Wheelockâ€™s Latin

Frederic M. Wheelock

Revised by Richard A. LaFleur

7th Edition

FOREWORD

The genesis of, and inspiration for, Wheelockâs Latin was the 1946 G.I. Education bill which granted World War II veterans a college education upon their return from service. âWhy would a vet, schooled on the battlefields of Europe and Asia, want to study Latin?â asked our father, then a Professor of Classics at Brooklyn College. What could this language say to those who had already seen so much reality? How could a teacher make a âdeadâ language become alive, pertinent, and viable? How could one teach Latin, not as an extinct vehicle, but as the reflection of a lively culture and philosophy? This was the challenge our father undertook.

Frederic Wheelock set about to create a Latin text that would give students something to think about, a humanistic diet to nurture them both linguistically and philosophically. The book began with lessons he designed especially for his Brooklyn College students. As children we smelled regularly the pungent hectograph ink which allowed him to painstakingly reproduce the chapters of a book he was designing, page by page on a gelatin pad, for one student at a time. In 1950, on Fredericâs six-month sabbatical leave, the Wheelock family travelled to the remote village of San Miguel De Allende in Mexico, where Frederic conscientiously wrote his text, and our diligent mother, Dorothy, meticulously typed the manuscript on an old portable typewriter. We young children scampered irreverently underfoot or played with native children and burros.

Twelve years of refinement, revision, and actual usage in our fatherâs classrooms resulted in the bookâs first edition. When students needed to learn grammar, they read lessons and literature from the great ancient writers who used the grammar in a meaningful context. Our father sought to graft the vital flesh and blood of Roman experience and thinking onto the basic bones of forms, syntax, and vocabulary; he wanted students to transcend mere gerund grinding by giving them literary and philosophical substance on which to sharpen their teeth.

As early as we can remember, classical heritage filled our house. The etymology of a word would trigger lengthy discussion, often tedious for us as adolescents but abiding as we became adults. Knowing Latin teaches us English, we were constantly reminded; at least 60% of English words are derived from Latin. Students who take Latin are more proficient and earn higher scores on the verbal SAT exam. The business world has long recognized the importance of a rich vocabulary and rates it high as evidence of executive potential and success. Understanding the etymological history of a word gives the user vividness, color, punch, and precision. It also seems that the clearer and more numerous our verbal images, the greater our intellectual power. Wheelockâs Latin is profuse with the etymological study of English and vocabulary enrichment. Our own experiences have shown that students will not only remember vocabulary words longer and better when they understand their etymologies, but also will use them with a sharper sense of meaning and nuance.

Why, then, exercise ourselves in the actual translation of Latin? âInexorably accurate translation from Latin provides a training in observation, analysis, judgment, evaluation, and a sense of linguistic form, clarity, and beauty which is excellent training in the shaping of oneâs own English expression,â asserted Frederic Wheelock. There is a discipline and an accuracy learned in the translation process which is transferable to any thinking and reasoning process, such as that employed by mathematicians. In fact, our fatherâs beloved editor at Barnes & Noble, Dr. Gladys Walterhouse, was the Math Editor there and yet an ardent appreciator of Latin and its precision.

Our father loved the humanistic tradition of the classical writers and thinkers. And he shared this love not only with his students through the Sententiae AntÄ«quae sections of his Latin text, but also with his family and friends in his daily life. As young girls, we were peppered with phrases of philosophical power from the ancients, and our father would show how these truths and lessons were alive and valid today. Some of the philosophical jewels which students of Latin will find in this book are: carpe diem, âharvest the dayâ; aurea mediocritÄs, âthe golden meanâ; summum bonum, âthe Highest Goodâ; and the derivation of âmoralityâ from mÅrÄs (âgood habits create good character,â as our father used to tell us).

If learning the Latin language and the translation process are important, then getting to know the messages and art of Horace, Ovid, Vergil, and other Roman writers is equally important. Wheelock presents these classical authorsâ writings on such illuminating topics as living for the future, attaining excellence, aging, and friendship. The summum bonum of Latin studies, Frederic Wheelock wrote, âis the reading, analysis, and appreciation of genuine ancient literary humanistic Latin in which our civilization is so deeply rooted and which has much to say to us in our own century.â

For the 45 years that Frederic Wheelock was a Professor of Latin, he instilled in his students the love of Latin as both language and literature, and he did so with humor and humility. He dearly loved teaching, because he was so enthusiastic about what he taught. He had a deep and abiding respect for his students and demanded discipline and high standards. He wished for Latin to be loved and learned as he lived it, as a torch passed down through the ages, to help light our way today.

In 1987, as Frederic Wheelock was dying at the end of 85 richly lived years, he recited Homer, Horace, and Emily Dickinson. He, like the ancients, leaves a legacy of the love of learning and a belief that we stand on the shoulders of the ancients. He would be delighted to know that there are still active and eager students participating in the excitement and enjoyment of his beloved Latin.

Martha Wheelock and Deborah Wheelock Taylor FÄ«liae amantissimae

FOR THE SEVENTH EDITION

Welcome to Wheelockâs Latin, seventh edition! After almost a quarter of a century since our fatherâs death, Wheelockâs Latin and the classical tradition are current and alive. Frederic Wheelockâs original intention for this textbook was the instruction of Latin in the context of Roman writers. To this design and classic text, revision author Richard A. LaFleur has brought modernity and invigoration through new but ancient and enlivening material; he has also shepherded Wheelockâs Latin into contemporary media and arenas. We express our heartfelt gratitude to Rick LaFleur for his enterprise, his intelligence, and his loyalty.

Wheelockâs Latin endures because Latin and the ancient Romans are universal and relevant. Philosophers, poets, and psychologists recognize the wisdom of the ancients: âUt amÄris, amÄbilis estÅ!â (Ovid, Ars AmÄtÅria, II, 107), âIn order to be loved, be lovable!â Ben Franklin then borrowed this truth, âIf you would be loved, love, and be lovable.â Self-help books, therapists, and even songwriters of today continue to offer this insight. In this way, Wheelockâs Latin has become as timeless as the ancients it respects and is beloved by countless who have studied with it.

Wheelockâs Latin is available to todayâs learners through modern developments which our father never could have foreseen, but about which, we imagine, he is smiling: the website, www.wheelockslatin.com, offering a rich array of interesting and useful ancillary materials; the proliferation of study aids, such as the audio CDs from Bolchazy-Carducci, where Latin is eloquently spoken; a Facebook page; smartphone apps for vocabulary and grammar; and finally, the arrival of an e-book. Wheelockâs Latin is edifying, fun, and accessible, now more than ever with this 7th edition! GaudÄte!

Martha and Deborah, semper amantissimae fÄ«liae

PREFACE

Why a new beginnersâ Latin book when so many are already available? The question may rightly be asked, and a justification is in order.

Every year increasing numbers of students enter college without Latin; and consequently they have to begin the language as undergraduates, typically as an elective or to satisfy a foreign language requirement, if they are to have any Latin at all. Though some college beginners do manage to continue their study of Latin beyond the second year, an unfortunate number have to be satisfied with only two or three semesters. Included among these are Romance language majors, English majors, and undergraduates in a great many other fields who have been convinced of the cultural and the practical value of even a little Latin. Common too are graduate students who discover that they need some Latin and want to study it on their ownâmuch as I taught myself Spanish from E. V. Greenfieldâs Spanish Grammar when I decided to make a trip to Mexicoâand other adults who wish to learn some Latin independently of a formal academic course. Into the hands of such mature students it is a pity and a lost opportunity to put textbooks which in pace and in thought are graded to much younger learners. On the other hand, in the classical spirit of moderation, we should avoid the opposite extreme of a beginnersâ book so advanced and so severe that it is likely to break the spirit of even mature students in its attempt to cover practically everything in Latin.

Accordingly, the writer has striven to produce a beginnersâ book which is mature, humanistic, challenging, and instructive, and which, at the same time, is reasonable in its demands. Certainly it is not claimed that Latin can be made easy and effortless. However, the writerâs experience with these chapters in preliminary form over a number of years shows that Latin can be made interesting despite its difficulty; it can give pleasure and profit even to the first-year student and to the student who takes only one year; it can be so presented as to afford a sense of progress and literary accomplishment more nearly commensurate with that achieved, for instance, by the student of Romance languages. The goal, then, has been a book which provides both the roots and at least some literary fruits of a sound Latin experience for those who will have only a year or so of Latin in their entire educational career, and a book which at the same time provides adequate introduction and encouragement for those who plan to continue their studies in the field. The distinctive methods and exercises employed in this book in order to attain this goal are here listed with commentary.

1. SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE AND LOCÄª ANTÄªQVÄª

It can hardly be disputed that the most profitable and the most inspiring approach to ancient Latin is through original Latin sentences and passages derived from the ancient authors themselves. With this conviction the writer perused a number of likely ancient works, excerpting sentences and passages which could constitute material for the envisioned beginnersâ book. A prime desideratum was that the material be interesting per se and not chosen merely because it illustrated forms and syntax. These extensive excerpts provided a good cross section of Latin literature on which to base the choice of the forms, the syntax, and the vocabulary to be presented in the book. All the sentences which constitute the regular reading exercise in each chapter under the heading of Sententiae AntÄ«quae (âAncient Sentencesâ) are derived from this body of original Latin, as is demonstrated by the citing of the ancient authorâs name after each sentence. The same holds for the continuous reading passages which appear both in the chapters and in the section entitled LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ« (âAncient Passagesâ). Once the work of the formal chapters has been completed, one can go on to the crowning experience of the course, reading additional real Latin passages from ancient authors, texts that cover a wide range of interesting topics such as love, biography, philosophy, religion, morality, friendship, philanthropy, games, laws of war, anecdotes, wit, satirical comment. A few selections are drawn from late Latin and medieval authors, in order to illustrate, among other things, the continuity of Latin through the Middle Ages. The readings have in many instances been edited, omitting a word or phrase or simplifying the syntax in one way or another, but all reflect the ancient authorâs thought and fundamental expression and by the nature of their content constitute something of an introduction to the Roman experience; they are not âmade-upâ Latin composed simply to illustrate vocabulary, forms, and rulesâthough they are intended to do this too.

2. VOCABULARIES

Every chapter has a regular vocabulary list of new Latin words to be thoroughly learned. Each entry includes: the Latin word with one or more forms (e.g., with all principal parts, in the case of verbs); essential grammatical information (e.g., the gender of nouns, case governed by prepositions); English meanings (usually with the basic meaning first); and, in parentheses, representative English derivatives. The full vocabulary entry must be memorized for each item; in progressing from chapter to chapter, students will find it helpful to keep a running vocabulary list in their notebooks or a computer file, or to use vocabulary cards (with the Latin on one side, and the rest of the entry on the other). With an eye to the proverb repetÄ«tiÅ est mÄter memoriae (ârepetition is the mother of memoryâ), words in the chapter vocabularies are regularly repeated in the sentences and reading passages of the immediately following chapters, as well as elsewhere in the book.

In order to avoid overloading the regular chapter vocabularies, words that are less common in Latin generally or which occur infrequently (sometimes only once) in this book are glossed in parentheses following the Sententiae AntÄ«quae and the reading passages. These glosses are generally less complete than the regular vocabulary entries and are even more abbreviated in the later chapters than in the earlier ones, but they should provide sufficient information for translating the text at hand; for words whose meanings can be easily deduced from English derivatives, the English is usually not provided. The instructorâs requirements regarding these vocabulary items may vary, but in general students should be expected to have at least a âpassiveâ mastery of the words, i.e., they should be able to recognize the words if encountered in a similar context, in a later chapter, for example, or on a test; full entries for most of these ârecognitionâ items will also be found in the end Vocabulary.

3. SYNTAX

Although the above-mentioned corpus of excerpts constituted the logical guide to the syntactical categories which should be introduced into the book, common sense dictated the mean between too little and too much. The categories which have been introduced should prove adequate for the reading of the mature passages of LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ« and also provide a firm foundation for those who wish to continue their study of Latin beyond the first year. In fact, with the skill acquired in handling this mature Latin and with a knowledge of the supplementary syntax provided in the Appendix, a student can move directly into reading a wide variety of classical and later authors. The syntax has been explained in as simple and unpedantic a manner as possible and illustrated by a large number of examples. Finally, in light of the sad reality that even English majors in college may have an inadequate knowledge of grammar, explanations of most grammatical terms have been added, usually with benefit of etymology; and these explanations have not been relegated to some general summarizing section (the kind that students usually avoid!) but have been worked in naturally as the terms first appear in the text.

4. FORMS AND THEIR PRESENTATION

The varieties of inflected and uninflected forms presented here are normal for a beginnersâ book. However, the general practice in this text has been to alternate lessons containing noun or adjective forms with lessons containing verb forms. This should help reduce the ennui which results from too much of one thing at a time. The same consideration prompted the postponement of the locative case, adverbs, and most irregular verbs to the latter part of the book, alternating with chapters that introduce subjunctives and other complex syntax.

Considerable effort has been made to place paradigms of more or less similar forms side by side for easy visual cross reference in the same chapter and also, as a rule, to have new forms follow familiar related ones in natural sequence (as when adjectives of the third declension follow the i-stem nouns).

The rate at which the syntax and the forms can be absorbed will obviously depend on the nature and the caliber of the class; the instructor will have to adjust the assignments to the situation. Though each chapter forms a logical unit, it has been found that at least two assignments have to be allotted to many of the longer chapters: the first covers discussion of the new grammar, the paradigms, the vocabularies, the âPractice and Reviewâ sentences (renamed ExercitÄtiÅnÄs in the latest edition), and some of the Sententiae AntÄ«quae; the second requires review, completion of the Sententiae, the reading passage(s), and the occasional section on etymology. Both these assignments are in themselves natural units, and this double approach contains the obvious gain of repetition.

5. PRACTICE AND REVIEW/EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

The âPractice and Reviewâ sentences (ExercitÄtiÅnÄs) were introduced to provide additional repetition of forms, syntax, and vocabulary, which is so essential in learning a language. If the author of a textbook can start with a predetermined sequence of vocabulary and syntax, for example, and is free to compose sentences based on that material, then it should be fairly simple to make the sentences of succeeding lessons repeat the items of the previous few lessons, especially if the intellectual content of the sentences is not a prime concern. But the challenge of providing readings based instead, and exclusively, on ancient texts is considerably greater; and so, while most of the items introduced in a given chapter do re-appear in the Sententiae AntÄ«quae of the following chapters, the author frankly concocted the âPractice and Reviewâ sentences (only a few of which were inspired by ancient sources) to fill in the lacunae, to guarantee further repetition than could otherwise have been secured, and to provide exercises for continuous review. The few English-to-Latin sentences in each chapter provide an entirely different approach to the language than Latin-to-English readings and should, therefore, be done regularly, but the others need not be assigned as part of the ordinary outside preparation. They are easy enough to be done at sight in class as time permits; or they can be used as a basis for review after every fourth or fifth chapter in lieu of formal review lessons.

6. ETYMOLOGIES

Lists of English derivatives are provided in parentheses after the words in the vocabularies to help impress the Latin words on the student, to demonstrate the direct or indirect indebtedness of English to Latin, and to enlarge the studentâs own vocabulary. Occasionally, English cognates have been added. At the end of some chapters an âEtymologyâ section (re-titled Etymologia in the seventh edition) introduces additional English and also Romance language derivatives, as well as other interesting points which could not be easily included in the vocabulary. From the beginning, students should consult the lists of prefixes and suffixes given in the Appendix under the heading of âSome Etymological Aids.â

7. THE INTRODUCTION/INTRÅDVCTIÅ

In addition to discussing the Roman alphabet and pronunciation, the bookâs general IntrÅductiÅ sketches the linguistic, literary, and palaeographical background of Latin. This background and the actual Latin of the Sententiae AntÄ«quae and the LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ« give the student considerable insight into Roman literature, thought, expression, and experience, and evince the continuity of the Roman tradition down to our own times. It is hoped that the IntrÅductiÅ and especially the nature of the chapters themselves will establish this book as not just another Latin grammar but rather as a humanistic introduction to the reading of genuine Latin.

The book had its inception as a group of typed lessons I designed and tried out in class as a result of the dissatisfaction expressed at the beginning of this Preface. Those initial lessons worked well, despite imperfections soon evident to myself and to colleagues who generously offered their critique. To Professor Lillian B. Lawler of Hunter College I am grateful for her perusal of the typescript and for her suggestions. I also wish to acknowledge the patience of my students and colleagues at Brooklyn College who worked with the typed material, and their helpfulness and encouragement in stating their reactions to the text. Subsequently these trial lessons were completely revised and rewritten in the light of experience. I am indebted to Professor Joseph Pearl of Brooklyn College for his kindness in scrutinizing the 40 chapters of the manuscript in their revised form and for many helpful suggestions. To the Reverend Joseph M.-F. Marique, S.J., of Boston College I herewith convey my appreciation for his encouraging and helpful review of the revised manuscript. Thomas S. Lester of Northeastern University, a man of parts and my alter Ä«dem amÄ«cissimus since classical undergraduate years, has my heartfelt thanks for so often and so patiently lending to my problems a sympathetic ear, a sound mind, and a sanguine spirit. To my dear wife, Dorothy, who so faithfully devoted herself to the typing of a very difficult manuscript, who was often asked for a judgment, and who, in the process, uttered many a salutary plea for clarity and for compassion toward the students, I dedicate my affectionate and abiding gratitude. My final thanks go to Dr. Gladys Walterhouse and her colleagues in the editorial department of Barnes & Noble for their friendly, efficient, and often crucial help in many matters. It need hardly be added that no one but the author is responsible for any infelicities which may remain.

THE SECOND AND THIRD EDITIONS

Because of the requests of those who found they needed more reading material than that provided by the LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ«, the author prepared a second edition which enriched the book with a new section entitled LocÄ« ImmÅ«tÄtÄ« (âUnaltered Passagesâ). In these selections the original ancient Latin texts have been left unchanged except for omissions at certain points, and footnotes are provided comparable to those in the LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ«. It is hoped that these readings will prove sufficiently extensive to keep a class well supplied after completing the bookâs 40 chapters, will give an interesting additional challenge to the person who is self-tutored, and will provide a very direct approach to the use of the regular annotated texts of classical authors.

Because of the indisputable value of repetition for establishing linguistic reflexes, a new section of âSelf-Tutorial Exercises,â consisting of questions on morphology and syntax, and sentences for translation, was added to the third edition. A key provides answers to all the questions and translations of all the sentences.

The second and third editions would be incomplete without a word of deep gratitude to the many who in one way or another have given kind encouragement, who have made suggestions, who have indicated emendanda. I find myself particularly indebted to Professors Josephine Bree of Albertus Magnus College, Ben L. Charney of Oakland City College, Louis H. Feldman of Yeshiva College, Robert J. Leslie of Indiana University, Mr. Thomas S. Lester of Northeastern University, the Reverend James R. Murdock of Glenmary Home Missioners, Professors Paul Pascal of the University of Washington, Robert Renehan of Harvard University, John E. Rexine of Colgate University, George Tyler of Moravian College, Ralph L. Ward of Hunter College, Dr. Gladys Walterhouse of the Editorial Staff of Barnes & Noble, and most especially, once again, to my wife Dorothy.

Frederic M. Wheelock

THE REVISED EDITION

When Professor Frederic Wheelockâs Latin first appeared in 1956, the reviews extolled its thoroughness, organization, and concision; one reviewer predicted that the book âmight well become the standard textâ for introducing college students and other adult learners to elementary Latin. Now, more than half a century later, that prediction has certainly been proven accurate. A second edition was published in 1960, retitled Latin: An Introductory Course Based on Ancient Authors and including a rich array of additional reading passages drawn directly from Latin literature (the LocÄ« ImmÅ«tÄtÄ«); the third edition, published in 1963, added Self-Tutorial Exercises, with an answer key, for each of the 40 chapters and greatly enhanced the bookâs usefulness both for classroom students and for those wishing to study the language independently. In 1984, three years before the authorâs death, a list of passage citations for the Sententiae AntÄ«quae was added, so that teachers and students could more easily locate and explore the context of selections they found especially interesting; and in 1992 a fourth edition appeared under the aegis of the bookâs new publisher, HarperCollins, in which the text was re-set and re-designed.

The fifth edition, published in 1995 and aptly retitled Wheelockâs Latin, constituted the first truly substantive revision of the text in more than 30 years. The revisions which I introduced were intended, not to alter the basic concept of the text, but to enhance it; indeed, a number of the most significant changes were based on Professor Wheelockâs own suggestions, contained in notes made available for the project by his family, and others reflected the experiences of colleagues around the country, many of whom (myself included) had used and admired the book for two decades or more and had in the process arrived at some consensus about certain basic ways in which it might be improved for a new generation of students.

The most obvious change in the fifth edition reflected Wheelockâs own principal desideratum, shared by myself and doubtless by most who had used the book over the years, and that was the addition of passages of continuous Latin, based on ancient authors, to all 40 chapters. These are in the early chapters brief and highly adapted, but later on are more extensive and often excerpted verbatim from a variety of prose and verse writers; some had appeared in previous editions among the LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ« and the LocÄ« ImmÅ«tÄtÄ«, while many were included for the first time in the fifth edition. Some of the âPractice and Reviewâ sentences (ExercitÄtiÅnÄs) were revised or replaced, as were a few of the Sententiae AntÄ«quae (which in some instances were expanded into longer readings), again as suggested in part by Professor Wheelock himself.

The chapter vocabularies, generally regarded as too sparse, were expanded in most instances to about 20â25 words, a quite manageable list including new items as well as many found previously as glosses to the Sententiae AntÄ«quae. Full principal parts were provided for all verbs from the beginning, as colleagues around the country had agreed should be done, so students would not be confronted with the somewhat daunting list previously presented in Chapter 12.

There was only minimal shifting of grammar, but in particular the imperfect tense was introduced along with the future in Chapters 5, 8, and 10, so that a past tense would be available for use in the readings at a much earlier stage. Numerals and the associated material originally in Chapter 40 were introduced in Chapter 15; and a half dozen or so important grammatical constructions previously presented in the Supplementary Syntax were instead introduced in Chapter 40 and a few of the earlier chapters. Many of the grammatical explanations were rewritten; essential information from the footnotes was incorporated into the text, while some less important notes were deleted.

Finally, I included at the end of each chapter a section titled LatÄ«na Est Gaudiumâet Åªtilis, which presents, in a deliberately informal style, a miscellany of Latin mottoes and well-known quotations, familiar abbreviations, interesting etymologies, classroom conversation items, occasional humorous asides, and even a few ghastly Latinate puns, all intended to demonstrate, on the lighter side, that Latin can indeed be pleasurable as well as edifying.

The success of the fifth edition encouraged all of us involvedâProfessor Wheelockâs daughters, Martha Wheelock and Deborah Wheelock Taylor, our editor Greg Chaput and his associates at HarperCollins, and myselfâto proceed with revisions I had proposed for a new sixth edition, published in 2000; these included: the handsome new cover art, a Roman mosaic from Tunisia depicting Vergil with a copy of the Aeneid in his lap and flanked by two Muses representing his workâs inspiration; maps of ancient Italy, Greece and the Aegean area, and the Mediterranean, specially designed to include, inter alia, all the placenames mentioned in the bookâs readings and notes (except a few situated on the remotest fringes of the empire); numerous photographs selected primarily from classical and later European art to illustrate literary and historical figures and aspects of classical culture and mythology presented in the chapters; revision of chapter readings, for greater clarity and increased reinforcement of new and recently introduced chapter vocabulary items; expansion of derivatives lists in the chapter vocabularies and of cross-references to related words in other chapters; and enlargement of the English-Latin end vocabulary. The âsixth edition, revisedâ (2005) included revisions to the IntrÅductiÅ and some of the readings and accompanying notes, as well as further expansion of the English-Latin vocabulary designed to better complement the Workbook for Wheelockâs Latin (in its revised third edition by Paul Comeau and myself). The revised sixth edition was also the first in many years to appear in a hardbound version, along with the traditional paperback; audio files were produced and posted online, with an introduction to pronunciation and reading of all the chapter vocabularies; and, also for the first time, a teacherâs guide was written and made available online for teachers, home-schoolers, and independent learners.

THE NEW SEVENTH EDITION

This latest edition, the seventh, published in 2011, features a great many revisions intended to make Wheelockâs Latin even more effective, more interesting, and more user-friendly. The text has been entirely re-keyed, providing the opportunity for formatting and design changes that help clarify each chapterâs organization and, along with new photographs and drawings, make the book more visually appealing. SMALL BOLD CAPITALS are employed to call attention to important new grammatical and other technical terms. To encourage active use of the language in the classroom, Latin is employed in the chapter titles and for section heads (ExercitÄtiÅnÄs instead of âPractice and Review,â VocÄbula for âVocabulary,â etc.). Material in the footnotes has either been incorporated into the text or deleted. The maps have been updated, and more frequent references appear in the text to encourage their use; the Index has been expanded.

Significant revisions have been made in each chapterâs grammar discussion section (newly titled Grammatica), including systematic introduction and definition of all parts of speech, earlier introduction of verb synopsis, and clarification of numerous grammatical points. The chapter VocÄbula have been revised in several ways, including spelling out full nominatives for all adjectives, genitives for all nouns, and principal parts for all verbs, even regular first conjugation verbsâthus eliminating abbreviations potentially distracting to students trying to learn new vocabulary items for the first time. Each list is preceded by a brief discussion of new or exceptional types of words that will be encountered, as well as general suggestions on how to master vocabulary.

Similarly, each chapterâs LÄctiÅnÄs et TrÄnslÄtiÅnÄs (âReadings and Translationsâ) section opens with a variety of tips aimed at building reading and translating skills. English derivatives are provided for Latin words glossed in the Sententiae AntÄ«quae and reading passages, as an aid to learning and recalling their meanings. Some of the existing readings have been slightly revised for improved reinforcement of new and recent vocabulary and grammar; and a few new authentic readings have been added to each chapter, in particular a selection of graffiti from Pompeii, titled ScrÄ«pta In Parietibus (âWritings on Wallsâ), which are accompanied by drawings or photographs and designed to provide interesting insights into the lives, and literacy, of ancient Roman men and women. These inscriptions and the chapterâs literary passages are provided with expanded introductions and a few QuaestiÅnÄs, reading comprehension and discussion questions designed to focus the readerâs attention on important points of both subject and style.

The Etymologia sections have been in some instances shortened, in other instances expanded, particularly with the addition of more Romance language derivatives; and there are a few changes to the LatÄ«na Est Gaudium sections as well.

Finally, the website at www.wheelockslatin.com, the online teacherâs guide, vocabulary cards, and other ancillaries available from Bolchazy-Carducci Publishers (www.bolchazy.com) have been updated to reflect changes to the textbook.

A FINAL NOTE TO STUDENTS AND INSTRUCTORS

The LÄctiÅnÄs et TrÄnslÄtiÅnÄs in this edition purposely provide more material for reading and translation than one would want to require for homework in the two or three days typically allotted to a chapter in a semester course or the week or so allotted in high school. Instructors are encouraged to be selective: my suggestion is to assign study of the new grammar, paradigms, and vocabulary for the first day or two, requiring for written homework only limited selections from the ExercitÄtiÅnÄs and Sententiae AntÄ«quae, and reserving the others (or some of the others, carefully selected in advance) for in-class sight translation; assignments for the second or third day should include the reading passages and graffiti following the Sententiae AntÄ«quae, which will give students the experience they need with continuous narrative. I like to assign one or two of the English-to-Latin ExercitÄtiÅnÄs each day, or will sometimes divide the students into small groups, giving them five minutes or so to work on one of the sentences together and having a member of each group put their sentence on the board for review. Students should regularly be encouraged to practice new material at home with the Self-Tutorial Exercises located at the back of the book, checking their accuracy with the answer key that follows, and sentences from these exercises, again pre-selected for the purpose, can be used to drill mastery of new concepts via sight translation in class.

The companion reader Scribblers, Scvlptors, and Scribes provides a broad array of entirely authentic, unadapted classical Latin texts whose vocabulary and grammar are correlated with the 40 chapters of Wheelockâs Latin. These readings, including a wide range of graffiti and other inscriptions, proverbs, and literary texts, provide insights into not just the minds of Romeâs movers and shakersâher politicians and generals, philosophers and poetsâbut also into the daily lives of the average Roman. Students should be assigned a selection from these readings for their final day on each chapter.

Most instructors will also want their students to use the Workbook for Wheelockâs Latin, which contains a variety of additional exercises, including for each chapter a detailed set of Intellegenda (learner objectives), a series of questions designed to focus directly on the newly introduced grammar, a variety of transformation drills, word, phrase, and sentence translations, questions on etymologies, synonyms, antonyms, and analogies for new vocabulary items, and reading comprehension questions to test the studentâs understanding of the chapterâs reading passages.

Those who may not have time to complete all of the many Workbook items provided for each chapter are advised at least to review the Intellegenda, answer all the Grammatica questions and then complete one or two items from each section of the ExercitÄtiÅnÄs, all the VÄ«s VerbÅrum (âThe Power of Wordsâ) etymology items, one or two of the Latin-to-English translations in section A of the LÄctiÅnÄs (readings), and all the items in LÄctiÅnÄs B (questions on the chapterâs literary passages).

There are numerous other materials designed to complement Wheelockâs Latin, the Workbook for Wheelockâs Latin, and Scribblers, Scvlptors, and Scribes, including audio CDs, computer software, vocabulary cards, and a wealth of internet resources, most of which, along with further suggestions on teaching and learning Latin via Wheelock, are accessible at the official Wheelockâs Latin Series Website, www.wheelockslatin.com, and described in my book Latin for the 21st Century: From Concept to Classroom (available from Pearson Publishers).

MÄªLLE GRÄTIÄSâ¦

There are many whom I am eager to thank for their support of my work on Wheelockâs Latin: first and foremost, my dear wife and steadfast companion, Alice, and my children, Jean-Paul, Laura Caroline, and Kimberley Ellen, for their constant affection; my colleague Jared Klein, a distinguished Indo-European linguist, for reading and offering his judicious advice on my revisions to both the IntrÅductiÅ and the individual chapters; graduate assistants Derek Bast, David Driscoll, Cleve Fisher, Marshall Lloyd, Sean Mathis, Matthew Payne, and Jim Yavenditti, for their energetic and capable help with a variety of tasks; Mary Wells Ricks, long-time friend and former Senior Associate Editor for the Classical Outlook, for her expert counsel on a variety of editorial matters; our department secretaries, JoAnn Pulliam and Connie Russell, for their generous clerical assistance, and graphic designer Kay Stanton for her drawings of graffiti and general assistance with illustrations; my editors at HarperCollins, Erica Spaberg, Patricia Leasure, Greg Chaput, and Stephanie Meyers, each of whom enthusiastically supported my proposals for the revised editions; Tim McCarthy, Michael Slade, and Alison Strum of Art Resource in New York, as well as colleagues Jim Anderson, Bob Curtis, Timothy Gantzâ , and Frances Van Keuren, for their assistance with the graphics, and AmÃ©lia Hutchinson, Mihai Spariosu, and Sallie Spence for consulting on Romance language derivatives; Tom Elliott and Brian Turner, with the Ancient World Mapping Center, for their expertise in designing the maps; students and associates at the University of Georgia who field-tested the new material or provided other helpful assistance, among them Bob Harris and Richard Shedenhelm; colleagues around the country who offered suggestions for specific revisions, especially Ward Briggs at the University of South Carolina (whose biographies of Professor Wheelock appear in his book, A Biographical Dictionary of American Classicists, Westport CT: Greenwood Press, 1994, and in the Winter, 2003, Classical Outlook), Rob Latousek, John Lautermilch, John McChesney-Young, Braden Mechley, Betty Rose Nagle, Krzysztof Odyniec, John Ramsey, Joseph Riegsecker, Cliff Roti, Les Sheridan, David Sider, Alden Smith, Brad Tillery, Cliff Weber, Stephen Westergan, and Stephen Wheeler; Dean Wyatt Anderson, for his encouragement of my own work and all our Classics Departmentâs endeavors; Martha Wheelock and Deborah Wheelock Taylor, my âsisters-in-Latin,â for their steadfast advocacy of my work on the revised editions and their generous sharing of their fatherâs notes; and finally, Professor Frederic M. Wheelock himself, for producing a textbook that has truly become a classic in its own right and one whose revision, therefore, became for me a labor amÅris.

Richard A. LaFleur
University of Georgia
Autumn, 2010

I love the language, that soft bastard Latin,

Which melts like kisses from a female mouth.

George Noel Gordon, Lord Byron

Beppo (where he was speaking of Italian, Latinâs first-born)

I would make them all learn English: and then I would let the clever ones learn Latin as an honor, and Greek as a treat.

Sir Winston Churchill

Roving Commission: My Early Life

He studied Latin like the violin, because he liked it.

Robert Frost

The Death of the Hired Man

INTRÅDVCTIÅ

Wer fremde Sprachen nicht kennt, weiss nichts von seiner eigenen. (Goethe)

Â 

Apprendre une langue, câest vivre de nouveau. (French proverb)

Â 

Your appreciation of the Latin language can be considerably increased by even a limited awareness of the background sketched in this IntrÅdvctiÅ. The paragraphs on the position of the Latin language in the Indo-European language family provide some linguistic perspective not only for Latin but also for the Romance languages and English. The brief survey of Latin literature introduces the authors whose works are excerpted in the bookâs Sententiae AntÄ«quae, LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ«, and LocÄ« ImmÅ«tÄtÄ« and provides a literary perspective which the student may never otherwise gain. And, of course, no introduction to the language would be complete without a discussion of the Roman alphabet and pronunciation.

THE POSITION OF THE LATIN LANGUAGE IN LINGUISTIC HISTORY

Say the words âI,â âme,â âis,â âmother,â âbrother,â and âten,â and you are speaking words which, in one form or another, men and women of Europe and Asia have used for thousands of years. In fact, we cannot tell how old these words actually are. If their spelling and pronunciation have changed somewhat from period to period and place to place, little wonder; what does pique the imagination is the fact that the basic elements of these symbols of human thought have had the vitality to traverse such spans of time and space down to this very moment on this continent. The point is demonstrated in this considerably abbreviated and simplified table:

You can see from these columns of words that the listed languages are related. And yet, with the exception of the ultimate derivation of English from Anglo-Saxon, none of these languages stems directly from another in the list. Rather, they all go back through intermediate stages to a common ancestor, which is now lost but which can be predicated on the evidence of the languages that do survive. Such languages the philologist calls COGNATES (Latin for ârelatedâ or, more literally, âborn together,â i.e., from the same ancestry). The name most commonly given to the now lost ancestor of all these ârelatives,â or cognate languages, is INDO-EUROPEAN, because its descendants are found both in or near India (Sanskrit, Iranian) and also in Europe (Greek and Latin and the Germanic, Celtic, Slavic, and Baltic languages).⁷ The Indo-European languages for which we have the oldest surviving documents are Sanskrit, Iranian, Greek, and Latin, and these documents go back centuries before the time of Christ. In addition to the common vocabulary illustrated in the above chart, this large family of languages shares many INFLECTIONS, or word-endings, in common. An INFLECTED LANGUAGE is one in which the nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and verbs have variable endings that indicate the relationship of the words to each other in a sentence. In particular, note that Anglo-Saxon, like Latin, was an inflected language but that its descendant English has lost most of its inflections (though some survive, such as âwho,â âhe,â âsheâ for subjects, vs. âwhom,â âhim,â herâ for objects, âshe lovesâ for third person singular, vs. âI love,â âyou love,â etc.).

In the interest of simplicity a number of languages and intermediate stages have been omitted. Latin, for example, was only one not shown on the chart.

The difference between DERIVED (from roots meaning âto flow downstream fromâ a source) and COGNATE languages can be demonstrated by the relationship of the Romance languages to Latin and to each other. Here we are in the realm of recorded history and can see that with the Roman political conquest of such districts as Gaul (France), Spain, and Dacia (Romania) there occurred also a Roman linguistic conquest. Out of this victorious ancient Latin as spoken by the common people (vulgus, hence âvulgarâ Latin) grew the Romance languages, such as French, Spanish, Portuguese, Romanian, Occitan (or ProvenÃ§al), and, of course, Italian. All these languages are âderivedâ from Latin and thus âcognateâ with each other.

Although English ultimately stems from Anglo-Saxon, which is cognate with Latin, there is much more than that to the story. Anglo-Saxon itself had early borrowed a few words from Latin; and then in the 7th century more Latin (including many Latinized Greek and Hebrew words drawn from Jeromeâs âVulgateâ translation of the Bible) entered the language as a result of the work of St. Augustine (the Lesser), who had been sent by Pope Gregory to Christianize the Angles. After the victory of William the Conqueror in 1066, Norman French became the polite language and Anglo-Saxon was held in low esteem as the tongue of vanquished men and serfsâno longer a literary language, but simply the speech of humble daily life. Some two centuries later, however, as the descendants of the Normans finally amalgamated with the English natives, the Anglo-Saxon language reasserted itself; but in its poverty it had to borrow hundreds of French words (literary, intellectual, and cultural) before it could become the language of literature. Borrow it did abundantly, and in the 13th and 14th centuries this development produced what is called Middle English, known especially from Chaucer, who died in 1400. Along with the adoption of these Latin-rooted French words there was also some borrowing directly from Latin itself, and the renewed interest in the classics which characterized the Renaissance naturally intensified this trend during the 16th and the 17th centuries.⁸ From that time to the present Latin has continued to be a source of new words, particularly for the scientist but even for ad writers and those marketing folks who invent product names!

Consequently, since English through Anglo-Saxon is cognate with Latin and yet also has directly or indirectly borrowed so many words from the language, our own vocabulary contains thousands of Latin cognates and thousands of derivatives. English âbrother,â for example, is cognate with Latin frÄter, while âfraternalâ clearly is derived from it. An important linguistic principle of sound change in the evolution of the Germanic languages, known as GRIMMâS LAW, describes shifts in consonants such as p to f, hard c (k) to h, and d to t, which account for the fact that Latin-English cognates like pÄs/ped-/âfootâ and cor/cord-/âheartâ have a common origin. Following are a variety of examples of English cognates and derivatives of Latin words:

Â 

Latin

English Derivative

English Cognate

mÄter

maternal

mother

duo

dual, duet

two

dÄns, stem dent-

dental

tooth

pÄs, stem ped-

pedal

foot

cor, stem cord-

cordial

heart

ferÅ

fertile

bear

Â 

Here you see one of the reasons for the richness of our vocabulary, and the longer you study Latin the more keenly you will realize what a limited language ours would be without the Latin element. Despite the brevity of this survey you can comprehend the general position of Latin in European linguistic history and something of its continuing importance to us today. It is the cognate of many languages and the parent of many, and can even be called the adoptive parent of English.

A BRIEF SURVEY OF LATIN LITERATURE

Since throughout this entire book you will be reading sentences and passages excerpted from Latin literature, a brief outline is here sketched to provide an overview of both the nature and the extent of this great literary corpus. Following is a conventional chronology:

I. Archaic through Early Republican Period (down to ca. 80 B.C.)

II. Late Republican and Augustan Period (the âGolden Ageâ: 80 B.C.âA.D. 14)

A. Ciceronian Period (80â43 B.C.)

B. Augustan Period (43 B.C.âA.D. 14)

III. Post-Augustan Period (the âSilver Ageâ: A.D. 14â138)

IV. Patristic Period (late 2ndâ5th cent.)

V. Medieval Period (6thâ14th cent.)

VI. Renaissance (15th cent.) to the Present

ARCHAIC THROUGH EARLY REPUBLICAN PERIOD (DOWN TO CA. 80 B.C.)

The apogee of Greek civilization, including the highest development of its magnificent literature and art, was reached during the 5th and the 4th centuries before Christ. In comparison, Rome during those centuries had little to offer. Our fragmentary evidence shows only a rough, accentual native meter called Saturnian, some native comic skits, and a simple, practical prose for records and speeches.

In the 3d century B.C., however, the expansion of Roman power brought the Romans into contact with Greek civilization. Somehow the hard-headed, politically and legally minded Romans were fascinated by what they found, and the writers among them went to school to learn Greek literature. From this time on, Greek literary forms, meters, rhetorical devices, subjects, and ideas had a tremendous and continuing influence on Roman literature, even as it developed its own character and originality in a great many ways.

In fact, the Romans themselves did not hesitate to admit as much. Although the Romans now composed epics, tragedies, satires, and speeches, the greatest extant accomplishments of this period of apprenticeship to Greek models are the comedies of Plautus (ca. 254â184 B.C.) and Terence (185â159 B.C.). These were based on Greek plays of the type known as New Comedy, the comedy of manners, and they make excellent reading today. Indeed, a number of these plays have influenced modern playwrights; Plautusâ Menaechmi, for instance, inspired Shakespeareâs Comedy of Errors.

LATE REPUBLICAN AND AUGUSTAN PERIOD (80 B.C.âA.D. 14)

During the first century before Christ the Roman writers perfected their literary media and made Latin literature one of the worldâs greatest. It is particularly famous for its beautiful, disciplined form, which we think of as âclassic,â and for its real substance as well. If Lucretius complained about the poverty of the Latin vocabulary, Cicero so molded the vocabulary and the general usage that Latin remained a supple and a subtle linguistic tool for thirteen centuries and more.

Â 

THE CICERONIAN PERIOD (80â43 B.C.). The literary work of the Ciceronian Period was produced during the last years of the Roman Republic. This was a period of civil wars and dictators, of military might against constitutional right, of selfish interest, of brilliant pomp and power, of moral and religious laxity. Outstanding authors important for the book which you have in hand are:

Lucretius (Titus LÅ«crÄtius CÄrus, ca. 98â55 B.C.): author of DÄ RÄrum NÄtÅ«rÄ, a powerful didactic poem on happiness achieved through the Epicurean philosophy. This philosophy was based on pleasure, or rather the absence of pain and suffering, and was buttressed by an atomic theory which made the universe a realm of natural, not divine, law and thus eliminated fear of the gods and the tyranny of religion, which Lucretius believed had shattered menâs happiness.

Catullus (GÄius Valerius Catullus, ca. 84â54 B.C.): lyric poet, the Robert Burns of Roman literature, an intense and impressionable young provincial from northern Italy who fell totally under the spell of an urban sophisticate, Lesbia (a literary pseudonym for her real name, Clodia), but finally escaped bitterly disillusioned; 113 of his poems have survived.

Cicero (MÄrcus Tullius CicerÅ, 106â43 B.C.): the greatest Roman orator, whose eloquence thwarted the conspiracy of the bankrupt aristocrat Catiline in 63 B.C. and 20 years later cost Cicero his own life in his patriotic opposition to Mark Antonyâs high-handed policies; admired also as an authority on Roman rhetoric, as an interpreter of Greek philosophy to his countrymen, as an essayist on friendship (DÄ AmÄ«citiÄ) and on old age (DÄ SenectÅ«te), and, in a less formal style, as a writer of self-revealing letters. Ciceroâs vast contributions to the Latin language itself have already been mentioned.

Caesar (GÄius IÅ«lius Caesar, 102 or 100â44 B.C.): orator, politician, general, statesman, dictator, author; best known for his military memoirs, Bellum Gallicum and Bellum CÄ«vÄ«le.

Nepos (CornÄlius NepÅs, 110â24 B.C.): friend of Catullus and Caesar and a writer of biographies noted rather for their relatively easy and popular style than for their importance as historical documents.

Publilius Syrus (fl. 43 B.C.): a slave who was taken to Rome and there became famous for his mimes, which today are represented only by a collection of epigrammatic sayings.

Â 

THE AUGUSTAN PERIOD (43 B.C.âA.D. 14). The first Roman Emperor gave his name to this period. Augustus wished to correct the evils of the times, to establish civil peace by stable government, and to win the Romansâ support for his new regime. With this in mind he and Maecenas, his unofficial prime minister, sought to enlist literature in the service of the state. Under their patronage Vergil and Horace became what we should call poets laureate. Some modern critics feel that this fact vitiates the noble sentiments of these poets; others see in Horace a spirit of independence and of genuine moral concern, and maintain that Vergil, through the character of his epic hero Aeneas, is not simply glorifying Augustus but is actually suggesting to the emperor what is expected of him as head of the state.

Vergil (PÅ«blius Vergilius MarÅ, 70â19 B.C.): from humble origins in northern Italy; lover of nature; profoundly sympathetic student of humankind; Epicurean and mystic; severe and exacting self-critic, master craftsman, linguistic and literary architect, âlord of languageâ; famous as a writer of pastoral verse (the Eclogues) and of a beautiful didactic poem on farm life (the Georgics); best known as the author of one of the worldâs great epics, the Aeneid, a national epic with contemporary political resonances, to be sure, but one also with ample universal and human appeal to make it powerful reading for our own age.

Horace (QuÄ«ntus HorÄtius Flaccus, 65â8 B.C.): a freedmanâs son who, thanks to his fatherâs vision and his own qualities, rose to the height of poet laureate; writer of genial and self-revealing satires; author of superb lyrics both light and serious; meticulous composer famed for the happy effects of his linguistic craftsmanship (cÅ«riÅsa fÄlÄ«citÄs, painstaking felicity); synthesist of Epicurean carpe diem (harvest the day) and Stoic virtÅ«s (virtue); preacher and practitioner of aurea mediocritÄs (the golden mean).

Livy (Titus LÄ«vius, 59 B.C.âA.D. 17): friend of Augustus but an admirer of the Republic and of olden virtues; author of a monumental, epic-spirited history of Rome, and portrayer of Roman character at its best as he judged it.

Propertius (Sextus Propertius, ca. 50 B.C.âca. A.D. 2): author of four books of romantic elegiac poems, much admired by Ovid.

Ovid (PÅ«blius Ovidius NÄsÅ, 43 B.C.âA.D. 17): author of several volumes of love poetry which was hardly consonant with Augustusâ plans; most famous today as the writer of the long and clever hexameter work on mythology entitled MetamorphÅsÄs, which has proved a thesaurus for subsequent poets. Ovid, like Pope, âlisped in numbers, for the numbers came.â

THE POST-AUGUSTAN PERIOD (A.D. 14â138)

In the post-Augustan age there was a great deal of excellent writing; but often there were also artificialities and conceits, a striving for effects and a passion for epigram, characteristics which often indicate a less sure literary sense and powerâhence the conventional, though overstated, distinction between the âGolden Ageâ of the late Republic and Augustan era and this so-called âSilver Age.â The temperaments of not a few emperors also had a limiting, even blighting effect on the literature of this period.

Seneca (LÅ«cius Annaeus Seneca, 4 B.C.âA.D. 65): Stoic philosopher from Spain; tutor of Nero; author of moral essays on the Stoic spirit, of tragedies (which, though marred by too much rhetoric and too many conceits, had considerable influence on the early modern drama of Europe), and of the ApocolocyntÅsis (âPumpkinificationâ), a brilliantly witty, though sometimes cruel, prosimetric satire on the death and deification of the emperor Claudius.

Petronius (exact identity and dates uncertain, but probably Titus PetrÅnius Arbiter, died A.D. 66): Neronian consular and courtier; author of the Satyricon, a satiric, prosimetric novel of sorts, famous for its depiction of the nouveau-riche freedman Trimalchio and his extravagant dinner-parties.

Quintilian (MÄrcus Fabius QuÄ«ntiliÄnus, ca. A.D. 35â95): teacher and author of theÄª nstitÅ«tiÅ ÅrÄtÅria, a famous pedagogical work which discusses the entire education of a person who is to become an orator; a great admirer of Ciceroâs style and a critic of the rhetorical excesses of his own age.

Martial (MÄrcus Valerius MÄrtiÄlis, A.D. 45â104): famed for his more than 1,500 witty epigrams and for the satirical twist which he so often gave to them. As he himself says, his work may not be great literature but people do enjoy it.

Pliny the Younger (GÄius PlÄ«nius Caecilius Secundus, ca. A.D. 62â113): a conscientious public figure, who is now best known for his Epistulae, letters which reveal both the bright and the seamy sides of Roman life during this imperial period.

Tacitus (PÅ«blius CornÄlius Tacitus, A.D. 55â117): most famous as a satirical, pro-senatorial historian of the period from the death of Augustus to the death of Domitian.

Juvenal (Decimus IÅ«nius IuvenÄlis, ca. A.D. 55âpost 127): a relentless, intensely rhetorical satirist of the evils of his times, who concludes that the only thing for which one can pray is a mÄns sÄna in corpore sÄnÅ (a sound mind in a sound body). His satires inspired Dr. Samuel Johnsonâs London and The Vanity of Human Wishes and the whole conception of caustic, âJuvenalianâ satire.

Â 

THE ARCHAISING PERIOD. The mid- to late 2nd century may be distinguished as an archaizing period, in which a taste developed for the vocabulary and style of early Latin and for the incorporation of diction from vulgar Latin; characteristic authors of the period were the orator Fronto and the antiquarian Aulus Gellius, known for his miscellaneous essays NoctÄs Atticae (âNights in Atticaâ).

THE PATRISTIC PERIOD (Late 2nd Cent.â5th Cent.)

The name of the Patristic Period comes from the fact that so much of the vital literature was the work of the Christian leaders, or fathers (patrÄs), among whom were Tertullian, Cyprian, Lactantius, Jerome, Ambrose, and Augustine. These men had been well educated; they were familiar with, and frequently fond of, the best classical authors; many of them had even been teachers or lawyers before going into service of the Church. At times the classical style was deliberately employed to impress the pagans, but more and more the concern was to reach the common people (vulgus) with the Christian message. Consequently, it is not surprising to see a re-emergence of in contemporary literature of vulgar Latin, the language of the common people whose linguistic roots date back to early Republican times. In fact, the language of Plautus has much in common with this later vulgar Latin, and we know that throughout the late Republican and post-Augustan periods vulgar Latin lived on as the colloquial idiom of the people while kept distinct from the literary idiom of the texts and the polished conversation of those ages. St. Jerome in his letters is essentially Ciceronian, but in his Latin edition of the Bible, the âVulgateâ (383â405 A.D.), he uses the language of the people. Similarly St. Augustine, though formerly a teacher and a great lover of the Roman classics, was willing to use any idiom that would reach the people and remarked that it did not matter if even the barbarians conquered Rome provided they were Christian.

THE MEDIEVAL PERIOD (6thâ14th Cents.)

During the first three centuries of the Medieval period, vulgar Latin underwent rapid changesâe.g., the loss of most declensional endings and the increased use of prepositions, extensive employment of auxiliary verbs, widely variable uses of the subjunctive and the indicativeâand, reaching the point when it could no longer be called Latin, it became this or that Romance language according to the locality.

On the other hand, Latin, the literary idiom more or less modified by the Vulgate and other influences, continued throughout the Middle Ages as the living language of the Church and of the intellectual world. Though varying considerably in character and quality, it was an international language, and Medieval Latin literature is sometimes called âEuropeanâ in contrast to the earlier ânational Roman.â In this Medieval Latin was written a varied and living literature (religious works, histories, anecdotes, romances, dramas, sacred and secular poetry), examples of which appear in this book, in the excerpt from the 7th century writer Isidore of Seville (in Capvt XXIX) and selections from other authors in the LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ«. The long life of Latin is attested in the early 14th century by the facts that Dante composed in Latin the political treatise DÄ MonarchiÄ, that he wrote in Latin his DÄ VulgÄrÄ« ÄloquentiÄ to justify his use of the vernacular Italian for literature, and that in Latin pastoral verses he rejected the exhortation to give up the vernacular, in which he was writing the Divine Comedy, and compose something in Latin. At the same time, by token of Danteâs success and that of others in the use of the vernacular languages, it must be admitted that Latin had begun to wage a losing battle.

THE PERIOD FROM THE RENAISSANCE (15th Cent.) TO THE PRESENT

Because of Petrarchâs new-found admiration of Cicero, Renaissance scholars scorned Medieval Latin and turned to Cicero in particular as the canon of perfection. Although this return to the elegant Ciceronian idiom was prompted by great affection and produced brilliant effects, it was an artificial movement which made Latin somewhat imitative and static compared with the spontaneous, living language which it had been during the Middle Ages. However, Latin continued to be effectively employed well into the modern periodâby Erasmus and Sir Thomas More in the 16th century, by Milton, Bacon, and Newton in the 17th century, and by botanists, classical scholars, and poets of the later centuriesâand the ecclesiastical strain is still very much alive (despite its de-emphasis in the early 1960s) as the language of the Roman Catholic Church and seminaries. Furthermore, the rediscovery of the true, humanistic spirit of the ancient Latin and Greek literatures and the fresh attention to literary discipline and form as found in the classics proved very beneficial to the native literature of the new era.

The purpose of this abbreviated outline has been to provide some sense of the unbroken sweep of Latin literature from the 3rd century B.C. down to our own times. Besides enjoying its own long and venerable history, Latin literature has also inspired, schooled, and enriched our own English and other occidental literatures to a degree beyond easy assessment. Add to this the wide influence of the Latin language itself as outlined above and you can hardly escape the conclusion that Latin is dead only in the narrow technical sense of the word, and that even a limited knowledge of Latin is a great asset to anyone who works with or is interested in English and the Romance languages and literatures and, indeed, to any educated person determined to read, write, and think with precision and a broad cultural perspective.

THE ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION

The forms of the letters which you see on this printed page are centuries old. They go back through the earliest Italian printed books of the 15th century⁹ and through the finest manuscripts of the 12th and 11th centuries to the firm, clear Carolingian bookhand of the 9th century as perfected under the inspiration of the Carolingian Renaissance by the monks of St. Martinâs at Tours in France. These monks developed the small letters from beautiful clear semi-uncials, which in turn lead us back to the uncials and square capitals of the Roman Empireâuncials, developed from Roman cursive, resembled square capitals except that the sharp corners of the angular letters were rounded so that they could be written with greater rapidity. Today we are in the habit of distinguishing the Roman alphabet from the Greek, but the fact is that the Romans learned to write from the Etruscans, who in turn had learned to write from Greek colonists who had settled in the vicinity of Naples during the 8th century B.C.; thus the Roman alphabet is simply one form of the Greek alphabet. But the Greeks were themselves debtors in this matter, for, at an early date, they had adapted their alphabet from a Semitic source, the Phoenicians; while the 22 letters of the Phoenician script, itself influenced by Egyptian hieroglyphics, had represented only consonant sounds, however, the Greeks showed their originality in using some of these letters to designate vowel sounds. The history of the letter-forms you see in our books today provides one more illustration of our indebtedness to European, Near Eastern, and North African antiquity.

The Roman alphabet was like ours except that it lacked the letters j and w. Furthermore, the letter v originally stood for both the sound of the vowel u and the sound of the consonant w (originally a literal âdouble u,â i.e., vv). Not until the second century of our era did the rounded u-form appear to distinguish vowel from consonant, but for convenience both v and u are employed in the Latin texts of most modern editions. The letter k was rarely used, and then only before a, in a very few words. The letters y (Greek upsilon, Y) and z (Greek zeta) were introduced toward the end of the Republic to be used in spelling words of Greek origin.

The following tables indicate approximately the sounds of Latin and how the letters were used by Romans of the classical period to represent those sounds (there are several differences of pronunciation in medieval and ecclesiastical Latin).

Vowels

Vowels in Latin had essentially two possible pronunciations, long and short. Long vowels were generally held about twice as long as short vowels (cf. half notes to quarter notes in music) and are marked in this book, as in most beginning texts, with a MACRON or LONG MARK (e.g., Ä); vowels without a macron are short. Students should regard macrons as part of the spelling of a word, since the differences of pronunciation they indicate are often crucial to meaning (e.g., liber is a noun meaning book, while lÄ«ber is an adjective meaning free); the Romans themselves recognized the importance of such differences and (occasionally, not always) marked long vowels in a variety of ways, sometimes by writing them larger than short vowels (LIBER) or writing them twice (LIIBER) or, more commonly and even in personal letters and graffiti, by writing a mark called in Latin an APEX, resembling an acute accent, above the vowel (LÃBER). Though there were most certainly individual differences, the pronunciations of the long and short vowels were approximately as followsâbe sure to listen to the pronunciation of these words and all the Latin in this IntrÅdvctiÅ either on the audio CD set Readings from Wheelockâs Latin or online at www.wheelockslatin.com):

Â 

Long

Short

Ä as in father: dÄs, cÄrÄ

as in Dinah: dat, casa

Ä as in they: mÄ, sÄdÄs

e as in pet: et, sed

Ä« as in machine: hÄ«c, sÄ«ca

i as in pin: hic, sicca

Å as in clover: Ås, mÅrÄs

o as in orb, off: os, mora

Å« as in rude: tÅ«, sÅ«mÅ

u as in put: tum, sum

y, either short or long, a vowel with a sound intermediate between u and i, as in French tu or German Ã¼berâone of only a few sounds in classical Latin that do not occur in modern English

Diphthongs

Latin has the following six diphthongs, combinations of two vowel sounds that were collapsed together into a single syllable:

ae as ai in aisle: cÄrae, saepe

au as ou in house: aut, laudÅ

ei as in reign: deinde

eu as Latin e + u, pronounced rapidly as a single syllable: seu. The sound does not occur in English and is rare in Latin.

oe as oi in oil: coepit, proelium

ui as in Latin u + i, spoken as a single syllable like Spanish muy (or like English gooey, pronounced quickly as a single syllable). This diphthong occurs only in huius, cuius, huic, cui, hui. Elsewhere the two letters are spoken separately as in fu-it, frÅ«ctu-Ä«.

Consonants

Latin consonants had essentially the same sounds as the English consonants with the following exceptions:

bs and bt were pronounced ps and pt (e.g., urbs, obtineÅ); otherwise Latin b had the same voiced sound as our letter (e.g., bibÄbant).

c was always hard as in can, never soft as in city: cum, cÄ«vis, facilis.

g was always hard as in get, never soft as in gem: glÅria, gerÅ. When it appeared before n, the letter g represented a nasalized ng sound as in hangnail: magnus.

h was a breathing sound, an ASPIRATE, as in English, only less harshly pronounced: hic, haec

i (which also represented a vowel) usually functioned as a consonant with the sound of y as in yes when used before a vowel at the beginning of a word (iÅ«stus = yustus); between two vowels within a word it served in double capacity: as the vowel i forming a diphthong with the preceding vowel, and as the consonant y (reiectus = rei-yectus; maior = mai-yor, with the ai pronounced like that in aisle; cuius = cui-yus); otherwise it was usually a vowel. This so-called CONSONANTAL i regularly appears in English derivatives as a j (a letter added to the alphabet in the Middle Ages); hence maior = major, IÅ«lius = Julius.

m had the sound it has in English, pronounced with the lips closed: monet. There is some evidence, however, that in at least certain instances final -m (i.e., -m at the end of a word), following a vowel, was pronounced with the lips open, producing a nasalization of the preceding vowel, another of the few sounds of classical Latin not occurring in English: tum, etiam.

q, as in English, is always followed by consonantal u, the combination having the sound kw: quid, quoque.

r was trilled; the Romans called it the littera canÄ«na, because its sound suggested the snarling of a dog: RÅma, cÅ«rÄre.

s was always voiceless as in see, never voiced as in our word ease: sed, posuissÄs, mÄ«sistis.

t always had the sound of t as in tired, never of sh as in nation or ch as in mention: taciturnitÄs, nÄtiÅnem, mentiÅnem.

v had the sound of our w: vÄ«vÅ = wÄ«wÅ, vÄ«num = wÄ«num.

x had the sound of ks as in axle, not of gz as in exert: mixtum, exerceÅ.

ch represented Greek chi and had the sound of ckh in blockhead, not of ch in church: chorus, Archilochus.

ph represented Greek phi and had the sound of ph in uphill, not the f sound in our pronunciation of philosophy: philosophia.

th represented Greek theta and had the sound of th in hothouse, not of th in thin or the: theÄtrum.

The Romans quite appropriately pronounced double consonants as two separate consonants; we in our haste usually render them as a single consonant. For instance, the rr in the Latin word currunt sounded something like the two râs in watch the cur run (except that in Latin each r was trilled); and the tt in admittent sounded like the two tâs in admit ten.

Syllables

In Latin as in English, a word has as many syllables as it has vowels and diphthongs.

Syllabification: In dividing a word into syllables:

Two contiguous vowels or a vowel and a diphthong are separated: dea, de-a; deae, de-ae.

A single consonant between two vowels goes with (because pronounced with) the second vowel: amÄ«cus, a-mÄ«-cus.

When two or more consonants stand between two vowels, generally only the last consonant goes with the second vowel: mittÅ, mit-tÅ; servÄre, servÄ-re; cÅnsÅ«mptus, cÅn-sÅ«mp-tus. However, a stop (p, b, t, d, c, g) + a liquid (l, r) generally (with common exceptions in poetry) count as a single consonant and go with the following vowel: patrem, pa-trem; castra, cas-tra. Also counted as single consonants are qu and the aspirates ch, ph, th, which should never be separated in syllabification: architectus, ar-chi-tec-tus; loquÄcem, lo-quÄ-cem.

Syllable quantity: A syllable is LONG BY NATURE if it contains a long vowel or a diphthong; a syllable is LONG BY POSITION if it contains a short vowel followed by two or more consonants or by x, which is a double consonant (= ks). Otherwise a syllable is short; again, the difference is rather like that between a musical half-note and a quarter-note. In applying these rules, remember that a stop + a liquid as well as qu and the aspirates ch, ph, and th regularly count as a single consonant: e.g., pa-trem, quo-que, phi-lo-so-phi-a.

Syllables long by nature (here underlined): lau-dÅ, RÅ-ma, a-mÄ«-cus.

Syllables long by position (underlined): ser-vat, sa-pi-en-ti-a, ax-is (= ak-sis).

Examples with all long syllables, whether by nature or by position, underlined: lau-dÄ-te, mo-ne-Å, sae-pe, cÅn-ser-vÄ-tis, pu-el-lÄ-rum.

Even in English, syllables have this sort of temporal quantity, i.e., some syllables take longer to pronounce than others (consider the word âenough,â with its very short, clipped first syllable, and the much longer second syllable), but it is not a phenomenon we think much about. The matter is important in Latin, however, for at least two reasons: first, syllable quantity was a major determinant of the rhythm of Latin poetry, as you will learn later in your study of the language; and, of more immediate importance, syllable quantity determined the position of the stress accent in words of three or more syllables, as explained below.

Accent

Words in Latin, like those in English, were pronounced with extra emphasis on one syllable (or more than one, in the case of very long words); the placement of this STRESS ACCENT in Latin (unlike English) followed these strict and simple rules:

1. In a word of two syllables the accent always falls on the first syllable: sÃ©r-vÅ, saÃ©-pe, nÃ-hil.

2. In a word of three or more syllables (a) the accent falls on the next to last syllable (sometimes called the PENULT), if that syllable is long (ser-v-re, cÅn-sÃ©rvat, for t-na); (b) otherwise, the accent falls on the syllable before that (the ANTEPENULT: mÃ³-ne-Å, pÃ¡-tri-a, pe-c-ni-a, vÃ³-lu-cris).

Because these rules for accentuation are so regular, accent marks (as opposed to macrons) are not ordinarily included when writing Latin; in this text, however, accents are provided in both the PARADIGMS (sample declensions and conjugations) and the chapter vocabularies, as an aid to correct pronunciation.

LANGUAGE IS SPEECH: The Importance of Pronunciation and Reading Aloud

Although oral-aural communication and conversational skills are sometimesâand unfortunatelyâgiven little stress in the Latin classroom, nevertheless a reasonably correct and consistent pronunciation is essential to the mastery of Latin, as of any language. An ability to pronounce words and to read sentences and longer texts aloud according to the few, simple rules provided in this IntrÅdvctiÅ will also enable you to âpronounceâ correctly in your mind and, as you think of a word, to spell it correctly. Without that ability, you will confuse not only the sounds of the language, but also the spelling and often therefore the meaning of its words.

Fortunately, as you have seen in this discussion, prÅnÅ«ntiÄtiÅ LatÄ«na est facilis, Latin pronunciation is easy, far easier than that of English or any other language I know. Vowels have only two possible sounds; most consonants have only one; and the rules for accentuation are just that, rules that you can count on every time. Moreover, nearly every sound that existed in classical Latin occurs also in English (the chief exceptions being the vowel y and the diphthong eu, neither of which was very common, the trilled r, and final -m). And in Latin, âwhat you see is what you getâ or rather âwhat you see is what you hearâ: there are no âsilent eâsâ or other such oddities of correlating spelling with sound that have led to the familiar quip that in English âghotiâ can even be pronounced âfishâ (gh- as in âenough,â -o- as in âwomen,â and -ti as in ânationâ)!

As you begin your study of Latin, remember that it did not merely consist of written texts to be read mutely from a printed page, but it was for a millennium and more a spoken languageâa language learned and spoken by Roman boys and girls, in fact, just as your own native language was acquired and spoken by you in your childhood; it was a living language read and spoken by average Roman women and men, and not just by famous orators, poets, and politicians. Andâa fact some may find startlingâthe Romans themselves never read silently, but always aloud; they regarded language as speaking and listening, and viewed writing as merely a convenient means of recording communications spoken and heard.

In your study of this classic and (because of its recurring inflections) highly sonorous tongue, you should apply all your language learning skills toward acquiring mastery, spending at least a few minutes every day listening and speaking, and not just silently reading and writing. In a classroom setting, you will have abundant opportunity to hear the language; but even so, or if you are studying independently, the Readings from Wheelockâs Latin CDs and the online audio at www.wheelockslatin.com are indispensable resources. Always practice and review paradigms and vocabulary items by listening to and reading them aloud. Most especially, like a true Roman, read aloud every Latin sentence or passage you encounter; and, though this book will certainly help you develop your skills in translating Latin into English, you should first read every Latin text aloud for comprehension, reading and hearing and thinking what the text is saying, before ever attempting to translate into English.

Carpe diemâcarpe LatÄ«nam!

Maps

Map 1: ANCIENT ITALY
Map by Richard A. LaFleur and Thomas R. Elliott, revised by Brian Turner, with materials provided by the Ancient World Mapping Center, www.unc.edu/awmc
copyright by Richard A. LaFleur, Thomas R. Elliott, Brian Turner, and the Ancient World Mapping Center, www.unc.edu/awmc

Map 2: THE ROMAN EMPIRE
Map by Richard A. LaFleur and Thomas R. Elliott, revised by Brian Turner, with materials provided by the Ancient World Mapping Center, www.unc.edu/awmc
copyright by Richard A. LaFleur, Thomas R. Elliott, Brian Turner, and the Ancient World Mapping Center, www.unc.edu/awmc

Map 3: ANCIENT GREECE AND THE AEGEAN
Map by Richard A. LaFleur and Thomas R. Elliott, revised by Brian Turner, with materials provided by the Ancient World Mapping Center, www.unc.edu/awmc
copyright by Richard A. LaFleur, Thomas R. Elliott, Brian Turner, and the Ancient World Mapping Center, www.unc.edu/awmc

CAPVT I

Verbs; First and Second Conjugations; Adverbs; Reading and Translating

SalvÄ (âGreetings!â), and WELCOME to the study of classical Latin, or what I affectionately call âThe Mother Tongueâ! You already know a great deal about the design and purposes of this book from reading the Preface and IntrÅductiÅ and thus are aware you are embarking on a fascinating journey into, not only the language, but also the literature and culture of ancient Rome. The task will be challenging, but the rewards manifold, and so I bid you bonam fortÅ«nam! (you can deduce the meaning of that phrase from the context and English derivatives, but, if not, look up both words in the Latin-English VocÄbula at the back of the bookâ¦.)

GRAMMATICA (âGrammar Topicsâ)

Each of this bookâs chapters opens with a discussion of grammatical issues essential to the mastery of Latin, typically including both MORPHOLOGY (word forms) and SYNTAX (usage of those forms within a sentence). Throughout each chapter important new terms, like âmorphologyâ and âsyntaxâ here, are regularly printed in these SMALL BOLD CAPITALS, usually at their first few occurrences in the book, as a reminder that they are items you must be familiar with.

VERBS (sg. verbum, pl. verba)

Since a VERB (from Latin verbum, whose basic meaning is word) describes its subjectâs activity or state of being, and is thus one of the most important words in a sentence, we may best begin our study of Latin with a look at that part of speech (the other PARTS OF SPEECH in Latin are the same as those in English: NOUNS, PRONOUNS, ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, PREPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS, INTERJECTIONS, each of which is systematically introduced in this book).

In Latin as in English, verbs exhibit the following five characteristics:

PERSON (Lat. persÅna): who is the subject, i.e., who performs (or, in the passive, receives) the action, from the speakerâs point of view; 1st person = the speaker(s), I, we; 2nd = the person(s) spoken to, you; 3rd = the person(s) spoken about, he, she, it, they.

NUMBER (numerus): how many subjects, singular or plural.

TENSE (tempus, time): the time of the action; Latin has six tenses, present, future, imperfect, perfect, future perfect, and pluperfect.

MOOD (modus, manner): the manner of indicating the action or state of being of the verb; like English, Latin has the INDICATIVE (which âindicatesâ facts) and the IMPERATIVE (which orders actions), both introduced in this chapter, and the SUBJUNCTIVE (which describes, in particular, hypothetical or potential actions), introduced in Capvt XXVIII

VOICE (vÅx): an indication, with transitive verbs (those that can take direct objects), of whether the subject performs the action (ACTIVE VOICE) or receives it (PASSIVE VOICE).

Conjugation (coniugÄtiÅ)

To CONJUGATE (coniugÄre, join together) a FINITE VERB (i.e., a verb that exhibits the above characteristics, as opposed to infinitives, which lack person and number) is to list all its forms, according to these variations of person, number, tense, mood, and voice. If asked to conjugate the English verb to praise in the present tense, active voice, of the indicative mood, you would say:

Â 

Â 

Singular

Plural

1st person

I praise

we praise

2nd person

we praise

you praise

3rd person

he (she, it) praises

they praise

Â 

The person and the number of five of these forms cannot be determined in English without the aid of pronouns I, you, we, they. Only in the third person singular can you omit the pronoun he (she, it) and still make clear by the special ending of the verb that praises is third person singular.

Personal Endings

What English can accomplish in only one of the six forms, Latin can do in all six by means of PERSONAL ENDINGS, which indicate distinctly the person, the number, and the voice of the verb. Since these personal endings will be encountered in every Latin sentence, you need to memorize them now, and itâs easily done. For the active voice they are:

Â 

Singular

Â 

1st person

-Å or -m, which corresponds to I.

2nd person

-s, which corresponds to you (sg.).

3rd person

-t, which corresponds to he, she, it.

Â 

Plural

Â 

1st person

-mus, which corresponds to we.

2nd person

-tis, which corresponds to you (pl.).

3rd person

-nt, which corresponds to they.

Â 

The next step is to find a verb STEM to which these endings can be added.

Present Active Infinitive and Present Stem

An INFINITIVE is a common verbal form, usually preceded with âtoâ in English (âto err is human, to forgive divineâ). The present active infinitives of the model verbs used in this book for the first and second conjugations are:

Â 

laudÄre, to praise

monÄre, to advise

Â 

The -Äre ending, with its -Ä- STEM VOWEL, identifies a verb as first conjugation; -Äre and the -Ä- characterize second conjugation verbs (Latin has four conjugations altogether, each marked by a different stem vowelâthe third and fourth conjugations are introduced in later chapters). Drop the -re, the actual infinitive ending, and you have the PRESENT STEM, which ends in Ä for first conjugation verbs, Ä for second:

Â 

laudÄ-

monÄ-

Â 

To this stem add the personal endings (with the few modifications noted below), and you are ready to read or to say something in Latin about the present: e.g., laudÄ + s > laudÄs, you praise; monÄmus, we advise.

This leads us to the first of many paradigms presented in this book. PARADIGMS (from Greek paradeigma, pattern, example) are presented throughout the chapters and in the Appendix (see SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, NOUNSâDECLENSIONS) to provide model summaries of forms. The ancient Romans learned the many INFLECTIONS (the changing endings of individual words) from their parents, teachers, and daily contact with other Latin speakers, just as we as children learned our own native language (and such inflections as âtheyâ and âthem,â or âseeâ and âseesâ). Since we lack this natural Latin-speaking environment and usually begin the study of Latin at a relatively late age under the exigencies of time, the analytical âgrammar-translationâ approach through paradigms (which even the Romans themselves had to learn) is widely regarded as a highly effective method for highschoolers, college students, and other adult learners.

In the process of memorizing paradigms, be sure always to say them aloud, as speaking and listening to the language, to its basic sounds and rhythms, is essential to acquiring mastery; if you have the audio package, Readings from Wheelockâs Latin, you can hear all the bookâs paradigms (as well as the 40 chapter vocabularies and Latin readings) pronounced there.

Present Indicative Active of laudÅ and moneÅ

Â 

Note that Latin has only these present active indicative forms, and so the following English translations are possible, depending on context; e.g., mÄ laudant, they praise me (SIMPLE PRESENT) or they are praising me (PROGRESSIVE PRESENT) or they do praise me (EMPHATIC PRESENT).

ACCENT marks (as in mÃ³nent) are provided in the paradigms only for convenience; since they follow the strict rules for accentuation explained in the IntrÅductiÅ, they need not, and should not, be included in your own conjugation of Latin verbs (unless you are asked to do so by your instructor).

The MACRONS, however, must be included (just as the Romans themselves frequently marked long vowels in a variety of ways), and the long vowel sounds they indicate must be taken into account in pronouncing and memorizing the paradigms and in conjugating other verbs. Note that the stem vowel has no macron in certain forms (e.g., moneÅ, laudant); learn the following rule, which will make it easier to account for macrons that seem to disappear and reappear arbitrarily:

Vowels that are normally long are regularly shortened when they occur immediately before another vowel (hence moneÅ instead of *monÄÅ), before -m, -r, or -t at the end of a word (hence laudat, not *laudÄt), or before nt or nd in any position (laudant, not *laudÄnt: the asterisks here and elsewhere in this book indicate a hypothetical form not actually occurring in classical Latin).

In the case of first conjugation, or -Ä-, verbs (vs. second conjugation, -Ä- verbs), the stem vowel is not merely shortened but disappears entirely in the first person singular, through contraction with final -Å (laudÅ, not *laudÄÅ).

Present Active Imperative

The IMPERATIVE mood is used for giving commands; the singular imperative is identical to the present stem, and the plural imperative (employed when addressing two or more persons) is formed by adding -te to that stem:

Â 

2nd person singular

laÃºdÄ, praise!

mÃ³nÄ, advise!

2nd person plural

laudte, praise!

monte, advise!

Â 

E.g., MonÄ mÄ! Advise me! ServÄte mÄ! Save me!

ADVERBS (sg. adverbium, pl. adverbia)

In Latin and English, an ADVERB is a word that modifies a verb, an adjective, or another adverb, and is typically positioned before that word (ad + verbum, next to/near the verb); nÅn and saepe appear in the following VocÄbula, and many others will be introduced in subsequent chapters.

NÅn valet. She (or he) is not well. MÄ saepe laudant. They often praise me. MÄ nÅn saepe monÄs. You do not often advise me.

VOCÄBVLA (âVOCABULARYâ)

In memorizing the VocÄbula in every chapter, pronounce (prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!) each Latin word carefully, with attention to macrons, according to the rules learned in the IntrÅductiÅ, along with the English meanings; listen to each chapterâs vocabulary on the Readings from Wheelockâs Latin CDs or online at www.wheelockslatin.com. Thorough memorization of vocabulary is a sine qua non (sine quÄ nÅn, without which not), an absolute essential to mastering a language, and there are no shortcuts; spend at least 5-10 minutes every single day studying a chapterâs new vocabulary and reviewing words introduced in previous chapters.

Most vocabulary entries contain additional information that should be learned, often including an indication of the part of speech (adverb, conjunction, etc.) and a selection of English derivatives listed in parentheses at the end of the entry. Like an English verb, a Latin verb has PRINCIPAL PARTS (usually four, vs. three in English, as in âgo, went, goneâ) which must be memorized in order to fully conjugate the verb. As you will see from the following list, the first principal part is the first person singular present active indicative, and the second principal part is the present active infinitive; the function of the remaining principal parts will be explained in later chapters. Try conjugating two or three of the verbs in this list, and give their singular and plural imperatives too.

Â 

mÄ, pron. (= pronoun, see AbbreviÄtiÅnÄs for a list of the abbreviations used in this book) me, myself

quid, pron., what (quid pro quo, quiddity)

nÃhil, noun, nothing (nil, nihilism, annihilate)

nÅn, adv. (adverb), not

saÃ©pe, adv., often

sÄ«, conj. (conjunction), if

Ã¡mÅ, amre, amvÄ«, amtum, to love, like; ambÅ tÄ, idiom, please (lit., I will love you) (amorous, amatory, Amanda)

cgitÅ, cÅgitre, cÅgitvÄ«, cÅgittum, to think, ponder, consider, plan (cogitate, cogitation, cogitative)

dbeÅ, dÄbre, dbuÄ«, dbitum, to owe; ought, must, should (debt, debit, due, duty)

dÅ, dÃ¡re, dÃ©dÄ«, dÃ¡tum, to give, offer (date, data, dative); unlike other first conj. verbs, the stem vowel of dÅ is long only in the 2nd pers. sg. indic. (dÄs) and sg. imperat. (dÄ).

Ã©rrÅ, errre, errvÄ«, errtum, to wander; err, go astray, make a mistake, be mistaken (erratic, errant, erroneous, error, aberration)

laÃºdÅ, laudre, laudvÄ«, laudtum, to praise (laud, laudable, laudatory)

mÃ³neÅ, monre, mÃ³nuÄ«, mÃ³nitum, to remind, advise, warn (admonish, admonition, monitor, monument, monster, premonition)

sÃ¡lveÅ, salvre, to be well, be in good health;

sÃ¡lvÄ, salvte, hello, greetings! (salvation, salver, salvage)

sÃ©rvÅ, servre, servvÄ«, servtum, to preserve, save, keep, guard (observe, preserve, reserve, reservoir)

cÅnsÃ©rvÅ, cÅnservre, cÅnservvÄ«, cÅnservtum (con-servÅ), a stronger form of servÅ, to preserve, conserve, maintain (conservative, conservation, conservator)

tÃ©rreÅ, terrre, tÃ©rruÄ«, tÃ©rritum, to frighten, terrify (terrible, terrific, terrify, terror, terrorist, deter)

vÃ¡leÅ, valre, vÃ¡luÄ«, valitrum, to be strong, have power; be well;

vÃ¡lÄ (valte), good-bye, farewell! (valedictorian, valid, invalidate, prevail, prevalent)

vÃdeÅ, vidre, vdÄ«, vsum, to see; observe, understand (video, provide, evident, view, review, revise, revision, television)

vÃ³cÅ, vocre, vocvÄ«, voctum, to call, summon (vocation, advocate, vocabulary, convoke, evoke, invoke, provoke, revoke)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ (âREADING AND TRANSLATIONâ)

Before attempting to read the following sentences and passage (all of which are based, however freely, on ancient sources), be sure you have memorized the paradigms and VocÄbula and practiced conjugating some of the verbs in the list. You should also first assess your mastery of each chapterâs grammatical material by using the Self-Tutorial Exercises at the back of the book: write out your answers to the grammar questions and your translations of at least some of the sentences, and then check your responses against the Answer Key at KEY TO SELF-TUTORIAL EXERCISES; if you have made mistakes, analyze them and review accordingly, before proceeding to the chapterâs readings.

The following simple rules will assist you with reading and translating. First, listen to the CDs, if you have them, and always read each sentence aloud (just as the Romans did!); read for comprehension, thinking about the meanings of words and phrases and the likely sense of the whole sentence. The verb often comes last in Latin: if its ending is either first or second person, you already know the subject (âI,â âwe,â or âyouâ) and can begin your translation there; if the verb is third person (i.e., ending with -t or -nt), look for a noun that might be the subject, frequently the first word in the sentence. Subject-object-verb (SOV) is a common word-order pattern in Latin (vs. SVO in English).

SENTENTIAE (âSentencesâ)

Labor mÄ vocat. (Note the SOV word order.âlabor; âlaboratory,â âelaborateâ; a noun, and one of hundreds of Lat. words that come into Eng. with their spelling unchanged; such words are typically not defined in these notes, as you are expected to intuit their meaning, but usually they may be found in the end Vocab., VOCÄBVLA: LATIN-ENGLISH below.)

MonÄ mÄ, sÄ« errÅâamÄbÅ tÄ!

FestÄ«nÄ lentÄ. (A favorite saying of the emperor Augustus.âfestÄ«nÅ, festÄ«nÄre, to hasten, make haste; âFestina,â a brand of wristwatch.âlentÄ, adv., slowly.)

LaudÄs mÄ; culpant mÄ. (culpÅ, culpÄre, to blame, censure; âculpable,â âculprit.â)

Saepe peccÄmus. (peccÅ, peccÄre, to sin; âpeccadillo,â âimpeccable.â)

Quid dÄbÄmus cÅgitÄre?

CÅnservÄte mÄ!

RÅ«mor volat. (volÅ, volÄre, to fly; âvolatile,â âvolley.â)

MÄ nÅn amat.

Nihil mÄ terret. (SOV again.)

ApollÅ mÄ saepe servat.

SalvÄte!âquid vidÄtis? Nihil vidÄmus.

Saepe nihil cÅgitÄs.

Bis dÄs, sÄ« cito dÄs. (bis, adv., twice; âbisect,â âbicycle.ââcito, adv., quickly; âcitation,â âincite.ââWhat do you suppose this ancient proverb meant?)

SÄ« valÄs, valeÅ. (A friendly sentiment with which Romans often commenced a letter.)

Each chapter contains a few sentences to translate from English into Latin; you will enjoy these composition exercises, which will soon have you thinking like an ancient Roman! You will need to carefully analyze the English sentence first, of course, thinking for example about the person and number of the verb; and use the few rules of word order you have learned in this chapter.

16. What does he see?

17. They are giving nothing.

18. You ought not to praise me.

19. If I err, he often warns me.

20. If you love me, save me, please!

The Poet Horace Contemplates an Invitation

MaecÄnÄs et Vergilius mÄ hodiÄ vocant. Quid cÅgitÄre dÄbeÅ? Quid dÄbeÅ respondÄre? SÄ« errÅ, mÄ saepe monent et culpant; sÄ« nÅn errÅ, mÄ laudant. Quid hodiÄ cÅgitÄre dÄbeÅ?

Â 

Horace (Quintus Horatius Flaccus, 65â8 B.C.) is one of the best known and admired of all classical Lat. poets; as a young man he composed two volumes of satires, but he is perhaps even better known for his lyric poems, the Odes or Carmina, from which comes the poetâs urgent dictum to âharvest the day,â carpe diem! For further particulars on Horace and the other authors cited in these chapter reading passages, review the Introd. above, p. xxxii. The wealthy literary patron Maecenas and the poet Vergil, author of Romeâs great epic poem, the Aeneid, were both friends of Horace, and this brief passage is very freely adapted from autobiographical references in his poetry.âet, conj., and.âhodiÄ, adv., today; âhodiernal.âârespondeÅ, respondÄre, to reply, respond; âresponse,â âcorrespond.â)

Horace, Virgil, and Varius at the House of Maecenas. Oil on canvas. Charles Francois Jalabert (1819â1901). MusÃ©e des Beaux-Artes, Nimes, France
Giraudon / The Bridgeman Art Library

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Why is Horace hesitant about the invitation he has received? In view of the shared interests of the three men, what do you suppose Horace may have done that Maecenas and Vergil might sometimes criticize?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS (âWritings on Wallsâ)

Like modern Americansâand literate humans everywhere!âthe ancient Romans loved scribbling on walls, and a vast number of their graffiti have been preserved in the ruins of Pompeii, the south Italian city near Naples that was at once both destroyed and, in an archaeological sense, preserved in the dreadful, catastrophic eruption of Mount Vesuvius in August of A.D. 79 (see Map 1, above). Examples of these graffiti are presented throughout book, for the interest and insights they provide into one aspect or another of life in ancient Italy; dozens more graffiti and other inscriptions from throughout the Roman empire are included in the companion reader, Scribblers, Scvlptors, and Scribes, also available from HarperCollins Publishers.

Many of the graffiti from Pompeii have been damaged, sometimes obscuring letters or entire words, and others containâlike those you have likely seen yourself on public bathroom walls!âspelling errors or other oddities of language that are interesting in themselves as reflections of varying levels of literacy, pronunciation variants, and other evidence of the general fluidity of language. You will learn lots of rules (rÄgulae) of spelling and grammar as you proceed through this text (rules that Latin, as a highly âregularâ language, tends to follow), but you should keep in mind that these reflect a limited, albeit important, segment of the population of ancient Italy, i.e., well educated, highly literate Romans of the 1st centuries B.C. and A.D.; many other Romans could read and write, however, and though they may not have produced any literary masterpieces, the âWritings on Wallsâ (scrÄ«pta in parietibus) they have left usâin their own handwritingâare a valuable legacy from the ancient world. In editing these graffiti, the following conventional symbols are regularly employed to indicate the sorts of errors and omissions mentioned above, as well as abbreviations that were common in both formal and informal texts:

Â 

(abc) |  |  | an abbreviation expanded by the editor
[abc] |  |  | letters missing due to damage and supplied by the editor
<abc> |  |  | letters omitted either by error, or as a reflection of the writerâs pronunciation, and supplied by the editor

Â 

Â 

Corpus Inscriptionum Latinarum (CIL) 4.10040: From the attic of a lodging in Pompeii, Reg. II, Ins. 1, = Region II, Insula 1: archaeologists have divided the ancient city into regions and blocks, regiÅnÄs and Ä«nsulae, the numbers for which are generally provided in this book; individual houses and shops within each insula were also typically numbered and sometimes named. The lad who scribbled this graffito to his sweetheart was not highly literate: as you can see from the drawing, he actually wrote AV, a contraction of AVE, = avÄ, which here had essentially the same meaning as salvÄ; and his PVLA was a misspelling of puella, which as you will see in Capvt II means girl or girlfriend. The above drawing, and those in subsequent chapters, are reproduced directly from the CIL by graphic artist Kay Stanton.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS! (âLatin Is Funâand Useful!â)

SalvÄte! Here and at the close of each chapter, you will find a trove of Latin miscellÄnea (you can easily deduce the meaning of that termâit became an English word too, spelled exactly the same!) for your pleasure and edification! Gaudium, in the title of this section, is the noun (nÅmen) for joy or just plain fun; and Å«tilis, an adjective (adiectÄ«vum) meaning useful, is a reminder here of the amazing âutilityâ of the Latin language, whose careful study will provide you with invaluable knowledge that you can âutilizeâ every day! To start with, here is some âfirst dayâ conversational Latin:

Â 

SalvÄ, discipula or discipule! Hello, student! (The -a/-e variants distinguish between female and male students.)

SalvÄte, discipulae et discipulÄ«! Hello, students! (feminine and masculine plural)

SalvÄ, magister or magistra! Greetings, teacher! (again, masculine or feminine)

ValÄte, discipulÄ« et discipulae! ValÄ, magister (magistra)! Good-bye, studentsâ¦, etc.

Quid est nÅmen tibi? Whatâs your name?

NÅmen mihi est âMark.â My name is Mark. (Or, better yet, how about a nÅmen LatÄ«num, Latin name: nÅmen mihi est âMÄrcus.â)

Â 

Your instructor may employ conversational âclassroom Latinâ in teaching grammar: several Latin grammatical terms are introduced above, e.g., adverbium, verbum, and coniugÄre; would you know how to respond if your instructor said to you, ConiugÄ verbum âamÅ, amÄreâ? (She/he might add â¦in tempore praesentÄ«, which you could likely guess means in the present tenseâ most of our English grammar terms derive from Latin, so this is easy!) In Capvt II you will learn that est = is; if your teacher asked, Quid est âsaepeââverbum aut (or) adverbium?âhow would you reply? Youâll be speaking, and thinking, like a Roman before you know it!

Oh, and remember that labor in sentence 1 (sententia I) above is one of many Latin words that come directly into English without any alteration in spelling? Well, rÅ«mor in sententia VIII is another, and so is videÅ in the VocÄbula. On the other hand, amÅ does not mean âbulletsâ (âammoâ!!) nor is amat âa small rug,â so, in this section of the book, beware ofâ¦ iocÄ« terribilÄs (terrible jokes): valÄte!

In Maecenasâ Foyer
Oil on canvas, 1890
Stefan Bakalowicz (1857â1947)
Tretyakov Gallery, Moscow, Russia
Tretyakov Gallery, Moscow, Russia / The Bridgeman Art Library

CAPVT II

First Declension Nouns and Adjectives; Prepositions, Conjunctions, Interjections

GRAMMATICA

NOUNS (sg. nÅmen, pl. nÅmina) AND CASES

A NOUN (nÅmen name) ânamesâ or identifies a person, place, or thing, either generally, poÄta, poet, urbs, city, liber, book (so-called COMMON NOUNS), or specifically, Vergilius, Vergil, RÅma, Rome, AenÄis, Aeneid (PROPER NOUNS). Nouns are also categorized as ABSTRACT (Ä«ra, anger) or CONCRETE (porta, gate). As a Latin verb has various INFLECTIONS or endings that signal specifics of meaning, so a noun has various terminations to show whether it functions as a verbâs subject or object, indicates possession, etc. The inflected forms of a noun are called CASES, the more common uses and meanings of which are catalogued below; you will encounter several other case uses in subsequent chapters, all of which you must be able to identify and name, so it is advisable to begin now keeping a list for each case, with definitions and examples, in your notebook or a computer file. For illustrative purposes, we will refer to the following simple English sentences, which have been limited to the material available in Capita I and II and later in the chapter will be translated into Latin for further analysis.

A. The poet is giving the girl large roses (or is giving large roses to the girl).

B. The girls are giving the poetâs roses to the sailors.

C. Without money the girlsâ country (or the country of the girls) is not strong.

Nominative Case

The Romans used the NOMINATIVE CASE most commonly to indicate the SUBJECT of a finite verb; e.g., âpoetâ in sentence A above and âgirlsâ in B. As you will see in a later chapter, the nominative was also employed with forms of to be (sum, esse) and other linking verbs, as a PREDICATE NOMINATIVE: Puella est poÄta, the girl is a poet; Patria est antÄ«qua, the country is ancient.

Genitive Case

When one noun was used to modify (from modus, limit) another, the Romans put the modifying/limiting noun, like poetâs in sentence B and girlsâ in sentence C, in the GENITIVE CASE. One idea commonly conveyed by the genitive is POSSESSION and, although other uses are distinguished, the genitive can generally be translated with the preposition âofâ or by using an apostrophe (âs or sâ). A noun in the genitive case usually follows the noun it modifies.

Dative Case

The Romans used the DATIVE to mark the person or thing indirectly affected by the action of the verb, as (to) the girl in sentence A and to the sailors in B; both of these nouns are INDIRECT OBJECTS, the most common use of the dative. âToâ or âforâ are most commonly supplied in translating a dative.

Accusative Case

The Romans used the ACCUSATIVE CASE to indicate the DIRECT OBJECT of the verb, the person or thing directly affected by the verbâs action. In sentences A and B, roses is the direct object of is (are) giving.

The accusative can also be used as OBJECT OF A PREPOSITION, with certain (not all) prepositions: e.g., ad, toward/at; in, into; post, after, behind. A PREPOSITION (praepositiÅ, placing before; pl. praepositiÅnÄs) is usually âpositioned beforeâ a noun or pronoun (its âobjectâ), forming with that object a PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE that modifies either a noun (agricola ad portam est vir bonus, the farmer at the gate is a good manâad portam is adjectival, answering the question âwhich farmer?â), or a verb (agricola ad portam ambulat, the farmer is walking toward the gateâad portam is adverbial and answers the question âwhere?â), or some other word in the sentence. Most prepositions govern objects in either the ablative case or the accusative; a few can take both cases but with different shades of meaning.

Ablative Case

The ABLATIVE CASE is sometimes call the âadverbial caseâ because it was used by the Romans to modify, or limit, the verb by such ideas as means (âby/with what,â e.g., pecÅ«niÄ, with money), agent (âby whomâ: ab puellÄ, by the girl), accompaniment (âwith whomâ: cum poÄtÄ, with the poet), manner (âhowâ: cum Ä«rÄ, with anger, angrily), place (âwhere/from whichâ: in/ex patriÄ, in/from the country), time (âwhen/within whichâ: Å«nÄ hÅrÄ, in one hour). The ablative was often employed as object of a preposition; when a preposition was not used, typically âby,â âwith,â or âfromâ should be supplied in translating to English.

Vocative Case

The Romans used the VOCATIVE CASE to address or call on (vocÄre, to call) a person or thing directly; e.g., SalvÄ, nauta, Greetings, sailor. Sometimes the INTERJECTION Å was employed, Å puella, servÄ mÄ, O (oh) girl, save me!âan interjection (interiectiÅ, throwing into; pl. interiectiÅnÄs) is an exclamatory word âthrown intoâ a sentence and expressing some emotion, e.g., âoh,â âaha,â âwow,â âyikes!â In modern punctuation the vocative (or noun/pronoun of DIRECT ADDRESS, as the usage is typically called) is separated from the rest of the sentence by commas. With one major exception to be studied in Capvt III, the vocative has the same form as that of the nominative, and so it is ordinarily not listed in the paradigms.

FIRST DECLENSION NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES

The listing of all the cases of a noun or adjective is called a DECLENSION (from dÄclÄ«nÄre, to change the direction or form of something). Just as we conjugate verbs by adding endings to a stem, so we DECLINE nouns and adjectives by adding endings to a BASE. The nominative and genitive singular forms of a noun are provided in the vocabulary entry, which must be completely memorized, and the base is found by dropping the genitive ending; the vocabulary entry for an adjective includes the masculine, feminine, and neuter nominative singular forms, and the surest way to determine its base is by dropping the feminine ending. The following paradigm, which should be memorized (and remember to practice aloud!), illustrates the declension of a noun/adjective phrase, porta magna, the large gate; note that since Latin lacked equivalents of the English ARTICLES âa,â âan,â and âthe,â they must be supplied in translation:

Gender

Like English, Latin distinguishes three GENDERS: masculine, feminine, and neuter. While Latin nouns indicating male beings are naturally masculine and those indicating female beings are feminine, the gender of most other nouns was a grammatical concept, not a natural one, and so a nounâs gender must be memorized as part of the vocabulary entry.

Most first declension nouns are feminine; e.g., puella, girl; pecÅ«nia, money. A few nouns denoting individuals engaged in what were among the Romans traditionally male occupations are masculine; e.g., poÄta, poet; nauta, sailor; agricola, farmer (others not employed in this book are aurÄ«ga, charioteer; incola, inhabitant; pÄ«rÄta, pirate).

ADJECTIVES, AGREEMENT, AND WORD ORDER

An ADJECTIVE (sg. adiectÄ«vum, pl. adiectÄ«va, set next to, added) âaddsâ information about, or âmodifies,â a noun or pronoun; e.g., magna porta, the large gate; patria antÄ«qua, the ancient country. In these examples, âlargeâ and âancientâ describe âattributesâ of the nouns, and adjectives used as simple modifiers in this way are called ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES. Like nouns, adjectives are declined, and an adjective agrees with its noun in gender, number, and case; like nouns, adjectives can be singular or plural and they have the same cases, but an adjective has varying forms to agree with a particular nounâs gender (an adjective that modifies more than one noun usually agrees in gender with the nearest one, though sometimes the masculine predominates). As its Latin root meaning suggests, an adjective was usually positioned next to its noun (except in poetry, where word order is much freer). Most often the adjective followed the noun; common exceptions were adjectives denoting size or number, as well as demonstratives (hic, this; ille, that), which normally precede, as do adjectives which the speaker or writer wishes to emphasize.

GRAMMAR: MORPHOLOGY AND SYNTAX

Two major aspects of a languageâs GRAMMAR are its morphology and syntax. MORPHOLOGY refers to the forms of words, such as verb conjugations and noun-adjective declensions. SYNTAX, from the Greek verb syntattein meaning to arrange, refers to the arrangement and interrelation of words to form meaningful phrases, clauses, and sentences. To describe the syntax of a given noun or adjective, you should state its form, the word on which it most closely depends, and the reason for the form (i.e., its grammatical USE or FUNCTION in the sentence). The sentences presented at the beginning of the chapter, here translated into Latin, provide some examples. Notice in the subject and verb endings the rule that a verb must agree with its subject in person and number; note too that where a noun ending such as -ae can represent more than one case and thus result in AMBIGUOUS FORMS, word order and context provide essential clues to a sentenceâs meaning (hence puellae is the indirect object in A, subject in B).

A. PoÄta puellae magnÄs rosÄs dat.

B. Puellae nautÄ«s rosÄs poÄtae dant.

C. Patria puellÄrum sine pecÅ«niÄ nÅn valet.

The syntax of some of these words can be described as follows:

Â 

Â 

Be sure you can explain the syntax of all nouns and adjectives in the sentences and reading passage below.

VOCÄBVLA

This new vocabulary list includes, inter alia (inter alia, among other things), several nouns and adjectives. In addition to English meanings and (in parentheses) derivatives, each noun entry includes the nominative and genitive singular, so you can identify the nounâs base, and its gender. Adjective entries include the nominative for all three genders, e.g., magnus, magna, magnum (often abbreviated magnus, -a, -um in this bookâs notes); the nominative form magna is recognizably first declension and feminine, and thus has the genitive singular form magnae and the base magn-; the full declensions of masculine (magnus) and neuter (magnum) adjectives are introduced in the next two chapters, but it will be easiest for you to learn the nominatives for all three genders now. As you learn the new first declension nouns and adjectives, try declining two or three of them.

Also in this list are two new CONJUNCTIONS (you learned sÄ«, if, in Capvt I), et and sed: a conjunction (sg. coniÅ«nctiÅ, pl. coniÅ«nctiÅnÄs, joining together) connects two or more elements, such as two nouns (fÄma et fortÅ«na, fame and fortune) or two clauses (puella mÄ laudat sed nauta mÄ monet, the girl praises me but the sailor warns me); COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS connect equivalent elements (poÄtam amÄmus et laudÄmus, we love and praise the poet), while SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS introduce a subordinate (dependent) clause and connect it with a main (independent) clause (sÄ« errÅ, mÄ monÄs, if I make a mistake, you advise me).

In studying any language, ancient or modern, you must learn through listening and speaking, not just by reading silently from a printed page; as you study each chapterâs vocabulary, use the CDs or the audio online at www.wheelockslatin.com (where you can also find vocabulary cards and cumulative lists), and listen to (audÄ«!) and say aloud (prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!) each Latin word and its meaning. Pay close attention to macrons, which indicate important differences of pronunciation and often of meaning. Latin pronunciation is easyâprÅnÅ«ntiÄtiÅ LatÄ«na est facilis!âand generally âwhat you see is what you get (i.e., what you say and hear)â; but recall that the consonant cluster -gn- is an exception, representing an -ngn-sound as in âhangnail,â so that magna sounds something like *mangna: listen carefully to this word on the website or CDs.

Â 

fma, fmae, f., rumor, report; fame, reputation (famous, defame, infamy) fÅ

frma, frmae, f., form, shape; beauty (formal, format, formula, formless, deform, inform, etc.; but not formic, formidable)

fortfortna, fortnae, f., fortune, luck (fortunate, misfortune, unfortunate)

ra, rae, f., ire, anger (irate, irascible; but not irritate)

naÃºta, naÃºtae, m., sailor (nautical, nautilus, argonaut)

pÃ¡tria, pÃ¡triae, f., fatherland, native land, (oneâs) country (patriotic, expatriate, repatriate)

pecnia, pecniae, f., money (pecuniary, impecunious; cf. peculation)

philosÃ³phia, philosÃ³phiae, f. (Greek philosophia, love of wisdom), philosophy

poÃ©na, poÃ©nae, f., penalty, punishment; poÃ©nÄs dÃ¡re, idiom, to pay the penalty (penal, penalize, penalty, pain, subpoena)

pota, potae, m., poet (poetry, poetic)

pÃ³rta, pÃ³rtae, f., gate, entrance (portal, portico, porch, porthole)

puÃ©lla, puÃ©llae, f., girl

rÃ³sa, rÃ³sae, f., rose (rosary, roseate, rosette)

sentÃ©ntia, sentÃ©ntiae, f., feeling, thought, opinion, vote, sentence (sententious, sentencing)

vta, vtae, f., life; mode of life (vital, vitals, vitality, vitamin, vitalize, devitalize, revitalize)

antquus, antqua, antquum, adj., ancient, old-time (antique, antiquities, antiquated, antiquarian)

mÃ¡gnus, mÃ¡gna, mÃ¡gnum, adj., large, great; important (magnify, magnificent, magnate, magnitude, magnanimous)

mÃ©us, mÃ©a, mÃ©um, adj., my

mÃºltus, mÃºlta, mÃºltum adj., much, many (multitude, multiply, multiple; multi-, a prefix as in multimillionaire)

tÃºus, tÃºa, tÃºum adj., your, used when speaking to only one person

et, conj., and; even; etâ¦ et, bothâ¦ and sed, conj., but

Å, interj. (interjection), O!, Oh!, commonly preceding a vocative

sÃne, prep. (preposition) + abl., without (sinecure, sans)

est, is

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

As always, before attempting the following readings, be sure you have memorized the paradigms and VocÄbula, and assessed your mastery by writing out your answers to the grammar questions and translations of some of the sentences in the Self-Tutorial Exercises for this chapter, comparing your answers with the key, and reviewing accordingly. Check your ability to recognize the new noun forms in the sentences below by identifying the case, number, gender, and use (function) of the first several that occur, e.g., veniam in the third sentence is: acc., sg., f., direct object. For adjectives, identify the nouns they modify.

Read each Sententia aloud, listening to the CDs if you have them, and think about its meaning, before translating. Likewise with the Catullus selection: read aloud and for comprehension, trying to get the sense of the entire passage. Remember that subject-object-verb (SOV) is a common pattern (as in S.A. 4)âbut word order is quite variable in Latin, and so you must pay careful attention to word endings, which, for nouns, signal distinctions of number and case/use that are essential to meaning; watch the endings of adjectives too, for noun-adjective agreement, and of verbs for differences of person and number. Remember too that in translating you must routinely supply the ARTICLES âa,â âan,â or âthe,â as appropriate to the context. In translating from English to Latin, use SOV order, and analyze carefully the use of each word in the sentence; in S.A. 16, e.g., âlifeâ is the direct object, and singular, so be sure to select the correct form of vÄ«ta.

All the bookâs Sententiae AntÄ«quae and reading passages are drawn from ancient Roman sources, and the author is identified in parentheses; most of the readings in these early chapters are âadapted,â i.e., simplified to accommodate the limited grammar and vocabulary you have learned, but an asterisk before an authorâs name means that the text is presented verbatim. The specific work from which each reading passage is drawn is cited in the notes, and citations for the individual Sententiae are provided at LOCATION OF THE SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE, for students who are interested in the context and wish to do further reading.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

SalvÄ, Å patria! (Plautus.)

FÄma et sententia volant. (Vergil.âvolÄre, to fly, move quickly; âvolatile.â)

DÄ veniam puellae, amÄbÅ tÄ. (Terence.âvenia, -ae, f., favor, pardon; âvenial,â âveniality.â)

ClÄmentia tua multÄs vÄ«tÄs servat. (Cicero.âclÄmentia, -ae, f., clemency; âclement,â âinclement.â)

Multam pecÅ«niam dÄportat. (Cicero.âdÄportÄre, to carry away; âdeport,â âdeportation.â)

Et fortÅ«nam et vÄ«tam antÄ«quae patriae saepe laudÄs sed recÅ«sÄs. (Horace.ârecÅ«sÄre, to refuse, reject; ârecusation,â ârecuse.â)

MÄ vÄ«tÄre turbam iubÄs. (*Seneca.âvÄ«tÄre, to avoid; do not confuse this verb with the noun vÄ«ta; âinevitable.â âturba, -ae, f., crowd, multitude; âturbid,â âturbulent.ââiubÄre, to order; âjussive.â)

MÄ philosophiae dÅ. (Seneca.)

Philosophia est ars vÄ«tae. (*Cicero.âars, nom. sg., art; âartifice,â âartistry.â)

SÄnam fÅrmam vÄ«tae cÅnservÄte. (Seneca.âsÄnus, -a, -um, sound, sane; âsanitary,â âsanatorium.â)

Immodica Ä«ra creat Ä«nsÄniam. (Seneca.âimmodicus, -a, -um, immoderate, excessive.âcreÄre, to create; âcreation,â âcreature.ââÄ«nsÄnia, -ae, f., unsoundness, insanity; âinsane.â)

Quid cÅgitÄs?âdÄbÄmus Ä«ram vÄ«tÄre. (Seneca.)

NÅ«lla avÄritia sine poenÄ est. (*Seneca.ânÅ«llus, -a, -um, no; ânullify,â âannul.ââavÄritia, -ae, f., avarice; âavaricious.â)

MÄ saevÄ«s catÄnÄ«s onerat. (Horace.âsaevus, -a, -um, cruel.âcatÄna, -ae, f., chain; âcatenary.ââonerÄre, to load, oppress; âonerous,â âexonerate.â)

Rotam fortÅ«nae nÅn timent. (Cicero.ârota, -ae, f., wheel; ârotary,â ârotate.ââtimÄre, to fear; âtimid,â âintimidate.â)

The girls save the poetâs life.

Without philosophy we often go astray and pay the penalty.

If your land is strong, nothing terrifies the sailors and you (sg.) ought to praise your great fortune.

You (pl.) often see the penalty of my anger and warn me.

The ancient gate is large.

Catullus Bids His Girlfriend Farewell

Puella mea mÄ nÅn amat. ValÄ, puella! Catullus obdÅ«rat: poÄta puellam nÅn amat, puellam nÅn vocat, fÅrmam puellae nÅn laudat, puellae rosÄs nÅn dat, et puellam nÅn bÄsiat!Äª ra mea est magna! ObdÅ«rÅ, mea puellaâsed sine tÄ nÅn valeÅ.

Â 

Catullus Carm. 8, prose adaptation: We have surviving from Catullus (Gaius Valerius Catullus, ca. 84â54 B.C.) 113 finely crafted poems, at once scholarly but intensely emotional; several are satirical and brazenly targeted at contemporaries like Julius Caesar, Cicero, and Pompey the Great, but most are love poems. Of those amatory poems, some two dozen dramatically chronicle his relationshipâfrom initial infatuation, to torrid romance, to the eventual devastating breakupâwith the mistress whom he calls âLesbia,â but who we are confident was actually Clodia, wife of the Roman senator Quintus Caecilius Metellus Celer. For unadapted excerpts from the original poem, see Capvt XIX below.âobdÅ«rÄre, to be firm, tough; âdurable,â âendure.ââbÄsiÄre, to kiss. âtÄ, you.)

Â 

QUAESTIÅNÄS: Think of this brief passage as a miniature âdramaâ with three scenes; where does each scene begin and end? It might be said that there are two Catulluses here, marked by the shift from first person to third and back to first: where does each shift occur, what is the intended effect, and how does the Catullus of the first and third scenes differ emotionally from the persona he imagines in the second? Which might one suppose, within this dramatic construct, is âthe realâ Catullus?

Catullus Reading His Poems at Lesbiaâs House. Oil on canvas, 1870. Sir Lawrence Alma-Tadema (1836â1912). Private collection.
Private Collection / The Bridgeman Art Library

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Â 

CIL 4.5371 (Reg. IX, near Ins. 8): This scribbler roughly configured his single-word inscription in the form of a ship, with the T representing the mast and the tails of the F, R, and A representing oarsâa whimsical jeu dâesprit seen elsewhere in Pompeian graffiti (cf. Capvt III, below); was the writer hoping for luck, or hailing the goddess Fortuna (to whom there were temples in Rome and who was often depicted holding a shipâs rudder), or both?

FÄlÄ«c<u>lam amat.

Â 

CIL 4.8917: The Pompeian who scrawled this graffito near a doorway in an inn (Reg. III, Ins. 6) struggled with his handwriting: he tried writing the sentence three times, then marked out the first and last versions and saved his second attempt (have you ever had this problem in writing out a sentence yourself?). Spelling was an issue for this writer too; the name of the woman he had in mind was properly âFeliculaâ (a DIMINUTIVE from Lat. fÄlÄ«x, lucky), though we find this same variant form elsewhere in the city, a type of contraction known as SYNCOPE, which here reflects the common tendency in informal speech to drop a short, unaccented vowel occurring in a wordâs penultimate syllable.

ETYMOLOGIA (âEtymologyâ)

Note that the term ETYMOLOGY comes from the Gk. etymos, true, real, and logos, word, meaning. Consequently, the etymology of a word traces the derivation of the word back to its original meaning. Under this heading will be introduced various items not covered by the derivatives listed in the vocabularies, and often including derivatives in Italian, Spanish, and other Romance languages.

PecÅ«nia is connected with pecus, cattle, just as Eng. fee is related to Ger. Vieh, cattle. FortÅ«na derives from fors, chance, accident. Explain the meanings of the following Eng. words on the basis of the Lat. source words in the sentences indicated. Further aid, if needed, can be obtained from a good dictionary; Websterâs New World Dictionary and the American Heritage Dictionary are especially helpful with etymologies, and other resources are available online.

Â 

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, discipulÄ« et discipulae! From the VocÄbula: To do something sub rosÄ is to do it secretly or in confidence (the rose was in antiquity a symbol of secrecy); aqua vÄ«tae, literally, the water of life, is an old Latin phrase for âwhiskeyâ; and a âsinecureâ (from sine + cÅ«ra, care) is an office or position that is largely without responsibility. And hereâs some more conversational Latin:

Â 

Quid hodiÄ agis? How are you today?

Â 

OptimÄ! Great!

PessimÄ! Terrible!

Bene! Good!

Satis bene. So-so or okay.

NÅn bene. Not well.

Et tÅ«? And you?

Â 

Discipulae et discipulÄ«, valÄte!

Pompeii: At the Walls Oil on canvas Stefan Bakalowicz (1857â1947)
public domain

CAPVT III

Second Declension Masculine Nouns and Adjectives; Apposition; Word Order

GRAMMATICA

THE SECOND DECLENSION

The second declension follows the rule you learned for the first: base + endings. The endings differ from those of the first declension, except in the dative and ablative plural, and second declension nouns are regularly either masculine or neuter; masculine nouns and adjectives are introduced below, neuters in Capvt IV. Most second declension masculines have a nominative singular ending in -us, while a few end in -er.

Masculines in -er

Some second declension -er masculines, like puer, retain the -e- in the base, while most, like ager, drop the -e-, hence the importance of learning the genitive as part of the vocabulary entry (though a knowledge of such English derivatives as âpuerileâ and âagricultureâ will also help you remember the base). Similar is the unique -ir masculine, vir, virÄ«, man. The underlined forms below are the ones that call for special attention; the adjective magnus is added for the sake of comparison: note, e.g., the combinations puer magnus, a big boy, and Å puer magne, O big boy.

Comments on Vocatives and Other Case Endings

Note that some second declension endings are identical to those in the first (the dative/ablative plural in -Ä«s) and others are similar (e.g., -am/-um accusative singular, -Ärum/-Årum genitive plural, and -Äs/-Ås accusative plural). As in the first declension, some second declension endings are used for different cases (e.g., what different cases may the forms amÄ«cÄ«, amÄ«cÅ, and amÄ«cÄ«s represent?); again, for these ambiguous forms word order and context are essential aids to reading comprehension and translation. You recall that an adjective must agree with the noun it modifies in number, gender, and case; but note from ager magnus and magne that their endings may not always be spelled the same, nor even must they be of the same declension, as seen, e.g., in agricola RÅmÄnus: since the noun for âfarmer,â although first declension, is masculine, a masculine (second declension) adjective is required.

It is also important to note that only in the singular of -us nouns and adjectives of the second declension does the vocative ever differ in spelling from the nominative: singular amÄ«cus, amÄ«ce; but plural amÄ«cÄ«, amÄ«cÄ«. Nouns in -ius (e.g., fÄ«lius, son, Vergilius, Vergil) and the adjective meus, my, have a single -Ä« in the vocative singular: mÄ« fÄ«lÄ«, my son; Å VergilÄ«, O Vergil.

APPOSITION

An APPOSITIVE (from ad at/next to, + pÅnÅ, positus, to set/position) is a noun that is âpositioned next toâ another noun as an explanatory equivalent:

GÄium, fÄ«lium meum, in agrÅ videÅ. I see Gaius, my son, in the field.

In this sentence fÄ«lium is said to be âin apposition withâ GÄium. Nouns in apposition always agree in case, usually in number, and often in gender as well, and an appositive is commonly separated from the preceding noun by commas.

WORD ORDER

Typical word order in a simple Latin sentence or clause is: (1) the subject and its modifiers, (2) indirect object and modifiers, (3) direct object and modifiers, (4) adverbial words or phrases, (5) verb. Remember, too, that adjectives and genitive nouns commonly follow the words they modify. However, although these patterns should be kept in mind, exceptions to these rules, especially for purposes of variety and emphasis, were common in classical Latin. In fact, in highly inflected languages like Latin, the basic sense of a clause is somewhat independent of word order, thanks to the inflectional endings, which tell so much about the interrelationship of the words in a sentence.

On the other hand, in English, where inflections are relatively few, sense commonly depends on stricter conventions of word order. Compare the following English sentence and the four Latin versions, which all mean essentially the same despite the differences of word order:

(1) The boy is giving the pretty girl a rose.

(2) Puer puellae bellae rosam dat.

(3) Bellae puellae puer rosam dat.

(4) Bellae puellae rosam dat puer.

(5) Rosam puer puellae bellae dat.

Whatever the order of the words in the Latin sentence, the sense remains the same (though the emphasis does vary, the first and last words typically being the most emphatic). Note also that according to its ending, bellae must modify puellae no matter where these words stand. But if you rearrange the words in the English sentence, you alter the sense:

(1) The boy is giving the pretty girl a rose.

(2) The pretty girl is giving the boy a rose.

(3) The girl is giving the boy a pretty rose.

(4) The girl is giving the pretty boy a rose.

(5) The rose is giving the boy a pretty girl.

In all these sentences the same words are used with the same spellings, but the sense of each sentence differs in accordance with the conventions of English word order. Furthermore, where the fifth English sentence is nonsense, the final Latin sentence, in much the same order, makes perfectly good senseâand lends emphasis to the direct object, the gift the boy is giving, i.e., the rose.

VOCÄBVLA

This chapterâs VocÄbula list introduces several second declension masculine nouns. As is clear from a word like ager, agrÄ«, a nounâs base is best determined by dropping its genitive ending, and the surest way to identify an adjectiveâs base is by dropping the nominative ending from the feminine form. Remember that while the gender of a noun is fixedâi.e., nouns regularly have but a single gender (there are some obvious exceptions, like the Latin word for âcitizen,â which could be either masculine or feminine)âadjectives have all three genders. As you learn these new words, test your mastery by declining a noun-adjective pair such as vir avÄrus or populus RÅmÄnus and comparing your work with the paradigms.

Nouns and adjectives generally follow the patterns described in this book, but there are occasional exceptions, like these in the list below: fÄ«lia, daughter, has the dative and ablative plural fÄ«liÄbus, as distinct from fÄ«liÄ«s, the dative and ablative of fÄ«lius, son; the adjective paucÄ«, paucae, pauca, few, since it denotes plurality, has only plural forms.

As always, memorize the entire entry for each new word, and review words from the preceding two chapters as well; using vocabulary cards or cumulative vocabulary lists will help with comprehensive review, but ideally you should learn and review all chapter vocabularies by listening to the CDs or the audio lists at www.wheelockslatin.com. When using the online audio, look closely at the spelling of each word, including macrons, then click on it and listen to it, say the word aloud, read and think about its English meanings (which appear on the web-page with the full Latin entry), then look/click/listen and repeat aloud again. Learn Latin as you did your native language, or any modern language you may have studied, i.e., through your eyes, your ears, and your mouth; and when studying vocabulary, semper audÄ« et prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!

Â 

Ã¡ger, Ã¡grÄ«, m., field, farm (agrarian, agriculture, agronomy)

agrÃcola, agrÃcolae, m., farmer (cf. ager)

amcus, amcÄ«, m., and amca, amcae, m., friend (amicable, amiable, amity; cf. amÅ)

fmina, fminae, f., woman (female, feminine, femininity)

flia, fliae, f., dat. and abl. pl.

fÄ«libus, daughter (filiation, affiliation, affiliate, filial)

flius, fliÄ«, m., son (for derivatives, see fÄ«lia)

nÃºmerus, nÃºmerÄ«, m., number (numeral, innumerable, enumerate)

pÃ³pulus, pÃ³pulÄ«, m., the people, a people, a nation (populace, population, popularity, popularize, populous)

pÃºer, pÃºerÄ«, m., boy; pl. boys, children (puerile, puerility, puerperous)

sapiÃ©ntia, sapiÃ©ntiae, f., wisdom (sapience, sapient, sage, savant)

vir, vÃrÄ«, m., man, hero (virtue, virile, triumvirate; not virulent)

avrus, avra, avrum, greedy, avaricious (avarice, avariciousness, avid)

paÃºcÄ«, paÃºcae, paÃºca, usually pl., few, a few (paucity, pauciloquent, poco)

RÅmnus, RÅmna, RÅmnum, Roman (Romance, romance, romantic, romanticism, Romanesque, Romania)

dÄ, prep. + abl., down from, from; concerning, about; as a prefix dÄ- with such meanings as down, away, aside, out, off (demote, from dÄ-moveÅ; decline, descend)

in, prep. + abl., in, on; also as a prefix (induce, inscribe, invoke; for dÄ-, in-, and other prefixes, see App., Some Etymological Aids)

hÃ³diÄ, adv., today (hodiernal)

sÃ©mper, adv., always (sempiternal)

hÃ¡beÅ, habre, hÃ¡buÄ«, hÃ¡bitum, to have, hold, possess; consider, regard (in-habit and in-hibit, âhold inâ; ex-hibit, âhold forthâ; habit, habitat)

sÃ¡tiÅ, satire, sativÄ«, satitum, to satisfy, sate (satiate, insatiable, satiety, satisfaction)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After memorizing the paradigms and VocÄbula and checking your mastery with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, find each second declension noun in the following readings and identify its case, number, and function; in particular, identify any nouns used as appositives (easy to spot as they are set off by commas). Remember always to read aloud and for comprehension, before attempting a translation; let the chapterâs observations on word order assist, and, as always, pay close attention to word endings. Since Latin often omits POSSESSIVES where English would normally employ them, you should in translation routinely supply them, just as you do articles; e.g., for natural English idiom you should supply âhisâ with fÄ«liÄbus in Ex. 7 and âyourâ with amÄ«cÅs in S.A. 10.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

FÄ«lium nautae RÅmÄnÄ« in agrÄ«s vidÄmus.

PuerÄ« puellÄs hodiÄ vocant.

Sapientiam amÄ«cÄrum tuÄrum, Å fÄ«lia mea, semper laudat.

MultÄ« virÄ« et fÄminae philosophiam antÄ«quam cÅnservant.

SÄ« Ä«ra valet, Å mÄ« fÄ«lÄ«, saepe errÄmus et poenÄs damus.

FortÅ«na virÅs magnÅs amat.

Agricola fÄ«liÄbus pecÅ«niam dat.

Without a few friends life is not strong.

Today you have much fame in your country.

We see great fortune in your daughtersâ lives, my friend.

He always gives my daughters and sons roses.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

DÄbÄtis, amÄ«cÄ«, dÄ populÅ RÅmÄnÅ cÅgitÄre. (Cicero.)

MaecÄnÄs, amÄ«cus AugustÄ«, mÄ in numerÅ amÄ«cÅrum habet. (Horace.âMaecÄnÄs, a name in nom. sg.; see Capvt I reading passage.âAugustus, -Ä«, m.)

Gaius Maecenas. Palazzo dei Conservatori Rome, Italy.
Alinari / Art Resource, NY

Libellus meus et sententiae meae vÄ«tÄs virÅrum monent. (Phaedrus.âlibellus, -Ä«, m., little book; âlibel,â âlibelous.â)

PaucÄ« virÄ« sapientiae student. (Cicero.âstudÄre + dat., to be eager for; âstudent,â âstudious.â)

FortÅ«na adversa virum magnae sapientiae nÅn terret. (Horace.âadversus, -a, -um, = Eng.; âadversary,â âadversity.â)

CimÅn, vir magnae fÄmae, magnam benevolentiam habet. (Nepos.âCimÅn, proper name nom. sg.âbenevolentia, -ae, f. = Eng.)

Semper avÄrus eget. (*Horace.âavÄrus = vir avÄrus.âegÄre, to be in need.)

NÅ«lla cÅpia pecÅ«niae avÄrum virum satiat. (Seneca.ânÅ«llus, -a, -um, no; ânull,â âannulment.ââcÅpia, -ae, f., abundance; âcopious,â âcornucopia.â)

PecÅ«nia avÄrum irrÄ«tat, nÅn satiat. (Publilius Syrus.âirrÄ«tÄre, to excite, exasperate; âirritable,â âirritate.â)

SÄcrÄtÄ amÄ«cÅs admonÄ; laudÄ palam. (*Publilius Syrus.âsÄcrÄtÄ, adv., in secret; âsecret,â âdiscrete.ââadmonÄ: = monÄ.âpalam, adv., openly.)

Modum tenÄre dÄbÄmus. (*Seneca.âmodus, -Ä«, m., moderation; âmode,â âmodify.ââtenÄre, to hold, maintain; âtenable,â âtenant.â)

The Grass Is Always Greener

Agricola et vÄ«tam et fortÅ«nam nautae saepe laudat; nauta magnam fortÅ«nam et vÄ«tam poÄtae saepe laudat; et poÄta vÄ«tam et agrÅs agricolae laudat. Sine philosophiÄ avÄrÄ« virÄ« dÄ pecÅ«niÄ semper cÅgitant: multam pecÅ«niam habent, sed nihil virum avÄrum satiat.

Â 

Horace Sat. 1.1: Freely adapted into prose from one of Horaceâs early satires (which he titled SermÅnÄs, Conversations), this passage elaborates upon a theme sounded in several of the preceding Sententiae AntÄ«quae.âetâ¦ et: you may be tempted to translate the first et as and; as a coordinating conjunction, however, et must connect parallel elements, and so it cannot join the nom. agricola with the acc. vÄ«tam but should instead be construed with the two dir. objs. vÄ«tam and fortÅ«nam.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Horace here comments on a common human failing. What is that flaw, and what does the satirist regard as its cause?âdo you agree with his assessment of cause and effect?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

G. IÅ«lius Trophimus

Â 

Venustus

Â 

CIL 4.7309b (Reg. I, Ins. 8, a caupÅna, inn, tavern) and 8020 (Reg. I, Ins. 6): Ancient Romans, like modern Americans, loved to write or paint their own and othersâ names on walls, sometimes with âportraits.â Gaius Julius Trophimus, to judge from the drawing seen here, was a handsome young man, one of several figures shown in a ritual procession; his full name typifies the nomenclature of male Roman citizens, consisting of a given name or PRAENOMEN (here âGaius,â regularly abbreviated âGâ or even more commonly âCâ), the family (gÄns) name or NOMEN (here âJulius,â which the scribe at first misspelled âJuliausâ and then corrected by marking out the superfluous A), and a COGNOMEN, a sort of nickname, often referring to some physical or mental trait and sometimes identifying a branch of a family (âTrophimusâ was a Greek word meaning âfoster child,â suggesting that the man here may have been a lÄ«bertÄ«nus, or âfreedman,â of the Julius family). Venustus was a relatively common cognomen, related to the name of the goddess Venus and meaning âCharmingâ or âAttractiveâ; the ship motif is seen in several other Pompeian graffiti, including the Fortuna graffito in Capvt II above.

ETYMOLOGIA

Following are some of the Romance words you can recognize based on your study of this chapterâs VocÄbula:

Occitan (Occ.) is another Romance language spoken, chiefly as a second language, only in the south of France (in a dialect known as ProvenÃ§al), Monaco, and some districts of northern Spain and the Italian Alps; you too can read Occitan (!), or at least these words from Old Occ. (the language of the troubadour literature of the 11thâ12th centuries): amic, filh, nmbre, pople, pauc, smpre, avr (loss of initial h- and the shift from b to v were common in the evolution of the Romance languages from Lat.), and de. And here are the Romanian (Rom.) derivatives for some of these same words; you can easily determine which is which: amic, fiu, numr, popor, avea, de.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, amÄ«cae et amÄ«cÄ«! Quid hodiÄ agitis? Well, if you are in the Coast Guard, you are semper parÄtus, always prepared, or if youâre a U.S. Marine, itâs semper fidÄlis, always faithful (from the same Latin root as âFido,â your trusty hound). These are just two (suggested by this chapterâs VocÄbula) of countless Latin mottoes representing a wide range of modern institutions and organizations. ValÄte et habÄte fortÅ«nam bonam!

A caupona on the Via dellâAbbondanza, with its serving counter opening onto the street Pompeii, Italy
Robert I. Curtis

CAPVT IV

Second Declension Neuters; Adjectives; Present of Sum; Predicate Nominatives; Substantives

GRAMMATICA

SECOND DECLENSION NEUTERS

In the first declension there are no nouns of neuter gender but in the second declension there are many. They are declined as follows, again by adding endings to a base:

Second declension neuter endings are the same as the masculine, except that the nominative, accusative, and vocative are identical to one another (true of all neuters of all declensions): -um in the singular, -a in the plural. Word order and context will enable you to distinguish between a neuter noun used as a subject and one used as an object (vocatives are even more easily distinguished, of course, as they are regularly set off from the rest of the sentence by commas). The plural -a ending might be mistaken for a first declension nominative singular, so you can see again how important it is to memorize vocabulary entries completely, including the gender of nouns. In spelling the genitive singular of neuter (and masculine) nouns with a base ending in -i- the Romans sometimes dropped that vowel, e.g., cÅnsilÄ« for cÅnsiliÄ« (see above) and fÄ«lÄ« for fÄ«liÄ«; in this book, however, the stem vowel is regularly retained. Second declension neuter nouns will be abbreviated in the notes as follows: dÅnum, -Ä« (= dÅnum, dÅnÄ«), n.

DECLENSION AND AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES

The paradigms of magnus presented in Capita IIâIV illustrate the point that, while the base remains constant, the adjective has masculine, feminine, and neuter endings to match the gender of the noun it modifies, with which it likewise agrees in number and case. The full declension of magnus below provides an overview of the first two declensions.

Such first/second declension adjectives will be abbreviated in the notes as follows: magnus, -a, -um, meus, -a, -um, etc.

PRESENT INFINITIVE AND INDICATIVE OF Sum

As the English verb âto beâ is irregular, so is the important Latin verb sum. Although the personal endings are familiar, the stem varies so much in the present tense that the forms must be memorized. Note that, since sum is an INTRANSITIVE LINKING VERB (i.e., often connecting its subject with a predicate noun or adjective), we do not refer to its voice as either active or passive.

Â 

Present infinitive: esse, to be

Present Indicative:

Singular

Plural

1. sum, I am

sÃºmus, we are

2. es, you are

Ã©stis, you are

3. est, he (she, it) is, there is

sunt, they are, there are

Â 

Some sample sentences: FÄ«lia tua est bona, Your daughter is good. AmÄ«cÄ« meÄ« estis, You are my friends. Sunt multÄ« agricolae in agrÄ«s, There are many farmers (many farmers are) in the fields.

PREDICATE NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES

As an intransitive verb, sum cannot take a direct object but instead, like other linking verbs to be introduced later, serves to connect the subject of a clause with a noun or adjective in the PREDICATE (the main divisions of a sentence are the subject, with its modifiers, and the predicate, which consists of the verb and all its dependent words and phrases). Such predicate nouns and adjectivesâor PREDICATE NOMINATIVES, as they are often calledâare connected or even equated with the subject by the linking verb, and so they naturally agree with the subject in number and case (usually the nominative, of course) and, wherever possible, in gender as well. In the case of compound subjects of different gender, a predicate adjective usually agrees in gender with the nearest, though the masculine often predominates. Study the following examples:

Vergilius est amÄ«cus AugustÄ«. Vergil is the friend of Augustus.

Vergilius est poÄta. Vergil is a poet.

Vergilius est magnus. Vergil is great.

FÄma VergiliÄ« est magna. The fame of Vergil is great.

AmÄ«cae sunt bonae. The girlfriends are good.

PuerÄ« dÄbent esse bonÄ«. The boys ought to be good.

Puer et puella sunt bonÄ«. The boy and girl are good.

DÅnum est magnum. The gift is large.

DÅna sunt magna. The gifts are large.

Sumus RÅmÄnÄ«. We are Romans (Roman men).

Sumus RÅmÄnae. We are Roman women.

SUBSTANTIVE ADJECTIVES

You learned about ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES (e.g., vir RÅmÄnus and fÄmina bona) in Capvt II, and PREDICATE ADJECTIVES have just been introduced (porta est antÄ«qua). The Romans also often used an adjective as a SUBSTANTIVE, i.e., in place of a noun, just as we do in English (âthe meek shall inherit the earthââi.e., âthe meek peopleâ). Such adjectives can sometimes be translated as English substantives, but for natural idiom you will often need to supply man or men, woman or women, thing or things, in accordance with the wordâs number and gender; compare the following examples:

BonÄs saepe laudant. They often praise the good women.

MultÄ« sunt stultÄ«. Many (men) are foolish.

PuerÄ« mala nÅn amant. The boys do not love bad things.

PaucÄ« dÄ perÄ«culÅ cÅgitant. Few (men) are thinking about the danger.

VOCÄBVLA

The vocabulary for this chapter introduces several neuter nouns, easily identified by the nominative -um and of course by the gender abbreviation ân.â; the neuter noun nihil (reintroduced from Capvt I, now that you understand the concepts of declension and gender) is identified as INDECLINABLE, meaning that the one form could be used as subject, direct object, etc. VocÄbula itself, by the way, is the plural of vocÄbulum, a neuter noun originally meaning what we âcallâ (from vocÄre) a person or thing and ultimately giving us our word âvocabulary.â Practice your mastery of neuters by declining a noun-adjective pair from the list (e.g., remedium bonum) and checking your work against the paradigms provided above. Memorize the entire entry for each new word, and review words from the preceding three chapters as well, ideally by listening to the CDs or the audio lists at www.wheelockslatin.com.

Â 

bsium, bsiÄ«, n., kiss (basiate)

bÃ©llum, bÃ©llÄ«, n., war (bellicose, belligerent, rebel, rebellion, revel)

cÅnsÃlium, cÅnsÃliÄ«, n., plan, purpose, counsel, advice, judgment, wisdom (counsel, counselor, consiliate, reconcile)

cra, crae, f., care, attention, caution, anxiety (cure, curator, curious, curiosity, curio, curettage, sinecure)

dnum, dnÄ«, n., gift, present (donate, donation, condone; cf. dÅ)

exÃtium, exÃtiÄ«, n., destruction, ruin (exit)

magÃster, magÃstrÄ«, m., and magÃstra, magÃstrae, f., schoolmaster or schoolmistress, teacher, master or mistress (magistrate, magistracy, magisterial, maestro, mastery, mister, miss; cf. magnus)

mÃ³ra, mÃ³rae, f., delay (moratorium, demur)

nÃhil, indeclinable, n., nothing (nihilist, annihilate)

Ã³culus, Ã³culÄ«, m., eye (ocular, oculist, binoculars, monocle)

offÃcium, offÃciÄ«, n., duty, service (office, officer, official, officious)

tium, tiÄ«, n., leisure, peace (otiose, negotiate)

perculum, perculÄ«, n., danger, risk (peril, perilous, imperil, parlous)

remÃ©dium, remÃ©diÄ«, n., cure, remedy (remedial, irremediable, remediation)

bÃ©llus, bÃ©lla, bÃ©llum, pretty, handsome, charming (belle, beau, beauty, embellish, belladonna, belles-lettres). Do not confuse with bellum, war.

bÃ³nus, bÃ³na, bÃ³num, good, kind (bonus, bonanza, bonny, bounty, bona fide)

hÅ«mnus, hÅ«mna, hÅ«mnum, pertaining to man, human; humane, kind; refined, cultivated (humanity, humanitarian, humanism, the humanities, humanist, inhuman, superhuman)

mÃ¡lus, mÃ¡la, mÃ¡lum, bad, wicked, evil (malice, malicious, malign, malignant, malaria, malady, malefactor, malfeasance, malevolent; mal-, a prefix as in maladjustment, malnutrition, maltreat, malapropos)

pÃ¡rvus, pÃ¡rva, pÃ¡rvum, small, little (parvovirus, parvule, parvicellular)

stÃºltus, stÃºlta, stÃºltum, foolish; stÃºltus, stÃºltÄ«, m., a fool (stultify, stultification)

vrus, vra, vrum, true, real, proper (verify, verisimilitude, very, veracity)

iÃºvÅ (or Ã¡diuvÅ), iuvre, ivÄ«, itum, to help, aid, assist; please (adjutant, coadjutant, aid, aide-de-camp)

sum, Ã©sse, fÃºÄ«, futrum, to be, exist (essence, essential, future, futurity)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Be sure you have memorized the paradigms and VocÄbula, practiced declining some of the new neuter nouns and adjectives, and completed some of the Self-Tutorial Exercises, before attempting the readings; find some second declension nouns in the sentences, and identify their case, number, gender, and function (and beware of neuters ending in -a: theyâre plural, of course, but students often confuse them with first declension singulars in -a); also identify all forms of sum, esse in the readings, and any predicate nominatives and substantives. Finally, as you read the sentences, the Cicero passage (listen to this on the CDs, if you have them), and the graffito, read aloud and for comprehension, before translating. And always choose meanings for words that best suit the context; e.g., cares/worries/anxieties would be a better choice than attentions or cautions for cÅ«rÄ«s in Ex. 5, and plan makes more sense than wisdom for cÅnsiliÅ in Ex. 6.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Åtium est bonum, sed Åtium multÅrum est parvum.

Bella (from bellum, -Ä«, n.) sunt mala et multa perÄ«cula habent.

Officium nautam dÄ ÅtiÅ hodiÄ vocat.

PaucÄ« virÄ« multÄs fÅrmÄs perÄ«culÄ« in pecÅ«niÄ videntânÅn dÄbÄmus esse avÄrÄ«!.

SÄ« multam pecÅ«niam habÄtis, saepe nÅn estis sine cÅ«rÄ«s.

Puellae magistram dÄ cÅnsiliÅ malÅ sine morÄ monent.

Å magne poÄta, sumus vÄrÄ« amÄ«cÄ«; mÄ iuvÄ, amÄbÅ tÄ!

FÄmina et agrÅs et portam agricolae videt.

You (sg.) are in great danger.

My sonâs opinions are often foolish.

The daughters and sons of great men and women are not always great.

Without wisdom the sailorsâ good fortune is nothing and they are paying the penalty.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

FortÅ«na caeca est. (*Cicero.âcaecus, -a, -um, blind; âCecil.â)

SÄ« perÄ«cula sunt vÄra, Ä«nfortÅ«nÄtus es. (Terence.âÄ«nfortÅ«nÄtus, -a, -um, unfortunate.)

SalvÄ, Å amÄ«ce; vir bonus es. (Terence.)

NÅn bella est fÄma fÄ«liÄ« tuÄ«. (Horace.)

ErrÄre est hÅ«mÄnum. (Seneca.âAs an indecl. n. verbal noun, an infin. can be the subj. of a verb.)

Nihil est omnÄ«nÅ beÄtum. (HoraceâomnÄ«nÅ, adv., wholly.âbeÄtus, -a, -um, happy, fortunate; âbeatify,â âbeatitude.â)

Remedium Ä«rae est mora. (Seneca.)

Bonus Daphnis, amÄ«cus meus, Åtium et vÄ«tam agricolae amat. (Vergil.âDaphnis is a pastoral character.)

MagistrÄ« parvÄ«s puerÄ«s crÅ«stula et dÅna saepe dant. (Horace.âcrÅ«stulum, -Ä«, n., cookie; âcrouton,â âcrustacean.â)

AmÄ«cam meam magis quam oculÅs meÅs amÅ. (Terence.âmagis quam, more than.)

SalvÄ, mea bella puellaâdÄ mihi multa bÄsia, amÄbÅ tÄ! (Catullus.âmihi, dat., to me.)

ÄªnfÄ«nÄ«tus est numerus stultÅrum. (Ecclesiastes.âÄ«nfÄ«nÄ«tus, -a, -um = Eng.; âinfinity.â)

Officium mÄ vocat. (Persius.)

MalÄ« sunt in nostrÅ numerÅ et dÄ exitiÅ bonÅrum virÅrum cÅgitant. BonÅs adiuvÄte; cÅnservÄte patriam et populum RÅmÄnum. (Cicero.ânostrÅ, our; ânostrum,â âpaternoster.â)

Cicero Musei Capitolini Rome, Italy
Bildarchiv Preussischer Kulturbesitz / Art Resource, NY

The Rarity of Friendship

PaucÄ« virÄ« vÄrÅs amÄ«cÅs habent, et paucÄ« sunt dignÄ«. AmÄ«citia vÄra est praeclÄra, et omnia praeclÄra sunt rÄra. MultÄ« virÄ« stultÄ« dÄ pecÅ«niÄ semper cÅgitant, paucÄ« dÄ amÄ«cÄ«s; sed errant: possumus valÄre sine multÄ pecÅ«niÄ, sed sine amÄ«citiÄ nÅn valÄmus et vÄ«ta est nihil.

Â 

Cicero AmÄ«c. 21.79â80: The Roman lawyer and statesman Cicero (Marcus Tullius Cicero, 106â43 B.C.) is one of the best known figures from the ancient world, thanks in large measure to the enormous number of his writings that have survived, including hundreds of letters on both political and personal matters, dozens of political and courtroom speeches, and several philosophical treatises. Written in 45 B.C. when Cicero was in his early 60âs, the DÄ AmÄ«citiÄ, On Friendship, remains one of the most popular and influential of those philosophical works.âdignus, -a, -um, worthy, deserving; âdeign,â âdignify.â amÄ«citia, -ae, f., friendship.âomnia: all [things]; âomnipotent,â âomniscient.ââpraeclÄrus, -a, -um, splendid, remarkable; âclarity.âârÄrus, -a, -um = Eng.; ârarefy,â ârarity.ââpossumus: we are able; âposse,â âpossible.â)

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What observations does Cicero make here on the rarity of friendship, and how is his perspective similar to that of Horace in the passage from his satires which you read in the preceding chapter?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

PrÄ«me, av<Ä>, valÄ.

Â 

CIL 4.8615: Salutation to a friend named âPrimus,â a common Roman cognomen, from a column in the colonnade around the Large Palaestra near the amphitheater in Pompeiiâs Region II; we have seen avÄ before, also in its contracted form avâ, in the graffito in Capvt I; and avÄ et valÄ was a widely used expression of greeting and farewell, best known today from the poet Catullusâ lament (in his poem 101) to his deceased brother: frÄter, avÄ atque [=et] valÄ. Seen in the drawing is the common use of the letter form || for E.

ETYMOLOGIA

Some Romance derivatives:

Here are some of the Old Occ. derivatives: perilh, ofÃci, bos, vr, maÃ¯stre, bel, uma, beat, bais, rar. And cf. Rom.: ochi, pericol, oficiu, bun, magistru, uman, beat (in Rom. the word actually means âdrunkâ!), rar.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄ, amÄ«ce (or amÄ«ca)! There are countless Latin expressions in current English usage (remember sub rosÄ?); one of them, related to an adjective encountered in this chapter, is rÄra avis, literally a rare bird, but used for an exceptional or unusual individual or a rarity. The student of Latin in the United States was becoming a rÄra avis in the 1960s and early 70s, but there has been a remarkable resurgence of interest since then. âOculus,â an architectural term for a circular opening in the apex of a dome, or a round window, is one of thousands of English words that come directly from Latin with no spelling change at allâan imaginative derivation, since Latin oculus, as seen in this chapterâs VocÄbula, means eye. ErgÅ, therefore, is another Latin word that has come straight into English; ergo, you now know what Descartes meant in his Discourse on Method when he said cÅgitÅ ergÅ sum. Semper cÅgitÄ, amÄ«ce, et valÄ!

CAPVT V

First and Second Conjugations: Future and Imperfect; Adjectives in -er

GRAMMATICA

THE FUTURE AND IMPERFECT TENSES

The Romans indicated future time in the first two conjugations by inserting the future TENSE SIGN (-bi- in most forms) between the present stem and the personal endings. The tense sign -bÄ- was similarly employed (in all four conjugations) for the imperfect tense, a past tense generally equivalent to the English past progressive. Along with the present tense, the future and imperfect make up the PRESENT SYSTEM, all of whose forms, as seen in the following paradigms, are based on the present stem:

Future and Imperfect Active of LaudÅ and MoneÅ

Future
Singular

Imperfect

1. laud-bÅ, I will /shall praise

laudba-m, I was praising, kept praising,
Â Â Â  used to praise, (often/always/usually)
Â Â Â  praised

2. laud-bi-s, you will praise

laud-bÄ-s, you were praising, etc.

3. laud-bi-t, he, she, it will praise

laud-ba-t, he was praising, etc.

Â 

Plural

Â 

1. laudbimus, we will /shall praise

laudÄbmus, we were praising, etc.

2. laudbitis, you will praise

laudÄbtis, you were praising, etc.

3. laudbunt, they will praise

laudbant, they were praising, etc.

Â 

Singular

Â 

1. mon-bÅ, I will/shall advise

mon-ba-m, I was advising, kept advising,
Â Â Â  used to advise, (often/always/usually)
Â Â Â  advised

2. mon-bi-s, you will advise

mon-bÄ-s, you were advising, etc.

3. mon-bi-t, he, she, it will advise

mon-ba-t, he was advising, etc.

Â 

Plural

Â 

1. monbimus, we will/shall advise

monÄbmus, we were advising, etc.

2. monbitis, you will advise

monÄbtis, you were advising, etc.

3. monbunt, they will advise

monbant, they were advising, etc.

Â 

Notice the vowel change in the first person singular and third plural future tense sign (chant out loud bÅ/bi/bi/bi/bi/buâsounds like baby talk!), and the shortened -a- in the first and third singular and third plural of the imperfect (remember that vowels which are normally long are regularly shortened before -m, -r, and -t at the end of a word, and before nt or another vowel in any position).

The INFIXES -bi- and -bÄ- (with the distinctive -i- and -Ä-) can be easily remembered as signs of the future and imperfect tenses by associating them with the English auxiliary verbs âwillâ and âwas,â which are also spelled with -i- and -a- and are generally used to translate those two tenses. Note that, where English requires three separate words for the ideas he will praise or he was praising, Latin requires only a single word with the three components of stem + tense sign + personal ending (laudÄ + bi + t = praise-will-he or laudÄ-ba-t = praising-was-he).

Translation

Translation of the future tense, usually with will (shall is less common in current English), should present no difficulty: dÄ amÄ«cÅ cÅgitÄbÅ, I will think about my friend; multam sapientiam habÄbunt, they will have much wisdom. The imperfect tense commonly indicates an action that was continuing or progressive in the past, as suggested by the term âimperfectâ (from imperfectum, not completed), including actions that were going on, repeated, habitual, attempted, or just beginning. All the following translations are possible, depending upon the context in which the sentence appears:

Nautam monÄbam. I was warning (kept warning, used to warn, tried to warn, was beginning to warn) the sailor.

PoÄtae vÄ«tam agricolae laudÄbant. Poets used to praise the farmerâs life.

Magister puerÅs vocÄbat. The teacher kept calling (was calling) the boys.

Occasionally the imperfect may be translated as a simple past tense, especially with an adverb that in itself indicates continuing action: nautam saepe monÄbam, I often warned (kept warning) the sailor; magister puellÄs semper laudÄbat, the teacher always praised (used to praise) the girls.

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSION IN -er

There are several first/second declension adjectives whose masculine nominative singular ends with -er rather than -us; some, like the noun retain the -e- in the base, and others, like the noun ager, drop the -e-. This should present no difficulty, since, as with all adjectives, the base, whether with or without the -e-, appears in the feminine and the neuter nominative forms, as seen in the following examples; likewise, just as with the -er nouns, your familiarity with derivatives can assist in remembering the base (âliberalâ from lÄ«ber, âpulchritudeâ from pulcher, âmiserableâ from miser, etc.).

Â 

lÄ«ber

lÄ«ber-a

lÄ«ber-um

free

pulcher

pulchr-a

pulchr-um

beautiful

Â 

The rest of the paradigm continues with the base and the regular endings:

For the singular of these samples fully declined, see the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, ADJECTIVESâDECLENSIONS, and remember to refer to this section of the Appendix whenever reviewing declensions and conjugations.

VOCÄBVLA

The VocÄbula list for this chapter, as always, includes in parentheses at the end of most entries a number of English words derived from the Latin term; to boost your English Word Power (!), always take note of these derivativesâand see if you can think of others. Nearly all Latin nouns are declined on the principle of base + endings; a few, however, like satis, enough, in the list below, are indeclinable, a concept discussed in connection with nihil in the previous chapterâs vocabulary. Satis is remarkably versatile, in fact, as it can function not only as a noun, when it is often construed with a genitive, as in satis pecÅ«niae, enough (of) money, but also as an adjective, meaning sufficient, and even an adverb, sufficiently. The conjunction igitur, therefore, is identified below as POSTPOSITIVE, meaning that it ordinarily does not appear as the first word of a sentence, but instead is positioned (positum) after (post) the first word or phrase. TÄ, like mÄ (Capvt I), is the form of the accusative and ablative cases; the other forms of these personal pronouns are introduced in Capvt XI. As you learn the newly introduced verbs, test your mastery by conjugating one or two of them in all three PRESENT SYSTEM tenses, then comparing your work with the paradigms; practice declining a noun-adjective pair too, such as animus noster or caelum pulchrumâor both!

Â 

adulÄscÃ©ntia, adulÄscÃ©ntiae, f., youth, young manhood; youthfulness (adolescence, adolescent)

Ã¡nimus, Ã¡nimÄ«, m., soul, spirit, mind; Ã¡nimÄ«, Ã¡nimrum, high spirits, pride, courage (animus, animosity, magnanimous, unanimous, pusillanimous)

caÃ©lum, caÃ©lÄ«, n., sky, heaven (ceiling, celestial, Celeste, cerulean)

cÃºlpa, cÃºlpae, f., fault, blame (cf. culpÅ below; culpable, culprit, exculpate, inculpate)

glria, glriae, f., glory, fame (glorify, glorification, glorious, inglorious)

vÃ©rbum, vÃ©rbÄ«, n., word (verb, adverb, verbal, verbiage, verbose, proverb)

tÄ, abl. and acc. sg., you; yourself; cf. mÄl

ber, lbera, lberum, free (liberal, liberality, libertine)

nÃ³ster, nÃ³stra, nÃ³strum, our, ours (nostrum, paternoster)

pÃºlcher, pÃºlchra, pÃºlchrum, beautiful, handsome; fine (pulchritude, pulchritudinous)

snus, sna, snum, sound, healthy, sane (sanity, sanitary, sanitation, sanitarium, insane)

Ãgitur, conj., postpositive, therefore, consequently

-ne, interrog. suffix attached to the first word of a sentence, typically the verb or another word on which the question hinges, to introduce a question whose answer is uncertain. (For other types of direct questions, see nÅnne and num in Capvt XL.)

prÃ³pter, prep. + acc., on account of, because of (post hoc, ergo propter hoc, âafter this, therefore on account of thisââa type of fallacious argument in logic)

crÄs, adv., tomorrow (procrastinate, procrastination)

heri, adv., yesterday

quÃ¡ndÅ, interrog. and rel. adv. and conj., when; sÄ« quÃ¡ndÅ, if ever

sÃ¡tis, indecl. noun, adj., and adv., enough, sufficient (-ly) (cf. satiÅ; satisfy, satisfactory, satiate, insatiable, sate; assets, from ad, up to + satis)

tum, adv., then, at that time; thereupon, in the next place

cnÅ, cÄnre, cÄnvÄ«, cÄntum, to dine (cenacle)

cÃºlpÅ, culpre, culpvÄ«, culptum, to blame, censure (cf. culpa above)

mÃ¡neÅ, manre, mnsÄ«, mnsum or remÃ¡neÅ, remanre, remnsÄ«, remnsum, to remain, stay, stay behind, abide, continue (mansion, manor, permanent, remnant, immanentâdo not confuse with âimminentâ)

sÃºperÅ, superre, supervÄ«, supertum, to be above (cf. super, adv. and prep. + abl. or acc., above), have the upper hand, surpass; overcome, conquer (superable, insuperable)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

The essential activities for these LÄctiÅ et TrÄnslÄtiÅ sections are to read aloud, read for comprehension, and then translate (listening to the Latin too, if you have the CDs); but for practice identifying the newly introduced verb forms, you should scan the readings for all the verbs and identify the tense, person, number, voice, mood, and whether the verb is first or second conjugation. An important translation tip is to always choose the meaning for a word that best suits the context: in the âThermopylaeâ passage below, e.g., courage would be a better choice for animÄ«s, in view of the military context, than minds or even pride. And donât forget the variety of options for translating the imperfect tense.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Officium lÄ«berÅs virÅs semper vocÄbat.

HabÄbimusne multÅs virÅs et fÄminÄs magnÅrum animÅrum?

PerÄ«cula bellÄ« nÅn sunt parva, sed patria tua tÄ vocÄbit et agricolae adiuvÄbunt.

Propter culpÄs malÅrum patria nostra nÅn valÄbit.

Mora animÅs nostrÅs superÄbat et remedium nÅn habÄbÄmus.

MultÄ« in agrÄ«s heri manÄbant et RÅmÄnÅs iuvÄbant.

PaucÄ« virÄ« dÄ cÅ«rÄ animÄ« cÅgitÄbant.

Propter Ä«ram in culpÄ estis et crÄs poenÄs dabitis.

VÄrum Åtium nÅn habÄs, vir stulte!

Nihil est sine culpÄ; sumus bonÄ«, sÄ« paucÄs habÄmus.

PoÄta amÄ«cae multÄs rosÄs, dÅna pulchra, et bÄsia dabat.

Will war and destruction always remain in our land?

Does money satisfy the greedy man?

Therefore, you (sg.) will save the reputation of our foolish boys.

Money and glory were conquering the soul of a good man.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Invidiam populÄ« RÅmÄnÄ« crÄs nÅn sustinÄbis. (Cicero.âinvidia, -ae, f., dislike; âinvidious,â âenvious.ââsustinÄre, to endure, sustain; âsustenance.â)

PerÄ«culumne igitur heri remanÄbat? (Cicero.)

Angustus animus pecÅ«niam amat. (Cicero.âangustus, -a, -um, narrow; âanguish,â âanxious.â)

SuperÄ animÅs et Ä«ram tuam. (Ovid.)

Culpa est mea, Å amÄ«cÄ«. (Cicero.)

DÄ veniam fÄ«liÅ et fÄ«liÄbus nostrÄ«s. (Terence.âvenia, -ae, f., favor, pardon; âvenial,â âveniality.â)

Propter adulÄscentiam, fÄ«liÄ« meÄ«, mala vÄ«tae nÅn vidÄbÄtis. (Terence.)

AmÄbÅ tÄ, cÅ«rÄ fÄ«liam meam. (Cicero.âcÅ«rÄre, to take care of; âcurative,â âcurator.â)

VÄ«ta hÅ«mÄna est supplicium. (Seneca.âsupplicium, -iÄ«, n., punishment; âsuppliant,â âsupplicate.â)

Satisne sÄnus es? (Terence.)

SÄ« quandÅ satis pecÅ«niae habÄbÅ, tum mÄ cÅnsiliÅ et philosophiae dabÅ. (Seneca.âpecÅ«niae, gen. case.)

Semper glÅria et fÄma tua manÄbunt. (Vergil.)

Vir bonus et perÄ«tus aspera verba poÄtÄrum culpÄbit. (Horace.âperÄ«tus, -a, -um, skillful; âexperiment,â âexpert.ââasper, aspera, asperum, rough, harsh; âasperate,â âexasperate.â)

His Only Guest Was a Real Boar!

NÅn cÄnat sine aprÅ noster, Tite, CaeciliÄnus:

bellum convÄ«vam CaeciliÄnus habet!

*Martial Epig. 7.59: This is the first of several selections included in this book from the Epigrammata of Martial (Marcus Valerius Martialis, A.D. 45â104), who today remains one of the most popular of Roman writers. Most of Martialâs 1500 epigrams are quite short, like this two-line elegiac couplet, with a satirical punch-line at the end, and targeted at specific, but usually fictitious, characters, here the glutton Caecilianus.âTitus: the poemâs addressee, but not its target.âaper, aprÄ«, m., boar, pig.âconvÄ«va, -ae, m., one of a few m. first decl. nouns, dinner-guest; âconvive,â âconvivial.â)

Â 

QUAESTIÅNÄS: What effect does Martial achieve by positioning the subject at the end of the sentence in the epigramâs opening verse? Gluttonyâone of the âseven deadly sinsââwas a frequent target of Roman satire, as was stinginess; who (or what) seems to have been Caecilianusâ only dinner-guest here, and what is the comic image?

Thermopylae: A Soldierâs Humor

âExercitus noster est magnus,â Persicus inquit, âet propter numerum sagittÄrum nostrÄrum caelum nÅn vidÄbitis!â Tum Lacedaemonius respondet: âIn umbrÄ, igitur, pugnÄbimus!â Et LeÅnidÄs, rÄx LacedaemoniÅrum, exclÄmat: âPugnÄte cum animÄ«s, LacedaemoniÄ«; hodiÄ apud Ä«nferÅs fortasse cÄnÄbimus!â

Â 

Cicero Tusc. 1.42.101: This passage adapted from the âTusculan Disputations,â another of Ciceroâs philosophical treatises, relates an anecdote about the battle of Thermopylae (see Map 3), 480 B.C., in which the invading Persian army under king Xerxes defeated a courageous band of 300 Spartans under the leadership of Leonidas; all 300 Spartans fell in battle, but not before slaying thousands of the enemy and delaying their advance long enough for other Greek forces to ready themselves for what proved to be a decisive victory at the Battle of Salamis (Map 3) later in the year.âexercitus, army; âexercise.ââPersicus, -Ä«, m., a Persian.âinquit, says.âsagitta, -ae, f., arrow; âSagittarius,â âsagittate.ââLacedaemonius, -Ä«, m., a Spartan.ârespondÄre: = Eng.âumbra, -ae, f., shade, shadow; ghost; âumbrageâ and âumbrella,â which, with its DIMINUTIVE suffix â-ella,â lit. means âlittle shade/shadow.ââpugnÄre, to fight; âpugilist,â âpugnacious.âârÄx, king; âregal,â âregalia.ââexclÄmÄre, to shout; âexclaim,â âexclamation.ââcum + abl., with.âapud + acc., among.âÄ«nferÄ«, -Årum, m. pl., those below, the dead; âinferior,â âinferiority.ââfortasse, adv., perhaps.)

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Both king Leonidas and his soldiersâthe famed â300,â who fought to the death to resist the Persian invasion of Greeceâwere apparently not only courageous but quick-witted as well; comment on the humor in their remarks, as Cicero reports them here.

Spartan warrior (Leonidas?) Ca. 490â480 B.C. Found near the Sanctuary of Athena Chalkiokos Archaeological Museum Sparta, Greece
Vanni / Art Resource, NY

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Aureus est, DanaÄ.

Â 

CIL 4.5303: Many graffiti from Pompeii echo literary texts or otherwise allude to Greco-Roman myths, some of them the work of school children (as we know, e.g., from the height at which they were written on walls), and all of them important to our understanding of the nature and extent of literacy in the Roman world. This graffito, found near a doorway in a house in Reg. IX, Ins. 8, alludes to the myth of DanaÃ«, the legendary Greek princess who was impregnated by Jupiter in the form of a golden shower of rain, a mystical encounter that resulted in the birth of the hero Perseus; some scholars think the writer here had in mind a phrase from Ovid Met. 6.113.âaureus, -a, -um, golden; âAuâ (symbol for the element gold, from the Lat. noun aurum), âauriferous.ââest: sc. âJupiterâ as subject.âDanaÄ: a Gk. voc. form.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, et amÄ«cÄ« et amÄ«cae meae! Quid hodiÄ agitis? In fact, I hope you are sÄnÄ« et sÄnae, both physically and spiritually; if so, you have attained what the 1st century A.D. Roman satirist Juvenal suggested was the highest good in life, mÄns sÄna in corpore sÄnÅ, a healthy mind in a healthy body (youâll encounter the two third declension nouns mÄns and corpus later on, but in the meantime you can keep this famous quotation in mente). Itâs rumored, by the way, that the athletic gear brand-name ASICS is an acronym for animus sÄnus in corpore sÄnÅ; with a glance back at the VocÄbula you can figure that one out too. NIKE, an ASICS competitor, takes its name from the Greek word for âvictory,â which in Latin is victÅria, a winning name for a queen or any powerful lady (whose male counterpart might well be dubbed âVictor,â from Latin victor).

You may have encountered the expressions verbum sap and mea culpa before; if not, you will. The former is an abbreviation of verbum satis sapientÄ« est: sapientÄ« is dative of the third declension adjective sapiÄns, wise, used here as a noun (remember substantives from Capvt IV?), so you should already have deduced that the phrase means a word to the wise is sufficient. If you couldnât figure that out, just shout âmea culpa!â and (hereâs a verbum sap) go back and review the VocÄbula in Capita IâV. ValÄte!

CAPVT VI

Sum and Possum; Complementary Infinitive

GRAMMATICA

FUTURE AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF Sum

The best procedure for learning the future and imperfect tenses of sum, esse, as for the present tense introduced in Capvt IV, is simply to memorize the paradigms below (listening to the audio CDs, if you have them); these forms are more regular than those for the present, however, each formed on the stem er- and with the familiar present system personal endings (-Å/-m, -s, -t, -mus, -tis, -nt).

Â 

Â 

Future Indicative

Imperfect Indicative

Â 

1. Ã©rÅ, I shall be

Ã©ram, I was

Sg.

2. Ã©ris, you will be

Ã©rÄs, you were

Â 

3. Ã©rit, he (she, it, there) will be

Ã©rat, he (she, it, there) was

Â 

Â 

1. Ã©rimus, we shall be

ermus, we were

Pl.

2. Ã©ritis, you will be

ertis, you were

Â 

3. Ã©runt, they (there) will be

Ã©rant, they (there) were

IRREGULAR Possum, posse, potuÄ«, to be able, can, could

The very common verb possum, posse, potuÄ«, is simply a compound of pot-, from the irregular adjective potis (able, capable; cf. âpotent,â âpotentialâ) + sum. Before forms of sum beginning with s-, the -t- was altered or ASSIMILATED to -s- (hence possum from *potsum); otherwise the -t- remained unchanged. The irregular present infinitive posse developed from an earlier, uncontracted form which followed this rule (potesse).

For both sum and possum it is helpful to note the similarity of the future and imperfect endings, -Å/-is/-it, etc., and -am/-Äs/-at, etc., to the regular first and second conjugation future and imperfect endings, -bÅ/-bis/-bit, etc., and -bam/-bÄs/-bat, etc., which were introduced in the previous chapter.

COMPLEMENTARY INFINITIVE

Possum, like English to be able, requires an infinitive to âcompleteâ its meaning, hence the term COMPLEMENTARY (not âcomplimentaryâ) INFINITIVE, which simply means âcompletingâ infinitive. You have already seen the complementary infinitive used with dÄbeÅ, and you will find it employed with audeÅ, audÄre, to dare, and other verbs.

Our friends were able to overcome (could overcome) many dangers.

AmÄ«cÄ« nostrÄ« poterant superÄre multa perÄ«cula.

My friend is not able to remain (cannot remain).

AmÄ«cus meus remanÄre nÅn potest.

You ought to save your money.

DÄbÄs cÅnservÄre pecÅ«niam tuam.

Note that a complementary infinitive has no separate subject of its own; its subject is the same as that of the verb on which it depends.

VOCÄBVLA

Most nouns follow the pattern of base + endings, but some few, like dea and deus in this list (and fÄ«lia in Capvt III), have one or more irregular forms; Ä«nsidiae is exceptional too in having plural forms with singular meanings. Pay careful attention to these and other sorts of irregularities when you encounter them in any of the chapter VocÄbula. Some further caveats for this list: you will not confuse ibi and ubi, if you recall that there precedes where alphabetically, just as ibi precedes ubi; thinking âalphabeticallyâ should also help you distinguish noster/our from vester/your; and note that -que suffixed to a word generally equates to et before the word. The importance of learning macrons as part of a wordâs spelling and pronunciation is again seen in the case of the noun liber (pronounced âLIH-berâ), meaning book, in this chapterâs vocabulary, which you would not want to confuse with the adjective lÄ«ber (âLEE-berâ), free, introduced in Capvt Vâanother reminder that you should study all new vocabulary, not silently, but by listening to and pronouncing each word aloud: vocÄbula semper audÄ« et prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!

Â 

dÃ©us, -Ä«, m., voc. sg. deus, nom. pl. dÄ«, dat. and abl. pl. dÄ«s (the plurals deÄ« and deÄ«s became common during the Augustan Period), god, and dÃ©a, dÃ©ae, f., dat. and abl. pl. deÄbus, goddess (adieu, deify, deity)

discÃpulus, discÃpulÄ«, m., and discÃpula, discÃpulae, f., learner, pupil, student (disciple, discipline, disciplinary)

Ä«nsÃdiae, Ä«nsÃdirum, f. pl., ambush, plot, treachery (insidious)

lÃber, lÃbrÄ«, m., book (library, librarian, libretto); not to be confused with lÄ«ber, free

tyrÃ¡nnus, tyrÃ¡nnÄ«, m., absolute ruler, tyrant (tyrannical, tyrannous, tyrannicide)

vÃtium, vÃtiÄ«, n., fault, crime, vice (vitiate, vicious, vituperate; but not âvice versaâ)

GraÃ©cus, GraÃ©ca, GraÃ©cum, Greek; GraÃ©cus, GraÃ©cÄ«, m., a Greek

perpÃ©tuus, perpÃ©tua, perpÃ©tuum, perpetual, lasting, uninterrupted, continuous (perpetuate, perpetuity)

plnus, plna, plnum, full, abundant, generous (plenary, plenteous, plentiful, plenitude, plenty, replenish, plenipotentiary)

sÃ¡lvus, sÃ¡lva, sÃ¡lvum, safe, sound (cf. salveÅ)

secÃºndus, secÃºnda, secÃºndum, second; favorable (secondary)

vÃ©ster, vÃ©stra, vÃ©strum, your (pl., i.e., used in addressing more than one person, vs. tuus, -a, -um), yours

-que, ENCLITIC (essentially = âsuffixedâ) conj., and; appended to the second of two words to be joined: fÄma glÅriaque, fame and glory

Ãºbi: (1) rel. adv. and conj., where, when; (2) interrog. adv. and conj., where? (ubiquitous, ubiquity)

Ãbi, adv., there (ib. or ibid.)

nunc, adv., now, at present (quidnunc)

qurÄ, adv., lit. because of which thing (quÄ rÄ), but more commonly therefore, wherefore, why

pÃ³ssum, pÃ³sse, pÃ³tuÄ«, to be able, can, could, have power (posse, possible, potent, potentate, potential, omnipotent)

tÃ³lerÅ, tolerre, tolervÄ«, tolertum, to bear, endure (tolerate, toleration, tolerable, intolerable, intolerance)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

By now, you know the ideal regimen: before attempting these readings, memorize paradigms and vocabulary, and assess your mastery with the Self-Tutorial Exercises. Listen to the readings, if you have the CDs, read them aloud once or twice for comprehension, and then write out your translationsâwhich should always be reasonably literal but within the bounds of natural English idiom; for practice with the new grammar, scan the readings and identify (1) the tense, person, and number of all forms of sum and possum that occur, and (2) all complementary infinitives.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

OculÄ« nostrÄ« nÅn valÄbant; quÄrÄ agrÅs bellÅs vidÄre nÅn poterÄmus.

Sine multÄ pecÅ«niÄ et multÄ«s dÅnÄ«s tyrannus stultus satiÄre populum RÅmÄnum nÅn poterit.

NÅn poterant, igitur, tÄ dÄ poenÄ amÄ«cÅrum tuÅrum heri monÄre.

Parvus numerus GraecÅrum crÄs ibi remanÄre et amÄ«cÅs adiuvÄre poterit.

Magister discipulÅs malÅs sine morÄ vocÄbit.

Discipulae vestrae dÄ librÄ«s magnÄ« poÄtae saepe cÅgitÄbant.

QuandÅ satis sapientiae habÄbimus?

MultÄ« librÄ« antÄ«quÄ« propter sapientiam cÅnsiliumque erant magnÄ«.

GlÅria bonÅrum librÅrum semper manÄbit.

Possuntne pecÅ«nia Åtiumque cÅ«rÄs vÄ«tae hÅ«mÄnae superÄre?

Therefore, we cannot always see the real vices of a tyrant.

Few free men will be able to tolerate an absolute ruler.

Many Romans used to praise the words of the ancient Greeks.

Where can glory and (use -que) fame be perpetual?

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Dionsius tum erat tyrannus SyrÄcÅ«sÄnÅrum. (Cicero.âDionsius, -iÄ«, m., a Greek name.âSyrÄcÅ«sÄnus, -Ä«, a Syracusan.)

OptÄsne meam vÄ«tam fortÅ«namque gustÄre? (Cicero.âoptÄre, to wish; âoptative,â âadopt.ââgustÄre, to taste; âgustatory,â âdisgust.â)

Possumusne, Å dÄ«, in malÄ«s Ä«nsidiÄ«s et magnÅ exitiÅ esse salvÄ«? (Cicero.âCan you explain why the nom. pl. salvÄ« is used here?)

Propter cÅ«ram meam in perpetuÅ perÄ«culÅ nÅn eritis. (Cicero.)

Propter vitia tua multÄ« tÄ culpant et nihil tÄ in patriÄ tuÄ dÄlectÄre nunc potest. (Cicero.âdÄlectÄre, to delight; âdelectable,â âdelectation.â)

FortÅ«na PÅ«nicÄ« bellÄ« secundÄ« varia erat. (Livy.âPÅ«nicus, -a, -um, Punic, Carthaginian.âvarius, -a, -um, varied; âvariety,â âvarious.â)

Patria RÅmÄnÅrum erat plÄna GraecÅrum librÅrum statuÄrumque pulchrÄrum. (Cicero.âstatua, -ae, f., Eng; âstatuary,â âstatuesque.â)

Sine dÄ«s et deÄbus in caelÅ animus nÅn potest sÄnus esse. (Seneca.)

SÄ« animus Ä«nfÄ«rmus est, nÅn poterit bonam fortÅ«nam tolerÄre. (Publilius Syrus. âÄ«nfÄ«rmus, -a, -um, not strong, weak; âinfirm,â âinfirmary.â)

Ubi lÄgÄs valent, ibi populus lÄ«ber potest valÄre. (Publilius Syrus.âlÄgÄs, nom. pl., laws; âlegal,â âlegislature.â)

âI Do Not Love Thee, Dr. Fellâ

NÅn amo tÄ, SabidÄ«, nec possum dÄ«cere quÄrÄ.

Hoc tantum possum dÄ«cere: nÅn amo tÄ.

*Martial Epig. 1.32: For Martialâs Epigrams, see notes to âHis Only Guest,â in Capvt V. The âDr. Fellâ title here derives from an anecdote, perhaps apocryphal, about a 17th cent. Oxford University student named Tom Brown (who later gained some acclaim as a translator and satirist) and Dr. John Fell, a Latinist, Dean of Christ Church, and Bishop of Oxford, who had threatened the young man with expulsion. Fell told Brown he would give him a reprieve if he could properly translate this epigram, and Brown came up with the following version on the spot: âI do not love thee, Dr. Fell, the reason why I cannot tell; but this I know, and know full well: I do not love thee, Dr. Fell.â Meter: elegiac couplet.âamo: final -Å was often shortened in Lat. poetry, for metrical reasons but also as a reflection of actual pronunciation habits.âSabidius, -iÄ«: the name of Martialâs perhaps fictitious target.ânec: = et nÅn.âdÄ«cere, to say; âdictate,â âdiction.ââhoc, this; âad hoc;â acc. case.âtantum, adv., only.)

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Though quite brief, this little epigram makes its point and is neatly stylized. What seems to you most striking in terms of its DICTION (choice and use of words)? Next, look at the poemâs structureâtwo lines, four clausesâand note that the clauses are set in a reverse ABBA order, an arrangement known as CHIASMUS that was commonly employed in Latin verse to achieve some sort of emphasis, often to underscore contrasting ideas; what do you see as its effect here?

âThe Historian Livy Laments the Decline of Roman Moralsâ

Populus RÅmÄnus magnÅs animÅs et paucÄs culpÄs habÄbat. DÄ officiÄ«s nostrÄ«s cÅgitÄbÄmus et glÅriam bellÄ« semper laudÄbÄmus. Sed nunc multum Åtium habÄmus, et multÄ« sunt avÄrÄ«. Nec vitia nostra nec remedia tolerÄre possumus.

Â 

Livy Urbe Cond. Preface: The Augustan writer Livy (Titus Livius, 59 B.C.âA.D. 17) authored the monumental Ab Urbe ConditÄ, From the Founding of the City, a history of Rome from its legendary founding in 753 B.C. down to the reign of the emperor Augustus; only 35 of the original 142 volumes have survived. The passage excerpted here is drawn from his preface to the work.ânecâ¦ nec, conj., neitherâ¦ nor.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: The author employs contrast to point out differences between early Rome and his own contemporary society; how many instances of this device can you identify? How would you characterize the overall tone of the passage?

Manuscript page with preface of Livyâs Ab Urbe Condita and miniature in four parts, including scenes of Lucretia and Romeâs kings. Burney manuscript 198. Ca. 1400, border added 1471â1474. The British Library
The British Library

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

AmÄ«culus.

Â 

CIL 4.8269: This artfully etched graffito from Reg. I, Ins. 10, appeared above a crude drawing of two gladiators. AmÄ«culus, -Ä«, m., is the DIMINUTIVE form of amÄ«cus, littleâ¦ or dearâ¦; diminutive suffixes in -ulus/-olus/-ula/-ola, etc., were commonly employed in Lat. both to indicate something small (saxum, rock; saxulum, little rock) and as terms of endearment (fÄ«lia > fÄ«liola, dear [little] daughter).

ETYMOLOGIA

Eng. âlibraryâ is clearly connected with liber. Many European languages, however, derive their equivalent from bibliothÄca, a Lat. word of Gk. origin meaning in essence the same thing as our word. What, then, do you suppose biblos meant in Greek?âcf. the Bible. Fr. y in the common phrase il y a (there is) derives from ibi. And the following Fr. words are also derived from Lat.: Ãªtes = estis; nÃ´tre = noster; vÃ´tre = vester; goÃ»ter = gustÄre. What, then, is one thing which the Fr. circumflex accent indicates?

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, discipulÄ« et discipulae! Quid hodiÄ agitis, Å amÄ«cÄ«? CÅgitÄtisne dÄ linguÄ LatÄ«nÄ? Well, I assume by now that your etymological sense will tell you that lingua LatÄ«na meansâ¦the Latin language or just âLatin,â your favorite subject. Now that youâve developed a taste for the language, I know that you study with great âgustoâ! (If you missed that bit of etymologizing, see S.A. 2 above.) The new VocÄbula item deus turns up in the expression deus ex machinÄ, god from a machine, which refers (in drama and other contexts) to any person or mechanism that performs an amazing rescue from some seemingly hopeless dilemma.

Do you know that sub> is a preposition meaning under, as in âsubterranean,â under the terra, earth; if so, you can laugh at this old favorite: semper ubi sub ubi! (Good hygiene and prevents rash!) And speaking of ubi, it asks the question that ibi answers; a compound form of the latter constructed with the intensifying suffix -dem, the same (see Capvt XI for a similar use of -dem), ibidem, gives us ibid., in the same place cited, just one of many Latin-based abbreviations commonly employed in English. Here are some others:

cf. = cÅnfer, compare

cp. = comparÄ, compare

e.g. = exemplÄ« grÄtiÄ, for the sake of example

et al. = et aliÄ«/aliae, and others (of persons)

etc. = et cÄtera, and others (of things)

i.e. = id est, that is

n.b. = nÅtÄ bene, note carefully (i.e., pay close attention)

v.i. and v.s. = vidÄ Ä«nfrÄ and vidÄ suprÄ, see below and see above

Semper ubi sub ubi AND the scholarly ibid. both in the same lesson? Well, thatâs what the title means: LatÄ«na EST gaudiumâET Å«tilis! ValÄte!

CAPVT VII

Third Declension Nouns

GRAMMATICA

THIRD DECLENSION NOUNS

The third of Latinâs five declensions contains nouns of all three genders with a great variety of nominative singular endings, but all characterized by the genitive singular in -is; because of this variety of gender and nominative form, it is especially important to memorize the full vocabulary entry. The declension itself follows the same principles learned for first and second declension nouns: find the base (by dropping the genitive singular -is) and add the endings. Because the vocative is identical to the nominative (with the sole exception of second declension -us/-ius words), it will not appear in subsequent paradigms.

Gender

Since the third declension contains nouns of all three genders, memorizing gender as part of the vocabulary entry remains imperative. Nouns denoting human beings, however, are typically masculine or feminine according to sense (e.g., rÄx, king, m., and uxor, wife, f.), and the following rules also have few or no exceptions:

Â 

Masculine (including a large group of AGENT NOUNS, i.e., for persons performing actions, such as: actor, one who acts, actor; amÄtor, one who loves, lover)

-or, -Åris (amor, -mÅris; labor, -bÅris; victor, -tÅris; scrÄ«ptor, -tÅris; the long Å vowel of the base is short in the nominative, as usual before final -r)

Feminine (including a large group of ABSTRACT NOUNS, for abstract concepts)

-tÄs, -tÄtis (vÄritÄs, -tÄtis; lÄ«bertÄs, -tÄtis)

-tÅ«s, -tÅ«tis (virtÅ«s, -tÅ«tis; senectÅ«s, -tÅ«tis)

-tÅ«dÅ, -tÅ«dinis (multitÅ«dÅ, -tÅ«dinis; pulchritÅ«dÅ, -tÅ«dinis)

-tiÅ, -tiÅnis (nÄtiÅ, -tiÅnis; ÅrÄtiÅ, -tiÅnis)

Neuter

-us (genus, generis; corpus, corporis; tempus, temporis: in contrast to masculine nouns, for neuters with a base ending in or the o is short)

-e, -al, -ar (mare, maris; animal, -mÄlis; exemplar, -plÄris)

-men (carmen, -minis; nÅmen, -minis)

Noun-Adjective Agreement

In declining, note that a third declension noun may be modified by a first or second declension adjective; e.g., great king in Latin is magnus rÄx, magnÄ« rÄgis, etc., true peace is pÄx vÄra, pÄcis vÄrae, etc. While an adjective and noun must agree in number, gender, and case, the spelling of their endings will not necessarily be identicalâas seen before in such noun-adjective pairs as agricola bonus.

VOCÄBVLA

In this list of new words you can see how essential it is to look at a nounâs genitive ending, not the nominative, in order to identify its declension; otherwise, e.g., -us nouns like corpus and tempus might easily be mistaken as second declension. Likewise recall that a nounâs base is best determined from its genitive form; this is especially true with third declension nouns, whose nominatives frequently do not reveal the base, as with the chapterâs paradigm nouns, rÄx/rÄgis, virtÅ«s/virtÅ«tis, homÅ/hominis, corpus, corporis. English derivatives can be helpful in remembering a nounâs base; e.g., iter, itineris, journey: itinerary; cor, cordis, heart: cordial; custÅs, custÅdis, guard: custodian. Since the third declension contains nouns of all genders, it remains imperative that you memorize gender as part of the entry; as you learn this list, practice declining some noun-adjective pairs, e.g., amor novus, carmen nostrum, uxor bona. Youâll see that two nouns in this list (mÅs and littera) have special, idiomatic meanings in the plural; weâve seen this before, with animus, and itâs something to note carefully.

As you learn this new vocabulary, you should also review words learned in Capita IâVI (capita, by the way, is from caput, capitis, n., head; heading, chapter); for review you can use vocabulary cards or cumulative vocabulary lists (available at www.wheelockslatin.com, or you can compile your own), but in memorizing this new list, be sure to use the CDs or the online audio, andâ¦ audÄ« prÅnÅ«ntiÄqueâthe verb prÅnÅ«ntiÅ, by the way, is an exception to the general rule, introduced in Capvt I, that vowels are generally short before nt, so be sure you are âpronouncingâ it correctly!

Â 

Ã¡mor, amris, m., love (amorous, enamored; cf. amÅ, amÄ«cus)

cÃ¡rmen, cÃ¡rminis, n., song, poem (charm)

cvitÄs, cÄ«vittis, f., state, citizenship (city)

cÃ³rpus, cÃ³rporis, n., body (corps, corpse, corpuscle, corpulent, corporal, corporeal, corporate, corporation, incorporate, corsage, corset)

hÃ³mÅ, hÃ³minis, m., human being, man (homicide, homage; homo sapiens, but not the prefix homo-; cf. hÅ«mÄnus and vir)

lÃ¡bor, labris, m., labor, work, toil; a work, production (laboratory, belabor, laborious, collaborate, elaborate)

lÃttera, lÃtterae, f., a letter of the alphabet; lÃtterae, litterrum, pl., a letter (epistle), literature (literal, letters, belles-lettres, illiterate, alliteration)

mÅs, mris, m., habit, custom, manner; mrÄs, mrum, pl., habits, morals, character (mores, moral, immoral, immorality, morale, morose)

nmen, nminis, n., name (nomenclature, nominate, nominative, nominal, noun, pronoun, renown, denomination, ignominy, misnomer)

pÄx, pcis, f., peace (pacify, pacific, pacifist, appease, pay)

rÄgna, regnae, f., queen (Regina, regina, reginal)

rÄx, rgis, m., king (regal, regalia, regicide, royal; cf. rajah)

tÃ©mpus, tÃ©mporis, n., time; occasion, opportunity (tempo, temporary, contemporary, temporal, temporize, extempore, tense [of a verb])

tÃ©rra, tÃ©rrae, f., earth, ground, land, country (terrestrial, terrace, terrier, territory, inter [verb], parterre, subterranean, terra cotta)

Ãºxor, uxris, f., wife (uxorial, uxorious, uxoricide)

vÃrgÅ, vÃrginis, f., maiden, virgin (virgin, virginal, virginity, Virginia)

vÃrtÅ«s, virttis, f., manliness, courage; excellence, character, worth, virtue (virtuoso, virtuosity, virtual; cf. vir)

nÃ³vus, nÃ³va, nÃ³vum, new; strange (novel, novelty, novice, innovate)

post, prep. + acc., after, behind (posterity, posterior, posthumous, post mortem, P.M. = post meridiem, preposterous, post-as a prefix, postgraduate, postlude, postpositive, postwar, etc.)

sub, prep. + abl. with verbs of rest, + acc. with verbs of motion, under, up under, close to; down to/into, to/at the foot of (sub- or, by ASSIMILATION, suc-, suf-, sug-, sup-, sus-, in countless compounds: subterranean, suburb, succeed, suffix, suggest, support, sustain)

aÃºdeÅ, audre, aÃºsus sum (the unusual third principal part of this SEMI-DEPONENT verb is explained in Capvt XXXIV), to dare (audacious, audacity)

nÃ©cÅ, necre, necvÄ«, nectum, to murder, kill (internecine; cf. nocÄre, to harm)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

A new challenge to reading comprehension and translation is that some third declension endings resemble the endings of different cases in other declensions, e.g., -Ä« can be the ending for a third declension dative singular or a second declension genitive singular or masculine nominative/vocative plural; -us could be a second declension masculine nominative or a third declension neuter accusative; etc. The key is careful vocabulary study, first and foremost, though word order and context can also be a help when dealing with ambiguous endings. For practice, use the Self-Tutorial Exercises for this chapter, of course, but also scan through the following readings and identify number, case/use, and gender for all the third declension nouns. And donât forget, when translating, to supply articles and possessives, choose meanings for words that best suit the context, and strive for as accurate and reasonably literal a rendering as possible within the bounds of natural English idiom.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

SecundÄs litterÄs discipulae heri vidÄbÄs et dÄ verbÄ«s tum cÅgitÄbÄs.

FÄminae sine morÄ cÄ«vitÄtem dÄ Ä«nsidiÄ«s et exitiÅ malÅ monÄbunt.

RÄx et rÄgÄ«na igitur crÄs nÅn audÄbunt ibi remanÄre.

MÅrÄs GraecÅrum nÅn erant sine culpÄ«s vitiÄ«sque.

QuandÅ hominÄs satis virtÅ«tis habÄbunt?

Corpora vestra sunt sÄna et animÄ« sunt plÄnÄ« sapientiae.

Propter mÅrÄs hÅ«mÄnÅs pÄcem vÄram nÅn habÄbimus.

Poteritne cÄ«vitÄs perÄ«cula temporum nostrÅrum superÄre?

Post bellum multÅs librÅs dÄ pÄce et remediÄ«s bellÄ« vidÄbant.

Officia sapientiamque oculÄ«s animÄ« poterÄmus vidÄre.

Without sound character we cannot have peace.

Many students used to have little time for Greek literature.

After bad times true virtue and much labor will help the state.

The daughters of your friends were dining there yesterday.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

HomÅ sum. (*Terence.)

Nihil sub sÅle novum (*Ecclesiastes.âsÅl, sÅlis, m., sun; âsolar,â âsolstice.âânovum: sc. est.)

Carmina nova dÄ adulÄscentiÄ virginibus puerÄ«sque nunc cantÅ. (Horace.âcantÄre, to sing; âcanto,â âchant,â ârecant.â)

LaudÄs fortÅ«nam et mÅrÄs antÄ«quae plÄbis. (*Horace.âplÄbs, plÄbis, f., the common people; âplebe,â âplebeian,â âplebiscite.â)

BonÄ« propter amÅrem virtÅ«tis peccÄre ÅdÄrunt. (Horace.âpeccÄre, to sin; âpeccadillo,â âimpeccable.ââÅdÄrunt: (they) hate; âodious,â âodium.â)

Sub prÄ«ncipe dÅ«rÅ temporibusque malÄ«s audÄs esse bonus. (Martial.âprÄ«nceps, -cipis, m., chief, prince; âprincipal,â âprincipality.â âdÅ«rus, -a, -um, hard, harsh; âdurable,â âendure,â âobdurate.â)

Populus stultus virÄ«s indignÄ«s honÅrÄs saepe dat. (Horace.âhonor, -nÅris, m., honor, office; âhonorable,â âhonorary.ââindignus, -a, -um, unworthy; âindignant,â âindignation.â)

NÅmina stultÅrum in parietibus et portÄ«s semper vidÄmus. (Cicero.âWitness the graffiti in this book!âpariÄs, -etis, m., wall of a building; âparietal.â)

Åtium sine litterÄ«s mors est. (*Seneca.âmors, mortis, f., death; âmortal,â âmortuary.â)

Multae nÄtiÅnÄs servitÅ«tem tolerÄre possunt; nostra cÄ«vitÄs nÅn potest. PraeclÄra est recuperÄtiÅ lÄ«bertÄtis. (Cicero.ânÄtiÅ, -Ånis f., = Eng.; ânationalism,â ânationality.ââservitÅ«s, -tÅ«tis, f., servitude; âservice.ââpraeclÄrus, -a, -um, noble, remarkable; âclarity.âârecuperÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., recovery; ârecuperate.ââlÄ«bertÄs, -tÄtis, f. = Eng.; âliberate,â âlibertine.â)

Nihil sine magnÅ labÅre vÄ«ta mortÄlibus dat. (Horace.âmortÄlis, -tÄlis, a mortal; âmortality.â)

QuÅmodo in perpetuÄ pÄce salvÄ« et lÄ«berÄ« esse poterimus? (Cicero.âquÅmodo, how.)

GlÅria in altissimÄ«s DeÅ et in terrÄ pÄx hominibus bonae voluntÄtis. (*Luke.âaltissimÄ«s, abl. pl., the highest; âaltimeter,â âaltitude.ââvoluntÄs, -tÄtis, will; âvoluntary,â âvolunteer.â)

The Rape of Lucretia

Tarquinius Superbus erat rÄx RÅmÄnÅrum, et Sextus Tarquinius erat fÄ«lius malus tyrannÄ«. Sextus LucrÄtiam, uxÅrem CollÄtÄ«nÄ«, rapuit, et fÄmina bona, propter magnum amÅrem virtÅ«tis, sÄ necÄvit. RÅmÄnÄ« antÄ«quÄ« virtÅ«tem animÅsque LucrÄtiae semper laudÄbant et TarquiniÅs culpÄbant.

Â 

Livy Urbe Cond. 1.58: For Livyâs history of Rome, see âThe Historian Livy Laments the Decline of Roman Morals,â in Capvt VI above. Lucius Tarquinius Superbus was Romeâs last king and an Etruscan, Collatinus a Roman nobleman; according to legend, the rape of Lucretia was a precipitating factor that led to the overthrow of the Tarquin dynasty, the end of Etruscan rule and of the monarchy itself, and the establishment of the Roman Republic in 509 B.C.ârapuit: raped; ârapacious,â ârapture.ââsÄ: herself.ânecÄvit: a past tense form.âTarquiniÅs: i.e., the entire royal family.

The Rape of Lucretia. Felice Ficherelli, 1605â1660. Oil on tinned copper. The Wallace Collection, London, Great Britain
By kind permission of the Trustees of the Wallace Collection, London / Art Resource, NY

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Livyâs moralizing tone was evident in the passage adapted from his preface, which you read in the last chapter, and throughout his work it seems he was as interested in drawing moral lessons as he was in reporting facts. Based on this brief, adapted passage, what were some of the virtues Romans most admired? What is your personal view of Lucretiaâs suicide, and of the Roman response to it, as suggested in this passage? Compare Ficherelliâs painting above with the manuscript illustration in Chapter VI.

Catullus Dedicates His Poetry Book

CornÄliÅ, virÅ magnae sapientiae, dabÅ pulchrum librum novum. CornÄlÄ«, mÄ« amÄ«ce, librÅs meÅs semper laudÄbÄs, et es magister doctus litterÄrum! QuÄrÄ habÄ novum labÅrem meum: fÄma librÄ« (et tua fÄma) erit perpetua.

Â 

Catullus Carm. 1: For Catullus, Cornelius Nepos, and other Roman writers presented in these chapter readings, be sure to review the âBrief Survey of Latin Literatureâ in the Introd. (above, p. xxxâxxxv); and cf. âCatullus Bids His Girlfriend Farewell,â in Capvt II. Catullus dedicated his poetry book, in the opening poem from which this prose passage is adapted, to the historian and biographer Cornelius Nepos; the entire, unadapted poem appears later in this text (LocÄ« Im. I, LOCÄª IMMTÄTÄª).âdoctus, -a, -um, learned, scholarly; âdoctor,â âindoctrinate.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Cornelius Nepos (ca. 110â24 B.C.), the author of some 400 biographies of famous Greeks and Romans, is not today regarded as one of the great Roman classic writers, but he was nevertheless respected by Catullus. Based on this prose excerpt from his dedicatory poem, what qualities did the young poet most admire in Nepos?âand what else had the biographer done to earn this honor in Catullusâ dedication?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Â 

Â 

CIL 4.4764 (Reg. VII, Ins. 7): Personal insults like this one from the House of the Cissonii were common in ancient graffiti, just as they are today. What case must PerÄrÄ« be?âand so, what was his name, i.e., was the nom. form?âfÅ«r, fÅ«ris, m., thief; âfurtive,â âfurtively.â

Â 

Â 

CIL 4.4885: The Pompeian responsible for this graffito found in a house in Reg. VIII, Ins. 2, was about as talented at drawing as he was at spelling: he tried twice, and failed, to write MVLVIVS (?), and while Mulvius was in fact a Lat. wordâthe name of a Roman gÄns (family)âit seems more likely, in view of the drawing, that he was trying to label his bird mÄ«luus or mÄ«lvus, kite, a common bird of prey, proverbial in ancient Rome for its rapacity and the vast distances it could fly. Our artistâs fine-feathered friend, alas, looks more like a coot, or a goose, than a kite!

ETYMOLOGIA

What Lat. word do you suppose gives us It. uomo, Sp. hombre, Fr. homme and on, Port. homem, Rom. om, and Old Occ. ome?

âTenseâ meaning the âtimeâ of a verb comes from tempus through Old Fr. tens; but âtenseâ meaning âstretched tightâ goes back to tendÅ, tendere, tetendÄ«, tÄnsum, to stretch.

In late Lat., cÄ«vitÄs came to mean city rather than state, and thus it became the parent of the Romance words for city: It. cittÃ , Sp. ciudad, Fr. citÃ©, Port. cidade, and Occ. ciutat.

Here are the Romance and Eng. equivalents of three common Lat. suffixes introduced in this chapter:

Cf. Port. -dade (verdade, antiguidade), -Ã§Ã£o/-zÃ£o (naÃ§Ã£o, razÃ£o), -tor (inventor, actor/ator); Rom. antichitate, naie/naiune, raiune, inventator, actor; Old Occ. vr, antiquitat, naci, raz, autor.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, et discipulÄ« et discipulae! Quid nunc agitis? You are beginning to see by now that Latin is living everywhere in our language; in fact, itâs a rÄra avis these days who considers Latin a dead language. To anyone who does, you might quip, quot hominÄs, tot sententiaeâan old proverb from the 2nd century B.C. comic playwright Terence meaning, freely, there are as many opinions as there are men. Notice terra in the VocÄbula: we met âsubterraneanâ in the last chapter, now do you think of âETâ? In the 1980s the little guy was everybodyâs favorite Extra-Terrestrial (from extrÄ, prep. + acc., beyond, + terra). Until he became familiar with the terrain, he was in a terra incognita; but once heâd learned the territory he felt he was on terra fÄ«rma (look up all these earth-words in your Funk and Wagnallâsâif you need to!). And, speaking of movies, Stephen Spielbergâs top-grossing Jurassic Park reminded us all that Tyrannosaurus rex was truly both a âtyrantâ and a âkingâ (though Spielbergâs âvelociraptorsâ were certainly terrifying âswift-snatchers,â from the Latin adjective vÄlÅx, fast, as in âvelocity,â + raptor, a third declension noun based on the verb rapere, to seize, snatch, grab). LatÄ«nam semper amÄbitisâvalÄte!

CAPVT VIII

Third Conjugation: Present System

GRAMMATICA

THIRD CONJUGATION VERBS

The third conjugation, in its present system tenses (present, future, and imperfect), is somewhat less regular than the other conjugations. Because the stem vowel was short (-e-), unlike those of the other three conjugations (-Ä- in the first, -Ä- in the second, and -Ä«- in the fourth, introduced in Capvt Xâcf. laudre, monre, and audre with Ã¡gere), it had undergone a number of sound and spelling changes by the classical period. The surest procedure, as always, is to memorize the following paradigms (listening to the CDs, if you have them); note in particular the vowel alternation in the present tense endings, and the new future tense endings.

Present Indicative Active

Â 

1. Ã¡g-Å

(I lead)

Sg.

2. Ã¡g-is

(you lead)

Â 

3. Ã¡g-it

(he, she, it leads)

Â 

Â 

1. Ã¡gimus

(we lead)

Pl.

2. Ã¡gitis

(you lead)

Â 

3. Ã¡gunt

(they lead)

Future Indicative Active

Â 

1. Ã¡g-am

(I will lead)

Sg.

2. Ã¡g-Äs

(you will lead)

Â 

3. Ã¡g-et

(he, she, it will lead)

Â 

Â 

1. agmus

(we will lead)

Pl.

2. agtis

(you will lead)

Â 

3. Ã¡gent

(they will lead)

Imperfect Indicative Active

Â 

1. ag-bam

(I was leading, used to lead, etc.)

Sg.

2. ag-bÄs

(you were leading, etc.)

Â 

3. ag-bat

(he, she, it was leading, etc.)

Â 

Â 

1. agÄbmus

(we were leading, etc.)

Pl.

2. agÄbtis

(you were leading, etc.)

Â 

3. agbant

(they were leading, etc.)

Present Imperative Active

Â 

2. Sg. Ã¡ge (lead!)

2. Pl. Ã¡gite (lead!)

Present Infinitive

As the infinitive endings -Äre and -Äre indicate the first and second conjugations respectively, so -ere indicates the third. Once again you can see the importance of meticulous vocabulary study, including attention to macrons: you must be especially careful to distinguish between second conjugation verbs in -Äre and third conjugation verbs in -ere, something you can practice right now by glancing ahead at this chapterâs VocÄbula.

Present Stem and Present Indicative

According to the normal rule for finding the present stem, you would drop the infinitive ending -re from agere and have age- as the present stem. To this you would expect to add the personal endings to form the present indicative. But in fact the short, unaccented stem vowel disappears altogether in the first person singular, and it was altered to -i- in the second and third persons singular and the first and second persons plural, and appears as -u- in the third plural. The most practical procedure is to memorize the present tense paradigm, paying close attention to the altered stem vowel plus personal endings; it should be helpful to note that the vowel alternation Å/is/it/imus/itis/unt is exactly the same as that seen in the future endings of first and second conjugation verbs (-bÅ, -bis, -bit, -bimus, -bitis, -bunt).

Future Indicative

Most striking in the future tense of the third conjugation (and the fourth, introduced in Capvt X) is the lack of the tense sign -bi-. Here -Ä- is the sign of the future in all forms except the first singular, and by contraction the stem vowel itself has disappeared.

Imperfect Indicative

The imperfect tense is formed precisely according to the rules learned for the first two conjugations (present stem + -bam, -bÄs, etc.), except that the stem vowel has been lengthened to -Ä-, yielding forms analogous to those in the first and second conjugations.

Present Imperative

Also in accordance with the rule already learned, the second person singular of the present imperative is simply the present stem; e.g., mitte (from mittere, to send), pÅne (pÅnere, to put). In the plural imperative, however, we see again the shift from short, unaccented -e- to -i-: hence, mittite and pÅnite (not *mittete or *pÅnete).

Irregular forms: The singular imperative of dÅ«cere was originally dÅ«ce, a form seen in the early writer Plautus. Later, however, the -e was dropped from dÅ«ce, as it was from the singular imperatives of three other common third conjugation verbs: dÄ«c (dÄ«cere, to say), fac (facere, to do), and fer (ferre, to bear). The other verbs of this conjugation follow the rule as illustrated by age, mitte, and pÅne; the four irregulars, dÄ«c, dÅ«c, fac, and fer, should simply be memorized.

VOCÄBVLA

Macrons can be mighty important: an -Äre verb is second conjugation, while the new -ere verbs, with the short stem vowel, are third conjugation and therefore have a great many different forms. So as you memorize each new vocabulary entry, pay close attention to the macrons, as a part of the wordâs spelling, listen carefully to its pronunciation on the CDs or online audio, and then repeat the word correctly yourself from the very outset. When you carefully pronounce aloud first docÄre, with its long, accented stem vowel, and then dÅ«cere, with the short, unaccented vowel, it will be impossible not to notice which is the second conjugation verb, and which is third. All the more reason to remember, whenever you study or review vocabulary: semper audÄ« et prÅnÅ«ntiÄ! And be sure to practice conjugating a first, second, and third conjugation verb from this new list; write out the forms for all three tenses, check them against the paradigms in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, CONJUGATIONS 1â4, and recite them aloud.

Â 

CÃcerÅ, Cicernis, m., (Marcus Tullius) Cicero (Ciceronian, cicerone)

cpia, cpiae, f., abundance, supply; cpiae, cÅpirum, pl., supplies, troops, forces (copious, copy, cornucopia)

frter, frtris, m., brother (fraternal, fraternity, fraternize, fratricide)

laus, laÃºdis, f., praise, glory, fame (laud, laudable, laudation, laudatory, magna cum laude; cf. laudÅ)

lÄ«bÃ©rtÄs, lÄ«berttis, f., liberty (cf. lÄ«ber)

rÃ¡tiÅ, ratinis, f., reckoning, account; reason, judgment, consideration; system; manner, method (ratio, ration, rational, irrational, ratiocination)

scrptor, scrÄ«ptris, m., writer, author (scriptorium; cf. scrÄ«bÅ below)

sorris, f., sister (sororal, sororicide, sorority)

victria, victriae, f., victory (victorious, Victoria; see LatÄ«na Est Gaudium, Capvt V, and cf. vincÅ below)

dum, conj., while, as long as, at the same time that; + subjunct., until

ad, prep. + acc., to, up to, near to, in the sense of âplace to whichâ with verbs of motion; contrast the dat. of ind. obj., also translated with âto,â but in a different sense (administer, ad hoc, ad hominem). In compounds the d is sometimes ASSIMILATED to the following consonant so that ad may appear, for instance, as ac- (accipiÅ: ad-capiÅ), ap- (appellÅ: ad-pellÅ), a- (aspiciÅ: ad-spiciÅ): see App., Some Etymological Aids.

ex or Ä, prep. + abl., out of, from, from within; by reason of, on account of; following cardinal numbers, of (exact, except, exhibit, evict). The Romans used ex before consonants or vowels; Ä (like âaâ vs. âanâ in Eng.) before consonants only. Like ad and many other prepositions, ex/Ä was often used as a prefix in compounds, sometimes with the x assimilated to the following consonant; e.g., excipiÅ, ÄdÅ«cÅ, Äventus, efficiÅ from ex + faciÅ, etc.; App., Some Etymological Aids.

nÃºmquam, adv., never

tÃ¡men, adv., nevertheless, still

Ã¡gÅ, Ã¡gere, gÄ«, ctum, to drive, lead, do, act; pass, spend (life or time); grtiÄs Ã¡gere+ dat. for the person being thanked, to thank (someone), lit., to give thanks to (agent, agenda, agile, agitate, active, actor, action, actual, actuate)

dÄmnstrÅ, dÄmÅnstrre, dÄmÅnstrvÄ«, dÄmÅnstrtum, to point out, show, demonstrate (demonstrable, demonstration, demonstrative)

dÃscÅ, dÃscere, dÃdicÄ«, to learn (disciple, disciplinary; cf. discipulus, discipula)

dÃ³ceÅ, docre, dÃ³cuÄ«, dÃ³ctum, to teach (docent, docile, document, doctor, doctrine, indoctrinate)

dcÅ, dcere, dxÄ«, dÃºctum, to lead; consider, regard; prolong (ductile, abduct, adduce, deduce, educe, induce, produce, reduce, seduce)

gÃ©rÅ, gÃ©rere, gÃ©ssÄ«, gÃ©stum, to carry; carry on, manage, conduct, wage, accomplish, perform (gerund, gesture, gesticulate, jest, belligerent, congeries, digest, suggest, exaggerate, register, registry)

scrbÅ, scrbere, scrpsÄ«, scrptum, to write, compose (ascribe, circumscribe, conscript, describe, inscribe, proscribe, postscript, rescript, scripture, subscribe, transcribe, scribble, scrivener, shrive)

trÃ¡hÅ, trÃ¡here, trxÄ«, trÃ¡ctum, to draw, drag; derive, acquire (attract, contract, retract, subtract, tractor, etc.)

vÃncÅ, vÃncere, vcÄ«, vÃctum, to conquer, overcome (convince, convict, evince, evict, invincible, Vincent, victor, Victoria, vanquish)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

As always, before attempting these readings, memorize the paradigms and vocabulary, and check your mastery with the Self-Tutorial Exercises. Then listen to the readings, if you have the CDs, read them aloud for comprehension, and write out your translations; for practice with the new grammar, scan through the readings and identify the person, number, and tense of all third conjugation verbs. A common translation error involves misconstruing future tense third conjugation forms like aget in S.A. 1 below as present tense, since they resemble second conjugation forms like monet, dÄbet, etc.; you can avoid such problems by carefully studying vocabulary. Another common mistake occurs in translating âtoâ in English-to-Latin exercises; with a verb of motion, use the newly introduced preposition ad; use the dative when âtoâ indicates an indirect object. The noun error in S.A. 6 is one of countless Latin words whose meanings are easily understood from English derivatives; here and in similar instances elsewhere in the notes, English definitions are omitted, sometimes with the note â= Eng.,â and youâll be expected to deduce the meanings.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Tempora nostra nunc sunt mala; vitia nostra, magna.

QuÄrÄ soror mea uxÅrÄ« tuae litterÄs scrÄ«bit (scrÄ«bet, scrÄ«bÄbat)?

Tyrannus populum stultum Ä terrÄ vestrÄ dÅ«cet (dÅ«cit, dÅ«cÄbat).

Ubi satis ratiÅnis animÅrumque in hominibus erit?

CÅpia vÄrae virtÅ«tis multÄs culpÄs superÄre poterat.

In lÄ«berÄ cÄ«vitÄte adulÄscentiam agÄbÄmus.

RÄgem malum tolerÄre numquam dÄbÄmus.

Post parvam moram multa verba dÄ Ä«nsidiÄ«s scrÄ«ptÅrum stultÅrum scrÄ«bÄmus.

The body will remain there under the ground.

Write (sg. and pl.) many things in your (sg. and pl.) books about the glory of our state.

Does reason always lead your (pl.) queen to virtue?

We shall always see many Greek names there.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

FrÄter meus vÄ«tam in ÅtiÅ semper aget. (Terence.)

Age, age! IuvÄ mÄ! DÅ«c mÄ ad secundum fÄ«lium meum. (Terence.âage, age = come on, come on/get moving!)

Å amÄ«cÄ«, lÄ«bertÄtem perdimus. (Laberius.âperdere, to destroy; âperdition.â)

Nova perÄ«cula populÅ RÅmÄnÅ expÅnam sine morÄ. (Cicero.âexpÅnere, to set forth, expose, explain; âexponent,â âexposition.â)

Numquam perÄ«culum sine perÄ«culÅ vincÄmus. (Publilius Syrus.)

Ex meÄ«s errÅribus hominibus rÄctum iter dÄmÅnstrÄre possum. (Seneca.âerror, -rÅris, m., = Eng.; âerroneous,â âunerring.âârÄctus, -a, -um, right; ârectangle,â ârectifyâ; Eng. ârightâ is cognate.âiter, itineris, n., road, way; âitinerant,â âitinerary.â)

Catullus MÄrcÅ TulliÅ CicerÅnÄ« magnÄs grÄtiÄs agit. (Catullus.âSee âThanks a Lot, Tully!â Capvt XXVII.)

Eximia fÅrma virginis oculÅs hominum convertit. (Livy.âeximius, -a, -um, extraordinary; âexample,â âexempt.ââconvertere, to turn around, attract; âconverse,â âconvert.â)

Agamemnon magnÄs cÅpiÄs Ä terrÄ GraecÄ ad TrÅiam dÅ«cet, ubi multÅs virÅs necÄbit. (Cicero.âAgamemnon, -nonis, m.)

Amor laudis hominÄs trahit. (Cicero.)

AuctÅrÄs pÄcis Caesar cÅnservÄbit. (Cicero.âauctor, -tÅris, m., author; âauthority,â âauthorize.ââCaesar, -saris, m.; âkaiser,â âczar.â)

Inter multÄs cÅ«rÄs labÅrÄsque carmina scrÄ«bere nÅn possum. (Horace.âinter, prep. + acc., among; âinterlude,â âinterval.â)

Dum in magnÄ urbe dÄclÄmÄs, mÄ« amÄ«ce, scrÄ«ptÅrem TrÅiÄnÄ« bellÄ« in ÅtiÅ relegÅ. (Horace.âurbs, urbis, f., city; âurban,â âurbane.ââdÄclÄmÄre, to declaim; âdeclamation,â âdeclamatory.ââTrÅiÄnus, -a, -um.ârelegere, to re-read.)

NÅn vÄ«tae, sed scholae, discimus. (*Seneca.âvÄ«tae and scholae, datives expressing purpose; see S.S., SUPPLEMENTARY SYNTAX.âschola, -ae, f., school; âschoolâ comes through Lat. schola from Gk. scholÄ, leisure; âscholar,â âscholastic.â)

HominÄs, dum docent, discunt. (*Seneca.)

RatiÅ mÄ dÅ«cet, nÅn fortÅ«na. (Livy.)

Gold funerary mask of âAgamemnonâ Mycenae, 16th cent. B.C. National Archaeological Museum, Athens, Greece
Scala / Art Resource, NY

Cicero on the Ethics of Waging War

CÄ«vitÄs bellum sine causÄ bonÄ aut propter Ä«ram gerere nÅn dÄbet. SÄ« fortÅ«nÄs et agrÅs vÄ«tÄsque populÄ« nostrÄ« sine bellÅ dÄfendere poterimus, tum pÄcem cÅnservÄre dÄbÄbimus; sÄ«, autem, nÅn poterimus esse salvÄ« et servÄre pÄtriam lÄ«bertÄtemque nostram sine bellÅ, bellum erit necessÄrium. Semper dÄbÄmus dÄmÅnstrÄre, tamen, magnum officium in bellÅ, et magnam clÄmentiam post victÅriam.

Â 

Cicero Off. 1.11.34â36 and Rep. 3.23.34â35 (see LocÄ« Ant. VII for a fuller adaptation): The views expressed by Cicero here are adapted from his political treatise on the ideal state, the DÄ RÄ PÅ«blicÄ (On the Republic), written in the late 50s, before his governorship in Cilicia, and from another of his philosophical works, the DÄ OfficiÄ«s (On Moral Responsibilities), written in 45â44 B.C., when he was semi-retired from politics and living in self-imposed exile during the dictatorship of Julius Caesar and its aftermath (the same period during which he composed the Tusculan Disputations and On Friendship, selections from which you read in Capita IV and V above).âcausa, -ae, f.; âcausal,â âaccuse.ââaut, conj., or.âdÄfendere: = Eng.; âdefendantâ âdefensive.ââpoterimusâ¦ dÄbÄbimus: The fut. tense in the PROTASIS, or âif-clause,â of a CONDITIONAL SENTENCE may be translated as pres. tense, since Eng. typically employs the pres. in such conditions, the âifâ itself implying fut. action; similarly the auxiliary verb âoughtâ in Eng. often implies futurity and so the fut. of dÄbÄre can often be translated as a pres., though here dÄbÄbimus strictly has the fut. sense of we will have an obligation (to).âautem, conj., however.ânecessÄrius, -a, -um: = Eng.; ânecessity.ââclÄmentia, -ae, f., mildness, gentleness, mercy; âclemency,â âinclement.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What specific ethical views on waging war are set forth here, do you agree or disagree with them, and how do they compare with modern American attitudes and practices? Based on this reading, does Cicero seem to have been a hawk, a dove, or a pragmatist?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

CrÄscÄ<n>s SpatalÅ sal(Å«tem)!

Â 

CIL 4.4742: From the House of the Cissonii, Reg. VII, Ins. 7. Romans often scribbled a âhelloâ to their friendsâon any convenient wall, or in this case on a column, in a favorite hangout; for the nautical form, cf. the graffiti in Capita IIâIII above. âCrescensâ (from CrÄscÄns, CrÄscentis, m., but often spelled and doubtless therefore pronounced, as here, without the -n-) and âSpatalusâ are both cognomina.âsalÅ«s, salÅ«tis, f., health, safety; greeting(s); âsalutation,â âsaluteâ; the word was commonly abbreviated in inscriptions, as here; salÅ«tem = ACCUSATIVE OF EXCLAMATION, a grammatical construction indicating emotion and generally with some transitive verb understood, here, e.g., dÄ«cÅ.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! With this chapterâs copious new vocabulary, you can see again what a veritable linguistic cornucopia (a âhorn of plenty,â from cÅpia + cornÅ«, horn, which is cognate with âcornetâ!) you have in Latin. ScrÄ«ptor is one of a large group of masculine third declension nouns formed by replacing the -um of a verbâs fourth principal part with -or, a suffix meaning essentially one who performs the action of the verb. So, a monitor, -tÅris, is one who advises, i.e., an advisor; an amÄtor is a lover; etc. What would be the similarly formed nouns from docÄre and agÅ? Look at the other verbs introduced in this chapter and at the vocabularies in the previous chapters; what other such -or nouns can you form and recognize? The point is that if you know one Latin root word, then you will often discover and be able to deduce the meanings of whole families of words: the verb discere, e.g., is related to discipulus and discipula, of course, and also to the noun disciplÄ«na. I like to point out that âdisciplineâ is not âpunishmentâ but âlearning.â If you saw the popular 1993 film Man Without a Face, you heard lots of Latin, including a favorite old injunction and the motto of Englandâs Winchester College, aut disce aut discÄde, either learn or leave (I have this posted on my office door). Youâll be learning, not leaving, I have no doubt, but for now, valÄte, discipulÄ« et discipulae!

CAPVT IX

Demonstratives Hic, Ille, Iste; Special -Ä«us Adjectives

GRAMMATICA

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (sg. prÅnÅmen, pl. prÅnÅmina) AND ADJECTIVES

DEMONSTRATIVES (from dÄmÅnstrÄre, to point out) are adjectives and pronouns that in general âpointâ to persons or things that are relatively near to, or far from, a speaker or an addressee. The Latin demonstratives hic, iste, and ille are variously equivalent to English âthis/theseâ and âthat/thoseâ; their declensions generally follow that of magnus, -a, -um (Capvt IV), with the exception of the forms underlined in the following paradigms (which, as always, should be memorized by repeating the forms aloud, from left to right, hic, haec, hoc; huius, huius, huius; etc.).

Iste, that (near you), that of yours, follows the declension of ille:

Declension

Again, all three demonstratives follow the pattern of magnus, -a, -um quite closely, entirely in the plural with the exception of the neuter haec. The most striking differences are the genitive and dative singular forms (shared by the nine other special adjectives discussed below) and the -c in several forms of hic, a shortened form of the demonstrative enclitic -ce. Note that huius and huic are among the few words in which ui functions as a diphthong; for the special pronunciation of huius (= huÃ-yus) see the IntrÅductiÅ (p. xxxviiâand listen to the CDs, if you have them).

Usage, Translation, and Word Order

In general the demonstratives point out persons or things either near the speaker (hic liber, this book = this book of mine, this book here) or near the addressee (iste liber, that book, that book of yours, that book next to you), or distant from both (ille liber, that book = that book over there, that book of his or hers). Ille and hic are sometimes equivalent to the former and the latter, respectively, and occasionally they have little more force than our personal pronouns, he, she, it, they; ille can also mean the famous (ille rÄx Philippus, that famous/well-known king Philip); iste is sometimes best translated such (as you speak of/refer to), and occasionally has a disparaging sense, as in ista Ä«ra, that awful anger of yours, iste tyrannus, that despicable tyrant.

When demonstratives modify nouns, they function as adjectives; since they are by nature emphatic, they regularly precede the nouns they modify. The following examples provide practice with some of the various forms:

Â 

hic liber, this book

hanc cÄ«vitÄtem, this state

ille liber, that book

huic cÄ«vitÄtÄ«, to this state

illÄ«us librÄ«, of that book

illÄ« cÄ«vitÄtÄ«, to that state

illÄ« librÄ«, those books

illae cÄ«vitÄtÄs, those states

illÄ« librÅ, to that book

haec cÄ«vitÄs, this state

illÅ librÅ, by that book

haec cÅnsilia, these plans

istÄ«us amÄ«cÄ«, of that friend (of yours)

hoc cÅnsilium, this plan

istÄ« amÄ«cÄ«, those friends (of yours)

hÅc cÅnsiliÅ, by this plan

istÄ« amÄ«cÅ, to that friend (of yours)

huic cÅnsiliÅ, to this plan

Â 

When used alone, demonstratives function as PRONOUNS (words used prÅ nÅmine, âin place of a noun,â and referring, less specifically than a noun, to a person, place, or thing) and are often best translated as this man, that woman, these things, etc., according to their gender, number, and context. (Generally the neuter was used as a pronoun only in the nominative and accusative; in the other cases the demonstrative was usually employed as an adjective agreeing with the noun for âthing,â e.g., huius reÄ«, of this thing.)

Â 

hic, this man

ille, that man

hanc, this woman

illa, that woman

hunc, this man

illa, those things

haec, this woman

huius, of this man or woman

haec, these things

illÄ«, to that man or woman

istum, that man

illÄ«, those men

istÄrum, of those women

Â 

SPECIAL -Ä«us ADJECTIVES

Nine common first/second declension adjectives have the genitive singular ending -Ä«us and dative singular ending -Ä«, following the pattern of illÄ«us and illÄ«. Elsewhere in the singular and throughout the plural these are regular adjectives, following the pattern of magnus, -a, -um, except for the neuter singular aliud (cf. illud) and the common use of alterÄ«us, borrowed from alter, for the genitive singular of alius, alia, aliud, instead of the regular alÄ«us.

The nine adjectives in this group can be easily remembered via the acronym UNUS NAUTA, each letter of which represents the first letter of one of the adjectives (and which at the same time includes one of the nine words, Å«nus, and even reminds you that nauta, though a first declension noun, is masculine, hence the masculine form Å«nus). Note, too, that each of the nine words indicates some aspect of number:

Â 

U Å«nus, -a, -um (Å«nÄ«us, etc.), one

N nÅ«llus, -a, -um (nÅ«llÄ«us, etc.), no, none

U Å«llus, -a, -um, any

S sÅlus, -a, -um, alone, only

N neuter, neutra, neutrum, neither

A alius, -a, -ud, another, other

U uter, utra, utrum, either, which (of two)

T tÅtus, -a, -um, whole, entire

A alter, altera, alterum, the other (of two)

VOCÄBVLA

We have seen a few Latin nouns that have irregularities, including variant endings or special meanings for the plural; locus in the list below has both masculine and neuter endings in the plural, with some different meanings for each gender, so take careful note. Note too the exceptional -ud neuter endings seen in illud, istud, aliud. The adverb nimis is also unusual in having two essentially opposite meanings, excessively, which has negative connotations, andâusually when modifying an adjective or another adverbâexceedingly, which can have a positive connotation: choose the one that suits the context. In, like sub, takes an accusative with verbs of motion (virÅs in hunc locum dÅ«cÄbÄs, you were leading the men into this place), an ablative with verbs of rest (illÄ« in agrÅ sunt, those men are in the field).

Remember, as always, to learn these new words by listening and saying them aloudâaudÄ« et prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!âand continue reviewing vocabulary from prior chapters as well. Practice the new forms by declining some noun-adjective phrases of different genders, such as ille rÄx alius, ista soror sÅla, and hoc studium tÅtum.

Â 

lÃ³cus, lÃ³cÄ«, m., place; passage in literature; pl., lÃ³ca, locrum, n., places, region; lÃ³cÄ«, locrum, m., passages in literature (allocate, dislocate, locality, locomotion)

mÃ³rbus, mÃ³rbÄ«, m., disease, sickness (morbid, morbidity, morbidness, morbose)

stÃºdium, stÃºdiÄ«, n. eagerness, zeal, pursuit, study (studio, studious; cf. studÄre, to be eager for, study)

hic, haec, hoc, this; the latter; at times weakened to he, she, it, they (ad hoc)

Ãlle, Ãlla, Ãllud, that; the former; the famous; he, she, it, they

Ãste, Ãsta, Ãstud, that of yours, that; such (as you have, as you speak of); sometimes with contemptuous force, e.g., that despicable, that wretched

Ã¡lius, Ã¡lia, Ã¡liud, other, another; Ã¡liÄ«â¦ Ã¡liÄ«, someâ¦ others (alias, alibi, alien)

Ã¡lter, Ã¡ltera, Ã¡lterum, the other (of two), second (alter, alteration, alternate, alternative, altercation, altruism, adulterate, adultery)

neÃºter, neÃºtra, neÃºtrum, not either, neither (neutrality, neutralize, neutron)

nllus, nlla, nllum, not any, no, none (null, nullify, nullification, annul)

slus, sla, slum, alone, only, the only; nÅn slumâ¦ sed Ã©tiam, not onlyâ¦ but also (sole, solitary, soliloquy, solo, desolate, sullen)

ttus, tta, ttum, whole, entire (total, totality, factotum, in toto)

llus, lla, llum, any

nus, na, num, one, single, alone (unit, unite, union, onion, unanimous, unicorn, uniform, unique, unison, universal, university)

Ãºter, Ãºtra, Ãºtrum, either, which (of two)

Ã©nim, postpositive conj., for, in fact, truly

in, prep. + acc., into, toward; against (also in + abl., in, on, see Capvt III); in compounds in- may also appear as il-, ir-, im-; and it may have its literal meanings or have simply an intensive force (intend, invade, impugn): contrast the inseparable negative prefix in-, not, un-, in-, and for these and other prefixes, see the App., Some Etymological Aids

nÃmis or nÃmium, adv., too, too much, excessively; in a positive sense, esp. with adjectives and adverbs, exceedingly, very (nimiety)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After completing some of the Self-Tutorial Exercises, check your mastery of the newly introduced demonstratives and -Ä«us adjectives by identifying the number, gender, case, and use of those in the chapterâs readings. Reminder: when hic, iste, and ille have no noun to modify, it is often necessary, in order to avoid ambiguity, to supply âman/men,â âwoman/women,â or âthing(s),â depending on the wordâs number and gender; thus hicâ¦ dÅ«cet in S.A. 2 should be translated this man will lead, and not this will lead.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Hic tÅtus liber multÅs locÅs litterÄrum RÅmÄnÄrum laudat.

HÄ« igitur illÄ«s deÄbus heri grÄtiÄs agÄbant.

Illud dÄ vitiÄ«s istÄ«us rÄgÄ«nae nunc scrÄ«bam, et ista poenÄs dabit.

Neuter alterÄ« plÄnam cÅpiam pecÅ«niae tum dabit.

Potestne laus Å«llÄ«us terrae esse perpetua?

Labor Å«nÄ«us numquam poterit hÄs cÅpiÄs vincere.

MÅrÄs istÄ«us scrÄ«ptÅris erant nimis malÄ«.

NÅ«llÄ« magistrÄ«, tamen, sub istÅ vÄra docÄre audÄbant.

ValÄbuntne pÄx et lÄ«bertÄs in patriÄ nostrÄ post hanc victÅriam?

Dum illÄ« ibi remanent, aliÄ« nihil agunt, aliÄ« discunt.

Cicero was writing about the glory of the other man and his wife.

The whole state was thanking this manâs brother alone.

On account of that courage of yours those (men) will lead no troops into these places tomorrow.

Will either new book be able to point out and overcome the faults of these times?

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Ubi illÄs nunc vidÄre possum? (Terence.)

Hic illam virginem in mÄtrimÅnium dÅ«cet. (Terence.âmÄtrimÅnium, -iÄ«, n.)

Huic cÅnsiliÅ palmam dÅ. (Terence.âpalma, -ae, f., palm branch of victory; âpalmetto,â âimpalm.â)

VirtÅ«tem enim illÄ«us virÄ« amÄmus. (Cicero.)

SÅlus hunc iuvÄre potes. (Terence.)

Poena istÄ«us Å«nÄ«us hunc morbum cÄ«vitÄtis relevÄbit sed perÄ«culum semper remanÄbit. (Cicero.ârelevÄre, to relieve, diminish; ârelevant,â ârelief.â)

HÄ« enim dÄ exitiÅ huius cÄ«vitÄtis et tÅtÄ«us orbis terrÄrum cÅgitant. (Cicero.âorbis, -is, m., circle, orb; âorbicularâ âorbit.â orbis terrÄrum, idiom, the world.)

Est nÅ«llus locus utrÄ« hominÄ« in hÄc terrÄ. (Martial.)

NÅn sÅlum Äventus hoc docetâiste est magister stultÅrum!âsed etiam ratiÅ. (Livy.âÄventus, outcome; âevent,â âeventual.â)

When I Haveâ¦Enough!

Habet ÄfricÄnus mÄ«liÄns, tamen captat.

FortÅ«na multÄ«s dat nimis, satis nÅ«llÄ«.

*Martial Epig. 12.10: This epigram targets one of those scoundrels known in ancient Rome as captÄtÅrÄs, lit. grabbers, men who practically made a career of kissing up to wealthy patronsâesp. those who were old or sickâwith an eye to gaining a favorable place in their wills. The legacy-hunter satirized here, Africanus, is already a millionaire, but is still on the lookout for inheritances; Martial helps emphasize the paradox by FRAMING the first verse with the contrasting verbsâa rhetorical device common in Lat. poetry. Meter: choliambic.âmÄ«liÄns: from the Lat. word mÄ«lle, thousand, but often used hyperbolically, as here; freely = millions; âmillennium,â âmillipede.ââcaptÄre, to hunt for legacies; âcaptive,â âcaptor.ââFortÅ«na: here PERSONIFIED; like the Greek goddess Tyche, Fortuna was deified and worshiped in temples throughout the Roman empire.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Identify the CHIASMUS in line 2 (if you do not recall the meaning of the term, see the notes on âDr. Fell,â in Capvt VI above); what is the intended effect?

Â 

SÄ« vÄ«s studÄre philosophiae animÅque, hoc studium nÅn potest valÄre sine frÅ«gÄlitÄte. Haec frÅ«gÄlitÄs est paupertÄs voluntÄria. Tolle, igitur, istÄs excÅ«sÄtiÅnÄs: âNÅndum satis pecÅ«niae habeÅ. SÄ« quandÅ illud âsatisâ habÄbÅ, tum mÄ tÅtum philosophiae dabÅ.â Incipe nunc philosophiae, nÅn pecÅ«niae, studÄre.

Â 

Seneca Ep. 17.5: Seneca âthe Youngerâ (Lucius Annaeus Seneca, ca. 4 B.C.âA.D. 65), Stoic philosopher, tutor to the young Nero, and author of numerous moralizing essays, epistles, and tragedies, here urges his reader to pursue the life of the mind; accused of involvement in a conspiracy against Nero, he was forced by the emperor to commit suicide.âvÄ«s: irreg. form, you wish.âstudÄre: one of several Lat. verbs that take a dat. âobjectâ (formally introduced in Capvt XXXV), to be eager (for), devote oneself (to), pursue; related to studium in the above VocÄbula; you will be happy to note that a âstudentâ is one âeagerâ for learning!âfrÅ«gÄlitÄs -tÄtis, f.: recall that many Lat. third decl. -tÄs nouns become â-tyâ nouns in Eng., like âlibertyâ from lÄ«bertÄs.âpaupertÄs, -tÄtis, f., small means, poverty; âpauper,â âimpoverishââvoluntÄrius, -a, -um: = Eng.; âvolunteer,â âinvoluntary.ââtollere, to take away; âextol,â âextolment.ââexcÅ«sÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., excuse; âexcusable.âânÅndum, adv., not yet.âtÅtum: Lat. often uses an adj. in the pred., where Eng. would employ an adv.; hence entirely is a good option here, but what would be a more lit. translation?âincipe: imperat., begin; âincipient,â âinception.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What, in Senecaâs opinion, often stands in the way of living a philosophically sound lifestyle? What solution does he propose? What special force does istÄs have here?

Seneca (the Younger)
Museo Archaeologico Nazionale Naples, Italy
SEF / Art Resource, NY

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Â 

CIL 4.8741: Numerous graffiti from Pompeii, like this one scrawled on a column in the Large Palaestra, near the amphitheater (Reg. II), advertised a variety of services available, from architects to tailors, perfumers, and launderers. It was also common in graffiti (and other types of inscriptions as well), esp. when space was limited, to continue a word begun on one line onto the following line, as here with CORNELI/VS FAVENTI/NUS.âP. = PÅ«blius; praenomina, as noted before, were commonly abbreviated.âtÅnsor, -sÅris, m., barber, âtonsorialâ; barbers were an essential profession in the Roman empire as they are today, and archaeologists have even found in Pompeii a painted campaign notice announcing the support of a barbersâ guild for a favorite political candidate.

ETYMOLOGIA

A few examples of in- as a prefix connected with the preposition: invoke, induce, induct, inscribe, inhibit, indebted. Some examples of in- as an inseparable negative prefix: invalid, innumerable, insane, insuperable, intolerant, inanimate, infamous, inglorious, impecunious, illiberal, irrational. For both prefixes, see Appendix, Some Etymological Aids.

Lat. ille provided the Romance languages with the definite article (âtheâ) and with pronouns of the third person; and Lat. Å«nus provided these languages with the indefinite article (âa,â âanâ). Some of these forms and a few other derivatives are shown in the following table:

Fr. lÃ  (there) comes from illÄc (viÄ), an adverbial form meaning there (that way); similarly, It. lÃ , Sp. allÃ¡, Port. lÃ¡/acolÃ¡/ali, Old Occ. lai/la, Rom. acolo.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Here is a mysterious old inscription, found on a hitching post out west in Dodge City:

Â 

TOTI

EMUL

ESTO

Â 

Aha!âlooks like the newly learned dat. of tÅtus + emul, like simul, simultaneously? + some form of sum, es, est, the exotic future imperative, perhaps? (NOT!âthat old post was just âto tie mules toâ!)

Here are some more vocabulary items useful for Latin conversation and other classroom activities: surgere, to rise, stand up (surge, resurgence, insurgence); cÅnsÄ«dere, to sit down (sedentary); ambulÄre, to walk (ambulatory, amble, ambulance); aperÄ«re (fourth conjugation), to open (aperture); claudere, to close (clause, closet); dÄclÄ«nÄre; coniugÄre; crÄta, -ae, chalk (cretaceous); ÄrÄsÅ«ra, -ae, eraser; stilus, -Ä«, pen or pencil (actually a stylus); tabula, -ae, chalkboard (tabular, tabulate); tabella, -ae, the DIMINUTIVE form of tabula, notebook, writing pad (tablet); iÄnua, -ae, door (janitor, Janus, January); fenestra, -ae, window; cella, -ae, room (cell); sella, -ae, chair; mÄnsa, -ae, table; podium, -iÄ«. Now youâll know just what to do when your instructor says to you, SalvÄ, discipula (or discipule) ! Quid hodiÄ agis? Surge ex sellÄ tuÄ, ambulÄ ad tabulam, et dÄclÄ«nÄ âhic, haec, hoc.â Next thing you know, youâll be speaking Latinânot so difficult (even Roman toddlers did!): semper valÄte, amÄ«cae amÄ«cÄ«que!

The Large Palaestra, Pompeii, Italy
Robert I. Curtis

CAPVT X

Fourth Conjugation and -iÅ Verbs of the Third

GRAMMATICA

FOURTH CONJUGATION AND THIRD CONJUGATION -iÅ VERBS

This chapter introduces the active voice of the last of the regular conjugations, the fourth conjugation (illustrated here by audiÅ, audÄ«re, audÄ«vÄ«, audÄ«tum, to hear) and -iÅ verbs of the third (illustrated by capiÅ, capere, cÄpÄ«, captum, to take, seize). Like the first two conjugations, the fourth is characterized by a long stem vowel; as seen in the paradigm below, the -Ä«- is retained through all the present system tenses (present, future, imperfect), although it is shortened before vowels as well as before final -t. Certain third conjugation verbs are formed in the same way in the present system, except that the -i- is everywhere short and e appears as the stem vowel in the singular imperative (cape) and the present active infinitive (capere). AgÅ is presented alongside these new paradigms for comparison and review (see Capvt VIII).

Present Active Indicative

Future Active Indicative

Imperfect Active Indicative

Present Active Imperative

Conjugation of AudiÅ

The -Ä«re distinguishes the infinitive of the fourth conjugation from those of the other conjugations (laud-re, mon-re, Ã¡g-ere, aud-re, cÃ¡p-ere).

As in the case of the first two conjugations, the rule for the formation of the present indicative is to add the personal endings to the present stem (audÄ«-). In the third person plural this rule would give us *audi-nt but the actual form is audiunt, an ending reminiscent of Ã¡gunt.

For the future of audiÅ a good rule of thumb is this: shorten the Ä« of the present stem, audi-, and add the future endings of agÅ: -am, -Äs, -et, -Ämus, -Ätis, -ent. Once again, as in the third conjugation, -Ä- is the characteristic vowel of the future.

The imperfect is formed with -iÄ-, instead of simply the stem vowel -Ä«-, before the -bÄ- tense sign, so that the forms are audiÄbam, audiÄbÄs, etc. (rather than *audÄ«bam, etc., as might be expected).

The imperatives, however, follow exactly the pattern of the first and second conjugations, i.e., the singular is identical to the present stem (audÄ«) and the plural adds -te (audÄ«te).

Conjugation of CapiÅ

As seen from its short e stem vowel, capere is clearly an infinitive of the third conjugation, not of the fourth. The imperative forms also show that this is a verb of the third conjugation.

The present, future, and imperfect indicative of capiÅ follow the pattern of audiÅ, except that capiÅ, like agÅ, has a short -i- in cÃ¡pis, cÃ¡pimus, cÃ¡pitis.

Note carefully again that -i- appears in all present system active indicative forms for both fourth conjugation and third -iÅ verbs, and remember that two vowels, -iÄ-, appear before the -bÄ- in the imperfect.

VOCÄBVLA

Without careful vocabulary study, third conjugation -iÅ verbs and fourth conjugation verbs may be easily confused; the second principal part is a sure indicator: when you see, and hear and say (semper audÄ« et prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!), the accented, long-Ä« stem vowel, youâll know the verb is fourth conjugation. Some other words you should beware of confusing: via and vÄ«ta, dÄ«cÅ and dÅ«cÅ (and donât forget those irregular imperatives, dÄ«c, dÅ«c, fac, fer).

Youâll see from the list below that the preposition cum, with, frequently appears in one form or another as a prefix; for this, and numerous other prefixes and suffixes that appear commonly in both Latin words and their English derivatives, take a close look now at âSome Etymological Aids,â in the App., PREFIXESâSUFFIXES. After memorizing this new vocabulary, practice with some of the new verbs by writing out conjugations of vÄ«vo, fugiÅ, and veniÅ in the three tenses you have learned, plus the imperatives; compare your work with the paradigms in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, CONJUGATIONS 1â4, and recite all the forms aloud.

Â 

amÄ«cÃtia, amÄ«cÃtiae, f., friendship (amicable, amity; cf. amÅ, amÄ«ca, amÄ«cus)

cupÃditÄs, cupidittis, f., desire, longing, passion; cupidity, avarice (Cupid)

hra, hrae, f., hour, time (horoscope: from Lat., via Fr., but ultimately Gk.)

nÄtra, nÄtrae, f., nature (natural, preternatural, supernatural)

senÃ©ctÅ«s, senecttis, f., old age (senescent, senility)

tÃmor, timris, m., fear (timorous, timid)

vritÄs, vÄrittis, f., truth (verify, veritable, verity)

vÃa, vÃae, f., way, road, street (via, viaduct, deviate, devious, obvious, pervious, impervious, previous, trivial, voyage, envoy)

volÃºptÄs, volupttis, f., pleasure (voluptuary, voluptuous, voluptuosity)

betus, beta, betum, happy, fortunate, blessed (beatific, beatify, beatitude, Beatrice)

quÃ³niam, conj., since, inasmuch as

cum, prep. + abl., with. As a prefix cum may appear as com-, con-, cor-, col-, co-, and means with, together, completely, or simply has an intensive force (complete, connect, corroborate, collaborate; see App., Some Etymological Aids)

aÃºdiÅ, audre, audvÄ«, audtum, to hear, listen to (audible, audience, audit, audition, auditory; obey, through Fr. obÃ©ir from Lat. obÄdÄ«re = ob + audÄ«re)

cÃ¡piÅ, cÃ¡pere, cpÄ«, cÃ¡ptum, to take, capture, seize, get. In compounds the -a- becomes -i-, -cipiÅ (see App., Some Etymological Aids): ac-cipiÅ, ex-cipiÅ, in-cipiÅ, re-cipiÅ, etc. (capable, capacious, capsule, captious, captive, captor)

dcÅ, dcere, dxÄ«, dÃctum, to say, tell, speak; name, call (dictate, dictum, diction, dictionary, dight, ditto, contradict, indict, edict, verdict)

fÃ¡ciÅ, fÃ¡cere, fcÄ«, fÃ¡ctum, to make, do, accomplish. In compounds the -a- becomes -i-, -ficiÅ (App., SOME ETYMOLOGICAL AIDS): cÅn-ficiÅ, per-ficiÅ, etc. (facile, fact, faction, factotum, facsimile, faculty, fashion, feasible, feat; cf. officium)

fÃºgiÅ, fÃºgere, fgÄ«, fÃºgitÅ«rum, to flee, hurry away; escape; go into exile; avoid, shun (fugitive, fugue, centrifugal, refuge, subterfuge)

vÃ©niÅ, venre, vnÄ«, vÃ©ntum, to come (advent, adventure, avenue, convene, contravene, covenant, event, inconvenient, intervene, parvenu, prevent, provenience, venue)

invÃ©niÅ, invenre, invnÄ«, invÃ©ntum, to come upon, find (invent, inventor, inventive, inventory)

vvÅ, vvere, vxÄ«, vctum, to live (convivial, revive, survive, vivacity, vivid, vivify, viviparous, vivisection, victual, vittle; cf. vÄ«ta)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After memorizing the paradigms and vocabulary, and practicing with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, search for all -iÅ verbs in the chapterâs readings, and identify their person, number, tense, mood (indicative or imperative), and whether they are third or fourth conjugation. Remember to read each sentence and passage aloud, think what the Latin is saying, and then write out translations that are at once accurate and idiomatic.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Quid discipulae hodiÄ discere dÄbent?

FrÄtrÄs nihil cum ratiÅne heri gerÄbant.

Ille magnam virtÅ«tem labÅris et studiÄ« docÄre saepe audet.

Hic dÄ senectÅ«te scrÄ«bÄbat; ille, dÄ amÅre; et alius, dÄ lÄ«bertÄte.

Ex librÄ«s Å«nÄ«us virÄ« nÄtÅ«ram hÄrum Ä«nsidiÄrum dÄmÅnstrÄbimus.

IstÄ« sÅlÄ« victÅriam nimis amant; neuter dÄ pÄce cÅgitat.

Ubi cÄ«vitÄs Å«llÅs virÅs magnae sapientiae audiet?

Ex illÄ«s terrÄ«s in haec loca cum amÄ«cÄ«s vestrÄ«s venÄ«te.

Tamen post paucÄs hÅrÄs sorÅrem illÄ«us invenÄ«re poterÄmus.

CÅpiae vestrae utrum virum ibi numquam capient.

Alter Graecus remedium huius morbÄ« inveniÄbat.

Carmina illÄ«us scrÄ«ptÅris sunt plÄna nÅn sÅlum vÄritÄtis sed etiam virtÅ«tis.

We shall then come to your land without any friends.

While he was living in that place, nevertheless, we were able to have no peace.

The whole state now shuns and will always shun these vices.

He will, therefore, thank the queen and the whole people.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

CupiditÄtem pecÅ«niae glÅriaeque fugite. (Cicero.)

Officium meum faciam. (*Terence.)

FÄma tua et vÄ«ta fÄ«liae tuae in perÄ«culum crÄs venient. (Terence.)

VÄ«ta nÅn est vÄ«vere sed valÄre. (Martial.)

Semper magnÅ cum timÅre incipiÅ dÄ«cere. (Cicero.âincipiÅ, -ere, to begin; âincipient,â âinception.â)

SÄ« mÄ dÅ«cÄs, MÅ«sa, corÅnam magnÄ cum laude capiam. (Lucretius.âMÅ«sa, -ae, f., Muse; âmuseum,â âmusic.ââcorÅna, -ae, f., crown; âcoronation,â âcoronary.â)

VÄ«ve memor mortis; fugit hÅra. (Persius.âmemor, adj., nom. sg., mindful; âmemorial,â âcommemorate.ââmors, mortis, f., death; âmortify,â âpostmortem.â)

Rapite, amÄ«cÄ«, occÄsiÅnem dÄ hÅrÄ. (Horace.ârapiÅ, -ere, to snatch, seize; ârapid,â ârapture,â âravage.ââoccÄsiÅ, -Ånis, f., opportunity; âoccasion,â âoccasional.â)

PaucÄ« veniunt ad senectÅ«tem. (*Cicero.)

Sed fugit, intereÄ, fugit tempus. (Vergil.âintereÄ, adv., meanwhile.âWhy is the verb repeated?)

FÄta viam invenient. (*Vergil.âfÄtum, -Ä«, n., fate; âfatal,â âfateful.â)

Bonum virum nÄtÅ«ra, nÅn ÅrdÅ, facit. (*Publilius Syrus.âÅrdÅ, -dinis, m., rank; âordain,â âordinary.â)

Obsequium parit amÄ«cÅs; vÄritÄs parit odium. (Cicero.âobsequium, -Ä«, n., compliance; âobsequent,â âobsequious.ââpariÅ, -ere, to produce; âparent,â âpostpartum.ââodium, -Ä«, n., hate; âodious,â âannoy.â)

Marble statue of Calliope, muse of epic poetry. Hadrianic copy, probably of a 2nd cent. B.C. original by Philiskos of Rhodes Museo Nazionale Romano (Palazzo Altemps), Rome, Italy
Vanni / Art Resource, NY

The Incomparable Value of Friendship

Nihil cum amÄ«citiÄ possum comparÄre; dÄ« hominibus nihil melius dant. PecÅ«niam aliÄ« mÄlunt; aliÄ«, corpora sÄna; aliÄ«, fÄmam glÅriamque; aliÄ«, voluptÄtÄsâsed hÄ« virÄ« nimium errant, quoniam illa sunt incerta et ex fortÅ«nÄ veniunt, nÅn ex sapientiÄ. AmÄ«citia enim ex sapientiÄ et amÅre et mÅribus bonÄ«s et virtÅ«te venit; sine virtÅ«te amÄ«citia nÅn potest esse. SÄ« nÅ«llÅs amÄ«cÅs habÄs, habÄs vÄ«tam tyrannÄ«; sÄ« inveniÄs amÄ«cum vÄrum, vÄ«ta tua erit beÄta.

Â 

Cicero AmÄ«c. (see LocÄ« Ant. VI for more extensive excerpts): Before reading this selection, look back at the passage from âOn Friendshipâ that was introduced in Capvt IV, and you will realize how much your Latin skills have improved over the course of just the past few chapters.âcomparÄre: = Eng.; âcomparable,â âcomparison.â A common mistranslation of the opening clause is ânothing can compare withâ¦â: before you make this mistake, look at the ending of possum.âmelius: better; âameliorate.ââmÄlunt: prefer.âincertus, -a, -um, uncertain; âcertitude.â âinveniÄs: as noted before, a fut. tense verb in the âif-clause,â or PROTASIS, of a CONDITIONAL SENT. may be translated as pres. tense, in keeping with Eng. idiom.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What major points is Cicero making here? What are the full implications of his remark about the personal attributes that form the basis of friendship (amÄ«citiaâ¦ venit); do you agree, as an ancient Stoic would, that genuine friendship cannot truly exist in the absence of these traits? What does Cicero mean when he compares a friendless existence to a vÄ«ta tyrannÄ«? Identify one or two of the most striking stylistic devices in the passage, and comment on their rhetorical effect.

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Â 

CIL 4.9143: The person who scribbled this graffito in the atrium of the House of Fabius Rufus (Reg. VII, Ins. 16) was quite generous in his good wishes for one and all! The mark between POMPEIANIS and VBIQVE seems to be a PUNCTUM, a mark of punctuation used only occasionally in graffiti, but often in other types of inscriptions, to indicate the separation between two words. The welcoming sentiment of this graffito inspired the title of a musical score for flute and voice, âPompeianis Ubique Salutem,â by the early 20th-century composer Wolfgang Hildemann.âPompeiÄnus, -a, -um, at/of Pompeii, Pompeian.âubique, adv., anywhere; everywhere; âubiquitous.ââsalÅ«tem: do you recall the meaning of salÅ«s, and why the acc. is employed here, from the graffito in Capvt VIII? The word is related to salveÅ.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Do you remember being introduced in Capvt VIII to masculine -or nouns formed from the fourth principal parts of verbs? Well, there are lots of others related to the new verbs in this chapter: audÄ«tor, auditor, listener, is one; can you find others? Look at the section on Etymological Aids in the App., SUFFIXES below, and youâll learn a great deal more about word families, including another group of third declension nouns, mostly feminine, formed by adding the suffix -iÅ (-iÅnis, -iÅnÄ«, etc.) to the same fourth principal part. Such nouns generally indicate the performance or result of an action, e.g., audÄ«tiÅ, audÄ«tiÅnis, f., listening, hearing, and many have English derivatives in -ion (like âauditionâ). Another example from this chapterâs VocÄbula is dictiÅ, (the act of) speaking, public speaking, which gives us such derivatives as âdictionâ (the manner or style of oneâs speaking or writing), âdictionary,â âbenediction,â âcontradiction,â etc. How many other Latin nouns and English derivatives can you identify from the new verbs in this chapter? Happy hunting, but in the meantime tempus fugit, so Iâll have to say valÄte!

CAPVT XI

Personal Pronouns Ego, TÅ«, and Is; Demonstratives Is and Äªdem

GRAMMATICA

PERSONAL PRONOUNS

A PERSONAL PRONOUN is a word used âin place of a nounâ (the literal meaning of prÅnÅmen) to designate a particular person, from the speakerâs point of view: the first person pronoun indicates the speaker herself or himself (ego/nÅs, I/me, we/us), the second person pronoun indicates the person(s) addressed by the speaker (tÅ«/vÅs, you), and the third person indicates the person(s) or thing(s) the speaker is talking about (is, ea, id, and their plurals, he/him, she/her, it, they/them). You should keep a list of the types of pronouns you have learned, including the demonstratives hic, iste, ille introduced in Capvt IX.

The First and Second Person Pronouns Ego/NÅs, TÅ«/VÅs

While the first and second person pronouns are irregular in form, their declensions are similar to one another and are easily memorized; note that there are two different forms for the genitive plural.

The Third Person Pronoun Is, Ea, Id

The declension of the pronoun is, ea, id is comparable to those of hic and ille (Capvt IX), i.e., the pattern is that of magnus, -a, -um (Capvt IV), with the exception of the ten forms underlined below; note that the base is e- in all but the four forms underlined and in bold below (including the alternate nominative plural iÄ«). For the pronunciation of eius, something like âei-yus,â review the discussion of consonantal i in the IntrÅductiÅ (and listen to the Capvt XI pronoun declensions on the CDs, if you have them).

Usage and Translation

Since these pronouns are employed as substitutes for nouns, they are in general used as their corresponding nouns would be: as subjects, direct objects, indirect objects, objects of prepositions, etc.:

Ego tibi (vÅbÄ«s) librÅs dabÅ. I shall give the books to you.

Ego eÄ« (eÄ«s) librÅs dabÅ. I shall give the books to him or her (to them).

TÅ« mÄ (nÅs) nÅn capiÄs. You will not capture me (us).

EÄ« id ad nÅs mittent. They (m.) will send it (this thing) to us.

VÅs eÅs (eÄs, ea) nÅn capiÄtis. You will not seize them (those men/women/things).

Eae ea ad tÄ mittent. They (f.) will send them (those things) to you.

Note, however, that the Romans used the nominatives of the pronouns (ego, tÅ«, etc.) only when they wished to stress the subject. Commonly, therefore, the pronominal subject of a Latin verb is not indicated except by the verbâs ending.

EÄ«s pecÅ«niam dabÅ. I shall give them money.

Ego eÄ«s pecÅ«niam dabÅ; quid tÅ« dabis? I shall give them money; what will you give?

Another point of usage: when cum was employed with the ablative of the personal pronouns, it was generally suffixed to the pronoun, rather than preceding it as a separate preposition: eÅs nÅbÄ«scum ibi inveniÄs, you will find them there with us.

Note also that the genitives of ego and tÅ« (namely meÄ«, nostrum, nostrÄ«; tuÄ«, vestrum, vestrÄ«) were employed in constructions to be introduced later in the book and were not used to indicate possession, for which the Romans preferred instead to employ the POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES you have already learned:

Â 

meus, -a, -um, my

tuus, -a, -um, your

noster, -tra, -trum, our

vester, -tra, -trum, your

Â 

English usage is comparable: just as Latin says liber meus, not liber meÄ«, so English says my book, not the book of me.

The genitives of is, ea, id, on the other hand, were quite commonly used to indicate possession. Hence, while eius can sometimes be translated of him/of her/of it, it is very often best translated his/her/its; likewise eÅrum/eÄrum/eÅrum can be rendered of them, but its common possessive usage should be translated their. Study the possessives in the following examples, in which mittam governs all the nouns:

Â 

Mittam (I shall send)

pecÅ«niam meam (my money).

amÄ«cÅs meÅs (my friends).

pecÅ«niam nostram (our money).

amÄ«cÅs nostrÅs (our friends).

pecÅ«niam tuam (your money).

amÄ«cÅs tuÅs (your friends).

pecÅ«niam vestram (your money).

amÄ«cÅs vestrÅs (your friends).

pecÅ«niam eius (his, her money).

amÄ«cÅs eius (his, her friends).

pecÅ«niam eÅrum (their money).

amÄ«cÅs eÅrum (their friends).

pecÅ«niam eÄrum (their money).

amÄ«cÅs eÄrum (their friends).

Â 

The possessive pronominal adjectives of the first and the second persons naturally agree with their noun in gender, number, and case, as all adjectives agree with their nouns. The possessive genitives eius, eÅrum, and eÄrum, being pronouns, remain unchanged regardless of the gender, number, and case of the noun on which they depend.

A last important reminder regarding possessives is the fact that Latin routinely omits them, except for emphasis or to avoid ambiguity. English, on the other hand, employs possessives regularly, and so you will often need to supply them in translating from Latin (just as you do the articles âa,â âan,â and âtheâ), in order to produce an idiomatic translation; e.g., patriam amÄmus, we love our country.

Is, ea, id AS DEMONSTRATIVE

While commonly serving as Latinâs third person pronoun, is/ea/id was also used as a demonstrative, somewhat weaker in force than hic or ille and translatable as either this/these or that/those. In general you should translate the word in this way when you find it immediately preceding and modifying a noun, i.e., in the same number, gender, and case; contrast the following:

Is est bonus. He is good.

Is amÄ«cus est vir bonus. This friend is a good man.

VidÄsne eam. Do you see her?

VidÄsne eam puellam. Do you see that girl?

THE DEMONSTRATIVE Äªdem, eadem, idem

The common demonstrative Ä«dem, eadem, idem, the same (man, woman, thing), is formed simply by adding -dem directly to the forms of is, ea, id, e.g., gen. eiusdem, dat. eÄ«dem, etc.; besides the singular nominatives Ä«dem (m., for *isdem) and idem (n., rather than *iddem), the only forms not following this pattern exactly are those shown below, where final -m changes to -n- before the -dem suffix (for the full declension of Ä«dem, see the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, PRONOUNS below).

Â 

Â 

Masculine

Feminine

Neuter

Singular

Â 

Â 

Â 

Acc.

eÃºndem

eÃ¡ndem

Ãdem

Plural

Â 

Â 

Â 

Gen.

eÅrÃºndem

eÄrÃºndem

eÅrÃºndem

Â 

Like other demonstratives, Ä«dem may function as an adjective or a pronoun: eÅsdem mittÅ, I am sending the same men; dÄ eÄdem ratiÅne cÅgitÄbÄmus, we were thinking about the same plan.

VOCÄBVLA

One unusual item in this list is the noun nÄmÅ, whichâlogically, since it means no oneâoccurs only in the singular. A further irregularity is that nÅ«llÄ«us and nÅ«llÅ or nÅ«llÄ, forms of nÅ«llus, -a, -um (Capvt IX), were usually employed instead of the expected nÄminis and nÄmine, an example of a linguistic phenomenon called SUPPLETION, the use of one word as part of the form set of another, though the two are not cognate; examples in English include the verb âgo, went, goneâ (âwentâ being originally past tense of âto wendâ) and irregular adjective comparisons such as âgood, better, best.â The conjunction autem is also exceptional in that (like nimis, discussed in the Capvt IX VocÄbula) it has two quite opposite meanings, however and moreover: choose the former if the statement the word introduces seems contrary to what might be expected from the preceding statement, the latter if the second statement reinforces the first. Practice with some of the new words by writing out declensions of id caput and Ä«dem cÅnsul and comparing your work with the paradigms in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, PRONOUNS.

Â 

cÃ¡put, cÃ¡pitis, n., head; leader; beginning; life; heading; chapter (cape = headland, capital, capitol, capitulate, captain, chief, chieftain, chef, cattle, chattels, cadet, cad, achieve, decapitate, recapitulate, precipice, occiput, sinciput, kerchief)

Â 

cnsul, cnsulis, m., consul (consular, consulate, consulship; cf. cÅnsilium)

nmÅ, nÅ«llus, nminÄ«, nminem, nllÅ or nllÄ, m. or f., no one, nobody (Jules Verneâs âCaptain Nemo,â nullify; cf. nÅ«llus)

Ã©go, mÃ©Ä«, I (ego, egoism, egotism, egotistical; cf. meus, noster)

tÅ«, tÃºÄ«, you (cf. tuus, vester)

is, Ã©a, id, this, that; he, she, it (i.e. = id est, that is)

dem, Ã©adem, Ãdem, the same (the bibliographic abbreviation id. = idem, identical, identity, identify)

amcus, amca, amcum, friendly (amicable, amiable, amiablyâcf. amÅ and the nouns amÄ«cus, amÄ«ca, and amÄ«citia).

crus, cra, crum, dear (caress, charity, charitable, cherish)

quod, conj., because

nÃ©que, nec, conj. and not, nor; nÃ©queâ¦ nÃ©que or necâ¦ nec, neitherâ¦ nor

aÃºtem, postpositive conj., however; moreover

bÃ©ne, adv. of bonus, well, satisfactorily, quite (benediction, benefit, benefactor, beneficent, benevolent)

Ã©tiam, adv., even, also

intÃ©llegÅ, intellÃ©gere, intellxÄ«, intellctum, to understand (intelligent, intellegentsia, intelligible, intellect, intellectual)

mÃttÅ, mÃttere, msÄ«, mÃssum, to send, let go (admit, commit, emit, omit, permit, promise, remit, submit, transmit, compromise, demise)

sÃ©ntiÅ, sentre, snsÄ«, snsum, to feel, perceive, think, experience (assent, consent, dissent, presentiment, resent, sentient, sentimental, scent)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Before translating, scan through the readings for the newly introduced personal pronouns and demonstratives and identify the number, gender, case, and use of each. Reminder: when a form of is, ea, id precedes a noun and agrees with it in number, gender, and case, it functions as a demonstrative and should be translated as âthisâ or âthat,â e.g., eam discipulam in Ex. 5; otherwise the word functions as a pronoun, as in Ex. 1. Remember that tÄcum, nÅbÄ«scum, etc., were regularly employed instead of cum tÄ and cum nÅbÄ«s. And donât forget to read aloud and for comprehension, before attempting to translate.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Eum ad eam cum aliÅ agricolÄ heri mittÄbant.

TÅ« autem fÄ«liam beÄtam eius nunc amÄs.

Propter amÄ«citiam, ego hoc faciÅ. Quid tÅ« faciÄs, mÄ« amÄ«ce?

VÅsne eÄsdem litterÄs ad eum mittere crÄs audÄbitis?

VenÄ«, mÄ« amÄ«ce, et dÅ«c mÄ ad eius discipulam (ad eam discipulam), amÄbÅ tÄ.

Post labÅrem eius grÄtiÄs magnÄs eÄ« agÄmus.

TÅ«ne vÄritÄtem in eÅ librÅ dÄmÅnstrÄs?

AudÄ, igitur, esse semper Ä«dem.

Venitne nÄtÅ«ra mÅrum nostrÅrum ex nÅbÄ«s sÅlÄ«s?

Dum ratiÅ nÅs dÅ«cet, valÄbimus et multa bene gerÄmus.

Illum timÅrem in hÅc virÅ Å«nÅ invenÄ«mus.

Sine labÅre enim nÅ«lla pÄx in cÄ«vitÄtem eÅrum veniet.

Studium nÅn sÅlum pecÅ«niae sed etiam voluptÄtis hominÄs nimium trahit; aliÄ« eÄs cupiditÄtÄs vincere possunt, aliÄ« nÅn possunt.

His life was always dear to the whole people.

You will often find them and their friends with me in the same place.

We, however, shall now capture their forces on this road.

Since I was saying the same things to him about you and his other sisters, your brother was not listening.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

VirtÅ«s tua mÄ amÄ«cum tibi facit. (Horace.)

Id sÅlum est cÄrum mihi. (Terence.âcÄrus and other adjectives indicating relationship or attitude often take the dat., translated to or for; see Capvt XXXV).

SÄ« valÄs, bene est; ego valeÅ. (Pliny.âbene est, idiom, itâs good/thatâs good.)

Bene est mihi quod tibi bene est. (Pliny.)

âValÄ.â âEt tÅ« bene valÄ.â (Terence.)

Quid hÄ« dÄ tÄ nunc sentiunt? (Cicero.)

OmnÄs idem sentiunt. (*Cicero.âomnÄs, all men, nom. pl.; âomnifarious,â âomnivore.â)

VideÅ nÄminem ex eÄ«s hodiÄ esse amÄ«cum tibi. (Cicero.âThe subject of an infin. is regularly in the acc., hence nÄminem; add this to your list of acc. case uses, and see Capvt XXV.)

HominÄs vidÄre caput CicerÅnis in RÅstrÄ«s poterant. (Livy.âAntony proscribed Cicero and had the great oratorâs head cut off and displayed on the Rostra! ârÅstra, -Årum; see Etymologia below.)

NÅn omnÄs eadem amant aut eÄsdem cupiditÄtÄs studiaque habent. (Horace.)

Nec tÄcum possum vÄ«vere nec sine tÄ (*Martial.)

VÄrus amÄ«cus est alter Ä«dem. (Cicero.âExplain how alter Ä«dem can mean âa second self.â)

Cicero Denounces Catiline in the Senate

Quid facis, CatilÄ«na? Quid cÅgitÄs? SentÄ«mus magna vitia Ä«nsidiÄsque tuÄs. Å tempora! Å mÅrÄs! SenÄtus haec intellegit, cÅnsul videt. Hic tamen vÄ«vit. VÄ«vit? Etiam in senÄtum venit; etiam nunc cÅnsilia agere audet; oculÄ«s dÄsignat ad mortem nÅs! Et nÅs, bonÄ« virÄ«, nihil facimus! Ad mortem tÄ, CatilÄ«na, cÅnsul et senÄtus dÅ«cere dÄbent. CÅnsilium habÄmus et agere dÄbÄmus; sÄ« nunc nÅn agimus, nÅs, nÅsâapertÄ dÄ«cÅâerrÄmus! Fuge nunc, CatilÄ«na, et dÅ«c tÄcum amÄ«cÅs tuÅs. NÅbÄ«scum remanÄre nÅn potes; nÅn tÄ, nÅn istÅs, nÅn cÅnsilia vestra tolerÄbÅ!

Â 

Cicero Cat. 1.1.ff: Lucius Sergius Catilina, âCatilineâ as he is commonly called, masterminded a political conspiracy during Ciceroâs consulship; Catiline had raised an army and his plans involved a violent take-over of the government and assassination of Cicero himself; this excerpt is adapted from the In CatilÄ«nam I, Ciceroâs first oration âAgainst Catiline,â which he delivered, after uncovering the plot, in an emergency meeting of the senate, in October of 63 B.C. Catiline, as a Roman senator, was himself present, and the excerpt here is alternately addressed to him and to the other senators. You will read more excerpts from the Catilinarian orationsâCicero delivered four altogetherâin Capita XIV and XX, below, and extensive unadapted excerpts appear in LocÄ« Im. VâVI, V. VITRIOLIC DENUNCIATION¹ OF THE LEADER OF A CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE ROMAN STATE.âsenÄtus: senate; âsenescence,â âsenility.ââdÄsignÄre: = Eng.; âdesign,â âdesignation.ââmors, mortis, f., death; âpostmortem,â ârigor mortis.ââapertÄ, adv., openly; âaperture,â âovert.â)

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What course of action does Cicero believe he and the senate should ultimately take? But what is he urging Catiline to do? What range of emotions does he attempt to arouse in his fellow senators? in Catiline? One device Cicero employs extensively here is ANAPHORA, the emphatic repetition of words or phrases; identify several instances of this device and comment on their effect. What other rhetorical strategies does he employ here in order to arouse his audience?

Cicero Denouncing Catiline in the Roman Senate. Wall painting. Cesare Maccari, 19th century. Palazzo Madama, Rome, Italy
Scala / Art Resource, NY

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

HecticÄ, pÅ«pe, âva(lÄ)â MercÄtor tibi dÄ«cit.

Â 

CIL 4.4485 (Reg. VI, Ins. 13, House of Sextus Pompeius Axiochus): Mercator wrote this note carefully in tall, 4â-high letters, with puncta (see CIL 4.9143 in Capvt X) separating all the words, to his ladyfriend Hectice: both names are likely cognomina (unless mercÄtor is simply a common noun, = merchant; âmercantile,â âmerchandiseâ); HecticÄ is Greek, suggesting the lady may have been a slave or a freedwoman, and voc. case. âpÅ«pe: = pÅ«pa, from pÅ«pa, -ae, f., girl, doll; âpupa,â âpupal.â

ETYMOLOGIA

CÄrus, in this chapterâs VocÄbula, sometimes meant expensive, like Eng. âdearâ and Fr. cher. The rÅstra mentioned in S.A. 9 were in origin the ramming beaks of ships captured in a naval battle at Antium (Anzio) in 338 B.C. and affixed to the speakersâ platform in the Roman Forum to attest the victory; the beaks ultimately gave their name to the platform, and both ârostrumâ and ârostraâ continue in Eng. usage today as terms for a dais or pulpit for public speakers.

Some Romance derivatives from the Lat. personal pronouns follow:

Fr. moi, toi came from accented Lat. mÄ, tÄ, and Fr. me, te came from unaccented Lat. mÄ, tÄ; the Sp. suffix -otros derived from alterÅs. Cf. Old Occ. eu; me; me; nos/ns, vos/vs; nos; vos; and Rom. eu, tu; mie, ie; mie, ie; noi, voi; noi, voi.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, discipulÄ« et discipulae cÄrae! Notice the ending on that adjective cÄrae?âremember that when adjectives modify two nouns of different gender, one solution in classical Latin was to have it agree with the one closer to it in the sentence. By the way, now you know the source of Freudâs ego and id, and the meaning of the salutation pÄx vÅbÄ«scum/pÄx tÄcum. And, you Caesar fans, can you believe that all of the following phrases/sentences have the same translation (wellâ¦sort of!): Caesar, Caesar! Caesar eam videt. Caesar, cape eam! Caesaris convulsiÅ (that last one is, Iâll admit, a bit of a stretch: Caesarâs seizure!). According to tradition, Caesarâs last words to the assassin Brutus were et tÅ«, BrÅ«te?âto which Brutus hungrily replied, according to the late great comedian Brother Dave Gardner, âNah, I ainât even et one yet!â Did you notice in the VocÄbula the origin of the abbreviations i.e. and id.? There are dozens of Latin abbreviations in current usage; for some others, besides those at the end of Capvt VI, scan through the list in AbbreviÄtiÅnÄs. And remember those -or/-iÅ nouns? From the verbs in this VocÄbula come missor, missÅris, m., a shooter (of âmissilesââlit., a sender) and missiÅ, missiÅnis, f., literally a sending forth and used in classical Latin for release from captivity, liberation (itself from lÄ«berÄre, to free), discharge (from military service), dismissal, and, of course, mission; from compounds of mittÅ come a host of Latin nouns with further English derivatives such as âadmission,â âcommission,â âemission,â âpermission,â etc. Can you think of others, both the Latin nouns and the English derivatives, from mittÅ? And how about sentiÅ? Well, tempus fugit, so pÄx vÅbÄ«scum et valÄte!

CAPVT XII

The Perfect Active System; Synopsis

GRAMMATICA

THE PERFECT ACTIVE SYSTEM

You are already familiar with the formation and translation of the present, future, and imperfect tenses, the three tenses that constitute the present system, so-called because they are all formed on the present stem and all look at time from the absolute perspective of the present. In Latin, as in English, there are three other tenses, the perfect, the future perfect, and the pluperfect, which constitute the PERFECT SYSTEM, so-called because they are formed on a perfect (active or passive) stem and look at time from a somewhat different perspective.

Learning the forms for these three tenses in the active voice (the perfect passive system is taken up in Capvt XIX) is an easy matter, since verbs of all conjugations follow the same simple rule: perfect active stem + endings.

Principal Parts

To identify the perfect active stem of a Latin verb you must know the verbâs principal parts, just as you must know the principal parts of an English verb if you want to use English correctly. As you have seen from your vocabulary study, most regular Latin verbs have four principal parts, as illustrated by laudÅ:

Present Active Indicative: laÃºdÅ, I praise

Present Active Infinitive: laudre, to praise

Perfect Active Indicative: laudvÄ«, I praised, have praised

Perfect Passive Participle: laudtum, praised, having been praised

The principal parts of the other verbs that have appeared in the paradigms are as follows:

The first two principal parts, necessary for conjugating a verb in the present system, have been dealt with extensively already. As the first person singular of the perfect active indicative, which always ends in -Ä«, a verbâs third principal part is analogous to its first (which is, of course, the first person singular of the present active indicative and regularly ends in -Å). The fourth principal part, while given in its neuter form in this book, is for regular transitive verbs the perfect passive participle, a fully declinable verbal adjective of the -us/-a/-um variety (laudÄtus, -a, -um, etc.âsome uses of participles will be explained in Capita XIX and XXIIIâXXIV). Verbs lacking a perfect passive participle substitute the accusative supine (see Capvt XXXVIII), and some verbs like sum and other intransitives substitute a future active participle (e.g., futÅ«rum = futÅ«rus, -a, -um), while others like possum have no fourth principal part at all.

While the first and second principal parts for regular verbs follow a very consistent pattern, there are no simple rules to cover the many variations in the third and fourth principal parts (though, as we have seen, most first conjugation verbs do follow the -Å/-Äre/-ÄvÄ«/-Ätum pattern of laudÅ, and many second and fourth conjugation verbs follow the patterns of moneÅ and audiÅ); hence, as pointed out earlier, it is crucial to memorize all the principal parts in the vocabulary entry for each verb by both saying them aloud and writing them out. Your knowledge of English will help you in this memorization, since there are many derivatives from both the present stem and the perfect participial stem, as you have already discovered (e.g., âdocileâ and âdoctor,â âagentâ and âaction,â etc.).

The Perfect Active Stem

Once you know a verbâs principal parts, finding the PERFECT ACTIVE STEM is easy: simply drop the final -Ä« which characterizes the third principal part of every verb. The stems for the sample verbs in the preceding list are: laudÄv-, monu-, Äg-, cÄp-, audÄ«v-, fu-, and potu-. The following paradigms show you the endings for the three perfect system tenses.

Perfect Active Indicative

The perfect endings (-Ä«, -istÄ«, -it, etc.) are new and must be memorized; the alternate ending -Äre (laudÄvÄre, ÄgÄre, fuÄre), while fairly common, especially in Latin poetry, appears only once or twice in this book. The pluperfect is in effect the perfect stem + eram, the imperfect of sum. The future perfect is in effect the perfect stem + erÅ, the future of sum, except that the third person plural is -erint, not -erunt.

Usage, Translation, and Distinction from the Imperfect

One might ask why there are more than three tenses, since there are only three times, i.e., the past, the present, and the future. Simply put, the perfect system presents a different way of looking at time, focusing on actions that, at some given point, have been completed (perfectum, perfect, is from perficiÅ, perficere, perfÄcÄ«, perfectum, to do thoroughly, complete), and typically considering the consequences of the completed action. The following chart illustrates how this works in English, which employs the auxiliary verbs âhad,â âhas,â and âwill haveâ (the past, present, and future tenses of âto haveâ) to convey the sense of completed actions, and the concept in Latin is comparable:

The pluperfect (plÅ«perfectum = plÅ«s quam perfectum, more than complete), sometimes called the past perfect, describes an action completed in the distant past and with consequences on some action in the more recent past: âyou had studied the material previously, and so by last Friday you already understood it well.â The future perfect (futÅ«rum perfectum) describes an act that will have been completed at some future point and its consequences on a more distant point in the future: âby this weekend you will have studied the material, and so you will understand it thoroughly for Mondayâs quiz.â The perfect tense describes a completed act that has consequences for the present (and hence is sometimes called the âpresent perfectâ): âby now you have studied this chapter thoughtfully, and so you understand the concepts.â You can see from these examples how the three perfect system tenses parallel the three tenses of the present system; in the latter we simply look at events of the past, present, or future, while in the former we look at completed actions with an eye to their consequences on some subsequent time in the past, present, or future.

The perfect tense, though often functioning as a pure present perfect, sometimes serves as a simple past tense; thus puer amÄ«cum monuit can in some contexts, when not thinking specifically of the actionâs consequences, mean simply the boy warned his friend. While the imperfect tense (imperfectum, not completed, i.e., continuing) is like a video of the past, the perfect tense is more like a still photograph: with the imperfect the action is viewed as going on, repeated, or habitual, so a more exact translation of amÄ«cum monÄbat, depending upon the context, might be the boy was warning/kept warning/used to warn his friend. The more static perfect tense looks back at an action as a single, completed event (he warned his friend once), or as an event that, although completed, has consequences for the present; in this latter case, you should translate with the auxiliary âhas/haveâ (he has warned his friend, and so his friend is now prepared).

SYNOPSIS

To test your ability to conjugate a Latin verb completely, you may be asked to provide a labeled SYNOPSIS of the verb in a specified person and number, in lieu of writing out all of the verbâs forms. Following is a sample third person singular synopsis of agÅ in the indicative mood, active voice:

VOCÄBVLA

Be sure to distinguish between pater, father, in this new list and patria, fatherland, learned previously; and donât give the s in Caesar the âzâ sound it has in English. As you study this new vocabulary, you should also check your mastery of words learned in Capita IâXI; for review you can use vocabulary cards or cumulative vocabulary lists (available at www.wheelockslatin.comâor make your own), but in memorizing this new list, be sure to listen to the CDs or the online audio, andâ¦ audÄ« et prÅnÅ«ntiÄ! After memorizing this list, practice with its three new verbs by writing out a synopsis, each in a different person and number, then check your work by comparing the paradigms in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, CONJUGATIONS 1â4.

Â 

adulscÄns, adulÄscÃ©ntis, m. and f., young man or woman (adolescent, adolescence, adult; cf. adulÄscentia)

Ã¡nnus, Ã¡nnÄ«, m., year (annals, anniversary, annuity, annual, biennial, perennial, centennial, millennium, superannuated)

Ãsia, Ãsiae, f., Asia, commonly referring to Asia Minor (see Map 3)

CaÃ©sar, CaÃ©saris, m., Caesar (Caesarian, Caesarism, kaiser, czar, tsar)

mter, mtris, f., mother (maternal, maternity, matriarchy, matrimony, matricide, matriculate, matrilineal, matrix, matron)

mÃ©dicus, mÃ©dicÄ«, m., and mÃ©dica, mÃ©dicae, f., doctor, physician (medic, medical, medicate, medicine, medicinal)

pÃ¡ter, pÃ¡tris, m., father (paternal, paternity, patrician, patrimony, patron, patronage, patronize, patter, padre, pÃ¨re; cf. patria)

patiÃ©ntia, patiÃ©ntiae, f., suffering; patience, endurance (patient, impatient)

prÄ«ncÃpium, prÄ«ncÃpiÄ«, n., beginning (principal, principle)

acÃ©rbus, acÃ©rba, acÃ©rbum, harsh, bitter, grievous (acerbic, acerbity, exacerbate)

prÅ, prep. + abl., in front of, before, on behalf of, for the sake of, in return for, instead of, for, as; also as prefix (pros and cons; for pro-as a prefix, see App., Some Etymological Aids)

dÃÅ«, adv., long, for a long time

nper, adv., recently

ÄmÃttÅ, ÄmÃttere, ÄmsÄ«, ÄmÃssum, to send away; lose, let go (amissible; cf. omit, omission)

cÃ¡dÅ, cÃ¡dere, cÃ©cidÄ«, cÄsrum, to fall (cadence, case, casual, cascade, chance, accident, incident, decadence, decay, deciduous)

crÃ©Å, crÃ©re, crÃ©vÄ«, crÃ©tum, to create (creation, creativity, creature, procreate)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After learning the new paradigms and vocabulary and testing yourself with some of the Self-Tutorial Exercises, scan through the following readings for examples of perfect system verbs, identifying the tense, number, and person of each. Listen to the CDs, if you have them, and read each sentence and passage aloud. In translating the perfect tense, remember the options: e.g., which is the better choice for ÄmÄ«sit in the selection âPliny Writes to Marcellinusâ the simple past tense âlostâ or the pure present perfect âhas lost,â and why?

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

VÅs nÅbÄ«s dÄ voluptÄtibus adulÄscentiae tum scrÄ«pseritis.

RatiÅnÄs alterÄ«us fÄ«liae heri nÅn fuÄrunt eaedem.

NÄmÅ in hanc viam ex utrÄ portÄ fÅ«gerat.

IllÄ« autem ad nÅs cum medicÄ eius nÅ«per vÄnÄrunt.

IllÄ« adulÄscentÄs ad tÄ propter amÄ«citiam saepe veniÄbant.

Eundem timÅrem nec in istÅ cÅnsule nec in amÄ«cÅ eius sÄnsimus.

Post paucÄs hÅrÄs Caesar Asiam cÄpit.

Illa fÄmina beÄta sÅla magnam cupiditÄtem pÄcis sÄnsit.

Potuistisne bonam vÄ«tam sine Å«llÄ lÄ«bertÄte agere?

VÄritÄs igitur fuit tÅtÄ« populÅ cÄra.

Neuter medicus nÅmen patris audÄ«verat.

That friendly queen did not remain there a long time.

Our mothers had not understood the nature of that place.

However, we had found no fault in the head of our country.

They kept sending her to him with me.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQUAE

In prÄ«ncipiÅ Deus creÄvit caelum et terram; et Deus creÄvit hominem. (Genesis.)

In triumphÅ Caesar praetulit hunc titulum: âVÄnÄ«, vÄ«dÄ«, vÄ«cÄ«.â (Suetonius.âtriumphus, -Ä«, m., triumphal procession, here celebrating his quick victory at Zela in Asia Minor in 47 B.C.âpraeferÅ, -ferre, -tulÄ«, -lÄtum, to display; âprefer,â âprelate.ââtitulus, -Ä«, m., placard; âtitle,â âtitular.â)

VÄ«xit, dum vÄ«xit, bene. (*Terence.)

AdulÄscÄns vult diÅ« vÄ«vere; senex diÅ« vÄ«xit. (Cicero.âvult, irreg., wishes; âvolition,â âbenevolent.ââsenex, senis, m., old man; âsenator,â âsenior.â)

NÅn ille diÅ« vÄ«xit, sed diÅ« fuit. (*Seneca.)

Hui, dÄ«xistÄ« pulchrÄ! (*Terence.âhui, interj., comparable to Eng. âwhee!ââpulchrÄ, adv. from pulcher; adverbs were commonly formed from adjectives in this way. See Capita XXVIâXXVII, and cf., e.g., vÄrÄ from vÄrus, lÄ«berÄ from lÄ«ber, and the irreg. bene from bonus.)

SophoclÄs ad summam senectÅ«tem tragoediÄs fÄcit. (*Cicero.âSophoclÄs, -clis, m., the famous Athenian playwright.âsummus, -a, -um, extreme; âsummary,â âsummit.ââtragoedia, -ae, f., tragedy; âtragedian,â âtragic.â)

IllÄ« nÅn sÅlum pecÅ«niam sed etiam vÄ«tam prÅ patriÄ prÅfÅ«dÄrunt. (Cicero.âprÅfundÅ, -ere, -fÅ«dÄ«, -fÅ«sum, to pour forth; âprofuse,â ârefuse.â)

RÄgÄs RÅmam Ä prÄ«ncipiÅ habuÄre; lÄ«bertÄtem LÅ«cius BrÅ«tus RÅmÄnÄ«s dedit. (Tacitus.âÄ + abl., from.âhabuÄre: though this may resemble an infin., it is one of the newly introduced perf. system forms.)

Sub Caesare autem lÄ«bertÄtem perdidimus. (Laberius.âperdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, to destroy, lose; âperdition,â âperdue.â)

QuandÅ lÄ«bertÄs ceciderit, nÄmÅ lÄ«berÄ dÄ«cere audÄbit. (Publilius Syrus.)

Pliny Writes to Marcellinus about the Death of Fundanusâ Daughter

SalvÄ, MarcellÄ«ne! Haec tibi scrÄ«bÅ dÄ FundÄnÅ, amÄ«cÅ nostrÅ, quod is fÄ«liam cÄram et bellam ÄmÄ«sit. Illa puella nÅn XIII annÅs vÄ«xerat, sed nÄtÅ«ra eÄ« multam sapientiam dederat. MÄtrem patremque, frÄtrem sorÅremque, nÅs et aliÅs amÄ«cÅs, magistrÅs magistrÄsque semper amÄbat, et nÅs eam amÄbÄmus laudÄbÄmusque. MedicÄ« eam adiuvÄre nÅn poterant. Quoniam illa autem magnÅs animÅs habuit, morbum nimis malum cum patientiÄ tolerÄvit. Nunc, mÄ« amÄ«ce, mitte FundÄnÅ nostrÅ litterÄs dÄ fortÅ«nÄ acerbÄ fÄ«liae eius. ValÄ.

Â 

Pliny Ep. 5.16 (for a longer, unadapted excerpt, see LocÄ« Im. XL): Pliny the Younger (Gaius Plinius Caecilius Secundus, ca. A.D. 61â112) was a senator, consul, and provincial governor, and an important literary figure during the reigns of Domitian, Nerva, and Trajan. Among his surviving works are 10 volumes of letters that provide us with invaluable insights into the society and politics of the period.âXIII annÅs, for 13 years, ACC. OF DURATION OF TIME (a construction formally introduced in Capvt XXXVII). Minicius Fundanus was a consul in A.D. 107; his daughterâs funerary urn and the following epitaph were found in the familyâs tomb outside of Rome (the parentheses indicate words abbreviated in the original inscription): D(Ä«s) M(Änibus) Miniciae Marcellae FundÄnÄ« f(Ä«liae); v(Ä«xit) a(nnÅs) XII m(ÄnsÄs) XI d(iÄs) VII. The dÄ« mÄnÄs to whom the epitaph is dedicated were the spirits of the dead, who protected the deceased.âmÄnsÄs: months; âsemester,â âtrimester.ââdiÄs: days; âdiary,â âmeridian,â âcarpe diem.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What are Plinyâs specific objectives in writing to Marcellinus? What virtues did Pliny especially admire in Minicia, Fundanusâ daughter?

Diaulus Still Buries His Clients

NÅ«per erat medicus, nunc est vespillo Diaulus.

Quod vespillo facit, fÄcerat et medicus.

*Martial Epig. 1.47: meter: elegiac couplet.âvespillÅ, -lÅnis, m., undertaker; final -Å was often shortened in verse, for metrical purposes and as a reflection of actual pronunciation habits in conversational Latin.âquod: what. âet: here, as often, = etiam.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What is (grimly) humorous about Diaulusâ career change?âhow were his two professions strikingly different, and yet alike? Comment on the different word order strategies employed in each verse; what is âsuspensefulâ in the arrangement of line 1? How is the arrangement of the second line, including the juxtaposition facit/ fÄcerat, especially appropriate to the circumstance Martial describes? Do you see the chiasmus in the overall ordering of the four clauses in the two lines?

Page from manuscript of Plinyâs Epistulae
(Ep. 3.4.8â9 and 3.5.1â3) 6th cent. A.D., Italy
The Pierpont Morgan Library New York
The Pierpont Morgan Library / Art Resource, NY

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Â 

CIL 4.7535: Of the thousands of wall paintings in Pompeii, only those in the outside dining area of the large and richly decorated house of Octavius Quartio (Reg. II, Ins. 5.2, on the Via dellâAbbondanza) are signed by the artist; on a bench situated near his murals of Narcissus, in one panel, and of Pyramus and Thisbe, in another, Lucius painted his own signature about 5² wide in bold white letters on a red background.âpingÅ, -ere, pÄ«nxÄ«, pictum, to decorate with color, paint (a picture); âpicture,â âdepict.â

ETYMOLOGIA

Further examples of how your knowledge of Eng. words can assist in learning the principal parts of Lat. verbs, as well as vice-versa:

Â 

Latin Verb

Pres. Stem in Eng. Word

Perf. Partic. Stem in Eng. Word

videÅ

provide (vidÄre)

provision (vÄ«sum)

maneÅ

permanent (manÄre)

mansion (mÄnsum)

vÄ«vÅ

revive (vÄ«vere)

victuals (vÄ«ctum)

sentiÅ

sentiment (sentÄ«re)

sense (sÄnsum)

veniÅ

intervene (venÄ«re)

intervention (ventum)

faciÅ

facile (facere)

fact (factum)

Â 

The connection between Lat. pater and patria (father-land) is obvious. However, although Eng. âpatriarch,â âpatriot,â and âpatronymicâ contain the stem patr-, which is meaningful to one who knows the Lat. words, nevertheless these Eng. words are actually derived from Gk., in which the stem patr- is cognate with the Lat. stem; cf. Gk. patr, father, pÃ¡trÄ or patrÃs, fatherland, patriÃ¡, lineage.

And here are several other derivatives from fundere, the root verb of prÅfundere in S.A. 8: confound, confuse, effuse, effusive, fuse, fusion, refund, transfusion.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, discipulae discipulÄ«que cÄrÄ«! As we saw in S. A. 2 above, Caesar is said to have proclaimed vÄnÄ«, vÄ«dÄ«, vÄ«cÄ« in propagandizing his victory at Zelaâa good example of the perfect tense, a âsnapshotâ of the action whose rapid conclusion the general wanted to emphasize. There are now some 20th-cent. variants on this boast: from the mall-masters, VENI, VIDI, VISA, âI came, I saw, I shopped!â and from the vegetarians, VENI, VIDI, VEGI, âI came, I saw, I had a saladâ; and how about VENI, VIDI, VELCRO, âI came, I saw, I stuck aroundâ? Are you groaning?!!âbut remember, patientia est virtÅ«s, and there may yet be worse to come: meantime, rÄ«dÄte (from rÄ«dÄre, to smile) et valÄte!

CAPVT XIII

Reflexive Pronouns and Possessives; Intensive Pronoun

GRAMMATICA

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS differ from other pronouns in that they are used ordinarily only in the predicate and refer back to the subject. âReflexiveâ derives from reflectÅ, -ere, -flexÄ«, -flexum, to bend back: reflexive pronouns âbend backâ to the subject, i.e., they âreflectâ or refer to the subject. Here are some English examples, contrasted with personal pronouns:

Â 

Reflexive Pronouns

Personal Pronouns

I praised myself.

You praised me.

Cicero praised himself.

Cicero praised him (Caesar).

Declension of Reflexives

Since reflexive pronouns refer to the subject, they cannot be the subject (except, as you will see in Capvt XXV, as accusative subject of an infinitive phrase, as in English âHe considered himself to be a good studentâ), and hence they have no nominative case. Otherwise, the declension of the reflexives of the first and the second persons is the same as that of the corresponding personal pronouns.

The third person reflexive pronoun, however, has its own peculiar forms; these are easily recognizable because, as seen from the following chart, they are identical to the singular of tÅ«, except that the nominative is lacking and the forms begin with s- rather than t-. Note also that the singular and plural are identical, or, to put it another way, singular and plural were not distinguished and did not need to be, since reflexives in fact âreflectâ the number (as well as the gender) of the subject; e.g., sÄ is easily understood to mean herself in the sentence fÄmina dÄ sÄ cÅgitÄbat (the woman was thinking about herself) and themselves in the sentence virÄ« dÄ sÄ cÅgitÄbant (the men were thinking about themselves).

Comparison of First and Second Person Reflexive and Personal Pronouns

TÅ« tÄ laudÄvistÄ«. You praised yourself.

CicerÅ tÄ laudÄvit. Cicero praised you.

NÅs laudÄvimus nÅs. We praised ourselves.

CicerÅ nÅs laudÄvit. Cicero praised us.

Ego mihi litterÄs scrÄ«psÄ«. I wrote a letter to myself.

CicerÅ mihi litterÄs scrÄ«psit. Cicero wrote a letter to me.

Comparison of Third Person Reflexive and Personal Pronouns

CicerÅ sÄ laudÄvit. Cicero praised himself.

CicerÅ eum laudÄvit. Cicero praised him (e.g., Caesar).

RÅmÄnÄ« sÄ laudÄvÄrunt. The Romans praised themselves.

RÅmÄnÄ« eÅs laudÄvÄrunt. The Romans praised them (e.g., the Greeks).

Puella sÄ servÄvit. The girl saved herself.

Puella eam servÄvit. The girl saved her (i.e., another girl).

REFLEXIVE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES

The REFLEXIVE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES of the first and the second persons are identical with the regular possessives already familiar to you: meus, tuus, noster, vester (i.e., my, my own; your, your own; etc.): Meum librum habÄs; you have my book. Meum librum habeÅ; I have my own book.

The third person reflexive possessive, however, is a new word, suus, sua, suum, his (own), her (own), its (own), their (own). While easily declined (just like tuus, -a, -um, a regular first/second declension adjective), some important points must be kept in mind regarding the wordâs usage and translation. First, like any adjective, suus, -a, -um, must agree with the noun it modifies in number, gender, and case. Its English translation, however, like that of the reflexive pronoun, must naturally reflect the gender and number of the subject to which it refers; e.g., vir fÄ«lium suum laudat, the man praises his (own) son, vs. fÄmina fÄ«lium suum laudat, the woman praises her (own) son, and virÄ« patriam suam laudant, the men praise their (own) country. Finally, the reflexive possessive adjective suus, -a, -um must be carefully distinguished from the nonreflexive possessive genitives eius, eÅrum, eÄrum (his/her, their: see Capvt XI), which refer to some person(s) other than the subject.

CicerÅ amÄ«cum suum laudÄvit. Cicero praised his (own) friend.

CicerÅ amÄ«cum eius laudÄvit. Cicero praised his (Caesarâs) friend.

RÅmÄnÄ« amÄ«cum suum laudÄvÄrunt. The Romans praised their (own) friend.

RÅmÄnÄ« amÄ«cum eÅrum laudÄvÄrunt. The Romans praised their (the Greeksâ) friend.

FÄmina amÄ«cÄ«s suÄ«s litterÄs scrÄ«psit. The woman wrote a letter to her (own) friends.

FÄmina amÄ«cÄ«s eius litterÄs scrÄ«psit. The woman wrote a letter to his (or her, i.e., someone elseâs) friends.

FÄmina amÄ«cÄ«s eÅrum litterÄs scrÄ«psit. The woman wrote a letter to their (some other personsâ) friends.

THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN Ipse, ipsa, ipsum

The INTENSIVE PRONOUN ipse, ipsa, ipsum follows the declensional pattern of the demonstratives in the genitive and the dative singular (i.e., gen. ipsÄ«us, ipsÄ«us, ipsÄ«us, dat. ipsÄ«, ipsÄ«, ipsÄ«: see App., SvmmÄrivm FÅrmÄrvm); otherwise, it is like magnus, -a, -um. The Romans used the intensive pronoun to emphasize any noun or pronoun in either the subject or the predicate of a sentence; consequently its possible translations include myself/ourselves (1st pers.), yourself/yourselves (2nd pers.), and himself/herself/itself/themselves (3rd pers.), as well as the very and the actual, as illustrated in the following examples:

CicerÅ ipse mÄ laudÄvit. Cicero himself praised me.

CicerÅ mÄ ipsum laudÄvit. Cicero praised me myself (i.e., actually praised me)

Ipse amÄ«cum eius laudÄvÄ«. I myself praised his friend.

FÄ«lia vÅbÄ«s ipsÄ«s litterÄs scrÄ«psit. Your daughter wrote a letter to you yourselves.

CicerÅ litterÄs ipsÄs Caesaris vÄ«dit. Cicero saw Caesarâs letter itself (i.e., Caesarâs actual letter).

VOCÄBVLA

This chapterâs vocabulary list introduces another noun, dÄ«vitiae, which, like Ä«nsidiae in Capvt VI and others youâll encounter later on, has plural forms with essentially singular meaningâthough in this case the singular, wealth, is a âcollective,â implying amassed riches; language has lots of twists and turns like this, all of them intriguing. Per, as you will see, is another preposition that turns up frequently, in a variety of forms, as a prefix, both in Latin words and in such English derivatives as âperfect,â âperspire,â and âpellucidâ; review again the several common Latin prefixes and suffixes listed in âSome Etymological Aids,â in the App., PREFIXES. Ålim, with its seemingly opposite meanings of long ago and some day (in the future), is related to ille and like it refers to something distant, i.e., a time in either the distant past or the distant future. Once you have memorized the new vocabulary, practice by writing out the declension of ipsum factum and doing a synopsis of one of the newly introduced verbs, then compare your work with the paradigms in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, PRONOUNS and CONJUGATIONS 1â4.

Â 

dÄ«vÃtiae, dÄ«vÃtirum, f. pl., riches, wealth

fÃ¡ctum, fÃ¡ctÄ«, n., deed, act, achievement (fact, factual, faction, feat; cf. faciÅ)

sÃgnum, sÃgnÄ«, n., sign, signal, indication; seal (assign, consign, countersign, design, ensign, insignia, resign, seal, signet)

Ãpse, Ãpsa, Ãpsum, intensive pron., myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself, etc., the very, the actual (ipso facto, solipsistic)

quÃsque, quÃdque (gen. cuiÃºsque; dat. cuÃque), indefinite pron., each one, each person, each thing

sÃºÄ«, reflexive pron. of 3rd pers., himself, herself, itself, themselves (suicide, per se)

dÃ³ctus, dÃ³cta, dÃ³ctum, taught, learned, skilled (doctor, doctorate, doctrine, indoctrinate; cf. doceÅ)

fortÅ«ntus, fortÅ«nta, fortÅ«ntum, lucky, fortunate, happy (unfortunate; cf. fortÅ«na)

sÃºus, sÃºa sÃºum, reflexive possessive adj. of 3rd pers., his own, her own, its own, their own (sui generis)

nam, conj., for

Ã¡nte, prep. + acc., before (in place or time), in front of; adv., before, previously; not to be confused with Greek anti, against (antebellum, antedate, ante-room, anterior, antediluvian, A.M. = ante merÄ«diem/âbefore midday,â advance, advantage)

per, prep. + acc., through; with reflexive pron., by; per- (assimilated to pel- before forms beginning with l-), as a prefix, through, through and through = thoroughly, completely, very (perchance, perforce, perhaps, perceive, perfect, perspire, percolate, percussion, perchloride, pellucid)

lim, adv., once (upon a time), long ago, formerly; some day, in the future

Ã¡lÅ, Ã¡lere, Ã¡luÄ«, Ã¡ltum, to nourish, support, sustain, increase; cherish (aliment, alimentary, alimony, coalesce, adolescence; the adj. altus, -a, -um, = tall, high, because what is ânourishedâ grows)

dligÅ, dÄ«lÃgere, dÄ«lxÄ«, dÄ«lctum, to esteem, love (diligent, diligence)

iÃºngÅ, iÃºngere, inxÄ«, inctum, to join (join, joint, junction, juncture, adjunct, conjunction, enjoin, injunction, subjunctive)

stÅ, stre, stÃ©tÄ«, stÃ¡tum, to stand, stand still or firm (stable, state, station, statue, stature, statute, establish, instant, instate, reinstate, stay)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Before attempting these readings, remember to test your mastery of the new material by writing out your answers to several of the Self-Tutorial Exercises, including some of the translations, and then checking your work against the Answer Key. Next listen to the readings, if you have the CDs, read them aloud once or twice for comprehension, and then write out your translations; for practice with the new grammar, scan through the readings for all the reflexives and intensives and identify the number, gender, case, and use of each. Translation tips: when an intensive modifies a noun or pronoun, simply translate accordingly, e.g., mÄ ipsum in Ex. 3 means me myself, but when there is no modified noun/pronoun, you must supply âhe, she, they,â etc., e.g., in Ex. 6 ipsÄ« is clearly masculine nominative plural and must be the subject, hence they themselves or the men themselves. In the case of a reflexive possessive, when the antecedent is clear from the context and no particular emphasis is intended, you may sometimes omit âownâ for more natural English idiom; in Ex. 10, e.g., it is acceptable to translate litterÄs suÄs simply as her letter, understanding of course that the reference is to her own, not someone elseâs, letter.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

CÅnsulÄs sÄ nec tÄcum nec cum illÄ«s aliÄ«s iungÄbant.

TÅtus populus RÅmÄnus lÄ«bertÄtem ÄmÄ«sit.

RÄx malus enim mÄ ipsum capere numquam potuit.

Ad patrem mÄtremque eÅrum per illum locum tum fÅ«gistis.

DÄ« animÅs creant et eÅs in corpora hominum Ä caelÅ mittunt.

IpsÄ« per sÄ eum in AsiÄ nÅ«per vÄ«cÄrunt.

In hÄc viÄ CicerÅ medicum eius vÄ«dit, nÅn suum.

NÄmÅ fÄ«liam acerbam cÅnsulis ipsÄ«us diÅ« dÄ«ligere potuit.

HÄ« CicerÅnem ipsum sÄcum iÅ«nxÄrunt, nam eum semper dÄ«lÄxerant.

FÄmina amÄ«ca vÅbÄ«s ante illam hÅram litterÄs suÄs mÄ«serit.

Ille bonam senectÅ«tem habuit, nam per annÅs bene vÄ«xerat.

MÄter fÄ«lium bene intellÄxit et Ä«ram sÄnserat, et adulÄscÄns eÄ« prÅ patientiÄ grÄtiÄs Ägit.

MÄ cum istÄ«s et capite eÅrum nÅn iungam, nec tÅ« autem tÄ eÄ«scum iungere dÄbÄs.

However, those young men came to Caesar himself yesterday.

Cicero, therefore, will never join his (Caesarâs) name with his own.

Cicero always esteemed himself and even you esteem yourself.

Cicero used to praise his own books and I now praise my own books.

The consul Cicero himself had never seen his (Caesarâs) book.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Ipse ad eÅs contendÄbat equitÄsque ante sÄ mÄ«sit. (Caesar.âcontendÅ, -ere, to hasten; âcontender,â âcontention.ââeques, equitis, m., horseman; âequestrianâ; cf. equus, horse.)

IpsÄ« nihil per sÄ sine eÅ facere potuÄrunt. (Cicero.)

Ipse signum suum et litterÄs suÄs Ä prÄ«ncipiÅ recognÅvit. (Cicero.ârecognÅscÅ, -ere, -cognÅvÄ«, -cognitum, to recognize; ârecognizance,â âreconnaissance.â)

Quisque ipse sÄ dÄ«ligit, quod quisque per sÄ sibi cÄrus est. (Cicero.)

Ex vitiÅ alterÄ«us sapiÄns Ämendat suum. (*Publilius Syrus.âsapiÄns, -entis, m., wise man, philosopher; âsavant,â âhomo sapiens.ââÄmendÄre, to correct; âamend,â âemend,â âmend.â)

RecÄde in tÄ ipsum. (*Seneca.ârecÄdÅ, -ere, to withdraw; ârecede,â ârecess.â)

Animus sÄ ipse alit. (*Seneca.)

HomÅ doctus in sÄ semper dÄ«vitiÄs habet. (Phaedrus.)

Alexander the Great and the Power of Literature

Magnus ille Alexander multÅs scrÄ«ptÅrÄs factÅrum suÅrum sÄcum semper habÄbat. Is enim ante tumulum Achillis Ålim stetit et dÄ«xit haec verba: âFuistÄ« fortÅ«nÄtus, Å adulÄscÄns, quod HomÄrum laudÄtÅrem virtÅ«tis tuae invÄnistÄ«.â Et vÄrÄ! Nam, sine Äªliade illÄ, Ä«dem tumulus et corpus eius et nÅmen obruere potuit. Nihil corpus hÅ«mÄnum cÅnservÄre potest; sed litterae magnae nÅmen virÄ« magnÄ« saepe cÅnservÄre possunt.

Â 

Cicero Arch. 10.24: The PrÅ ArchiÄ, In Defense of Archias, is one of the best known of Ciceroâs dozens of surviving speeches; in it Cicero defended his friend, the Greek poet Archias, against legal challenges to his Roman citizenship status. As just one means of persuading the court, Cicero spoke eloquently on the benefits that poets and poetry could provide a society and its citizens, including its ruling class. Alexander the Great, son of Philip of Macedon, became king when his father died in 336 and by the time of his own premature death in 323 at the age of 33 had led his Macedonian army in the conquest of Greece, much of the near east, and Egypt, marching even into India. He had been educated by Aristotle and himself clearly understood the power of poetry, and of the written word in general, as this anecdote makes clear. âille: what special sense of the demonstrative is particularly apt here, and in the phrase Äªliade illÄ below as well?âtumulus, -Ä«, m., tomb, grave; âtumulus,â âtumular.ââsÄ: here, as often, â-selfâ can be omitted, both for more natural Eng. idiom and because the reflexive force is sufficiently clear from the context.âAchillÄs, -lis, m.âHomÄrus, -Ä«. m.âlaudÄtor, -tÅris, m., lit., one who praises (see Capvt VIII, LatÄ«na Est Gaudium, for the basic sense of nouns ending in -or), eulogist, chronicler; âlaud,â âlaudatory.â âvÄrÄ: adv. of vÄrus; âverify,â âverity.ââÄªlias, -adis, f., Iliad.âetâ¦ et: take careful note of what the conjunctions here must be linking; the potential for misconstruing derives from the fact that corpus is an ambiguous form, but the ambiguity is resolved with the sg. verb potuit.âobruÅ, -ere, to overwhelm, bury; âruin,â âruination.â

Alexander the Great. Detail of marble Roman statue, 1st cent. A.D. Found in the Baths of Trajan at Cyrene. Museum, Cyrene, Libya
Â© Gilles Mermet / Art Resource, NY

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Explain what Alexander felt had made Achilles so fortunate, despite his legendary early death. What point does Cicero draw from this anecdote, how was it appropriate to his own political position, and would a U.S. senator today likely agree?

The Authority of a Teacherâs Opinion

MagistrÄ« bonÄ« discipulÄ«s sententiÄs suÄs nÅn semper dÄ«cere dÄbent. DiscipulÄ« Pthagorae in disputÄtiÅnibus saepe dÄ«cÄbant: âIpse dÄ«xit!â PthagorÄs, eÅrum magister philosophiae, erat âipseâ: sententiae eius etiam sine ratiÅne valuÄrunt. In philosophiÄ autem ratiÅ sÅla, nÅn sententia, valÄre dÄbet.

Â 

Cicero Nat. D. 1.5.10: The DÄ NÄtÅ«rÄ DeÅrum (whose Lat. title you can easily translate) was one of three religious treatises (the others being DÄ FÄtÅ, On Fate, and DÄ DÄ«vinÄtiÅne, On Divination) authored by Cicero in 45â44 B.C. and dealing with the major views then prevalent of the nature of the gods (Cicero himself believed in the existence of a divine being), the validity of divination (which he rejected), and the free will/determinism debate (in which he argued for the former). In this passage he comments on dogmatism and the fallacy of arguments based on an âexpertâsâ authority.âPthagorÄs, -ae, m.; Pythagoras was a 6th cent. B.C. Greek scientist, mathematician, philosopher, and religious leader known for his doctrine of the transmigration of souls into other humans, animals, and plants, as well as such discoveries as the Pythagorean theorem and theories of musical harmonies.âdisputÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., argument, debate; âdisputable,â âdisputation.ââipse dÄ«xit: sc. id as direct obj.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: On what basis does Cicero criticize Pythagoras and, less directly, his followers as well? Have you ever had a teacher yourself whose âauthorityâ in a sense diminished the true effectiveness of his or her teaching?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

âVÄnimus hÅc cupidÄ«!â ScrÄ«bit{t} CornÄlius MÄrtiÄlis.

Â 

CIL 4.8891 (Reg. III, Ins. 5): The first sentence of this graffito, written near the entrance to a shop, is the opening of an amatory poem found in several other locations in Pompeii (e.g., CIL 4.1227 and 6697); the meter is ELEGIAC COUPLET, so we know the verb must be vÄnimus and not venÄ«mus: what are the two different tenses? The scribbler was so pleased with recalling and writing out this half verse that he signed his workâunfortunately misspelling the verb scrÄ«bit: remember that the brackets {â¦} are conventionally employed to indicate letters added to a wordâs spelling in error.âhÅc (more commonly hÅ«c), adv., to this place, hither (related to hic, haec, hoc).âcupidus, -a, -um, desirous, eager, fond; âCupid,â âcupidity.â

Â 

Â 

CIL 4.4753: Inscribed by a lad to his dad, on a column in the house of L. Cissonius Secundus (Reg. VII, Ins. 7); both names are cognomina, or aephÄbus (more often spelled ephÄbus), -Ä«, m., may just be the common noun = boy, young man.âSuccessÅ: the end of the name is not quite legible and illustrates one sort of challenge faced by editors working with graffiti; CILâs editors think the writer first wrote -N (an odd mistake), then corrected it to -O; but it has also been suggested that the correct reading, with the last three letters squeezed together, may be SVCCESSORI, dat. of Successor (also a Roman cognomen).âsalÅ«tem: if you do not recall the meaning, see CIL 4.4742 in Capvt VIII. Though a tad sloppy writing his fatherâs name, the young fellow did embellish the tail of his T with a decorative flourishâever do something like that when you were signing a greeting card, maybe even a Fatherâs Day card?

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! If youâve spent much time in court, or even reading John Grisham novels, youâve doubtless encountered some legal Latin. Ipse turns up more than once in the lawyerâs lexicon: thereâs ipsÅ factÅ, by that very fact; ipsÅ jÅ«re (classical iÅ«re), by the law itself; and rÄs ipsa loquitur, the matter speaks for itself. And from the third person reflexive possessive thereâs suÄ« jÅ«ris (iÅ«ris), literally of his own right, i.e., legally competent to manage oneâs own affairs. Not a legal term, but from the reflexive and common in English is suÄ« generis, literally of his/her/its own kind (from genus, generis), used of a person or thing that is unique. Another common English phrase, seen in the above reading on Pythagoras, is ipse dÄ«xit, used of any dogmatic or arbitrary statement; likewise from the intensive pronoun are the phrase ipsissima verba, the very words (of a person being quoted), the medical term âipsilateral,â meaning âon or affecting the same side of the bodyâ (from latus, lateris, n., side), and the word âsolipsism,â for the philosophical theory that the self alone is the only reality or that it conditions our perception of reality. By now youâve had all the vocabulary needed to translate the famous quotation from Constantine, in hÅc signÅ vincÄs (under this standardâi.e., the crossâyou shall prevail), seen in more recent decades on a well-known brand of cigarettes, where, freely, it means, Youâll win with this brand (but would the U.S. Surgeon General agree?). Well, tempus iterum fÅ«git: valÄte!

CAPVT XIV

I-Stem Nouns of the Third Declension; Ablatives of Means, Accompaniment, and Manner

GRAMMATICA

THIRD DECLENSION i-STEM NOUNS

Some third declension nouns have a characteristic i in certain case endings and are thus called I-STEM NOUNS, as distinct from those introduced in Capvt VII, which are sometimes called CONSONANT STEMS. As you will see from the following paradigms, the only new ending shared by all i-stems is the genitive plural in -ium rather than simply -um; neuters have, in addition, -Ä« instead of -e in the ablative singular and -ia instead of -a in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural; vÄ«s is a common irregular i-stem and should be memorized (its genitive and dative singular forms, given in parentheses, are rarely used).

An alternate masculine and feminine accusative plural ending in -Ä«s (e.g., cÄ«vÄ«s for cÄ«vÄs), though rarely appearing in this book, was frequently employed throughout Republican literature and into the Augustan period and should be remembered.

Besides learning these few new endings, it is also important to be able to recognize that a noun is an i-stem when you encounter it in a vocabulary list or a reading. The following three rules will enable you to do so and should be memorized.

Masculine and Feminine i-Stems

1. Most masculine and feminine nouns that have a nominative singular in -is or -Äs and the same number of syllables in both the nominative and genitive (and hence called âparisyllabic,â from pÄr, equal, + syllaba).

hostis, hostis, m.; gen. pl. hostium; enemy

nÄvis, nÄvis, f.; nÄvium; ship

mÅlÄs, mÅlis, f.; mÅlium; mass, structure

cÄ«vis, cÄ«vis, and nÅ«bÄs, nÅ«bis, above

2. Masculine and (chiefly) feminine nouns with a nominative singular in -s or -x which have a base ending in two consonants; most, like the following, have monosyllabic nominatives.

ars, art-is, f.; artium; art, skill

dÄns, dent-is, m.; dentium; tooth

nox, noct-is, f.; noctium; night

urbs, urb-is, above

Again, the only ending ordinarily distinguishing these masculine and feminine nouns from consonant stems is the genitive plural in -ium.

Neuter i-Stems

3. Neuter nouns with a nominative singular ending in -al, -ar, or -e have the characteristic i not only in the genitive plural -ium but also in the ablative singular -Ä« and the nominative/accusative/vocative plural -ia.

animal, animÄlis, n., animal

exemplar, exemplÄris, n., model, pattern, original

mare, maris, above

Irregular VÄ«s

The common irregular i-stem vÄ«s must be memorized and carefully distinguished from vir. Note that the characteristic long Ä« appears in most forms of vÄ«s, vs. the short i of vir; contrast the following: virÄ«, virÅs, vÄ«rÄs, virÄ«s, vÄ«rium, virum, vÄ«ribus.

ABLATIVE CASE USES

You have frequently encountered in the readings ablative nouns and pronouns employed simply as objects of prepositions; there are several more distinct uses of the ablative, some requiring a preposition and some not. Following are three of the most common, and others will be introduced in later chapters, so you may wish to maintain a list in your notebook or computer file, with the name, a definition, and examples for each (you should keep similar lists for all the other cases as well).

Ablative of Means or Instrument

As you continue to learn new syntactical constructions, always keep in mind these three things: DEFINITION (what is it?), RECOGNITION (how do I recognize one when I see it in a sentence), TRANSLATION (how do I translate it into English?). For the ABLATIVE OF MEANS/INSTRUMENT, a usage you have actually already encountered a few times in the readings, itâs as simple as this:

Â 

Definition: a noun or pronoun that answers the question âby means of what (instrument)?/by what?/with what?â is the action of the verb performed.

Â 

Recognition: a noun/pronoun in the ablative without a preposition.

Â 

Translation: Supply the English prepositions by (means of), with.

LitterÄs stilÅ scrÄ«psit. He wrote the letter with a pencil (stilus, -Ä«).

CÄ«vÄs pecÅ«niÄ vÄ«cit. He conquered the citizens with/by money.

Id meÄ«s oculÄ«s vÄ«dÄ«. I saw it with my own eyes.

SuÄ«s labÅribus urbem cÅnservÄvit. By his own labors he saved the city.

Ablatives of Accompaniment and Manner

You have also already encountered the ABLATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT (DEFINITION: an ablative noun/pronoun, usually a person, that answers the question âin whose company/with whom is the action performedâ; RECOGNITION: an ablative with the preposition cum; TRANSLATION: translate cum as âwith,â followed by the noun/pronoun, e.g., cum agricolÄ labÅrat, he is working with the farmer) and the ABLATIVE OF MANNER (DEF.: a noun that answers the question âhow/in what mannerâ is the action performed; REC.: cum + an ablative noun, regularly an abstract noun; TRANS.: e.g., cum cÅ«rÄ labÅrat, she works with care/carefully).

Cum amÄ«cÄ«s vÄnÄrunt. They came with friends (= with whom?)

Cum celeritÄte vÄnÄrunt. They came with speed (= how?; speedily.âceleritÄs, -tÄtis).

Id cum eÄ«s fÄcit. He did it with them (= with whom?).

Id cum virtÅ«te fÄcit. He did it with courage (= how?; courageously).

Each of these three constructions may be translated using the English preposition âwithâ (among other possibilities), but the three usages are conceptually different and must be distinguished. Recall that ablatives generally function adverbially, telling you something about the action of the verb; in these three instances they tell you, respectively, by what means the action was performed, with whom the action was performed, and in what manner the action was performed. The only challenge comes in translating from English to Latin: if with tells with whom or in what manner, use cum + ablative; if with tells by what means/with what instrument, use the ablative without a preposition.

VOCÄBVLA

As you learn this chapterâs vocabulary (by listening and repeating aloud, right?âsemper audÄ« et prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!), keep in mind the rules for recognizing third declension i- stems and identify those you find in this list; practice by declining at least one of each genderâor, better yet, decline some noun-adjective phrases like animal ipsum and urbs sÅlaâand comparing with the paradigms. A few of the nouns require special attention: cÄ«vis, citizen, is one of a small group of nouns that can, for obvious reasons, be either feminine or masculine (another is canis, dog, âcanineâ); and be careful not to confuse mors with mora or mÅs, or vÄ«s with vir. The new prepositions introduced here, Ä/ab and trÄns, also commonly function as prefixes: see âSome Etymological Aids,â App., PREFIXES.

Â 

Ã¡nimal, animlis, n., a living creature, animal (related to anima, breath, air, spirit, soul, and animus; animate, animation)

Ã¡qua, Ã¡quae, f., water (aquatic, aquarium, Aquarius, aqueduct, subaqueous, ewer, sewer, sewage, sewerage)

ars, Ã¡rtis, f., art, skill (artifact, artifice, artificial, artisan, artist, inert)

aÃºris, aÃºris, f., ear (aural, auricle, auricular, auriform; not to be confused with âauric,â âauriferous,â from aurum, gold)

cvis, cvis, m. and f., citizen (civic, civil, civilian, civility, civilize; cf. cÄ«vitÄs)

iÅ«s, iris, n., right, justice, law (jurisdiction, jurisprudence, juridical, jurist, juror, jury, just, justice, injury)

mÃ¡re, mÃ¡ris, n., sea (marine, mariner, marinate, maritime, submarine, cormorant, rosemary, mere = Eng. cognate, archaic for âsmall lakeâ)

mors, mÃ³rtis, f., death (mortal, immortal, mortify, mortgage; murder = Eng. cognate)

nbÄs, nbis, f., cloud (nubilous, nubilose, nuance)

Ås, ris, n., mouth, face (oral, orifice, orator; cf. ÅrÄre, to speak, plead)

pars, pÃ¡rtis, f., part, share; direction (party, partial, partake, participate, participle, particle, particular, partisan, partition, apart, apartment, depart)

Rma, Rmae, f., Rome (romance, romantic, romanticism; cf. RÅmÄnus)

tÃºrba, tÃºrbae, f., uproar, disturbance; mob, crowd, multitude (cf. turbÄre, to disturb, throw into confusion; turbid, turbulent, turbine, turbo, disturb, perturb, imperturbable, trouble)

urbs, Ãºrbis, f., city (urban, urbane, urbanity, suburb, suburban)

vÄ«s, vÄ«s, f., force, power, violence; vrÄs, vrium, pl., strength (vim, violate, violent; do not confuse with vir)

Ä (before consonants, like Eng. âa,â vs. âanâ), ab (before vowels or consonants), prep. + abl., away from, from; by (personal agent); frequent in compounds (aberration, abject, abrasive, absolve, abstract, abundant, abuse)

trÄns, prep. + acc., across; also a prefix (transport, transmit, transfer)

appÃ©llÅ, appellre, appellvÄ«, appelltum, to speak to, address (as), call, name (appellation, appellative, appeal, appellant, appellate)

cÃºrrÅ, cÃºrrere, cucÃºrrÄ«, cÃºrsum, to run, rush, move quickly (current, cursive, cursory, course, coarse, discursive, incur, occur, recur)

mtÅ, mÅ«tre, mÅ«tvÄ«, mÅ«ttum, to change, alter; exchange (mutable, immutable, mutual, commute, permutation, transmutation, molt)

tÃ©neÅ, tenre, tÃ©nuÄ«, tÃ©ntum, to hold, keep, possess; restrain; -tineÅ, -Äre, -tinuÄ«, -tentum in compounds, e.g., contineÅ (tenable, tenacious, tenant, tenet, tenure, tentacle, tenor, continue, content, continent, pertinent, pertinacity, lieutenant, appertain, detain, retain, sustain)

vtÅ, vÄ«tre, vÄ«tvÄ«, vÄ«ttum, to avoid, shun; not to be confused with vÄ«vÅ (inevitable)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After memorizing the paradigms and vocabulary, and practicing with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, listen to the readings, if you have the CDs, read them aloud for comprehension, and then write out your translations. For practice with the new grammar, scan through the readings and, first, find all the i- stem nouns; next, find all the ablative nouns and pronouns and identify the specific usage of each (means, manner, accompaniment, or simply object of a preposition).

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Magnam partem illÄrum urbium post multÅs annÅs vÄ« et cÅnsiliÅ capiÄbat.

Ante Caesaris ipsÄ«us oculÅs trÄns viam cucurrimus et cum amÄ«cÄ«s fÅ«gimus.

NÄmÅ vitia sua videt, sed quisque illa alterÄ«us.

Monuitne nÅ«per eÅs dÄ vÄ«ribus illÄrum urbium in AsiÄ?

IpsÄ« autem lÄ«bertÄtem cÄ«vium suÅrum magnÄ cum cÅ«rÄ aluerant.

NÅmina multÄrum urbium ab nÅminibus urbium antÄ«quÄrum trÄximus.

Pars cÄ«vium dÄ«vitiÄs cÄpit et per urbem ad mare cucurrit.

HodiÄ multae nÅ«bÄs in caelÅ sunt signum Ä«rae acerbae deÅrum.

Illud animal heri ibi cecidit et sÄ trÄns terram ab agrÅ trahÄbat.

That wicked tyrant did not long preserve the rights of these citizens.

Great is the force of the arts.

His wife was standing there with her (own) friends and doing that with patience.

Cicero felt and said the same thing concerning his own life and the nature of death.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Et Deus aquÄs âmariaâ in prÄ«ncipiÅ appellÄvit. (Genesis; aquÄs is dir. obj.; maria is an OBJECTIVE COMPLEMENT, a construction common with such verbs as appellÅ, to call, as in âto call him a friend,â and faciÅ, to make, as in âto make her the leader.â)

Terra ipsa hominÄs et animÄlia Ålim creÄvit. (Lucretius.)

PÄn servat ovÄs et magistrÅs fortÅ«nÄtÅs ovium. (Vergil.âPan, the god of pastures and shepherds.âovis, ovis, f., sheep; âovine.â)

Parva formÄ«ca onera magna Åre trahit. (Horace.âformÄ«ca, -ae, f., ant; âformic acid,â âformaldehyde.ââonus, oneris, n., load; âonerous,â âexonerate.â)

Auribus teneÅ lupum. (*Terence.âa picturesque, proverbial statement of a dilemma, like Eng. âto have a tiger by the tail.ââlupus, -Ä«, m., wolf; âlupus,â the disease, âlupine.â)

Ille magnam turbam clientium sÄcum habet. (Horace.âcliÄns, -entis, m., client, dependent; âclientage,â âclientele.â)

Hunc nÄmÅ vÄ« neque pecÅ«niÄ superÄre potuit. (Ennius.)

Animus eius erat ignÄrus artium malÄrum. (Sallust.âignÄrus, -a, -um, ignorant; âignorance,â âignore.â)

Magna pars meÄ« mortem vÄ«tÄbit. (Horace.âmeÄ«, partitive gen., Capvt XV.)

VÅs, amÄ«cÄ« doctÄ«, exemplÄria Graeca semper cum cÅ«rÄ versÄte. (Horace.âexemplar, -plÄris, n., model, original; âexemplary,â âexample.ââversÄre, to turn; study; âversatile,â âverse.â)

NÅn vÄ«ribus et celeritÄte corporum magna gerimus, sed sapientiÄ et sententiÄ et arte. (Cicero.âceleritÄs, -tÄtis, swiftness; âcelerity,â âaccelerate.â)

IstÄ« caelum, nÅn animum suum, mÅ«tant, sÄ« trÄns mare currunt. (Horace.)

Store Teeth

ThÄis habet nigrÅs, niveÅs LaecÄnia dentÄs.

Quae ratiÅ est? ÄmptÅs haec habet, illa suÅs.

Ancient Roman and Etruscan dental appliances
Simona Minozzi; copyright Soprintendenza Special ai Beni Archeologici di Roma

Danish National Museum, Copenhagen, Denmark; invoice no. 8319

*Martial Epig. 5.43: Yes, the Romans DID have false teethâmade of ivory, wood, or sometimes even iron! Meter: elegiac couplet.âThÄis and LaecÄnia are names of women; take habetâ¦ dentÄs with both these subjects.âniger, -gra, -grum, black, here, i.e., discolored and decayed; âdenigrate.ââniveus, -a, -um, snowy; ânivation,â âniveal.ââdÄns, dentis, m., tooth; âdental,â âtrident.ââquae (interrog. adj. modifying ratiÅ), what? âÄmptÅs [dentÄs], perf. pass. partic., bought, purchased; âexempt,â âpreempt.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Both verses of this two-liner contain an example of chiasmusâcan you identify each, and comment on the intended effect? To which of the women do haec and illa refer?âif necessary, refer to the range of meanings for these demonstratives in the Capvt IX VocÄbula.) If you judged your lady-friends by their teeth, which of these two would you prefer to hang out with?

Cicero Imagines the State of Rome Itself Urging Him to Punish the Catilinarian Conspirators

M. TullÄ« CicerÅ, quid agis? IstÄ« prÅ multÄ«s factÄ«s malÄ«s poenÄs dare nunc dÄbent; eÅs enim ad mortem dÅ«cere dÄbÄs, quod RÅmam in multa perÄ«cula trÄxÄrunt. Saepe RÅmÄnÄ« in hÄc cÄ«vitÄte etiam cÄ«vÄs morte multÄvÄrunt. Sed nÅn dÄbÄs cÅgitÄre hÅs malÅs esse cÄ«vÄs, nam numquam in hÄc urbe prÅditÅrÄs patriae iÅ«ra cÄ«vium tenuÄrunt; hÄ« iÅ«ra sua ÄmÄ«sÄrunt. Populus RÅmÄnus tibi magnÄs grÄtiÄs aget, M. TullÄ«, sÄ« istÅs cum virtÅ«te nunc multÄbis.

Â 

Cicero Cat. 1.11.27â28: A continuation of Ciceroâs first Catilinarian oration (see notes on âCicero Denounces Catiline,â Capvt XI); in a particularly histrionic moment, Cicero here assumes the role of the personified city of Rome, urging action against the conspirators.âM.: the standard abbreviation for the praenomen MÄrcus (for the Roman system of personal nomenclature, see notes on the graffito in Capvt III). âmultÄre, to punish.âprÅditor, -tÅris, m., betrayer.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: It was illegal to execute Roman citizens without a trial. Cicero here, in a moment of high rhetorical drama, imagines the state of Rome itself urging a rationale for immediately executing Catilineâs supporters (as in fact Cicero ultimately did); what exactly is that argument?âwould it carry any weight in a modern American courtroom?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

CIL 4.4722-4723: From a wall in the courtyard of the House of the Cissonii (Reg. VII, Ins. 7: for another graffito from the same house, see CIL 4.4742 in Capvt VIII above); presumably Urbicus himself etched these drawings of a deer and a boar (?) and the two accompanying graffiti, the second of which is excerpted hereâseemingly a self-gratulatory note on the ubiquitousness of his doodlings!âArsâ¦ ubique: sc. est.âubique, adv., anywhere; everywhere; often abbreviated in inscriptions, but usually as ubiq.; âubiquity.â

ETYMOLOGIA

Pan (in S.A. 3), the Greek god of woods and countryside, was endowed with the power of engendering sudden fear in people; hence from Gk. comes our word âpanicâ (however, âpan-,â as in âPan-American,â comes from a different Gk. word meaning all.) And here are some more derivatives from dÄns, dentis, in âStore Teethâ: dentist, dentifrice, dentil, indent, dandelion (from Fr. dent de lion); Eng. âtoothâ is cognate, as is the Gk. root dont-, as in âorthodontist,â a doctor who makes your teeth âstraightâ (Gk. ortho-).

Following are some more Romance derivatives:

Cf. Rom. arta, moarte, parte, picior (from pediculus, diminutive of pes), dinte, nava, noapte; and Old Occ. art, mrt, part, pÄ, dn, nau, nch. Clearly most of these Romance derivatives do not come from the nom. of the Lat. words. The rule is that Romance nouns and adjectives of Lat. origin generally derive from the acc. form, often with the loss of some part of the final syllable; one exception thus far in this book has been Fr. fils, son, from Lat. fÄ«lius, and cf. Old Fr. fiz, whence Eng. âFitz-,â natural son, e.g., Fitzgerald.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

Quid agitis, amÄ«cÄ« et amÄ«cae! Hereâs hoping yours is a mÄns sÄna in corpore sÄnÅ, in all of its partÄs. Youâve now learned the Latin names for several body parts: oculus, auris, Ås, and dÄns (remember Thais and Laecania?). Here are some others, from the caput up only, that can be easily remembered from their English derivatives: collum, -Ä«, neck (âcollarâ); nÄsus, -Ä«, nose (ânasalâ); supercilium, -Ä«, eyebrow (letâs hope youâve never raised an eyebrow superciliously at a friend); coma, -ae, hair (astronomy buffs know the constellation Coma BerenÄ«cÄs, Bereniceâs lockâsorry, no connection with âcomb,â but âcometâ is related); lingua, -ae, tongue as well as language (âmultilingual,â âlingo,â and even âlinguine,â which is long and flat like a tongue!). For more partÄs corporis, see Capvt XX. Languages, by the way, should be learned with âoral-auralâ techniques, and not just through reading and writing, so I hope youâre remembering to practice your declensions and conjugations aloud, and to say salvÄ or tÄ amÅ to someone everyday. Looking back at the VocÄbula and the new i-stems, I am reminded of ars grÄtiÄ artis, art for the sake of art, the motto of M.G.M. film studios, and B.A. and M.A. for Baccalaureus Artium and Magister Artium, academic degrees you may have or aspire to. Then thereâs the familiar Latin phrase, mare nostrum, which is either what the Romans used to call the Mediterranean (our sea) or, perhaps somewhat less likely, Caesarâs critical comment on his unmusical equine (âmy horse doesnât play the guitarââgroan!!!). ValÄte!

CAPVT XV

Numerals; Genitive of the Whole; Ablative with Numerals and Ablative of Time

GRAMMATICA

NUMERALS

The commonest numerals in Latin, as in English, are the CARDINALS (from cardÅ, cardinis, m., hinge, the âpivotalâ numbers in counting, âone, two, threeâ¦,â etc.) and the ORDINALS (from ÅrdÅ, Årdinis, m., rank, order, the numerals indicating âorderâ of occurrence, âfirst, secondâ¦,â etc.).

Cardinal Numerals

In Latin most cardinal numerals through 100 are indeclinable adjectives; one form is used for all cases and genders. The following, however, are declined as indicated.

Â 

nus, na, num, one (for declension, see Capvt IX)

The cardinals indicating the hundreds from 200 through 900 are declined like plural adjectives of the first and second declensions; e.g., ducentÄ«, -ae, -a, two hundred.

MÄ«lle, 1,000, is an indeclinable adjective in the singular, but in the plural it functions as a neuter i-stem noun of the third declension (e.g., mÄ«lle virÄ«, a thousand men; mÄ«lia virÅrum, thousands of men).

The cardinals from Å«nus through vÄ«gintÄ« quÄ«nque should be memorized (see list in the App., NUMERALS) and with them centum (100) and mÄ«lle. The following sentences illustrate these various forms and uses of cardinal numerals:

TrÄs puerÄ« duÄbus puellÄ«s rosÄs dedÄrunt. Three boys gave roses to two girls.

OctÅ puerÄ« decem puellÄ«s librÅs dedÄrunt. Eight boys gave books to ten girls.

Åªnus vir cum quattuor amÄ«cÄ«s vÄnit. One man came with four friends.

CÅnsul cum centum virÄ«s vÄnit. The consul came with 100 men.

CÅnsul cum ducentÄ«s virÄ«s vÄnit. The consul came with 200 men.

CÅnsul cum mÄ«lle virÄ«s vÄnit. The consul came with 1,000 men.

CÅnsul cum sex mÄ«libus virÅrum vÄnit. The consul came with six thousand(s) (of) men.

Ordinal Numerals

The ordinal numerals, which indicate the order of sequence, are regular first/second declension adjectives (prÄ«mus, -a, -um; secundus, -a, -um; etc.âsee App., SvmmÄrivm FÅrmÄrvm). The ordinals from prÄ«mus through duodecimus should be learned.

GENITIVE OF THE WHOLE

The genitive of a word indicating the whole of some thing or group is used after a word designating a part of that whole:

pars urbis, part of the city (city = the whole)

nÄmÅ amÄ«cÅrum meÅrum, no one of my friends

This genitive of the whole (sometimes called the PARTITIVE GENITIVE) is also used with mÄ«lia and after the neuter nominative and accusative of certain pronouns and adjectives such as aliquid, quid, multum, plÅ«s, minus, satis, nihil, tantum, quantum:

nihil temporis, no time (nothing of time)

satis Äloquentiae, sufficient elo quence

quid cÅnsiliÄ«? what plan?

decem mÄ«lia virÅrum, 10,000 men (but mÄ«lle virÄ«, 1,000 men)

Â 

The genitive of the whole may itself be the neuter singular of a second declension adjective:

multum bonÄ«, much good (lit. of good)

Quid novÄ«? What (is) new?

nihil certÄ«, nothing certain

ABLATIVE WITH CARDINAL NUMERALS

With cardinal numerals (other than mÄ«lia) and with quÄ«dam (a certain one) and sometimes paucÄ« the idea of the whole is expressed by ex or dÄ and the ablative:

trÄs ex amÄ«cÄ«s meÄ«s, three of my friends (but trÄs amÄ«cÄ« = three friends)

quÄ«nque ex eÄ«s, five of them

centum ex virÄ«s, 100 of the men

quÄ«dam ex eÄ«s, a certain one of them

paucÄ« ex amÄ«cÄ«s, a few of the friends

ABLATIVE OF TIME WHEN OR WITHIN WHICH

The Romans indicated the TIME WHEN OR WITHIN WHICH an action occurred by using the ablative, without a preposition; in translating you usually must supply âat,â âon,â âin,â or âwithin,â depending upon English idiom (âforâ is not an option, as it indicates DURATION OF TIME, an accusative construction introduced in Capvt XXXVII):

EÅ tempore nÅn poteram id facere. At that time I could not do it.

Agricolae bonÄ«s annÄ«s valÄbant. In good years the farmers flourished.

EÅdem diÄ vÄnÄrunt. They came (on) the same day (diÄ, abl. of diÄs, day).

AestÄte lÅ«dÄbant. In the summer they used to play. (aestÄte, abl. of aestÄs, summer)

PaucÄ«s hÅrÄ«s id faciet. In (within) a few hours he will do it.

Since this construction always involves some noun indicating a unit of time, without a preposition, you can easily distinguish it from the other ablative uses you have learned (object of certain prepositions, means, manner, accompaniment, and ablative with cardinal numerals); you must be able to identify and translate these six ablative usages, so for each remember: DEFINITION, RECOGNITION, TRANSLATION.

VOCÄBVLA

Numerous Latin nouns ending in -ia evolve into English nouns in -y; Italia and memoria are two examples in this chapterâs list, as is glÅria (Capvt Vâfor others, see âSome Etymological Aids,â SUFFIXES). Is tempestÄs an i- stem or not?âif youâre uncertain, review the rules in Capvt XIV. Some verbs lack a fourth principal part; timeÅ in this chapter, and discÅ in Capvt VIII are examples. A special challenge in this chapter is learning to count from Å«nus to vÄ«gintÄ« quÄ«nque, 1â25, and from prÄ«mus to duodecimus, 1stâ12th. Listen to these numerals on the CDs or at www.wheelockslatin.com for correct pronunciation, then practice counting aloud, just as you did when you were learning as a young child to count in your native language: âone, two, threeâ¦,â âÅ«nus, duo, trÄsâ¦â âfirst, second, thirdâ¦,â âprÄ«mus, secundus, tertius.â Once you have worked at learning the list and new declensions, decline some noun-adjective phrases using the new vocabulary, such as duae memoriae and trÄs tempestÄtÄs (both plural only, of course).

Â 

ItÃ¡lia, ItÃ¡liae, f., Italy (italics, italicize)

memÃ³ria, memÃ³riae, f., memory, recollection (memoir, memorial, memorize, memorandum, commemorate)

tempÃ©stÄs, tempesttis, f., period of time, season; weather, storm (tempest, tempestuous; cf. tempus)

Cardinal numerals from nus to vÄ«gÃntÄ« qunque (App., NUMERALS)

Ordinal numerals from prmus to duodÃ©cimus (App., NUMERALS)

cÃ©ntum, indecl. adj., a hundred (cent, centenary, centennial, centigrade, centimeter, centipede, centurion, century, bicentennial)

mlle, indecl. adj. in sg., thousand; mlia, mÄ«lium, n. i-stem noun in pl., thousands (millennium, mile, milligram, millimeter, millipede, million, mill = 1/10 cent)

mÃser, mÃsera, mÃserum, wretched, miserable, unfortunate (misery, commiserate)

Ãnter, prep. + acc., between, among (intern, internal; common as Eng. prefix, App., PREFIXES, e.g., interact, intercept, interdict)

Ãtaque, adv., and so, therefore

commÃttÅ, commÃttere, commsÄ«, commÃssum, to entrust, commit (committee, commission, commissary, commitment, noncommissioned, noncom)

exspÃ©ctÅ, exspectre, exspectvÄ«, exspecttum, to look for, expect, await (expectant, expectation)

iÃ¡ciÅ, iÃ¡cere, icÄ«, iÃ¡ctum, to throw, hurl. Appears in compounds as -iciÅ, -icere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectum: e.g., ÄiciÅ, Äicere, ÄiÄcÄ«, Äiectum, to throw out, drive out (abject, adjective, conjecture, dejected, eject, inject, interject, object, project, reject, subject, trajectory)

tÃmeÅ, timre, tÃmuÄ«, to fear, be afraid (of) (timid, timorous, intimidate; cf. timor)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After learning the new paradigms and vocabulary and testing your mastery with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, scan the readings to identify all ablative and genitive uses. The trick in translating ablative of time is that you usually must supply âat,â âon,â âin,â or âwithin,â based on English idiom; thus, for Å«nÅ annÅ in Ex. 4, we would say in or within one year, not at or on one year. Listen to the CDs, if you have them, and read aloud before translating.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Illae quÄ«nque fÄminae inter ea animÄlia mortem nÅn timÄbant.

Duo ex fÄ«liÄ«s Ä portÄ per agrÅs cum patre suÅ heri currÄbant et in aquam cecidÄrunt.

PrÄ«mus rÄx dÄ«vitiÄs in mare iÄcit, nam magnam Ä«ram et vim turbae timuit.

NÄmÅ eandem partem Asiae Å«nÅ annÅ vincet.

RÅmÄnÄ« quattuor ex eÄ«s urbibus prÄ«mÄ viÄ iÅ«nxÄrunt.

Itaque mÄ«lia librÅrum eius ab urbe trÄns Italiam mÄ«sistis.

LÄ«bertÄtem et iÅ«ra hÄrum urbium artibus bellÄ« cÅnservÄvimus.

DÄ« GraecÄ« sÄ inter hominÄs cum virtÅ«te saepe nÅn gerÄbant.

CicerÅ mÄ«lia RÅmÄnÅrum vÄ« sententiÄrum suÄrum dÅ«cÄbat.

Sententiae medicÄ« eum cÄrum mihi numquam fÄcÄrunt.

The tyrant used to entrust his life to those three friends.

The greedy man never has enough wealth.

At that time we saved their mother with those six letters.

Through their friends they conquered the citizens of the ten cities.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQUAE

DiÅ« in istÄ nÄve fuÄ« et propter tempestÄtem nÅ«bÄsque semper mortem exspectÄbam. (Terence.ânÄvis, -vis, f., ship; ânaval,â ânavigate.â)

Septem hÅrÄ«s ad eam urbem vÄnimus. (Cicero.)

Italia illÄ«s temporibus erat plÄna GraecÄrum artium, et multÄ« RÅmÄnÄ« ipsÄ« hÄs artÄs colÄbant. (Cicero.âartÄs, in the sense of studies, e.g., literature and philosophy.âcolÅ, -ere, to cultivate, pursue; âculture,â âagriculture.â)

Inter bellum et pÄcem dubitÄbant. (Tacitus.âdubitÄre, to hesitate, waver; âdoubtful,â âdubious.â)

EÅ tempore istum ex urbe ÄiciÄbam. (Cicero.)

DÄ«cÄbat quisque miser: âCÄ«vis RÅmÄnus sum.â (Cicero.)

Mea puella passerem suum amÄbat, et passer ad eam sÅlam semper pÄ«piÄbat nec sÄ ex gremiÅ movÄbat. (Catullus.âpasser, -seris, m., sparrow, a pet bird; âpasseriform,â âpasserine.ââpÄ«piÄre, to chirp; âpeep,â âpiper.ââgremium, -iÄ«, n., lap.âmovÄre; âmovement,â âmotor.â)

FÄ«liÄ« meÄ« frÄtrem meum dÄ«ligÄbant, mÄ vÄ«tÄbant; mÄ patrem acerbum appellÄbant et meam mortem exspectÄbant. Nunc autem mÅrÄs meÅs mÅ«tÄvÄ« et duÅs fÄ«liÅs ad mÄ crÄs traham. (Terence.)

Dionsius tyrannus, quoniam tÅnsÅrÄ« caput committere timÄbat, fÄ«liÄs suÄs barbam et capillum tondÄre docuit; itaque virginÄs tondÄbant barbam et capillum patris. (Cicero.âtÅnsor, -sÅris, m., barber; âtonsorial,â âtonsure.ââbarba, -ae, f., beard; âbarb,â âbarber.ââcapillus, -Ä«, m., hair; âcapillary.ââtondÄre, to shave, cut.)

Mausoleum of Cyrus the Great 6th cent. B.C. Pasargadae, Iran
SEF / Art Resource, NY

Cyrusâ Dying Words on Immortality

Å meÄ« fÄ«liÄ« trÄs, nÅn dÄbÄtis esse miserÄ«. Ad mortem enim nunc veniÅ, sed pars meÄ«, animus meus, semper remanÄbit. Dum eram vÅbÄ«scum, animum nÅn vidÄbÄtis, sed ex factÄ«s meÄ«s intellegÄbÄtis eum esse in hÅc corpore. CrÄdite igitur animum esse eundem post mortem, etiam sÄ« eum nÅn vidÄbitis, et semper cÅnservÄte mÄ in memoriÄ vestrÄ.

Â 

Cicero Sen. 22.79â81: This passage and the next are both drawn from Ciceroâs treatise DÄ SenectÅ«te, composed shortly before Julius Caesarâs assassination. Cyrus the Great, whom Cicero quotes here, was a Persian king of the 6th cent. B.C. and founder of the Persian Achaemenid Empire.âcrÄdÅ, -ere, to believe; âcredible,â âcredulity,â âcreed.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What view of the afterlife is evidenced in this passage? Comment on Cyrusâ argument for the existence of the soul.

Fabian Tactics

Etiam in senectÅ«te QuÄ«ntus Fabius Maximus erat vir vÄrae virtÅ«tis et bella cum animÄ«s adulÄscentis gerÄbat. DÄ eÅ amÄ«cus noster Ennius, doctus ille poÄta, haec verba Ålim scrÄ«psit: âÅªnus homÅ cÄ«vitÄtem fortÅ«nÄtam nÅbÄ«s cÅ«nctÄtiÅne cÅnservÄvit. RÅ«mÅrÄs et fÄmam nÅn pÅnÄbat ante salÅ«tem RÅmae. GlÅria eius, igitur, nunc bene valet et semper valÄbit.â

Â 

Cicero Sen. 4.10: Quintus Fabius Maximus enjoyed considerable success against Hannibal in the Second Punic War (218â201 B.C.) through his delaying tactics, thus earning the cognomen CÅ«nctÄtor, the Delayer.âEnnius: Quintus Ennius (239â169 B.C.), an early Lat. poet sometimes called âthe Father of Latin Literature,â was author of numerous plays and an influential epic poem titled the AnnÄlÄs.âcÅ«nctÄtiÅ, -Ånis, m., delaying; âcunctation.âârÅ«mor, -mÅris, m., rumor, gossip.âpÅnÅ, -ere, to put, place; âposit,â âexponent.ââsalÅ«s, -lÅ«tis, f., safety; âsalutary,â âsalutationâ; cf. salvÄre. â valet: the sense here is to prevail (a derivative) or endure, survive.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What did Cicero find especially praiseworthy in the character of Quintus Fabius Maximus? What one virtue in particular did Fabiusâ contemporary, the poet Ennius, single out?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

CIL 4.5081 (Reg. XI, Ins. 5) and 6856 (Reg. VI, Ins. 16): The Pompeians who inscribed these ornate graffiti in their houses were clearly feeling patriotic at the time! I have not provided transcriptions here, because you can certainly read 6856, which was inscribed on the wall of one homeâs corridor leading from the atrium to the back of the house; and, given that the last six letters of 5081, inscribed near a kitchen door in another house, are CAESAR, you should easily decipher the four letters of the first word (two of which also appear in the second word) and thus determine the name of the notorious Roman emperor whom the writer here chose to memorialize.

ETYMOLOGIA

Following are some Eng. derivatives from the Lat. cardinals and ordinals 2â12: (2) dual, duel, duet, double (cf. doubt, dubious), duplicity; second; (3) trio, triple, trivial; (4) quart, quarter, quartet, quatrain; (5) quinquennium, quintet, quintuplets, quincunx; (6) sextet, sextant; (7) September; (8) October, octave, octavo; (9) November, noon; (10) December, decimal, decimate, dime, dean; (12) duodecimal, dozen.

The following table lists some Romance cardinal numbers derived from Latin.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Quid novÄ«, meÄ« amÄ«cÄ« amÄ«caeque? Latin has other types of numerals, besides the cardinals and ordinals, which you will encounter later in your study of the language and many of which are already familiar. âRoman numeralsâ developed from counting on the fingers: I = one finger, II = two, etc., V = five (the hand held outstretched with the thumb and index finger making a âVâ), VI = a âhandful of fingersâ plus one, etc., X = two Vâs, one inverted on the other, and so on. There were also DISTRIBUTIVE numerals, singulÄ«, -ae, -a (one each); bÄ«nÄ«, -ae, -a (two each), ternÄ«, -ae, -a, etc., and MULTIPLICATIVES, simplex, simplicis (single), duplex (double), triplex, etc.; likewise numeral adverbs, semel (once), bis (twice), ter (three times), etc. All these words have numerous (pardon the pun) English derivatives! For practice, in or out of the classroom, try some math too: duo et trÄs sunt quÄ«nque. And with the interrogative quot (how many?), your instructor may ask you questions like quot oculÅs habÄs?âremember to reply in the correct gender and case, duÅs or duÅs oculÅs habeÅâor quot discipulae hodiÄ sunt in classe (in class)?âquot discipulÄ« in classe sunt?âquot discipulae et discipulÄ« sunt? Your family physician may write a prescription that includes the common medical abbreviation ât.i.d.,â which stands for ter in diÄ, three times (in a) day. Well, this doctorâs prescription, for your intellectual health, is âstudy your Latin, t.i.d.ââet valÄte!

CAPVT XVI

Third Declension Adjectives

GRAMMATICA

THIRD DECLENSION ADJECTIVES

Latin has two major categories of adjectives. You are already familiar with first/second declension adjectives like magnus, -a, -um (Capvt IV) and the small sub-set of that group with -Ä«us in the genitive singular and -Ä« in the dative singular (Capvt IX). Adjectives of the second major group generally have third declension i-stem forms and are declined exactly like i-stem nouns, except that the ablative singular of all genders (not just the neuter) ends with -Ä«. Adjectives of this group fall into three categories that differ from each other in simply one respect. Some, called âadjectives of three endings,â have distinct forms of the nominative singular that differentiate each of the three genders, just as magnus, magna, and magnum do (e.g., Äcer M., Äcris F., and Äcre N.); those of âtwo endingsâ (the largest category of third declension adjectives) have a single nominative form for both masculine and feminine, and another for the neuter (e.g., fortis M. and F., forte N.); and those of âone endingâ do not differentiate the genders at all in the nominative singular (e.g., potÄns is the M., F., and N. nominative singular form). In all other respects the adjectives of all three categories are the same, with the masculine and feminine endings differing from the neuters only in the accusative singular and the nominative (= vocative) and accusative plural.

Paradigms are given below, with the distinctive i-stem endings in bold; the nouns cÄ«vis and mare are provided for comparison (review Capvt XIV, if necessary) and to show that there is very little new to be learned in order to master third declension adjectives:

Note the forms in which the characteristic i appears, as indicated in the paradigms:

(1) -Ä« in the ablative singular of all genders.

(2) -ium in the genitive plural of all genders.

(3) -ia in the nominative and accusative plural of the neuter.

Like i-stem nouns, third declension adjectives have an alternate -Ä«s ending in the accusative plural, but it will rarely be used in this book.

A third declension adjective can be used with a noun of any declension just as a first/second declension adjective can. Compare the following, where omnis, -e, every, all, is used as the example of an adjective of two endings:

Â 

omnis amÄ«cus or homÅ

Äcer amÄ«cus/homÅ

potÄns amÄ«cus/homÅ

omnis rÄgÄ«na or mÄter

Äcris rÄgÄ«na/mÄter

potÄns rÄgÄ«na/mÄter

omne bellum or animal

Äcre bellum/animal

potÄns bellum/animal

Â 

Analyze the forms in the following phrases:

Â 

omnÄ« fÅrmae

in omnÄ« fÅrmÄ

omnium fÅrmÄrum

omnÄ« animÅ

in omnÄ« animÅ

omnium animÅrum

omnÄ« hominÄ«

in omnÄ« homine

omnium hominum

omnÄ« urbÄ«

in omnÄ« urbe

omnium urbium

omnÄ« marÄ«

in omnÄ« marÄ«

omnium marium

Usage and Word Order

Third declension adjectives function in the following four ways (the first three of which have already been introduced), just like first/second declension adjectives:

ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE: vir fortÄs, the brave men (simple modifier)

PREDICATE ADJECTIVE: virÄ« sunt fortÄs, the men are brave (describing the subject, with a form of sum or some other linking verb)

SUBSTANTIVE ADJECTIVE: fortÅ«na fortÄs adiuvat, fortune helps the brave (used in place of a noun)

OBJECTIVE COMPLEMENT: virtÅ«s fÄcit virÅs fortÄs, virtue made the men brave (describing the result of the action of the verb on the object; cf. âshe painted the house yellowââquite different from the attributive use in âshe painted the yellow houseâ)

Remember that attributive adjectives commonly follow the nouns they modify, except those that denote size or quantity, demonstratives, and those meant to be emphatic.

VOCÄBVLA

Watch the third declension adjectives: itâs easy to identify those of two endings and three endings; entries for those of one ending provide the genitive, so you can determine the base. These adjectives are regularly i-stem, but are any of the third declension nouns in this list i- stem?âif you are unsure, review Capvt XIV, then decline at least one or two noun-adjective pairs from this list, e.g., satura Äcris or mÄns celeris, and compare with the paradigms. And remember, as you learn these new words, to use the CDs or the online audio at www.wheelockslatin.com and semper audÄ« et prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!

Â 

aÃ©tÄs, aettis, f., period of life, life, age, an age, time (eternal, eternity, sempiternal)

audtor, audÄ«tris, m., hearer, listener, member of an audience (auditor, auditory, auditorium; cf. audiÅ)

clÄmÃ©ntia, clÄmÃ©ntiae, f., mildness, gentleness, mercy (clement, clemency, inclement, Clementine)

mÄns, mÃ©ntis, f., mind, thought, intention (mental, mentality, mention, demented; âmindâ is cognate)

sÃ¡tura, sÃ¡turae, f., satire (satirist, satirical, satirize)

cer, cris, cre, sharp, keen, eager; severe, fierce (acrid, acrimony, acrimonious, eager, vinegar)

brÃ©vis, brÃ©ve, short, small, brief (brevity, breviary, abbreviate, abridge)

cÃ©ler, cÃ©leris, cÃ©lere, swift, quick, rapid (celerity, accelerate, acceleration, decelerate)

diffÃcilis, diffÃcile, hard, difficult, troublesome (difficulty)

dÃºlcis, dÃºlce, sweet; pleasant, agreeable (dulcify, dulcet, dulcimer)

fÃ¡cilis, fÃ¡cile, easy, agreeable (facile, facility, facilitate; cf. faciÅ)

fÃ³rtis, fÃ³rte, strong, brave (fort, forte, fortify, fortitude, force, comfort)

ÃngÄns, gen. ingÃ©ntis, huge

iÅ«cÃºndus, iÅ«cÃºnda, iÅ«cÃºndum, pleasant, delightful, agreeable, pleasing (jocund)

lÃ³ngus, lÃ³nga, lÃ³ngum, long (longitude, longevity, elongate, oblong, prolong; Eng. âlongâ is cognate)

Ã³mnis, Ã³mne, every, all (omnibus, bus, omnipresent, omnipotent, omniscient, omnivorous)

pÃ³tÄns, gen. potÃ©ntis, pres. partic. of possum as an adj., able, powerful, mighty, strong (potent, impotent, omnipotent, potentate, potential)

sÃ©nex, gen. sÃ©nis, adj. and noun, old, aged; old man (senate, senator, senescent, senile, senior, seniority, sir, sire; cf. senectÅ«s)

quam, adv., how

rÃ©gÅ, rÃ©gere, rxÄ«, rctum, to rule, guide, direct (regent, regime, regiment, regular, regulate, correct, direction, rectitude; cf. rÄx, rÄgÄ«na)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After learning the paradigms and vocabulary and doing some of the Self-Tutorial Exercises, scan through the following readings for examples of third declension adjectives and identify the form and use of each. As always, read aloud before translating.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

FortÄs virÄ« et fÄminae ante aetÄtem nostram vÄ«vÄbant.

EÅs centum senÄs miserÅs ab ItaliÄ trÄns maria difficilia heri mittÄbat.

IllÄ« duo virÄ« omnÄs cupiditÄtÄs ex sÄ ÄiÄcÄrunt, nam nÄtÅ«ram corporis timuÄrunt.

PotÄns rÄgÄ«na, quoniam sÄ dÄ«lÄxit, istÅs trÄs vÄ«tÄvit et sÄ cum eÄ«s numquam iÅ«nxit.

Itaque inter eÅs ibi stÄbam et signum cum animÅ fortÄ« diÅ« exspectÄbam.

Celer rÅ«mor per Åra aurÄsque omnium sine morÄ currÄbat.

VÄ«s bellÄ« acerbÄ« autem vÄ«tam eius paucÄ«s hÅrÄ«s mÅ«tÄvit.

QuÄ«nque ex nautÄ«s sÄ ex aquÄ trÄxÄrunt sÄque CaesarÄ« potentÄ« commÄ«sÄrunt.

Caesar nÅn poterat suÄs cÅpiÄs cum celeribus cÅpiÄ«s rÄgis iungere.

ThemistoclÄs omnÄs cÄ«vÄs Ålim appellÄbat et nÅmina eÅrum ÄcrÄ« memoriÄ tenÄbat.

In caelÅ sunt multae nÅ«bÄs et animÄlia agricolae tempestÄte malÄ nÅn valent.

The father and mother often used to come to the city with their two sweet daughters.

The souls of brave men and women will never fear difficult times.

Does he now understand all the rights of these four men?

The doctor could not help the brave girl, for death was swift.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Quam dulcis est lÄ«bertÄs! (Phaedrus.)

Labor omnia vÄ«cit. (*Vergil.)

FortÅ«na fortÄs adiuvat. (Terence.)

Quam celeris et Äcris est mÄns! (Cicero.)

PolyphÄmus erat mÅnstrum horrendum, Ä«nfÅrme, ingÄns. (Vergil.âmÅnstrum, -Ä«, n., = Eng.; âmonstrosity,â âmonstrous.ââhorrendus, -a, -um, = Eng.; âhorrid,â âabhorrent.ââÄ«nfÅrmis, -e, formless, hideous; âinformal.â)

Varium et mÅ«tÄbile semper fÄmina. (*Vergil.âOrder: fÄmina semper [est] varium et mÅ«tÄbile.âvarius, -a, -um, varying, fickle; âvariegate,â âvariety.ââmÅ«tÄbilis, -e, changeable; âimmutable,â âtransmute.â The neuters varium and mÅ«tÄbile are used to mean âa fickle and changeable thing.â)

Facile est epigrammata bellÄ scrÄ«bere, sed librum scrÄ«bere difficile est. (*Martial.âepigramma, -matis, n., short poem, epigram; âepigrammatist.ââbellÄ, adv. from bellus, -a, -um.)

Äªra furor brevis est; animum rege. (*Horace.âfuror, -rÅris, m., madness; âfurious,â âinfuriate.â)

Ars poÄtica est nÅn omnia dÄ«cere. (*Servius.âpoÄticus, -a, -um; âpoetaster,â âpoetical.â)

Nihil est ab omnÄ« parte beÄtum. (*Horace.)

Liber meus hominÄs prÅ«dentÄ« cÅnsiliÅ alit. (Phaedrus.âprÅ«dÄns, gen. -dentis, = Eng.; âprudence,â âimprudentâ; the word is a contraction of prÅvidÄns, provident)

MÄter omnium bonÄrum artium sapientia est. (*Cicero.)

ClÄmentia rÄgem salvum facit; nam amor omnium cÄ«vium est inexpugnÄbile mÅ«nÄ«mentum rÄgis. (Seneca.âinexpugnÄbilis, -e, impregnable.âmÅ«nÄ«mentum, -Ä«, n., fortification, defense; âmuniment.â)

VÄ«ta est brevis; ars, longa. (Hippocrates, quoted by Seneca.)

Breve tempus aetÄtis autem satis longum est ad bene vÄ«vendum. (Cicero.âvÄ«vendum, living, verbal noun obj. of ad, for.)

VÄ«vit et vÄ«vet per omnium saeculÅrum memoriam. (*Velleius Paterculus.âsaeculum, -Ä«, n., century, age; âsecular,â âsecularize.â)

The blinding of Polyphemus Hydria from Cerveteri, 525 B.C. Museo Nazionale di Villa Giulia, Rome, Italy
Scala / Art Resource, NY

Juvenal Explains His Impulse to Satire

Semper ego audÄ«tor erÅ? Est turba poÄtÄrum in hÄc urbeâego igitur erÅ poÄta! Sunt mÄ«lia vitiÅrum in urbeâdÄ istÄ«s vitiÄ«s scrÄ«bam! Difficile est saturam nÅn scrÄ«bere. SÄ« nÄtÅ«ra mÄ adiuvÄre nÅn potest, facit indignÄtiÅ versum. In librÅ meÅ erunt omnia facta hominumâtimor, Ä«ra, voluptÄs, culpa, cupiditÄs, Ä«nsidiae. Nunc est plÄna cÅpia vitiÅrum in hÄc miserÄ urbe RÅmae!

Â 

Juvenal Sat. 1.1ff: The satirist Juvenal (Decimus Junius Juvenalis, ca. A.D. 60â130) has been over the centuries one of the most widely read and influential of Roman writers. His 16 verse satires, published in six volumes, were largely characterized by a tone of anger and indignation that was in marked contrast to the more genial satires of his Augustan predecessor Horace (a selection from whose SermÅnÄs you read in Capvt III). In this passage from the opening of his programmatic first satire, Juvenal announces his reasons for writing satura, a literary genre the Romans laid claim to inventing; Juvenalâs contemporary, Quintilian, author of an important work on Roman education and rhetoric, asserted satura quidem indeed) tÅta nostra est.âaudÄ«tor: a reminder that satire, like other verse genres in Rome, was composed for recitation as much as for a reading audience.âturba poÄtÄrum: an exaggeration, but similar complaints are heard from other writers of the day.ânÄtÅ«ra: i.e., any innate talent he might have for writing poetry.âindignÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f.; = Eng.; âindignant,â âindignity.ââversus, verse, poetry; âversify,â âversion.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Juvenal here gives two reasons for his decision to write satire, the first facetious, the second quite seriousâwhat are they? How does Juvenalâs difficile est saturam nÅn scrÄ«bere (his exact words) make an even more cynical point than if he had instead written nÅn difficile est saturam scrÄ«bere? The satirist claims that his book will survey omnia facta hominum: what then is the implication of the list of behaviors and the concluding sentence that follow?

On a Temperamental Friend

Difficilis facilis, iÅ«cundus acerbusâes Ä«dem:

nec tÄcum possum vÄ«vere nec sine tÄ.

*Martial Epig. 12.46: Martial was a friend of Juvenalâs and a major influence on his writing; though not himself a satirist in the strictly formal senseâi.e., he wrote epigrams and not the long dactylic hexameter poems that characterized Roman satireâhis writings, as we have seen, were nevertheless highly satirical. Meter: elegiac couplet.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Is Martialâs addressee here male or female?âhow do you know? Elaborate on Martialâs characterization of this personâhave you ever been acquainted with someone like this? The most striking stylistic feature of the epigram is ANTITHESIS, which is deftly employed by the poet in three sets of contrasting words and phrases in the two verses; identify them. Difficilis facilis, iÅ«cundus acerbus is an example, not only of chiasmus, but also of the rhetorical device known as ASYNDETON, the deliberate omission of conjunctions where typically expected; what is the intended effect of the two devices here? The second verse is structured in a series of three phrases: what are they, and how does their arrangement suit the lineâs meaning?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

CIL 4.6787: Hereâs another graffito that should require no transcription; if you canât figure it out, try to find the word in this chapterâs VocÄbula. Have you ever written simply your name on a wall somewhere?âthe Romans often did, and this graffito, not just an adjective but the writerâs cognomen, is typical; the same writer in another graffito (4.6786) on the same wall (in the atrium of a house in Reg. V, Ins. 4) wrote his name again, followed by GrÄt<a>e salÅ«tem, a âhelloâ to his girlfriend Grata, whose name means âPleasingâ or âAgreeable.â Both names are representative of hundreds of Roman cognomina that describe a personâs positive character traits or attractive physical attributes; we saw Venustus, âCharming,â in Capvt III above, and other common examples are AudÄns, âDaring/Courageous,â FÄlÄ«x, âFortunate,â Magnus, as in âPompey the Great,â and Caesar, probably = âLong-/Luxuriant-haired.â On the other hand, Romans were not bashful about drawing attention to what might be considered negative traits or physical anomalies, and so we find such equally common cognomina as Paetus and StrabÅ, both meaning âSquinty-eyed,â Scaurus, âSwollen-Ankled,â Valgus, âBow-legged,â and even CicerÅ, âChickpea,â which the ancient Greek biographer Plutarch claimed was given to one of Marcus Tullius Ciceroâs ancestors (and then passed on to him) because he had a deformity on his nose resembling a garbanzo bean!

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Quid agitis? Quid hodiÄ est tempestÄs? Here are some possible answers, many of which you can again recognize from derivatives: frÄ«gida (tempestÄs is feminine, as you recall from Capvt XV, hence the feminine adjective, from frÄ«gidus, -a, -um); calida (âscaldâ is a derivative); nimbÅsa (from nimbus, which means the same as nÅ«bÄs, + the common suffix -Åsus, -a, -um, full of, hence âcloudyââcf. âcumulonimbus cloudsâ); ventÅsa (an identical formation from ventus, wind); sÅl lÅ«cet, the sun is shining (cf. âsolar,â âtranslucentâ); pluit, itâs raining (âpluvial,â âpluviometerâ); ningit, itâs snowing (Eng. âniveousâ from Lat. niveus, -a, -um is related).

Well, enough of the weather. Hereâs an omnibus of omni- words and phrases to delight you all: If you were âomnificâ (from facere) and âomnipresentâ (-sent from sum) and your appetite âomnivorousâ (vorÄre, to eat, cf. âcarnivorous,â âherbivorousâ) and your sight were âomnidirectionalâ (see regÅ in the VocÄbula above), then you might potentially be âomnipotentâ and even âomniscientâ (scÄ«re, to know). But as a proverbial saying from Vergil reminds us, nÅn omnia possumus omnÄs. Then thereâs the made-up word, âomnium-gatherum,â a Latin-English hybrid that refers to a âmiscellaneous collectionâ (of people or things)âit may seem silly but the word was used by British literati as early as the 16th cent., according to the Oxford English Dictionary! Well, speaking of silly, be aware that regÅ, mentioned above, does NOT mean âto go again,â nor should regit be translated âleave, yâall, and this time I mean it!â Enough of that too: ValÄte, omnÄs amÄ«cÄ« et amÄ«cae meae, et semper amÄte LatÄ«nam!

CAPVT XVII

The Relative Pronoun

GRAMMATICA

THE RELATIVE PRONOUN

The RELATIVE PRONOUN quÄ«, quae, quod, as common in Latin as its English equivalent who/which/that, ordinarily introduces a subordinate clause and refers back to some noun or pronoun known as its ANTECEDENT; the RELATIVE CLAUSE itself has an adjectival function, providing descriptive information about the antecedent (e.g., âthe man who was from Italyâ = âthe Italian manâ).

The forms of the relative pronoun are so diverse that the only practical procedure is to memorize them. However, the genitive and dative endings cuius and cui resemble huius/huic and illÄ«us/illÄ«, and it is easy to identify the case, the number, and often the gender of most of the remaining forms, based on their similarity to various first, second, and third declension endings.

For the pronunciation of the ui in cuius (as if spelled cui-yus) and in cui, cf. huius and huic (Capvt IX) and see the IntrÅductiÅ, p. xxxvii (listen to the CDs too, if you have them).

Usage and Agreement

Since the relative pronoun (from referÅ, referre, rettulÄ«, relÄtum) refers to and is essentially equivalent to its antecedent (from antecÄdere, to go before, since the antecedent usually appears in a preceding clause), the two words naturally agree in number and gender; the case of the relative, however, like that of any noun or pronoun, is determined by its use within its own clause. The logic of this can be demonstrated by analyzing and translating the following sentence:

Â 

The woman whom you are praising is wise.

The main clause of the sentence reads: The womanâ¦ is wise. FÄminaâ¦ est sapiÄns.

Whom introduces a subordinate, relative clause modifying woman.

Woman (fÄmina) stands before the relative whom and is its antecedent.

Whom has a double loyalty: (1) to its antecedent, fÄmina, and (2) to the subordinate clause in which it stands.

a. Since the antecedent, fÄmina, is feminine and singular, whom in Latin will have to be feminine and singular.

b. Since in the subordinate clause whom is the direct object of (you) are praising (laudÄs), it must be in the accusative case in Latin.

c. Therefore, the Latin form must be feminine and singular and accusative: quam.

The complete sentence in Latin appears thus:

FÄmina quam laudÄs est sapiÄns.

Again, succinctly, the rule is this: the gender and number of a relative are determined by its antecedent; its case is determined by its use in its own clause. Identify the gender, number, case, use, and antecedent of the relatives in the following sentences:

DÄ«ligÅ puellam quae ex ItaliÄ vÄnit. I admire the girl who came from Italy.

HomÅ dÄ quÅ dÄ«cÄbÄs est amÄ«cus cÄrus. The man about whom you were speaking is a dear friend.

Puella cui librum dat est fortÅ«nÄta. The girl to whom he is giving the book is fortunate.

Puer cuius patrem iuvÄbÄmus est fortis. The boy whose father we used to help is brave.

VÄ«tam meam committam eÄ«s virÄ«s quÅrum virtÅ«tÄs laudÄbÄs. I shall entrust my life to those men whose virtues you were praising.

TimeÅ idem perÄ«culum quod timÄtis. I fear the same danger which you fear.

In translating, be sure not to shift words from the relative clause into the main clause or vice versa; e.g., in the third sentence above, puella should not be mistaken as the subject of dat. Note that a relative clause is a self-contained unit, usually beginning with the relative pronoun and ending with the first verb you encounter (cuiâ¦ dat in the third sample sentence); in complex sentences, like S.A. 3 below, you may find it helpful first to identify and actually even bracket the relative clause(s):

MultÄ« cÄ«vÄs aut ea perÄ«cula [quae imminent] nÅn vident aut ea [quae vident] neglegunt.

As you read and translate such a sentence, translate the relative clause as soon as you have translated the relative pronounâs antecedent (which very often, as here, precedes the relative pronoun immediately).

VOCÄBVLA

This list includes several common verbs: note the conjugation of each and remember the rule for -iÅ verbs, i.e., that youâll find the characteristic -i- in every single form of the three present system active indicative tenses. CoepÄ« is an example of a DEFECTIVE VERB, i.e., a verb many or most of whose conjugational forms were rarely employed. Autâ¦ aut will remind you of etâ¦ et: both are examples of CORRELATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. Practice recently introduced grammar with some of the new words; e.g., decline libellus levis and write out a synopsis of dÄsÄ«derÅ or dÄleÅ, checking your work with the paradigms in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, NOUNSâDECLENSIONS.

Â 

libÃ©llus, libÃ©llÄ«, m., little book (libel, libelous; diminutive of liber)

quÄ«, quae, quod, rel. pron., who, which, what, that (qui vive, quorum)

caÃ©cus, caÃ©ca, caÃ©cum, blind (caecum, caecal, caecilian)

lÃ©vis, lÃ©ve, light; easy; slight, trivial (levity, lever, levy, levee, Levant, leaven, legerdemain, alleviate, elevate, relevant, irrelevant, relieve)

aut, conj., or; autâ¦ aut, eitherâ¦ or

cÃto, adv., quickly (excite, incite, recite; cf. recitÅ, below)

quÃ³que, adv., also, too

admÃttÅ, admÃttere, admsÄ«, admÃssum, to admit, receive, let in (admission, admissible, inadmissible, admittedly)

coÃ©pÄ«, coepÃsse, coÃ©ptum, began, defective verb used in the perf. system only; the pres. system is supplied by incipiÅ (below).

cÃºpiÅ, cÃºpere, cupvÄ«, cuptum, to desire, wish, long for (Cupid, cupidity, concupiscence, covet, covetous, Kewpie doll; cf. cupiditÄs)

dleÅ, dÄlre, dÄlvÄ«, dÄltum, to destroy, wipe out, erase (delete, indelible)

dÄsderÅ, dÄsÄ«derre, dÄsÄ«dervÄ«, dÄsÄ«dertum, to desire, long for, miss (desiderate, desideratum, desiderative, desire, desirous)

incÃpiÅ, incÃpere, incpÄ«, incÃ©ptum, to begin (incipient, inception; cf. capiÅ)

nÄvigÅ, nÄvigre, nÄvigvÄ«, nÄvigtum, to sail, navigate (navigation, navigable; cf. nauta)

nÃ©glegÅ, neglÃ©gere, neglxÄ«, neglctum, to neglect, disregard (negligent, negligee, negligible)

rÃ©citÅ, recitre, recitvÄ«, recittum, to read aloud, recite (recital, recitation, recitative)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Reading and translating sentences that contain relative clauses (like the one you just this moment read: âthat contain relative clausesâ) need not be difficult. Bracketing the clause as suggested in the preceding discussion of S.A. 3 below can help you avoid jumbling words from the subordinate clause into the main clause; practice with a few sentences in the Self-Tutorial Exercises. Watch out for look-alike qu- words like the adverb quam in Ex. 5 (which cannot be a relative pronoun because it has no antecedent), and the conjunction quod, because: when quod immediately follows a neuter singular word, it is nearly always the relative pronoun; when there is no apparent antecedent, it is more likely the conjunction. And, beware: as youâll see in the Martial epigram below, the antecedent does not always antecede!

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

PotÄns quoque est vÄ«s artium, quae nÅs semper alunt.

MiserÅs hominÄs, autem, sÄcum iungere coeperant.

Nam illÄ aetÄte pars populÄ« in ItaliÄ iÅ«ra cÄ«vium numquam tenuit.

Incipimus vÄritÄtem intellegere, quae mentÄs nostrÄs semper regere dÄbet et sine quÄ valÄre nÅn possumus.

Quam difficile est bona aut dulcia ex bellÅ trahere!

Centum ex virÄ«s mortem diÅ« timÄbant et nihil clÄmentiae exspectÄbant.

Puer mÄtrem timÄbat, quae eum saepe neglegÄbat.

Inter omnia perÄ«cula fÄmina fortis sÄ cum sapientiÄ gessit.

Itaque celer rÅ«mor mortis Äcris per ingentÄs urbÄs cucurrit.

Quoniam memoria factÅrum nostrÅrum dulcis est, beÄtÄ« nunc sumus et senectÅ«tem facilem agÄmus.

MultÄ« audÄ«tÅrÄs saturÄs ÄcrÄs timÄbant quÄs poÄta recitÄbat.

They feared the powerful men whose city they were ruling by force.

We began to help those three pleasant women to whom we had given our friendship.

We fear that book with which he is beginning to destroy our liberty.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

SalvÄ, bone amÄ«ce, cui fÄ«lium meum heri commÄ«sÄ«. (Terence.)

Dionsius, dÄ quÅ ante dÄ«xÄ«, Ä GraeciÄ ad Siciliam per tempestÄtem brevem sed potentem nÄvigÄbat. (Cicero.âSicilia, -ae, f., Sicily.)

MultÄ« cÄ«vÄs aut ea perÄ«cula quae imminent nÅn vident aut ea quae vident neglegunt. (Cicero.âimminÄre, to impend, threaten; âimminence,â âimminent.â)

Bis dat quÄ« cito dat. (Publilius Syrus.âbis, adv., twice; âbiped,â âbipolar.â)

QuÄ« coepit, dÄ«midium factÄ« habet. Incipe! (Horace.âdÄ«midium, -Ä«, n., half; âdimidiate.â)

Levis est fortÅ«na: id cito reposcit quod dedit. (Publilius Syrus.âreposcÅ, -ere, to demand back.)

FortÅ«na eum stultum facit quem nimium amat. (Publilius Syrus.)

NÅn sÅlum fortÅ«na ipsa est caeca sed etiam eÅs caecÅs facit quÅs semper adiuvat. (Cicero.)

Bis vincit quÄ« sÄ vincit in victÅriÄ. (*Publilius Syrus.)

SimulÄtiÅ dÄlet vÄritÄtem, sine quÄ nÅmen amÄ«citiae valÄre nÅn potest. (Cicero.âsimulÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., pretense, insincerity; âsimulate,â âsimulation.â)

VirtÅ«tem enim illÄ«us virÄ« amÄvÄ«, quae cum corpore nÅn periit. (Cicero.âpereÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, to perish; âperish,â âperishable.â)

Turbam vÄ«tÄ. Cum hÄ«s vÄ«ve quÄ« tÄ meliÅrem facere possunt; illÅs admitte quÅs tÅ« potes facere meliÅrÄs. (Seneca.âmelior, better; âmeliorate,â âameliorate.â)

On the Pleasures of Love in Old Age

Estne amor in senectÅ«te? VoluptÄs enim minor est, sed minor quoque est cupiditÄs. Nihil autem est cÅ«ra nÅbÄ«s, sÄ« nÅn cupimus, et nÅn caret is quÄ« nÅn dÄsÄ«derat. AdulÄscentÄs nimis dÄsÄ«derant; senÄs satis amÅris saepe habent et multum sapientiae. CÅgitÅ, igitur, hoc tempus vÄ«tae esse iÅ«cundum.

Â 

Cicero Sen. 14.47â48: For Ciceroâs DÄ SenectÅ«te, see the notes to the two passages in Capvt XV.âminor: less; âminority,â âminus.ââcarÄre, to lack, want; âcaret.ââis quÄ«: a rel. pron. is often immediately preceded by a form of is, ea, id as antecedent; another common example is id quod, that which.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What reason does Cicero offer for his view that the lessening of romantic passion that can accompany old age need not be a source of concern? Comment on the word order of the second sentence and how it neatly suits the nature of the argument.

Itâs All in the Delivery

A Reading from Homer, Sir Lawrence Alma-Tadema, 1885 Philadelphia Museum of Art: The George W. Elkins Collection
The Philadelphia Museum of Art / Art Resource, NY

Quem recitÄs meus est, Å FÄ«dentÄ«ne, libellus;

sed male cum recitÄs, incipit esse tuus!

*Martial Epig. 1.38: In ancient Rome, poetry was performance and was meant first and foremost for a listening audience; proper delivery (ÄctiÅ) and recitation (recitÄtiÅ) were skills taught in school, and recitÄtiÅnÄs were a favorite entertainment among educated Romans. Poets recited their own poetry, and sometimes their work was recited by othersânot always to good effect, however. Juvenal complains about the cityâs turba poÄtÄrum, as we read in the previous chapter, and Martial here expresses his displeasure with Fidentinus, who has been reciting some of his epigrams, and nÅn bene! Meter: elegiac couplet.âlibellus: the delayed antecedent of quem; in prose the order might be libellus quem recitÄs est meus.âmale, adv. of malus.âcum, conj., when.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What does this epigram tell us about the consequences of poorly reciting a text?âwhat are some specific ways in which delivery can affect meaning? Comment specifically on the effect of positioning meus before the subject to which it refers in line 1 and then delaying tuus to the the poemâs end.

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Â 

CIL 4.9008: Inscribed on a column in a Pompeian house (Reg. VII, Ins. 6). The context is not entirely certain, but quite possibly Maximus was an actor in mimes, a popular form of Roman comedy characterized by satiric, lively, and often obscene dance and miming routines in which a single actor, using a variety of masks, played all the roles. Certainly the writer here had a sense of humor, as his âself-portraitâ in the role of a soldier incorporates the S- of sum into the nose-piece of his helmet and the -SERO of lÅ«serÅ into its crest.âomnÄs: i.e., parts or characters in a performance?âlÅ«dÅ, lÅ«dere, lÅ«sÄ«, lÅ«sum, to play, sport; play the role of, mime; âludicrous, delude, illusion.â

ETYMOLOGIA

The Lat. rel. pron. was the parent of the following Romance forms: It. chi, che; Sp. que; Port. que or, if referring to people, quem; Fr. qui, que; Old Occ. qui; Rom. care, ce. To Lat. aut can be traced It. o; Sp. o; Port. ou; Fr. ou; Old Occ. ; Rom. ou (now obsolete).

If the suffix -scÅ shows a Lat. verb to be an âinceptiveâ verb, what force or meaning does this ending impart to the verb?âtremÅ, tremble; tremÄscÅ = ? In medieval manuscripts many texts begin with an âincipitâ; e.g., liber prÄ«mus EpistulÄrum PlÄ«niÄ« incipit.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

Iterum salvÄte! There are a couple of English abbreviations from quÄ«, quae, quod which you may have seen: q.v. = quod vidÄ, which see (i.e., âsee this itemâ), and Q.E.D. = quod erat dÄmÅnstrandum, that which was to be proved (used, e.g., in mathematical proofsâfor the verbal form, a âpassive periphrastic,â see Capvt XXIV). Less common are q.e. = quod est, which is, and Q.E.F. = quod erat faciendum, which was/had to be done. You are beginning to see that for a truly literate person Latin is sine quÄ nÅn (indispensable, lit. something without which one can not manage), and thatâs a point we neednât âquibbleâ over (a diminutive derived from the frequent use of quibus in legal documents). The root meaning of recitÄre, by the way, is to arouse again (cf. âexcite,â âinciteâ); when we âreciteâ a text, we are quite literally ârevivingâ or bringing it back to life, which is why weâjust like the Romansâshould always read literature, especially poetry, aloud! And hereâs some good advice on doing your translations: semper scrÄ«be sententiÄs in tabellÄ tuÄ (your notebook). An old proverb tells you why: quÄ« scrÄ«bit, bis discit! And hereâs a proverb with the VocÄbula item cito: cito matÅ«rum, cito putridum, quickly ripe, quickly rotten. So letâs not go too fast: valÄte!

CAPVT XVIII

First and Second Conjugations: Present System Passive; Ablative of Agent

GRAMMATICA

FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS: PRESENT SYSTEM PASSIVE VOICE

In Latin as in English there are PASSIVE VOICE verb forms and passive sentence types, in which the subject is passive recipient of the action (rather than actively performing the action, as in the active voice). The rule for forming the passive of first and second conjugation present system passives (i.e., passives of the present, future, and imperfect tenses) is an easy one: simply substitute the new passive endings (-r, -ris, -tur; -mur, -minÄ«, -ntur) for the active ones learned in Capvt I (-Å/-m, -s, -t; -mus, -tis, -nt). The few exceptions to this rule are highlighted in bold in the following paradigms.

Present Indicative Passive LaudÅ and MoneÅ

Imperfect Indicative Passive

I was (being) praised, used to be
Â Â Â  praised, etc.:

I was (being) warned, used to be
Â Â Â  warned, etc.:

1. laud-ba-r

monbar

2. laudÄ-b-ris

monÄbris

3. laudÄ-b-tur

monÄbtur

Â 

1. laudÄ-b-mur

monÄbmur

2. laudÄ-b-minÄ«

monÄbminÄ«

3. laudÄ-bÃ¡-ntur

monÄbÃ¡ntur

Future Indicative Passive

I will be praised

I will be warned

1. laud-b-or

monbor

2. laud-be-ris

monberis

3. laud-bi-tur

monbitur

Â 

1. laud-bi-mur

monbimur

2. laudÄ-bÃ-minÄ«

monÄbÃminÄ«

3. laudÄ-bÃº-ntur

monÄbÃºntur

Â 

The exceptional forms, highlighted in bold above, are few: in the first person singular, present and future, the active ending -Å is shortened and -r is added to directly to it, instead of being substituted for it; -bi- is changed to -be- in the future second person singular. Notice, too, that the stem vowel remains short in laudantur/monentur but is long in laudÄtur/monÄtur (review the rule in Capvt I: vowels are generally shortened before nt in any position but only before a final -m, -r, or -t, hence laudat but laudÄtur). Latin had an alternate second person singular passive ending in -re (e.g., laudÄbere for laudÄberis); this ending is not employed in this book, but you will likely encounter it in your later readings.

Present Passive Infinitive

The present passive infinitive of first and second conjugation verbs is formed by changing final -e of the active to -Ä«.

Â 

laudÄre, to praise

monÄre, to warn

laudÄrÄ«, to be praised

monÄrÄ«, to be warned

Usage

When a verb is active voice (from agÅ, agere, ÄgÄ«, Äctum, to act), the subject performs the action; with a verb in passive voice (from patior, patÄ«, passus sum, to undergo, experience) the subject is passively acted upon. As a rule, only transitive verbs are used in the passive; and what had been the object of the transitive verb (receiving the action of the verb) now becomes the subject of the passive verb (still receiving the action of the verb). To make verbs passive in English, we use a form of the verb âto beâ:

Caesarem admonet. He warns Caesar.

Caesar admonÄtur. Caesar is (being) warned.

Urbem dÄlÄbant. They were destroying the city.

Urbs dÄlÄbÄtur. The city was being destroyed.

Patriam cÅnservÄbit. He will save the country.

Patria cÅnservÄbitur. The country will be saved.

ABLATIVE OF PERSONAL AGENT

The personal agent by whom the action of a passive verb is performed is indicated by Ä/ab and the ABLATIVE OF AGENT; the means by which the action is accomplished is indicated by the ABLATIVE OF MEANS, without a preposition, as you have already learned in Capvt XIV. Both constructions are common with passive verbs, as seen in the following examples:

DÄ« Caesarem admonent. The gods are warning Caesar.

Caesar Ä dÄ«s admonÄtur. Caesar is warned by the gods. (Agent)

Caesar hÄ«s prÅdigiÄ«s admonÄtur. Caesar is warned by these omens (prÅdigium). (Means)

MalÄ« virÄ« urbem dÄlÄbant. Evil men were destroying the city.

Urbs ab malÄ«s virÄ«s dÄlÄbÄtur. The city was being destroyed by evil men. (Agent)

Urbs flammÄ«s dÄlÄbÄtur. The city was being destroyed by flames (flamma). (Means)

HÄ« cÄ«vÄs patriam cÅnservÄbunt. These citizens will save the country.

Patria ab hÄ«s cÄ«vibus cÅnservÄbitur. The country will be saved by these citizens. (Agent)

Patria armÄ«s et vÄritÄte cÅnservÄbitur. The country will be saved by arms and truth. (Means)

As seen in these examples, an active sentence construction can be transformed to a passive construction in this way: what was the direct object becomes the subject; what was the subject becomes in Latin an ablative of agent, if a person, or an ablative of means, if a thing; and a passive verb form, in the appropriate person, number, and tense, is substituted for the active.

VOCÄBVLA

Genus is one of thousands of Latin words (like oculus and corpus) that have come into English without any change in spelling. Hostis, enemy (of the state) is another noun with a special sense in the plural, equivalent to our COLLECTIVE NOUN, the enemy (as opposed to an individual enemy). Donât confuse clÄrus with cÄrus, or moveÅ with moneÅ. Note carefully also that the passive videor, vidÄrÄ«, while it can certainly mean to be seen, very often means to seem, appear; for practice, conjugate this verb in the six active tenses and three passive tenses you have now learned, and cf. with the full conjugation of moneÅ in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum.

Â 

flmen, flminis, n., river (flume, fluminous; cf. fluÅ, below)

gÃ©nus, gÃ©neris, n., origin; kind, type, sort, class (genus, generic, genitive, gender, general, generous, genuine, degenerate, genre, congenial)

hÃ³stis, hÃ³stis, m., an enemy (of the state); hÃ³stÄs, -ium, the enemy (hostile, hostility, host)

ldus, ldÄ«, m., game, sport; school (ludicrous, delude, elude, elusive, allude, allusion, illusion, collusion, interlude, prelude, postlude)

prÃ³bitÄs, probittis, f., uprightness, honesty (probity, probation)

sciÃ©ntia, sciÃ©ntiae, f., knowledge (science, scientific, scientist, prescience; cf. scÄ«re, to know)

clrus, clra, clrum, clear, bright; renowned, famous, illustrious (clarify, clarity, claret, clarinet, clarion, declare, Clara, Clarissa, Claribel)

mortlis, mortle, mortal (mortality, immortal, immortality; cf. mors)

cÅ«r, adv., why

deÃnde, adv., thereupon, next, then

flÃºÅ, flÃºere, flxÄ«, flxum, to flow (fluid, fluent, flux, influx, affluence, influence, confluence, influenza, flu, mellifluous, superfluous)

lÃ©gÅ, lÃ©gere, lgÄ«, lctum, to pick out, choose; read (elect, elegant, eligible, lecture, legend, legible, intellect; cf. dÄ«ligÅ, intellegÅ, neglegÅ)

mÃsceÅ, miscre, mÃscuÄ«, mÃxtum, to mix, stir up, disturb (miscellaneous, miscible, meddle, medley, melee, promiscuous)

mÃ³veÅ, movre, mvÄ«, mtum, to move; arouse, affect (mobile, motion, motive, motor, commotion, emotion, remote, locomotive, mutiny)

vÃdeor, vidrÄ«, vsus sum, pass. of videÅ, to be seen, seem, appear

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

As always, practice first with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, then read the following sentences and passage aloud, listening to the CDs, if you have them, and reading initially for comprehension. Look for all occurrences of the ablatives of agent and means, and for all passive verb forms, identifying the person, number, and tense of each.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

MultÄ« morte etiam facilÄ« nimis terrentur.

BeÄta memoria amÄ«citiÄrum dulcium numquam dÄlÄbitur.

Illa fÄmina caeca omnia genera artium quoque intellÄxit et ab amÄ«cÄ«s iÅ«cundÄ«s semper laudÄbÄtur.

Pater senex vester, Ä quÅ saepe iuvÄbÄmur, multa dÄ celeribus perÄ«culÄ«s ingentis maris heri dÄ«cere coepit.

MentÄs nostrae memoriÄ potentÄ« illÅrum duÅrum factÅrum cito moventur.

CÅnsilia hostium illÅ tertiÅ bellÅ longÅ et difficilÄ« dÄlÄbantur.

Itaque mÄter mortem quÄrtÄ« fÄ«liÄ« exspectÄbat, quÄ« nÅn valÄbat et cuius aetÄserat brevis.

Bella difficilia sine cÅnsiliÅ et clÄmentiÄ numquam gerÄbÄmus.

TÄ cum novem ex aliÄ«s miserÄ«s ad Caesarem crÄs trahent.

RÄgem Äcrem, quÄ« officia neglegere incÄperat, ex urbe suÄ ÄiÄcÄrunt.

Ille poÄta in tertiÅ libellÅ saturÄrum scrÄ«psit dÄ hominibus avÄrÄ«s quÄ« ad centum terrÄs aliÄs nÄvigÄre cupiunt quod pecÅ«niam nimis dÄsÄ«derant.

Mercy will be given by them even to the citizens of other cities which they rule.

Many are moved too often by money but not by truth.

The state will be destroyed by the powerful king, whom they are beginning to fear.

Those ten women were not frightened by plans of that trivial sort.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Possunt quia posse videntur. (*Vergil.âquia, conj., because.)

Etiam fortÄs virÄ« subitÄ«s perÄ«culÄ«s saepe terrentur. (Tacitus.âsubitus, -a, -um, sudden.)

Tua cÅnsilia sunt clÄra nÅbÄ«s; tenÄris scientiÄ hÅrum cÄ«vium omnium. (Cicero.)

Malum est cÅnsilium quod mÅ«tÄrÄ« nÅn potest. (*Publilius Syrus.)

FÄs est ab hoste docÄrÄ«. (Ovid.âfÄs est, it is right.)

EÅ tempore erant circÄnsÄs lÅ«dÄ«, quÅ genere levÄ« spectÄculÄ« numquam teneor. (Pliny.âcircÄnsÄs lÅ«dÄ«, contests in the Circus; âcirca,â âcircleâ; âludicrous,â âinterlude.ââquÅ genere: by which kind = a kindâ¦ by which; occasionally, as here, the antecedent is incorporated into the rel. clause.âspectÄculum, -Ä«, n.; âspectacular,â âspectator.â)

Haec est nunc vÄ«ta mea: admittÅ et salÅ«tÅ bonÅs virÅs quÄ« ad mÄ veniunt; deinde aut scrÄ«bÅ aut legÅ; post haec omne tempus corporÄ« datur. (Cicero.âsalutÄre, to greet at the early morning reception; âsalutation,â âsalutatorian.â)

Nihil igitur mors est, quoniam nÄtÅ«ra animÄ« habÄtur mortÄlis. (Lucretius.)

Amor miscÄrÄ« cum timÅre nÅn potest. (*Publilius Syrus.)

Numquam enim temeritÄs cum sapientiÄ commiscÄtur. (*Cicero.âtemeritÄs, -tÄtis, f., rashness; âtemerarious,â âtemerity.ââcommiscÄtur: = miscÄtur + the prefix com- with its common intensifying force.)

DÄ«ligÄmus eum quÄ« pecÅ«niÄ nÅn movÄtur. (Cicero.)

LaudÄtur ab hÄ«s; culpÄtur ab illÄ«s. (*Horace.)

ProbitÄs laudÄturâet alget. (*Juvenal.âalgÄre, to be cold, be neglected; âalgid.â)

Marble funerary relief of circus scene, 1stâ2nd cent. A.D. Museo Gregoriano Profano, Vatican Museums, Vatican State
Vanni / Art Resource, NY

On Death and Metamorphosis

Å genus hÅ«mÄnum, quod mortem nimium timet! CÅ«r perÄ«cula mortis timÄtis? Omnia mÅ«tantur, omnia fluunt, nihil ad vÄram mortem venit. Animus errat et in alia corpora miscÄtur; nec manet, nec eÄsdem fÅrmÄs servat, sed in fÅrmÄs novÄs mÅ«tÄtur. VÄ«ta est flÅ«men; tempora nostra fugiunt et nova sunt semper. Nostra corpora semper mÅ«tantur; id quod fuimus aut sumus, nÅn crÄs erimus.

Â 

Ovid Met. 15.153â216: Ovid (Publius Ovidius Naso, 43 B.C.âA.D. 17) has remained for 2000 years enormously popular, both for his several books of erotic poetry (including his racy Ars AmÄtÅria, The Art of Love, which seems to have been one of the reasons Augustus exiled him from Rome in A.D. 8 at the height of his career) and for his MetamorphÅsÄs, his most influential work, a quasi-epic collection of 250 interconnected transformation myths in 15 volumes. The passage presented here, a prose adaptation from that poemâs closing book, presents some imaginative views on the transmigration of souls in the context of an argument on why men should not fear death (with which you might compare Lucretiusâ remark in S. A. 8 above).

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What specific arguments are presented here to allay the fear of death? Would readers ancient or modern (yourself included) find them persuasive and consoling, or unsettling?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

M. LucrÄtius FrontÅ, vir fortis et ho<nestus>.

Â 

CIL 4.6796: Graffito from a wall in the courtyard of a house in Reg. V, Ins. 4. Whoever wrote this, whether Fronto himself or an admirer, began to add in a second line ET and (probably) HONESTVS (honorable, a common epithet in such inscriptions), then stopped and, caught in the act or for whatever other reason, attempted to erase the incomplete phrase. Do you recall the term for the dot used to separate the words?âif not, see the graffiti in Capita XâXI.âM.: if you do not recall this abbreviation, see âCicero Imagines,â Capvt XIV.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Wondering how the same verb, legere, can mean both to pick out and to read? Because the process of reading was likened to gathering and collecting the words of a text. What a splendid metaphor: we are all of us (especially Latin students) âword collectorsâ! âGather ye rosebuds while ye mayââ¦ and also the delights of language. Remember the special passive meaning of videor introduced in this VocÄbula; here it is in the present passive infinitive form, also newly introduced in this chapter: esse quam vidÄrÄ«, to be rather than to seem, the state motto of North Carolina. Scientia also turns up in several mottoes: scientia est potentia, knowledge is power, is one favorite, and another is scientia sÅl mentis est, knowledge is the sun of the mind (motto of the University of Delaware). ValÄte, discipulae discipulÄ«que!

CAPVT XIX

Perfect Passive System; Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives

GRAMMATICA

THE PERFECT PASSIVE SYSTEM

The construction of the forms of the PERFECT PASSIVE SYSTEM is quite simple: a verbâs PERFECT PASSIVE PARTICIPLE (the fourth principal part) is combined with sum, erÅ, and eram to form the perfect, future perfect, and pluperfect passive, respectively. The same pattern is employed for verbs of all conjugations; thus, in the following paradigms, monitus, Äctus, audÄ«tus, captus, or any other perfect passive participle could be substituted for laudÄtus.

Perfect Indicative Passive

1. laudtus, -a, -um sum

I was praised, have been praised

2. laudtus, -a, -um es

you were praised, have been praised

3. laudtus, -a, -um est

he, she, it was praised, has been praised

Â 

1. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a sÃºmus

we were praised, have been praised

2. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a Ã©stis

you were praised, have been praised

3. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a sunt

they were praised, have been praised

Â 

Future Perfect Indicative Passive

Pluperfect Indicative Passive

Â 

I will have been praised, etc.

I had been praised, etc.

1. laudtus, -a, -um Ã©rÅ

1. laudtus, -a, -um Ã©ram

2. laudtus, -a, -um Ã©ris

2. laudtus, -a, -um Ã©rÄs

3. laudtus, -a, -um Ã©rit

3. laudtus, -a, -um Ã©rat

Â 

1. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a Ã©rimus

1. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a ermus

2. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a Ã©ritis

2. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a ertis

3. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a Ã©runt

3. laudtÄ«, -ae, -a Ã©rant

Usage and Translation

Although sum + the participle function together in Latin as a verbal unit, the participle in essence is a type of predicate adjective; i.e., puella laudÄta est = puella est laudÄta, cf. puella est bona. Consequently, and logically, the participle agrees with the subject in gender, number, and case.

Just as Latin uses the present, future, and imperfect of sum, esse to form these perfect system passive verbs, so English uses the present, future, and past tenses of the verb to have as perfect system (active and passive) auxiliaries: laudÄtus est, he has been praised (or, simple past, was praised); laudÄtus erit, he will have been praised; laudÄtus erat, he had been praised. Be careful to avoid such common mistranslations as is praised for laudÄtus est and was praised for laudÄtus erat (caused by looking at the forms of esse and the participle separately, rather than viewing them as a unit). The following examples illustrate these rules of form, usage, and translation:

Puella laudÄta est. The girl has been (or was) praised.

Puellae laudÄtae erant. The girls had been praised.

Puellae laudÄtae erunt. The girls will have been praised.

PuerÄ« monitÄ« sunt. The boys have been (were) warned.

PerÄ«culum nÅn vÄ«sum erat. The danger had not been seen.

PerÄ«cula nÅn vÄ«sa sunt. The dangers were not seen.

Litterae scrÄ«ptae erunt. The letter will have been written.

Synopsis

You can now do a synopsis of first and second conjugation verbs in all six tenses of the indicative, active and passive; here is an example:

THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN

As with the English interrogative pronoun (âwho?â/âwhose?â/âwhom?â/âwhat?â/âwhich?â), the Latin INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN quis, quid asks for the identity of a person or thing: e.g., quid vidÄs? what do you see? and quis cÅnsilium habet? who has a plan? In the plural the forms of the Latin interrogative pronoun are identical to those of the relative pronoun; in the singular it follows the pattern of the relative with two exceptions: (1) the masculine and the feminine have the same forms, (2) the nominative forms are quis, quid (and quid is also, of course, the n. acc. form).

THE INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVE

Like the English interrogative adjective (âwhichâ¦?â/âwhatâ¦?â/âwhat kind ofâ¦?â), the Latin INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVE quÄ«, quae, quod asks for more specific identification of a person or thing: e.g., quod signum vidÄs? what sign do you see? quae fÄmina cÅnsilium habet? which woman has a plan? in quÄ urbe vÄ«vimus? in what kind of city are we living? The word sometimes has exclamatory force: quÅs mÅrÄs malÅs istÄ« habent! what terrible morals those men have! The forms of the interrogative adjective are identical to those of the relative pronoun, in both the singular and the plural.

The Interrogatives and Relative Distinguished

The forms quis and quid are easily recognized as interrogative pronouns, but otherwise the interrogative pronoun, the interrogative adjective, and the relative pronoun can only be distinguished by their function and context, not by their forms. The following points will make the distinction simple:

the interrogative pronoun asks a question about the identity of a person or thing, has no antecedent, and often introduces a sentence with a question mark at the end (an exception is the âindirect question,â introduced in Capvt XXX): quid legis? what are you reading?

the interrogative adjective asks for more specific identification of a person or thing and both precedes and agrees in gender, number, and case with the noun it is asking about: quem librum legis? which book are you reading?

the relative pronoun usually introduces a subordinate clause, has an antecedent, and does not ask a question (in fact, relative clauses answer questions, in the sense that they are adjectival and provide further information about their antecedents: liber quem legis est meus, the book which you are reading is mine.

Determine whether a relative pronoun, an interrogative pronoun, or an interrogative adjective is used in the following examples:

Quis librum tibi dedit? Who gave the book to you?

Vir quÄ« librum tibi dedit tÄ laudÄvit. The man who gave you the book praised you.

Quem librum tibi dedit? Which book did he give you?

Cuius librum CicerÅ tibi dedit? Whose book did Cicero give to you?

Cuius librÄ« fuit CicerÅ auctor? Of which book was Cicero the author?

Vir cuius librum CicerÅ tibi dedit tÄ laudÄvit. The man whose book Cicero gave to you praised you.

Cui amÄ«cÅ librum dedistÄ«? To which friend did you give the book?

Cui librum CicerÅ dedit? To whom did Cicero give the book?

Vir cui CicerÅ librum dedit tÄ laudÄvit. The man to whom Cicero gave the book praised you.

Quid dedit? What did he give?

Quod praemium dedit? What reward did he give? (praemium, -iÄ«.)

Praemium quod dedit erat magnum. The reward which he gave was large.

Ä quÅ praemium datum est? By whom was the reward given?

Vir Ä quÅ praemium datum est tÄ laudÄvit. The man by whom the reward was given praised you.

QuÅ praemiÅ ille mÅtus est? By which reward was that man motivated?

VOCÄBVLA

Be careful not to confuse look-alike words such as iÅ«dex and iÅ«dicium in this VocÄbula, and the conjunctions at, in the list below, and et, learned previously. As you study this new vocabulary, do a synopsis of one of the three new verbs and compare your work with the full conjugation of laudÄre in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, CONJUGATIONS 1â4; decline the interrogative adjective with one of the new nouns in this list too, e.g., quÄ« auctor, which author? or quod scelus, what crime?

Â 

argÅ«mÃ©ntum, argÅ«mÃ©ntÄ«, n., proof, evidence, argument (argumentation, argumentative)

aÃºctor, auctris, m., increaser; author, originator (authority, authorize)

benefÃcium, benefÃciÄ«, n., benefit, kindness; favor (beneficence, beneficial, beneficiary; cf. faciÅ)

famÃlia, famÃliae, f., household, family (familial, familiar, familiarity)

GraÃ©cia, GraÃ©ciae, f., Greece

idex, idicis, m., judge, juror (judge, judgment; cf. iÅ«dicium below, and iÅ«s)

iÅ«dÃcium, iÅ«dÃciÄ«, n., judgment, decision, opinion; trial (adjudge, adjudicate, judicial, judicious, injudicious, misjudge, prejudge, prejudice)

scÃ©lus, scÃ©leris, n., evil deed, crime, sin, wickedness

quis? quid?, interrog. pron., who? whose? whom? what? which? (quiddity, quidnunc, quip; cf. quisque)

quÄ«? quae? quod? interrog. adj., what? which? what kind of?; sometimes with exclamatory force, what (a)! what sort of! (quo jure)

cÃ©rtus, cÃ©rta, cÃ©rtum, definite, sure, certain, reliable (ascertain, certify, certificate)

grÃ¡vis, grÃ¡ve, heavy, weighty; serious, important; severe, grievous (aggravate, grief, grievance, grieve, grave, gravity)

immortlis, immortle, not subject to death, immortal (cf. mors)

at, conj. but; but, mind you; but, you say; typically a stronger adversative than sed nÃsi, conj., ifâ¦ not, unless; except (nisi prius)

cÃ³ntrÄ, prep. + acc., against (âcontra-â in compounds such as contradict, contrast, contravene, contrapuntal, and see âSome Etymological Aids,â PREFIXES; contrary, counter, encounter, country, pro and con)

iam, adv., now, already, soon

dÄlÃ©ctÅ, dÄlectre, dÄlectvÄ«, dÄlecttum, to delight, charm, please (delectable, delectation)

lberÅ, lÄ«berre, lÄ«bervÄ«, lÄ«bertum, (1), to free, liberate (liberate, liberation, liberal, deliver; cf. lÄ«ber, lÄ«bertÄs)

pÃ¡rÅ, parre, parvÄ«, partum, (1), to prepare, provide; get, obtain (apparatus, compare, parachute, parapet, parasol, pare, parry, repair, reparation, separate, several)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Scan the readings for perfect system passives and interrogative pronouns and adjectives. To avoid confusing the qu- words youâve recently learned, be sure to review âThe Interrogatives and Relative Distinguishedâ above; and be careful not to translate perfect system passives as simple present, future, and imperfect by mistakenly focusing on the forms of esse: e.g., dÄlÄta est in Ex. 2 means has been/was destroyed, not is destroyed.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Quis lÄ«bertÄtem eÅrum eÅ tempore dÄlÄre coepit?

Cuius lÄ«bertÄs ab istÅ auctÅre deinde dÄlÄta est?

QuÅs librÅs bonÅs poÄta caecus heri recitÄvit?

FÄminae librÅs difficilÄs crÄs legent quÅs mÄ«sistÄ«.

Omnia flÅ«mina in mare fluunt et cum eÅ miscentur.

Itaque id genus lÅ«dÅrum levium, quod Ä multÄ«s familiÄ«s laudÄbÄtur, nÅs ipsÄ« numquam cupimus.

PuerÄ« et puellae propter facta bona Ä mÄtribus patribusque quoque laudÄtae erunt.

CÅ«r istÄ« vÄritÄtem timÄbant, quÄ multÄ« adiÅ«tÄ« erant?

HostÄs trÄns ingÄns flÅ«men in GraeciÄ deinde cito nÄvigÄre incÄpÄrunt.

QuÄ« vir fortis clÄrusque, dÄ quÅ lÄgistÄ«, aetÄtem brevem mortemque celerem exspectÄbat?

Quae studia gravia tÄ semper dÄlectant, aut quae nunc dÄsÄ«derÄs?

Who saw the six men who had prepared this?

What was neglected by the second student yesterday?

We were helped by the knowledge which had been neglected by him.

Whose plans did the old men of all those cities fear? Which plans did they esteem?

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Quae est nÄtÅ«ra animÄ«? Est mortÄlis. (Lucretius.)

Illa argÅ«menta vÄ«sa sunt et gravia et certa. (Cicero.)

Quid nÅs facere contrÄ istÅs et scelera eÅrum dÄbÄmus? (Cicero.)

Quid ego ÄgÄ«? In quod perÄ«culum iactus sum? (Terence.)

Å dÄ« immortÄlÄs! In quÄ urbe vÄ«vimus? Quam cÄ«vitÄtem habÄmus? Quae scelera vidÄmus? (Cicero.)

QuÄ« sunt bonÄ« cÄ«vÄs nisi eÄ« quÄ« officiÅ moventur et beneficia patriae memoriÄ tenent? (Cicero.)

Alia, quae pecÅ«niÄ parantur, ab eÅ stultÅ parÄta sunt; at mÅrÄs eius vÄrÅs amÄ«cÅs parÄre nÅn potuÄrunt. (Cicero.)

The Aged Playwright Sophocles Holds His Own

Quam multa senÄs in mentibus tenent! SÄ« studium grave et labor et probitÄs in senectÅ«te remanent, saepe manent etiam memoria, scientia, sapientiaque. SophoclÄs, scrÄ«ptor ille Graecus, ad summam senectÅ«tem tragoediÄs fÄcit; sed propter hoc studium familiam neglegere vidÄbÄtur et Ä fÄ«liÄ«s in iÅ«dicium vocÄtus est. Tum auctor eam tragoediam quam sÄcum habuit et quam proximÄ scrÄ«pserat, âOedipum ColÅnÄum,â iÅ«dicibus recitÄvit. Ubi haec tragoedia recitÄta est, senex sententiÄ«s iÅ«dicum est lÄ«berÄtus.

Â 

Cicero Sen. 7.22: In this selection from âOn Old Ageâ (you should re-read the others in Capita XV and XVII), Cicero relates an anecdote about the Greek tragedian Sophocles (ca. 496â406 B.C.), who during his long career authored more than 120 plays, many of them prize-winning. âsummam, extreme; âsummary,â âsummit.ââtragoedia, -ae, f.; the diphthong oe has become e in the Eng. word; âtragedian,â âtragic.ââproximÄ, adv., shortly before; âproximity,â âapproximate.ââOedipum ColÅnÄum: Sophocles composed his last play, âOedipus at Colonus,â near the end of his life, and it won first place in the theatrical competitions at which it was produced posthumously, by his grandson, in 401 B.C.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What is Ciceroâs purpose in relating this anecdote about Sophocles in his treatise DÄ SenectÅ«te? Why did the court acquit Sophocles of the charges his sons had brought against him?

Marble statue of Sophocles Roman copy of a 4th cent. B.C. Greek original Museo Gregoriano Profano Vatican Museums, Vatican State
Vanni / Art Resource, NY

Catullus Bids a Bitter Farewell to Lesbia

ValÄ, puellaâiam Catullus obdÅ«rat.

â¦

15Â Â Â  Scelesta, vae tÄ! Quae tibÄ« manet vÄ«ta?

Quis nunc tÄ adÄ«bit? Cui vidÄberis bella?

Quem nunc amÄbis? Cuius esse dÄ«cÄris?

Quem bÄsiÄbis? Cui labella mordÄbis?

At tÅ«, Catulle, dÄstinÄtus obdÅ«rÄ.

*Catullus Carm. 8.12, 15â19: Lines excerpted directly from the Catullus poem which you read in a much simplified prose adaptation in Capvt II (and which is presented in nearly complete form in LocÄ« Ant. I, below, I. DISILLUSIONMEN); meter: choliambic.âobdÅ«rÄre, to be hard, be tough, endure; âobdurate.ââscelestus, -a, -um, wicked, accursed; âscelerat.ââvae tÄ, woe to you.âquae: with vÄ«ta.âtibÄ«: just as final long vowels were sometimes shortened in verse, for metrical reasons, final short vowels were sometimes lengthened.âadÄ«bit: will visit.âdÄ«cÄris: will you be said.âbÄsiÄre, to kiss.âcui: here = cuius, as the dat. often has possessive force. âlabellum, -Ä«, n., lip; âlabial.ââmordÄre, to bite; âmordant,â âmorsel,â âremorse.ââdÄstinÄtus, -a, -um, resolved, firm; âdestination,â âdestiny.â)

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What are the most striking stylistic features of this excerpt?âthink even of rhythms and sound effects. How does Catullusâ language resemble that of a prosecuting attorney?âhow do his questions become progressively more intense? What psychology does Catullus play upon in describing himself in third person, and then addressing and lecturing himself in the poemâs closing line?

Message from a Bookcase

SÄlectÅs nisi dÄs mihÄ« libellÅs,

admittam tineÄs trucÄsque blattÄs!

*Martial Epig. 14.37: One of the first books Martial wrote, though appearing in manuscripts as Liber XIV, was separately titled ApophorÄta, a Greek word lit. meaning âthings (for guests) to take away,â like our âparty favors.â Each of these little gift poems was labeled with the name of the object it accompanied (here a scrÄ«nium, a cylindrical container for holding books), and in many the gift itself addresses the readerâin this instance with a threat! Meter: hendecasyllabic.âsÄlectus, -a, -um, select, carefully chosen; âselection,â âselective.ââtinea, -ae, f., maggot, bookworm; âtineal.ââtrux, gen. trucis, fierce, savage; âtruculent.ââblatta, -ae, f., cockroach.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: As we have seen, word order in verse is much freer than that of prose; how might you here re-arrange the words of the first line into standard prose order? Which word in particular adds mock intensity to the bookcaseâs threat?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Casta sum mÄter, et omnÄ«nÅ alÅ quod mercÄs.

Â 

CIL 4.8842: This graffito was found in a structure in Reg. III, Ins. 3, identified by the editors of CIL as a school for Pompeian youth (schola iÅ«ventÅ«tis). The building seems to have had an association with Flora, Roman goddess of spring and flowering and the renewal of life, whose name appears twice in a nearby graffito (4.8840) and who was perhaps the schoolâs tutelary deity; the editors of CIL take this graffito to be from a hymn in which the goddess addresses the young worshiper.âcastus, -a, -um, unstained, holy, pure; âchaste,â âchastity.ââcastaâ¦ mÄter: the designation suits Flora, as a major fertility goddess; her yearly festival, the Floralia, was regarded by prostitutes as their own special holiday.âomnÄ«nÅ, adv., wholly, entirely, altogether; âomnipotent,â âomniscient.ââmercÄre, to buy, trade; deal in, traffic in (for the likely sense here, cf. the Eng. idiom, âin all your dealingsâ = âall that you deal withâ); âmercantile,â âmerchant.â

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte!âquid agitis? Weâve been seeing quid in that idiom (how are you doing? not what are you doing?) ever since Capvt II, and do you recall quid novÄ«, whatâs new?, from the discussion of the genitive of the whole in Capvt XV? Even before beginning your study of Latin youâd likely encountered the common phrase quid prÅ quÅ, one thing in return for another (= âtit for tatââquid was often equivalent to the indefinite something) and you may even have run into quidnunc, a âbusybodyâ (lit., what-now?!). The interrogative adjective has also come into English: quÅ jÅ«re (= classical iÅ«re), by what (legal) right, quÅ animÅ, with what intention, and quÅ modÅ, in what manner. You learned iaciÅ, iacere, iÄcÄ«, iactum in Capvt XV: you can now recognize the perfect passive form in Julius Caesarâs famous dictum, alea iacta est, the die has been cast, a remark he made in 49 B.C. when crossing the Rubicon river in northern Italy (see Map 1) and embarking upon civil war with Pompey the Great. DiscipulÄ« discipulaeque, valÄte!

CAPVT XX

Fourth Declension; Ablatives of Place from Which and Separation

GRAMMATICA

FOURTH DECLENSION

The fourth declension is easily learned and contains relatively few nouns; most are masculine, with the nominative singular in -us, but there are some feminines, also in -us, and a few neuters, with the nominative singular in -Å«. To decline, simply add the new endings presented below to the base; note that the characteristic vowel u appears in all endings except the dative and ablative plural (and even there a few nouns have -ubus for -ibus) and that, of all the -us endings, only the masculine and feminine nominative singular has a short -u-.

Remember that there are also -us nouns in the second and third declensions, e.g., amÄ«cus and corpus; it is a nounâs genitive ending, not the nominative, that determines its declension, so it is imperative that you memorize the full vocabulary entry for every new noun you encounter. Recall, too, that a noun and modifying adjective, though they must agree in number, gender, and case, will not necessarily have the same endings, hence frÅ«ctus dulcis, frÅ«ctÅ«s dulcis, etc., sweet fruit; manus mea, manÅ«s meae, etc., my hand; cornÅ« longum, cornÅ«s longÄ«, etc., a long horn; etc.

ABLATIVES OF PLACE FROM WHICH AND SEPARATION

The ablatives of place from which and separation are common and closely related constructions (which you should add to your list of ablative uses). The principal difference is that the ABLATIVE OF PLACE FROM WHICH, already encountered in your readings, regularly involves a verb of active motion from one place to another; nearly always, too, the ablative is governed by one of the prepositions ab, dÄ, or ex (away from, down from, out of):

GraecÄ« Ä patriÄ suÄ ad Italiam nÄvigÄvÄrunt. The Greeks sailed from their (own) country to Italy.

FlÅ«men dÄ montibus in mare flÅ«xit. The river flowed down from the mountains into the sea.

MultÄ« ex agrÄ«s in urbem venient. Many will come from the country into the city.

CicerÅ hostÄs ab urbe mÄ«sit. Cicero sent the enemy away from the city.

The ABLATIVE OF SEPARATION, as the terminology suggests, implies only that some person or thing is separate from another; there is no movement from one place to another; and sometimes there is no preposition, particularly with certain verbs meaning âto free,â âto lack,â and âto deprive,â which commonly take an ablative of separation:

CicerÅ hostÄs ab urbe prohibuit, Cicero kept the enemy away from the city (cf. the similar example above).

EÅs timÅre lÄ«berÄvit. He freed them from fear.

Agricolae pecÅ«niÄ saepe carÄbant. The farmers were often lacking money.

VOCÄBVLA

Recall that there are -us nouns, not just in the fourth declension, but in the second and third as well, e.g., amÄ«cus and corpus; it is a nounâs genitive ending, not the nominative, that identifies its declension, so it is imperative to memorize the full vocabulary entry for every new noun. ConiÅ«rÄtÄ« is found only in the plural, and logically soâcan you explain why? Comparing such forms as frÅ«ctus and frÅ«ctÅ«s provides a reminder that macrons often signal important differences of meaning and usage and so must be learned as part of a wordâs spelling and pronunciation; always practice new paradigms and vocabulary by listening (to your instructor and/or the online audio, and the CDs too, if you have them) and repeating them aloud: semper audÄ« prÅnÅ«ntiÄque! As you learn the new vocabulary, decline some noun-adjective pairs such as sÄnsus commÅ«nis, manus dextra, and genÅ« sinistrum.

Â 

coniÅ«rtÄ«, coniÅ«rÄtrum, m. pl., conspirators (conjure, conjurer; cf. coniÅ«rÄtiÅ, conspiracy, conjuration)

cÃ³rnÅ«, cÃ³rnÅ«s, n., horn (cornânot the grain, but a thick growth of skin; cornea, corner, cornet, cornucopia, unicorn)

frctus, frctÅ«s, m., fruit; profit, benefit, enjoyment (fructify, fructose, frugal)

gÃ©nÅ«, gÃ©nÅ«s, n., knee (genuflect, genuflection, genual; âkneeâ is cognate)

mÃ¡nus, mÃ¡nÅ«s, f., hand; handwriting; band (manual, manufacture, manumit, manuscript, emancipate, manacle, manage, manicle, maneuver)

mÃ©tus, mÃ©tÅ«s, m., fear, dread, anxiety (meticulous; cf. metuere, to fear, dread)

mÅns, mÃ³ntis, m., mountain (mount, mountainous, Montana, amount, catamount, paramount, surmount, tantamount)

sentus, sentÅ«s, m., senate (senator, senatorial; related to senex, as the senate was a council of âeldersâ)

snsus, snsÅ«s, m., feeling, sense (sensation, sensory, sensual, sensuous, senseless, insensate, sensible, sensitive; cf. sentiÅ)

sÃ©rvitÅ«s, servittis, f., servitude, slavery (service; cf. servÅ)

spritus, spritÅ«s, m., breath, breathing; spirit, soul (spiritual, spiritous, conspire, inspire, expire, respiratory, transpire; cf. spÄ«rÄre, to breathe)

vÃ©rsus, vÃ©rsÅ«s, m., line of verse (versify, versification)

commnis, commne, common, general, of/for the community (communal, commune, communicate, communicable, communion, communism, community, excommunicate)

dÃ©xter, dÃ©xtra, dÃ©xtrum, right, right-hand (dexterity, dextrous, ambidextrous)

sinÃster, sinÃstra, sinÃstrum, left, left-hand; harmful, ill-omened (sinister, sinistral, sinistrodextral)

cÃ¡reÅ, carre, cÃ¡ruÄ«, caritrum + abl. of separation, to be without, be deprived of, want, lack; be free from (caretânot carat)

dÄfÃ©ndÅ, dÄfÃ©ndere, dÄfÃ©ndÄ«, dÄfnsum, to ward off; defend, protect (defendant, defense, defensible, defensive, fence, fencing, fend, fender, offend)

discdÅ, discdere, discÃ©ssÄ«, discÃ©ssum, to go away, depart (proceed, secede; do not confuse with discÅ)

dÄ«, ÅdÃsse, sum, a DEFECTIVE VERB (see comments on coepÄ«, Capvt XVII), having chiefly perf. system forms with pres. force, to hate (odium, odious)

prohÃbeÅ, prohibre, prohÃbuÄ«, prohÃbitum, to keep (back), prevent, hinder, restrain, prohibit (prohibitive, prohibition, prohibitory; cf. habeÅ)

prÅnntiÅ, prÅnÅ«ntire, prÅnÅ«ntivÄ«, prÅnÅ«ntitum, to proclaim, announce; declaim; pronounce (pronouncement, pronunciation; cf. nÅ«ntius, messenger, message)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Scan through the readings for all fourth declension nouns, identifying the gender, number, case, and use of each, as well as for all occurrences of the ablative of place from which and ablative of separation constructions. Listen to the CDs, if you have them, and read aloud, and for comprehension, before translating.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Etiam senÄs frÅ«ctibus sapientiae et cÅnsiliÄ«s argÅ«mentÄ«sque certÄ«s saepe carÄre videntur.

Aut ingentÄs montÄs aut flÅ«mina celeria quae dÄ montibus fluÄbant hostÄs ab urbe prohibÄbant.

Quoniam nimis fortia facta faciÄbat, aetÄs eius erat brevis.

Illa medica facere poterat multa manÅ« dextrÄ sed sinistrÄ manÅ« pauca.

At vÄritÄs nÅs metÅ« gravÄ« iam lÄ«berÄbit quÅ diÅ« territÄ« sumus.

Quibus generibus scelerum sinistrÅrum illae duae cÄ«vitÄtÄs dÄlÄtae erunt?

QuÄ« mortÄlis sine amÄ«citiÄ et probitÄte et beneficiÅ in aliÅs potest esse beÄtus?

Pater pecÅ«niam ex GraeciÄ in suam patriam movÄre coeperat, nam familia discÄdere cupÄ«vit.

Ä quibus studium difficilium artium eÅ tempore neglÄctum est?

Ubi versÅ«s illÄ«us auctÅris clÄrÄ« lÄctÄ« sunt, audÄ«tÅrÄs dÄlectÄtÄ« sunt.

SÄ cito iÄcÄrunt ad genua iÅ«dicum, quÄ« autem nÅ«llam clÄmentiam dÄmÅnstrÄvÄrunt.

IstÄ« coniÅ«rÄtÄ« ab urbe prohibÄrÄ« nÅn possunt.

We cannot have the fruits of peace, unless we ourselves free our families from heavy dread.

Those bands of unfortunate men and women will come to us from other countries in which they are deprived of the benefits of citizenship.

The old men lacked neither games nor serious pursuits.

Who began to perceive our common fears of serious crime?

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Cornua cervum Ä perÄ«culÄ«s dÄfendunt. (Martial.âcervus, -Ä«, m., stag.)

OedipÅ«s duÅbus oculÄ«s sÄ prÄ«vÄvit. (Cicero.âprÄ«vÄre, to deprive; âprivation,â privative.â)

ThemistoclÄs bellÅ PersicÅ Graeciam servitÅ«te lÄ«berÄvit. (Cicero.âPersicus, -a, -um, Persian; âpeach,â from Persica, peachtree, and Persicum mÄlum, Persian apple, what the Romans called the peach.)

DÄmosthenÄs multÅs versÅ«s Å«nÅ spÄ«ritÅ« prÅnÅ«ntiÄbat. (Cicero.)

PersicÅs apparÄtÅ«s ÅdÄ«. (Horace.âapparÄtus, -Å«s, m., equipment, display)

Iste commÅ«nÄ« sÄnsÅ« caret. (Horace.)

SenectÅ«s nÅs prÄ«vat omnibus voluptÄtibus neque longÄ abest Ä morte. (Cicero.âlongÄ, adv. of longus.âabsum, to be away; âabsence,â âabsentee.â)

NÅ«llus accÅ«sÄtor caret culpÄ; omnÄs peccÄvimus. (Seneca.âaccÅ«sÄtor, -tÅris, m., âaccusative,â âaccusatory.ââpeccÄre, to sin; âpeccant,â âimpeccable.â)

NÅ«lla pars vÄ«tae vacÄre officiÅ potest. (Cicero.âvacÄre, to be free from; âvacate,â âevacuate.â)

PrÄ«ma virtÅ«s est vitiÅ carÄre. (Quintilian.)

Vir scelere vacuus nÅn eget iaculÄ«s neque arcÅ«. (Horace.âvacuus, -a, -um, free from; âvacuum,â âvacant.ââegÄre, to need; âindigence,â âindigent.ââiaculum, -Ä«, n., javelin; âprojectile.ââarcus, -Å«s, m., bow; âarc,â âarcher.â)

MagnÄ« tumultÅ«s urbem eÅ tempore miscÄbant. (Cicero.âtumultus, -Å«s, m.; âtumult,â âtumultuous.â)

Litterae senÄtuÄ« populÅque Allobrogum manibus coniÅ«rÄtÅrum ipsÅrum erant scrÄ«ptae. (Cicero.âAllobrogÄs, -gum, m. pl., a Gallic tribe the Catilinarian conspirators tried to recruit against Rome.)

Cicero Urges Catilineâs Departure from Rome

HabÄmus senÄtÅ«s cÅnsultum contrÄ tÄ, CatilÄ«na, vehemÄns et grave; Äcre iÅ«dicium habÄmus, et vÄ«rÄs et cÅnsilium cÄ«vitÄs nostra habet. Quid est, CatilÄ«na? CÅ«r remanÄs? Å dÄ« immortÄlÄs! DiscÄde nunc ex hÄc urbe cum malÄ manÅ« scelerÄtÅrum; magnÅ metÅ« mÄ lÄ«berÄbis, sÄ« omnÄs istÅs coniÅ«rÄtÅs tÄcum ÄdÅ«cÄs. Nisi nunc discÄdÄs, tÄ cito ÄiciÄmus. Nihil in cÄ«vitÄte nostrÄ tÄ dÄlectÄre potest. Age, age! Deinde curre ad Manlium, istum amÄ«cum malum; tÄ diÅ« dÄsÄ«derÄvit. Incipe nunc; parÄ cÅpiÄs et gere bellum in cÄ«vitÄtem! BrevÄ« tempore tÄ omnÄsque tuÅs, hostÄs patriae, vincÄmus, et omnÄs vÅs poenÄs gravÄs semper dabitis.

Lucius Sergius Catilina Bronze sculpture, 1889 Thomas Vincotte (1850â1925) Nationalgalerie, Staatliche Museen Berlin, Germany
Bildarchiv Preussischer Kulturbesitz / Art Resource, NY

Cicero Cat. 1.1.3ff: Another passage adapted from Ciceroâs first oration against Catiline; be sure to read again the other excerpts, and accompanying notes, in Capita XI and XIV (the selection presented here comes shortly after the passage of the speech excerpted in Capvt XI).âcÅnsultum, -Ä«, n., decree; âconsult,â âconsultant.ââvehemÄns, gen. vehementis, = Eng.; âvehemence.â âscelerÄtus, -a, -um, wicked, criminal, defiled; adj. from scelus. âManlium: Manlius was one of Catilineâs principal fellow conspirators.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What several reasons does Cicero give Catiline to encourage his departure from the city? Which are most compelling, which somewhat less so or even facetious? What is unusual, and effective, in the positioning of the adjectives in the opening sentence?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Â 

CIL 4.8954: Habitus scribbled this note to a lady friend near the entrance to a shop in Reg. III, Ins. 7. What was her name, i.e., in the nom. form, and what case is it here?âsalÅ«tem: if you do not recall the meaning and case usage of this word, see the graffiti in Capita VIII and X; here, as often in graffiti, the word was abbreviated, but you can practice a bit of âforgeryâ by writing out the full word, replicating as nearly as possible Habitusâ handwriting: youâll have to be creative with the final -m, but specimens of the other three letters appear in the first two words. By the way, actual forgeries of âancientâ graffiti are not uncommon; folks prowling through Pompeii in relatively modern times have scrawled their own Lat. messages on the walls of ruins throughout the city or added words or phrases next to or beneath genuine ancient graffiti, many of them published separately in CIL 4 and labeled as Falsae vel (= aut) Suspectae.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! This chapterâs VocÄbula provides some âhandyâ items: can you explain the etymologies of âmanumit,â âmanuscript,â and âmanufactureâ? A âmanualâ is the Latin equivalent of the Germanic âhandbook.â Then thereâs the old Roman proverb manus manum lavat (lavÄre, to bathe, gives us âlavatoryâ), one hand washes the other. You can see the right-handed bias in the etymologies of âdexterityâ and âsinisterâ (from the ancient superstition that bad signs and omens appeared to oneâs left) and even âambidextrousâ (from ambÅ, both, two: is having âtwo right handsâ better than having two left hands?). And speaking of hands, how about fingers? The Latin word is digitus, -Ä«, which gives us âdigit,â âdigital,â âprestidigitationâ (for a magicianâs quick fingers), and even âdigitalis,â a heart medication from a plant whose flowers are finger-shaped. These appendages are also handy for counting (numerÄre) : prÄ«mus digitus, secundus digitus, tertiusâ¦ etc. (Potestisne numerÄre omnÄs digitÅs vestrÅs, discipulÄ« et discipulae? If not, look back at Capvt XV and review your numerÄ«!) The Romans had special names for each of the fingers, beginning with the thumb, pollex, then index (from indicÄre, to point), medius (middle) or Ä«nfÄmis (infamous, evilânot all our body language is new!), quÄrtus or ÄnulÄrius (where they often wore ÄnulÄ«, rings: see âRingo,â Capvt XXXI), and minimus (the smallest) or auriculÄrius (the parvus digitus, and so handy for scratching or cleaning oneâs aurÄs!). ValÄte!

CAPVT XXI

Third and Fourth Conjugations: Present System Passive

GRAMMATICA

THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATION PRESENT SYSTEM PASSIVE

The pattern of substituting passive endings for active endings, which you learned in Capvt XVIII for the present system passives of first and second conjugation verbs, generally applies to third and fourth conjugation verbs as well; the only exceptions are in the second person singular present tense (set in bold in the following paradigms) and the present infinitive of third conjugation verbs.

Present Indicative Passive

1. Ã¡gor

aÃºdior

cÃ¡pior

2. Ã¡geris

audris

cÃ¡peris

3. Ã¡gitur

audtur

cÃ¡pitur

Â 

1. Ã¡gimur

audmur

cÃ¡pimur

2. agÃminÄ«

audminÄ«

capÃminÄ«

3. agÃºntur

audiÃºntur

capiÃºntur

Future Indicative Passive

1. Ã¡gar

aÃºdiar

cÃ¡piar

2. agris

audiris

capiris

3. agtur

auditur

capitur

Â 

1. agmur

audimur

capimur

2. agminÄ«

audiminÄ«

capiminÄ«

3. agÃ©ntur

audiÃ©ntur

capiÃ©ntur

Imperfect Indicative Passive

1. agbar

audibar

capibar

2. agÄbris

audiÄbris

capiÄbris

3. agÄbtur

audiÄbtur

capiÄbtur

Â 

1. agÄbmur

audiÄbmur

capiÄbmur

2. agÄbminÄ«

audiÄbminÄ«

capiÄbminÄ«

3. agÄbÃ¡ntur

audiÄbÃ¡ntur

capiÄbÃ¡ntur

Â 

Be careful not to confuse the second person singular present and future third conjugation forms, which are distinguished only by the vowel quantity (ageris vs. agÄris). Note that capiÅ and audiÅ are identical throughout the present system active and passive, except for variations in -i- vs. -Ä«- (in the present tense only) and the second singular passive caperis vs. audÄ«ris. Remember that the perfect passive system for third and fourth conjugation verbs follows the universal pattern introduced in Capvt XIX.

Present Passive Infinitive

The present infinitive passive of the fourth conjugation is formed by changing the final -e to -Ä«, as in the first two conjugations; but in the third conjugation, including -iÅ verbs, the whole -ere is changed to -Ä«.

Â 

audre, to hear

audrÄ«, to be heard (cf. laudrÄ«, monrÄ«)

Ã¡gere, to drive

Ã¡gÄ«, to be driven

cÃ¡pere, to take

cÃ¡pÄ«, to be taken

Synopsis

You can now provide a synopsis of regular verbs of all four conjugations in the indicative mood; following is a sample third person plural synopsis of agÅ:

VOCÄBVLA

Äh (English ah or aha)!âmore look-alikes in this list: casa and causa. But say them aloudâprÅnÅ«ntiÄâand youâll hear and learn the difference. N.B. the common use of ablative causÄ with a preceding genitive, e.g., pecÅ«niae causÄ, for the sake of money, or virtÅ«tis causÄ, on account of virtue. There are several new third declension nouns here; if you donât recognize which are i- stems, review Capvt XIV. And practice synopses of some third and fourth conjugation verbsâthen compare your work with the paradigms in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum.

Â 

cÃ¡sa, cÃ¡sae, f., house, cottage, hut (casino)

caÃºsa, caÃºsae, f., cause, reason; case, situation; caÃºsÄ, abl. with a preceding gen., for the sake of, on account of (accuse, because, excuse)

fenÃ©stra, fenÃ©strae, f., window (fenestrated, fenestration, fenestella, defenestration)

fnis, fnis, m., end, limit, boundary; purpose; fnÄs, fÄ«nium, boundaries, territory (affinity, confine, define, final, finale, finance, fine, finesse, finial, finicky, finish, finite, infinite, paraffin, refine)

gÄns, gÃ©ntis, f., clan, race, nation, people (gentile, gentle, genteel, gentry; cf. genus)

mÃºndus, mÃºndÄ«, m., world, universe (mundane, extramundane, demimonde)

nvis, nvis, f., ship, boat (naval, navy, navigate, nave; cf. nÄvigÄre, nauta)

sÃ¡lÅ«s, saltis, f., health, safety; greeting (salubrious, salutary, salutation, salute, salutatorian, salutatory; cf. salveÅ, salvus)

Tria, Triae, f., Troy (Trojan)

vÄ«cnus, vÄ«cnÄ«, m., and vÄ«cna, vÄ«cnae, f., neighbor (vicinity, vicinal, vicinage)

vÃºlgus, vÃºlgÄ«, n. (sometimes m.), the common people, mob, rabble (vulgar, vulgarity, vulgarize, vulgate, divulge)

Ã¡sper, Ã¡spera, Ã¡sperum, rough, harsh (asperity, exasperate, exasperation)

Ã¡tque or ac (both forms used before consonants, atque regularly before vowels or h), conj., and also, and even, and in fact

Ãterum, adv., again, a second time (iterate, iterative, reiterate, reiteration)

contÃneÅ, continre, contÃnuÄ«, contÃ©ntum, to hold together, contain, keep, enclose, restrain (content, discontent, malcontent, continual; cf. teneÅ)

iÃºbeÅ, iubre, iÃºssÄ«, iÃºssum, to bid, order, command (jussive)

labrÅ, labÅrre, labÅrvÄ«, labÅrtum, to labor; be in distress (laboratory, laborer, belabor; cf. labor)

rÃ¡piÅ, rÃ¡pere, rÃ¡puÄ«, rÃ¡ptum, to seize, snatch, carry away (rapacious, rapid, rapine, rapture, ravage, ravish; cf. Äripere, to snatch away)

relÃnquÅ, relÃnquere, relquÄ«, relÃctum, to leave behind, leave, abandon, desert (relinquish, reliquary, relict, relic, delinquent, dereliction)

scÃÅ, scre, scvÄ«, sctum, to know (science, scientific, conscience, conscious, prescience, scilicet; cf. scientia, nescÄ«re, to not know, be ignorant of)

tÃ¡ngÅ, tÃ¡ngere, tÃ©tigÄ«, tctum, to touch (tangent, tangible, tact, tactile, contact, contagious, contiguous, contingent, integer, taste, tax)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After learning the new paradigms and vocabulary and testing yourself with some of the Self-Tutorial Exercises, scan through the following readings for examples of third and fourth conjugation present system passive verbs, identifying the tense, number, and person of each.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Laus autem nimis saepe est neque certa neque magna.

SenÄs in gente nostrÄ ab fÄ«liÄ«s numquam neglegÄbantur.

Quis tum iussus erat Graeciam metÅ« gravÄ« lÄ«berÄre, familiÄs dÄfendere, atque hostÄs Ä fÄ«nibus prohibÄre?

SalÅ«tis commÅ«nis causÄ eÅs coniÅ«rÄtÅs ex urbe discÄdere ac trÄns flÅ«men ad montÄs dÅ«cÄ« iussit.

AliÄ« auctÅrÄs coepÄrunt spÄ«ritÅ«s nostrÅs contrÄ iÅ«dicium atque argÅ«menta senÄtÅ«s iterum movÄre, quod omnÄs metÅ« novÅ territÄ« erant.

Omnia genera servitÅ«tis nÅbÄ«s videntur aspera.

RapiÄturne igitur CicerÅ ex manibus istÅrum?

QuÄ« fÄ«nis metÅ«s atque servitÅ«tis in eÄ cÄ«vitÄte nunc potest vidÄrÄ«?

At senectÅ«tis bonae causÄ iam bene vÄ«vere dÄbÄmus.

In familiÄ eÅrum erant duae fÄ«liae atque quattuor fÄ«liÄ«.

Casa vÄ«cÄ«nae nostrae habuit paucÄs fenestrÄs per quÄs vidÄre potuit.

QuandÅ cornÅ« audÄ«vit, senex in genua cecidit et deÄ«s immortÄlibus grÄtiÄs prÅnÅ«ntiÄbat.

Propter beneficia et sÄnsum commÅ«nem tyrannÄ«, paucÄ« eum odÄrunt.

The truth will not be found without great labor.

Many nations which lack true peace are being destroyed by wars.

Their fears can now be conquered because our deeds are understood by all.

Unless serious pursuits delight us, they are often neglected for the sake of money or praise.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Numquam perÄ«culum sine perÄ«culÅ vincitur. (Publilius Syrus.)

Novius est vÄ«cÄ«nus meus et manÅ« dextrÄ tangÄ« dÄ fenestrÄ«s meÄ«s potest. (Martial.âNovius: a personal name.)

NÅnne iÅ«dicÄs iubÄbunt hunc propter scelera in vincula dÅ«cÄ« et ad mortem rapÄ«? (Cicero.ânÅnne introduces a question which anticipates the answer âyesâ; see Capvt XL.âvinculum, -Ä«, n., chain; âvinculum.â)

Altera aetÄs bellÄ«s cÄ«vÄ«libus teritur et RÅma ipsa suÄ«s vÄ«ribus dÄlÄtur. (Horace.âcÄ«vÄ«lis, -e, = Eng.; cf. cÄ«vis, cÄ«vitÄs; âcivilian,â âcivilize.ââterÅ, -ere, trÄ«vÄ«, trÄ«tum, to wear out; âtrite,â âcontrite,â âdetriment.â)

At amÄ«citia nÅ«llÅ locÅ exclÅ«ditur; numquam est intempestÄ«va aut sinistra; multa beneficia continet. (Cicero.âexclÅ«dÅ, -ere, to shut out; âexclude,â âexclusion.ââintempestÄ«vus, -a, -um, untimely.)

FutÅ«ra scÄ«rÄ« nÅn possunt. (Cicero.âfutÅ«rus, -a, -um, = Eng.; âfuturistic.â)

PrÄ«ncipiÅ ipse mundus deÅrum hominumque causÄ factus est, et quae in eÅ sunt, ea parÄta sunt ad frÅ«ctum hominum. (Cicero.)

Quam cÅpiÅsÄ Ä Xenophonte agrÄ«cultÅ«ra laudÄtur in eÅ librÅ quÄ« âOeconomicusâ Ä«nscrÄ«bitur. (Cicero.âcÅpiÅsÄ, adv., fully, copiously; cf. cÅpia.âXenophÅn, -phontis, m., name of a famous Greek historian. âagrÄ«cultÅ«ra, -ae, f.; âagriculture.ââÄ«nscrÄ«bÅ, -ere, to entitle; âinscribe,â âinscription.â)

Vulgus vult dÄcipÄ«. (*Phaedrus.âvult: wants; âvolition,â âvolunteer.ââdÄcipiÅ, -ere, to deceive; âdeceiver,â âdeception.â)

Ubi scientia ac sapientia inveniuntur? (Job.)

VÄritÄs nimis saepe labÅrat; exstinguitur numquam. (Livy.âexstinguÅ, -ere; âextinguish,â âextinct.â)

Vergilâs Messianic Eclogue

Venit iam magna aetÄs nova; dÄ caelÅ mittitur puer, quÄ« vÄ«tam deÅrum habÄbit deÅsque vidÄbit et ipse vidÄbitur ab illÄ«s. Hic puer reget mundum cui virtÅ«tÄs patris pÄcem dedÄrunt. Pauca mala, autem, remanÄbunt, quae hominÄs iubÄbunt labÅrÄre atque bellum asperum gerere. Erunt etiam altera bella atque iterum ad TrÅiam magnus mittÄtur AchillÄs. Tum, puer, ubi iam longa aetÄs tÄ virum fÄcerit, erunt nÅ«llÄ« labÅrÄs, nÅ«lla bella; nautae ex nÄvibus discÄdent, agricolae quoque iam agrÅs relinquent, terra ipsa omnibus hominibus omnia parÄbit. Currite, aetÄtÄs; incipe, parve puer, scÄ«re mÄtrem, et erit satis spÄ«ritÅ«s mihi tua dÄ«cere facta.

Â 

Vergil Ecl. 4: Vergil (Publius Vergilius Maro, 70â19 B.C.) is best known for his epic poem, the Aeneid, but other, earlier works included his quasi-didactic poem, the Georgics, a glorification of farming, and the Eclogues, a collection of 10 short pastoral poems extolling the shepherdâs life. The fourth Eclogue, composed ca. 40 B.C., stood apart from the others, as it heralded the worldâs rebirth and a new Golden Age of peace and freedom from toil that would be ushered in with the birth of a divine boy child; readers ancient and modern have speculated over the childâs identity, some supposing reference to the families of Octavian and/or Mark Antony, but the poemâs hopeful, messianic message, taken by many early Christians as a prophecy of the birth of Christ, may have been intended more generally to reflect contemporary longing for an end to Roman civil war.âaltera bella: here = the same wars over again.âscÄ«re mÄtrem: i.e., to be born, but what is the lit. meaning?âspÄ«ritÅ«s: here, as often, in the sense of inspiration.)

Marble portrait bust of Vergil Imperial Roman Museo Gregoriano Profano Vatican Museums, Vatican State
Vanni / Art Resource, NY

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Which aspects of this prophecy strike you as especially mystical? Where does the narrator address the boy, and what do you sense is the intended effect?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

CrÄscÄns CrsÄrÅtÄ« salÅ«tem! Quid agit tibi dexter ocellus?

CIL 4.8347: Graffito found near the entrance to the kitchen of the House of Menander (Reg. I, Ins. 10). We have seen the cognomen CrÄscÄns before; this is likely a different fellow (the name was common), and the editors of CIL speculate that he might have been the familyâs doorman (ÅstiÄrius), as his name was also found in the houseâs entrance-way (vestibulum). The exact context is unclear, but Crescens seems to be asking Cryseros about a friend or lover; the second sentence is in dactylic meter (Ë Ë/ Ì Ë Ë/ Ì Ë Ë/ Ì Ì) and may be a quotation from an amatory poem.âCrsÄrÅs (or ChrsÄrÅs), CrsÄrÅtis, m., C(h)ryseros, a Greek cognomen, probably a slaveâs or a freedmanâs, meaning âgolden.ââsalÅ«tem: cf. the graffiti in Capita VIII, X, and XIX.âquid: with agis/agit commonly = how?, as in the conversational quid agis, how are you (doing)?âtibi: here, as often, the dat. has possessive force.âocellus: diminutive of oculus, lit. little eye, but in an amatory context = darling, comparable to the Eng. expression âapple of my eyeâ; with ocellus in this sense dexter essentially = cÄrus (the expression survives in modern It. occhio destro). A less artful interpretation would be simply opthalmological!âin that case, what would Crescens quite literally be asking?

The House of Menander, view through the atrium into the peristyle garden, Pompeii, Italy
Robert I. Curtis

ETYMOLOGIA

Romance derivatives from some of the words in the VocÄbula:

Cf. Rom. cauza, fine, ginte (obsolete), conine; Old Occ. cauza, fn, gn, contener, mn.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, discipulae atque discipulÄ«! Quid novÄ«? Well, how about some more well-known Latin phrases and mottoes related to the verba nova in this chapterâs VocÄbula? First, for you Godfather fans, thereâs Italian cosa nostra, from causa nostra. Vestra causa tÅta nostra est is the motto of the American Classical League, a national organization for teachers of Latin, Greek, and classical humanities. The University of Georgiaâs motto is et docÄre et rÄrum exquÄ«rere causÄs, both to teach and to seek out the causes of things (i.e., to conduct researchâfor rÄrum, see the next chapter). Here are some others: fÄ«nis corÅnat opus, the end crowns the work; gÄns togÄta, the toga-clad nation (a phrase Vergil applies to Rome, where the toga was a manâs formal attire); tangere ulcus, to touch a sore spot (lit., ulcer); sÄ«c trÄnsit glÅria mundÄ«, so passes the glory of the world (Thomas Ã  Kempis, on the transitory nature of worldly thingsâsome comedian who shall forever remain nameless has offered an alternate translation, to wit, âGloria always gets sick on the subway at the beginning of the weekâ!!!); and the abbreviation sc., meaning supply (something omitted from a text but readily understood), comes from scÄ«licet, short for scÄ«re licet, literally it is permitted for you to understand. Hic est fÄ«nis: valÄte!

CAPVT XXII

Fifth Declension; Ablative of Place Where and Summary of Ablative Uses

GRAMMATICA

THE FIFTH DECLENSION

This chapter introduces the fifth and last of the Latin noun declensions. The characteristic vowel is -Ä-, and -ÄÄ« or -eÄ« is the genitive and dative ending (the gen./dat. -e- is long when preceded by a vowel, short when preceded by a consonant; cf. diÄÄ« and reÄ« below). Nouns of this declension are all feminine, except diÄs (day) and its compound merÄ«diÄs (midday), which are masculine. To decline, follow the usual pattern of base plus endings:

Note that the genitive and dative singular are identical (true of the first declension also), as are the nominative singular and the nominative and accusative plural (the vocatives, too, of course), and the dative and ablative plural (true of all declensions); word order, context, and other cues such as subject-verb agreement will help you distinguish among those ambiguous forms in a sentence.

ABLATIVE OF PLACE WHERE AND SUMMARY OF ABLATIVE USES

You have thus far been introduced to these ablative uses: object of a preposition (Capvt II), means, manner, accompaniment (Capvt XIV), ablative with cardinal numerals and ablative of time (Capvt XV), agent (Capvt XVIII), place from which and separation (Capvt XX). You have also encountered the ABLATIVE OF PLACE WHERE construction, a noun in the ablative, typically with in, in/on, or sub, under, describing where someone or something is located or an action is occurring:

In magnÄ casÄ vÄ«vunt. They live in a large house.

NÄvis sub aquÄ fuit. The ship was under water.

Some ablative case uses require a preposition in Latin, others do not, and in some instances the practice was variable. Notably, in the ablative of manner construction, when the noun is modified by an adjective, cum is frequently omitted; if cum is used, it is usually preceded by the adjective (e.g., id magnÄ cÅ«rÄ fÄcit and id magnÄ cum cÅ«rÄ fÄcit, both meaning he did it with great care). The following summary reviews each of the ablative uses studied thus far:

Ablatives with a Preposition

The ablative is used as a simple object of a preposition and specifically with:

cum to indicate ACCOMPANIMENT:
Cum amÄ«cÅ id scrÄ«psit. He wrote it with his friend.

cum to indicate MANNER (whether or not an adjective is used):
Cum cÅ«rÄ id scrÄ«psit. He wrote it with care.
MagnÄ cum cÅ«rÄ id scrÄ«psit. He wrote it with great care.

in and sub> to indicate PLACE WHERE:
In urbe id scrÄ«psit. He wrote it in the city.

ab, dÄ, ex to indicate PLACE FROM WHICH:
Ex urbe id mÄ«sit. He sent it from the city.

ab, dÄ, ex to indicate SEPARATION:
Ab urbe eÅs prohibuit. He kept them from the city.

ab to indicate PERSONAL AGENT:
Ab amÄ«cÅ id scrÄ«ptum est. It was written by his friend.

ex or dÄ following certain CARDINAL NUMERALS to indicate a group of which some part is specified:
TrÄs ex nÄvibus discessÄrunt. Three of the ships departed.

Ablatives without a Preposition

The ablative is used without a preposition to indicate:

MEANS/INSTRUMENT:
SuÄ manÅ« id scrÄ«psit. He wrote it with his own hand.

MANNER, when an adjective is used:
MagnÄ cÅ«rÄ id scrÄ«psit. He wrote it with great care.

TIME WHEN/WITHIN WHICH:
EÅ tempore or Å«nÄ hÅrÄ id scrÄ«psit. He wrote it at that time or in one hour.

SEPARATION, especially with ideas of freeing, lacking, depriving:
MetÅ« eÅs lÄ«berÄvit. He freed them from fear.

VOCÄBVLA

Remember that for some fifth declension nouns the genitive/dative singular ending is -ÄÄ« and for others -eÄ«; learn these new nouns, like all vocabulary, by looking carefully at their spelling, macrons included, listening to them at www.wheelockslatin.com (or on the CDs), and then repeating each aloud correctly. Do not confuse diÄs and deusâthough the two, day/daylight and god, derive from the same Indo-European root, which is also reflected in the names of the sky god Zeus and Iuppiter (a form later reconfigured as diÄs pater). And donât forget to nasalize the -gn- in ignis, i.e., prÅnÅ«ntiÄ as if it were spelled *ingnis. Practice with some of the new words by declining fidÄs incerta and fÄlÄ«x spÄs; compare your work with the paradigms in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, NOUNSâDECLENSIONS.

Â 

dÃÄs, diÄ«, m., day (diary, dial, dismal, diurnal, journal, adjourn, journey, meridian, sojourn)

fÃ©rrum, fÃ©rrÄ«, n., iron; sword (ferric, ferrite, ferro-; Fe, the chemical symbol for iron)

fÃdÄs, fÃdeÄ«, f., faith, trust, trustworthiness, fidelity; promise, guarantee, protection (confide, diffident, infidel, perfidy, fealty)

Ãgnis, Ãgnis, m., fire (igneous, ignite, ignition)

mÃ³dus, mÃ³dÄ«, m., measure, bound, limit; manner, method, mode, way (model, moderate, modern, modest, modicum, modify, mood)

rÄs, rÃ©Ä«, f., thing, matter, property, business, affair (real, realistic, realize, reality, real estate, rebus)

rÄs pblica, rÃ©Ä« pblicae (often seen as a single word, rÄspblica), f., state, commonwealth, republic (Republican)

spÄs, spÃ©Ä«, f., hope (despair, desperate; cf. spÄrÄre, to hope)

aÃ©quus, aÃ©qua, aÃ©quum, level, even; calm; equal, just; favorable (equable, equanimity, equation, equator, equilateral, equilibrium, equinox, equity, equivalent, equivocal, inequity, iniquity, adequate, coequal)

flÄ«x, gen. fÄlcis, lucky, fortunate, happy (felicitation, felicitous, infelicitous, felicity, infelicity, Felix)

incÃ©rtus, incÃ©rta, incÃ©rtum (in-certus), uncertain, unsure, doubtful (incertitude)

Latnus, Latna, Latnum, Latin (Latinate, Latinist, Latinity, Latinize, Latino)

mÃ©dius, mÃ©dia, mÃ©dium, middle; used partitively, middle of: media urbs, middle of the city (Mediterranean, medium, median, mediate, mean, medieval, meridian, immediate, intermediary)

quÃ³ndam, adv., formerly, once (quondam)

ÃºltrÄ, adv. and prep. + acc., on the other side of, beyond (ultra, ultrasonic, ultrasound, ultraviolet, outrage, outrageous)

prtinus, adv., immediately

cÃ©rnÅ, cÃ©rnere, crvÄ«, crtum, to distinguish, discern, perceive (discernible, discreet, discrete, discretion)

ÄrÃpiÅ, ÄrÃpere, ÄrÃpuÄ«, ÄrÃ©ptum (Ä+rapiÅ), to snatch away, take away; rescue (for the VOWEL WEAKENING seen in the compound form -ripiÅ from rapiÅ, see âTwo Rules of Phonetic Change,â Some Etymological Aids)

Ãnquit, defective verb, he says or said, placed after one or more words of a direct quotation but usually translated before the quote

tÃ³llÅ, tÃ³llere, sÃºstulÄ«, subltum, to raise, lift up; take away, remove, destroy (extol, sublate, sublation; cf. tolerÅ; the principal parts are another example of SUPPLETION: see above, Chapter XII)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Before translating, practice with the new grammar by scanning the readings and identifying the number, gender, case, and use of all fifth declension nouns, as well as the use of each ablative noun and pronoun.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

VÄ«cÄ«nÄ« nostrÄ« sÄ in genua prÅtinus iÄcÄrunt et omnÄs deÅs in mundÅ laudÄvÄrunt.

GentÄs Graeciae ingentibus montibus et parvÄ«s fÄ«nibus continÄbantur.

Quis iussit illam rem pÅ«blicam servitÅ«te asperÄ lÄ«berÄrÄ«?

âIste,â inquit, âsceleribus suÄ«s brevÄ« tempore tollÄtur.â

ContrÄ aliÄs manÅ«s malÅrum cÄ«vium eaedem rÄs iterum parÄbuntur; senÄtusrem pÅ«blicam dÄfendent et istÄ« ex fÄ«nibus nostrÄ«s cito discÄdent.

SenectÅ«s senÄs Ä mediÄ«s rÄbus saepe prohibet.

At rÄs gravÄs neque vÄ« neque spÄ geruntur sed cÅnsiliÅ.

SÄ« versÅ«s hÅrum duÅrum poÄtÄrum neglegÄtis, magnÄ parte RÅmÄnÄrum litterÄrum carÄbitis.

EÅdem tempore nostrae spÄs salÅ«tis commÅ«nis vestrÄ fidÄ altae sunt, spÄ«ritÅ«s sublÄtÄ« sunt, et timÅrÄs relictÄ« sunt.

Nova genera scelerum in hÄc urbe inveniuntur quod multÄ« etiam nunc bonÄ«s mÅribus et sÄnsÅ« commÅ«nÄ« carent ac nÄtÅ«ram sinistram habent.

Vulgus multa ex fenestrÄ«s casÄrum ÄiciÄbat.

Great fidelity can now be found in this commonwealth.

His new hopes had been destroyed by the common fear (what would the correct forms be of both metus and timor?) of uncertain things.

On that day the courage and the faith of the brave Roman men and women were seen by all.

The tyrant knew the enemyâs plans, and with great hope he ordered those ships to be destroyed.

He could not defend himself with his left hand or his right.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Dum vÄ«ta est, spÄs est. (Cicero.)

Aequum animum in rÄbus difficilibus servÄ. (Horace.)

Ubi tyrannus est, ibi plÄnÄ est nÅ«lla rÄs pÅ«blica. (*Cicero.âplÄnÄ, adv., clearly; âplain,â âexplain.â)

FuÄrunt quondam in hÄc rÄ pÅ«blicÄ virÄ« magnae virtÅ«tis et antÄ«quae fideÄ«. (Cicero.)

Hanc rem pÅ«blicam salvam esse volumus. (*Cicero.âvolumus: we wish; âvolition,â âmalevolent.â)

SpÄs coniÅ«rÄtÅrum mollibus sententiÄ«s multÅrum cÄ«vium alitur. (Cicero.âmollis, -e, soft, mild; âmollify,â âemollient.â)

RÄs pÅ«blica cÅnsiliÄ«s meÄ«s eÅ diÄ ex igne atque ferrÅ Ärepta est. (Cicero.)

Quod bellum ÅdÄrunt, prÅ pÄce cum fidÄ labÅrÄbant. (Livy.)

DÄ«c mihi bonÄ fidÄ: tÅ« eam pecÅ«niam ex eius manÅ« dextrÄ nÅn ÄripuistÄ«? (Plautus.)

AmÄ«cus certus in rÄ incertÄ cernitur. (Ennius.)

HomÄrus audÄ«tÅrem in mediÄs rÄs rapit. (Horace.)

FÄlÄ«x est quÄ« potest causÄs rÄrum intellegere; et fortÅ«nÄtus ille quÄ« deÅs antÄ«quÅs dÄ«ligit. (Vergil.)

StÅicus noster, âVitium,â inquit, ânÅn est in rÄbus sed in animÅ ipsÅ.â (Seneca.âStÅicus, -Ä«, m., a Stoic philosopher; âstoic,â âstoical.â)

Et mihi rÄs subiungam, nÅn mÄ rÄbus. (Horace.âsubiungÅ, -ere, to subject; âsubjoin,â âsubjunctive.â)

Est modus in rÄbus; sunt certÄ« fÄ«nÄs ultrÄ quÅs virtÅ«s invenÄ«rÄ« nÅn potest. (Horace.)

Hoc, FortÅ«na, tibi vidÄtur aequum? (*Martial.)

A Visit from the Young Interns

LanguÄbam: sed tÅ« comitÄtus prÅtinus ad mÄ

vÄnistÄ« centum, Symmache, discipulÄ«s.

Centum mÄ tetigÄre manÅ«s aquilÅne gelÄtae:

nÅn habuÄ« febrem, Symmache, nunc habeÅ!

Martial Epig. 5.9: Anyone who has ever visited the health center of a university that has a medical school can fully sympathize with this complaint!âif you werenât sick when you GOT there, you might well be when you LEFT! Meter: elegiac couplet.âlanguÄre, to be weak, sick; âlanguid,â âlanguish.ââcomitÄtus, -a, -um, accompanied (by); âconcomitance,â âconcomitant.ââSymmachus: the name of this doctor, a med school âprofessor,â is Greek, which adds an ethnic slur to the piece, not uncommon in Roman satire.âcentumâ¦ discipulÄ«s: abl. of agent with comitÄtus; the prep. was often omitted in poetry.âtetigÄre: = tetigÄrunt; for this alternate ending, see Capvt XII.âaquilÅ, -lÅnis, m., the north wind.âgelÄtus, -a, -um, chilled, here modifying centumâ¦ manÅ«s; âgel,â âgelatin.ââfebris, febris, f., fever; âfebrile,â âfeverish.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: The disjointedness of the phrases comitÄtusâ¦ centumâ¦ discipulÄ«s and centumâ¦ manÅ«sâ¦ gelÄtae is deliberate; which pairs of words are emphasized and what is the purpose? Comment on the arrangement of the two adverb-verb phrases in the last verse and how the word order helps underscore the punch-line (Martialâs epigrams, as you have seen, nearly always have a zinger in the closing verse!).

Bronze and iron surgical instruments. 3rd cent. A.D. Private collection
Â© FranÃ§ois Guenet / Art Resource, NY

On Ambition and Literature, Both Latin and Greek

PoÄtae per litterÄs hominibus magnam perpetuamque fÄmam dare possunt; multÄ« virÄ«, igitur, litterÄs dÄ suÄ«s rÄbus scrÄ«bÄ« cupiunt. Trahimur omnÄs studiÅ laudis et multÄ« glÅriÄ dÅ«cuntur, quae aut in litterÄ«s GraecÄ«s aut LatÄ«nÄ«s invenÄ«rÄ« potest. QuÄ«, autem, videt multum frÅ«ctum glÅriae in versibus LatÄ«nÄ«s sed nÅn in GraecÄ«s, nimium errat, quod litterae Graecae leguntur in omnibus ferÄ gentibus, sed LatÄ«nae in fÄ«nibus suÄ«s continentur.

Â 

Cicero Arch. 11.26, 10.23: Review the passage about Alexander the Great from this same speech which you read in Capvt XIII, and recall that the speech was in defense of the Greek poet Archias.âferÄ, adv., almost.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What is Ciceroâs initial observation regarding the benefits that literature can provide an ambitious man?âhow does this compare with the anecdote he relates about Alexander elsewhere in the speech? Explain the authorâs point in comparing the advantages of Greek and Latin literature: is his position surprising to you?âwhy or why not? Identify the device of word order seen in both trahimur omnÄsâ¦ multÄ«â¦ dÅ«cuntur and leguntur in omnibus ferÄ gentibusâ¦ in fÄ«nibus suÄ«s continentur; what is the writerâs purpose in employing this arrangement?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

C. IÅ«lium Polybium

duumvir(um) [Cuculla] rog(at).

Â 

CIL 4.7841: An example of the hundreds of electoral notices (programmata, sg. programma) found on the walls of buildings lining the streets of Pompeii; most of these programmata were dipinti (sg. dipinto) rather than graffiti, i.e., they were painted not incised. In this notice (the top two lines in the photo), which appears immediately above another one painted on the street-front wall of a wool processing shop on the Via dellâAbbondanza (Reg. IX, Ins. 7), the name of the woman lobbying for Polybiusâ election, Cuculla, has been painted over, perhaps because the candidate, or another of his supporters, did not welcome the endorsement.âduumvir, -Ä«, m., frequently, as here, abbreviated IIVIR, duumvir; the duumvirs were Pompeiiâs two chief magistrates, sharing authority, like the two consuls in Rome.ârogÅ (1), to ask, ask for; in electoral campaigning, ask to elect, ask approval for; âinterrogate,â âprerogative.â

Storefront with programma for Gaius Julius Polybius (CIL 4.7841) Via dellâAbbondanza. 1st cent. A.D. Pompeii, Italy
Alinari / Art Resource, NY

ETYMOLOGIA

Connected with diÄs is the adj. diurnus, daily, whence come the words for âdayâ in It. and Fr.: It. giorno, Fr. jour, journÃ©e; cf. Sp. dÃa; Port. dia, diurno; Old Occ. jrn; Rom. ziua. In late Lat. there was a form diurnÄlis, from which derive It. giornale, Fr. journal, Port. diurnal, Old Occ. jornal, Eng. âjournalâ; cf. Sp. diario, Rom. zilnic. Eng. âdismalâ stems ultimately from diÄs malus. The stem of fidÄs can be found in the following words even though it may not be immediately obvious: affidavit, defy, affiance, fiancÃ©. Eng. âfaithâ is from early Old Fr. feit, feid, from Lat. fidem. Other words connected with modus are: modulate, accommodate, commodious, discommode, incommode, Ã  la mode, modus operandi.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Now that youâve encountered merÄ«diÄs, you understand a.m. and p.m., from ante and post merÄ«diem. Your physician might prescribe a medication diÄbus alternÄ«s, every other day, or diÄbus tertiÄ«s, every third day, or even b.i.d. or t.i.d., bis in diÄ or ter in diÄ (if youâve thought about those last two twice or thrice and still canât figure them out, look back at Capvt XV!). Other items you might encounter one of these days: diem ex diÄ, day by day; diÄs fÄlÄ«x, a lucky day; the legal terms diÄs jÅ«ridicus and nÅn jÅ«ridicus, days when court is and is not in session; and the DiÄsÄª rae, a medieval hymn about the Day of Judgment, part of the requiem mass. And surely you follow Horaceâs advice every day and carpe diem (an agricultural metaphor, since carpÅ, carpere really means to harvest or pluck from the vine or stalkâso your days, once seized, should be a bountiful cornucopia). Now you know, too, what is meant by the phrase amÄ«cus certus in rÄ incertÄ; a bonÄ fidÄ agreement is made with good faith (recognize the ablative usage?); and if your âfriend indeedâ is your trusty dog, you should consider dubbing him âFido.â Carpite omnÄs diÄs, discipulÄ« discipulaeque, et valÄte!

CAPVT XXIII

Participles

GRAMMATICA

PARTICIPLES (participium, -Ä«, n.)

Like English, Latin has a set of verbal adjectives, i.e., adjectives formed from a verb stem, called PARTICIPLES. Regular transitive verbs in Latin have four participles, two of them active voice (the present and future), and two passive (future and perfect). The present active and future passive participles are formed on a verbâs present stem, while the perfect passive and future active are formed on the PARTICIPIAL STEM, found by dropping the endings from the perfect passive participle, which is itself usually a verbâs fourth principal part: i.e., laudÄt- from laudÄtus, -a, -um:

Â 

Â 

Active

Passive

Pres.

present stem + -ns (gen. -ntis)

âââ

Perf.

âââ

partic. stem + -us, -a, -um

Fut.

participial stem + -Å«rus, -Å«ra, -Å«rum

pres. stem + -ndus, -nda, -ndum

Â 

This pattern can perhaps best be recalled by memorizing the participles of agÅ, in which the difference between the present stem and the participial stem is sufficient to eliminate any confusion. It is also helpful to note that the base of the present participle is marked by -nt-, the future active by -Å«r-, and the future passive, often called the âgerundive,â by -nd-.

Â 

agÅ, agere, Ägi, Äctum, to drive, do, lead, act

Â 

Â 

Active

Passive

Pres.

Ã¡gÄns, agÃ©ntis, doing

âââ

Perf.

âââ

ctus, -a, -um, done, having been done

Fut.

Äctrus, -a, -um, about to do, going to do

agÃ©ndus, -a, -um, (about) to be done, deserving to be done

Â 

English derivatives neatly illustrate the sense of three of these participles: âagentâ (from agÄns), a person doing something; âactâ (Äctus, -a, -um), something done; âagendaâ (agendus, -a, -um), something to be done. The participles of three of the model verbs follow:

Note that fourth conjugation and third conjugation -iÅ verbs have -ie- in both the present active participle (-iÄns, -ientis) and the future passive (-iendus, -a, -um). Notice too that while Latin has present active, perfect passive, and future active and passive participles, the equivalents of praising, having been praised, about to praise, and (about) to be praised, it lacks both a present passive participle (being praised) and a perfect active participle (having praised).

Declension of Participles

Three of the four participles are declined on the pattern of magnus, -a, -um. Only the present participle has third declension forms, following the model of potÄns (Capvt XVI), except that the ablative singular sometimes ends in -e, sometimes (especially when used strictly as an attributive adjective) in -Ä«; the vowel before -ns in the nominative singular is always long, but before -nt- (according to the rule learned earlier) it is always short.

Â 

Â 

M. & F.

N.

Nom.

Ã¡gÄns

Ã¡gÄns

Gen.

agÃ©ntis

agÃ©ntis

Dat.

agÃ©ntÄ«

agÃ©ntÄ«

Acc.

agÃ©ntem

Ã¡gÄns

Abl.

agÃ©ntÄ«, agÃ©nte

agÃ©ntÄ«, agÃ©nte

Â 

Nom.

agÃ©ntÄs

agÃ©ntia

Gen.

agÃ©ntium

agÃ©ntium

Dat.

agÃ©ntibus

agÃ©ntibus

Acc.

agÃ©ntÄs

agÃ©ntia

Abl.

agÃ©ntibus

agÃ©ntibus

Participles as Verbal Adjectives

The etymology of the term âparticiple,â from pars + capere, to take part/share in, reflects the fact that participles share in the characteristics of both adjectives and verbs. As adjectives, participles agree in gender, number, and case with the words they modify. Sometimes also, like adjectives, they modify no expressed noun but function as nouns themselves: amÄns, a lover; sapiÄns, a wise man, philosopher; venientÄs, those coming. As verbs, participles have tense and voice; they may take direct objects or other constructions used with the particular verb; and they may be modified by an adverb or an adverbial phrase:

Patrem in casÄ videntÄs, puella et puer ad eum cucurrÄrunt. Seeing their father in the house, the boy and girl ran up to him.

In Latin as in English, the time of the action indicated by a participle is not absolute but relative to that of the main verb. For example, the action of a present participle is contemporaneous with the action of the verb of its clause, no matter whether that verb is a present, past, or future tense; in the above sentence it was at some past time that the children first saw and then ran toward their father (seeing him, i.e., when they saw him, they ran up to him). The time indicated by perfect and future participles is also relative, as can be seen in the following table:

Present participle = action contemporaneous with that of the verb (same time)

Perfect participle = action prior to that of the verb (time before)

Future participle = action subsequent to that of the verb (time after)

GraecÄ« nautae, videntÄs PolyphÄmum, timent, timuÄrunt, timÄbunt.

The Greek sailors, seeing Polyphemus, are afraid, were afraid, will be afraid.

GraecÄ« nautae, vÄ«sÄ« Ä PolyphÄmÅ, timent, timuÄrunt, timÄbunt.

The Greek sailors, (having been) seen by P., are afraid, were afraid, will be afraid.

GraecÄ« nautae, vÄ«sÅ«rÄ« PolyphÄmum, timent, timuÄrunt, timÄbunt.

The Greek sailors, about to see Polyphemus, are afraid, were afraid, will be afraid.

Translating Participial Phrases as Clauses

Participial phrases are used more frequently in Latin than in English, which prefers clauses with regular verbs. In translating Latin into idiomatic English, therefore, it is often preferable to transform a participial phrase into a subordinate clause. In doing so you need to consider (1) the relationship between the action in the phrase and the action in the clause to which it is attached, so you can choose an appropriate subordinating conjunction (usually âwhen,â âsince,â or âalthoughâ), and (2) the relativity of tenses, so you can transform the participle into the appropriate verb tense.

Thus the example given earlier, patrem in casÄ videntÄs, puella et puer ad eum cucurrÄrunt, can be translated seeing their father in the house, the girl and boy ran up to him or, more idiomatically, when they saw their father in the house, the girl and boy ran up to him. Likewise GraecÄ« nautae, vÄ«sÄ« Ä PolyphÄmÅ, timuÄrunt is better translated when/since they had been seen [time prior to main verb] by Polyphemus, the Greek sailors were afraid than the more literal having been seen by Polyphemus, the Greek sailors were afraid. Consider these further examples:

MÄter, fÄ«lium amÄns, auxilium dat. Since she loves her son [lit., loving her son], the mother gives him assistance.

Pater, fÄ«liam vÄ«sÅ«rus, casam parÄbat. Since he was about to see his daughter, the father was preparing the house.

Puella, in casam veniÄns, gaudÄbat. When she came into the house [lit., coming into the house], the girl was happy.

VOCÄBVLA

This chapterâs new word-list contains, in opprimÅ from premÅ, another example of the sort of VOWEL WEAKENING common in compounds (see note on ÄripiÅ in Capvt XXIII, and App., Some Etymological Aids). The list also introduces another SEMI-DEPONENT verb, gaudeÅ, which, like audeÅ, audÄre, ausus sum (Capvt VII), has only three principal parts and perfect system forms that are passive but have active meanings (youâll learn more about such verbs in Capvt XXXIV). For practice with the new grammar, write out the four participles for one or two of the verbs in this list, such as ÄducÅ and vertÅ, include the English translations, then compare with the above paradigms.

Â 

arx, Ã¡rcis, f., citadel, stronghold (possibly related to arca, box, chest, from which we get âarkâ)

dux, dÃºcis, m., leader, guide; commander, general (duke, ducal, ducat, duchess, duchy, doge; cf. dÅ«cÅ)

Ã©quus, Ã©quÄ«, m., horse (equestrian, equine; cf. equa, mare)

hÃ¡sta, hÃ¡stae, f., spear (hastate)

nsula, nsulae, f., island (insular, insulate, isolate, peninsula)

ltus, ltoris, n., shore, coast (littoral, sublittoral)

mles, mlitis, m., soldier (military, militaristic, militate, militant, militia)

Årtor, ÅrÄtris, m., orator, speaker (oratory, oratorio; cf. Ås and ÅrÄre, to speak, plead)

sacÃ©rdÅs, sacerdtis, m., priest (sacerdotal; cf. sacer, sacred)

Ã¡liquis, Ã¡liquid (gen. alicuÃus, dat. Ã¡licui, etc.; cf. decl. of quis, quid; nom. and acc. n. pl., Ã¡liqua), indef. pron., someone, somebody, something

quÃsquis, quÃdquid (quis repeated; cases other than nom. rare), indef. pron., whoever, whatever

magnÃ¡nimus, magnÃ¡nima, magnÃ¡nimum, great-hearted, brave, magnanimous (magnanimity)

Ãºmquam, adv., in questions or negative clauses, ever, at any time (numquam = ne + umquam)

ducÅ, Äducre, ÄducvÄ«, Äductum, to bring up, educate (education, educator, educable; do not confuse with ÄdÅ«cere, to lead out)

gaÃºdeÅ, gaudre, gÄvsus sum, to be glad, rejoice (gaudy, gaudeamus; cf. gaudium, joy, as in LatÄ«na est gaudium!)

ostÃ©ndÅ, ostÃ©ndere, ostÃ©ndÄ«, ostÃ©ntum, to exhibit, show, display (ostentation, ostentatious, ostensible; cf. tendere, to stretch, extend)

pÃ©tÅ, pÃ©tere, petvÄ«, pettum, to seek, aim at, beg, beseech (appetite, compete, competent, impetuous, petition, petulant, repeat; cf. perpetuus)

prÃ©mÅ, prÃ©mere, prÃ©ssÄ«, prÃ©ssum, to press; press hard, pursue; spelled -primÅ, -primere in compounds such as opprimÅ below (compress, depress, express, impress, imprint, print, repress, reprimand, suppress)

Ã³pprimÅ, opprÃmere, opprÃ©ssÄ«, opprÃ©ssum, to suppress, overwhelm, overpower, check (oppress, oppression, oppressive, oppressor)

vÃ©rtÅ, vÃ©rtere, vÃ©rtÄ«, vÃ©rsum, to turn; change; so ÄvertÅ, turn away, avert, revertÅ, turn back, etc. (adverse, advertise, averse, convert, controversy, diverse, divorce, invert, pervert, revert, subvert; cf. versus)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After learning the new paradigms and vocabulary and testing your mastery with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, scan through the following readings for all the participles, identifying the tense, voice, number, gender, case, and the noun modified. Listen to the CDs, if you have them, and read aloud before translating.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Aliquid numquam ante audÄ«tum in hÄc rÄ pÅ«blicÄ cernÅ.

Illum ÅrÄtÅrem in mediÅ senÄtÅ« iterum petentem fÄ«nem bellÅrum ac scelerum nÅn adiÅ«vistis.

CertÄ« frÅ«ctÅ«s pÄcis ab territÅ vulgÅ atque senÄtÅ« cupiÄbantur.

QuÄ« vir magnanimus aliÄs gentÄs gravÄ« metÅ« servitÅ«tis lÄ«berÄbit?

NÄmÅ fidem neglegÄns timÅre umquam carÄbit.

Illa fÄmina fortÅ«nÄta haec cÅnsilia contrÄ eÅs malÅs quondam aluit et salÅ«tis commÅ«nis causÄ semper labÅrÄbat.

Illam gentem LatÄ«nam oppressÅ«rÄ« et dÄ«vitiÄs raptÅ«rÄ«, omnÄs virÅs magnae probitÄtis premere ac dÄlÄre prÅtinus coepÄrunt.

TollÄturne fÄma huius medicÄ« istÄ«s versibus novÄ«s?

At vÄ«ta illÄ«us modÄ« aequÄ« aliquid iÅ«cundÄ« atque fÄlÄ«cis continet.

QuÅ diÄ ex igne et ferrÅ atque morte certÄ Äreptus es?

We gave many things to nations lacking hope.

Those ten men, (when) called, will come again into this territory with great eagerness.

Through the window they saw the second old man running out of his neighborâs house and away from the city.

He himself was overpowered by uncertain fear because he desired neither truth nor liberty.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

VÄ«vÄs meÄ«s praesidiÄ«s oppressus. (Cicero.âpraesidium, -iÄ«, n., guard; âpreside,â âpresident.â)

IllÄ« autem, tendentÄs manÅ«s dextrÄs, salÅ«tem petÄbant. (Livy.âtendÅ, -ere, to stretch, extend; âtend,â âdistend,â âtension.â)

Tantalus sitiÄns flÅ«mina ab Åre fugientia tangere dÄsÄ«derÄbat. (Horace.âTantalus: From Tantalusâ name and the myth of his offense against the gods comes the word âtantalizing.ââsitÄ«re, to be thirsty.)

Signa rÄrum futÅ«rÄrum mundÅ Ä dÄ«s ostenduntur. (Cicero.)

Graecia capta asperum victÅrem cÄpit. (Horace.âvictor, -tÅris, m., here = Rome.)

Atticus CicerÅnÄ« ex patriÄ fugientÄ« multam pecÅ«niam dedit. (Nepos.âAtticus, a friend of Cicero.)

SÄ« mihi eum Äducandum committÄs, studia eius fÅrmÄre ab Ä«nfantiÄ incipiam. (Quintilian.âfÅrmÄre; âreform,â âtransform.ââÄ«nfantia, -ae, f.; âinfantile,â âinfanticide.â)

Saepe stilum verte, bonum libellum scrÄ«ptÅ«rus. (Horace.âstilum vertere, to invert the stilus = to use the eraser; âstiletto,â âstyle.â)

CÅ«ra ÅrÄtÅris dictÅ«rÄ« eÅs audÄ«tÅ«rÅs dÄlectat. (Quintilian.)

MortÄ« SÅcratis semper illacrimÅ, legÄns PlatÅnem. (Cicero.âSÅcratÄs, -cratis, m.âillacrÄ«mÄre, to weep over; âlachrymose,â âlacrimal.ââPlatÅ, -tÅnis, m.)

Memoria vÄ«tae bene Äctae multÅrumque bene factÅrum iÅ«cunda est. (Cicero.)

QuÄ« timÄns vÄ«vet, lÄ«ber nÅn erit umquam. (Horace.âquÄ«, as often, = is quÄ«.)

NÅn is est miser quÄ« iussus aliquid facit, sed is quÄ« invÄ«tus facit. (Seneca.âinvÄ«tus, -a, -um, unwilling; the adj. here has adverbial force, as it commonly does in Latin.)

Verbum semel Ämissum volat irrevocÄbile. (Horace.âsemel, adv., once.âÄ-mittere; âemissary,â âemission.ââvolÄre, to fly; âvolatile,â âvolley.ââirrevocÄbilis, -e.)

Laocoon Speaks Out Against the Trojan Horse

OppressÄ« bellÅ longÅ et Ä deÄ«s ÄversÄ«, ducÄs GraecÅrum, iam post decem annÅs, magnum equum ligneum arte Minervae faciunt. Uterum multÄ«s mÄ«litibus complent, equum in lÄ«tore relinquunt, et ultrÄ Ä«nsulam proximam nÄvigant. TrÅiÄnÄ« nÅ«llÄs cÅpiÄs aut nÄvÄs vident; omnis TrÅia gaudet; panduntur portae. DÄ equÅ, autem, TrÅiÄnÄ« sunt incertÄ«. AliÄ« eum in urbem dÅ«cÄ« cupiunt; aliÄ« eum GraecÄs Ä«nsidiÄs appellant. PrÄ«mus ibi ante omnÄs, dÄ arce currÄns, LÄocoÅn, sacerdÅs TrÅiÄnus, haec verba dÄ«cit: âÅ miserÄ« cÄ«vÄs, nÅn estis sÄnÄ«! Quid cÅgitÄtis? NÅnne intellegitis GraecÅs et scÄ«tis Ä«nsidiÄs eÅrum? Aut inveniÄtis in istÅ equÅ multÅs mÄ«litÄs ÄcrÄs, aut equus est machina bellÄ«, facta contrÄ nÅs, ventÅ«ra in urbem, vÄ«sÅ«ra casÄs nostrÄs et populum. Aut aliquid latet. EquÅ nÄ crÄdite, TrÅiÄnÄ«: quidquid id est, timeÅ DanaÅs et dÅna ferentÄs!â DÄ«xit, et potentem hastam magnÄ«s vÄ«ribus manÅ«s sinistrae in uterum equÄ« iÄcit; stetit illa, tremÄns.

Â 

Vergil Aen. 2.13â52: You read a passage adapted from Vergilâs Fourth Eclogue in Capvt XXI; here, and in Capvt XXV, you will read dramatic selections, also in prose adaptation, from Book Two of his 12-volume epic poem, the Aeneid (Capvt XL presents a long, unadapted passage in its original dactylic hexameter form). In this scene the Trojan prince Aeneas tells Carthageâs queen Dido of the Greeksâ ruse of âthe Trojan horse,â a huge wooden horse they have left outside Troyâs walls after seemingly abandoning their 10-year effort to sack the city and sailing home; as seen in the accompanying photograph of an archaic Greek amphora (storage jug), a squadron of Greek soldiers have been concealed within the horseâs belly (which Vergil purposefully calls its âwomb,â uterus). The Trojans are divided over what to do with the horse, when in the midst of their debate the priest LaocoÃ¶n rushes forth to deliver a stern warning that the device must be a Greek trick, designed for their destruction âligneus, -a, -um, wooden, of wood; âligneous,â âlignite.ââMinerva, -ae, f., Minerva, goddess of war and protectress of the Greeks.âuterus, -Ä«, m.; âuterine,â âin utero.â âcomplÄre, to fill up, make pregnant; âcomplete,â âcomplement.ââproximus, -a, -um, nearby; âproximity,â âapproximate.ââTrÅiÄnus, -a, -um, Trojan. âpandÅ, -ere, to open; âexpand,â âexpansive.ââLÄocoÅn, -ontis, m.ânÅnne: the word introduces a question anticipating an affirmative answer, Donât youâ¦? âmachina, -ae, f.; = Eng.; âmachination,â âmachineryâ; Aeneas, later in his narration of Troyâs doomsday (lines 237â38), calls the horse a fÄtÄlis machinaâ¦ fÄta armÄ«s, a deadly machine, pregnant with weapons. âvÄ«sÅ«ra: here to spy on. âlatÄre, to be hidden, be concealed; âlatency,â âlatent.ââequÅ: dat. âobjectâ of crÄdite (a construction we have seen before, formally introduced in Capvt XXXV).ânÄ: = nÅn.âDanaÅs: = GraecÅs. âet (with ferentÄs): = etiam. âferentÄs: pres. partic. of the irreg. verb ferÅ, to carry, bear; âfertile,â âconference.â Quidquidâ¦ ferentÄs is a hexameter line drawn verbatim from the poem (Book Two, verse 49); read it aloud and listen to the dactylic rhythms.âtremÅ, -ere, to tremble, shake, vibrate; âtremor,â âtremulous.â

Trojan Horse with Greek soldiers. Relief from neck of an earthenware amphora Ca. 640 B.C. Mykonos, Greece. Archaeological Museum, Mykonos, Greece
Erich Lessing / Art Resource, NY

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Vergilâs poetry is highly cinematographic; what details even in this prose adaptation are especially visual, and how might you, as a motion picture director, advise your camera-man to film them? What striking poetic sound-effects do you hear in the verse quidquid id est, timeÅ DanaÅs et dÅna ferentÄs?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Paule ed Petre, petite prÅ VictÅre.
Scala / Art Resource, NY

This graffito is one of hundreds found in a 3rd-cent. A.D. Christian burial area in the catacombs beneath the basilica of St. Sebastian on Romeâs Via Appia. Family members inscribed prayers for the deceased such as this one to the apostles Paul and Peter.âed: = et.âPauleâ¦ Petre: what case are these nouns, and what would their nom. forms be?âpetite: here = pray.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! This chapterâs VocÄbula list suggests a couple of literary titles from ancient Rome: among Ciceroâs dozens of books was a rhetorical treatise titled DÄ ÅrÄtÅre, and one of Plautusâ most popular plays was the MÄ«les GlÅriÅsus, usually translated The Braggart Soldier. Then thereâs the medieval student song with the famous line (quite apt for college Latin students) gaudeÄmus, igitur, iuvenÄs dum sumus, so let us rejoice, while we are young! From vertere is verte for turn the page and versÅ for the left-hand page in a book (i.e., the side you see when you have just turned the page); printers call the right-hand page the rectÅ. And from the reading passage: the expression âa Trojan horseâ is used of any person, group, or device that tries to subvert a government or any organization from within. Also from Vergilâs story of Aeneasâ sojourn in Carthage is the famous quotation regarding the countryâs queen, Dido: dux fÄmina factÄ«, a woman (was) leader of the action! GaudÄte atque valÄte!

Athena (Minerva) constructing the Trojan horse
Red-figure Greek kylix (drinking cup)
The âSabouroff Painter,â 470â460 B.C.
Museo Archeologico, Florence, Italy
Scala / Art Resource, NY

CAPVT XXIV

Ablative Absolute; Passive Periphrastic; Dative of Agent

GRAMMATICA

ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE

The ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE is a type of participial phrase generally consisting of a noun (or pronoun) and a modifying participle in the ablative case; loosely connected to the rest of the sentence (hence the term, from absolÅ«tum, loosened from, separated) and usually set off by commas, the phrase describes some general circumstance under which the action of the sentence occurs:

RÅmÄ vÄ«sÄ, virÄ« gaudÄbant. Rome having been seen, the men were rejoicing.

As typified by this example, the ablative absolute always is self-contained, i.e., the participle and the noun it modifies are in the same phrase and the noun of the ablative absolute phrase is not referred to at all in the attached clause. In other types of participial phrases (such as those seen in Capvt XXIII), the participles modify some noun or pronoun in the attached clause; compare the following example, which has an ordinary participial phrase, with the previous example:

RÅmam videntÄs, virÄ« gaudÄbant. Seeing Rome, the men were rejoicing.

In this instance the participle modifies the subject of the main clause, and so an ablative absolute is not used.

Like other participial phrases, the ablative absolute can be translated literally, as in RÅmÄ vÄ«sÄ, (with) Rome having been seen. For more natural idiom, however, it is generally better to transform the phrase to a clause, converting the participle to a verb in the appropriate tense, treating the ablative noun as its subject, and supplying the most logical conjunction (usually âwhen,â âsince,â or âalthoughâ), as explained in the last chapter; thus, a more idiomatic translation of RÅmÄ vÄ«sÄ, virÄ« gaudÄbant would be since Rome was (had been) seen, the men were rejoicing. Compare the following additional examples:

HÄ«s rÄbus audÄ«tÄ«s, coepit timÄre.

These things having been heard, he began to be afraid.

Or in more natural English:

When (since, after, etc., depending on the context) these things had been heard, he beganâ¦

When (since, after, etc.) he had heard these things, he beganâ¦

In the ablative absolute, the ablative noun/pronoun regularly comes first, the participle last; when the phrase contains additional words, like the participleâs direct object (imperium) in the preceding example, they are usually enclosed within the noun/participle frame.

As seen in the following examples, even two nouns, or a noun and an adjective, can function as an ablative absolute, with the present participle of sum (lacking in classical Latin) to be understood:

Caesare incertÅ, bellum timÄbÄmus.

Since Caesar was uncertain (with Caesar uncertain), we were afraid of war.

THE PASSIVE PERIPHRASTIC

The PASSIVE PERIPHRASTIC is a passive verb form consisting of the GERUNDIVE, a common term for the future passive participle, along with a form of sum (the term âperiphrasticâ means literally a âroundabout way of speakingâ and refers simply to such combinatory forms). The gerundive, as essentially a predicate adjective, agrees with the subject of sum in gender, number, and case, e.g., haec fÄmina laudanda est, this woman is to be praised.

The gerundive often conveys an idea of necessary, obligatory, or appropriate action, rather than simple futurity, and this is the case in the passive periphrastic construction. Hence id faciendum est means not simply this is (about) to be done, but rather this has to be (must/should be) done; cf. id faciendum erat, this had to be done; id faciendum erit, this will have to be done. Just as Latin uses the auxiliary sum in its various tenses in this construction, English commonly uses the expressions âhas to be,â âhad to be,â and âwill have to be,â as seen in these examples; âshould,â âought,â and âmustâ are also commonly employed (cf. dÄbeÅ, which, as you have already learned, is also used to indicate obligatory action).

DATIVE OF AGENT

Instead of the ablative of agent, the DATIVE OF AGENT is used with the passive periphrastic. A literal translation of the passive periphrastic + dative of agent often sounds awkward, and so it is generally best to transform such clauses into active constructions:

Hic liber mihi cum cÅ«rÄ legendus erit. This book will have to be read by me with care or (better) I will have to (ought to, must, should) read this book with care.

Illa fÄmina omnibus laudanda est. That woman should be praised by all or everyone should praise that woman.

PÄx ducibus nostrÄ«s petenda erat. Peace had to be sought by our leaders or our leaders had to seek peace.

VOCÄBVLA

Among this chapterâs new words are several COMPOUND VERBS, including accipiÅ, excipiÅ, and recipiÅ, all formed from capiÅ and exhibiting the sort of vowel weakening you have seen before. Re- is an INSEPARABLE PREFIX, meaning that it does not stand alone as a separate word, as do ad, ex, etc.; other examples are: sÄ-, apart, aside, as in sÄdÅ«cÅ, to lead aside, the negative in- (im-, il-, ir-), not, un-, as in incertus, uncertain; and dis- (dif-, dÄ«-), apart, away, not, as in discÄdÅ, to go away, and difficilis, not easy. Difficilis (dis- + facilis) and accipiÅ (ad + capiÅ), by the way, illustrate another common type of phonetic change known as ASSIMILATION, where the final consonant of a prefix was, for ease of pronunciation, altered to match the initial consonant of the base word (App., SOME ETYMOLOGICAL AIDS).

Â 

CarthgÅ, Carthginis, f., Carthage (city in North Africa)

fbula, fbulae, f., story, tale; play (fable, fabulous, confabulate; cf. fÄma)

impertor, imperÄtris, m., general, commander-in-chief, emperor (cf. imperium, below, and imperÄre, to command)

impÃ©rium, impÃ©riÄ«, n., power to command, supreme power, authority, command, control (imperial, imperialism, imperious, empire)

perfÃºgium, perfÃºgiÄ«, n., refuge, shelter (cf. fugiÅ)

sÃ©rvus, sÃ©rvÄ«, m., and sÃ©rva, sÃ©rvae, f., slave (serf, servant, servile, service)

sÅlcium, sÅlciÄ«, n., comfort, relief (solace, consolation, inconsolable)

vÃºlnus, vÃºlneris, n., wound (vulnerable, vulnerability, invulnerable)

re- or (before words beginning with d) red-, inseparable prefix (see above), again, back (recede, receive, remit, repeat, repel, revert)

ut, conj. + indic., as, just as, when

pÃ³steÄ, adv., afterwards (cf. post)

accÃpiÅ, accÃpere, accpÄ«, accÃ©ptum, to take (to oneâs self), receive, accept (acceptable, acceptance)

excÃpiÅ, excÃpere, excpÄ«, excÃ©ptum, to take out, except; take, receive, capture (exception, exceptionable)

recÃpiÅ, recÃpere, recpÄ«, recÃ©ptum, to take back, regain; admit, receive (recipe, Rx, receipt, recipient, receptacle, reception)

pÃ©llÅ, pÃ©llere, pÃ©pulÄ«, pÃºlsum, to strike, push; drive out, banish (compel, compulsion, dispel, impel, propel, repel, pulsate, pulse)

expÃ©llÅ, expÃ©llere, Ã©xpulÄ«, expÃºlsum, to drive out, expel, banish (expulsion)

nrrÅ, nÄrrre, nÄrrvÄ«, nÄrrtum, to tell, report, narrate (narration, narrative, narrator)

quaÃ©rÅ, quaÃ©rere, quaesvÄ«, quaestum, to seek, look for, strive for; ask, inquire, inquire into (acquire, conquer, exquisite, inquire, inquest, inquisition, perquisite, query, quest, question, request, require)

rdeÅ, rÄ«dre, rsÄ«, rsum, to laugh, laugh at (deride, derisive, ridicule, ridiculous, risible; cf. rÄ«diculus, laughable)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Identify each ablative absolute, passive periphrastic, and dative of agent in the following readings; the challenge in translating these constructions is to strive for natural, idiomatic English, which generally requires transforming ablative absolute phrases into âwhen/since/althoughâ clauses, and passive periphrastic/dative of agent clauses into active voice constructions.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Igne vÄ«sÅ, omnÄs virÄ« et uxÅrÄs territae sunt et ultrÄ urbem ad lÄ«tus Ä«nsulae nÄvigÄvÄrunt, ubi perfugium inventum est.

PopulÅ metÅ« oppressÅ, iste imperÄtor nÅbÄ«s ex urbe pellendus est.

ÅrÄtor, signÅ Ä sacerdÅte datÅ, eÅ diÄ revÄnit et nunc tÅtus populus LatÄ«nus gaudet.

GÄns RÅmÄna versÅ«s illÄ«us scrÄ«ptÅris magnÄ laude quondam recÄpit.

LaudÄs atque dÅna huius modÄ« ab ÅrÄtÅribus dÄsÄ«derÄbantur.

ImperiÅ acceptÅ, dux aequus magnanimusque fidem suam reÄ« pÅ«blicae ostendit.

Aliquis eÅs quÄ«nque equÅs ex igne ÄripÄ« posteÄ iusserat.

Cernisne umquam omnia quae tibi scienda sunt?

Ille, ab arce urbis reventÅ«rus, ab istÄ«s hominibus premÄ« coepit.

CupiÅ tangere manum illÄ«us mÄ«litis quÄ« metÅ« caruit atque gravia scelera contrÄ rem pÅ«blicam oppressit.

Iste dux prÅtinus expulsus est, ut imperium excipiÄbat.

Illae servae, autem, perfugium sÅlÄciumque ab amÄ«cÄ«s quaerÄbant.

CornÅ« audÄ«tÅ, ille mÄ«les, incertus cÅnsiliÄ«, cÅpiÄs ad mediam Ä«nsulam vertit.

When the common danger had been averted, two of our sons and all our daughters came back from Asia.

Our hopes must not be destroyed (use tollÅ) by those three evil men.

Since the people of all nations are seeking peace, all leaders must conquer the passion for (= of) power. (Use an ablative absolute and a passive periphrastic.)

The leader, having been driven out by both the free men and the slaves, could not regain his command.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

CarthÄgÅ dÄlenda est. (Cato.)

AsiÄ victÄ, dux RÅmÄnus fÄlÄ«x multÅs servÅs in Italiam mÄ«sit. (Pliny the Elder.)

Omnibus ferrÅ mÄ«litis perterritÄ«s, quisque sÄ servÄre cupiÄbat. (Caesar.)

Quidquid dÄ«cendum est, lÄ«berÄ dÄ«cam. (Cicero.âlÄ«berÄ, adv. of lÄ«ber.)

Haec omnia vulnera bellÄ« tibi nunc sÄnanda sunt. (Cicero.âsÄnÄre, to heal; âsanatorium,â âsane.â)

Nec tumultum nec hastam mÄ«litis nec mortem violentam timÄbÅ, AugustÅ terrÄs tenente. (Horace.âtumultus -Å«s, m., disturbance, civil war; âtumult,â âtumultuous.ââviolentus, -a, -um; related to vÄ«s; âviolence,â ânonviolent.ââAugustus, -Ä«, m.)

TarquiniÅ expulsÅ, nÅmen rÄgis audÄ«re nÅn poterat populus RÅmÄnus. (Cicero.)

Ad Å«tilitÄtem vÄ«tae omnia cÅnsilia factaque nÅbÄ«s regenda sunt. (Tacitus.âÅ«tilitÄs, -tÄtis, f., benefit, advantage; âutility,â âutilitarian.â)

CaesarÄ« omnia Å«nÅ tempore erant agenda. (*Caesar.)

DÄ CupiditÄte

HomÅ stultus, âÅ cÄ«vÄs, cÄ«vÄs,â inquit, âpecÅ«nia ante omnia quaerenda est; virtÅ«s et probitÄs post pecÅ«niam.â

PecÅ«niae autem cupiditÄs fugienda est. Fugienda etiam est cupiditÄs glÅriae; Äripit enim lÄ«bertÄtem. Neque imperia semper petenda sunt neque semper accipienda; etiam dÄpÅnenda nÅn numquam.

Â 

Horace Epist. 1.1.53 and Cicero Off. 1.20.68: Horace turned to writing verse Epistles (Epistulae), as well as lyric poetry, after publishing his two volumes of satire (see above, Capvt III); like his satires, many of the Epistulae dealt with moralizing themes, including the poem from which the above excerpt, along with a brief passage from Ciceroâs âOn Moral Responsibilitiesâ (introduced in Capvt VIII above), has been adapted.âimperia: i.e., military commands, which some contemporaries, Caesar notably, had not resigned, when, in Ciceroâs opinion, they should have.âdÄpÅnÅ, -ere, to put down, resign; âdepose,â âdeposition.â)ânÅn numquam: the double-negative was a common Lat. idiom for sometimes.

Â 

CaelÅ receptus propter virtÅ«tem, HerculÄs multÅs deÅs salÅ«tÄvit; sed PlÅ«tÅ veniente, quÄ« FortÅ«nae est fÄ«lius, Ävertit oculÅs. Tum, causÄ quaesÄ«tÄ, âÅdÄ«,â inquit, âillum, quod malÄ«s amÄ«cus est atque omnia corrumpit lucrÄ« causÄ.â

Â 

Phaedrus Fab. 4.12: Gaius Julius Phaedrus (ca. 15 B.C.âA.D. 50), a freedman of the emperor Augustus, composed five volumes of moralizing fables in verse, many of them animal fables based on the early, semi-legendary Greek fabulist Aesop. Here he imagines the entry of Hercules into heaven, following his deification, and his encounter with Plutus.âHerculÄs, -lis, m.; âHerculean.ââsalÅ«tÄre, to greet; âsalutation,â âsalutatorian.ââPlÅ«tus, -Ä«, m., god of wealth; âplutocracyâ (originally from Gk., not Lat.)âFortÅ«nae: here personified, as in Martialâs âWhen I Have Enoughâ (Capvt IX).âcorrumpÅ, -ere, to corrupt; âcorruptible,â âcorruption.ââlucrum, -Ä«, n., gain, profit; âlucrative,â âlucre.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What, according to these three writers, are some of the negative moral consequences of the lust for wealth, and in Ciceroâs opinion, ambition for glory as well? What do you suppose Cicero meant by Äripitâ¦lÄ«bertÄtem? Plutus was generally said to be the son of the grain goddess Demeter and the mortal or demi-god Iasion; in what sense, though, does Phaedrus logically call him fÄ«lius FortÅ«nae?

Heracles (Hercules) fighting the Nemean lion, one of his 12 labors Attic black-figure kalpis, early 5th cent. B.C. Kunsthistorisches Museum, Vienna, Austria
Erich Lessing / Art Resource, NY

The Satiristâs Modus Operandi

RÄ«dÄns saturÄs meÄs percurram, et cÅ«r nÅn? Quid vetat mÄ rÄ«dentem dÄ«cere vÄrum, ut puerÄ«s ÄducandÄ«s saepe dant crÅ«stula magistrÄ«? QuaerÅ rÄs gravÄs iÅ«cundÅ lÅ«dÅ et, nÅminibus fictÄ«s, dÄ multÄ«s culpÄ«s vitiÄ«sque nÄrrÅ. Sed quid rÄ«dÄs? MÅ«tÄtÅ nÅmine, dÄ tÄ fÄbula nÄrrÄtur!

Â 

Horace Sat. 1.1.23â27, 69â70: In this prose adaptation from his programmatic first satire (from which âThe Grass Is Always Greener,â in Capvt III, was also adapted), Horace tells us something about his modus operandi as a satirist.âper + currÅ.âvetÄre, to forbid; âveto.ââpuerÄ«sâ¦ magistrÄ«: the order of the nouns is varied for effect: ind. obj., dir. obj., subject.âcrÅ«stulum, -Ä«, n., cookie, pastry; âcrouton,â âcrust.ââfingÅ, -ere, fÄ«nxÄ«, fictum, to form, invent, make up; âfeign,â âfiction.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Naming names was a signal characteristic of Roman satire from the genreâs beginnings; the second cent. B.C. satirist, Lucilius, recognized as the genreâs founder, was known for his naming attacks on persons alive, powerful, and proud: what is Horaceâs accommodation to that tradition?âbut then what is the point of his closing admonition to his audience? How, specifically, does he engage his audience in his closing remarks? What differences of purpose and tone do you detect between Horaceâs programmatic remarks here and those of Juvenal adapted from his program poem in Capvt XVI above?âsupport your answer with references to specific words and phrases in both texts. Which satirist seems more interested in education, which in condemnation?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

VÄ«num acceptum ab dominÅ VIIÄª dÅ«s AprÄ«lÄs.

CIL 4.10565: Dated notice of receipt of goods, possibly recorded by a slave; from a wall in the courtyard of the House of Neptune and Amphitrite, one of the best preserved houses in Herculaneum, named for its splendid mosaic of the sea god and his Nereid wife (Ins. 5).âvÄ«num, -Ä«, n., wine; âvineyard,â âviniferous.ââdominus, -Ä«, m., master, lord; âdominate,â âdominion.ââÄªdÅ«s,Äª duum, f. pl., the Ides: the 12 months in the imperial Roman calendar each had three named days, the âKalends,â which was the 1st day of the month, the âNones,â which was the 7th in March, May, July, and October, and the 5th in the others, and the âIdes,â which was the 15th in March, May, July, and October, the 13th in others. The remaining days were identified as so many days before the Ides, the Nones, or the Kalends; the Roman counting system was âinclusive,â meaning that VIIÄª dÅ«s AprÄ«lÄs, seven (days) before the Ides of April = April 7 (7â8â9â10â11â12â13 = seven days, counting inclusively).âAprÄ«lis, -lis, m., (month of) April.

Courtyard of the House of Neptune and Amphitrite, Herculaneum, Italy
Erich Lessing / Art Resource, NY

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, amÄ«cae amÄ«cÄ«que! Quid agitis hodiÄ? Bet you didnât know that Rx and ârecipeâ came from the same word (see recipiÅ in the Vocab.), but now, thanks to Latin, you do! There are countless derivatives from the capiÅ family, as you have seen already; and from excipere there are some âexceptionallyâ familiar phrases: exceptiÅ probat regulam, the exception proves the rule, and exceptÄ«s excipiendÄ«s, with all the necessary exceptions (lit., with things excepted that should be excepted: recognize the gerundive?). And, by analogy with this last, what are the idiomatic and the literal meanings of the very common phrase mÅ«tÄtÄ«s mÅ«tandÄ«s? (If you canât figure that out, itâs in your Websterâs, along with hundreds of other Latin phrases, mottoes, words, and abbreviations in current English usage!) Some other gerundives that pop up in English: agenda (things to be done), corrigenda (things to be corrected, i.e., an errÄta list), and even the passive periphrastics dÄ gustibus nÅn disputandum est, sometimes shortened simply to dÄ gustibus (you shouldnât argue about taste), and quod erat dÄmÅnstrandum (which weâve seen before), abbreviated Q.E.D. at the end of a mathematical proof. Servus, also in the new VocÄbula gives us one of the Popeâs titles, servus servÅrum deÄ« (another is pontifex, the name of an ancient Roman priestly office, which may originally have meant bridge-builderâbecause priests bridge the gap between men and gods?); and quaere is used in English as a note to request further information. Nunc est satis: valÄte atque semper rÄ«dÄte!

CAPVT XXV

Infinitives; Indirect Statement

GRAMMATICA

INFINITIVES

Having surveyed the forms and uses of the verbal adjectives known as participles in the last two chapters, we turn now to the INFINITIVE, a common verbal noun used in a variety of ways. Most transitive verbs have six infinitives, present, future, and perfect, active and passive; intransitive verbs usually lack the passive. You are already familiar with the present active and passive infinitives, whose forms vary with each of the four conjugations; the perfect and future infinitives are all formed according to the following patterns, regardless of conjugation:

Â 

Â 

Active

Passive

Pres.

-Äre, -Äre, -ere, -Ä«re

-ÄrÄ«, -ÄrÄ«, -Ä«, -Ä«rÄ«

Perf.

perfect stem + -isse

perfect passive participle + esse

Fut.

future active participle + esse

[supine in -um + Ä«rÄ«]

Â 

The future passive infinitive is bracketed because it is rare and does not occur in this book; the SUPINE in -um (formally introduced in Capvt XXXVIII) has the same spelling as the perfect passive participle in the nominative neuter singular. Following are the infinitives of agÅ, agere, ÄgÄ«, Äctum, to drive, do, lead, act:

Â 

Â 

Active

Passive

Pres.

Ã¡gere, to lead

Ã¡gÄ«, to be led

Perf.

ÄgÃsse, to have led

ctus, -a, -um Ã©sse, to have been led

Fut.

Äctrus, -a, -um Ã©sse, to be about
Â Â Â  to lead, to be going to lead

ctum rÄ«, to be about to be led, to be
Â Â Â  going to be led

The participles employed as components of three of these infinitives are essentially predicate adjectives (e.g., cf. âto be activeâ and âto beâ + âabout to actâ) and in usage agree with the subject of esse. The literal translations given above are conventional; in actual use (especially in indirect statement, as explained below) the perfect and particularly the future infinitives are rarely translated literally.

The infinitives of the other model verbs are as follows:

Usage

As a verbal noun, an infinitive can function in a variety of ways. We have seen its use as a subject (errÄre est humÄnum, to err is human) and as a complement with such verbs as possum and dÄbeÅ (discÄdere nunc possunt, they can leave nowâCapvt VI); and the infinitive, with its own accusative subject, can also serve as a direct object (iussit eÅs venÄ«re, he ordered them to come: see S.S., OBJECTIVE INFINITIVE). One of the commonest uses of the infinitive, however, is in a construction known as indirect statement.

INDIRECT STATEMENT

An INDIRECT STATEMENT simply reports indirectly (i.e., not in direct quotation) what someone has said, thought, felt, etc. The following is a direct statement, made by a teacher:

Julia is a good student.

Here the teacherâs comment is directly reported or quoted:

âJulia is a good student,â says the teacher.

The teacher said, âJulia is a good student.â

Latin also uses direct quotations with certain verbs of speaking, etc., including inquit:

âIÅ«lia,â magister inquit, âest discipula bona.â

Often, however, both Latin and English will report someoneâs remarks (or thoughts or feelings) indirectly. In English we regularly put such indirect statements into a subordinate clause introduced by âthatâ:

The teacher says that Julia is a good student.

The teacher said that Julia was a good student.

Latin, on the other hand, uses no introductory word for âthatâ and employs an infinitive phrase with an accusative subject, instead of a clause:

Magister dÄ«cit IÅ«liam esse discipulam bonam.

Magister dÄ«xit IÅ«liam esse discipulam bonam.

This construction is regularly employed in Latin after verbs of speech, mental activity, or sense perceptionâsometimes called âhead verbsââi.e., verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving, feeling, seeing, hearing, etc. (a list of such Latin verbs follows the VocÄbula). English uses a similar objective case + infinitive construction after a few verbs of this type (e.g., âthe teacher considers her to be a good studentâ), but in classical Latin this pattern is always followed and the accusative subject is always expressed, even when it is the same as the subject of the verb of saying, etc., in which case the subject is ordinarily a reflexive pronoun:

IÅ«lia putat sÄ esse bonam discipulam. Julia thinks that she (herself) is a good student.

Recognizing indirect statements is easy: look for the main verb of speech, mental activity, or sense perception with an accusative + infinitive phrase following. The greater challenge is in translation, since you must usually supply âthatâ and convert the infinitive phrase into a regular clause, as in the above examples, where literal translations (e.g., the teacher says Julia to be a good student or Julia thinks herself to be a good student) would not produce idiomatic English. After supplying that and translating the accusative subject as if it were a nominative, you must then transform the infinitive into a regular finite verb in the correct tense, noting that tenses of the infinitive, like those of the participle, are relative not absolute.

Translating Infinitive Tenses in Indirect Statement

Study carefully the tenses in the following groups of sentences:

1. DÄ«cuntâThey say

A. eum iuvÄre eam.

that he is helping her.

B. eum iÅ«visse eam.

that he helped/was helping her.

C. eum iÅ«tÅ«rum esse eam.

that he will help her.

2. DÄ«xÄruntâThey said

A. eum iuvÄre eam.

that he was helping her.

B. eum iÅ«visse eam.

that he had helped her.

C. eum iÅ«tÅ«rum esse eam.

that he would help her.

3. DÄ«centâThey will say

A. eum iuvÄre eam.

that he is helping her.

B. eum iÅ«visse eam.

that he helped/was helping her.

C. eum iÅ«tÅ«rum esse eam.

that he will help her.

Â 

Note that after any tense of the main verb (dÄ«cunt, dÄ«xÄrunt, dÄ«cent) the present, the perfect, or the future tense of the infinitive may be used. As with participles, the tenses of the infinitive are relative, not absolute:

the present infinitive indicates the same time as that of the main verb.

the perfect infinitive indicates time before that of the main verb.

the future infinitive indicates time after that of the main verb.

In the following examples note the translation of tenses, the use of reflexives, the agreement of participial endings with the accusative subjects, and the use in one instance of the passive periphrastic infinitive (gerundive + esse, to indicate obligatory action):

GÄius dÄ«cit sÄ iÅ«visse eam.

Gaius says that he (Gaius) helped her.

GÄius dÄ«xit eum iÅ«visse eam.

Gaius said that he (e.g., Marcus) had helped her.

GÄius dÄ«cit litter Äs Ä sÄ scrÄ«pt Äs esse.

Gaius says that the letter was written by him (Gaius).

GÄius dÄ«cit litter Äs tibi scrÄ«bend Äs esse.

Gaius says that the letter ought to be written by you (or, better: that you ought to write the letter).

DiscipulÄ« putant sÄ linguam LatÄ«nam amÄtÅ«r Ås esse.

The (male) students think that they will love the Latin language.

Magistra scÄ«vit discipul Äs LatÄ«nam amÄtÅ«r Äs esse.

The teacher knew that the (female) students would love Latin.

VOCÄBVLA

Äit and Äiunt are two of the most frequently used forms of ÄiÅ, a common defective verb; the first person form ÄiÅ itself occasionally had the sense, I say so, I agree, yes. For practice with the new grammar, write out the six infinitives for some of the verbs in this list, e.g. crÄdÅ and nÅ«ntiÅ, include the English translations, then compare with the above paradigms.

Â 

lÃngua, lÃnguae, f., tongue; language (linguist, linguistics, bilingual, lingo, linguine: see LatÄ«na Est Gaudium, Capvt XIV)

fÃ©rÅx, gen. fercis, fierce, savage (ferocious, ferocity; cf. ferus, -Ä«, beast)

fidlis, fidle, faithful, loyal (fidelity, infidelity, infidel; cf. fidÄs)

gÃ©minus, gÃ©mina, gÃ©minum, twin (geminate, gemination, Gemini)

sÃ¡piÄns, gen. sapiÃ©ntis, as adj., wise, judicious; as noun, a wise man/woman, philosopher (homo sapiens, sapience, insipience, insipid, verbum sapienti, savant, sage; cf. sapientia)

Ãºltimus, Ãºltima, Ãºltimum, farthest, extreme; last, final (ultimate, ultimatum, penultimate, antepenult)

dÃ©hinc, adv., then, next

hÄ«c, adv., here (cf. hic, haec, hoc)

it, iunt, defective verb, he says, they say, assert, commonly used in connection with proverbs and anecdotes (adage)

crdÅ, crdere, crdidÄ«, crditum + acc. or (Capvt XXXV) dat., to believe, trust (credence, credentials, credible, incredible, credulity, credulous, creed, credo, credit, creditable, accreditation)

iÃ¡ceÅ, iacre, iÃ¡cuÄ«, to lie; lie prostrate; lie dead (adjacent, adjacency, interjacent, subjacent, gist, joist; do not confuse with iaciÅ, iacere)

nÃ©gÅ, negre, negvÄ«, negtum, to deny, say thatâ¦ not (negate, negative, abnegate, renegade, renege, denial)

nÃ©sciÅ, nescre, nescvÄ«, nesctum, to not know, be ignorant (nice, nescient; cf. sciÅ)

nntiÅ, nÅ«ntire, nÅ«ntivÄ« nÅ«ntitum, to announce, report, relate (denounce, enunciate, pronounce, renounce, nuncio; cf. prÅnÅ«ntiÅ, nÅ«ntius, messenger)

patefÃ¡ciÅ, patefÃ¡cere, patefcÄ«, patefÃ¡ctum, to make open, open; disclose, expose (patent; cf. patÄre, to be open)

pÃºtÅ, putre, putvÄ«, puttum, to reckon, suppose, judge, think, imagine (compute, count, account, dispute, impute, putative, repute)

sprÅ, spÄrre, spÄrvÄ«, spÄrtum, to hope for, hope (that) (despair, desperado, desperate, desperation, prosper; cf. spÄs)

suscÃpiÅ, suscÃpere, suscpÄ«, suscÃ©ptum (sub + capiÅ), to undertake (susceptible)

Verbs That May Introduce Indirect Statement

saying: dcÅ, nÃ©gÅ, it, nntiÅ, prÅnntiÅ, nÃ¡rrÅ, scrbÅ, dÃ³ceÅ, ostÃ©ndÅ, dÄmnstrÅ, mÃ³neÅ, pÃ©tÅ

knowing: scÃÅ, nÃ©sciÅ, intÃ©llegÅ, memÃ³riÄ tÃ©neÅ, dÃscÅ

thinking: cÃ©rnÅ, cgitÅ, crdÅ, hÃ¡beÅ, pÃºtÅ, sprÅ

perceiving and feeling: aÃºdiÅ, vÃdeÅ, sÃ©ntiÅ, gaÃºdeÅ

Others to be introduced later are respondeÅ, answer; cognÅscÅ, learn, know; arbitror, think; opÄ«nor, think, suppose; prÅmittÅ, promise; dÄcernÅ, decide; doleÅ, grieve.

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

As with ablative absolutes, the challenge in translating indirect statements is that, for natural English idiom, a transformation is usually required, turning the accusative + infinitive phrase into a subordinate clause introduced by âthatâ and with a normal subject + finite verb in the correct tense; review the examples in Chapter XXV above and practice some translations in the Self-Tutorial Exercises. To test your ability to recognize indirect statements, scan through all the following readings looking for a âhead verbâ followed by accusative + infinitive.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

âQuisque,â inquit, âsemper putat suÄs rÄs esse magnÄs.â

PosteÄ audÄ«vimus servÅs dÅnÅrum causÄ labÅrÄvisse, ut mÄ«litÄs fidÄlÄs heri nÄrrÄverant.

VÄ«cÄ«nÄ« nostrÄ« vim ignis magnÄ virtÅ«te dehinc ÄvertÄrunt, quod laudem atque dÅna cupÄ«vÄrunt.

Hoc signum perÄ«culÄ« tÅtam gentem nostram tanget, nisi hostem ex urbe excipere ac ab ItaliÄ pellere poterimus.

Duce ferÅcÄ« CarthÄginis expulsÅ, spÄs fidÄsque virÅrum magnanimÅrum rem pÅ«blicam continÄbunt.

CÅ«r iÅ«cundus HorÄtius culpÄs hÅ«mÄnÄs in saturÄ«s semper ostendÄbat atquerÄ«dÄbat?

CrÄdimus fidem antÄ«quam omnibus gentibus iterum alendam esse.

Dux, officium susceptÅ«rus, imperium accÄpit et imperÄtor factus est.

RÄs pÅ«blica, ut Äit, libellÄ«s huius modÄ« tollÄ« potest.

AliquÄ« negant hostÄs victÅs servitÅ«te umquam opprimendÅs esse.

CrÄdunt magistram sapientem vÄritÄtem patefactÅ«ram esse.

Quisquis vÄritÄtem quaeret atque recipiet bene ÄducÄbitur.

We thought that your sisters were writing the letter.

They will show that the letter was written by the brave slavegirl.

The orator said that the book had never been written.

We hope that the judgeâs wife will write those two letters tomorrow.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Id factum esse tum nÅn negÄvit. (Terence.)

HÄ«s rÄbus prÅnÅ«ntiÄtÄ«s, igitur, eum esse hostem scÄ«vistÄ«. (Cicero.)

Eum ab hostibus exspectÄrÄ« nunc sentÄ«s. (Cicero.)

VÄ«dÄ« eÅs in urbe remÄnsisse et nÅbÄ«scum esse. (Cicero.)

Itaque aeternum bellum cum malÄ«s cÄ«vibus Ä mÄ susceptum esse cernÅ. (Cicero.)

Idem crÄdÅ tibi faciendum esse. (Cicero.)

TÄ enim esse fidÄlem mihi sciÄbam. (Terence.)

Hostibus sÄ in cÄ«vitÄtem vertentibus, senÄtus CincinnÄtÅ nÅ«ntiÄvit eum factum esse dictÄtÅrem. (Cicero.âCincinnÄtus, -Ä«, m.; âCincinnati.ââdictÄtor, -tÅris, m.; âdictation,â âdictatorship.â)

DÄ«cÅ tÄ, Pyrrhe, RÅmÄnÅs posse vincere. (Ennius.âPyrrhus, -Ä«, m.; the Greek general Pyrrhus defeated the Romans twice, but the victories cost him so many men he lost the war; hence the term âPyrrhic victory.â)

DÄ«c, hospes, Spartae tÄ nÅs hÄ«c iacentÄs vÄ«disse, patriae fidÄlÄs. (Cicero; epigram on the Spartans who died at Thermopylae.âhospes, -pitis, m., stranger; âhospice,â âhospital.ââSparta, -ae, f., the city of Sparta.)

SÅcratÄs putÄbat sÄ esse cÄ«vem tÅtÄ«us mundÄ«. (Cicero.)

IllÄ« magistrÄ« negant quemquam virum esse bonum nisi sapientem. (Cicero.âquisquam, quidquam, anyone, anything; any.)

NegÄvÄ«, autem, mortem timendam esse. (Cicero.)

CrÄdÅ deÅs immortÄlÄs sparsisse spÄ«ritÅ«s in corpora hÅ«mÄna. (Cicero.âspargÅ, -ere, sparsÄ«, sparsum, to scatter, sow; âsparse,â âintersperse.â)

AdulÄscÄns spÄrat sÄ diÅ« vÄ«ctÅ«rum esse; senex potest dÄ«cere sÄ diÅ« vÄ«xisse. (Cicero.âDo not confuse vÄ«ctÅ«rum, from vÄ«vÅ, with victÅ«rum, from vincÅ).

Äiunt enim multum legendum esse, nÅn multa. (*Pliny.)

The Death of LaocoÃ¶nâ¦ and Troy

HÄ«c alius magnus timor (Å fÄbula misera!) animÅs caecÅs nostrÅs terret. LÄocoÅn, sacerdÅs NeptÅ«nÄ« fortÅ«nÄ factus, Äcrem taurum ad Äram in lÄ«tore mactÄbat. Tum geminÄ« serpentÄs potentÄs, mare prementÄs, ab Ä«nsulÄ ad lÄ«tora currunt. Iamque agrÅs tenÄbant et, oculÄ«s igne ardentibus, Åra linguÄ«s sÄ«bilÄ«s lambÄbant.

NÅs omnÄs fugimus; illÄ« viÄ certÄ LÄocoonta fÄ«liÅsque eius petunt. PrÄ«mum parva corpora duÅrum puerÅrum capiunt et lacerant necantque dÄvÅrantque. Tum patrem fortem, ad fÄ«liÅs miserÅs currentem, rapiunt et magnÄ«s spÄ«rÄ«s tenent et superant. Nec sÄ Ä vulneribus dÄfendere nec fugere potest, et ipse, ut taurus saucius ad Äram, clÄmÅrÄs horrendÅs ad caelum tollit. EÅdem tempore serpentÄs fugiunt, petuntque perfugium in arce Minervae Äcris.

Quod LÄocoÅn in equum Minervae hastam iÄcerat, nÅs putÄvimus eum errÄvisse et poenÄs dedisse; vÄritÄtem acerbam nescÄ«vimus. PortÄs patefacimus et admittimus istum equum in urbem; ac puerÄ« puellaequeâÅ patria, Å dÄ« magnÄ«, Å TrÅia!âeum tangere gaudent. Et quoque gaudÄmus nÅs miserÄ«, quibus ille diÄs fuit ultimus ac quibus numquam erit Å«llum sÅlÄcium.

The LaocoÃ¶n group Roman copy, perhaps after Agesander, Athenodorus, and Polydorus of Rhodes 1st cent. B.C. Museo Pio Clementino, Vatican Museums, Vatican State
Timothy McCarthy / Art Resource, NY

Vergil Aen. 2.199â249: A continuation, in prose adaptation, of the LaocoÃ¶n passage from Aeneid Book Two read in Capvt XXIII. After the priestâs warning to his fellow countrymen in that scene, a Greek spy named Sinon allows himself to be captured and fabricates a tale that nearly persuades the Trojans that they should bring the colossal wooden horse into the city, in order to assure the favor of Minerva and their protection from the Greeks. Just as the Trojans are wavering over the right course of action, two giant serpents course over the sea from the direction of Tenedos (the island where the Greek forces are secretly hiding: Map 3), glide onto the shore, and attack LaocoÃ¶n and his sons, in the process sealing Troyâs fate.âLÄocoÅn, -ontis, m.âNeptÅ«nus, -Ä«, m.: Neptune, god of the sea, took the Greek side in the Trojan war.âfortÅ«nÄ factus: Neptuneâs former priest had been slain, and LaocoÃ¶n was hastily chosen by lot to make offerings to the god.âtaurus, -Ä«, m., bull; âtaurine,â âtoreador.ââÄra, -ae, f., altar. âmactÄre, to sacrifice, sacrificially slaughter. âserpÄns, -pentis, m., = Eng.; âserpentine.ââardÄre, to blaze; âardent,â âarson.ââsÄ«bilus, -a, -um, hissing; âsibilant,â âsibilate.ââlambÅ, -ere, to lick; âlambent,â âlap.ââLÄocoonta: Gk. acc.âprÄ«mum, adv. of prÄ«mus. âlacerÄre, to tear to pieces, mangle; âlacerate,â âlaceration.ââdÄvÅrÄre, to devour; âcarnivore,â âvoracious.ââspÄ«ra, -ae, f., coil; âspire,â âspiral.ââsaucius, -a, -um, wounded. âclÄmor, -mÅris, m., shout, scream; âclamor,â âexclaim.ââhorrendus, -a, -um, = Eng.; âhorrid,â âabhorrent.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: You have already discussed the cinematographic aspects of the earlier LaocoÃ¶n passage in Capvt XXIII; comment on the several highly visual elements in this passage. Identify the SIMILE Vergil employs to describe the priestâs screams, and explain its irony. What are the moments of greatest pathos in the passage, and what key words, phrases, and images does Vergil employ to evoke our emotional response?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Quisquis in alterÄ«us fortÅ«nÄ«s incubÄs.

CIL 4.5087: Graffito found near the kitchen door of a Pompeian house (Reg. IX, Ins. 5); a reprimand to the covetous, with a proverbial ring.âquisquis: with the 2nd-pers. verb, = you, who(ever)â¦.âincubÄre, to lie upon, recline on; jealously watch (over), obsess (on); âincubate,â âincubus.â

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

Quid agitis hodiÄ, amÄ«cÄ« et amÄ«cae? Also from iacÄre in the new VocÄbula is the phrase hÄ«c iacet, here liesâ¦, often inscribed on tombstones (sometimes spelled hic jacket and mistaken to mean a country boyâs sportcoat!). And here are some other well-known mottoes and phrases: dum spÄ«rÅ, spÄrÅ, while I breathe, I hope (South Carolinaâs state mottoâthe verb spÄ«rÄre is related to spÄ«ritus, Capvt XX, and gives us âconspire,â âexpire,â âinspire,â âperspire,â ârespiratory,â âtranspire,â etc.); crÄde DeÅ, trust in God; and Italian (ultimately from Latin and Arabic!) lingua franca, literally Frankish language, used of any hybrid language that is employed for communication among different cultures. SpÄ«rÄte, spÄrÄte, rÄ«dÄte, atque valÄte!

CAPVT XXVI

Comparison of Adjectives; Ablative of Comparison

GRAMMATICA

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

The adjective forms you have learned thus far indicate a basic characteristic (a quality or quantity) associated with the modified noun, e.g., vir beÄtus, a happy man. This is called the POSITIVE DEGREE of the adjective.

In Latin, as in English, an adjective may be âcomparedâ in order to indicate whether a person or thing being described has a greater degree of a particular characteristic than some other person(s) or thing(s), or more than is usual or customary. When comparing a person/thing with just one other, the COMPARATIVE DEGREE is used: vir beÄtior, the happier man. When comparing a person/thing with two or more others, the SUPERLATIVE DEGREE is employed: vir beÄtissimus, the happiest man.

Formation of Comparatives and Superlatives

The form of the positive degree is learned from the vocabulary. The comparative and superlative forms of regular adjectives add suffixes to base of the positive:

Â 

Comparative: base of positive + -ior (m. & f.), -ius (n.); -iÅris, gen.

Superlative: base of positive + -issimus, -issima, -issimum

Â 

Positive

Comparative

Superlative

Â 

crus, -a, -um
Â Â Â  (dear)

crior, -ius
Â Â Â  (dearer)

cÄrÃssimus, -a, -um
Â Â Â  (dearest)

lÃ³ngus, -a, -um
Â Â Â  (long)

lÃ³ngior, -ius
Â Â Â  (longer)

longÃssimus, -a, -um
Â Â Â  (longest)

fÃ³rtis, -e
Â Â Â  (brave)

fÃ³rtior, -ius
Â Â Â  (braver)

fortÃssimus, -a, -um
Â Â Â  (bravest)

flÄ«x, gen. fÄlcis
Â Â Â  (happy)

fÄlcior, -ius
Â Â Â  (happier)

fÄlÄ«cÃssimus, -a, -um
Â Â Â  (happiest)

pÃ³tÄns, gen. potÃ©ntis
Â Â Â  (powerful)

potÃ©ntior, -ius
Â Â Â  (more powerful)

potentÃssimus, -a, -um
Â Â Â  (most powerful)

sÃ¡piÄns, gen. sapiÃ©ntis
Â Â Â  (wise)

sapiÃ©ntior, -ius
Â Â Â  (wiser)

sapientÃssimus, -a, -um
Â Â Â  (wisest)

Â 

Some adjectives are compared by adding magis (more) and maximÄ (most) to the positive, especially those like idÅneus, -a, -um (suitable) whose base ends in a vowel: magis idÅneus, maximÄ idÅneus.

Declension of Comparatives

The declension of superlatives simply follows the pattern of magnus, -a, -um. Comparatives, however, are two-ending adjectives of the third declension, but are not i-stemâs (i.e., they do not have the -Ä« abl. sg., -ium gen. pl., or -ia n. nom./acc. pl. endings that characterize other third declension adjectives, as seen in Capvt XVI). Memorize the following paradigm, taking special note of the endings printed in bold:

Usage and Translation

Comparative degree adjectives are commonly translated with more or the suffix -er and superlatives with most or -est, depending on the context and English idiom, e.g.: fÄmina sapientior, the wiser woman; urbs antÄ«quior, a more ancient city; tempus incertissimum, a most uncertain time; lÅ«x clÄrissima, the brightest light. Though there is no direct connection between the forms, it may be helpful for mnemonic purposes to associate the Latin comparative marker -År- with English âmoreâ/â-erâ and the superlative marker -ss- with English âmost/-est.â

The comparative sometimes has the force of ârather,â indicating a greater degree of some quality than usual (lÅ«x clÄrior, a rather bright light), or âtoo,â indicating a greater degree than desirable (vÄ«ta eius erat brevior, his/her life was too short). The superlative is sometimes translated with âvery,â especially when comparing a person/thing to what is usual or ideal: vÄ«ta eius erat brevissima, his/her life was very short.

Quam with Comparatives and Superlatives

Â 

When quam follows a comparative degree adjective it functions as a coordinating conjunction meaning âthan,â linking two items that are being compared; the same case or construction follows quam as precedes:

HÄ« librÄ« sunt clÄriÅrÄs quam illÄ«. These books are more famous than those.

DÄ«cit hÅs librÅs esse clÄriÅrÄs quam illÅs. He says that these books are more famous than those.

When quam precedes a superlative, it functions adverbially and indicates that the person/thing modified has the greatest possible degree of a particular quality:

AmÄ«cus meus erat vir quam iÅ«cundissimus. My friend was the pleasantest man possible or as pleasant as can be.

ABLATIVE OF COMPARISON

When the first element being compared was nominative or accusative, quam was often omitted and the second element followed in the ablative case, the so-called ABLATIVE OF COMPARISON (which should be added to your now extensive list of ablative case uses):

CÅnsilia tua sunt clÄriÅra lÅ«ce. Your plans are clearer than light. (Cf. cÅnsilia tua sunt clÄriÅra quam lÅ«x, which means the same.)

Quis in ItaliÄ erat clÄrior CicerÅne? Who in Italy was more famous than Cicero?

PaucÅs fÄlÄ«ciÅres patre tuÅ vÄ«dÄ«. I have seen few men happier than your father.

VOCÄBVLA

As you review this list, practice the new grammar by writing out the comparative and superlative forms, including the nominative singular for all genders and the English meanings, for a few of the adjectives, such as superbus and trÄ«stis, then check your work by comparing with the samples in the chart in Chapter XXVI. As alwaysâut semperâlearn all these new items by focusing on their spelling, listening to them online (or on the CDs), and repeating them aloud: audÄ« atque prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!

Â 

cna, cnae, f., dinner (cenacle; cf. cÄnÅ)

fÃ³rum, fÃ³rÄ«, n., marketplace, forum (forensic)

lÄx, lgis, f., law, statute; cf. iÅ«s, which emphasizes right, justice (legal, legislator, legitimate, loyal, colleague, college, privilege)

lmen, lminis, n., threshold (liminality, subliminal, eliminate, preliminary)

lÅ«x, lcis, f., light (lucid, elucidate, translucent, illustrate, illuminate)

mnsa, mnsae, f., table; dining; dish, course; mnsa secÃºnda, dessert (the constellation Mensa)

nox, nÃ³ctis, f., night (nocturnal, nocturne, equinox, noctiluca, noctuid)

sÃ³mnus, sÃ³mnÄ«, m., sleep (somnambulate, somnambulist, somniferous, somniloquist, somnolent, insomnia, Sominex)

qudam, quaÃ©dam, quÃddam (pron.) or quÃ³ddam (adj.), indef. pron. and adj.; as pron., a certain one or thing, someone, something; as adj., a certain, some (gen. cuiÃºsdam, dat. cuÃdam, etc.)

pudcus, pudca, pudcum, modest, chaste (impudent, pudency, pudendum; cf. pudÄ«citia, modesty, chastity)

supÃ©rbus, supÃ©rba, supÃ©rbum, arrogant, overbearing, haughty, proud (superb; cf. superÄre)

trstis, trste, sad, sorrowful; joyless, grim, severe (tristful; cf. trÄ«stitia, sorrow)

tÃºrpis, tÃºrpe, ugly; shameful, base, disgraceful (turpitude, turpitudinous)

urbnus, urbna, urbnum, of the city, urban; urbane, elegant (urbanity, urbanization, suburban; cf. urbs)

prae, prep. + abl., in front of, before (frequent as a prefix, App. PREFIXES, e.g., praepÅnere, to put before, prefer; sometimes intensifying, e.g., praeclÄrus, praeclÄra, praeclÄrum, especially famous, remarkable; precede, prepare, preposition)

quam, conj. after comparatives, than; adv. before superlatives, asâ¦ as possible: quam fortissimus, as brave as possible (do not confuse with quam, adv., how, or with the f. acc. sg. of the rel. pron. or interrog. adj.)

tÃ¡ntum, adv., only (tantamount)

invtÅ, invÄ«tre, invÄ«tvÄ«, invÄ«ttum, to entertain, invite, summon (invitation, invitational, vie)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After careful study of the new grammar and vocabulary, search through the following readings for all the comparative and superlative degree adjectives and occurrences of the ablative of comparison construction. Listen to the CDs, if you have them, and read aloud before translating.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Ille dux nescÄ«vit cÅnsilium nÅ«ntiÄtum esse et sÄ imperium prÅtinus susceptÅ«rum esse.

âQuÄ«dam,â inquit, âimperium quondam petÄbant et lÄ«berÅs virÅs opprimere cupiÄbant.â

EÅdem diÄ decem mÄ«lia hostium ab duce fidÄlissimÅ Äversa ac pulsa sunt; multÄ« mÄ«litÄs vulnera recÄperant et in agrÄ«s iacÄbant.

Morte tyrannÄ« ferÅcis nÅ«ntiÄtÄ, quisque sÄ ad ÅrÄtÅrem potentissimum magnÄspÄ vertit.

RÄ«dÄns, scrÄ«ptor illÄ«us fÄbulae sapiÄns aliquid iÅ«cundius dehinc nÄrrÄvit.

HÄ«s rÄbus audÄ«tÄ«s, adulÄscentÄs geminÄ« propter pecÅ«niae cupiditÄtem studium litterÄrum relinquent.

RÄgÄ«na fortissima CarthÄginis posteÄ ostendit fidem semper esse sibi cÄriÅrem dÄ«vitiÄ«s.

NegÄvit sÄ umquam vÄ«disse servam fidÄliÅrem quam hanc.

IÅ«cundior modus vÄ«tae hominibus nunc quaerendus est.

CrÄdimus illÅs vÄ«gintÄ« lÄ«berÅs virÅs fÄminÄsque vÄ«tam quam iÅ«cundissimam agere.

ImperÄtor centum mÄ«litÄs fortissimÅs prae sÄ heri mÄ«sit.

LÅ«x in illÄ casÄ nÅn fuit clÄrissima, quod familia paucÄs fenestrÄs patefÄcerat.

AmÄ«cÅs trÄ«stÄs excÄpit, ad mÄnsam invÄ«tÄvit, et eÄ«s perfugium ac sÅlÄcium hÄ«c dedit.

What is sweeter than a very pleasant life?

Certain men, however, say that death is sweeter than life.

When these three very sure signs had been reported, we sought advice and comfort from the most powerful leader.

In that story the author says that all men seek as happy lives as possible.

This light is always brighter than the other.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

SenectÅ«s est loquÄcior. (Cicero.âloquÄx, gen. loquÄcis, garrulous; âloquacious,â âloquacity.â)

Tua cÅnsilia omnia nÅbÄ«s clÄriÅra sunt quam lÅ«x. (Cicero.)

Quaedam remedia graviÅra sunt quam ipsa perÄ«cula. (Seneca.)

EÅ diÄ virÅs fortissimÅs atque amantissimÅs reÄ« pÅ«blicae ad mÄ vocÄvÄ«. (Cicero.âamÄns reÄ« pÅ«blicae, i.e., patriotic.)

QuÄ« imperia libÄns accÄpit, partem acerbissimam servitÅ«tis vÄ«tat. (Seneca.âlibÄns, gen. libentis, willing; âad lib.â; here, as often, the adj. has adverbial force.)

IÅ«cundissima dÅna, ut Äiunt, semper sunt ea quae auctor ipse cÄra facit. (Ovid.)

BeÄtus sapiÄnsque vir forum vÄ«tat et superba lÄ«mina potentiÅrum cÄ«vium. (Horace.)

Quid est turpius quam ab aliquÅ illÅ«dÄ«? (Cicero.âillÅ«dÅ, -ere, to deceive; âillude,â âillusion.â)

Quid enim est stultius quam incerta prÅ certÄ«s habÄre, falsa prÅ vÄrÄ«s? (*Cicero.âfalsus, -a, -um; âfalsify,â âfault.â)

Saepe mihi dÄ«cis, cÄrissime amÄ«ce: âScrÄ«be aliquid magnum; dÄsidiÅsissimus homÅ es.â (Martial.âdÄsidiÅsus, -a, -um, lazy; âdesidiose.â)

Verba currunt; at manus notÄriÄ« est vÄlÅcior illÄ«s; nÅn lingua mea, sed manus eius, labÅrem perfÄcit. (Martial.ânotÄrius, -Ä«, m., stenographer; ânotary,â ânote.ââvÄlÅx, gen. vÄlÅcis, swift; âvelocity.ââperficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, to complete; âperfect,â âperfection.â)

MultÄ« putant rÄs bellicÄs graviÅrÄs esse quam rÄs urbÄnÄs; sed haec sententia mÅ«tanda est, nam multae rÄs urbÄnae sunt graviÅrÄs clÄriÅrÄsque quam bellicae. (Cicero.âbellicus, -a, -um, adj. of bellum; âbellicose.â)

InvÄ«tÄtus ad cÄnam, manÅ« sinistrÄ lintea neglegentiÅrum sustulistÄ«. Hoc salsum esse putÄs? RÄs sordidissima est! Itaque mihi linteum remitte. (Catullus.âlinteum, -Ä«, n., linen, napkin; âlint.ââneglegÄns, gen. -gentis, careless; âneglect,â ânegligent.ââsalsus, -a, -um, salty; witty; âsauce,â âsaucy,â âsausage.ââsordidus, -a, -um, dirty, mean; âsordid.â)

The Nations of Gaul

Gallia est omnis dÄ«vÄ«sa in partÄs trÄs, quÄrum Å«nam incolunt Belgae, aliam AquÄ«tÄnÄ«, tertiam quÄ« ipsÅrum linguÄ Celtae, nostrÄ GallÄ« appellantur. HÄ« omnÄs linguÄ, Ä«nstitÅ«tÄ«s, lÄgibus inter sÄ differunt. GallÅs ab AquÄ«tÄnÄ«s Garumna flÅ«men, Ä BelgÄ«s Matrona et Sequana dÄ«vidit. HÅrum omnium fortissimÄ« sunt Belgae.

Â 

*Caesar B. Gall. 1.1: Gaius Julius Caesar (100â44 B.C.), politician, author, military commander, and ultimately dictator, remains one of the best known of all ancient Romansânot least because of the extensive memoirs he wrote on his military campaigns as governor of the Roman province of Gaul, titled the Bellum Gallicum, and on his subsequent conflict with Pompey and his supporters in Romeâs civil wars, the Bellum CÄ«vÄ«le. The passage included here is drawn directly from the opening of the earlier work, which he begins by describing something of the geography and ethnography of the tribes of Gaul.âThe places and peoples mentioned: Gaul, the Belgae, the Aquitani, the Celts or Gauls, and the rivers Garonne, Marne, and Seine (see Map 2).âdÄ«vidÅ, -ere, -vÄ«sÄ«, -vÄ«sum, to divide, separate; âdividend,â âdivisible.ââincolÅ, -ere, to inhabit; Belgae, AquÄ«tÄnÄ«, and (eÄ«) quÄ« are all subjects of incolunt. âipsÅrum linguÄ: = linguÄ suÄ.ânostrÄ: sc. linguÄ.âÄ«nstitÅ«tum, -Ä«, n., custom, institution; âinstitute,â âinstitutionalize.ââlinguÄ, Ä«nstitÅ«tÄ«s, lÄgibus: ABL. OF RESPECT or SPECIFICATION, in (respect to their) language,â¦. âdifferÅ: = Eng.; âdifference,â âdifferential.â

Bust of Julius Caesar Museo Pio Clementino, Vatican Museums, Vatican State
Scala / Art Resource, NY

QVAESTIÅ: Caesarâs writing was often characterized by its direct language and succinctness; how does this excerpt typify those aspects of his style?

The Good Life

Haec sunt, amÄ«ce iÅ«cundissime, quae vÄ«tam faciunt beÄtiÅrem: rÄs nÅn facta labÅre sed Ä patre relicta, ager fÄlÄ«x, parvum forÄ« et satis ÅtiÄ«, mÄns aequa, vÄ«rÄs et corpus sÄnum, sapientia, amÄ«cÄ« vÄrÄ«, sine arte mÄnsa, nox nÅn ebria sed solÅ«ta cÅ«rÄ«s, nÅn trÄ«stis torus et tamen pudÄ«cus, somnus facilis. DÄsÄ«derÄ tantum quod habÄs, cupe nihil; nÅlÄ« timÄre ultimum diem aut spÄrÄre.

Â 

Martial Epig. 10.47: In this prose adaptation from one of his longer Epigrams, Martial shares with a friend his views of what makes for a happy life. ârÄs: here property, wealth. âÄ patre relicta: i.e., inherited.âforÄ«: i.e., the hustle-bustle of the business world (the same sense of the word seen in S.A. 7 above); here gen. of the whole with parvum.âarte: here = ostentation, pretentiousness. âebrius, -a, -um, drunken; âinebriated.ââsolvÅ, -ere, solvÄ«, solÅ«tum, to loosen, free (from); âsolve,â âabsolve.ââtorus, -Ä«, m., bed; âtorus.âânÅlÄ«: imperat. regularly used with an infin. for a negative command, do notâ¦.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Literal translations often do not convey a writerâs intent; how might you paraphrase this list of desiderata, in order to clarify Martialâs meaning? Which one of his objectives is inconsonant with Americaâs conventional âwork ethicâ?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

PrÄ«ma, domina.

Â 

CIL 4.8241: Proprietorsâ names were often posted on their shops, as in the case of this inn or tavern (caupÅna), situated adjacent to a small house in Reg. I, Ins. 10.âPrÄ«ma: ordinal numerals, often indicating birth order, were used both as praenomina and cognomina, esp. in womenâs names, e.g., Secunda, Tertia, QuÄrta, etc.âdomina, -ae, f., mistress (female head of a household), owner; âdominate,â âprima donna.â

ETYMOLOGIA

Just a few more of the numerous Eng. derivatives from solvÅ (in âThe Good Life,â above) are: absolution, dissolve, dissolute, resolve, resolution, solution, ablative absolute.

In Sp. the compar. degree of an adj. is regularly formed by putting mÃ¡s, from Lat. magis, more, before the adj.: mÃ¡s caro, mÃ¡s alto; Port. similarly employs mais, as in mais caro. It., Sp., and Port. retain vestiges of the Lat. superl. ending -issimus, but generally in the intensive sense of very, exceedingly:

Â 

Latin

Italian

Spanish

Portuguese

Â 

cÄrissimus

carissimo

carisimo

carÃssimo

very dear

clÄrissimus

chiarissimo

clarisimo

clarÃssimo

very clear

altissimus

altissimo

altisimo

altÃssimo

very high

Â 

For further discussion of comparison of adjectives in the Romance languages, including Fr., Occ., and Rom., see the next chapterâs Etymologia.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Here are some more familiar mottoes, phrases, famous quotations, and etymological tidbits ex vocÄbulÄ«s huius capitis (vocÄbula, by the way, are lit. âwhat you call things,â from vocÄre): auctor ignÅtus means author unknown, i.e., âanonymousâ; cÄna DominÄ« is the Lordâs Supper; dÅ«ra lÄx sed lÄx, a harsh law, but the law nevertheless; lÄx nÅn scrÄ«pta, customary law (as opposed to lÄx scrÄ«ptaâwhat are the lit. meanings?âyou can also figure out lÄx locÄ«); then thereâs Ovidâs admonition to loners, trÄ«stis eris sÄ« sÅlus eris, and the hope of one of Plautusâ characters for lÄx eadem uxÅrÄ« et virÅ; a legal decree of Ä mÄnsÄ et torÅ, from table and bed (torus, -Ä«), is a separation prohibiting husband and wife from cohabiting. Knowing the noun lÅ«x and the related verb lÅ«ceÅ, lÅ«cÄre, to shine brightly, can shed some light on these items: lÅ«x et vÄritÄs is the motto of Yale University, lÅ«x et lÄx is the motto of the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, pellucid explanations are perfectly clear (per + lÅ«c-), translucent materials let the light shine through, and Lux soap will make you shine like light! LÅ«cÄte, discipulae discipulÄ«que, et valÄte!

CAPVT XXVII

Irregular Comparison of Adjectives

GRAMMATICA

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

Some adjectives have comparisons that do not follow the regular patterns introduced in Capvt XXVI.

Superlatives of -er and -lis Adjectives

Two groups of adjectives, which are otherwise regular, have peculiar forms in the superlative. Six adjectives ending in -lis form the superlative by adding -limus, -lima, -limum to the base:

Â 

Positive

Comparative

Superlative

fÃ¡cilis, -e (easy)

facÃlior, -ius (easier)

facÃl-limus, -a, -um (easiest)

diffÃcilis, -e (difficult)

difficÃlior, -ius (more
Â Â Â  difficult)

difficÃllimus, -a, -um (most
Â Â Â  difficult)

sÃmilis, -e (like)

simÃlior, -ius (more l.)

simÃllimus, -a, -um (most l.)

Â 

Dissimilis (unlike, dissimilar), gracilis (slender, thin), and humilis (low, humble) follow this same pattern; all other -lis adjectives have regular superlatives (e.g., fidÄlissimus, Å«tilissimus, etc.).

Adjectives with a masculine in -er, regardless of declension, form the superlative by adding -rimus, not to the base, but directly to this masculine -er; the comparatives of such adjectives are formed regularly, by adding -ior, -ius to the base (which, as you know, in some cases retains the -e- and sometimes drops it):

Â 

Positive

Comparative

Superlative

lber, -bera, -berum
Â Â Â  (free)

lÄ«bÃ©rior, -ius (freer)

lÄ«bÃ©r-rimus, -a, -um (freest)

pÃºlcher, -chra,
Â Â Â  -chrum (beautiful)

pÃºlchrior, -ius (more
Â Â Â  beautiful)

pulchÃ©rrimus, -a, -um (most
Â Â Â  beautiful)

cer, cris, cre
Â Â Â  (keen)

crior, crius (keener)

ÄcÃ©rrimus, -a, -um (keenest)

Other Irregular Adjective Comparisons

A few common adjective comparisons are so irregular that their comparatives and superlatives must simply be memorized; many of the irregularities are examples of SUPPLETION (see Capvt XI), just like English âgood, better, bestâ and âbad, worse, worst,â whose comparatives and superlatives derive from words not cognate with the positive forms. Following are some of the most important, which you will need to memorize (English derivatives can help with this: see the Etymologia section below):

There is no positive degree adjective corresponding to prior and prÄ«mus, since those words, by the very definition of âpriorityâ and âprimacy,â imply comparison with one or more persons or things; the prepositions prae and prÅ, however, are related.

Declension of PlÅ«s

None of the irregular forms offers any declensional difficulty except plÅ«s. In the plural plÅ«s functions as an adjective (e.g., plÅ«rÄs amÄ«cÄ«), but has mixed i-stem and consonant-stem forms (-ium in the genitive plural but -a, not -ia, in the neuter nominative and accusative); in the singular it functions not as an adjective at all, but as a neuter noun which is commonly followed by a genitive of the whole (e.g., plÅ«s pecÅ«niae, more money, lit. more of moneyâsee Capvt XV).

VOCÄBVLA

Some tips for the new vocabulary: donât confuse forms of sÅl and sÅlus, -a, -um; review the discussion of consonantal i in the IntrÅductiÅ, p. xxxviii, and listen carefully online to the pronunciation of maior, maius, something like âmai-yor,â âmai-yus,â etc.; note the special meanings of the plurals superÄ« and maiÅrÄs (which the Romans often employed in a phrase invoking ancestral custom, the mÅs maiÅrum); and note that you must learn all the irregular comparative and superlative adjective forms listed in the table above.

Â 

dÄlecttiÅ, dÄlectÄtinis, f., delight, pleasure, enjoyment (delectation, delectable, delicious, dilettante; cf. dÄlectÅ)

nÃ©pÅs, neptis, m., grandson, descendant (nephew, nepotism, niece)

sl, slis, m., sun (solar, solarium, solstice, parasol)

dligÄns, gen. dÄ«ligÃ©ntis, diligent, careful (diligence, diligently)

dissÃmilis, dissÃmile, unlike, different (dissimilar, dissimilarity, dissemble)

grÃ¡cilis, grÃ¡cile, slender, thin (gracile, gracility)

hÃºmilis, hÃºmile, lowly, humble (humility, humiliate, humiliation)

mÃ¡ior, mÃ¡ius, compar. adj., greater; older; mairÄs, mairum, m. pl., ancestors (i.e., the older ones; major, majority, etc.âsee Etymologia below)

prmus, prma, prmum, first, foremost, chief, principal (primary, primate, prime, primeval, primer, premier, primitive, prim, primo-geniture, prima facie, primordial, primrose)

quot, indecl. adj., how many, as many as (quota, quotation, quotient)

sÃmilis, sÃmile, + gen. or dat., similar (to), like, resembling (simile, assimilate, simulate, dissimulate, verisimilitude, assemble, resemble, simultaneous; âsameâ is cognate)

sÃºperus, sÃºpera, sÃºperum, above, upper; sÃºperÄ«, superrum, m. pl., the gods (superior, etc.; cf. superÅ and see Etymologia below)

tilis, tile, useful, advantageous (what Latin is to YOU!âutility, from Å«tilitÄs, -tÄtis; utilitarian, utilization, utilize)

All the irregular adjectival forms listed above, CAPVT XXVII

pnÅ, pnere, pÃ³suÄ«, pÃ³situm, to put, place, set (see Etymologia below)

prÃ³bÅ, probre, probvÄ«, probtum, to approve, recommend; test (probe, probate, probable, approbation, proof, prove, approval, improve, reprobate; cf. probitÄs)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

The most important activities for the LÄctiÅ et TrÄnslÄtiÅ section are to read aloud, read for comprehension, and then translate (listen to the Latin too, if you have the CDs); but for practice with the new grammar, you should scan through the readings for all comparative and superlative adjectives, noting which are regular and which are irregular.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Quisque cupit quam pulcherrima atque Å«tilissima dÅna dare.

QuÄ«dam turpÄs habent plÅ«rima sed etiam plÅ«ra petunt.

Ille ÅrÄtor, ab tyrannÅ superbissimÅ expulsus, ducem iÅ«cundiÅrem et lÄgÄs aequiÅrÄs dehinc quaesÄ«vit.

Summum imperium optimÄ«s virÄ«s semper petendum est.

Senex nepÅtibus trÄ«stibus casam patefÄcit et eÅs trÄns lÄ«men invÄ«tÄvit.

Ostendit ultimum signum lÅ«ce clÄrissimÄ ab hostibus illÄ nocte datum esse.

Iste tyrannus pessimus negÄvit sÄ virÅs lÄ«berÅs umquam oppressisse.

FidÄlissimus servus plÅ«s cÄnae ad mÄnsam accipiÄbat quam trÄs peiÅrÄs.

Äiunt hunc auctÅrem vÄ«tam humillimam hÄ«c agere.

CÅ«r dÄ« superÄ« oculÅs Ä rÄbus hÅ«mÄnÄ«s eÅ tempore ÄvertÄrunt?

HabÄsne pecÅ«niam et rÄs tuÄs prae rÄ pÅ«blicÄ?

SÅlem post paucÄs nÅ«bÄs gracillimÄs in caelÅ hodiÄ vidÄre possumus.

Some believe that very large cities are worse than very small ones.

In return for the three rather small gifts, the young man gave even more and prettier ones to his very sad mother.

Those very large mountains were higher than these.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Trahit mÄ nova vÄ«s: videÅ meliÅra probÅque, sed peiÅra tantum faciÅ et nesciÅ cÅ«r. (Ovid.)

Quaedam carmina sunt bona; plÅ«ra sunt mala. (Martial.)

Optimum est. Nihil melius, nihil pulchrius hÅc vÄ«dÄ«. (Terence.)

SpÄrÅ tÄ et hunc nÄtÄlem et plÅ«rimÅs aliÅs quam fÄlÄ«cissimÅs ÄctÅ«rum esse. (Pliny.ânÄtÄlis [diÄs], birthday; ânatal,â âNatalie.â)

Quoniam cÅnsilium et ratiÅ sunt in senibus, maiÅrÄs nostrÄ« summum concilium appellÄvÄrunt âsenÄtum.â (Cicero.âconcilium, -Ä«, n., council; âconciliate,â âreconcileâ; be careful to distinguish concilium, cÅnsilium, and cÅnsul.)

PlÅ«s operae studiÄ«que in rÄbus domesticÄ«s nÅbÄ«s nunc pÅnendum est etiam quam in rÄbus mÄ«litÄribus. (Cicero.âopera, -ae, f., work, effort; âopera,â âoperation,â âcooperate.ââdomesticus, -a, -um; âdomesticate,â âdomesticity.ââmÄ«litÄris, -e; âmilitarism,â âdemilitarizeâ; cf. mÄ«les.)

Neque enim perÄ«culum in rÄ pÅ«blicÄ fuit gravius umquam neque Åtium maius. (Cicero.)

Sumus sapientiÅrÄs illÄ«s, quod nÅs nÄtÅ«ram esse optimam ducem scÄ«mus. (Cicero.âoptimam: f. by attraction to the gender of nÄtÅ«ram.)

NÄtÅ«ra minimum petit; nÄtÅ«rae autem sÄ sapiÄns accommodat. (*Seneca.âaccommodÄre, to adapt; âaccommodation.â)

Maximum remedium Ä«rae mora est. (*Seneca.)

QuÄ« animum vincit et Ä«ram continet, eum cum summÄ«s virÄ«s nÅn comparÅ sed eum esse simillimum deÅ dÄ«cÅ. (Cicero.âcomparÄre, to compare; âcomparable,â âcomparison.â)

Dionsius, tyrannus urbis pulcherrimae, erat vir summae in vÄ«ctÅ« temperantiae et in omnibus rÄbus dÄ«ligentissimus et Äcerrimus.Äª dem tamen erat ferÅx ac iniÅ«stus. QuÄ ex rÄ, sÄ« vÄrum dÄ«cimus, vidÄbÄtur miserrimus. (Cicero.âDionysius, ruler of Syracuse in the 4th cent. B.C.âvÄ«ctus, -Å«s, m., mode of life; âvictual,â âvittles.ââtemperantia, -ae, f.; âtemperate,â âintemperance.ââiniÅ«stus, -a, -um, unjust; âinjustice.ââquÄ ex rÄ: = ex illÄ rÄ.)

Nisi superÅs vertere possum, Acheronta movÄbÅ. (Vergil.âAcheronta: Gk. acc., Acheron, a river in the underworld, here by metonymy the land of the dead.)

Alley Cat

CaelÄ«, Lesbia nostra, Lesbia illa,

illa Lesbia, quam Catullus Å«nam

plÅ«s quam sÄ atque suÅs amÄvit omnÄs,

nunc in quadriviÄ«s et angiportÄ«s

5Â Â Â  glÅ«bit magnanimÄ« RemÄ« nepÅtÄs.

*Catullus Carm. 58: This poem, a single sent. sardonically addressed to Caelius, a former rival for Lesbiaâs favors, clearly was composed at an even lower point of Catullusâ relationship with Lesbia than his Carmen 8, which you read (and may wish to re-read now) in Capvt XIX; meter: hendecasyllabic.âquadrivium, -iÄ«, n., crossroads. âangiportum, -Ä«, n., alley. âglÅ«bÅ, -ere, to peel (back), strip (off); used of stripping the bark off trees or the skin off an animal, here in an obscene sense.âRemus: Remus was slain by his brother, Romulus, who became legendary founder of Rome and the cityâs first king; his nepÅtÄs are his imagined descendantsâRomeâs nobilityâin Catullusâ day.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Marcus Caelius Rufus, a dissolute young senator, had earned Catullusâ resentment for his own affair with Lesbia (a pseudonym, you may recall from Capvt II, for Clodia, wife of another senator: this was a true Roman soap opera!); comment on the irony in Catullusâ use of nostra in addressing him. Recalling that demonstratives are âpointing words,â what do you sense as the effect of illa here, and in what ways does Catullus emphasize the word?âcomment too on the arrangement of Lesbia illa, illa Lesbia. Why do you suppose Catullus chose to imagine Lesbiaâs dallying in alleyways with Remusâ descendants, rather than Romulusâ?

Thanks a Lot, Tully!

DÄ«sertissime RÅmulÄ« nepÅtum,

quot sunt quotque fuÄre, MÄrce TullÄ«,

quotque post aliÄ«s erunt in annÄ«s,

grÄtiÄs tibi maximÄs Catullus

5Â Â Â  agit, pessimus omnium poÄta,

tantÅ pessimus omnium poÄta

quantÅ tÅ« optimus omnium patrÅnus.

*Catullus Carm. 49: The poet sends âthanksâ to the orator and statesman, Marcus Tullius Cicero; whether or not the tone is ironic is a matter much debated by scholars, but it is worth noting here that Cicero had not only on occasion expressed his disdain for romantic poetry, but also had defended the Caelius Rufus of Catullus 58 on charges the orator claimed were instigated by Clodia/Lesbia. Like Catullus 58 above, this poem is structured as a single, long sent., and its meter is hendecasyllabic.âdÄ«sertus, -a, -um, eloquent, learned; âdissertation.ââfuÄre: = fuÄrunt, see Capvt XII.âpost: = posteÄ.âtantÅâ¦ quantÅ, just as muchâ¦ as. âtÅ«: sc. es.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Irony can often be detected by the intonation of a speaker, or a poet reciting his verse, but is sometimes difficult to discern in a written text; what do you see as this poemâs most striking stylistic feature (occurring in virtually every line) and how might its exuberance suggest that Catullusâ âthank youâ here is in fact sarcastic? INTERTEXTUALITY, i.e., resonances between one literary text and another, can often be a clue to an authorâs intent; what connection do you see between this poemâs opening line, and the closing verse of poem 58, and, if deliberate, what might its purpose be?

An Uncleâs Love for His Nephew and Adopted Son

AdulÄscÄns est cÄrior mihi quam ego ipse! Atque hic nÅn est fÄ«lius meus sed ex frÄtre meÅ. Studia frÄtris iam diÅ« sunt dissimillima meÄ«s. Ego vÄ«tam urbÄnam ÄgÄ« et Åtium petÄ«vÄ« et, id quod quÄ«dam fortÅ«nÄtius putant, uxÅrem numquam habuÄ«. Ille, autem, haec omnia fÄcit: nÅn in forÅ sed in agrÄ«s vÄ«tam Ägit, parvum pecÅ«niae accÄpit, uxÅrem pudÄ«cam dÅ«xit, duÅs fÄ«liÅs habuit. Ex illÅ ego hunc maiÅrem adoptÄvÄ« mihi, ÄdÅ«xÄ« Ä parvÅ puerÅ, amÄvÄ« prÅ meÅ. In eÅ adulÄscente est dÄlectÄtiÅ mea; sÅlum id est cÄrum mihi.

Â 

Terence Ad. 39â49: Terence (Publius Terentius Afer, ca. 185â159 B.C.), brought to Rome from Carthage as a slave, was subsequently freed and went on to a career as comic playwright and producer. The Adelphoe, Brothers, last of his six plays, is a comedy of manners, something like a modern âsitcom,â about two fathers with quite different philosophies about raising their adolescent sons; Micio, the more lenient father, speaks here about his affection for his son, whom he has adopted from his brother.âiam diÅ«: commonly used with a pres. tense verb for an action begun in the past but continuing in the pres., where in Eng., and thus in translation, we would use perf. tense.âdÅ«xit: here, married. âadoptÄre, = Eng.; âadoption,â âadoptive.ââÄdÅ«xÄ«: raised. â id: this thing, i.e., their relationship.

Scene from Terenceâs comedy, The Andria. Marble bas-relief, 1st cent. A.D. Museo Archeologico Nazionale, Naples, Italy
Vanni / Art Resource, NY

QVAESTIÅNÄS: It was a matter of great importance in the Greco-Roman world for a man to have a male heir; why did Micio resort to adoption? Marriage humor was standard fodder for comics in antiquity as it is today; what is the joke here?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Â 

CIL 4.9415: Not exactly a graffito, but another example of Roman script: just as manufacturers label jars and cans of processed foods today, ancient food producers incised or painted labels on their storage and shipping containers, which were usually ceramic ware, like the jug (urceus) that bore this inscription; from the atrium of a house in Reg. I, Ins. 8.âliquÄmen, -minis, n., liquid, fluid, sauce; liquamen; liquamen and another popular fish-sauce called garum were widely used for seasoningâthis jar was also inscribed, in a second hand, SCOMBR, a common abbreviation for scomber, mackerel, the fish typically used to produce these sauces.âoptimum: a bit of advertising hype, another aspect of marketing familiar to us today!

ETYMOLOGIA

In many instances the irregular comparison of a Lat. adj. can easily be remembered by Eng. derivatives:

Â 

bonus

melior: ameliorate

Â 

optimus: optimist, optimum, optimal

magnus

maior: major, majority, mayor

Â 

maximus: maximum

malus

peior: pejorative

Â 

pessimus: pessimist

multus

plÅ«s: plus, plural, plurality, nonplus

parvus

minor: minor, minority, minus, minute, minuet, minister, minstrel

Â 

minimus: minimum, minimize

prÅ)

prior: prior, priority

Â 

prÄ«mus: prime, primacy, primary, primeval, primitive

superus

superior: superior, superiority

Â 

summus: summit, sum, consummate

Â 

suprÄmus: supreme, supremacy

Â 

Lat. plÅ«s is the parent of Fr. plus, It. piÃ¹, and Old Occ. plus or pus, words which are placed before adjectives to form the compar. degree in those Romance languages. In Fr. and It. adding the definite article to these comparatives converts them into superlatives:

Â 

Latin

French

Italian

longior

plus long

piÃ¹ lungo

longissimus

le plus long

il piÃ¹ lungo

cÄrior

plus cher

piÃ¹ caro

cÄrissimus

le plus cher

il piÃ¹ caro

Â 

For comparatives Rom. uses mai, like Port. mais and Sp. mÃ¡s (all from Lat. magis), before an adj., e.g., mai lung, longer; then, like Fr., It., and Port., it adds the definite article for superlatives, cel mai lung, longest. For the intensive sense often conveyed by Lat. superlatives, Rom. employs foarte, very, from Lat. forte, before an adj.; e.g., foarte clar, very clear. The practice for forming superlatives in Occ. is variable; but cf., e.g., carisme.

From pÅnÅ come innumerable derivatives: apposite, apposition, component, composite, compost, compound, deponent, deposit, deposition, depot, exponent, exposition, expound, imposition, impost, impostor, juxtaposition, opponent, opposite, positive, post, postpone, preposition, proposition, propound, repository, supposition, transposition. However, note that some Eng. compounds ending in â-pose,â e.g., ârepose,â derive through Fr. poser from late Lat. pausÄre, which stems from Gk. pausis, a pause, and pauein, to stop.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄ! Quid hodiÄ agis? SpÄ«rÄsne? SpÄrÄsne? RÄ«dÄsne? ValÄsne? SÄ« tÅ« valÄs, ego valeÅ! And here are some more rÄs LatÄ«nae to give you a mÄns sÄna: first, an old Latin maxim which you should now be able to read, sapiÄns nihil affÄ«rmat quod nÅn probat. Likewise this quote from Horace (Epist. 1.1.106), sapiÄns Å«nÅ minor est Iove, and the motto of the Jesuit order, ad maiÅrem glÅriam DeÄ«. Now, quid est tempestÄs? Pluitne? Estne frÄ«gida? NimbÅsa? Well, it really wonât matter, if you remember this proverb: sÅl lÅ«cet omnibus! (Remember lÅ«cÄre from last chapter?) Birds of a feather flock together and, according to another old Latin proverb, similis in similÄ« gaudet. Here are some more from the irregular comparatives and superlatives youâve just learned: meliÅrÄs priÅrÄs, freely, the better have priority; maximÄ cum laude and summÄ cum laude (what you should have on your next diploma, sÄ« es dÄ«ligÄns in studiÅ LatÄ«nae!); peior bellÅ est timor ipse bellÄ« (note the ablative of comparison); Ä plÅ«ribus Å«num, motto of the United States, one from several, i.e., one union from many states; nÄ plÅ«s ultrÄ, no more beyond (this point), i.e., the ultimate; prÄ«mus inter parÄs, first among equals; prÄ«mÄ faciÄ, at first sight; and, finally, summum bonum, the highest good, which can come from studying Latin, of course: valÄ!

CAPVT XXVIII

Subjunctive Mood; Present Subjunctive; Jussive and Purpose Clauses

GRAMMATICA

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

You will recall from Capvt. I that MOOD (from modus) is the âmannerâ of expressing a verbal action or state of being, and you are already familiar with two of the three Latin moods, the INDICATIVE and the IMPERATIVE: an imperative (from imperÄre, to command) emphatically commands someone to undertake an action that is not yet going on, while indicatives (from indicÄre, to point out) âindicateâ real actions, i.e., actions that definitely have (or have not) occurred in the past, that are (or are not) occurring in the present, or that likely will (or will not) occur in the future.

In contrast to the indicative, the mood of actuality and factuality, the SUBJUNCTIVE is in general (though not always) the mood of potential, tentative, hypothetical, ideal, or even unreal action. An example in English is, âIf the other student were here, he would be taking notesâ; in this conditional sentence, which imagines actions that are contrary to the actual facts, English employs the auxiliaries âwereâ and âwouldâ to indicate that the action described is only hypothetical. Among the other auxiliaries used in English to describe potential or ideal actions are âmay,â âmight,â âshould,â âwould,â âmay have,â âwould have,â etc.

Latin employs the subjunctive much more frequently than English, in a wide variety of clause types, and it uses special subjunctive verb forms rather than auxiliaries. There are two tasks involved in mastering the subjunctive: first, the morphology, i.e., learning the new forms, a relatively simple matter; second, the syntax, i.e., learning to recognize and translate the various subjunctive clause types, which is also quite easily done if your approach is systematic.

PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE

There are only four tenses in the subjunctive mood. The present subjunctive is introduced in this chapter and has rules for formation that vary slightly among the four conjugations; rules for forming the imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect (Capita XXIXâXXX) are the same for all conjugations, even for irregular verbs.

Â 

1. laÃºdem

mÃ³neam

Ã¡gam

aÃºdiam

cÃ¡piam

2. laÃºdÄs

mÃ³neÄs

Ã¡gÄs

aÃºdiÄs

cÃ¡piÄs

3. laÃºdet

mÃ³neat

Ã¡gat

aÃºdiat

cÃ¡piat

Â 

1. laudmus

monemus

agmus

audimus

capimus

2. laudtis

monetis

agtis

auditis

capitis

3. laÃºdent

mÃ³neant

Ã¡gant

aÃºdiant

cÃ¡piant

Â 

Note that in the first conjugation the characteristic stem vowel changes from -Ä- in the present indicative to -Ä- in the present subjunctive. In the other conjugations -Ä- is consistently the sign of the present subjunctive, but with variations in the handling of the actual stem vowel (shortened in the second, replaced in the third, altered to short -i- in the fourth/third -iÅ); the mnemonic âwe fear a liarâ will help you remember that the vowels preceding the personal endings are -Ä-, -eÄ-, -Ä-, and -iÄ- for the first, second, third, and fourth/third -iÅ conjugations, respectively. Note that a subjunctive may be mistaken for an indicative, if you neglect to recognize a verbâs conjugation (e.g., cf. agat with amat, and amet with monet), so remember your vocabulary.

The present passive subjunctive follows the usual pattern of substituting passive endings:

Â 

laÃºder, laudris (and remember the alternate -re ending, Capvt XVIII), laudtur; laudmur, laudminÄ«, laudÃ©ntur

mÃ³near, moneris, monetur; monemur, moneminÄ«, moneÃ¡ntur

Ã¡gar, agris, agtur; agmur, agminÄ«, agÃ¡ntur

aÃºdiar, audiris, auditur; audimur, audiminÄ«, audiÃ¡ntur

cÃ¡piar, capiris, capitur; capimur, capiminÄ«, capiÃ¡ntur

Translation

While âmayâ is sometimes used to translate the present subjunctive (e.g., in purpose clauses), the translation of all subjunctive tenses, in fact, varies with the type of clause, as you will see when each is introduced.

THE JUSSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE

In this and subsequent chapters you will be introduced to a series of subjunctive clause types: the jussive subjunctive and purpose clauses (Capvt XXVIII), result clauses (XXIX), indirect questions (XXX), cum clauses (XXXI), proviso clauses (XXXII), conditions (XXXIII), jussive noun clauses (XXXVI), relative clauses of characteristic (XXXVIII), and fear clauses (XL). You should catalog these clause types in your notebook or computer file and systematically learn three details for each: (1) its definition, (2) how to recognize it in a Latin sentence, and (3) how to translate it into English.

As suggested by the term âsubjunctiveâ itself (from subiungere, to subjoin, subordinate), subjunctive verbs were used chiefly in SUBORDINATE (dependent) CLAUSES. However, the subjunctive was also employed in certain types of INDEPENDENT (main) CLAUSES. The JUSSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE (from iubÄre, to order) is among the most important of these independent uses, and the only one formally introduced in this book. Definition: as the term implies, the JUSSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE expresses a command or exhortation, especially in the first or third person (the imperative is generally used for the second person). Recognition: The clause type is easily recognized, since the sentenceâs main verb (often its only verb) is subjunctive; negative commands are introduced by nÄ. Translation: while âmayâ and âshouldâ are sometimes employed in translating jussives (particularly in second person: semper spÄrÄs, you should always hope), âletâ is the auxiliary most often used, followed by the subject noun or pronoun (in the objective case, i.e., âme,â âus,â âhim,â âher,â âthemâ):

Â 

CÅgitem nunc dÄ hÄc rÄ, et tum nÅn errÄbÅ. Let me now think about this matter, and then I will not make a mistake.

Discipulus discat aut discÄdat. Let the student either learn or leave.

DoceÄmus magnÄ cum dÄlectÄtiÅne linguam LatÄ«nam. Let us teach the Latin language with great delight.

NÄ id faciÄmus. Let us (âletâsâ) not do this.

Audeant illÄ« virÄ« et fÄminae esse fortÄs. Let those men and women dare to be brave.

PURPOSE CLAUSES

Definition: A PURPOSE CLAUSE is a subordinate clause indicating the objective of the action in the main clause; e.g., âwe study Latin so that we may learn more about ancient Romeâ or âwe study Latin to improve our English.â As seen in this second example, English often employs an infinitive to express purpose, but that use of the infinitive is rare in classical Latin prose, which instead employed a subordinate clause with a subjunctive verb. Recognition: Look for a subjunctive clause introduced by ut or, for a negative purpose, nÄ, and stating the purpose of the action in the main clause. Translation: The auxiliary âmayâ is often used in translating the present tense in a purpose clause, but it is generally more idiomatic to translate with an infinitive (âtoâ or âin order toâ), so long as the purpose clause and the main clause have the same subject. Study the following examples:

Hoc dÄ«cit ut eÅs iuvet.

He says this to help them.

in order to help them.

that he may help them.

so that he may help them.

in order that he may help them.

The first two translations above are more colloquial, the others more formal.

DiscÄdit nÄ id audiat.

He is leaving in order not to hear this.

so that he may not hear this.

Cum cÅ«rÄ docet ut discipulÄ« bene discant.

He teaches with care so (that) his students may learn well.

Hoc facit nÄ capiÄtur.

He does this in order not to be captured.

LibrÅs legimus ut multa discÄmus.

We read books (in order) to learn many things.

BonÅs librÅs nÅbÄ«s dent nÄ malÅs legÄmus.

Let them give us good books so that we may not read bad ones.

VOCÄBVLA

As you learn the new verbs in this list, conjugate a few in the present subjunctive. ParÄns/parentis (originally present participle of a verb meaning to give birth to) is another noun that, for obvious reasons, can be feminine or masculine; it serves as a reminder that vowels before ns are regularly long, those before nt are regularly short. The Romans variously treated vesper as second or third declension (even vespera, first declension, is attested); so expect a variety of endings.

Â 

Ã¡rma, armrum, n. pl., arms, weapons (army, armament, armada, armistice, armadillo, gendarme, alarmâfrom It. allâarme, to arms, Lat. ad illa arma)

cÃºrsus, cÃºrsÅ«s, m., running, race; course (courser, cursor, cursory, cursive, concourse, discourse, recourse, precursor, excursion; cf. currÅ)

lna, lnae, f., moon (lunar, lunacy, lunate, lunatic, interlunar)

occsiÅ, occÄsinis, f., occasion, opportunity (occasional)

pÃ¡rÄns, parÃ©ntis, m./f., parent (parental, parenting; cf. pariÅ, parere, give birth to)

stlla, stllae, f., star, planet (stellar, constellation, interstellar)

vÃ©sper, vÃ©speris or vÃ©sperÄ«, m., evening; evening star (vesper, vesperal)

mÃ³rtuus, mÃ³rtua, mÃ³rtuum, dead (mortuary)

prnceps, gen. prncipis, chief, foremost; m./f. noun, leader, emperor (prince, principal, principality; cf. prÄ«mus, prÄ«ncipium)

ut, conj. + subjunct., in order that, so that, that, in order to, so as to, to; + indic., as, when

nÄ, adv. and conj. with subjunct. of command and purpose, not; in order thatâ¦ not, thatâ¦ not, in order not to

cdÅ, cdere, cÃ©ssÄ«, cÃ©ssum, to go, withdraw; yield to, grant, submit (accede, access, antecedent, ancestor, cede, concede, deceased, exceed, intercede, precede, proceed, recede, secede; cf. discÄdÅ)

ddicÅ, dÄdicre, dÄdicvÄ«, dÄdictum, to dedicate (dedication, dedicatory)

Ã©geÅ, egre, Ã©guÄ« + abl. or gen., to need, lack, want (indigence, indigent; do not confuse with ÄgÄ«, from agÅ)

Ã©xpleÅ, explre, explvÄ«, expltum, to fill, fill up, complete (expletive, deplete, replete; cf. plÄnus, pleÅ, to fill)

praÃ©stÅ, praestre, praÃ©stitÄ«, praÃ©stitum, to excel; exhibit, show, offer, supply, furnish (presto; prae + stÅ, lit. âto stand in front ofâ)

tÃ¡ceÅ, tacre, tÃ¡cuÄ«, tÃ¡citum, to be silent, leave unmentioned (tacit, taciturn, taciturnity, reticence, reticent)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After memorizing the new paradigms and vocabulary and testing your mastery with some of the Self-Tutorial Exercises, scan the following readings for all present subjunctive verbs, identifying which are jussive and which are in purpose clauses. Before translating each sentence and passage, read aloud for comprehension.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Auctor sapiÄns et dÄ«ligÄns turpia vÄ«tet et tantum plÅ«ra bona probet.

Itaque prÅ patriÄ etiam maiÅra meliÅraque nunc faciÄmus.

NepÅs tuus Ä mÄnsÄ discÄdat nÄ ista verba acerba audiat.

NÄ imperÄtor superbus crÄdat sÄ esse fÄlÄ«ciÅrem quam virum humillimum.

Quisque petit quam fÄlÄ«cissimum et urbÄnissimum modum vÄ«tae.

QuÄ«dam dÄlectÄtiÅnÄs et beneficia aliÄ«s praestant ut beneficia similia recipiant.

MultÄ« medicÄ« lÅ«cem sÅlis fuisse prÄ«mum remedium putant.

Imperium ducÄ« potentiÅrÄ« dabunt ut hostÄs ÄcerrimÅs Ävertat.

HÄ«s verbÄ«s trÄ«stibus nÅ«ntiÄtÄ«s, pars hostium duÅs prÄ«ncipÄs suÅs relÄ«quit.

MaiÅrÄs putÄbant deÅs superÅs habÄre corpora hÅ«mÄna pulcherrima et fortissima.

Uxor pudÄ«ca eius haec decem Å«tilissima tum probÄvit.

Let him not think that those dissimilar laws are worse than the others (translate with and without quam).

They will send only twenty men to do this very easy thing in the forum.

They said: âLet us call the arrogant emperor a most illustrious man in order not to be expelled from the country.â

Therefore, let them not order this very wise and very good woman to depart from the dinner.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

RatiÅ dÅ«cat, nÅn fortÅ«na. (*Livy.)

Arma togae cÄdant. (Cicero.âtoga, -ae, f., toga, the garment of peace and civil, in contrast to military, activity.)

Ex urbe nunc discÄde nÄ metÅ« et armÄ«s opprimar. (Cicero.)

Nunc Å«na rÄs mihi prÅtinus est facienda ut maximum Åtium et sÅlÄcium habeam. (Terence.)

RapiÄmus, amÄ«cÄ«, occÄsiÅnem dÄ diÄ. (*Horace.)

Corpus enim somnÅ et multÄ«s aliÄ«s rÄbus eget ut valeat; animus ipse sÄ alit. (Seneca.)

QuÄ« beneficium dedit, taceat; nÄrret quÄ« accÄpit. (*Seneca.)

DÄ mortuÄ«s nihil nisi bonum dÄ«cÄmus. (Diogenes Laertius.)

ParÄns ipse nec habeat vitia nec toleret. (Quintilian.)

In hÄc rÄ ratiÅ habenda est ut monitiÅ acerbitÄte careat. (Cicero.âmonitiÅ, -Ånis, f., admonition; âadmonish.ââacerbitÄs, -tÄtis, f., noun of acerbus; âacerbity.â)

FÄminae ad lÅ«dÅs semper veniunt ut videantâet ut ipsae videantur. (Ovid.)

Arma virumque canÅ quÄ« prÄ«mus Ä lÄ«toribus TrÅiae ad Italiam vÄnit. (Vergil.âcanÅ, -ere, to sing about; âcantor,â âaccent.â)

Please Remove My Name from Your Mailing List!

CÅ«r nÅn mitto meÅs tibi, PontiliÄne, libellÅs?â

nÄ mihi tÅ« mittÄs, PontiliÄne, tuÅs!

*Martial Epig. 7.3: Roman poets, just like American writers, would often exchange copies of their works with one another; but Pontilianusâ poems are not Martialâs cup of tea! Meter: elegiac couplet.âmitto: as you have seen before, final -Å was often shortened in verse. ânÄâ¦ mittÄs: not jussive, but purpose, following the implied statement, âI donât send mine to youâ¦.â)

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: How do word order and the use of pronouns underscore the insult in line 2?

To Have Friends One Must Be Friendly

Ut praestem PyladÄn, aliquis mihi praestet OrestÄn.

Hoc nÅn fit verbÄ«s, MÄrce; ut amÄris, amÄ.

*Martial Epig. 6.11.9â10: Orestes, son of Agamemon, and Pylades, son of King Strophius of Phocis and Agamemnonâs sister Anaxibia, were in Greek myth exemplars of close friendship; meter: elegiac couplet. âPyladÄnâ¦ OrestÄn: both are Gk. acc. sg. forms.âfit: is accomplished; âfiat.â)

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Explain how the second lineâs ut-clause + imperat. parallels both the thought and the syntax of the first line.

The Days of the Week

DiÄs dictÄ« sunt Ä deÄ«s quÅrum nÅmina RÅmÄnÄ« quibusdam stÄllÄ«s dÄdicÄvÄrunt. PrÄ«mum enim diem Ä SÅle appellÄvÄrunt, quÄ« prÄ«nceps est omnium stÄllÄrum ut Ä«dem diÄs est prae omnibus diÄbus aliÄ«s. Secundum diem Ä LÅ«nÄ appellÄvÄrunt, quae ex SÅle lÅ«cem accÄpit. Tertium ab stÄllÄ MÄrtis, quae Vesper appellÄtur. QuÄrtum ab stÄllÄ MercuriÄ«. QuÄ«ntum ab stÄllÄ Iovis. Sextum Ä Veneris stÄllÄ, quam LÅ«ciferum appellÄvÄrunt, quae inter omnÄs stÄllÄs plÅ«rimum lÅ«cis habet. Septimum ab stÄllÄ SÄturnÄ«, quae dÄ«citur cursum suum trÄ«gintÄ annÄ«s explÄre. Apud HebraeÅs autem diÄs prÄ«mus dÄ«citur Å«nus diÄs sabbatÄ«, quÄ« inter nÅs diÄs dominicus est, quem pÄgÄnÄ« SÅlÄ« dÄdicÄvÄrunt. Sabbatum autem septimus diÄs Ä dominicÅ est, quem pÄgÄnÄ« SÄturnÅ dÄdicÄvÄrunt.

Â 

Isidore Orig. 5.30: The Spanish writer (Saint) Isidore, Bishop of Seville (ca. A.D. 560â636), was a polymath best known for his 20-volume work, the OrÄ«ginÄs or Etymologiae, which he intended to be an encyclopedia of all that was worth knowing about classical antiquity; in this passage, which you should compare with the graffito from 1st-cent. Pompeii below, he discusses the Greco-Roman names for the days of the weeks, briefly comparing the Judaeo-Christian system. The early Germanic calendar adopted the Roman system but substituted the names of Germanic deities (including Tiu, Woden, Thor, and Freya) for all but Saturday.âMÄrs, MÄrtis, m.; âMarch,â âmartial.â âMercurius, -Ä«, m.; âmercury,â âmercurial.â âIuppiter, Iovis, m.; âjovial,â âJovian.â âVenus, Veneris, f.; âVenusian,â âvenereal.â âLÅ«ciferus, -Ä«, m., Lucifer, light-bringer, the morning star; âluciferous.ââSÄturnus, -Ä«, m.; âSaturday,â âsaturnine.â âtrÄ«gintÄ: 30. âHebraeus, -Ä«, m., Hebrew. âsabbatum, -Ä«, n., the Sabbath; Å«nus diÄs sabbatÄ«: i.e., the first day after the Sabbath. âdominicus, -a, -um, of the Lord, the Lordâs; âDominic,â âdominican.ââpÄgÄnus, -Ä«, m., rustic, peasant; heathen, pagan; âpaganism.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What three types of celestial bodies does the word stÄlla refer to here? To what group specifically does Isidore refer in the phrase inter nÅs?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

CIL 4.8863: The columns reproduced in this drawing of a graffito from a Pompeian shop in Reg. III, Ins. 4, are four from a total of eight in which the writer included the different weekly market-days (nÅ«ndinae) for several neighboring towns along with some other specific dates, listing the names of the days of the week, as seen here, and numbering the days of the month from 1â30 (IâXXX). The Romans typically abbreviated the days of the week (and the months), just as we do; the numerals employed here include the common variants VIIII for IX, XVIIII for XIX, and XXVIIII for XXIX (see the table of numerals in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum).

CIL 4.5002 and 7131: A wonderful testimony to the literacy, and literary interests, of ancient Pompeians, snippets from some of the already âclassicâ Roman poets were often written on walls by enthusiasts or students, including these two excerpts from the opening verse of Vergilâs Aeneid (cf. S.A. 12 above), a line that appears, in whole or part, in more than a dozen other graffiti throughout the city. The graffito above (top), from the atrium of the House of Marcus Casellius Marcellus (in Reg. IX, Ins. 2), has only the first two words of the verse, ARMA VIRVMQVE, while the other inscription, a dipinto painted in the middle of an electoral programma on the front of the shop of the blacksmith (ferrÄrius) Tyrsus on the Via dellâAbbondanza (Reg. I, Ins. 6), continues with CANO TROIAE and a curving stroke that formed the beginning of the Q in the lineâs next word, QVI (a stray ARM also appears beneath the -QVE âanother, aborted attempt at beginning the verse?); the original poetic word order seen in the dipinto, Arma virumque canÅ TrÅiae quÄ«â¦, has been simplified in S.A. 12, where TrÅiae is repositioned within the rel. clause to which it belongs syntactically.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Here are some nuggets from the new VocÄbula: teachers and guardians can serve in locÅ parentis; mortuÄ« nÅn mordent, âdead men tell no talesâ (lit., the dead donât bite!); occÄsiÅ fÅ«rem facit, opportunity makes a thief; those who know about Watergate will now recognize the etymology of the âexpletives deletedâ (four-letter words that âfill outâ the sentences of vulgar and illiterate folk!); an ÄditiÅ prÄ«nceps is a first edition; tacet, a musical notation calling for a vocalist or instrumentalist to be silent; related to cursus is curriculum, running, course, course of action, hence a rÃ©sumÃ© provides your curriculum vÄ«tae; and the motto of New York University (fÄ«liÅ meÅ grÄtiÄs!), a good one for Latin students, is perstÄre et praestÄre, to persevere and to excel.

Now letâs focus on jussives: first off, I hope that all my students in Wyoming recognized arma togae cÄdant as their state motto; another motto, with this new verb cÄdere and an imperative rather than a jussive, is Vergilâs nÄ cÄde malÄ«s, yield not to evils; and Vegetius, an ancient military analyst, has advised us, quÄ« dÄsÄ«derat pÄcem, praeparet bellum. Before bidding you farewell, hereâs a proverbâwith both a purpose clause and a jussiveâthat makes the same point as the Pylades reading above: ut amÄ«cum habeÄs, sÄ«s amÄ«cus (sÄ«s, as youâll see in the next chapter, is the subjunctive for es), in order to have a friend, you should be a friend. By the way, I call first person plural jussives the âsalad subjunctivesâ (remember VENI, VIDI, VEGI?) because they always contain âlet usââa reminder of the salad most ordered by honeymooners, âlettuce alone!â On that note, let us just say: amÄ«cÄ« amÄ«caeque meae, semper valeÄtis!

CAPVT XXIX

Imperfect Subjunctive; Present and Imperfect Subjunctive of Sum and Possum; Result Clauses

GRAMMATICA

THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE

The imperfect subjunctive is easy to recognize and form, consisting of the present active infinitive + the present system personal endings, active and passive, with the -Ä- long (except, as usual, before final -m, -r, and -t, and both final and medial -nt/-nt-). Samples are given in the following paradigms; for complete conjugations, see the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, SvmmÄrivm FÅrmÄrvm:

Â 

1. laudre-m

laudre-r

Ã¡gerer

audrem

cÃ¡perem

2. laudrÄ-s

laudÄr-ris

agerris

audrÄs

cÃ¡perÄs

3. laudre-t

laudÄr-tur

agertur

audret

cÃ¡peret

Â 

1. laudÄr-mus

laudÄr-mur

agermur

audÄ«rmus

capermus

2. laudÄr-tis

laudÄr-minÄ«

agerminÄ«

audÄ«rtis

capertis

3. laudre-nt

laudÄrÃ©-ntur

agerÃ©ntur

audrent

cÃ¡perent

PRESENT AND IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE OF Sum AND Possum

The present subjunctives of sum and possum are irregular but follow a consistent pattern; the imperfect subjunctives, however, follow the rule given above:

Â 

Usage and Translation of the Imperfect Subjunctive

The imperfect subjunctive is used in a variety of clause types, when the main verb is a past tense. As for all subjunctives, the translation depends upon the type of clause, but auxiliaries sometimes used with the imperfect include âwere,â âwould,â and, in purpose clauses, âmightâ (vs. âmayâ for the present tense). Study these sample sentences containing purpose clauses:

Hoc dÄ«cit ut eÅs iuvet.

He says this (in order) to help them.

so that he may help them.

Hoc dÄ«xit (dÄ«cÄbat) ut eÅs iuvÄret.

He said (kept saying) this (in order) to help them.

so that he might help them.

Hoc facit nÄ urbs capiÄtur.

He does this so that the city may not be captured.

Hoc fÄcit (faciÄbat) nÄ urbs caperÄtur.

He did (was doing) this so that the city might not be captured.

Remember that in order to master the subjunctive (notice the purpose clause?) you must (1) learn a definition for each clause type, (2) be able to recognize each, and (3) know the proper translation for the subjunctive verb in each type. Keep these three points in mindâdefinition, recognition, translationâas you proceed to the following discussion of result clauses and to the subsequent chapters in this book.

RESULT CLAUSES

Definition: A RESULT CLAUSE is a subordinate clause that shows the result of the action in the main clause; the purpose clause answers the question âwhy is (was) it being done?â, while the result clause answers the question âwhat is (was) the outcome?â Examples in English are: âit is raining so hard that the streets are floodingâ and âshe studied Latin so diligently that she knew it like a Roman.â Notice that English introduces such clauses with âthatâ and uses the indicative mood, generally with no auxiliary (i.e., neither may nor might).

Recognition: Latin result clauses begin with ut and contain (usually at the end) a subjunctive verb. The result clause can be easily recognized, and distinguished from a purpose clause, by the sense and context and also by the fact that the main clause usually contains an adverb (ita, tam, sÄ«c, so) or adjective (tantus, so much, so great) indicating degree and signaling that a result clause is to follow. Moreover, if the clause describes a negative result, it is still introduced by ut but contains a negative word such as nÅn, nihil, nÄmÅ, numquam or nÅ«llus (vs. a negative purpose clause, which is introduced by nÄ).

Translation: In result clauses (vs. purpose clauses) the subjunctive verb is regularly translated as an indicative, without an auxiliary; âmayâ or âmightâ are used only in those instances where a potential or ideal result, rather than an actual result, is being described. Analyze these examples:

Tanta fÄcit ut urbem servÄret. He did such great things that he saved the city. (Result)

Haec fÄcit ut urbem servÄret. He did these things so that he might save the city. (Purpose)

Tam strÄnuÄ labÅrat ut multa perficiat. He works so energetically that he accomplishes many things. (Result)

StrÄnuÄ labÅrat ut multa perficiat. He works energetically so that he may accomplish many things. (Purpose)

Hoc tantÄ benevolentiÄ dÄ«xit ut eÅs nÅn offenderet. He said this with such great kindness that he did not offend them. (Result)

Hoc magnÄ benevolentiÄ dÄ«xit nÄ eÅs offenderet. He said this with great kindness in order that he might not offend them. (Purpose)

Saltus erat angustus, ut paucÄ« GraecÄ« multÅs mÄ«litÄs prohibÄre possent. The pass was narrow, so that a few Greeks were able to stop many soldiers. (Result)

Note that in this last example there is no âsignal wordâ such as ita or tam in the main clause, but it is clear from the context that the ut clause indicates the result, not the purpose, of the narrowness of the pass.

VOCÄBVLA

Nothing too unusual in this new list: moenia was regularly employed only in the plural, just as when speaking in English of defensive fortifications, we refer to a cityâs âwallsâ not âwallâ; one word for a wall of a house, by the way, is mÅ«rus, which gives us âmural.â Practice conjugating a few of the verbs in this list in the newly introduced imperfect subjunctiveâand why not the present subjunctive too!

Â 

ftum, ftÄ«, n., fate; death (fatal, fatalism, fatality, fateful, fairy; fÄbula and fÄma are from the same stem)

ingÃ©nium, ingÃ©niÄ«, n., nature, innate talent (ingenuity, genius, genial, congenial; cf. genus, gÄns, and gignere, to create, give birth to)

moÃ©nia, moÃ©nium, n. pl., walls of a city (munitions, ammunition; cf. mÅ«nire, to fortify)

nta, ntae, f., daughter (prenatal, postnatal, Natalie; cf. nÄtÅ«ra)

sculum, sculÄ«, n., kiss (osculate, osculation; cf. Ås)

sdus, sderis, n., constellation, star (sidereal, consider, desire)

dÃgnus, dÃgna, dÃgnum + abl., worthy, worthy of (dignify, dignity from dignitÄs, indignation from indignÄtiÅ, deign, disdain, dainty)

drus, dra, drum, hard, harsh, rough, stern, unfeeling, hardy, difficult (dour, durable, duration, during, duress, endure, obdurate)

tÃ¡ntus, tÃ¡nta, tÃ¡ntum, so large, so great, of such a size (tantamount; do not confuse with the adv. tantum, only)

dnique, adv., at last, finally, lastly

Ãta, adv. used with adjs., verbs, and advs., so, thus

quÃdem, postpositive adv., indeed, certainly, at least, even; nÄâ¦ quÃdem, notâ¦ even (do not confuse with quÄ«dam, certain)

sÄ«c, adv. most commonly with verbs, so, thus (sic)

tam, adv. with adjs. and advs., so, to such a degree; tamâ¦ quam, soâ¦ as; tamquam, as it were, as if, so to speak

vrÅ, adv., in truth, indeed, to be sure, however (very, verily, etc.; cf. vÄrus, vÄritÄs)

cÃ³ndÅ, cÃ³ndere, cÃ³ndidÄ«, cÃ³nditum, to put together or into, store; found, establish (= con- + dÅ, dare; condiment, abscond, recondite)

contÃ©ndÅ, contÃ©ndere, contÃ©ndÄ«, contÃ©ntum, to strive, struggle, contend; hasten (contender, contentious; cf. tendÅ, to stretch, extend)

mÃ³lliÅ, mollre, mollvÄ«, molltum, to soften; make calm or less hostile (mollescent, mollify, mollusk, emollient; cf. mollis, soft, mild)

pÃºgnÅ, pugnre, pugnvÄ«, pugntum, to fight (pugnacious, impugn, pugilist)

respÃ³ndeÅ, respondre, respÃ³ndÄ«, respnsum, to answer (respond, response, responsive, responsibility, correspond)

sÃºrgÅ, sÃºrgere, surrxÄ«, surrctum, to get up, arise (surge, resurgent, resurrection, insurgent, insurrection, source, resource)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

The challenge in these readings is to distinguish between purpose and result clauses, both of which may be introduced by ut: if you see tam, tantus, ita, or sÄ«c in the main clause, the ut-clause indicates result; likewise an ut-clause that contains nÅn, numquam, or nÄmÅ is a negative result clause, whereas negative purpose clauses are introduced by nÄ. Remember that the verb in a result clause is generally translated without âmayâ or âmight,â which are commonly used in English to signal purpose rather than result.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

PrÄ«nceps arma meliÅra in manibus mÄ«litum posuit, ut hostÄs terrÄrent.

HostÄs quidem negÄvÄrunt sÄ arma dissimilia habÄre.

Pars mÄ«litum lÅ«cem diÄÄ« vÄ«tÄvit nÄ hÄ«c vidÄrentur.

SÅlem prÄ«mam lÅ«cem caelÄ« superÄ«, lÅ«nam prÄ«mam lÅ«cem vesperÄ«, et stÄllÄs oculÅs noctis appellÄbant.

IllÄ« adulÄscentÄs sapientiae dÄnique cÄdant ut fÄlÄ«ciÅrÄs hÄ«s sint.

SapientÄs putant beneficia esse potentiÅra quam verba acerba et turpia.

QuÄ«dam magister verba tam dÅ«ra discipulÄ«s dÄ«xit ut essent trÄ«stÄs atque discÄderent.

RespondÄrunt auctÅrem hÅrum novem remediÅrum esse medicam potentissimam.

Nihil vÄrÅ tam facile est ut sine labÅre id facere possÄ«mus.

PrÅ labÅre studiÅque patria nostra nÅbÄ«s plÅ«rimÄs occÄsiÅnÄs bonÄs praestat.

ParentÄs plÅ«rima Åscula dedÄrunt nÄtae pulcherrimae gracilÄ«que, in quÄ maximam dÄlectÄtiÅnem semper inveniÄbant.

The words of the philosopher were very difficult, so that those listening were unable to learn them.

The two women wished to understand these things so that they might not live base lives.

Those four wives were so pleasant that they received very many kindnesses.

He said that the writerâs third poem was so beautiful that it delighted the minds of thousands of citizens.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQUAE

Omnia vincit Amor; et nÅs cÄdÄmus AmÅrÄ«. (Vergil.)

Urbem clÄrissimam condidÄ«; mea moenia vÄ«dÄ«; explÄvÄ« cursum quem FÄta dederant. (Vergil.)

Ita dÅ«rus erÄs ut neque amÅre neque precibus mollÄ«rÄ« possÄs. (Terence.âprex, precis, f., prayer; âprecarious,â âimprecation,â âpray.â)

NÄmÅ quidem tam ferÅx est ut nÅn mollÄ«rÄ« possit, cultÅ«rÄ datÄ. (Horace.âcultÅ«ra, -ae, f.; âagriculture,â âhorticulture.â)

Difficile est saturam nÅn scrÄ«bere; nam quis est tam patiÄns malae urbis ut sÄ teneat? (Juvenal.âpatiÄns, gen. -entis, tolerant of; âpatience.â)

Fuit quondam in hÄc rÄ pÅ«blicÄ tanta virtÅ«s ut virÄ« fortÄs cÄ«vem perniciÅsum ÄcriÅribus poenÄ«s quam acerbissimum hostem reprimerent. (Cicero.âperniciÅsus, -a, -um, pernicious.âre-primÅ, cf. opprimÅ; ârepress,â âreprimand.â)

Ita praeclÄra est recuperÄtiÅ lÄ«bertÄtis ut nÄ mors quidem in hÄc rÄ sit fugienda. (Cicero.ârecuperÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., recovery; ârecuperate.â)

NÄ ratiÅnÄs meÅrum perÄ«culÅrum Å«tilitÄtem reÄ« pÅ«blicae vincant. (Cicero.âÅ«tilitÄs, -tÄtis, f., advantage; cf. Å«tilis; âutilitarian,â âutility.â)

EÅ tempore AthÄniÄnsÄs tantam virtÅ«tem praestitÄrunt ut decemplicem numerum hostium superÄrent, et hÅs sÄ«c perterruÄrunt ut in Asiam refugerent. (Nepos.âAthÄniÄnsÄs, -ium, Athenians.âdecemplex, -plicis, tenfold.âper + terreÅ.)

ÅrÄtor exemplum dignum petat ab DÄmosthene illÅ, in quÅ tantum studium tantusque labor fuisse dÄ«cuntur ut impedÄ«menta nÄtÅ«rae dÄ«ligentiÄ industriÄque superÄret. (Cicero.âexemplum, -Ä«, n., example; âexemplify,â âsample.ââDÄmosthenÄs, -thenis, m., a famous Greek orator.âimpedÄ«mentum, -Ä«, n.; âimpede.ââdÄ«ligentia, -ae, f.; âdiligently.ââindustria, -ae, f.; âindustrious.â)

Praecepta tua sint brevia ut cito mentÄs plÅ«rium discipulÅrum ea discant teneantque memoriÄ fidÄlÄ«. (Horace.âpraeceptum, -Ä«, n., precept; âpreceptor.â)

Nihil tam difficile est ut nÅn possit studiÅ invÄstÄ«gÄrÄ«. (Terence.âinvÄstÄ«gÄre, to track down, investigate; âinvestigation,â âvestige.â)

Bellum autem ita suscipiÄtur ut nihil nisi pÄx quaesÄ«ta esse videÄtur. (Cicero.)

Tanta est vÄ«s probitÄtis ut eam etiam in hoste dÄ«ligÄmus. (Cicero.)

Marble head of Demosthenes Roman copy of a 3rd cent. B.C. bronze statue by Polyeuktos Louvre, Paris, France
Erich Lessing / Art Resource, NY

How Many Kisses Are Enough?

Quaeris, Lesbia, quot bÄsia tua sint mihi satis? Tam multa bÄsia quam magnus numerus Libyssae harÄnae aut quam sÄ«dera multa quae, ubi tacet nox, furtÄ«vÅs amÅrÄs hominum videntâtam bÄsia multa (nÄmÅ numerum scÄ«re potest) sunt satis CatullÅ Ä«nsÄnÅ!

Â 

Catullus Carm. 7: In an earlier poem (Carm. 5, which you will read in its entirety in Capvt XXXI) Catullus had begged Lesbia for hundreds and thousands of kisses and a life immersed in love; in this prose adaptation of Carm. 7 (for verse excerpts from the poem, see LocÄ« Im. II) the poet imagines his mistress cooly asking just exactly how many kisses he wants.âquotâ¦ sint: an IND. QUEST., a construction formally introduced in Capvt XXX but easily understood here.âLibyssus, -a, -um, Libyan, African. âharÄna, -ae, f., sand, here = grains of sand; âarena.ââfurtÄ«vus, -a, -um, stolen, secret; âfurtive.ââÄ«nsÄnus, -a, -um: = Eng.; âinsanity.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Catullusâ response is as calculated as Lesbiaâs question; how are his analogies alike and yet different?âtry to visualize them bothâhow do they look different and, in a sense, even âfeelâ different?

The Nervousness of Even a Great Orator

Ego dehinc ut respondÄrem surrÄxÄ«. QuÄ sollicitÅ«dine animÄ« surgÄbamâdÄ« immortÄlÄsâet quÅ timÅre! Semper quidem magnÅ cum metÅ« incipiÅ dÄ«cere. QuotiÄnscumque dÄ«cÅ, mihi videor in iÅ«dicium venÄ«re nÅn sÅlum ingeniÄ« sed etiam virtÅ«tis atque officiÄ«. Tum vÄrÅ ita sum perturbÄtus ut omnia timÄrem. DÄnique mÄ collÄgÄ« et sÄ«c pugnÄvÄ«, sÄ«c omnÄ« ratiÅne contendÄ« ut nÄmÅ mÄ neglÄxisse illam causam putÄret.

Â 

Cicero Cluent. 51: Ciceroâs speech PrÅ CluentiÅ, In Defense of Cluentius, resulted in the acquittal of a man accused by his mother of poisoning his step-father; this passage is interesting, as it shows the trepidation that can plague even the greatest of public speakers.âsollicitÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f., anxiety; âsolicit,â âsolicitous.ââquotiÄnscumque, adv., as often as, whenever. âingeniÄ«â¦ virtÅ«tisâ¦ officiÄ«: all modify iÅ«dicium.âperturbÄre, to disturb, confuse; âperturbation,â âimperturbable.ââcolligÅ, -ere, -lÄgÄ«, -lÄctum, to gather, collect, control; âcollection,â ârecollect.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Ciceroâs concern over public opinion was a great source of anxiety; explain in your own words the three areas in which he feared he might be judged lacking. By what multiple means did he overcome his concerns on this occasion and win his case?

Youâre All Just Wonderful!

NÄ laudet dignÅs, laudat Callistratus omnÄs:

cui malus est nÄmÅ, quis bonus esse potest?

*Martial Epig. 12.80: meter: elegiac couplet.âdignÅs: i.e., only the deserving. âCallistratus: a Greek name, meant to suggest perhaps a former slave.âquisâ¦ potest: supply eÄ«, antecedent of cui, to a man to whom.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Explain the ethical implications of the question Martial poses in line 2; why would befriending someone like Callistratus ultimately be meaningless?âhave you ever known such a person?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

FÄlÄ«cem Aufidium, fÄlÄ«cem, semper deus faciat!

CIL 4.6815: If this prayer, written with a flourish between two doors of an apartment house (Reg. VI, Ins. 16), achieved its purpose, Aufidius was a very lucky guy!âFÄlÄ«cem: repeated for emphasis, a rhetorical device known as ANAPHORA; or, as some editors suppose, the second occurrence of the word may be the manâs cognomen, i.e., his name was Aufidius Felix and the writer is engaging in a bit of name-play, a favorite type of Roman humor.

ETYMOLOGIA

The adverbial ending -mente or -ment so common in Romance languages derives from Lat. mente (abl. of mÄns) used originally as an abl. of manner but reduced to an adverbial suffix. The following examples are based on Lat. adjectives which have already appeared in the vocabularies:

Â 

Latin Words

It. Adverb

Sp. Adverb

Fr. Adverb

dÅ«rÄ mente

duramente

duramente

durement

clÄrÄ mente

chiaramente

claramente

clairement

sÅlÄ mente

solamente

solamente

seulement

certÄ mente

certamente

certamente

certainement

dulcÄ« mente

dolcemente

dulcemente

doucement

brevÄ« mente

brevemente

brevemente

brÃ¨vement

facilÄ« mente

facilmente

fÃ¡cilmente

facilement

Â 

Cf. Port. duramente, claramente, somente, certamente, docemente, brevemente, facilmente; Old Occ. solamn, certamn, breumn.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄ! Sunt multae dÄlectÄtiÅnÄs in novÅ vocÄbulÄriÅ nostrÅ: e.g., thereâs Virginiaâs state motto, sÄ«c semper tyrannÄ«s, thus always to tyrants (i.e., death!); and ingenium, which really means something inborn, like a Roman manâs genius (his inborn guardian spirit, counterpart to the womanâs iÅ«nÅ, magnified and deified in the goddess Juno); the connection of moenia and mÅ«nÄ«re reminds us that fortification walls were the ancientsâ best munitions, and thereâs the old proverb praemonitus, praemÅ«nÄ«tus, forewarned (is) forearmed; sÄ«c is an editorâs annotation, meaning thus (it was written), and used to identify an error or peculiarity in a text being quoted, and itâs also the parent of It. sÃ¬, Sp. sÃ, Port. sim, Fr. si, Old Occ. si, all meaning yes. And hereâs a brief âkissertationâ on the nicest word in this new list: Åsculum was the native word for kiss (vs. bÄsium, which the poet Catullus seems to have introduced into the language from the north); it is actually the diminutive of Ås, Åris and so means literally little mouthâwhich perhaps proves the Romans âpuckered upâ when they smooched! Catullus, by the way, loved to invent words, and one was bÄsiÄtiÅ, kissification or smooch-making (âsmooch,â by the way, is not Latinate, alas, but Germanic and related to âsmack,â as in âto smack oneâs lips,â which one might do before enjoying either a kiss or a slice of toast with âSmuckerâsâ!). RÄ«dÄte et valÄte!

CAPVT XXX

Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive; Indirect Questions; Sequence of Tenses

GRAMMATICA

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE

Perfect system subjunctives, like perfect system indicatives, all follow the same basic rules of formation, regardless of the conjugation to which they belong. For the perfect subjunctive active, add -erÄ«- + the personal endings to the perfect stem (shortening the -i- before -m, -t, and -nt); for the pluperfect active, add -issÄ- + the personal endings to the perfect stem (shortening the -e- before -m, etc.). For the passives, substitute the subjunctives sim and essem for the equivalent indicatives sum and eram. The forms of laudÅ are shown below; those for the other model verbs (which follow the very same pattern) are provided in the Appendix.

Perfect Subjunctive Active

Sg.

laudv-erim, laudverÄ«s, laudverit

Pl.

laudÄvermus, laudÄvertis, laudverint

Â 

Note that these forms are identical to those of the future perfect indicative except for the first person singular and the long -Ä«- in certain of the subjunctive forms; the identical forms can be distinguished as indicative or subjunctive by sentence context.

Pluperfect Subjunctive Active

Sg.

laudÄv-Ãssem, laudÄvÃssÄs, laudÄvÃsset

Pl.

laudÄvissmus, laudÄvisstis, laudÄvÃssent

These forms resemble the perfect active infinitive, laudÄvisse, + the endings (with the -Ä- long except before -m, etc.; cf. the imperfect subjunctive, which resembles the present active infinitive + endings).

Perfect Subjunctive Passive

Sg.

laudtus, -a, -um sim, laudtus sÄ«s, laudtus sit

Pl.

laudtÄ«, -ae, -a smus, laudtÄ« stis, laudtÄ« sint

Pluperfect Subjunctive Passive

Sg.

laudtus, -a, -um Ã©ssem, laudtus Ã©ssÄs, laudtus Ã©sset

Pl.

laudtÄ«, -ae, -a essmus, laudtÄ« esstis, laudtÄ« Ã©ssent

Translation and Usage

As with the present and imperfect subjunctives, the perfect and pluperfect are employed in a variety of clauses (in accordance with the sequence of tenses discussed below) and with a variety of translations. Just as âmayâ and âmight/wouldâ are sometimes used in translating the present and imperfect, respectively, so âmay haveâ and âmight have/would haveâ are sometimes employed with the perfect and pluperfect; likewise, they are often translated as simple indicatives: the best procedure is to learn the rules for translation of each clause type.

Synopsis

You can now conjugate a verb fully in all of its finite forms; following is a complete third person singular synopsis of agÅ, agere, ÄgÄ«, Äctum:

Indicative Mood

Subjunctive Mood

INDIRECT QUESTIONS

Definition: An INDIRECT QUESTION is a subordinate clause which reports a question indirectly, not via a direct quotation (e.g., âthey asked what Gaius was doingâ vs. âthey asked, âWhat is Gaius doing?ââ); as such, it is comparable in concept to an indirect statement, which reports indirectly, not a question, but a statement (Capvt XXV). Recognition: The indirect question uses a subjunctive verb (not an infinitive, like an indirect statement) and is distinguished from other subjunctive clauses as it is introduced by an interrogative word such as quis/quid, quÄ«/quae/quod (the interrogative adjective), quam, quandÅ, cÅ«r, ubi, unde, uter, utrumâ¦ an (whetherâ¦ or), -ne (attached to the clauseâs first word, = whether), etc.; the verb in the main clause is ordinarily a verb of speech, mental activity, or sense perception (including many of the same verbs that introduce indirect statements, listed in Capvt XXV). Translation: The subjunctive verb in an indirect question is usually translated as an indicative in the same tense, i.e., without any auxiliary such as âmayâ or âmight.â Compare the first three examples below, which are direct questions, with the next three, which contain indirect questions:

Â 

Quid GÄius facit?

What is Gaius doing?

Quid GÄius fÄcit?

What did Gaius do?

Quid GÄius faciet?

What will Gaius do?

Â 

Rogant quid GÄius faciat.

They ask what Gaius is doing.

Rogant quid GÄius fÄcerit.

They ask what Gaius did.

Rogant quid GÄius factÅ«rus sit.

They ask what Gaius will do
Â Â Â  (lit., is about to do).

Â 

FactÅ«rus sit in this last example is a form sometimes called the FUTURE ACTIVE PERIPHRASTIC; in the absence of an actual future subjunctive, this combination of a form of sum + the future active participle (cf. the passive periphrastic, consisting of sum + the future passive participle, Capvt XXIV) was occasionally employed to indicate future time unambiguously in certain types of clauses, including the indirect question. In this last example, if the main verb were a past tense, then (in accordance with the rules for sequence of tenses) the sentence would be rogÄvÄrunt quid Gaius factÅ«rus esset, they asked what Gaius would do (was about to do, was going to do).

SEQUENCE OF TENSES

In Latin as in English there is a logical sequence of tenses as the speaker or writer proceeds from a main clause to a subordinate clause. The rule in Latin is simple: a PRIMARY TENSE of the indicative must be followed by a primary tense of the subjunctive, and an indicative HISTORICAL (or SECONDARY) TENSE must be followed by a historical subjunctive tense, as illustrated in the following chart:

After a primary main verb the present subjunctive indicates action occurring at the same time as that of the main verb or after that of the main verb; the perfect subjunctive indicates action which occurred before that of the main verb. Similarly after a historical main verb the imperfect subjunctive indicates action occurring at the same time as that of the main verb or after that of the main verb, and the pluperfect subjunctive indicates action before that of the main verb. The primary tenses of the indicative, the present and future, both indicate incomplete actions (i.e., actions now going on, in the present, or only to be begun in the future), while the historical tenses, as the term implies, refer to past actions.

The rules for the sequence of tenses operate in purpose clauses, result clauses, indirect questions, and similar constructions to be introduced in subsequent chapters; analyze carefully the sequencing in each of the following examples:

Id facit (faciet) ut mÄ iuvet. He does (will do) it to help me.

Id fÄcit (faciÄbat) ut mÄ iuvÄret. He did (kept doing) it to help me.

Tam dÅ«rus est ut eum vÄ«tem. He is so harsh that I avoid him.

Tam dÅ«rus fuit (erat) ut eum vÄ«tÄrem. He was so harsh that I avoided him.

Rogant, rogÄbuntâThey ask, will ask

quid faciat. what he is doing.

quid fÄcerit. what he did.

quid factÅ«rus sit. what he will (is about to) do.

RogÄvÄrunt, rogÄbantâThey asked, kept asking

quid faceret. what he was doing.

quid fÄcisset. what he had done.

quid factÅ«rus esset. what he would (was about to) do.

There are two common exceptions to the rules for sequence of tenses: a HISTORICAL PRESENT main verb (a present tense used for the vivid narration of past events: âIâm sitting in my room last night, when suddenly I hear a knock at the doorâ) often takes a historical sequence subjunctive, and a perfect tense main verb, when focusing on the present consequences of the past action, may be followed by a primary sequence subjunctive (see Exerc. 8 below). Note, too, that since purpose and result clauses logically describe actions that follow the actions of the main verb, they do not ordinarily contain perfect or pluperfect tense verbs, which indicate prior action.

VOCÄBVLA

A few unusual items: cÄterÄ« has only plural forms for the same reason as paucÄ«, i.e., because the meaning essentially connotes plurality; tantusâ¦ quantus, when employed together, are known as CORRELATIVE ADJECTIVES, comparable to the correlative conjunctions etâ¦ et and autâ¦ aut; the verb cognÅscÅ/nÅscÅ in the perfect means I have learned, and since, once you have learned something, you âknowâ it, the wordâs perfect tense is often translated with present force, e.g., cognÅvit = she has learned or she knows, and similarly nÅverant = they had learned/they knew. As you learn the verbs in this list, practice conjugating a few of them in the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive, and do a synopsis of one or two as well, then compare your work with the paradigms.

Â 

hÃ³nor, honris, m., honor, esteem; public office (honorable, honorary, honorific, dishonor, honest)

cterÄ«, cterae, ctera, pl., the remaining, the rest, the other, all the others; cf. alius, another, other (etc. = et cetera)

quÃ¡ntus, quÃ¡nta, quÃ¡ntum, how large, how great, how much (quantify, quantity, quantitative, quantum); tÃ¡ntusâ¦ quÃ¡ntus, just as much (many)â¦ as

rÄ«dÃculus, rÄ«dÃcula, rÄ«dÃculum, laughable, ridiculous (ridicule; cf. rÄ«deÅ)

vvus, vva, vvum, alive, living (vivid, vivify, convivial; cf. vÄ«vÅ, vÄ«ta)

frtim, adv., stealthily, secretly (furtively, ferret; cf. fÅ«rtÄ«vus, -a, -um, secret, furtive; fÅ«r, fÅ«ris, m./f., thief)

mox, adv., soon

prmÅ, adv., at first, at the beginning (cf. prÄ«mus, -a, -um)

repÃ©nte, adv., suddenly

Ãºnde, adv., whence, from what or which place, from which, from whom

Ãºtrumâ¦ an, conj., whetherâ¦ or

bÃbÅ, bÃbere, bÃbÄ«, to drink (bib, bibulous, imbibe, wine-bibber, beverage)

cognscÅ, cognscere, cognvÄ«, cognitum and (its base form) nÅscÅ, nÅscere, nÅvÄ«, nÅtum, to become acquainted with, learn, recognize; in perf. tenses, know (cognizance, cognition, connoisseur, incognito, reconnaissance, reconnoiter, notice, notify, notion, notorious)

comprehÃ©ndÅ, comprehÃ©ndere, comprehÃ©ndÄ«, comprehnsum, to grasp, seize, arrest; comprehend, understand (comprehensive, comprehensible)

cÅnsmÅ, cÅnsmere, cÅnsmpsÄ«, cÅnsmptum, to consume, use up (consumer, consumption, assume, assumption, presume, presumption, presumptuous, resume, resumption; cf. sÅ«mere, to take)

dÃºbitÅ, dubitre, dubitvÄ«, dubittum, to doubt, hesitate (dubious, dubitable, doubtful, doubtless, indubitable, undoubtedly)

expnÅ, expnere, expÃ³suÄ«, expÃ³situm, to set forth, explain, expose (exponent, exposition, expository, expound)

mÃnuÅ, minÃºere, mÃnuÄ«, mintum, to lessen, diminish (cf. minor, minus, minimus; diminish, diminutive, minuet, minute, minutiae, menu)

rÃ³gÅ, rogre, rogvÄ«, rogtum, to ask (interrogate, abrogate, arrogant, derogatory, prerogative, surrogate)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Before reading the following selections, be sure you have memorized the paradigms and VocÄbula and assessed your mastery by answering the grammar questions and translating some of the sentences in the Self-Tutorial Exercises for this chapter; check your answers to the Exercises against the key (KEY FOR Capvt XXX), analyze any errors, and review accordingly. Scan through the readings below for all subjunctives verbs and identify the clause type in which each appears; recall that âmayâ or âmightâ are commonly employed when translating verbs in purpose clauses into English, but subjunctives in result clauses or indirect questions are usually translated simply as indicatives, without any auxiliary.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

RogÄvit ubi illae duae discipulae dignae haec didicissent.

VidÄbit quanta fuerit vÄ«s illÅrum verbÅrum fÄlÄ«cium.

HÄs Ä«nsidiÄs repente exposuit nÄ rÄs pÅ«blica opprimerÄtur.

HÄ« taceant et trÄs cÄterÄ« expellantur nÄ occÄsiÅnem similem habeant.

Ita dÅ«rus erat ut beneficia nÄ parentum quidem comprehendere posset.

CÄterÄ« quidem nesciÄbant quam Äcris esset mÄns nÄtae eÅrum.

DÄnique prÄ«nceps cognÅscet cÅ«r potentior pars mÄ«litum nÅs vÄ«tet.

Iam cognÅvÄ« cÅ«r clÄra facta vÄrÅ nÅn sint facillima.

QuÄ«dam auctÅrÄs appellÄbant arma optimum remedium malÅrum.

MortuÄ«s haec arma mox dÄdicÄmus nÄ honÅre egeant.

FÄtÅ duce, RÅmulus Remusque RÅmam condidÄrunt; et, RemÅ necÄtÅ, moeniaurbis novae cito surrÄxÄrunt.

Tell me in what lands liberty is found.

We did not know where the sword had finally been put.

He does not understand the first book which they wrote about the moon, stars, and constellations.

They asked why you could not learn what the rest had done.

Let all men now seek better things than money or supreme power so that their souls may be happier.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Nunc vidÄtis quantum scelus contrÄ rem pÅ«blicam et lÄgÄs nostrÄs vÅbÄ«s prÅnÅ«ntiÄtum sit. (Cicero.)

Quam dulcis sit lÄ«bertÄs vÅbÄ«s prÅtinus dÄ«cam. (Phaedrus.)

RogÄbat dÄnique cÅ«r umquam ex urbe cessissent. (Horace.)

Nunc sciÅ quid sit amor. (*Vergil.)

VideÄmus uter hÄ«c in mediÅ forÅ plÅ«s scrÄ«bere possit. (Horace.)

MultÄ« dubitÄbant quid optimum esset. (*Cicero.)

Incipiam expÅnere unde nÄtÅ«ra omnÄs rÄs creet alatque. (Lucretius.)

Dulce est vidÄre quibus malÄ«s ipse careÄs. (Lucretius.)

AuctÅrem TrÅiÄnÄ« bellÄ« relÄgÄ«, quÄ« dÄ«cit quid sit pulchrum, quid turpe, quid Å«tile, quid nÅn. (Horace.âTrÅiÄnus, -a, -um, Trojan.)

DoctÅs rogÄbis quÄ ratiÅne bene agere cursum vÄ«tae possÄ«s, utrum virtÅ«tem doctrÄ«na paret an nÄtÅ«ra ingeniumque dent, quid minuat cÅ«rÄs, quid tÄ amÄ«cum tibi faciat. (Horace.âdoctrÄ«na, -ae, f., teaching; âdoctrine,â âindoctrinate.â)

IstÄ« autem rogant tantum quid habeÄs, nÅn cÅ«r et unde. (Seneca.)

Errat, quÄ« fÄ«nem vÄsÄnÄ« quaerit amÅris: vÄrus amor nÅ«llum nÅvit habÄre modum. (*Propertius.âvÄsÄnus, -a, -um, insane.)

Sed tempus est iam mÄ discÄdere ut cicÅ«tam bibam, et vÅs discÄdere ut vÄ«tam agÄtis. Utrum autem sit melius, dÄ« immortÄlÄs sciunt; hominem quidem nÄminem scÄ«re crÄdÅ. (Cicero.âSocratesâ parting words to the jury which had condemned him to death.âcicÅ«ta, -ae, f., hemlock; âcicutoxin.âânÄminem: = nÅ«llum.)

The Death of Socrates. Charles Alphonse Dufresnoy. Oil on canvas, 17th cent. Galleria Palatina, Palazzo Pitti, Florence, Italy
Alinari / Art Resource, NY

Evidence and Confession

Sit dÄnique scrÄ«ptum in fronte Å«nÄ«us cuiusque quid dÄ rÄ pÅ«blicÄ sentiat; nam rem pÅ«blicam labÅribus cÅnsiliÄ«sque meÄ«s ex igne atque ferrÅ Äreptam esse vidÄtis. Haec iam expÅnam breviter ut scÄ«re possÄ«tis quÄ ratiÅne comprehÄnsa sint. Semper prÅvÄ«dÄ« quÅ modÅ in tantÄ«s Ä«nsidiÄ«s salvÄ« esse possÄmus. OmnÄs diÄs cÅnsÅ«mpsÄ« ut vidÄrem quid coniÅ«rÄtÄ« ÄctÅ«rÄ« essent. DÄnique litterÄs intercipere potuÄ« quae ad CatilÄ«nam Ä LentulÅ aliÄ«sque coniÅ«rÄtÄ«s missae erant. Tum, coniÅ«rÄtÄ«s comprehÄnsÄ«s et senÄtÅ« convocÄtÅ, contendÄ« in senÄtum, ostendÄ« litterÄs LentulÅ, quaesÄ«vÄ« cognÅsceretne signum. DÄ«xit sÄ cognÅscere; sed prÄ«mÅ dubitÄvit et negÄvit sÄ dÄ hÄ«s rÄbus respÅnsÅ«rum esse. Mox autem ostendit quanta esset vÄ«s cÅnscientiae; nam repente mollÄ«tus est atque omnem rem nÄrrÄvit. Tum cÄterÄ« coniÅ«rÄtÄ« tam fÅ«rtim inter sÄ aspiciÄbant ut nÅn ab aliÄ«s indicÄrÄ« sed indicÄre sÄ ipsÄ« vidÄrentur.

Â 

Cicero Cat. 1 and 3: Cicero finally succeeded in forcing Catiline to leave Rome, but some of his henchmen remained in the city and tangible evidence was still needed to prove their guilt; in this selection, adapted from passages in his first and third Catilinarian orations, Cicero shows how he finally obtained that evidence and even extracted a confession from Publius Cornelius Lentulus Sura, a disgraced former consul and Catilineâs second in command. Be sure to review the readings and notes on the Catilinarian conspiracy in Capita XI, XIV, and XX; a final reading, âTestimony Against the Conspirators,â appears in Capvt XXXVI.âfrÅns, frontis, f., brow, face; âfrontal,â âaffront.ââbreviter: adv. of brevis.âprÅ-videÅ, to fore-see, give attention to; âprovide,â âprovident.ââintercipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, = Eng.; âinterception,â âinterceptor.ââcognÅsceretne: when introducing an ind. quest., -ne = whether. âcÅnscientia, -ae, f., conscience; âconscientious,â âunconscionable.ââinter sÄ aspiciÅ, -ere, to glance at each other; âaspect.ââindicÄre, to accuse; âindication,â âindicative.ââsÄ ipsÄ«: a lit. Eng. translation might produce the unfortunate redundancy themselvesâ¦ themselves, but in Lat. of course the words are identical in neither form nor function and would in no way sound odd.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What incriminating evidence had Cicero obtained against the conspirators, and how did it lead to Lentulusâ confession?

A Covered Dish Dinner!

MÄnsÄs, Åle, bonÄs pÅnis, sed pÅnis opertÄs.

RÄ«diculum est: possum sÄ«c ego habÄre bonÄs.

*Martial Epig. 10.54: Olus was the sort of stingy host often targeted in Roman satireâone might as well dine at home! Meter: elegiac couplet.âmÄnsÄs: here, as often, the word refers not to tables but to the dishes, i.e., the platters of food, set out on them at dinner.âopertus, -a, -um, concealed, covered; âcoverlet,â âcovert.ââsÄ«c: here better rendered (in) that way, rather than simply âsoâ or âthus.ââego: i.e., even a âpoorâ fellow like the speaker could host fancy dinner parties!

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Explain exactly what tantalizing circumstance the speaker is complaining about in line 1; how does word order underscore the point in that line, and echo it in the following verse as well?

A Legacy-hunterâs Wish

NÄ«l mihi dÄs vÄ«vus; dÄ«cis post fÄta datÅ«rum:

sÄ« nÅn es stultus, scÄ«s, Maro, quid cupiam!

*Martial Epig. 11.67: The speaker wants something Maro is just dying to give him! For Romeâs captÄtÅrÄs,, see âWhen I Haveâ¦Enough,â Capvt IX above. Meter: elegiac couplet.ânÄ«l: a common variant for nihil.âfÄta: poetic pl. for sg., = mortem.âdatÅ«rum: = tÄ datÅ«rum esse.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What does the speaker want, so that he can get, well, what he wants? Identify the chiasmus in line 1, and explain its purpose.

Note on a Copy of Catullusâ Carmina

Tantum magna suÅ dÄbet VÄrÅna CatullÅ

quantum parva suÅ Mantua VergiliÅ.

*Martial Epig. 14.195: A gift-note from the ApophorÄta (see âMessage from a Bookcase,â in Capvt XIX), and a high compliment to Catullus, who was a favorite of Martialâs and a major influence on his epigrams. Meter: elegiac couplet.âVÄrÅnaâ¦ Mantua: Verona and Mantua, both towns in northern Italy (see Map 1), were the birthplaces of Catullus and Vergil respectively.âmagna suÅâ¦ VÄrÅna CatullÅ: this kind of ABAB arrangement (adj. Aâ¦ adj. Bâ¦ noun Aâ¦ noun B), known as INTERLOCKED WORD ORDER, is common in Lat. verse.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Comment on the word order in the second verse, and on the parallel structure of the two lines; how is the parallelism suited to the point Martial is making?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

SÄ«c [t]i[b]i contingat semper flÅrÄre, SabÄ«na, contingat fÅrmae, sÄ«sque puella diÅ«.

CIL 4.9171: This verse graffito, found outside Pompeiiâs Porta Vesuviana, seems to have been an original composition, addressed by the writer to his girlfriend Sabina (though some scholars see a reference to Poppaea Sabina, wife of the emperor Nero); meter: elegiac couplet.âcontingÅ, -tingere, -tigÄ«, -tÄctum, to touch; + dat. + infin., fall to oneâs lot, be granted (to someone to do something); âcontingent,â âcontactâ; tibi contingatâ¦ contingat fÅrmae = chiasmus (dativeA-verbB=verbB-dativeA).âflÅrÄre, to flower, blossom; shine, excel; âfloral,â âfluorish.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What, specifically, are the writerâs wishes for Sabina? What does he mean by puella here? The editors of CIL considered fÅrmae an error for fÅrma, nom.; but, besides the fact that the nom. with its short final syllable would not fit the meter, what other arguments favor the reading fÅrmae?

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, amÄ«cÄ«! This chapterâs VocÄbula list brings a veritable cÄna verbÅrum for your mÄnsa LatÄ«na; letâs start with the main course: the cursus honÅrum, a familiar phrase in English, was the traditional course of political office-holding in Rome; ordinarily one served first as quaestor (a treasury official), then as praetor (judge), and only later as cÅnsul. The consulship was something like our presidency, but the term was one year, and there were two consuls, each with veto power over the other (Cicero, as you recall, was one of the consuls in 63 B.C., when he uncovered the Catilinarian conspiracy).

Now for the mÄnsa secunda: first, an old proverb that will serve you near as well as carpe diem: occÄsiÅnem cognÅsce! And hereâs another that may save you from temptation to even the slightest of crimes: nÄmÅ repente fuit turpissimus, no one was ever suddenly most vicious (Juvenal 2.83: the satirist meant that even the worst criminals attained that status through the gradual accumulation of guilty acts). An honorary degree is granted honÅris causÄ; honÅrÄs mÅ«tant mÅrÄs is an ancient truism; from cÄterÄ«, besides et cÄtera/ etc., is cÄtera dÄsunt, the rest is lacking, an editorial notation for missing sections of a text; from quantus comes a large quantity of phrases, one of which should be sufficient here, quantum satis, as much as suffices (if you are not satisfied, youâll find more quantum phrases in Capita XXXII and XXXIV); and when day is done you can shout mox nox, in rem, soon (âtwill be) night, (letâs get down) to business. ValÄte!

CAPVT XXXI

Cum Clauses; FerÅ

GRAMMATICA

Cum CLAUSES

You are already familiar with the use of cum as a preposition meaning âwith.â The word can also serve as a conjunction, meaning when, since, or although and introducing a subordinate cum CLAUSE that describes an action connected in one way or another with the main clause. Sometimes the verb employed is indicative, especially when describing the precise time of an action. In these so-called cum TEMPORAL CLAUSES, cum is translated âwhenâ (or âwhileâ); tum is occasionally found in the main clause, and cumâ¦ tum together may be translated ânot onlyâ¦ but alsoâ:

Cum eum vidÄbis, eum cognÅscÄs. When you (will) see him [i.e., at that very moment], you will recognize him.

Cum vincimus, tum pÄcem spÄrÄs. When (while) we are winning, you are (at the same time) hoping for peace.

Cum ad illum locum vÄnerant, tum amÄ«cÅs contulerant. When they had come to that place, they had brought their friends or not only had they come to that place, but they had also brought their friends.

Often, however, the verb of the cum clause is subjunctive, especially when it describes the general circumstances (rather than the exact time) when the main action occurred (often called a cum CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSE), or explains the cause of the main action (cum CAUSAL CLAUSE), or describes a circumstance that might have obstructed the main action or is in some other way opposed to it (cum ADVERSATIVE or CONCESSIVE CLAUSE):

Cum hoc fÄcisset, ad tÄ fÅ«git.

When he had done this, he fled to you. (circumstantial)

Cum hoc scÄ«ret, potuit eÅs iuvÄre.

Since he knew this, he was able to help them. (causal)

Cum hoc scÄ«ret, tamen mÄ«litÄs mÄ«sit.

Although he knew this, nevertheless he sent the soldiers. (adversative)

Cum GÄium dÄ«ligerÄmus, nÅn poterÄmus eum iuvÄre.

Although we loved Gaius, we could not help him. (adversative)

Recognition: You should have little difficulty distinguishing among the four basic types of cum clauses: the temporal has an indicative verb, and the three subjunctive types can generally be recognized by analyzing the relationship between the actions in the main and subordinate clauses; in the case of adversative clauses the adverb tamen often appears in the main clause. Translation: Remember that when cum is followed immediately by a noun or pronoun in the ablative case, you should translate it with. When instead it introduces a subordinate clause, translate it when, since, although, etc. As seen in the above examples, the verb in a cum clause, whatever its type, is regularly translated as an indicative, i.e., without an auxiliary such as may or might.

IRREGULAR FerÅ, ferre, tulÄ«, lÄtum, to bear, carry

FerÅ is one of a series of irregular verbs to be introduced in the closing chapters of this text (the others being volÅ, nÅlÅ, mÄlÅ, fÄ«Å, and eÅ); they are all commonly used and must be learned thoroughly. The English verb âto bearâ is cognate with Latin ferÅ, ferre and has generally the same basic and metaphorical meanings, to carry and to endure. In the present system ferÅ is simply a third conjugation verb, formed exactly like agÅ except that the stem vowel does not appear in a few places, including the infinitive ferre. The only irregular forms, all in the present tense (indicative, imperative, and infinitive), are highlighted below in bold; the imperfect subjunctive, while formed on the irregular infinitive ferre, nevertheless follows the usual pattern of present infinitive + endings. Although tulÄ« (originally tetulÄ«) and lÄtum (originally *tlÄtum) derive ultimately, by suppletion, from a different verb related to tollÅ, the conjugation follows the regular pattern of the perfect system and should cause no difficulty. The singular imperative lacks the -e, like dÄ«c, dÅ«c, and fac (Capvt VIII).

Present Indicative

Â Â Â Â Active

Â Â Â Â Passive

1. fÃ©rÅ

fÃ©ror

2. fers (cf. Ã¡gis)

fÃ©rris (Ã¡geris)

3. fert (cf. Ã¡git)

fÃ©rtur (Ã¡gitur)

Â 

1. fÃ©rimus

fÃ©rimur

2. fÃ©rtis (cf. Ã¡gitis)

ferÃminÄ«

3. fÃ©runt

ferÃºntur

Present Active Imperative:

fer (Ã¡ge), fÃ©rte (Ã¡gite)

Infinitives

Active

Passive

Pres. fÃ©rre (Ã¡gere)

fÃ©rrÄ« (Ã¡gÄ«)

Perf. tulÃsse

ltus Ã©sse

Fut. lÄtrus Ã©sse

ltum rÄ«

Synopsis

The following synopsis, showing irregular forms in bold, provides an overview of the conjugation of ferÅ; for the complete conjugation, see the App. (IRREGULAR: ferÅ, ferre, tulÄ«, lÄtum, to bear, carry).

VOCÄBVLA

As always, learn the entire entry for each word in the following list, and review vocabulary from preceding chapters as well, ideally by listening to the CDs or the audio lists at www.wheelockslatin.com. When using the online audio, look carefully at each wordâs spelling, including macrons, then click on the word and listen to it, say the word and its meaning aloud, then look/click/listen and repeat aloud again. Semper audÄ«Äs ac prÅnÅ«ntiÄs!

Â 

as, Ã¡ssis, m., an as, a small copper coin, comparable to a penny (ace)

auxÃlium, auxÃliÄ«, n., aid, help (auxiliary; cf. auctor and augÄre, to increase, augment)

dÃgitus, dÃgitÄ«, m., finger, toe (digit, digital, digitalis, digitalize, digitize, prestidigitation; see LatÄ«na Est Gaudium, Capvt XX)

elephÃ¡ntus, elephÃ¡ntÄ«, m. and f., elephant (elephantiasis, elephantine)

exsÃlium, exsÃliÄ«, n., exile, banishment (often without the -s-, exilium; exilic)

invÃdia, invÃdiae, f., envy, jealousy, hatred (invidious, envious)

rmor, rÅ«mris, m., rumor, gossip (rumormonger)

vnum, vnÄ«, n., wine (vine, vinegar, viniferous, vintage, vinyl)

medÃocris, medÃocre, ordinary, moderate, mediocre (mediocrity; cf. medius)

cum, conj. + subjunct., when, since, although; conj. + indic., when

Ã¡pud, prep. + acc., among, in the presence of, at the house of

sÃ©mel, adv., a single time, once, once and for all, simultaneously

Ãºsque, adv., all the way, up (to), even (to), continuously, always

dÃ³leÅ, dolre, dÃ³luÄ«, dolitrum, to grieve, suffer; hurt, give pain (doleful, dolor, dolorous, Dolores, condole, condolences, indolent)

dÃ³rmiÅ, dormre, dormvÄ«, dormtum, to sleep (dormitory, dormer, dormancy, dormant, dormouse)

fÃ©rÅ, fÃ©rre, tÃºlÄ«, ltum, to bear, carry, bring; suffer, endure, tolerate; say, report (fertile, circumference, defer, differ, infer, prefer, proffer, suffer, transfer; cf. tolerÅ, tollÅ)

Ã¡dferÅ, adfÃ©rre, Ã¡ttulÄ«, alltum, to bring to (afferent, allative)

cnferÅ, cÅnfÃ©rre, cÃ³ntulÄ«, colltum, to bring together, compare; confer, bestow; sÄ cÅnfÃ©rre, idiom, to go, lit., to take/betake oneself (conference, collate, collation; the abbreviation âcf.â = cÅnfer, âcompareâ)

Ã³fferÅ, offÃ©rre, Ã³btulÄ«, obltum, to offer (offertory, oblation)

rÃ©ferÅ, refÃ©rre, rÃ©ttulÄ«, reltum, to carry back, bring back; repeat, answer, report (refer, reference, referent, referral, relate, relation, relative)

invÃdeÅ, invidre, invdÄ«, invsum, to be envious; + dat. (see Capvt XXXV), to look at with envy, envy, be jealous of (invidious, invidiousness)

Ã³ccidÅ, occÃdere, occidÄ«, occsum, to fall down; die; set (occident, occidental, occasion, occasional; cf. cadÅ, occÄsiÅ)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Scan the following readings for (a) all forms of ferÅ, identifying the person, number, tense, mood, and voice of each, and (b) all cum clauses, determining for each the specific type and whether âwhen,â âsince,â or âalthoughâ conveys the intended sense. Before translating, read each sentence and passage aloud for comprehension, and listen to the CDs if you have them.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Iam vÄrÅ cognÅvimus istÄs mentÄs dÅ«rÄs ferrum prÅ pÄce offerre.

NÄ nÄtae geminae discant verba tam acerba et tam dÅ«ra.

Cum hÄ« decem virÄ« dignÄ« ex moenibus semel discessissent, alia occÄsiÅ pÄcis numquam oblÄta est.

Tantum auxilium nÅbÄ«s referet ut nÄ ÄcerrimÄ« quidem mÄ«litÄs aut pugnÄre aut hÄ«c remanÄre possint.

RogÄbat cÅ«r cÄterae tantam fidem apud nÅs praestÄrent et nÅbÄ«s tantam spem adferrent.

Cum patria nostra tanta beneficia offerat, tamen quÄ«dam sÄ in Ä«nsidiÄs fÅ«rtim cÅnferunt et contrÄ bonÅs mox pugnÄbunt.

DÄnique audiÄmus quantae sint hae Ä«nsidiae ac quot coniÅ«rÄtÄ« contrÄ cÄ«vitÄtem surgant.

Haec scelera repente exposuÄ« nÄ alia et similia ferrÄtis.

RespondÄrunt plÅ«rima arma Ä mÄ«litibus ad lÄ«tus allÄta esse et in nÄvibus condita esse.

Cum parentÄs essent vÄ«vÄ«, fÄlÄ«cÄs erant; mortuÄ« quoque sunt beÄtÄ«.

NesciÅ utrum trÄs coniÅ«rÄtÄ« maneant an in exsilium contenderint.

NÅs cÅnferÄmus ad cÄnam, meÄ« amÄ«cÄ«, bibÄmus multum vÄ«nÄ«, cÅnsÅ«mÄmus noctem, atque omnÄs cÅ«rÄs nostrÄs minuÄmus!

When the soldiers had been arrested, they soon offered us money.

Although life brings very difficult things, let us endure them all and dedicate ourselves to philosophy.

Since you know what help is being brought by our six friends, these evils can be endured with courage.

Although his eyes could not see the light of the sun, nevertheless that humble man used to do very many and very difficult things.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Potestne haec lÅ«x esse tibi iÅ«cunda, cum sciÄs hÅs omnÄs cÅnsilia tua cognÅvisse? (Cicero.)

ThemistoclÄs, cum Graeciam servitÅ«te PersicÄ lÄ«berÄvisset et propter invidiam in exsilium expulsus esset, ingrÄtae patriae iniÅ«riam nÅn tulit quam ferre dÄbuit. (Cicero.âPersicus, -a, -um.âingrÄtus, -a, -um, ungrateful; âingrate,â âingratitude.ââiniÅ«ria, -ae, f., injury; âinjurious,â âinjuriously;â cf. iÅ«s.)

Quae cum ita sint, CatilÄ«na, cÅnfer tÄ in exsilium. (Cicero.âquae cum: = et cum haec.)

Å nÄvis, novÄ« flÅ«ctÅ«s bellÄ« tÄ in mare referent! Å quid agis? Unde erit Å«llum perfugium? (Horace.ânÄvis: ship [of state].âflÅ«ctus, -Å«s, m., wave, billow; âfluctuate,â âfluctuation.â)

Cum rÄs pÅ«blica immortÄlis esse dÄbeat, doleÅ eam salÅ«tis egÄre ac in vÄ«tÄ Å«nÄ«us mortÄlis cÅnsistere. (Cicero.âcÅnsistÅ, -ere + in, to depend on; âconsist,â âconsistency.â)

Cum illum hominem esse servum nÅvisset, eum comprehendere nÅn dubitÄvit. (Cicero.)

Ille comprehÄnsus, cum prÄ«mÅ impudenter respondÄre coepisset, dÄnique tamen nihil negÄvit. (Cicero.âimpudenter, adv.; âimpudence,â âimpudent.â)

MilÅ dÄ«citur per stadium vÄnisse cum bovem umerÄ«s ferret. (Cicero.âMilÅ, -lÅnis, m., a famous Greek athlete.âstadium, -iÄ«, n. âbÅs, bovis, m./f., ox; âbovine,â âbeef.ââumerus, -Ä«, m., shoulder; âhumerus,â âhumeral.â)

Quid vesper et somnus ferant, incertum est. (Livy.)

Ferte miserÅ tantum auxilium quantum potestis. (Terence.)

Hoc Å«num sciÅ: quod fÄta ferunt, id ferÄmus aequÅ animÅ. (Terence.)

LÄgum dÄnique idcircÅ omnÄs servÄ« sumus, ut lÄ«berÄ« esse possÄ«mus. (*Cicero.âidcircÅ, adv., for this reason.)

Give Me a Thousand Kisses!

VÄ«vÄmus, mea Lesbia, atque amÄmus,

rÅ«mÅrÄsque senum sevÄriÅrum

omnÄs Å«nius aestimÄmus assis!

SÅlÄs occidere et redÄ«re possunt;

5 Â Â Â nÅbÄ«s cum semel occidit brevis lÅ«x,

nox est perpetua Å«na dormienda.

DÄ mÄ« bÄsia mÄ«lle, deinde centum;

dein mÄ«lle altera, dein secunda centum;

deinde usque altera mÄ«lle, deinde centum.

10 Â Â Dein, cum mÄ«lia multa fÄcerÄ«musâ

conturbÄbimus illa, nÄ sciÄmus,

aut nÄ quis malus invidÄre possit,

cum tantum sciat esse bÄsiÅrum.

*Catullus Carm. 5: In one of his most popular carmina, Catullus here exhorts Lesbia to live, and love, and ignore the gossip of grumpy old men who envy young lovers and curse their passion.ârÅ«mÅrÄs: with omnÄs; adj. and noun were often widely separated in poetry, so it is essential to pay close attention to the endings.âsevÄrus, -a, -um, = Eng.; âpersevere.â âÅ«niusâ¦ assis: GEN. OF INDEF. VALUE; we would say at (rather than of) oneâ¦. âaestimÄre, to value, estimate; âesteem,â âestimate.ââsÅlÄs: pl., as, in the poetic imagination, each dayâs sun is a new one.âredÄ«re, to return. ânÅbÄ«s: DAT. OF REFERENCE, a usage formally introduced in Capvt XXXVIII, but whose sense is easily understood here.âmÄ«: = mihi. âdein: = deinde. âconturbÄre, to throw into confusion, mix up; âdisturb,â âperturbationâ; here possibly an allusion to jumbling the counters on an abacus.ânÄ sciÄmus: sc. numerum; if the number is unknown, then, in a sense, it is limitless; in ancient views of black magic, knowing the exact number of, say, a neighborâs sheep made a curse upon them more efficacious.âquis: here indef., someone. âinvidÄre: with malus, the word means both to envy and to cast an evil eye upon, i.e., to hex.âtantum: with bÄsiÅrum, gen. of the whole, = so many kisses.

Roman abacus Museo Nazionale Romano (Terme di Diocleziano) Rome, Italy
Scala / Art Resource, NY

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: The poem is about livingâand dyingâas much as about loving, as announced in the equation set forth in the opening verse; what opposing images does Catullus employ for life and death, and how does he manipulate word order, and even sound effects, to draw our attention to the antitheses? How, in the vision of this poem, might one seemingly escape death? How are the senÄs and the quis malus associated, and what do they represent? How does the poet employ numbers hereâand not just the hundreds and thousands, but also the number âoneâ?

Ringo

SÄnÅs CharÄ«nus omnibus digitÄ«s gerit

nec nocte pÅnit ÄnulÅs,

nec cum lavÄtur. Causa quae sit quaeritis?

DactyliothÄcam nÅn habet!

*Martial Epig. 11.59: Charinusâhis Greek name suggests servile originsâwas an ostentatious chap who liked to show off his many rings; meter: alternating iambic trimeter and dimeter.âsÄnÄ«, -ae, -a, a DISTRIBUTIVE NUMERAL, six each, six apiece; âsenariiâ (a verse form with six iambic feet per line).âÄnulus, -Ä«, m., ring; âannelidâ (a type of ring-worm) and âannular eclipse,â both spelled with nn, perhaps by analogy with annus, year, though Änulus, to get down to âfundamentals,â is actually the diminutive of Änus, ring, circle, anus); and for the digitus ÄnulÄrius, see LatÄ«na Est Gaudium, Capvt XX.âpÅnit: = dÄpÅnit, put away; use of a simple verb form, where a compound might be expected, was common in Lat. verse.âlavÄre, to bathe; âlaundry,â âlavatory.ââcausaâ¦ quaeritis: the usual order would be quaeritisne quae sit causa.âdactyliothÄca, -ae, f., ring-box, jewelry chest; a Gk. word, as befits Charinus; âdactylic,â âpterodactylâ (both originally derive from Gk., not Lat.).

Roman gold rings, one with a red carnelian intaglio of Minerva, one with a twisted knot. 1stâ3rd cent. A.D. Kunsthistorisches Museum, Vienna, Austria

Erich Lessing / Art Resource, NY

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What noun must sÄnÅs modify? What effect was the poet hoping to achieve by so widely separating noun and adj.? You can do the math: how many rings did Charinus own? How many ring-boxes? So, whatâs the joke?

FacÄtiae (Witticisms)

Cum CicerÅ apud Damasippum cÄnÄret et ille, mediocrÄ« vÄ«nÅ in mÄnsÄ positÅ, dÄ«ceret, âBibe hoc Falernum; hoc est vÄ«num quadrÄgintÄ annÅrum,â CicerÅ sÄ«c respondit, âBene aetÄtem fert!â

Augustus, cum quÄ«dam rÄ«diculus eÄ« libellum trepidÄ adferret, et modo prÅferret manum et modo retraheret, âPutÄs,â inquit, âtÄ assem elephantÅ dare?â

Â 

Macrobius Sat. 2.3â4: Macrobius Ambrosius Theodosius was a 5th-cent. A.D. scholar whose writings reflected a keen interest in Romeâs pagan past; his SaturnÄlia was a collection of dramatized dialogues set during the December festival of Saturnalia in the year A.D. 383 and featuring discussions among important figures of the period: among more serious topics the interlocutors shared a series of jokes told by famous persons from earlier times.âFalernum, -Ä«, n., Falernian (wine), the most revered of ancient Roman wines, from vineyards in northern Campania; Ciceroâs host Damasippus has substituted an inferior vintage.âquadrÄgintÄ, indecl., 40; âquarantine.ââtrepidÄ, adv., in confusion; âtrepidation,â âintrepid.ââmodoâ¦ modo, nowâ¦ now. âprÅ + ferÅ and re + trahÅ: you can easily deduce the meanings of these two compound verbs, which give us such derivatives as âproferâ and âretract.â âelephantÅ: one thinks of a child offering a peanut to a circus elephant.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Can you explain the humor in each of these two jokes? Which do you regard as more clever, which as unkind?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

QuÄ« vÄ«tam spernit facile contemnet deÄ«â¦.

CIL 4.5370: The person who wrote this graffito on a wall in Reg. IX (near Ins. 7) offered passers-by a religious admonition.âspernÅ, -ere, sprÄvÄ«, sprÄtum, to scorn, despise, spurn (which, by the way, is not a derivative).âfacile: adv. from facilis.âcontemnÅ, -temnere, -tempsÄ«, -temptum, to despise, scorn; âcontemn,â âcontemptâ; the line following is unintelligible, but must have contained an acc. noun modified by deÄ« and dir. obj. of this verb, e.g., cÅnsilium; cf., e.g., Luke 7.30: cÅnsilium DeÄ« sprÄvÄrunt.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

Iterum salvÄte, doctae doctÄ«que! Having made it this far, youâve certainly earned that appellation, and, as a further reward, here are more tidbits ex vocÄbulÄ«s novÄ«s huius capitis, all focused on that villainous Catiline: to start with, thereâs that famous cum temporal clause from Ciceroâs indictment of Catiline: cum tacent, clÄmant, when they are silent, they are shouting, i.e., âby their silence they condemn you.â Poor Catiline, perhaps he had too much to drink, usque ad nauseam, and spilled the beans, ignoring the warning, in vÄ«nÅ vÄritÄs; if only he had observed Horaceâs aurea mediocritÄs, the golden mean, he might have received auxilium ab altÅ, help from on high, but the gods, it appears, were against him. And so he soon met his end, semel et simul, once and for all: valÄ, miser CatilÄ«na, et valeÄtis, vÅs omnÄs, amÄ«cÄ« vÄritÄtis honÅrisque!

CAPVT XXXII

Formation and Comparison of Adverbs; VolÅ, MÄlÅ, NÅlÅ; Proviso Clauses

GRAMMATICA

FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

You are by now familiar with a wide range of Latin adverbs, words that are employed (as in English) to modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs, and that usually precede the words they modify. Many have their own peculiar forms and endings and must simply be memorized when first introduced in the VocÄbula (often without benefit of English derivatives to aid in the memorization): among these are cÅ«r, etiam, ita, tam, etc.

Positive Degree

A great many adverbs, however, are formed directly from adjectives and are easily recognized. Many first/second declension adjectives form positive degree adverbs by adding -Ä to the base:

Â 

lÃ³ng-Ä

(far; longus, -a, -um)

lber-Ä

(freely; lÄ«ber, lÄ«bera, lÄ«berum)

pÃºlchr-Ä

(beautifully; pulcher, -chra, -chrum)

Â 

Adverbs are often formed from third declension adjectives by adding -iter to the base; if the base ends in -nt- only -er is added:

Â 

fÃ³rt-iter

(bravely; fortis, -e)

celÃ©r-iter

(quickly, celer, celeris, celere)

cr-iter

(keenly; Äcer, Äcris, Äcre)

fÄlc-iter

(happily; fÄlÄ«x, gen. fÄlÄ«cis)

sapiÃ©nt-er

(wisely; sapiÄns, gen. sapientis)

Comparative and Superlative Degree

Many Latin adverbs have comparative and superlative forms, just as they do in English, and their English translations correspond to those of comparative and superlative adjectives; e.g., positive degree âquicklyâ; comparative âmore (rather, too) quicklyâ; superlative âmost (very) quickly,â etc.

The comparative degree of adverbs is with few exceptions identical to the -ius form which you have already learned as the neuter of the comparative degree of the adjective: dÄ«ligentius, more/rather diligently.

The superlative degree of adverbs, being normally derived from the superlative degree of adjectives, regularly ends in -Ä according to the rule given above for converting adjectives of the first and the second declensions into adverbs: iÅ«cundissimÄ, most/very pleasantly.

Quam with Comparative and Superlative Adverbs

Quam is used with adverbs in the same ways as with adjectives: hic puer celerius cucurrit quam ille, this boy ran more quickly than that one; illa puella quam celerrimÄ cucurrit, that girl ran as quickly as possible. The ablative of comparison is not ordinarily employed after comparative adverbs (except in poetry).

Comparison of Irregular Adverbs

When the comparison of an adjective is irregular (see Capvt XXVII), the comparison of the adverb derived from it normally follows the irregularities of the adjective but has adverbial endings. Study carefully the following list of representative adverbs; those that do not follow the standard rules stated above for forming adverbs from adjectives are highlighted in bold (be prepared to point out how they do not conform). Note the alternate superlatives prÄ«mÅ, which usually means first (in time) vs. prÄ«mum, usually first (in a series); quam prÄ«mum has the idiomatic meaning as soon as possible.

Â 

IRREGULAR VolÅ, velle, voluÄ«, to wish

Like ferÅ (Capvt XXXI), volÅ is another common third conjugation verb which, though regular for the most part, does have several irregular forms, including the present infinitive velle. Remember these points:

âvolÅ has no passive forms at all, no future active infinitive or participle, and no imperatives;

âthe perfect system is entirely regular;

âthe only irregular forms are in the present indicative (which must be memorized) and the present subjunctive (which is comparable to sim, sÄ«s, sit);

âthe imperfect subjunctive resembles that of ferÅ; while formed from the irregular infinitive velle, it nevertheless follows the usual pattern of present infinitive + personal endings;

âvol- is the base in the present system indicatives, vel- in the subjunctives.

Synopsis

The following synopsis, with irregular forms in bold, provides an overview of the conjugation of volÅ; for the full conjugation, see the App. (IRREGULAR VERBS):

Indicative Mood

NÅlÅ AND MÄlÅ

The compounds nÅlÅ, nÅlle, nÅluÄ« (nÄ + volÅ), not to wish, to be unwilling, and mÄlÅ, mÄlle, mÄluÄ« (magis + volÅ), to want (something) more or instead, prefer, follow volÅ closely, but have long vowels in their stems (nÅ-, mÄ-) and some other striking peculiarities, especially in the present indicative.

Present Indicative of NÅlÅ

Sg. nlÅ, nÅn vÄ«s, nÅn vult

Pl. nlumus, nÅn vÃºltis, nlunt

Present Indicative of MÄlÅ

Sg. mlÅ, mvÄ«s, mvult

Pl. mlumus, mÄvÃºltis, mlunt

Â 

The following synopses provide overviews of both verbs, with irregular forms in bold; see the App. (IRREGULAR VERBS) for full conjugations:

NÅlÅ and Negative Commands

While volÅ and mÄlÅ lack imperatives, nÅlÅ has singular and plural imperatives that were commonly employed with complementary infinitives to express NEGATIVE COMMANDS:

NÅlÄ« manÄre, CatilÄ«na! Do not remain, Catiline!

NÅlÄ«te discÄdere, amÄ«cÄ« meÄ«! Do not leave, my friends!

PROVISO CLAUSES

The subjunctive is used in a subordinate clause introduced by dummodo, provided that, so long as, and certain other words that express a provisional circumstance or âprovisoâ; nÄ is used as the negative in such clauses. The verb in such clauses is simply translated as an indicative:

NÅn timÄbÅ, dummodo hÄ«c remaneÄs. I shall not be afraid, provided that you remain here.

Erimus fÄlÄ«cÄs, dummodo nÄ discÄdÄs. We shall be happy, so long as (provided that) you do not leave.

VOCÄBVLA

You must learn all the irregular adverbs in the chart in Chapter XXXIIânot a daunting task if you have mastered the irregular adjective comparisons presented in Capvt XXVII. To reinforce learning volÅ, nÅlÅ, and mÄlÅ, do a synopsis of each in a different person and number and then check your work against the full conjugations in the SummÄrium FÅrmÄrum, IRREGULAR VERBS.

Â 

custdia, custdiae, f., protection, custody; pl., guards (custodian)

exÃ©rcitus, exÃ©rcitÅ«s, m., army (exercise)

paupÃ©rtÄs, pauperttis, f., poverty, humble circumstances (cf. pauper below)

dves, gen. dvitis or dtis, rich, wealthy (Dives; cf. dÄ«vitiae)

pÄr, gen. pÃ¡ris + dat., equal, like (par, pair, parity, peer, peerless, disparage, disparity, umpire, nonpareil)

paÃºper, gen. paÃºperis, of small means, poor (pauper, poverty, impoverished)

dÃºmmodo, conj. + subjunct., provided that, so long as

Â 

All adverbs in the list above, Comparison of Irregular Adverbs

Â 

mlÅ, mlle, mluÄ«, to want (something) more, instead; prefer

nlÅ, nlle, nluÄ«, to notâ¦ wish, be unwilling (nolo contendere, nol. pros., nolens volens)

pÃ¡teÅ, patre, pÃ¡tuÄ«, to be open, lie open; be accessible; be evident (patent, pÄtent, patency; cf. patefacere)

praÃ©beÅ, praebre, praÃ©buÄ«, praÃ©bitum, to offer, provide (provender)

prÅmÃttÅ, prÅmÃttere, prÅmsÄ«, prÅmÃssum, to send forth; promise (promissory, compromise)

vÃ³lÅ, vÃ©lle, vÃ³luÄ«, to wish, want, be willing, will (volition, voluntary, volunteer, volitive, voluptuous, benevolent, malevolent)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Test your mastery of the new material by writing out your answers to some of the Self-Tutorial Exercises and then checking the Answer Key. Next, scan the following selections to find (a) all forms of volÅ, nÅlÅ, and mÄlÅ, identifying the person, number, tense, mood, and voice of each, and (b) all proviso clauses. Finally, before translating, read each sentence and passage aloud once or twice, reading for comprehension, and listen to the CDs if you have them.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

PrÄ«mÅ illÄ« trÄs rÄ«diculÄ« nÄ mediocria quidem perÄ«cula fortiter ferre poterant et Å«llum auxilium offerre nÅlÄbant.

MaximÄ rogÄvimus quantum auxilium septem fÄminae adferrent et utrum dubitÄrent an nÅs mox adiÅ«tÅ«rae essent.

DÄnique armÄ«s collÄtÄ«s, imperÄtor prÅmÄ«sit decem mÄ«lia mÄ«litum celerrimÄ discessÅ«ra esse, dummodo satis cÅpiÄrum reciperent.

Paria beneficia, igitur, in omnÄs dignÅs cÅnferre mÄvultis.

Haec mala melius expÅnant nÄ dÄ«vitiÄs minuant aut honÅrÄs suÅs Ämittant.

At volumus cognÅscere cÅ«r sÄ«c invÄ«derit et cÅ«r verba eius tam dÅ«ra fuerint.

Cum cÄterÄ« hÄs Ä«nsidiÄs cognÅverint, vult in exsilium fÅ«rtim ac quam celerrimÄ sÄ cÅnferre ut rÅ«mÅrÄs et invidiam vÄ«tet.

MultÄ«ne discipulÄ« tantum studium usque praestant ut hÄs sententiÄs facillimÄ Å«nÅ annÅ legere possint?

Cum dÄ«vitiÄs ÄmÄ«sisset et Å«num assem nÅn habÄret, tamen omnÄs cÄ«vÄs ingenium mÅrÄsque eius maximÄ laudÄbant.

PlÅ«ra meliÅraque lÄgibus aequÄ«s quam ferrÅ certÄ faciÄmus.

OculÄ« tuÄ« sunt pulchriÅrÄs sÄ«deribus caelÄ«, mea puella; es gracilis et bella, ac Åscula sunt dulciÅra vÄ«nÅ: amÄmus sub lÅ«ce lÅ«nae!

Iste hostis, in Italiam cum multÄ«s elephantÄ«s veniÄns, prÄ«mÅ pugnÄre nÅluit et plÅ«rimÅs diÄs in montibus cÅnsÅ«mpsit.

SÄ« nepÅs tÄ ad cÄnam semel invÄ«tÄbit, mÄnsam explÄbit et tibi tantum vÄ«nÄ« offeret quantum vÄ«s; nÅlÄ«, autem, nimium bibere.

Do you wish to live longer and better?

He wishes to speak as wisely as possible so that they may yield to him very quickly.

When these plans had been learned, we asked why he had been unwilling to prepare the army with the greatest possible care.

That man, who used to be very humble, now so keenly wishes to have wealth that he is willing to lose his two best friends.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

OccÄsiÅ nÅn facile praebÄtur sed facile ac repente Ämittitur. (Publilius Syrus.)

NÅbÄ«scum vÄ«vere iam diÅ«tius nÅn potes; nÅlÄ« remanÄre; id nÅn ferÄmus. (Cicero.)

VÄ«s rÄctÄ vÄ«vere? Quis nÅn? (*Horace.ârÄctus, -a, -um, straight, right; ârectify,â ârectilinear.â)

PlÅ«s nÅvistÄ« quid faciendum sit. (Terence.)

Mihi vÄrÄ dÄ«xit quid vellet. (Terence.)

ParÄs cum paribus facillimÄ congregantur. (*Cicero.âcongregÄre, to gather into a flock; âcongregate,â âgregarious,â âsegregation.â)

TÄ magis quam oculÅs meÅs amÅ. (Terence.)

HominÄs libenter id crÄdunt quod volunt. (Caesar.âlibenter, adv., with pleasure, gladly, willingly; âad lib.â)

Multa Äveniunt hominibus quae volunt et quae nÅlunt. (Plautus.âÄ + venÄ«re, lit. âcome out,â to happen; âevent,â âeventual.â)

CÅnsiliÅ melius contendere atque vincere possumus quam Ä«rÄ. (Publilius Syrus.)

Optimus quisque facere mÄvult quam dÄ«cere. (Sallust.âmÄvult quam: = magis vult quam.)

OmnÄs sapientÄs fÄlÄ«citer, perfectÄ, fortÅ«nÄtÄ vÄ«vunt. (Cicero.âperfectÄ, adv., completely, fully; âperfect,â âperfectly.â)

MaximÄ eum laudant quÄ« pecÅ«niÄ nÅn movÄtur. (Cicero.)

SÄ« vÄ«s scÄ«re quam nihil malÄ« in paupertÄte sit, cÅnfer pauperem et dÄ«vitem: pauper saepius et fidÄlius rÄ«det. (Seneca.)

MagistrÄ« puerÄ«s crÅ«stula dant ut prÄ«ma elementa discere velint. (Horace.âcrÅ«stulum, -Ä«, n., cookie; âcrust.ââelementum, -Ä«, n.; âelemental,â âelementary.â)

SÄ« vÄ«s mÄ flÄre, dolendum est prÄ«mum ipsÄ« tibi. (*Horace.âflÄre, to weep; âfeeble.â)

The Character of Cimon

CimÅn celeriter ad summÅs honÅrÄs pervÄnit. HabÄbat enim satis Äloquentiae, summam lÄ«berÄlitÄtem, magnam scientiam lÄgum et reÄ« mÄ«litÄris, quod cum patre Ä puerÅ in exercitibus fuerat. Itaque hic populum urbÄnum in suÄ potestÄte facillimÄ tenuit et apud exercitum valuit plÅ«rimum auctÅritÄte.

Cum ille occidisset, AthÄniÄnsÄs dÄ eÅ diÅ« doluÄrunt; nÅn sÅlum in bellÅ, autem, sed etiam in pÄce eum graviter dÄsÄ«derÄvÄrunt. Fuit enim vir tantae lÄ«berÄlitÄtis ut, cum multÅs hortÅs habÄret, numquam in hÄ«s custÅdiÄs pÅneret; nam hortÅs lÄ«berrimÄ patÄre voluit nÄ populus ab hÄ«s frÅ«ctibus prohibÄrÄtur. Saepe autem, cum aliquem minus bene vestÄ«tum vidÄret, eÄ« suum amiculum dedit. MultÅs locuplÄtÄvit; multÅs pauperÄs vÄ«vÅs iÅ«vit atque mortuÅs suÅ sÅ«mptÅ« extulit. SÄ«c minimÄ mÄ«rum est sÄ«, propter mÅrÄs CimÅnis, vÄ«ta eius fuit sÄcÅ«ra et mors eius fuit omnibus tam acerba quam mors cuiusdam ex familiÄ.

Â 

Nepos Cim. (adapted excerpts): Cornelius Nepos, as you may recall from the notes to âCatullus Dedicates His Poetry Bookâ in Capvt II above, was author of hundreds of brief biographies of famous Greeks and Romans. Two dozen or so of Neposâ biographies survive, including his life of the 5th-cent. Athenian statesman Cimon, whose career, while distinguished, did have its low points, including a 10-year ostracism (exile) from Athens.âper + venÄ«re: another compound verb whose meaning you can easily deduce; âparvenu.â âÄloquentia, -ae, f., = Eng.; âeloquent.â âlÄ«berÄlitÄs, -tÄtis, f., = Eng.; âliberal,â âliberalism.â âmÄ«litÄris, -e, = Eng.; âmilitarism,â âdemilitarize.â âÄ puerÅ: from his boyhood. âpotestÄs, -tÄtis, f., power; âpotentâ; cf. possum. âauctÅritÄs, -tÄtis, f., authority; âauthoritativeâ; cf. auctor; here ABL. OF RESPECT or SPECIFICATION, in (respect to his)â¦.âAthÄniÄnsis, -is, m./f., an Athenian. âhortus, -Ä«, m., garden; âhorticul ture,â âcohort.ââvestÄ«tus, -a, -um, clothed; âvest,â âvestment,â âdivest.ââamiculum, -Ä«, n., cloak. âlocuplÄtÄre, to enrich; âcomplete,â âreplete.ââsÅ«mptus, -Å«s, m., expense; âsumptuous,â âconsumption.ââextulit: from ex + ferÅ (efferÅ), here = bury, but what is the lit. meaning? âefferent,â âelation.ââmÄ«rus, -a, -um, surprising; âmiracle,â âadmiration.ââsÄcÅ«rus, -a, -um: from sÄ-, without, + cÅ«ra; âsecure,â âsecurity.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Nepos, never regarded as a critical historian (one modern scholar has ungently termed him âan intellectual pygmyâ), tended to eulogize his subjects and re-shape the facts when useful to his moralizing purposes; what are the principal virtues Nepos here attributes to Cimon, and in what two different arenas of Athenian life?

A Vacationâ¦from You!

Quid mihi reddat ager quaeris, Line, NÅmentÄnus?

Hoc mihi reddit ager: tÄ, Line, nÅn videÅ!

*Martial Epig. 2.38: Does Linus really wonder why Martial takes so many country vacations?! Meter: elegiac couplet.âreddÅ, -ere, to give back, return (in profit); ârender,â ârent.ââager: here, farm, i.e., Martialâs rustic retreat.âNÅmentÄnus, -a, -um, in Nomentum, a town of Latium known for its wine industry.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What is most striking stylistically in this epigram, and what is the comic effect?âthough not so funny to poor Linus!

Pleaseâ¦Donât!

NÄ«l recitÄs et vÄ«s, MÄmerce, poÄta vidÄrÄ«.

Quidquid vÄ«s estÅ, dummodo nÄ«l recitÄs!

*Martial Epig. 2.88: Mamercus was a wannabe poetâthere were plenty of those in Rome (cf. âJuvenal Explains,â Capvt XVI)! Meter: elegiac couplet.ânÄ«l: = nihil. âestÅ: fut. imperat. of esse, which often had the stern tone of a religious or legal dictum, âThou shalt beâ¦!â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Compare this poem with Epig. 1.38 in Capvt XVII; how were Fidentinus and Mamercus at once alike, and unalike? Which, in Martialâs view, was the greater pest? What do the two epigrams tell you about the importance of recitÄtiÅ in Roman literary culture?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

M. SalÄriÅ fÄlÄ«citer!

CIL 4.6811: Scribbled on the wall of a house in Reg. V by some well-wisher of Salarius. A Manius Salarius Crocus is known from two graffiti in a nearby house, and this Salarius may be the same: the Romans usually abbreviated the praenomen MÄrcus with an M and MÄnius with Mâ, but the distinction was not always observed in graffiti.âfÄlÄ«citer: an example of the sort of 3rd-decl. adj.-based adverbs newly introduced in this chapter; sc. sit or something such, in the sense of âmay things go well forâ¦!â

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! The modern Olympic games have as their motto three comparative adverbs, citius, altius (from altus, -a, -um, high), fortius. The new irregular verbs in this chapter, especially volÅ and nÅlÅ are extremely common in Latin and youâll find them, willy-nilly, all through English. You know very well, for example, the legal plea of nÅlÅ, short for nÅlÅ contendere, I am unwilling to contest (the accusation); thereâs also nol. pros. = nÅlle prÅsequÄ«, to be unwilling to pursue (the matter), meaning to drop a lawsuit; nÅlÄns, volÄns, unwilling (or) willing, i.e., whether or not one wishes, like âwilly-nillyâ (a contraction of âwill ye, nill yeâ); the abbreviation âd.v.,â for deÅ volente; also volÅ, nÅn valeÅ, I am willing but not able; nÅlÄ« mÄ tangere, a warning against tampering as well as Latin for the jewel-weed flower or âtouch-me-notâ; quantum vÄ«s, as much as you wish (which may be more than just quantum satis, Capvt XXX!); Deus vult, the call to arms of the First Crusade; and mÄlÅ morÄ« quam foedÄrÄ«, freely âdeath before dishonorâ (lit., I prefer to die than to be dishonored: for the deponent verb morior, see Capvt XXXIV). Years ago some pundit wrote (demonstrating the importance of macrons), mÄlÅ malÅ malÅ mÄlÅ, Iâd rather be in an apple tree than a bad man in adversity; the first mÄlÅ is from mÄlum, -Ä«, apple, fruit-tree, which calls to mind Horaceâs characterization of a Roman cÄna, from the hors dâoeuvres to the dessert, as ab ovÅ (ovum, -Ä«, egg) usque ad mÄla, a phrase, very like the expression âfrom soup to nuts,â that became proverbial for âfrom start to finish.â Et cÄtera ex vocÄbulÄ«s novÄ«s: cÄterÄ«s pÄribus, all else being equal; custÅdia is related to custÅs, custÅdis, guard, and custÅdÄ«re, to guard, hence Juvenalâs satiric query, sed quis custÅdiet ipsÅs custÅdÄs; exercitus is connected with exerceÅ, exercÄre, to practice, exercise, and the noun exercitÄtiÅ, which gives us the proverb, most salutary for Latin students: exercitÄtiÅ est optimus magister. And so, valÄte, discipulÄ«/ae, et exercÄte, exercÄte, exercÄte!

CAPVT XXXIII

Conditions

GRAMMATICA

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

CONDITIONS are among the most common sentence types, others being DECLARATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, and EXCLAMATORY. You have encountered numerous conditional sentences in your Latin readings already, and are likely aware that they consist of two clauses: (1) the condition or PROTASIS (Greek for âpropositionâ or âpremiseâ), a subordinate clause usually introduced by sÄ«, if, or nisi, if not or unless, and stating a hypothetical action or circumstance, and (2) the conclusion or APODOSIS (Greek for âoutcomeâ or âresultâ), the main clause, which expresses the anticipated outcome if the premise turns out to be true.

There are six basic conditional types; three have their verbs in the indicative, three in the subjunctive, and the reason is simple. While all conditional sentences, by their very nature, describe actions in the past, present, or future that are to one extent or another hypothetical, the indicative was employed in those where the condition was more likely to be realized, the subjunctive in those where the premise was either less likely to be realized or where both the condition and the conclusion were absolutely contrary to the actual facts of a situation. Study the following summary, learning the names of each of the six conditional types, how to recognize them, and the standard formulae for translation:

Indicative Conditions

SIMPLE FACT PRESENT: SÄ« id facit, prÅ«dÄns est. If he is doing this [and it is quite possible that he is], he is wise. Present indicative in both clauses; translate verbs as present indicatives.

SIMPLE FACT PAST: SÄ« id fÄcit, prÅ«dÄns fuit. If he did this [and quite possibly he did], he was wise. Past tense (perfect or imperfect) indicative in both clauses; translate verbs as past indicatives.

SIMPLE FACT FUTURE (sometimes called FUTURE MORE VIVID): SÄ« id faciet, prÅ«dÄns erit. If he does (will do) this [and quite possibly he will], he will be wise. Future indicative in both clauses; translate the verb in the protasis as a present tense (here English âifâ + the present has a future sense), the verb in the apodosis as a future. (Occasionally the future perfect is used, in either or both clauses, with virtually the same sense as the simple future: see S.A. 8 and âB.Y.O.B.â line 3, SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE.)

Subjunctive Conditions

The indicative conditions deal with potential facts; the subjunctive conditions are ideal rather than factual, describing circumstances that are either, in the case of the âfuture less vivid,â somewhat less likely to be realized or less vividly imagined or, in the case of the two âcontrary to factâ types, opposite to what actually is happening or has happened in the past.

CONTRARY TO FACT PRESENT: SÄ« id faceret, prÅ«dÄns esset. If he were doing this [but in fact he is not], he would be wise [but he is not]. Imperfect subjunctive in both clauses; translate with auxiliaries were (â¦ing) and would (be).

CONTRARY TO FACT PAST: SÄ« id fÄcisset, prÅ«dÄns fuisset. If he had done this [but he did not], he would have been wise [but he was not]. Pluperfect subjunctive in both clauses; translate with auxiliaries had and would have.

FUTURE LESS VIVID (sometimes called SHOULD-WOULD): SÄ« id faciat, prÅ«dÄns sit. If he should do this [and he may, or he may not], he would be wise. Present subjunctive in both clauses; translate with auxiliaries should and would.

There are occasional variants on these six basic types, e.g., use of the imperative in the apodosis, MIXED CONDITIONS with different tenses or moods in the protasis and apodosis, different introductory words (e.g., dum), etc., but those are easily dealt with in context. For practice, identify the type of each of the following conditions:

SÄ« hoc dÄ«cet, errÄbit. If he says this, he will be wrong.

SÄ« hoc dÄ«cit, errat. If he says this, he is wrong.

SÄ« hoc dÄ«xisset, errÄvisset. If he had said this, he would have been wrong.

SÄ« hoc dÄ«cat, erret. If he should say this, he would be wrong.

SÄ« hoc dÄ«xit, errÄvit. If he said this, he was wrong.

SÄ« hoc dÄ«ceret, errÄret. If he were saying this, he would be wrong.

SÄ« veniat, hoc videat. If he should come, he would see this.

SÄ« vÄnit, hoc vÄ«dit. If he came, he saw this.

SÄ« venÄ«ret, hoc vidÄret. If he were coming, he would see this.

SÄ« veniet, hoc vidÄbit. If he comes, he will see this.

SÄ« vÄnisset, hoc vÄ«disset. If he had come, he would have seen this.

VOCÄBVLA

Note that ops (like a few other nouns youâve learned, e.g., animus and fÄ«nis) has some different meanings in the plural; and be aware that quis, quid, as youâll see below, is often indefinite and not interrogative; finally, the eu diphthong in heu is one of the very few sounds in classical Latin (the sound represented by the letter y is another) that we do not have in English: as always, listen carefully to this chapterâs vocabulary either on the CDs or at www.wheelockslatin.com.

Â 

inÃtium, inÃtiÄ«, n., beginning, commencement (initial, initiate, initiation)

ops, Ã³pis, f., help, aid; Ã³pÄs, Ã³pum, pl., power, resources, wealth (opulent, opulence; cf. cÅpia, from con- + ops)

philÃ³sophus, philÃ³sophÄ«, m., and philÃ³sopha, philÃ³sophae, f., philosopher (philosophical; cf. philosophia)

plÄbs, plbis, f., the common people, populace, plebeians (plebs, plebe, plebeian, plebiscite)

sÄl, sÃ¡lis, m., salt; wit (salad, salami, salary, saline, salinometer, sauce, sausage)

spÃ©culum, spÃ©culÄ«, n., mirror (speculate, speculation; cf. spectÄre, to watch, look at)

quis, quid, after sÄ«, nisi, nÄ, num, indef. pron., anyone, anything, someone, something (cf. quis? quid? quisque, quisquis)

cÃ¡ndidus, cÃ¡ndida, cÃ¡ndidum, shining, bright, white; beautiful (candid, candidate, candor, incandescent, candle, chandelier)

mÃ©rus, mÃ©ra, mÃ©rum, pure, undiluted (mere, merely)

suvis, suve, sweet (suave, suaveness, suasion, dissuade, persuade)

-ve, conj. suffixed to a word = aut before the word (cf. -que), or

heu, interj., ah!, alas! (a sound of grief or pain; cf. âwoeâ)

sÃºbitÅ, adv., suddenly (sudden, suddenness)

recsÅ, recÅ«sre, recÅ«svÄ«, recÅ«stum, to refuse (recuse, recusant, recusative; cf. causa)

trdÅ, trdere, trdidÄ«, trditum (trÄns + dÅ), to give over, surrender; hand down, transmit, teach (tradition, traitor, treason)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

Read each sentence and passage aloud, and read for comprehension, before attempting a translation. As you read, identify the specific type of each conditional sentence and translate according to the rules introduced above.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Dummodo exercitus opem mox ferat, moenia urbis celeriter cÅnservÄre poterimus.

Cum cÅnsilia hostium ab initiÅ cognÅvissÄs, prÄ«mÅ tamen Å«llum auxilium offerre aut etiam centum mÄ«litÄs prÅmittere nÅluistÄ«.

SÄ« dÄ«vitiae et invidia nÅs ab amÅre et honÅre usque prohibent, dÄ«vitÄsne vÄrÄ sumus?

Pauper quidem nÅn erit pÄr cÄterÄ«s nisi scientiam ingeniumve habÄbit; sÄ« autem haec habeat, multÄ« magnopere invideant.

Nisi Ä«nsidiae patÄrent, ferrum eius maximÄ timÄrÄmus.

SÄ« quis rogÄbit quid nunc discÄs, nÅlÄ« dubitÄre: refer tÄ artem nÅn mediocrem sed Å«tilissimam ac difficillimam discere.

LÄgÄs ita scrÄ«bantur ut dÄ«vitÄs et plÄbsâetiam pauper sine asseâsint parÄs.

SÄ« custÅdiae dÅ«riÅrÄs fortiÅrÄsque ad casam tuam contendissent, heu, numquam tanta scelera suscÄpissÄs et hÄ« omnÄs nÅn occidissent.

Illa philosopha sapientissima, cum id semel cognÅvisset, ad eÅs celerrimÄ sÄ contulit et omnÄs opÄs suÄs praebuit.

DÅ«rum exsilium tam Äcrem mentem Å«nÅ annÅ mollÄ«re nÅn poterit.

Propter omnÄs rÅ«mÅrÄs pessimÅs (quÄ« nÅn erant vÄrÄ«), nÄtae suÄvÄs eius magnopere dolÄbant et dormÄ«re nÅn poterant.

If those philosophers should come soon, you would be happier.

If you had not answered very wisely, they would have hesitated to offer us peace.

If anyone does these three things well, he will live better.

If you were willing to read better books, you would most certainly learn more.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

SÄ« vÄ«s pÄcem, parÄ bellum. (Flavius Vegetius.âparÄ: prepare for.)

Arma sunt parvÄ« pretiÄ«, nisi vÄrÅ cÅnsilium est in patriÄ. (Cicero.âpretium, -Ä«, n., value; âprecious,â âprice,â âappraise.â)

SalÅ«s omnium Å«nÄ nocte certÄ Ämissa esset, nisi illa sevÄritÄs contrÄ istÅs suscepta esset. (Cicero.âsevÄritÄs, -tÄtis, f., = Eng.; âsevere,â âpersevere.â)

SÄ« quid dÄ mÄ posse agÄ« putÄbis, id agÄsâsÄ« tÅ« ipse ab istÅ perÄ«culÅ eris lÄ«ber. (Cicero.)

SÄ« essem mihi cÅnscius Å«llÄ«us culpae, aequÅ animÅ hoc malum ferrem. (Phaedrus.âcÅnscius, -a, -um, conscious; âconscience,â âunconscious.â)

DÄ«cis tÄ vÄrÄ mÄlle fortÅ«nam et mÅrÄs antÄ«quae plÄbis; sed sÄ« quis ad illa subitÅ tÄ agat, illum modum vÄ«tae recÅ«sÄs. (Horace.)

Minus saepe errÄs, sÄ« sciÄs quid nesciÄs. (Publilius Syrus.)

DÄ«cÄs âheuâ sÄ« tÄ in speculÅ vÄ«deris. (Horace.)

NÄ«l habet Ä«nfÄlÄ«x paupertÄs dÅ«rius in sÄ quam quod rÄ«diculÅs hominÄs facit. (*Juvenal.ânÄ«l: = nihil.âÄ«nfÄlÄ«x: = Ä«n-, not, + fÄlÄ«x.âquod, the fact that.)

MagnÅ mÄ metÅ« lÄ«berÄbis, dummodo inter mÄ atque tÄ mÅ«rus intersit. (*Cicero.âmÅ«rus, -Ä«, m., wall, city-wall; âmural.ââintersum, -esse, -fuÄ«, to be between, lie between; âinterest.â)

SÄ« occÄ«dÄ«, rÄctÄ fÄcÄ«; sed nÅn occÄ«dÄ«. (*Quintilian.âoccÄ«dÅ, -ere, -cÄ«dÄ«, -cÄ«sum, to kill; âhomicide.âârÄctÄ, adv., rightly, justly; ârectitude.â)

B.Y.O.B., etc., etc.

CÄnÄbis bene, mÄ« Fabulle, apud mÄ

paucÄ«s (sÄ« tibi dÄ« favent) diÄbusâ

sÄ« tÄcum attuleris bonam atque magnam

cÄnam, nÅn sine candidÄ puellÄ

5 Â  Â  et vÄ«nÅ et sale et omnibus cachinnÄ«s;

haec sÄ«, inquam, attuleris, venuste noster,

cÄnÄbis bene; nam tuÄ« CatullÄ«

plÄnus sacculus est arÄneÄrum.

Sed contrÄ accipiÄs merÅs amÅrÄs,

10 Â  seu quid suÄvius Älegantiusve est:

nam unguentum dabo, quod meae puellae

dÅnÄrunt VenerÄs CupÄ«dinÄsque;

quod tÅ« cum olfaciÄs, deÅs rogÄbis

tÅtum ut tÄ faciant, Fabulle, nÄsum.

*Catullus Carm. 13: The perfect reading selection for a chapter on conditions; this dinner invitation, one of Catullusâ most popular poems, was highly conditional, but if Fabullus accepts, heâs in for an unusual treat! Meter: hendecasyllabic.âfavÄre: + dat., to be favorable toward, favor; âfavorite.ââcachinna, -ae, f., laugh, laughter; âcachinnateâ; probably in origin ONOMATOPOETIC, like Eng. âcackle.ââvenustus, -a, -um, from venus/Venus, attractive (in appearance or manner), charming; âvenereal.ââsacculus, -Ä«, m., money-bag, wallet; âsack,â âsatchel.ââarÄnea, -ae, f., spiderweb; âaraneid,â cognate with âarachnid.ââcontrÄ, here adv., on the other hand, in return; âcontrary.ââseu, conj., or. âÄlegÄns, gen. -gantis; âelegance,â âelegantly.â âunguentum, -Ä«, n., salve, perfume; âunguent,â âointment.ââdabo: -Å was often shortened in verse.âdÅnÄrunt: = dÅnÄvÄrunt (such contractions, dropping v and the following vowel, were common in perf. system forms), from dÅnÄre, to give; âdonation,â âdonor.ââVenus, -neris, f., and CupÄ«dÅ, -dinis, m.; Venus and Cupid, pl. here to represent all the fostering powers of Love; âvenerate,â âcupidity;â cf. cupiÅ; cupiditÄs. âquodâ¦ olfaciÄs: = cum tÅ« id olfaciÄs.âolfaciÅ, -ere, to smell; âolfactory,â âolfactant.ââdeÅs rogÄbisâ¦ utâ¦ faciant: JUSSIVE NOUN CLAUSE, a construction formally introduced in Capvt XXXVI, but easily translated here.ânÄsus, -Ä«, m., nose; ânasalâ and ânasalizeâ are derivatives, ânostrilâ and ânozzleâ are cognate; obj. complement with tÄ; the wide separation of adj. and noun suggests the cartoon-like enormity of the imagined schnoz!

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: The poem neatly falls into two parts, the first describing what Fabullus will not receive at this cÄna, and what therefore he must bring, and why; the second describing what he will receive, and why. Comment on Catullusâ use of cÄnÄbis/cÄna and nam as structural markers, and on how effectively the poet produces a surprise ending at the close of each of the poemâs halves. What other thematic connections do you see between the two sections?

The Rich Get Richer

Semper pauper eris, sÄ« pauper es, AemiliÄne:

dantur opÄs nÅ«llÄ« nunc nisi dÄ«vitibus.

*Martial Epig. 5.81: Aemilianus, like most of Martialâs addresses, is doubtless fictitious but represents a type. Meter: elegiac couplet.

Â 

QUAESTIÅ: Comment on the poetâs use of anaphora, word order, and ALLITERATION (repetition of consonant sounds) to help make his point.

Aristotle, Tutor of Alexander the Great

An Philippus, rÄx Macedonum, voluisset AlexandrÅ, fÄ«liÅ suÅ, prÄ«ma elementa litterÄrum trÄdÄ« ab Aristotele, summÅ eius aetÄtis philosophÅ, aut hic suscÄpisset illud maximum officium, nisi initia studiÅrum pertinÄre ad summam sapientissimÄ crÄdidisset?

Â 

Quintilian Inst. 1.1.23: Quintilian (Marcus Fabius Quintilianus, ca. A.D. 35â95) is best known for his 12-volume work on oratory and education, the ÄªnstitÅ«tiÅnÄs ÅrÄtÅriae; he has given us the well known phrase defining the teacherâs role of serving in locÅ parentis, and you read his dictum on Roman satire in the notes to âJuvenal Explainsâ in Capvt XVI. Philip hired Aristotle to tutor Alexander when the boy was 13; for another reflection on the intellectual interests of Alexander the Great, review the passage you read from Ciceroâs PrÅ ArchiÄ in Capvt XIII.âan, interrog. conj., or, can it be that. âMacedonÄs, -num, m./f. pl., Macedonians. âAristotelÄs, -lis, m. âpertinÄre ad: to relate to, affect; âpertain,â âpertinent.ââsumma, -ae, f., highest part, whole; âsum,â âsummary.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Explain in your own words the view Quintilian expresses here regarding teachers and the education of the young. Did Philip and Aristotle agree? Do you?

Aristotle Roman copy of a Greek original Galleria Spada, Rome, Italy
Alinari / Art Resource, NY

Your Loss, My Gain!

Cum QuÄ«ntus Fabius Maximus magnÅ cÅnsiliÅ Tarentum fortissimÄ recÄpisset et SalÄ«nÄtor (quÄ« in arce fuerat, urbe ÄmissÄ) dÄ«xisset, âMeÄ operÄ, QuÄ«nte FabÄ«, Tarentum recÄpistÄ«,â Fabius, mÄ audiente, âCertÄ,â inquit rÄ«dÄns, ânam nisi tÅ« urbem ÄmÄ«sissÄs, numquam eam recÄpissem.â

Â 

Cicero Sen. 4.11: Another example of Roman wit, from Ciceroâs treatise On Old Age (take a few minutes now to review the other selections you have read from that same work, in Capita XV, XVII, and XIX). During the second Punic War, the inhabitants of Tarentum, in southeastern Italy (Map 1), revolted from the Romans to Hannibal, though the Romans under Marcus Livius Salinator managed to hold the citadel. In 209 B.C. the city was recaptured by Quintus Fabius Maximus (Fabius âthe Delayer,â about whose accomplishments you read in Capvt XV).âopera, -ae, f., work, help, effort; meÄ operÄ is rather like our idiom, âthanks to me.ââmÄ audiente: like our idiom âin my presence,â but what is the lit. meaning? Like Ciceroâs other philosophical treatises, the DÄ SenectÅ«te was written in the form of a dialogue; the âmeâ speaking here was Cato the Elder, a contemporary of Fabius.

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Explain Salinatorâs hubris, and Fabiusâ wit.

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

MÅ«nus NÅlae dÄ quÄdrÄ«du[Å] M(ÄrcÄ«) CÅminiÄ« HÄrÄdi[s]:

PrÄ«<n>ceps Ner(ÅniÄnus), XII, c(orÅnae) X[?]; v(Ä«cit).

HilÄrus Ner(ÅniÄnus), XIV, c(orÅnae) XII; v(Ä«cit).

Creunus, VII, c(orÅnae) V; m(issus est).

CIL 4.10237: One of several illustrated gladiatorial graffiti from a tomb in the necropolis outside Pompeiiâs Porta di Nocera; the games whose results are recorded here were sponsored by Marcus Cominius Heres (HÄrÄs, -rÄdis), apparently a local magistrate. The three named gladiators, Princeps (whose name is misspelled) and the two depicted in the drawing, Hilarus and Creunus, all of them slaves, had impressive winning records: the first Roman numeral after each gladiatorâs name stands for the number of pugnae, fights, in which he had competed, the second for the number of corÅnae (here, as often, abbreviated as a reverse C), crowns or victory garlands, which he had won; someone, perhaps the fan of a rival, marked out the number of Hilarusâ victories with two lines; the meaning of the letters (TAAV?) written beneath Creunusâ name is unclear. Pictured to the right are musicians (gladiatorial games had bands just like football games today!); the figures to the far left are probably spectators.âmÅ«nus, -neris, n., service, function, duty; public show, game; offering, gift; âmunificence,â âmunificent.ââNÅlae: LOCATIVE case (see Capvt XXXVII) of the place name NÅla, = at Nola, a town northeast of Pompeii.âquÄdrÄ«duum, -Ä«, n., (a period of) four days; with dÄ, for aâ¦; gladiatorial games were often scheduled for several consecutive days.âNerÅniÄnus, -a, -m, of (the emperor) Nero, Neronian; the epithet indicates that these fighters were from the imperial gladiatorial camp at Capua.âmissus est: i.e., he was defeated but spared (âsent home to fight another dayâ).

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

Â 

SalvÄte! Here are some well known conditions: sÄ« nÄtÅ«ra negat, facit indignÄtiÅ versum, if nature denies (i.e., if my talent is lacking), indignation creates my verse (so said the satirist Juvenal, who had plenty of both!âsee âJuvenal Explains,â Capvt XVI); sÄ« fÄcistÄ«, negÄ! (a lawyerâs advice); sÄ« Deus nÅbÄ«scum, quis contrÄ nÅs (the verbs are left out, but the meaning is clear); sÄ« post fÄta venit glÅria, nÅn properÅ, if glory comes (only) after death, Iâm in no hurry! (Martial); sÄ« sÄ«c omnÄs, freely, a wistful âif only everything were like thisâ (or does it really mean âall on the boat became illâ?!!). Ex vocÄbulÄ«s novÄ«s quoque: well, to start âfrom the beginning,â the phrase ab initiÅ is quite common in English; those running for political office in Rome wore the toga candida, white toga, hence English âcandidate.â The Romans called undiluted wine merum (which the bibulous merely imbibed!); ope et cÅnsiliÅ is a good way to manage life. The expression âwith a grain of saltâ comes from Latin cum grÄnÅ salis; âsalaryâ is also from sÄl, a package of which was part of a Roman soldierâs pay (we âbring home the salty bacon,â Romans brought home the salt!); and sÄl Atticum is dry Athenian wit. Art is a speculum vÄ«tae. If you remember how to form adverbs from adjectives, then you can decipher the proverb suÄviter in modÅ, fortiter in rÄ, a good mode for the Latin teacher; and if you read music, you may have seen subitÅ, a musical annotation meaning quickly.

Hope you enjoy these closing miscellÄnea (from miscellÄneus, -a, -um, varied, mixed), and hereâs one reason why: sÄ« fÄ«nis bonus est, tÅtum bonum erit, an old proverb, a âmixed condition,â and familiar vocabulary, so Iâll give you the free version, âAllâs well that ends well (including this chapter)!â: et vÅs omnÄs, quoque valeÄtis!

Necropolis outside the Porta di Nocera, Pompeii, Italy
Robert I. Curtis

CAPVT XXXIV

Deponent Verbs; Ablative with Special Deponents

GRAMMATICA

DEPONENT VERBS

Latin has a number of common DEPONENT VERBS, verbs that have passive endings but active meanings. There are few new forms to be learned (only the imperatives); the most crucial matter is simply to recall which verbs are deponent, so that you remember to translate them in the active voice, and that can be managed through careful vocabulary study. There are a few exceptions to the rule of passive forms/active meanings, and those will also need to be carefully noted.

Principal Parts and Conjugation

As you will see from the following examples, deponents have only three principal parts, the passive equivalents of the first three principal parts of regular verbs (1. first pers. sg. pres. indic., 2. pres. infin., 3. first pers. sg. perf. indic.).

Â 

Present Indic.

Present Infin.

Perfect Indic.

hÃ³rtor, I urge

hortrÄ«, to urge

horttus (-a, -um) sum, I urged

fÃ¡teor, I confess

fatrÄ«, to confess

fÃ¡ssus (-a, -um) sum, I confessed

sÃ©quor, I follow

sÃ©quÄ«, to follow

sectus (-a, -um) sum, I followed

mlior, I work at

mÅlrÄ«, to work at

mÅltus (-a, -um) sum, I worked at

pÃ¡tior, I suffer

pÃ¡tÄ«, to suffer

pÃ¡ssus (-a, -um) sum, I suffered

Â 

Deponents are conjugated according to the same rules as regular verbs in the passive voice; the following representative forms are provided for review, and full conjugations for each of the five examples given above are included in the App. (CONJUGATIONS 1â4).

Â 

Indicative

Â 

Present

Â 

1. hÃ³rtor, I urge

sÃ©quor, I follow

2. hortris (-re), you urge

sÃ©queris (-re), you follow

3. horttur, he urges

sÃ©quitur, he follows

Â 

1. hortmur, we urge

sÃ©quimur, we follow

2. hortminÄ«, you urge

sequÃminÄ«, you follow

3. hortÃ¡ntur, they urge

sequÃºntur, they follow

Â 

Imperfect

Â 

1. hortbar, I was urging

sequbar, I was following

2. hortÄbris (-re), you were urging, etc.

sequÄbris (-re), you were following, etc.

Â 

Future

Â 

1. hortbor, I shall urge

sÃ©quar, I shall follow

2. hortberis (-re), you will urge

sequris (-re), you will follow

3. hortbitur, he will urge, etc.

sequtur, he will follow, etc.

Â 

Perfect

Â 

horttus, -a, -um sum, I urged, etc.

sectus, -a, -um sum, I followed, etc.

Â 

Pluperfect

Â 

horttus, -a, -um Ã©ram, I had urged, etc.

sectus, -a, -um Ã©ram, I had followed, etc.

Â 

Future Perfect

Â 

horttus, -a, -um Ã©rÅ,
Â Â Â Â Â  I shall have urged, etc.

sectus, -a, -um Ã©rÅ,
Â Â Â Â Â  I shall have followed, etc.

Â 

Â 

Subjunctive

Â 

Present

Â 

hÃ³rter, hortris, horttur, etc.

sÃ©quar, sequris, sequtur, etc.

Â 

Imperfect

Â 

hortrer, hortÄrris, hortÄrtur, etc.

sÃ©querer, sequerris, sequertur, etc.

Â 

Perfect

Â 

horttus, -a, -um sim, sÄ«s, etc.

sectus, -a, -um sim, sÄ«s, etc.

Â 

Pluperfect

Â 

horttus, -a, -um Ã©ssem, etc.

sectus, -a, -um Ã©ssem, etc.

Synopsis

The following synopsis of fateor, fatÄrÄ«, fassus sum provides a useful overview of the conjugation of deponents; remember that all English equivalents are active, i.e., he confesses, he will confess, etc.

Indicative Mood

Subjunctive Mood

Participles, Infinitives, and Imperatives

The participles and infinitives of typical deponent verbs are here given in full not because of any new forms but because of certain discrepancies in the general rule of passive forms with active meanings:

Â 

Participles

Â 

Pres. hÃ³rtÄns, urging

sÃ©quÄns, following

Perf. horttus, -a, -um, having urged

sectus, -a, -um, having followed

Fut. hortÄtrus, -a, -um, about to urge

secÅ«trus, -a, -um, about to follow

Ger. hortÃ¡ndus, -a, -um, to be urged

sequÃ©ndus, -a, -um, to be followed

Â 

Infinitives

Â 

Pres. hortrÄ«, to urge

sÃ©quÄ«, to follow

Perf. horttus, -a, -um Ã©sse, to have urged

sectus, -a, -um Ã©sse, to have followed

Fut. hortÄtrus, -a, -um Ã©sse, to be about
Â Â Â Â  to urge

secÅ«trus, -a, -um Ã©sse, to be about to follow

Â 

Exceptions: Deponents have the same four participles as regular verbs, but only three infinitives, one for each tense. Three of the participles and one of the infinitives present exceptions to the rule that deponents are passive in form but active in meaning:

Present and future participles: active forms with active meanings.

Gerundive (future passive participle): passive form with passive meaning.

Future infinitive: active form with active meaning.

Imperatives

The present imperative of deponents would naturally have the forms of the present passive imperative. These forms have not been given before because they are found chiefly in deponent verbs, but they are easy to learn: the second person singular has the same spelling as that of the alternate second person singular passive of the present indicative, e.g., sequere, follow! Note that, coincidentally, this form is also identical to the (non-existent) present active infinitive: be careful not to mistake this deponent imperative for an infinitive. The plural imperative is spelled the same as the second person plural passive of the present indicative, e.g., sequiminÄ«, follow! Compare the following examples:

Semi-Deponent Verbs

Latin has a few SEMI-DEPONENT VERBS, which are normal in the present system but deponent in the perfect system, as seen in their principal parts:

Â 

aÃºdeÅ, I dare

audre, to dare

aÃºsus sum, I dared

gaÃºdeÅ, I rejoice

gaudre, to rejoice

gÄvsus sum, I rejoiced

Â 

Study the following sentences, containing both deponent and semi-deponent verbs:

Eum patientem haec mala hortÄtÄ« sunt.
They encouraged him (as he was) suffering these evils.

Eum passÅ«rum haec mala hortÄtÄ« sunt.
They encouraged him (as he was) about to suffer these evils.

Is, haec mala passus, hortandus est.
This man, having suffered these evils, ought to be encouraged.

Is haec mala fortiter patiÄtur.
He will suffer these evils bravely.

Eum sequere et haec mÅlÄ«re.
Follow him and work at these things.

Eum sequÄ« et haec mÅlÄ«rÄ« nÅn ausus es.
You did not dare to follow him and work at these things.

Eum sequeris/sequÄris.
You are following/will follow him.

Eum hortÄmur et sequÄmur.
Let us encourage and follow him.

ABLATIVE WITH SPECIAL DEPONENTS

The ablative is used as object of a few deponent verbs, of which Å«tor (and its compounds) is the most common (others, including fruor, to enjoy, fungor, to perform, potior, to possess, and vÄscor, to eat, are not employed in this book, but may be encountered in your later reading). Åªtor, to use, enjoy, may originally have meant I am benefitted/I benefit myself (by), so that this ABLATIVE WITH SPECIAL DEPONENTS may in origin have been an ablative of means:

Åªtitur stilÅ. He is using a pencil (lit., He is benefitted/benefits himself by means of a pencil).

CicerÅ GraecÄ«s litterÄ«s Å«tÄbÄtur. Cicero used to enjoy Greek literature.

NÅn audent Å«tÄ« nÄvibus. They do not dare to use the ships.

NÅn ausÄ« sunt Å«tÄ« nÄvibus. They did not dare to use the ships.

VOCÄBVLA

The basic sense of anima, introduced below, was life-breath, whereas animus, as you have already learned, refers fundamentally to mind, as opposed to body; but there came to be some overlap in meaning, and both words could mean soul. As you learn the principal parts of the deponent verbs introduced here, practice by doing a synopsis, with English translation, of two or three of them from different conjugations, each in a different person and number; and be careful not to confuse patior with pateÅ, learned earlier.

Â 

Ã¡nima, Ã¡nimae, f., air (breathed by an animal), breath; soul, spirit (anima, animism, animation, animated, inanimate; cf. animal, animus)

remÃssiÅ, remissinis, f., letting go, release; relaxation (remiss, remission; from re + mittÅ)

vÅx, vcis, f., voice, word (vocal, vocalic, vocalize, vociferous, vowel; vox angelica, vox humana, vox populi; cf. vocÅ)

advÃ©rsus, advÃ©rsa, advÃ©rsum, opposite, adverse (adversary, adversative, adversity; cf. vertÅ)

tlis, tle, such, of such a sort (cf. quÄlis, of what sort, what kind of)

vae, interj., often + dat. or acc., alas, woe to

Ã¡rbitror, arbitrrÄ«, arbitrtus sum, to judge, think (arbiter, arbitress, arbitration, arbitrator, arbitrary, arbitrarily)

cnor, cÅnrÄ«, cÅntus sum, to try, attempt (conation, conative)

crscÅ, crscere, crvÄ«, crtum, to increase (crescent, crescendo, concrete, decrease, excrescence, increment, accretion, accrue, crew, recruit)

ÄgrÃ©dior, gredÄ«, ÄgrÃ©ssus sum, to go out (aggression, congress, digress, egress, ingredient, ingress, progress, regress, retrogress, transgress)

fÃ¡teor, fatrÄ«, fÃ¡ssus sum, to confess, admit (confession, profess, profession, professor; cf. fÄbula, fÄma, fÄtum)

hÃ³rtor, hortrÄ«, horttus sum, to encourage, urge (hortatory, exhortation)

lÃ³quor, lÃ³quÄ«, loctus sum, to say, speak, tell (loquacious, circumlocution, colloquial, elocution, eloquent, obloquy, soliloquy, ventriloquist)

mlior, mÅlrÄ«, mÅltus sum, to work at, build, undertake, plan (demolish, demolition; cf. mÅlÄs, a large mass, massive structure)

mÃ³rior, mÃ³rÄ«, mÃ³rtuus sum, fut. act. partic. moritrus, to die (moribund, mortuary; cf. mors, mortÄlis, mortuus, immortÄlis)

nscor, nscÄ«, ntus sum, to be born; spring forth, arise (agnate, cognate, innate, nascent, natal, nation, nature, naive; cf. nÄta, nÄtÅ«ra)

pÃ¡tior, pÃ¡tÄ«, pÃ¡ssus sum, to suffer, endure; permit (passion, passive, compassion, compatible, impassioned, dispassionate; cf. patientia)

proficscor, proficscÄ«, profÃ©ctus sum, to set out, start (profit and proficient from the related prÅficiÅ, to make headway, gain results)

rsticor, rÅ«sticrÄ«, rÅ«stictus sum, to live in the country (rusticate, rustic, rural, cf. rÅ«sticus, rural)

sÃ©deÅ, sedre, sdÄ«, sÃ©ssum, to sit (sedan, sedate, sedentary, sediment, sessile, session, assess, assiduous, president, siege, subsidy)

sÃ©quor, sÃ©quÄ«, sectus sum, to follow (consequent, consecutive, obsequious, persecute, sequence, sequel, subsequent; cf. secundus)

spÃ©ctÅ, spectre, spectvÄ«, specttum, to look at, see (spectator, spectacle, speculate, aspect, circumspect, inspect; cf. speculum)

tor, tÄ«, sus sum + abl., to use; enjoy, experience (abuse, disuse, peruse, usual, usurp, usury, utensil, utilize, utility, utilitarian; cf. Å«tilis)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After studying the new grammar, memorizing the vocabulary, and testing your mastery with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, scan the following readings for all (a) deponent verbs, identifying the tense, number, person, and mood of each, and (b) ablatives with special deponents. Listen to the CDs, if you have them, and read aloud for comprehension before translating.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Nisi quis plÄbÄ« opem celeriter referet auxiliumve prÅmissum praebÄbit, mÄ«lia pauperum morientur.

Cum urbs plÄna custÅdiÄrum esset, nÅn ausÄ« estis suscipere scelera tam gravia quam voluerÄtis.

DÄ«c nunc cÅ«r velÄ«s tÄ ad istam dÄ«vitem et candidam cÅnferre. VÄrÄ ac lÄ«berÄ loquere; nÅlÄ« recÅ«sÄre!

DÄ«vitiÄ«s opibusque trÄditÄ«s, heu, illÄ« philosophÄ« eÄdem nocte subitÅ profectÄ« sunt in exsilium, unde numquam ÄgredÄ« potuÄrunt.

NÄ patiÄmur hanc antÄ«quissimam scientiam ÄmittÄ«.

Fateor mÄ vÄ«nÅ merÅ apud mÄ Å«sÅ«rum esse.

Ab initiÅ nÅn comprehendistÄ« quantus exercitus nÅs sequerÄtur et quot elephantÅs istÄ« mÄ«litÄs sÄcum dÅ«cerent.

PrÄ«mÅ respondit sÄ nÅlle sequÄ« ducem mediocris virtÅ«tis sapientiaeve, cum cÄ«vitÄs in lÄ«mine bellÄ« stÄret.

Ex urbe subitÅ Ägressus, ferrÅ suÅ morÄ« semel cÅnÄtus est.

Cum AristotelÄs hortÄrÄtur hominÄs ad virtÅ«tem, tamen arbitrÄbÄtur virtÅ«tem in hominibus nÅn nÄscÄ«.

MÄter paterque nunc rÅ«sticÄrÄ« plÅ«rimum mÄlunt, ut Ä labÅribus remissiÅne suÄvÄ« fÄlÄ«cius Å«tantur.

DÄ mihi, amÄbÅ tÄ, multum salis et vÄ«num aquamve, ut cÄnÄ maximÄ Å«tar.

They did not permit me to speak with him at that time.

We kept thinking (arbitror) that, on account of the plebeiansâ poverty, he would use the office more wisely.

If any one should use this water even once, he would die.

If those four soldiers had followed us, we would not have dared to put the weapons on the ships.

This dinner will be good, provided that you use salt.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

CÄdÄmus PhoebÅ et, monitÄ«, meliÅra sequÄmur. (*Vergil.âPhoebus Apollo was god of prophecy.)

Nam nÄmÅ sine vitiÄ«s nÄscitur; optimus ille est quÄ« minima habet. (Horace.)

Mundus est commÅ«nis urbs deÅrum atque hominum; hÄ« enim sÅlÄ«, ratiÅne Å«tentÄs, iÅ«re ac lÄge vÄ«vunt. (Cicero.)

TardÄ sed graviter vir sapiÄns Ä«rÄscitur. (*Publilius Syrus.âtardÄ, adv., slowly; âtardy,â âretard.ââÄ«rÄscor, Ä«rÄscÄ«, Ä«rÄtus sum, to become angry; âirascible,â âirate.â)

Quae cum ita sint, CatilÄ«na, Ägredere ex urbe; patent portae; proficÄ«scere; nÅbÄ«scum versÄrÄ« iam diÅ«tius nÅn potes; id nÅn feram, nÅn patiar. (Cicero.âQuae cum: = Cum haec.âversor, -sÄrÄ«, -sÄtus sum, lit. to be turned, turn [oneself ] around; idiom = to spend oneâs time [in a place], remain; âversatile,â âconverse.â)

CÅ«ra pecÅ«niam crÄscentem sequitur et dÄ«ves male dormit. (Horace.)

SÄ« in Britanniam profectus essÄs, nÄmÅ in illÄ tantÄ Ä«nsulÄ iÅ«re perÄ«tior fuisset. (Cicero.âBritannia, -ae, f., Britain.âperÄ«tus, -a, -um + abl., skilled in; âexpert,â âexperience.â)

Nisi laus nova nÄscitur etiam vetus laus in incertÅ iacet ac saepe Ämittitur. (Publilius Syrus.)âvetus, gen. veteris, old; âveteran,â âinveterate.â)

SpÄrÅ autem mÄ secÅ«tum esse in libellÄ«s meÄ«s tÄlem temperantiam ut nÄmÅ bonus dÄ illÄ«s querÄ« possit. (Martial.âtemperantia, -ae, f.; âtemperate,â âintemperance.ââqueror, querÄ«, questus sum, to complain; âquerulous,â âquarrel.â)

HÅrae quidem et diÄs et annÄ« discÄdunt; nec praeteritum tempus umquam revertitur, nec quid sequÄtur potest scÄ«rÄ«. (Cicero.âpraeteritus, -a, -um, past; âpreterit,â âpraeteritio.âârevertor, -vertÄ«, -versus sum, to return; âreverse,â ârevert.â)

NÅvistÄ« mÅrÄs mulierum: dum mÅliuntur, dum cÅnantur, dum in speculum spectant, annus lÄbitur. (Terence.âmulier, -eris, f., woman; âmuliebrity.ââlÄbor, lÄbÄ«, lÄpsus sum, to slip, glide; âlapse,â âcollapse.â)

AmÄ«citia rÄs plÅ«rimÄs continet; nÅn aquÄ, nÅn igne in plÅ«ribus locÄ«s Å«timur quam amÄ«citiÄ. (Cicero.)

HomÅ stultus! Postquam dÄ«vitiÄs habÄre coepit, mortuus est! (Cicero.âpostquam, conj., after; âpostscript.â)

Å passÄ« graviÅra, dabit deus hÄ«s quoque fÄ«nem. (*Vergil.âÅ passÄ«, voc. pl., O you who haveâ¦.âhÄ«s: = hÄ«s rÄbus gravibus.)

Claudiusâ Excremental Expiration

Et ille quidem animam Äbulliit, et ex eÅ dÄsiit vÄ«vere vidÄrÄ«. ExspÄ«rÄvit autem dum comoedÅs audit, ut sciÄs mÄ nÅn sine causÄ illÅs timÄre. Ultima vÅx eius haec inter hominÄs audÄ«ta est, cum maiÅrem sonitum Ämisisset illÄ parte quÄ facilius loquÄbÄtur: âVae mÄ, putÅ, concacÄvÄ«!â Quod an fÄcerit, nesciÅâomnia certÄ concacÄvit!

Â 

*Seneca Apoc. 4: The 1st-cent. A.D. philosopher Seneca the Younger, whose views on frugality you read in Capvt IX (âWhen I Haveâ¦Enough!â), is also credited with authoring a satirical and occasionally cruel farce on the emperor Claudiusâ death and deification; the workâs Greek title, ApocolocyntÅsis, seems to have meant âPumpkinificationâ or âDeification of a Pumpkin-Head.ââÄbulliÅ, -Ä«re, ÄbulliÄ«, to bubble out, + animam, comic for âhe diedâ; âebullient.ââex eÅ: sc. tempore.âdÄsinÅ, -sinere, -siÄ«, -situm, to cease. âexspÄ«rÄre, to breathe out, die; âexpiration,â âexpire.ââcomoedus, -Ä«, m., comic actor, comedian. âaudit: use of the pres. instead of the expected perf. was a colloquialism.âvÅx: i.e., utterance. âsonitus, -Å«s, m., sound; âsonic,â âresonate.ââÄ/ex + mittere: = Eng.; âemission,â âemissary.â âillÄ parte: sc. corporis, i.e., his bottom; the suggestion that Claudius spoke from his anus with greater ease than from his mouth was an indelicate slur on the emperorâs affliction with stuttering.âconcacÄre, to defecate upon. âquod: = id.âan, whether, introducing an ind. question.

The emperor Claudius Head from a life-size bronze statue Saxmundham, Suffolk, England 1st cent. A.D. British Museum, London, Great Britain
Â© The Trustees of the British Museum / Art Resource, NY

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What is the satiric implication of the remark dÄsiit vÄ«vere vidÄrÄ«? At the outset of the satire, the narrator assumes the persona of a historian trying to report the facts of an actual event according to the limited sources available to him; where in this excerpt does that persona humorously appear?

And Vice Is Not Nice!

MentÄ«tur quÄ« tÄ vitiÅsum, ZÅile, dÄ«cit:

nÅn vitiÅsus homÅ es, ZÅile, sed vitium!

*Martial Epig. 11.92: meter: elegiac couplet.âmentior, -tÄ«rÄ«, -tÄ«tus sum, to lie, deceive. âvitiÅsus: adj. from vitium; âviciousnessâ; for the suffix -Åsus, -a, -um, = Eng. â-ousâ or â-ose,â see S.S., SUFFIXES; âtÄ vitiÅsum: sc. esse; remember that the verb sum, esse is often omitted when readily understood from the context, a type of omission known as ELLIPSIS.âZÅilus: a Greek name.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What do we initially think the narratorâs attitude toward Zoilus is? Comment specifically on the epigramâs word-play and how anaphora and word order accentuate the surprise ending.

Pretty Is as Pretty Does

Bella es, nÅvimus, et puella, vÄrum est,

et dÄ«vesâquis enim potest negÄre?

Sed cum tÄ nimium, Fabulla, laudÄs,

nec dÄ«ves neque bella nec puella es!

*Martial Epig. 1.64: Fabulla boasteth too much! Meter: hendecasyllabic.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Fabulla either is bella, a puella, and dÄ«ves, orâ¦ she isnât! Comment on the poetâs use of word order, alliteration, and POLYSYNDETON (use of more conjunctions than usual or necessary) to make his point; and what are the multiple ramifications of telling this lady she is nec puella?

On Lesbiaâs Husband

Ille mÄ« pÄr esse deÅ vidÄtur,

ille, sÄ« fÄs est, superÄre dÄ«vÅs,

quÄ«, sedÄns adversus, identidem tÄ

spectat et audit

5 Â Â Â  dulce rÄ«dentem, miserÅ quod omnÄ«s

Äripit sÄnsÅ«s mihi: nam simul tÄ,

Lesbia, aspexÄ«, nihil est super mÄ«,

[Lesbia, vÅcis,]

lingua sed torpet, tenuis sub artÅ«s

10 Â Â flamma dÄmÄnat, sonitÅ« suÅpte

tintinant aurÄs, geminÄ teguntur

lÅ«mina nocte.

Åtium, Catulle, tibi molestum est;

ÅtiÅ exsultÄs nimiumque gestÄ«s;

15 Â Â Åtium et rÄgÄs prius et beÄtÄs

perdidit urbÄs.

*Catullus Carm. 51: One of the most admired of Catullusâ poems, Carmen 51 is generally regarded as dramatically at least, if not in its actual order of composition, first of the Lesbia cycle; in part an imitation of an erotic poem by the 7th cent. B.C. Greek poetess Sappho of Lesbos (whose home and literary milieu inspired the pseudonym Catullus gave his mistress), the poet recalls an occasion when, gazing upon Lesbia and a man sitting opposite her (likely her husband), he becomes emotionally and even physiologically overwhelmed by her beauty and the sweet sound of her laughter. Meter: Sapphic stanza.âmÄ«: = mihi. âfÄs est: it is right; read the two opening verses aloud and listen to the rhyming of the first four words in each.âdÄ«vÅs: = deÅs.âidentidem, adv., again and again; âidentical.ââdulce: adv. of dulcis.âmiserÅâ¦ mihi: DATIVE OF SEPARATION, essentially the same as the abl. usage; the prose order would be quod omnÄ«s (= omnÄs) sÄnsÅ«s mihi miserÅ Äripit.âquod: a circumstance which; the entire preceding clause is the antecedent.âsimul, adv., as soon as; âsimultaneous,â âensemble.ââaspexÄ«: = spectÄvÄ«; âaspect.â ânihil: with vÅcis, gen. of the whole, noâ¦. âest super: = superest, remains. âLesbia, vÅcis: an editorial suggestion for a verse missing in the manuscripts.âtorpÄre, to grow numb; âtorpedo,â âtorpid.ââtenuis: with flamma, from tenuis, -e, thin, slender; âtenuous,â âextenuate.ââartus, -Å«s, m., joint, limb (of the body); âarticle,â âarticulation.ââflamma, -ae, f., flame; âflammable,â âinflammation.ââdÄmÄnÄre, to flow through. âsuÅpte: intensive for suÅ.âtintinÄre, to ring; âtintinnabulation.ââtegÅ, -ere, to cover; âprotect,â âdetect.ââlÅ«men, -minis, m., light; eye; âluminary,â âluminous.ââmolestus, -a, -um, troublesome; âmolest.ââexsultÄre, to celebrate, exult (in), + ÅtiÅ; âexultant,â âexultation.â âgestÄ«re, to act without restraint, be elated or triumphant. âperdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, to destroy; âperdition.â

Â 

QUAESTIÅNÄS: What makes the man sitting with Lesbia godlike?âi.e., what can he endure that, by contrast, overpowers Catullus? Describe as exactly as possible what happens to Catullus in the second and third stanzas, esp. in lines 11â12. GeminÄ is an example of a TRANSFERRED EPITHET, modifying nocte grammatically when logically it should apply to Catullusâ lÅ«mina; what effect does the resultant image exert on the reader? Some scholars have questioned whether the fourth stanza, with its abrupt transition and self reprimand, was even a part of the original poem or if instead it was somehow misplaced here by scribal error during the transmission of the manuscript from antiquity into the middle ages and beyond; review your other readings from Catullus, including poem 8 (Capvt XXXI) and esp. the excerpt from poem 5 (Capvt XIX), and argue your own position on this issue.

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Pittacius cum PrÄ«migeniÄ hÄ«c. PrÄ«ma, sequere!

Volumnius.

CIL 4.8769: Pittacius Volumnius scribbled this note on a column of Pompeiiâs Large Palaestra (Reg. II, Ins. 7), recording a liaison with his girlfriend, then urging another lady (or was âPrimaâ just his shortened, pet name for Primigenia?) to follow him.âsequere: watch outâthis form is not what it may seem to be, as you know if youâve studied this chapter carefully. Because he was writing on a fluted column (#106: archaeologists have assigned identifying numbers to all these columns), Volumnius could fit only a few letters on each line and after writing SEQ on one line continued with VERE on the next, a common practice seen again in his signature VOLV/MNIVS; to help the reader avoid confusion on the one line that contained more than one word, he placed a punctum between PRIMA and SEQ.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, meÄ« discipulÄ« discipulaeque! Quid agitis? (SpÄrÅ vÅs valÄre.) Now that youâve begun to read more real, unadapted Latin literature (like the above selections from Martial, Seneca, and Catullus), you might appreciate the following remark: âLooking back on school, I really liked Latin. In my case, a little bit stuck: I ended up with a feeling for literature.ââPaul McCartney. So, how much Latin is enough?âquantum placeat, as much as gives one pleasure (close to quantum vÄ«s, Capvt XXXII, and more, one hopes, than quantum satis, Capvt XXX!).

Here are some Latin phrases that are by no means moribund: first, an unfortunate (and fortunately overstated!) old proverb, quem dÄ« dÄ«ligunt, adulÄscÄns moritur; a reminder of oneâs mortality is a mementÅ morÄ«, freely âremember that you must dieâ (the -tÅ form is a relatively rare FUTURE IMPERATIVE not formally introduced in this book but often employed in ancient legal and religious texts); on sacrificing oneâs life for oneâs country, Horace wrote dulce et decÅrum (from decÅrus, -a, -um, fitting, proper) est prÅ patriÄ morÄ«; another bleak proverb (but essential here, as it offers two deponents!) is the astronomer Maniliusâ dictum, nascentÄs morimur (even as we are) being born, we (begin to) die; and then there is Senecaâs version of âeat, drink, and be merry,â complete with a passive periphrastic, bibÄmus, moriendum est, and the words addressed to the emperor by gladiators preparing to fight, AvÄ, ImperÄtor: moritÅ«rÄ« tÄ salÅ«tant, hail, Emperor, they (who are) about to die salute you! To any who have suffered, not death, but defeat, one might proclaim vae, victÄ«s, woe to the conquered, a famous line from Livyâs account of the Gallic sack of Rome in 390 B.C.

Well, enough morbidity. HÄ«c sunt alia miscellÄnea ex vocÄbulÄ«s novÄ«s: vÅx populÄ«; vÅx clamantis in dÄsertÅ, the voice of one calling out in the wilderness (from the gospel of Matthew); crÄscit amor nummÄ« quantum ipsa pecÅ«nia crÄvit, love of the coin grows as much as oneâs wealth itself has grown (Juvenal 14.139); sedente animÅ, with a calm mind. And here are some other deponents: Marylandâs state motto is crÄscite et multiplicÄminÄ« (can you figure that one out?); loquitur is a note in a dramatic text; and the legal phrase rÄs ipsa loquitur, the matter speaks for itself, we have seen before, but now you understand the verb form. And how about this sequence: seq. is an abbreviation for sequÄns/sequentÄs, the following, once common in footnotes; a nÅn sequitur is a remark that does not follow logically from a prior statement (a sequitur, of course, does!); sequor nÅn Ä«nferior, I follow (but am) not inferior. Will this exciting chapter have a sequel in the subsequent chapter? And, if not, what will be the consequences? Stay tunedâ¦ et valÄte!

Ave CaesarâMorituri te salutant! Oil on canvas, 1859. Jean-LÃ©on GÃ©rÃ´me (1824â1904) Yale University Art Gallery, New Haven, Connecticut
Yale University Art Gallery / Art Resource, NY

CAPVT XXXV

Dative with Adjectives, Special Verbs, and Compounds

GRAMMATICA

THE DATIVE CASE

The dative case is in general employed to indicate a person or thing that some act or circumstance applies to or refers to âindirectly,â as opposed to the accusative, which indicates the more immediate recipient or object of an action. The indirect object, e.g., is the person/thing toward which a direct object is âreferredâ by the subject + verb: âI am giving the book [direct object] to you [indirect object]â = âI am giving the book, not just to anyone anywhere, but in your direction, i.e., to you.â Even in the passive periphrastic construction, the dative of agent indicates the person for whom a certain action is obligatory. A number of other dative usages are distinguished by grammarians, but most are variants on this basic notion of reference or direction.

DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

The DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES construction is one you have already encountered in your readings, though it has not yet been formally introduced. Simply stated, a noun in the dative case is employed with many Latin adjectivesâparticularly those indicating attitude, quality, or relationâto indicate the direction (literally or metaphorically) in which the adjective applies; such adjectives are normally followed by âto,â âtoward,â or âforâ in English (e.g., âfriendly to/toward,â âhostile to/toward,â âsuitable to/for,â âuseful to,â âsimilar to,â âequal to,â etc.).

Mors est similis somnÅ. Death is similar to sleep.

SciÄbam tÄ mihi fidÄlem esse. I knew that you were loyal to me.

NÅbÄ«s est vir amÄ«cus. He is a man friendly toward us.

Quisque sibi cÄrus est. Each person is dear to himself.

Ille vidÄtur pÄr esse deÅ. That man seems to be equal to a god.

DATIVE WITH SPECIAL VERBS

Conceptually similar is the DATIVE WITH SPECIAL VERBS construction. Many of these verbs (the most important of which are listed below) are actually intransitive and, like adjectives that take a dative, indicate attitude or relationship, e.g., nocÄre, to be injurious to, parcÅ, to be lenient toward, etc. Although these verbs are often translated into English as if they were transitive and the dative nouns they govern as though they were direct objects (e.g., tibi parcit, he spares you; lit., he is lenient toward you), the datives again indicate the person/thing toward whom the attitude or quality applies.

Although a common rule for the dative with special verbs lists those meaning to âfavor,â âhelp/harm,â âplease/displease,â âtrust/distrust,â âbelieve,â âpersuade,â âcommand,â âobey,â âserve,â âresist,â âenvy,â âthreaten,â âpardon,â and âspare,â the list is cumbersome and involves some important exceptions (including iuvÅ, to help, and iubeÅ, to command, order, which take accusatives). More useful is simply to understand the concept and recognize some of the commonest Latin verbs that take this construction. In learning the following list, note that the more literal translation, given first for each verb, includes English to and thus reminds you of the required dative; note as well that each verb conveys some notion of attitude toward a person or thing, again suggesting a dative.

crÄdÅ + dat., entrust to; trust, believe (crÄdÅ tibi, I believe you)

ignÅscÅ + dat., grant pardon to; pardon, forgive (ignÅscÅ virÄ«s, I forgive the men)

imperÅ + dat., give orders to; command (imperÅ mÄ«litibus, I command the soldiers)

noceÅ + dat., do harm to; harm (noceÅ hostibus, I harm the enemy)

nÅ«bÅ + dat., be married to; marry (nÅ«bÅ illÄ« virÅ, I am marrying that man)

parcÅ + dat., be lenient to; spare (parcÅ vÅbÄ«s, I spare you)

pÄreÅ + dat., be obedient to; obey (pÄreÅ ducÄ«, I obey the leader)

persuÄdeÅ + dat., make sweet to, make agreeable to; persuade (persuÄdeÅ mihi, I persuade myself)

placeÅ + dat., be pleasing to; please (placeÅ patrÄ«, I please my father)

serviÅ + dat., be a slave to; serve (serviÅ patriae, I serve my country)

studeÅ + dat., direct oneâs zeal to; study (studeÅ litterÄ«s, I study literature)

CrÄde amÄ«cÄ«s. Believe (trust) your friends.

IgnÅsce mihi. Pardon me (forgive me).

Magistra discipulÄ«s parcit. The teacher spares (is lenient toward) her pupils.

Hoc eÄ«s nÅn placet. This does not please them.

NÅn possum eÄ« persuÄdÄre. I cannot persuade him.

Variae rÄs hominibus nocent. Various things harm men.

CicerÅ philosophiae studÄbat. Cicero used to study philosophy.

Philosophiae servÄ«re est lÄ«bertÄs. To serve philosophy is liberty.

Some of these verbs, it should be noted, can also take a direct object (e.g., crÄdÅ takes a dative for a person believed, mÄtrÄ« crÄdit, he believes his mother, but an accusative for a thing, id crÄdit, he believes it); and some, like imperÅ and persuÄdeo, take a noun clause as an object, as we shall see in the next chapter.

DATIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS

A very similar dative usage occurs with certain verbs compounded with ad, ante, con- (=cum), in, inter, ob, post, prae, prÅ, sub, super, and sometimes circum and re- (in the sense of against). This DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS is especially common when the meaning of a compound verb is significantly different from its simple form, whether transitive or intransitive; conversely, if the meaning of the compound is not essentially different from that of the simple verb, then the dative is ordinarily not employed:

Eum sequor. I follow him.

EÄ« obsequor. I obey him (lit., I follow in the direction of, i.e., in his path)

Sum amÄ«cus eius. I am his friend.

AmÄ«cÅ adsum. I support my friend (lit., I am next to my friend, i.e., at his side).

Ad nÅs vÄnit. He came to us.

Ad nÅs advÄnit. He came to us.

Often the dative functions essentially as object of the prepositional prefix, though the preposition would take another case if separate from the verb; thus adsum amÄ«cÅ above and the following examples:

AliÄ«s praestant. They surpass the others (lit., they stand before the others).

ExercituÄ« praeerat. He was in charge of the army (lit., he was in front of/before the army).

If the simple verb is transitive, then the compound may take an accusative as object of the root verb as well as a dative dependent on the prefix:

ExercituÄ« eum praeposuÄ«. I put him in charge of the army (lit., I put him [posuÄ« eum] in front of the army [prae- + exercituÄ«]).

AmÄ«citiae pecÅ«niam praeposuÄ«. I preferred money to friendship (lit., I put money [posuÄ« pecÅ«niam] before friendship [prae- + amÄ«citiae]).

Since there is such variability in the rules for dative with special verbs and compounds, the best procedure is to understand the concepts involved and then, when encountering a dative in a sentence, to be aware of these possible functions; just as with the other cases, you should be maintaining a list of the dative uses you have learned (there have been five thus far) in your notebook or computer file, including definitions and representative examples.

VOCÄBVLA

Be careful not to confuse aestÄs below with aetÄs, nor parcÅ and pÄreo below with parÅ, nor serviÅ with servÅ. And remember to learn all these new words, as always, by listening to them on the CDs or at www.wheelockslatin.com and repeating them aloud.

Â 

aÃ©stÄs, aesttis, f., summer (estival, estivate, estivation; cf. aestus, -Å«s, heat, aestuÄre, to be hot, seethe, boil)

inua, inuae, f., door (janitor, Janus, January)

pÃ©ctus, pÃ©ctoris, n., breast, heart (pectoral, expectorate, parapet)

praÃ©mium, praÃ©miÄ«, n., reward, prize (premium)

Ä«rtus, Ä«rta, Ä«rtum, angry (irate; cf. Ä«ra, Ä«rÄscor, to be angry)

antepnÅ, antepnere, antepÃ³suÄ«, antepÃ³situm, to put before, prefer

fÃ³veÅ, fovre, fvÄ«, ftum, to comfort, nurture, cherish (foment)

iscÅ, ignscere, ignvÄ«, igntum + dat., to grant pardon to, forgive

ÃmperÅ, imperre, impervÄ«, impertum + dat., to give orders to, command (imperative, emperor; cf. imperÄtor, imperium)

mror, mÄ«rrÄ«, mÄ«rtus sum, to marvel at, admire, wonder (admire, marvel, miracle, mirage, mirror; cf. mÄ«rÄculum, a marvel)

nÃ³ceÅ, nocre, nÃ³cuÄ«, nÃ³citum + dat., to do harm to, harm, injure (innocent, innocuous, nuisance, obnoxious; cognate with necÅ)

nbÅ, nbere, npsÄ«, nptum, to cover, veil; + dat. (of a bride) to be married to, marry (nubile, connubial, nuptials; cf. nÅ«ptiae, marriage)

pÃ¡rcÅ, pÃ¡rcere, pepÃ©rcÄ«, parsrum + dat., to be lenient to, spare (parsimonious, parsimony)

preÅ, pÄrre, pruÄ« + dat., to be obedient to, obey (apparent, appear, apparition)

persudeÅ, persuÄdre, persusÄ«, persusum + dat., to succeed in urging, persuade, convince (assuage, dissuade, suasion; cf. suÄvis)

plÃ¡ceÅ, placre, plÃ¡cuÄ«, plÃ¡citum + dat., to be pleasing to, please (complacent, placable, implacable, placate, placid, plea, plead, pleasure)

sÃ¡piÅ, sÃ¡pere, sapvÄ«, to have good taste; have good sense, be wise (sapient, sapid, insipid, sage, savor; cf. sapiÄns, sapientia)

sÃ©rviÅ, servre, servvÄ«, servtum + dat., to be a slave to, serve (service, disservice, subservient, servile, servility, deserve, desert = reward, dessert; cf. servus, servitÅ«s)

stÃºdeÅ, studre, stÃºduÄ« + dat., to direct oneâs zeal to, be eager for, study (student; cf. studium, studiÅsus, eager, diligent, scholarly)

subrdeÅ, subrÄ«dre, subrsÄ«, subrsum, to smile (down) upon (cf. rÄ«deÅ, rÄ«diculus)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After thorough study of the new grammar and vocabulary, scan the following readings for all dative nouns and pronouns, identifying the specific usage of each. Then read each sentence and passage aloud, listening to the CDs if you have them, and translate into idiomatic English.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Minerva, fÄ«lia Iovis, nÄta est plÄna scientiae et ingeniÄ«.

CustÅdiae sÄ« cum duce nostrÅ lÄ«berÄ loquantur et huic tyrannum trÄdere cÅnentur, sine perÄ«culÅ ex moenibus urbis prÅtinus ÄgredÄ« possint.

PÄrÄre lÄgibus aequÄ«s melius est quam tyrannÅ servÄ«re.

Cum optimÄ honÅribus Å«sus esset et sibi cÄ«vitÄtem semper antepÅneret, etiam plÄbs eÄ« crÄdÄbat et nÅn invidÄbat.

DiÅ« passa, mÄter vestra fÄlÄ«citer, sedÄns apud amÄ«cÅs, mortua est.

PhilosophÄ« cÅnsilium spectÄvÄrunt et recÅ«sÄvÄrunt tÄlem rem suscipere mÅlÄ«rÄ«ve.

Cum dÄ«ves sÄ«s atque dÄ«vitiae crÄscant, tamen opibus tuÄ«s parcere vÄ«s et nÄminÄ« assem offerÄs.

Ab illÄ Ä«nsulÄ subitÅ profectus, eÄdem nocte ad patriam nÄve advÄnit; tum, quaerÄns remissiÅnem animae, diÅ« rÅ«sticÄbÄtur.

Hic mÄ«les, cum imperÄtÅrÄ« vestrÅ nÅn placÄret, heu, illa praemia prÅmissa ÄmÄ«sit.

Nisi mÅrÄs parÄs scientiae suntâid nÅbÄ«s fatendum estâscientia nÅbÄ«s magnopere nocÄre potest.

Magistra tum rogÄvit duÅs parvÅs puerÅs quot digitÅs habÄrent.

MÄter candida nÄtae cÄrissimae subrÄ«det, quam maximÄ fovet, et eÄ« plÅ«rima Åscula suÄvia dat.

Why does he now wish to hurt his two friends?

If he does not spare the plebeians, alas, we shall neither trust him nor follow him.

Since you are studying Roman literature, you are serving a very difficult but a very great master.

If they were truly willing to please us, they would not be using their wealth thus against the state.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

NÄmÅ lÄ«ber est quÄ« corporÄ« servit. (Seneca.)

Imperium habÄre vÄ«s magnum? ImperÄ tibi! (Publilius Syrus.)

BonÄ«s nocet quisquis pepercit malÄ«s. (*Id.)

Cum tÅ« omnia pecÅ«niae postpÅnÄs, mÄ«rÄris sÄ« nÄmÅ tibi amÅrem praestat? (Horace.âpost-pÅnÅ; âpostponement,â âpostpositive.â)

FrÅ«strÄ aut pecÅ«niae aut imperiÄ«s aut opibus aut glÅriae student; potius studeant virtÅ«tÄ« et honÅrÄ« et scientiae et alicui artÄ«. (Cicero.âfrÅ«strÄ, adv., in vain; âfrustrate,â âfrustration.ââpotius, adv., rather.)

VirtÅ«tÄ« melius quam FortÅ«nae crÄdÄmus; virtÅ«s nÅn nÅvit calamitÄtÄ« cÄdere. (Publilius Syrus.âcalamitÄs, -tÄtis; âcalamitous.â)

Et Deus Äit: âFaciÄmus hominem ad imÄginem nostram et praesit piscibus maris bÄstiÄ«sque terrae.â (Genesis.âimÄgÅ, -ginis, f.; âimagery,â âimagination.ââprae-sum.âpiscis, -is, m., fish; âPisces,â âpiscine.ââbÄstia, -ae, f., beast; âbestial,â âbestiary.â)

OmnÄs arbitrÄtÄ« sunt tÄ dÄbÄre mihi parcere. (Cicero.)

Quid facere vellet, ostendit, et illÄ« servÅ spÄ lÄ«bertÄtis magnÄ«sque praemiÄ«s persuÄsit. (Caesar.)

SÄ« cui librÄ« CicerÅnis placent, ille sciat sÄ prÅfÄcisse. (Quintilian.âprÅficiÅ: = prÅ + faciÅ, to progress, benefit; âproficiency,â âprofit.â)

In urbe nostrÄ mihi contigit docÄrÄ« quantum Ä«rÄtus AchillÄs GraecÄ«s nocuisset. (Horace.âcontingÅ, -ere, -tigÄ«, -tÄctum, to touch closely, fall to the lot of; âcontingent,â âcontiguous,â âcontact.â)

Alicui rogantÄ« melius quam iubentÄ« pÄrÄmus. (Publilius Syrus.)

VÄ«vite fortiter fortiaque pectora rÄbus adversÄ«s oppÅnite. (Horace.âoppÅnÅ: = ob + pÅnÅ, to set against; âopponent,â âopposite.â)

NÅn ignÄra malÄ«, miserÄ«s succurrere discÅ. (*Vergil.âignÄrus, -a, -um, ignorant; âignorance,â âignore;â ignÄra is f. because it agrees with Dido, exiled queen, who speaks these words to the shipwrecked Aeneas.âsuccurrÅ: = sub + currÅ, to help; âsuccor.â)

IgnÅsce saepe alterÄ«, numquam tibi. (Publilius Syrus.)

Cum enim tÄ, deum meum, quaerÅ, vÄ«tam beÄtam quaerÅ; quaeram tÄ ut vÄ«vat anima mea. (*St. Augustine.)

Sequere hÄc, mea gnÄta, mÄ, cum dÄ«s volentibus. (*Plautus.âhÄc, adv., in this direction, this way.âgnÄta: = nÄta.)

Ovid Asks the Gods to Inspire His Work

In nova fert animus mÅ«tÄtÄs dÄ«cere fÅrmÄs

corpora: dÄ«, coeptÄ«sânam vÅs mÅ«tÄstis et illÄsâ

adspÄ«rÄte meÄ«s prÄ«mÄque ab orÄ«gine mundÄ«

ad mea perpetuum dÄdÅ«cite tempora carmen!

*Ovid Met. 1.1â4: Ovid invokes the gods to inspire his work in these opening verses of his MetamorphÅsÄs (review âOn Death and Metamorphosis,â and the accompanying notes, in Capvt XVIII); the challenge in translating this excerpt, as with much of Lat. verse, is to connect the adjectives with the nouns they modify, so watch the endings!ânova: of the three nouns in this sent., which does this adj. agree with?âfert: here, compels (me). âcoeptum, -Ä«, n., usually pl., beginning, undertaking, enterprise; âinception.ââmÅ«tÄstis: = mÅ«tÄvistis; such contractions, with v and the following vowel dropped, are common in perf. system forms; cf. dÅnÄrunt for dÅnÄvÄrunt in Catullus 13 (Capvt XXXIII).âet: = etiam. âadspÄ«rÄre, to breathe upon, inspire; âaspire,â âaspirant.ââorÄ«gÅ, -ginis, f., = Eng.; âoriginator,â âaboriginal.ââmea perpetuumâ¦ tempora carmen: if you do not recall the technical term for this common poetic word order device, see âNote on a Copy of Catullusâ Carmina,â Capvt XXX. âdÄ + dÅ«cÅ: derivatives include âdeduceâ and âdeduction,â but the verb has a more lit. meaning here.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What range of time is spanned by the transformation tales Ovidâs poem will relate? What are the theological implications of Ovidâs prologue?

Sorry, Nobodyâs Home!

NÄsÄ«ca ad poÄtam Ennium vÄnit. Cum ad iÄnuam Ennium quaesÄ«visset et serva respondisset eum in casÄ nÅn esse, sÄnsit illam dominÄ« iussÅ« id dÄ«xisse et Ennium vÄrÅ esse in casÄ. Post paucÅs diÄs, cum Ennius ad NÄsÄ«cam vÄnisset et eum ad iÄnuam quaereret, NÄsÄ«ca ipse exclÄmÄvit sÄ in casÄ nÅn esse. Tum Ennius âQuid?â inquit, âEgo nÅn cognÅscÅ vÅcem tuam?â HÄ«c NÄsÄ«ca merÅ cum sale respondit: âVae, homÅ es impudÄns! Ego, cum tÄ quaererem, servae tuae crÄdidÄ« tÄ nÅn in casÄ esse; nÅnne tÅ« mihi ipsÄ« nunc crÄdis?â

Â 

Cicero De Or. 2.276.âCiceroâs DÄ ÅrÄtÅre, published in 55 B.C., was one of several treatises he wrote on oratory and rhetoric, important subjects for the Roman ruling class; in this passage he relates a humorous anecdote about Publius Cornelius Scipio Nasica, a celebrated jurist, and his friend the poet Quintus Ennius, as an example of the potential value of using jokes in speeches.âiussÅ«, at the command of; cf. iubeÅ. â exclÄmÄre, to shout out; âexclaim,â âexclamation.ââimpudÄns, gen. -dentis; âimpudence.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Explain the jokeâand if you laughed out loud when you read it, that means your Latin is getting better and better!

âI Do.â âI Donât!â

NÅ«bere vÄ«s PrÄ«scÅ. NÅn mÄ«ror, Paula; sapÄ«stÄ«.

DÅ«cere tÄ nÅn vult PrÄ«scus: et ille sapit!

*Martial Epig. 9.10: Priscus was an eligible bachelor, maybe a rich one; Paula was apparently not his type! Meter: elegiac couplet.âsapÄ«stÄ«: = sapÄ«vistÄ«; for the form, see on mÅ«tÄstis above.âdÅ«cere: i.e., in mÄtrimÅnium.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Which of these two players was smart, and how does Martial use word order to underscore the point?

Maronilla Has a Cough

Petit Gemellus nÅ«ptiÄs MarÅnillae

et cupit et Ä«nstat et precÄtur et dÅnat.

AdeÅne pulchra est? Immo, foedius nÄ«l est.

Quid ergÅ in illÄ petitur et placet? Tussit!

Â 

*Martial Epig. 1.10: meter: choliambic.ânÅ«ptiÄe, -Ärum, f. pl., marriage; ânuptial,â âpre-nuptialâ; cf. nÅ«bere. âÄ«nstÄre, to press, insist; âinstance,â âinstant.ââprecor, -cÄrÄ«, -cÄtus sum, to beg, entreat; âdeprecation,â âimprecate.ââdÅnat: = dat; âdonation.â âadeÅ: = tam.âimmÅ, adv., on the contrary; the -o is shortened here for metrical purposes.âfoedius: = turpius.ânÄ«l: = nihil.âergÅ: = igitur.âtussÄ«re, to cough; âtussive,â âpertussis.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Identify the polysyndeton and comment on its effect (if you donât recall the term, see âPretty Isâ in the last chapter). Explain Gemellusâ interest in Maronilla (if you canât, recall what youâve learned about Romeâs captÄtÅrÄs)âand where is his motivation revealed?

Summer Vacation

LudÄ« magister, parce simplicÄ« turbae:

â¦

aestÄte puerÄ« sÄ« valent, satis discunt.

*Martial Epig. 10.62.1, 12: Even in ancient Rome students got a summer vacation and were âspared the rodâ during harvest time, from July to October. Meter: choliambic.âsimplex, gen. -plicis, simple, unaffected, here youthful; âsimplicity,â âsimplistic.â

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

[A]mÅre tuÅ moreorâ¦. PereÅ, vÄ«ta, in am[Åre]â¦. VÄ«t<i>a, amÅ tÄ!

CIL 4.9054: From one of several stucco fragments found in the Building of Eumachia (Reg. VII, Ins. 9); only these three sentences can be confidently restored, but it seems from the few other legible words (amantem, Venus: can you find them in the drawing?) that perhaps all or most of what was inscribed here was amatory in nature.âamÅre: ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, a common abl. case construction whose sense is easily understood here.âmoreor: = morior; the lovestruck writer was not a great speller, but at least he recalled that the verb is deponent. In a curious illustration of the continuity of classical Lat., however coincidental it may be, the exclamatory AmÅre tuÅ morior is uttered both by Helen to Paris, as she implores him to take her to be his lover in Troy, in the 13th cent. Excidium Troie (The Destruction of Troy), a narrative ultimately dating back to ancient sources, and by Mary Magdalene, crying out to the crucified Christ, in the 17th-cent. hymn âMaria Magdalene Stabat,â composed by the Benedictine nun Chiara Margarita Cozzolani.âpereÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, to pass away, be destroyed, perish; âperishable.ââvÄ«ta: a common term of endearment, esp. among lovers, often mea vÄ«ta.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, discipulÄ« discipulaeque! Or perhaps now that you have learned the meaning of studÄre you should be termed studentÄs, since it is clearly your zeal for learning that has brought you this far in your study of Latin! So, studentÄs, here is your praemium, more delectables for your cÄna LatÄ«na, once more ex novÄ«s grammaticÄ«s atque vocÄbulÄ«s: if you remember that verbs signifying âfavorâ¦ etc.â govern the dative, you can understand this first, fortuitously alliterative motto, fortÅ«na favet fortibus; the command favÄte linguÄ«s, lit. be favorable with your tongues, was used in religious rituals to call for silence and the avoidance of any ill-omened speech; imperÅ obviously gives us âimperative,â but also the expression dÄ«vide (from dÄ«videre, to separate, divide) et imperÄ; a placet is an affirmative vote, a placitum a judicial decision, and a âplaceboâ is an unmedicated preparation meant to humor a patient (what, literally, does the âmedicineâ promise to do?); secret meetings are held iÄnuÄ«s clausÄ«s (from claudÅ, claudere, clausÄ«, clausum, to close, as in ârecluse,â âcloset,â etc.), but iÄnuae mentis are the ones studying Latin will help you to open (aperiÅ, aperÄ«re, aperuÄ«, apertum is to open, as in âapertureâ). Also from iÄnua we have: âjanitor,â lit. a âdoormanâ; âJanus,â the two-faced god of doors, of entrances and exits, of beginnings and ending; and âJanuary,â the doorway into the new year. StudÄte LatÄ«nae, aperÄ«te mentÄs, et semper valÄte, studentÄs!

CAPVT XXXVI

Jussive Noun Clauses; FÄ«Å

GRAMMATICA

JUSSIVE NOUN CLAUSES

The JUSSIVE NOUN CLAUSE is a kind of indirect command: as with indirect statements (Capvt XXV) and indirect questions (Capvt XXX), the actual command (or request, entreaty, etc.) is not quoted verbatim, via an imperative or a jussive subjunctive (Capvt XXVIII) in a main clause, but is reported indirectly in a subordinate clause, i.e., not âhe ordered them, âDo this!ââ but âhe ordered them to do this.â In Latin such clauses are introduced by ut or nÄ and employ a subjunctive verb, usually present or imperfect tense, whereas in English, and therefore in translation, we ordinarily employ a present infinitive with no introductory word and no auxiliary such as âmayâ or âmightâ:

Hoc facite. Do this! (imperative, direct command)

Hoc faciant. Let them do this. (jussive subjunctive, direct command)

Imperat vÅbÄ«s ut hoc faciÄtis. He commands you to do this.

ImperÄvit eÄ«s ut hoc facerent. He commanded them to do this.

PersuÄdet eÄ«s ut hoc faciant. He persuades them to do this.

PetÄ«vit ab eÄ«s nÄ hoc facerent. He begged (from) them not to do this.

Monuit eÅs nÄ hoc facerent. He warned them not to do this.

HortÄtus est eÅs ut hoc facerent. He urged them to do this.

These clauses are often confused with purpose clauses because in appearance they are identical, but a study of the examples given above reveals their jussive nature. In contrast to purpose clauses, which function adverbially (answering the question âwhy?â), jussive noun clauses function as objects of the main verbs which introduce them (answering the question âwhatâ¦ was ordered, requested, advised, etc.?â). The following list includes some of the more common verbs that can introduce jussive noun clauses and indicates the case employed for the person being ordered or requested to act:

hortor eum ut, I urge him toâ¦

imperÅ eÄ« ut, I order him toâ¦

moneÅ eum ut, I advise him toâ¦

ÅrÅ eam ut, I beg her toâ¦

persuÄdeÅ eÄ« ut, I persuade him toâ¦ (or I persuade him thatâ¦)

petÅ ab eÅ ut, I beg (from) him toâ¦

quaerÅ ab eÄ ut, I request (from/of) her toâ¦

rogÅ eum ut, I ask him toâ¦

VolÅ, nÅlÅ, and mÄlÅ (Capvt XXXII) sometimes introduce such clauses (e.g., mÄlÅ ut, I prefer thatâ¦), although they also commonly are followed by infinitives; iubeÅ nearly always takes the infinitive construction.

IRREGULAR FÄ«Å, fierÄ«, factus sum, to occur, happen;
be done, be made

The common irregular verb fÄ«Å, fierÄ«, meaning to occur, happen, was used by the Romans in place of the passive of the present system of faciÅ and so, although active in form, also has the passive meanings to be done, be made; e.g., fit was used instead of facitur for it is done, is made (the practice with compounds of faciÅ varied: perficitur, is completed, but calefit instead of calefacitur for is heated). Conversely, the perfect system of fÄ«Å was lacking and was supplied by the perfect passive system of faciÅ, the same sort of suppletion seen earlier in the use of tulÄ« and lÄtum for the perfect system of ferÅ, ferre.

In effect, we have a composite verb with the principal parts fÄ«Å, fierÄ«, factus sum and with the range of related meanings occur, happen, become, be made, be done. In translating, when you see the active present system forms of fÄ«Å remember the passive force options be done, be made, and when you see the passive perfect system forms factus est, factus erat, factus sit, etc., remember the options has become, had occurred, etc.

The only new forms to be learned are those listed below; note that: the stem vowel -Ä«- is long in all places except fit, fierÄ«, and the imperfect subjunctive; otherwise, the forms of the present, future, and imperfect indicative and the present subjunctive follow the pattern of audiÅ; the imperfect subjunctive follows a predictable pattern, given the infinitive fierÄ«.

Â 

Infinitive

Imperatives

fte

Sg. fÄ« Pl.

Â 

Study carefully the following examples:

Â 

Hoc facit (faciet). He is doing or making this (will do or make).

Hoc fit (fÄ«et). This is done or made (will be done or made).

Hoc faciat. Let him do or make this.

Hoc fÄ«at. Let this be done or made.

DÄ«cunt eum hoc facere. They say that he is doing this.

DÄ«cunt hoc fierÄ«. They say that this is being done (is happening).

PerÄ«culum fit gravius. The danger is becoming graver.

Mox factÄ« sunt fÄlÄ«ces. They soon became happy.

VOCÄBVLA

As a check on your mastery of fÄ«Å, do a synopsis in all six tenses with the book closed, then compare your work with the full conjugation in SvmmÄrivm FÅrmÄrvm. And remember: as you memorize this new list, audÄ« ac prÅnÅ«ntiÄ!

Â 

cupdÅ, cupdinis, f., desire, passion (cupidity, Cupid; cf. cupiÅ, cupiditÄs)

lctor, lÄctris, m., and lctrÄ«x, lÄctrcis, f., reader (lector; cf. legÅ, lectern, lecture)

vÃnculum, vÃnculÄ«, n., bond, chain, fetter (vinculum; cf. vinciÅ, to bind)

cÅtdiÄ, adv., daily, every day (quot + diÄs; cotidian)

fortÃ¡sse, adv., perhaps (cf. fortÅ«na)

accdÅ, accdere, accÃ©ssÄ«, accÃ©ssum (ad + cÄdÅ), to come (to), approach (accede, access, accessible, accession, accessory; cf. discÄdÅ)

cÃ¡rpÅ, cÃ¡rpere, cÃ¡rpsÄ«, cÃ¡rptum, to harvest, pluck; seize (carp at, excerpt, carpet, scarce; carpe diem: see LatÄ«na Est Gaudium, Capvt XXII)

cgÅ, cgere, cogÄ«, coctum (cum + agÅ), to drive or bring together, force, compel (cogent, coaction, coactive, coagulate; cf. cÅgitÅ)

contÃ©mnÅ, contÃ©mnere, contÃ©mpsÄ«, contÃ©mptum, to despise, scorn (contemn, contempt, contemptible, contemptuous)

contÃºndÅ, contÃºndere, cÃ³ntudÄ«, contsum, to beat, crush, bruise, destroy (contuse, contusion; obtuse, from obtundÅ, to beat, make blunt)

crÅ, cÅ«rre, cÅ«rvÄ«, cÅ«rtum, to care for, attend to; heal, cure; take care (cure, curator, procure, proctor, accurate; cf. cÅ«ra)

dÄcÃ©rnÅ, dÄcÃ©rnere, dÄcrvÄ«, dÄcrtum, to decide, settle, decree (decretal, decretory; cf. cernÅ)

Ã©xigÅ, exÃgere, exgÄ«, exctum (ex + agÅ), to drive out, force out, exact; drive through, complete, perfect (exactitude, exigent, exigency)

fÅ, fÃerÄ«, fÃ¡ctus sum, to occur, happen; become; be made, be done (fiat)

oblÃ©ctÅ, oblectre, oblectvÄ«, oblecttum, to please, amuse, delight; pass time pleasantly (oblectation; cf. dÄlectÅ, dÄlectÄtiÅ)

rÅ, Årre, ÅrvÄ«, Årtum, to speak, plead; beg, beseech, entreat, pray (orator, oration, oracle, adore, inexorable, peroration; cf. ÅrÄtor)

rÃ©creÅ, recrere, recrevÄ«, recretum (re + creÅ), to restore, revive; refresh, cheer (recreate, recreation)

requrÅ, requrere, requÄ«svÄ«, requÄ«stum (re + quaerÅ), to seek, ask for; miss, need, require (requisite, requisition, prerequisite, request)

sernÅ, serÄnre, serÄnvÄ«, serÄntum, to make clear, brighten; cheer up, soothe (serene, serenity, serenade)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After studying the new grammar and vocabulary, check your mastery with the Self-Tutorial Exercises and Answer Key, and then scan the readings to identify (a) the tense, person, number, and mood of all forms of fÄ«Å, and (b) all jussive noun clauses; be careful not to confuse jussive noun and purpose clauses, and remember to translate the subjunctive verbs in the former (and often the latter) simply as infinitives. Listen to each sentence and passage, if you have the CDs, read them aloud for comprehension, and write out your translations.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

PoterÄsne etiam centum virÄ«s persuÄdÄre ut viam virtÅ«tis sine praemiÄ«s sequerentur?

Haec fÄmina vult ex urbe ÄgredÄ« et ad illam Ä«nsulam proficÄ«scÄ« ut sine morÄ illÄ« agricolae nÅ«bat et semper rÅ«sticÄtur.

PetÄbant Ä nÅbÄ«s ut etiam in adversÄ«s rÄbus huic ducÄ« pÄrÄrÄmus et servÄ«rÄmus.

Haec ab fÄminÄ«s facta sunt nÄ tantam occÄsiÅnem Ämitterent.

RogÄmus tÄ ut honÅre et opibus sapientius Å«tÄris et hÅs quÄ«nque amÄ«cÅs semper foveÄs.

Nisi quis hoc suscipere audÄbit, nÅlent nÅbÄ«s crÄdere et fÄ«ent Ä«rÄtÄ«.

RogÄvit nÅs cÅ«r neque dÄ«vitibus neque pauperibus placÄre cÅnÄtÄ« essÄmus.

ArbitrÄbÄtur tÄlem vÄ«tam nÅn ex dÄ«vitiÄ«s sed ex animÅ plÄnÅ virtÅ«tis nÄscÄ«.

Scientiam et ingenium magis quam magnÄs dÄ«vitiÄs mÄ«rÄmur.

SenÄtus ducÄ« imperÄvit nÄ hostibus victÄ«s nocÄret sed eÄ«s parceret et remissiÅnem poenae daret.

Ille ÅrÄtor vulgum Ä«rÄtissimum vÅce potentÄ« serÄnÄvit atque, ut omnibus spectantibus subrÄ«sit, eÅs oblectÄvit.

Ut parva puella per iÄnuam currÄbat, subitÅ occidit et genua male contudit.

Dummodo sÄ«s aequus hÄ«s virÄ«s, fÄ«ent tibi fidÄlÄs.

That summer they urged that this be done better.

Provided that this is done, they will beg us to spare him.

That teacher wants to persuade her twenty pupils to study more good literature.

Since his hope is becoming very small, let him confess that he commanded (use imperÅ) those two men not to do it.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

DÄ«xitque Deus: âFÄ«at lÅ«x.â Et facta est lÅ«x. (*Genesis.)

Fatendum est nihil dÄ nihilÅ posse fierÄ«. (Lucretius.ânihilum, -Ä«, n.: = nihil.)

Magnae rÄs nÅn fÄ«unt sine perÄ«culÅ. (Terence.)

HÄ«s rÄbus cognitÄ«s, ille suÅs hortÄtus est nÄ timÄrent. (Caesar.)

Omnia fÄ«ent quae fierÄ« aequum est. (Terence.)

âPater, ÅrÅ tÄ ut mihi ignÅscÄs.â âFÄ«at.â (Terence.)

Dum loquimur, fÅ«gerit invida aetÄs: carpe diem! (*Horace.âinvidus, -a, -um, envious; âinvidious,â âenvy.â)

CarpÄmus dulcia; post enim mortem cinis et fÄbula fÄ«Äs. (Persius.âcinis, -neris, m., ashes; âcinerary,â âincinerate.â)

Ante senectÅ«tem cÅ«rÄvÄ« ut bene vÄ«verem; in senectÅ«te cÅ«rÅ ut bene moriar. (Seneca.)

SolÅn dÄ«xit sÄ senem fierÄ« cotÄ«diÄ aliquid addiscentem. (Cicero.âSolÅn, -lÅnis, m., Solon, great 6th cent. B.C. Athenian legislator. âad + discÅ, -ere.)

Caret pectus tuum inÄnÄ« ambitiÅne? Caret Ä«rÄ et timÅre mortis? IgnÅscis amÄ«cÄ«s? FÄ«s lÄnior et melior, accÄdente senectÅ«te? (Horace.âinÄnis, -e, empty, vain; âinane,â âinanity.ââambitiÅ, -Ånis, f.; âambitiousâ; from ambi-, around, + Ä«re, to go, the word was applied to political candidates who âwent aroundâ canvassing for votes.âlÄnis, -e, gentle, kind; âlenience,â âlenient.â)

Hoc dÅ«rum est; sed levius fit patientiÄ quidquid corrigere est nefÄs. (Horace.âcorrigÅ, -ere; âincorrigible,â âcorrect.ââest nefÄs, it is wrong, contrary to divine law.)

SapiÄmus et cÄdÄmus! Leve fit onus quod bene fertur. (Ovid.âonus, oneris, n., burden; âonerous,â âexonerate.â)

Ego vÅs hortor ut amÄ«citiam omnibus rÄbus hÅ«mÄnÄ«s antepÅnÄtisâvae illÄ«s quÄ« nÅ«llÅs amÄ«cÅs habent! (Cicero.)

PetÅ Ä vÅbÄ«s ut patiÄminÄ« mÄ dÄ studiÄ«s hÅ«mÄnitÄtis ac litterÄrum loquÄ«. (Cicero.âhÅ«mÄnitÄs, -tÄtis, f., culture; âhumanity,â âthe humanitiesâ; cf. homÅ, hÅ«mÄnus.)

Auribus frequentius quam linguÄ Å«tere! (*Seneca.âfrequenter, adv., often, frequently.)

Citius venit perÄ«clum cum contemnitur. (*Publilius Syrus.âperÄ«clum: = perÄ«clum; for another example of this type of contraction, known as SYNCOPE, see the FÄlÄ«c<u>lam graffito in Capvt II.)

The Quality of Martialâs Book

Sunt bona, sunt quaedam mediocria, sunt mala plÅ«ra

quae legis hÄ«c; aliter nÅn fit, AvÄ«te, liber.

Â 

*Martial Epig. 1.16: Anyone who has ever written a book will be grateful for this defense Martial offers to Avitus; meter, elegiac couplet.âaliter, adv., otherwise.

I Donât Cook for Cooks!

LÄctor et audÄ«tor nostrÅs probat, Aule, libellÅs,

sed quÄ«dam exÄctÅs esse poÄta negat.

NÅn nimium cÅ«rÅ, nam cÄnae fercula nostrae

mÄlim convÄ«vÄ«s quam placuisse cocÄ«s!

Â 

*Martial Epig. 9.81; meter: elegiac couplet.âprobat: it was common for a verb to agree in number with the nearer of two subjects, though here the hypothetical lÄctor and audÄ«tor are perhaps thought of as one and the same person.âesse: sc. eÅs, = libellÅs, as subject.âferculum, -Ä«, n., course (of a meal).âmÄlim: POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE, a common usage employed for hypothetical action, I would prefer that. âcÄnaeâ¦ cocÄ«s: more usual order might be mÄlim fercula cÄnae nostrae placuisse convÄ«vÄ«s quam cocÄ«s.âquam: i.e., magis quam.âconvÄ«va, -ae, m., dinner-guest; âconvivial.ââcocus, -Ä«, m., cook; âconcoction.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: In both epigrams the poet offers a defense of his work, proving the obvious point that literary critics existed then as now; comment on the issues Martial raises in both poems, and on the effectiveness of the culinary metaphor employed in the second.

Oh, Iâd Love to Read You My Poemsâ¦Not!

Ut recitem tibi nostra rogÄs epigrammata. NÅlÅâ

nÅn audÄ«re, Celer, sed recitÄre cupis!

*Martial Epig. 1.63: Unlike the implied critics in the preceding epigrams, Celer was a fan of Martialâsâor at least pretended to be! Meter: elegiac couplet.âepigramma, -matis, n.; âepigrammatic,â âepigrammatist.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Compare Martialâs response to Celer with his response to Pontilianus in âPlease Remove My Name from Your Mailing Listâ (Capvt XXVIII); how are they alike, how different, and what do they tell you about Roman literary culture of the 1st cent. A.D.? What several additional selections have you read in this book, from Martial and other authors as well, in which writers talk about writing?âwhat range of issues do they raise?

I Love Herâ¦I Love Her Not

ÅdÄ« et amÅ! QuÄrÄ id faciam fortasse requÄ«ris.

Nescio, sed fierÄ« sentiÅ et excrucior.

*Catullus Carm. 85: Brief, but intense, and one of Catullusâ most admired poems; meter: elegiac couplet.âexcruciÄre, to crucify, torment; âexcruciate,â âcruxâ; from crux, crucis, f., cross; crucifixion, a form of punishment borrowed by the Romans from the Carthaginians, was largely reserved for slaves.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: The poem is largely about antitheses, but not just love and hate; 8 of the 14 words are verbs: which, on the one hand, are about asking and knowing and acting, and which, conversely, are about feeling, and suffering, and being acted upon? What is the effect of these oppositions?

Who Is Truly Free?

Quis igitur vÄrÅ lÄ«ber est? Tantum vir sapiÄns, quÄ« sibi imperat, quem neque fortÅ«na adversa neque paupertÄs neque mors neque vincula terrent, quÄ« potest cupÄ«dinibus fortiter respondÄre honÅrÄsque contemnere, cuius virtÅ«s cÅtÄ«diÄ crÄscit, quÄ« in sÄ ipsÅ tÅtus est.

Â 

Horace Sat. 2.7.83ff: In this prose adaptation from one of his later satires, Horace comments on what was a central topic in ancient philosophy, following essentially the views of Stoicism; review the other selections you have read from the SermÅnÄs, in Capita III and XXIV.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Summarize these requisites of intellectual and moral freedom, and explain how they are encapsulated, in a sense, in the final clause; do you agree with them all, including Horaceâs privileging of the vir sapiÄns, which reflects Stoic dogma that all but the wise are slaves?

Testimony Against the Conspirators

SenÄtum coÄgÄ«. IntrÅdÅ«xÄ« Volturcium sine GallÄ«s. Fidem pÅ«blicam eÄ« dedÄ«. HortÄtus sum ut ea quae scÄ«ret sine timÅre nÅ«ntiÄret. Tum ille, cum sÄ ex magnÅ timÅre recreÄvisset, dÄ«xit sÄ ab LentulÅ habÄre ad CatilÄ«nam mandÄta ut auxiliÅ servÅrum Å«terÄtur et ad urbem quam prÄ«mum cum exercitÅ« accÄderet. IntrÅductÄ« autem GallÄ« dÄ«xÄrunt sibi litterÄs ad suam gentem ab LentulÅ datÄs esse et hunc imperÄvisse ut equitÄtum in Italiam quam prÄ«mum mitterent. DÄnique, omnibus rÄbus expositÄ«s, senÄtus dÄcrÄvit ut coniÅ«rÄtÄ«, quÄ« hÄs Ä«nsidiÄs mÅlÄ«tÄ« essent, in custÅdiam trÄderentur.

Â 

Cicero Cat. 3, excerpts: In this adaptation from his third oration against Catiline, Cicero informs the Roman citizenry of the evidence against the conspirators and of actions taken by the senate; be sure to review all the earlier readings on the Catilinarian conspiracy in Capita XI, XIV, XX, and XXX.âintrÅ + dÅ«cÅ, -ere, = Eng.; âintroduction,â âintroductory.ââVolturcium: Titus Volturcius, a minor figure among the conspirators, had been arrested in possession of the incriminating letters you read about in Capvt XXX; he was given immunity, fidem pÅ«blicam, in return for his testimony here.âGallus, -Ä«, m. a Gaul; Lentulus, the leading conspirator at Rome in Catilineâs absence, had been seeking support from the Gallic Allobroges (Map 2), who had a delegation at Rome. The ambassadors pretended to go along, but instead reported what they knew to Cicero and assisted him in trapping Volturcius and seizing Lentulusâ letters.âscÄ«ret: a subordinate clause that would ordinarily have an indic. verb often has instead a subjunct. when the clause occurs either within an ind. state. or, as here, within another subjunct. clause; in this latter instance the verb is often termed SUBJUNCTIVE BY ATTRACTION. âmandÄtum, -Ä«, n., order; âmandate,â âcommand,â âdemand.ââquam prÄ«mum: see Capvt XXXII.âequitÄtus, -Å«s, m., cavalry; âequitation,â âequestrian.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Summarize what you have learned about the Catilinarian conspiracy, and the role Cicero played in its suppression, from the several passages you have read in this book.

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Satrium quÄ«nq(uennÄlem) Å(rÅ) v(Ås) f(aciÄtis).
Robert I. Curtis

CIL 4.7620: Another electoral programma like the one presented in Capvt XXII above, painted on the front wall of the House of Trebius Valens, facing onto Pompeiiâs Via dellâAbbondanza (Reg. III, Ins. 2). This notice advocated election of Satrius to the post of duumvir quÄ«nquennÄlis, the title given to duumvirs (see Capvt XXII) who were elected in a census year (usually every five years, hence the title, from quÄ«nque); from other programmata we know the candidate was Marcus Satrius Valens, member of a prominent Pompeian family, who ran for this office along with Quintus Postumius Modestus in A.D. 75. Abbreviations were common in these dipinti, as was the punctum, the raised dot seen in the photo following QVINQ, which was often employed to mark the ending of a word or an abbreviation.âÅrÅ vÅs: sc. ut; the conj. was frequently omitted in a jussive noun clause.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, studentÄs! Here are some fÄ«Å items: if youâve found it easier to write a speech than a poem, youâll believe the old saying nÄscimur poÄtae, fÄ«mus ÅrÄtÅrÄs; a fiat (not the car) is a magisterial command, let it be done! From Publilius Syrus (the source of many of this bookâs sententiae) comes repente dÄ«vÄs nÄmÅ factus est bonus (like Juvenalâs nÄmÅ repente fuit turpissimus, Capvt XXX); also the legal expression regarding âconsenting adults,â volentÄ« nÅn fit iniÅ«ria, injury is not done to a willing person, and fÄ«at ut petitur, let it be done as requested, the phrase used for granting a legal petition. Et cÄtera ex vocÄbulÄ«s novÄ«s in hÅc capite: an accessit (lit., he/she approached, came close) is a recognition for second place or honorable mention in a competition; vinculum mÄtrimÅniÄ« is the bond of matrimony, and Ä vinculÅ mÄtrimÅniÄ« is legal Latin for an annulment; dÄ minimÄ«s nÅn cÅ«rat lÄx, the law does not concern itself with trivialities, is another familiar legal maxim; there are numerous mottoes and familiar sayings from ÅrÄre, including ÅrÄre et spÄrÄre and ÅrÄ et labÅrÄ; besides carpe diem, there is carpent tua pÅma nepÅtÄs, your descendants will harvest your fruits. CarpÄmus omnÄs diÄs, lÄctÅrÄs et lÄctrÄ«cÄs!

Front wall of the House of Trebius Valens with the electoral notice for Satrius and adjacent programmata Via dellâAbbondanza, Pompeii, Italy
Robert I. Curtis

CAPVT XXXVII

Conjugation of EÅ;
Place and Time Constructions

GRAMMATICA

IRREGULAR EÅ, Ä«re, iÄ«, itum, to go

The irregular fourth conjugation verb eÅ, Ä«re, iÄ«, itum, to go, is fully conjugated below; the verb is as common in Latin as âgoâ is in English, and so the conjugation should be learned thoroughly.

Indicative

Subjunctive

Imperatives: Sg. Ä« Pl. te Gerund: eÃºndÄ«

Â 

Participles (in common use): Pres. ÃÄns (eÃºntis, eÃºntÄ«, etc.) Fut. itrus, -a, -um

Â 

Infinitives: Pres. re Fut. itrus Ã©sse Perf. sse

Â 

A few irregularities in the present system of eÅ merit particular attention. First, the normal stem, Ä«-, seen in the present infinitive, becomes e- before a, o, and u in the present indicative and subjunctive (e.g., eÅ, eunt, eam, eundÄ«), as well as in all forms of the present participle, except the nominative singular, and in the gerund (a form explained in Capvt XXXIX). Second, the future has the tense sign and endings of a first or second conjugation verb, i.e., -bÅ, -bis, etc., not -am, -Äs, etc. The perfect system is regular except that ii- before s usually contracts to Ä«-; e.g., Ä«stÄ«, Ä«sse. Forms with -v-, such as Ä«vÄ«, are rare and do not appear in this book.

Only the active forms are presented here; the rare impersonal passive (e.g., Ä«tur, Ä«bÄtur) and the future and perfect passive participles (eundum, itum) do not appear in this book. Transitive compounds such as adeÅ, to approach, commonly have passive endings (e.g., adeor, adÄ«bÄtur, etc.), but those forms likewise are not employed in this book.

PLACE CONSTRUCTIONS

You have already learned the prepositions and cases employed in the following regular place constructions:

(1) PLACE WHERE: in or sub> + ablative
In illÄ urbe vÄ«sus est. He was seen in that city.
Nihil sub sÅle est novum. There is nothing new under the sun.

(2) PLACE TO WHICH: in, ad, or sub> + accusative
In illam urbem Ä«bit. He will go into that city.
Sub hastam hostis occidit. He fell under the enemyâs spear.

(3) PLACE FROM WHICH: ab, dÄ, or ex + ablative
Ex illÄ urbe iit. He went out of that city.

Special Place Constructions

With the actual names of cities, towns, and small islands, as well as the nouns domus, humus, and rÅ«s, no prepositions were employed in Latin, though they usually must be supplied in English translation (cf., however, English âhe ran homeâ for âhe ran to his homeâ).

(1) For PLACE WHERE with these words a special case was used in Latin, the LOCATIVE. The locative is identical to the genitive for the singular of first and second declension nouns; elsewhere the locative is usually identical to the ablative.

VÄ«sus est RÅmae, EphesÄ«, AthÄnÄ«s, et CarthÄgine.

He was seen at Rome, Ephesus, Athens, and Carthage.

(2) PLACE TO WHICH: accusative without a preposition

Äªbit RÅmam, Ephesum, AthÄnÄs, et CarthÄginem.

He will go to Rome, Ephesus, Athens, and Carthage.

(3) PLACE FROM WHICH: ablative without a preposition

Iit RÅmÄ, EphesÅ, AthÄnÄ«s, et CarthÄgine.

He went from Rome, Ephesus, Athens, and Carthage.

Domus, as seen in the VocÄbula below, is an irregular feminine noun, having some second declension endings and some fourth. In place constructions the commonest forms are as follows:

Â 

domÄ« (locative), at home

DomÄ« vÄ«sus est. He was seen at home.

domum (acc.), home (= to home)

Domum Ä«bit. He will go home.

domÅ (abl.), from home

DomÅ iit. He went from home.

Â 

The locative of humus, a feminine second declension noun, follows the rule: humÄ«, on the ground. The locative of rÅ«s is either rÅ«rÄ« or rÅ«re, in the country.

TIME CONSTRUCTIONS

You are familiar with the ABLATIVE OF TIME WHEN OR WITHIN WHICH (Capvt XV); no preposition is used in Latin, but in English translation you must supply âin,â âwithin,â âat,â âon,â etc., depending on the particular noun:

EÅdem diÄ iit. He went on the same day.

PaucÄ«s hÅrÄ«s domum Ä«bit. He will go home in/within a few hours.

Newly introduced here is the ACCUSATIVE OF DURATION OF TIME, which indicates, not the time at or within which an action occurs, but for how long a period of time the action occurs. No preposition is employed in Latin; in English translation, the preposition âforâ is sometimes used, sometimes omitted. The construction also commonly occurs with nÄtus to indicate a personâs age.

MultÅs annÅs vÄ«xit. He lived (for) many years.

PaucÄs hÅrÄs domÄ« manÄbit. He will stay at home (for) a few hours.

QuÄ«nque et vÄ«gintÄ« annÅs nÄtus, imperÄtor factus est. At the age of 25 (lit., having been born for 25 years), he became commander.

VOCÄBVLA

Youâll find a few exceptional forms in this list: the toponyms AthÄnae and SyrÄcÅ«sae are nouns that (like Ä«nsidiae) have plural forms with singular meanings; the Romans treated domus sometimes as second declension, sometimes fourth, and so youâll see a variety of endings. Licet is one of several common IMPERSONAL VERBS, which have only third person (and infinitive) forms because they have as their subject, not a person, but a phrase or clause or an indefinite âitâ or âoneâ; e.g., licet tibi abÄ«re literally means to leave is permitted for you, though the idiomatic translation is it is permissible for you to leave or, simply, you may leave. As an aid to mastering eÅ, try a synopsis with your book closed, then check your work by referring to the full conjugation above; the new noun iter, by the way, is related and literally means âa going.â

Â 

Athnae, AthÄnrum, f. pl., Athens (cf. athenaeum)

dÃ³mus, dÃ³mÅ«s (dÃ³mÄ«), f., house, home (domain, domicile, domestic, domesticate, dome, major-domo)

hÃºmus, hÃºmÄ«, f., ground, earth; soil (humus, exhume, inhumation, posthumous; cf. humiliate, humility, from humilis, lit. = on the earth, down-to-earth)

Ãter, itÃneris, n., journey; route, road (itinerant, itinerary; cf. eÅ)

rÅ«s, rris, n., the country, countryside (rustic, rusticity; cf. rÅ«sticor)

SyrÄcsae, SyrÄcÅ«srum, f. pl., Syracuse

Ã¡bsÄns, gen. absÃ©ntis, absent, away (absence, absentee, absenteeism, in absentia; from absum, abesse)

grtus, grta, grtum, pleasing, agreeable; grateful (gracious, gratify, gratis, gratuity, ingrate, ingratiate, congratulate)

idneus, idnea, idneum, suitable, fit, appropriate

immtus, immta, immtum, unmoved; unchanged; unrelenting (immotile; cf. moveÅ)

fÃ³rÄ«s, adv., out of doors, outside (foreclose, foreign, forest, forfeit)

Ã©Å, re, ÃÄ«, Ãtum, to go (ambition, circuit, concomitant, preterit, sedition, transient)

Ã¡beÅ, abre, Ã¡biÄ«, Ã¡bitum, to go away, depart, leave

Ã¡deÅ, adre, Ã¡diÄ«, Ã¡ditum, to go to, approach (adit)

Ã©xeÅ, exre, Ã©xiÄ«, Ã©xitum, to go out, exit (cf. exitium)

ÃneÅ, inre, ÃniÄ«, Ãnitum, to go in, enter; enter into, begin (initial, initiate, initiative)

Ã³beÅ, obre, Ã³biÄ«, Ã³bitum, to go up against, meet; die (obiter dictum, obituary)

pÃ©reÅ, perre, pÃ©riÄ«, pÃ©ritum, to pass away, be destroyed (perish)

rÃ©deÅ, redre, rÃ©diÄ«, rÃ©ditum, to go back, return

interfÃciÅ, interfÃcere, interfcÄ«, interfÃ©ctum, to kill, murder

lÃcet, licre, lÃcuit, impers., + dat. + infin., it is permitted (to someone to do something), one may (license, licentious, illicit, leisure; the abbreviations âviz.â and âsc.â: see LatÄ«na Est Gaudium below)

peregrnor, peregrÄ«nrÄ«, peregrÄ«ntus sum, to travel abroad, wander (peregrine, peregrinate, pilgrim, pilgrimage; from per + ager)

requiscÅ, requiscere, requivÄ«, requitum, to rest (requiescat, requiem)

sÃ³leÅ, solre, sÃ³litus sum, to be accustomed (insolent, obsolete)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After studying the new grammar, memorizing the vocabulary, and checking your mastery with the Self-Tutorial Exercises and key, scan the following readings for (a) forms of eÅ and its compounds, identifying tense, number, person, and mood of each, and (b) occurrences of place and time constructions, identifying the case and use of each. Listen to the CDs, if you have them, and read aloud for comprehension before translating.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Dehinc petet Ä frÄtre meÅ et sorÅre ut occÄsiÅnem carpant et in urbem quam celerrimÄ ineant.

Nisi domum hÄc aestÄte redÄ«ssÄs, in longÅ itinere AthÄnÄs fortasse peregrÄ«nÄtÄ« essÄmus et nÅs ibi oblectÄvissÄmus.

NÄ levÄs quidem timÅrÄs ferre poterÄtis; rÅ«rÄ«, igitur, nÅn in urbe semper vÄ«vÄbÄtis.

Haec locÅ«tÄ«, lÄctÅribus et lÄctrÄ«cibus persuÄdÄbunt nÄ opÄs cupÄ«dinÄsque praemiÄ«s bonae vÄ«tae antepÅnant.

MultÅs annÅs eÅs cÄ«vitÄtÄ« servÄ«re coÄgit, sed animÅs numquam contudit.

At nÅs, ipsÄ« multa mala passÄ«, cÅnÄtÄ« sumus eÄ«s Ä«rÄtÄ«s persuÄdÄre ut servÅs vinculÄ«s lÄ«berÄrent et nÄ cui nocÄrent.

SÄ« quis vult aliÅs iuvÄre, cÅ«ret ut ad eÅs adeat plÄnus sapientiae.

PhilosophÄ« cÅtÄ«diÄ requÄ«rÄbant utrum illÄ« discipulÄ« nÄtÅ«rae pÄrÄrent.

ContemnÄmus omnia perÄ«cula, ea ex pectoribus exigÄmus, et fateÄmur haec difficillima RÅmae suscipienda esse.

OmnÄs solent mÄ«rÄrÄ« ea pulcherrima quae AthÄnÄ«s vident.

Nisi mÄvÄ«s morÄ«, exÄ« SyrÄcÅ«sÄ«s, sequere alium ducem, et accÄde AthÄnÄs.

FÄmina candida ante speculum immÅta stetit, sed sÄ spectÄre recÅ«sÄvit et animÅs recreÄre nÅn potuit.

PaucÄs hÅras duodecim puerÄ« puellaeque humÄ« sedÄbant, ut magistra, subrÄ«dÄns et eÅs serÄnÄns, plÅ«rimÄs fÄbulÄs nÄrrÄbat.

SÄ« sapiÄs et tibi imperÄre poteris, fÄ«Äs grÄtior iÅ«stiorque, parcÄs miserÄ«s ac amÄ«cÅs fovÄbis.

They commanded that this be done in Rome for three days.

Unless he goes to Syracuse within five days, his fatherâs fear will become greater.

He thought that his brother would perhaps not go away from home that summer.

Nobody may (use licet) speak freely in that country, as we all know.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

MortÄlia facta perÄ«bunt. (*Horace.)

NoctÄs atque diÄs patet ÄtrÄ« iÄnua DÄ«tis. (*Vergil.âÄter, Ätra, Ätrum, dark, gloomy; âatrocious,â âatrocity.ââDÄ«s, DÄ«tis, m., Dis, another name for Pluto, god of the dead.)

AnnÄ« eunt mÅre modÅque fluentis aquae. Numquam hÅra quae praeteriit potest redÄ«re; Å«tÄmur aetÄte. (Ovid.âpraeterÄ«re, to go by, pass; âpreterit,â âpraeteritio.â)

Heu, obiÄ«! Quid ego ÄgÄ«! FÄ«lius nÅn rediit Ä cÄnÄ hÄc nocte. (Terence.)

FrÄter meus Årat nÄ abeÄs domÅ. (Terence.)

DÄ«cit patrem ab urbe abÄ«sse sed frÄtrem esse domÄ«. (Terence.)

TertiÄ hÅrÄ forÄ«s Ä«bam SacrÄ ViÄ, ut meus mÅs est. (Horace.âSacrÄ ViÄ: ABLATIVE OF ROUTE, a common construction, usually translated by way ofâ¦. The Sacred Way was the main street through the Roman Forum; another famous street in Rome was Via LÄta, from lÄtus, -a, -um, broad: how would you translate the streetâs name?)

DÄnique DÄmoclÄs, cum sÄ«c beÄtus esse nÅn posset, ÅrÄvit Dionsium tyrannum ut abÄ«re Ä cÄnÄ licÄret. (Cicero.)

EÅ tempore, SyrÄcÅ«sÄ«s captÄ«s, MÄrcellus multa RÅmam mÄ«sit; SyrÄcÅ«sÄ«s autem multa atque pulcherrima relÄ«quit. (Cicero.)

DiÄs multÅs in eÄ nÄve fuÄ«; ita adversÄ tempestÄte Å«sÄ« sumus. (Terence.)

Äªram populÄ« ferre nÅn poterÅ, sÄ« in exsilium ieris. (Cicero.)

Caesare interfectÅ, BrÅ«tus RÅmÄ AthÄnÄs fÅ«git. (Cicero.)

Ipse RÅmam redÄ«rem, sÄ« satis cÅnsiliÄ« dÄ hÄc rÄ habÄrem. (Cicero.)

NÄmÅ est tam senex ut nÅn putet sÄ Å«num annum posse vÄ«vere. (Cicero.)

Dum nÅs fÄta sinunt, oculÅs satiÄmus amÅre; nox tibi longa venit, nec reditÅ«ra diÄs. (*Propertius.âsinÅ, -ere, to allow; âsite,â âdesinence.ââreditÅ«ra: sc. est, fut. act. periphrastic for redÄ«bit; diÄs is sometimes f.)

Adversus nÄminÄ«, numquam praepÅnit sÄ aliÄ«s. (Terence.âpraepÅnÅ, -ere, -posuÄ«, -positum, to place before; âpreposition.â)

The Roman Forum with remains of the temple of Castor and Pollux in the foreground and beyond it the Sacra Via Rome, Italy
James C. Anderson, Jr.

Thanksâ¦ But No Thanks!

Candidius nihil est tÄ, CaeciliÄne. NotÄvÄ«:

sÄ« quandÅ ex nostrÄ«s disticha pauca legÅ,

prÅtinus aut MÄrsÄ« recitÄs aut scrÄ«pta CatullÄ«.

Hoc mihi dÄs, tamquam dÄteriÅra legÄs,

5 Â Â Â  ut collÄta magis placeant mea? CrÄdimus istud:

mÄlo tamen recitÄs, CaeciliÄne, tua!

*Martial Epig. 2.71: Caecilianus is yet another contemporary reciter on Martialâs âdonât go thereâ list! Meter: elegiac couplet. âcandidius: here, kinder, more generous. ânotÄre, to note, notice; ânotary,â âannotate.âânostrÄ«s: sc. libellÄ«s.âdisticha: Gk. acc., couplets, verses. âMÄrsÄ«: Domitius Marsus, a popular Augustan poet, who, like Catullus, was a favorite of Martialâs; only fragments of his work survive.âscrÄ«ptum, -Ä«, n., writing, written works; from the fourth principal part of scrÄ«bÅ; âmanuscript,â âprescription.ââhocâ¦ dÄs, i.e., as a favor.âtamquam: here introduces an imagined comparison, something like a condition, hence the verb is subjunctive.âdÄteriÅra: sc. scrÄ«pta, worse poetry; âdeteriorate.ââcollÄta: with mea, compared, in comparison; âcollate,â âcollation.ââmÄloâ¦ (ut) recitÄs: as we have seen before, the conj. is often omitted before a jussive noun clause.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Explain the jokeâi.e., how can Caecilianus really make Martialâs poetry look good? The punch-line, as so often, comes down to one, strategically placed word: what is that word?

Trimalchioâs Epitaph

âÄªnscrÄ«ptiÅ quoque vidÄ dÄ«ligenter sÄ« haec satis idÅnea tibi vidÄtur: âC. Pompeius TrimalchiÅ MaecÄnÄtiÄnus hÄ«c requiÄscit. Huic sÄvirÄtus absentÄ« dÄcrÄtus est. Cum posset in omnibus decuriÄ«s RÅmae esse, tamen nÅluit. Pius, fortis, fidÄlis, ex parvÅ crÄvit; sestertium relÄ«quit trecentiÄs, nec umquam philosophum audÄ«vit. ValÄ. Et tÅ«.ââ Haec ut dÄ«xit TrimalchiÅ, flÄre coepit Å«bertim. FlÄbat et FortÅ«nÄta; flÄbat et Habinnas; tÅta dÄnique familia, tamquam in fÅ«nus rogÄta, lÄmentÄtiÅne triclÄ«nium implÄvit.

Â 

*Petronius Sat. 71â72: Petronius (his exact identity and dates are uncertain, but probably Titus Petronius Arbiter, forced by Nero to commit suicide in A.D. 66) was author of the Satyricon, a picaresque novel whose antiheroes in one episode arrive at the home of Trimalchio, a freedman known for his lavish but utterly gauche dinner-parties; in this scene Trimalchio asks his guests their opinion of his proposed epitaph.âÄ«nscrÄ«ptiÅ, -Ånis, f., = Eng.; the more usual order would be quoque vidÄ dÄ«ligenter sÄ« haec Ä«nscrÄ«ptiÅâ¦.âC.: = GÄius.âMaecÄnÄtiÄnus: Trimalchio takes this name to associate himself with the famous Maecenas, a powerful and wealthy associate of Augustus.âhuicâ¦ absentÄ«: i.e., in absentia from Rome.âsÄvirÄtus, -Å«s, m., the post of sÄvir AugustÄlis, a member of the six-man commission that supervised the cult of the emperor.âdecÅ«ria, -ae, f., club; these were groups of ten men organized for both business and social purposes.âpius, -a, -um, devoted, dedicated; âpious,â âexpiate.ââex parvÅ: i.e., from humble beginnings.âsestertiumâ¦ trecentiÄs: 30 million sesterces, a hefty sum!ânecâ¦ audÄ«vit: i.e., he ânever even went to college!ââet tÅ«: sc. valÄ; epitaphs typically represented such âconversationsâ: the deceased wishes the passerby âFarewell,â and the passerby, reading the inscription, replies, âAnd you (likewise farewell).ââhaec ut: = ut haec.âflÄre, to weep; from the related adj. flÄbilis, lamentable, tearful, we have âfeeble.ââÅ«bertim, adv., profusely. âet: = etiam. âFortunata (âLuckyâ) and Habinnas were Trimalchioâs wife and a guest.âfÅ«nus, -neris, n., funeral; âfunereal,â âfunerary.ââlamentÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f.; âlament,â âlamentable.â âtriclÄ«nium, -iÄ«, n., dining room. âimpleÅ, -plÄre, -plÄvÄ«, -plÄtum, to fill; âimplement,â âimplementation.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Elsewhere during the banquet, Trimalchio joyfully mis-tells the Trojan War story, confusing all the characters and events; in what specific ways does his epitaph reflect his anti-intellectualism, and other aspects of his arrogance?

MÄrcus QuÄ«ntÅ FrÄtrÄ« S.

Licinius, servus AesÅpÄ« nostrÄ«, RÅmÄ AthÄnÄs fÅ«git. Is AthÄnÄ«s apud PatrÅnem prÅ lÄ«berÅ virÅ fuit. Deinde in Asiam abiit. PosteÄ PlatÅ, quÄ«dam quÄ« AthÄnÄ«s solet esse multum et quÄ« tum AthÄnÄ«s fuerat cum Licinius AthÄnÄs vÄnisset, litterÄ«s AesÅpÄ« dÄ LiciniÅ acceptÄ«s, hunc EphesÄ« comprehendit et in custÅdiam trÄdidit. PetÅ Ä tÄ, frÄter, ut EphesÅ exiÄns servum RÅmam tÄcum redÅ«cÄs. AesÅpus enim ita Ä«rÄscitur propter servÄ« scelus ut nihil eÄ« grÄtius possit esse quam recuperÄtiÅ fugitÄ«vÄ«. ValÄ.

Â 

Cicero Q Fr. 1.2.14: As noted earlier, hundreds of Ciceroâs letters survive, on both personal and political matters; this one he wrote to his brother Quintus, then governor of the Roman province of Asia (Asia Minor), regarding a friendâs fugitive slave.âS.: = salÅ«tem dÄ«cit, says greetings, a standard opening in Roman letters.âAesÅpus: the leading tragic actor in Rome and a friend of Cicero, to whom he gave elocution lessons.âPatrÅ, -trÅnis, m., identified by Cicero only as an Epicurean.âPlatÅ: another Epicurean, from Sardis.âmultum, adv.âEphesus, -Ä«, m., a city in Asia Minor.âre + dÅ«cÅ; âreduce,â âreduction.â âÄ«rÄscor, -cÄ«, Ä«rÄtus sum, to be angry; âirascible,â âirateâ; cf. Ä«ra and Ä«rÄtus.ârecuperÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., recovery; ârecuperateâ and ârecoverâ are cognates, both derived from recuperÅ, to regain. âfugitÄ«vus, -Ä«, m.; = Eng.; cf. fugere.

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Just to be sure you understand the geography, trace Liciniusâ itinerary, referring to the maps of the Roman Empire and Greece (Maps 1 and 2).

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Å utinam liceat collÅ complexa tenÄre

brÄciola et tenerÄ«s Åscula ferre labellÄ«s.

Äª nunc, ventÄ«s tua gaudia, pÅ«pula, crÄde;

crÄde mihÄ«, levis est nÄtÅ«ra virÅrum.

Saepe ego, cu<m> mediÄ vigilÄre<m> perdita nocte, 5

haec mÄcum meditÄ<n>sâmultÅs FortÅ«na quÅs supstulit altÄ,

hÅs modo prÅiectÅs subitÅ praecipitÄsque premit;

sÄ«c Venus ut subitÅ co<n>iÅ«nxit corpora amantum,

dÄ«vidit lÅ«x, et sÄ pariies quid aamâ¦.

CIL 4.5296: This elaborate graffito found near a doorway in a house in Reg. IX, Ins. 7, is an erotic poem in dactylic hexameter, though the meter, as well as some of the syntax, is irregularâdue either to compositional flaws or to the failure of the person inscribing it on the wall to recall the text perfectly from memory. The lovesick soliloquy is clearly delivered, and the poem itself most likely authored, by a woman; the piece is a variation on the PARACLAUSITHYRON form, a verse lament spoken by a lover shut out at his or her paramourâs door. Though echos from the republican poets Catullus and Lucretius have been detected, the poem is clearly an original composition and further testimony to the level of literacy found in Pompeii.âutinam, conj. + subjunct., introducing wishes, how I wish that, if only. âcollum, -Ä«, n., neck; âcollarâ; collÅ: with tenÄre brÄciola, sc. âaround (my)â¦.ââcomplector, -plectÄ«, -plexus sum, to hold in the arms, hug, embrace; âcomplection,â âcomplexâ; complexa: this partic. is commonly employed in combination with tenÄre, in the sense of âholding in an embrace.ââbrÄciolum: = brÄcchiolum, -Ä«, n., dimin. of brÄcchium, little arm; âbrace,â âbracelet.ââtener, -nera, -nerum, soft, tender; âtenderness.ââlabellum, -Ä«, n., diminutive of labrum, (little) lip; âlabellum,â âlabroid.ââventus, -Ä«, m., wind; âvent,â âventilate.ââgaudium, -Ä«, n., joy, delight; âgaudy,â âgaudiness.ââpÅ«pula, -ae, f., diminutive of pÅ«pa (see CIL 4.4485 in Capvt XI above), little girl, little doll; âpupa,â âpupal.ââlevis: fickle would be a good choice here; what are some others?âvirÅrum: i.e., as opposed to fÄminÄrum.âvigilÄre, to be awake, watch; âvigil,â âvigilantâ; a vowel before final -m was often nasalized and, as the -m itself was barely pronounced, it was frequently dropped in spelling, as the writer has done here with both cum (influenced in part by the initial m- of mediÄ following) and vigilÄrem. âperditus, -a, -um, ruined, lost (emotionally), hopeless; âperdition.ââmeditor, -tÄrÄ«, -tÄtus sum, to think about constantly, contemplate, ponder; âmeditate,â âmeditationâ; the writer again dropped the nasal -n- from the ending of meditÄns. We would expect a finite verb here, but the sense breaks off, either in error or as a dramatic APOSIOPESIS. âFortÅ«na quÅs: in prose FortÅ«na, as subj. of the rel. clause, would follow quÅs, but word order in poetry, as you have seen, is much freer; Fortuna was widely worshiped as a deity throughout the Roman empire.âsupstulit: = sustulit (substulit), from tollÅ. âaltÄ, adv. from altus, -a, -um, high, up; âaltitude,â âaltimeter.ââmodo, adv., now, just now; just, only. âprÅiciÅ, -icere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectum, to throw forward, cast out; âproject,â âprojectile.ââpraeceps, gen. -cipitis, plunging head-first, headlong, in an uncontrolled fall; âprecipitous(ly).ââsÄ«câ¦ ut: = sÄ«cut, conj., just as.âconiungÅ, -ere, -iÅ«nxÄ«, -iÅ«nctum, to join together, connect; âconjoin,â âconjunctionâ; in coiÅ«nxit the writer has again dropped medial -n-, likely another reflection of her pronunciation.âdÄ«vidÅ, -ere, -vÄ«sÄ«, -vÄ«sum, to separate into two parts; divide; âdivision.ââlÅ«x: i.e., the dawn of a new day, after a love affair has ended; the remainder of the verse is unintelligible, and one or more additional lines may have been lost.

âPoetess of Pompeiiâ Fresco from Insula Occidentale, Pompeii Museo Archaeologico Nazionale, Naples, Italy
Scala / Art Resource, NY

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: In what one or two places do you see the clearest evidence that the speaker is female? What do you see as the intended effect of the diminutives in lines 2â3? What apparently has the addressee done to upset the speaker, and what is the speakerâs admonition to her in verses 3â4? What are the writerâs closing observations on the power of the goddesses Fortuna and Venus? What do you imagine the poemâs closing verse(s) may have saidâi.e., how would you have concluded the poem? Verse 2, with its repeated la/la/la/llÄ«s syllables is highly alliterative; which other lines are marked by alliteration?

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! These familiar words and phrases from eÅ are certainly going to interest you (notice how colloquial English employs âgoâ as an auxiliary verb to indicate futurity, and cf. Latinâs use of Ä«rÄ« in those rare future passive infinitive forms): exit and exeunt omnÄs are stage directions; to âperishâ is to be âthoroughly goneâ (from per + eÅ), i.e., to make oneâs final âexitâ from lifeâs stage, an exodus often marked by obiit on old tombstones or by the abbreviation O.S.P. for obiit sine prÅle (he/she died without offspring, from prÅlÄs, prÅlis, f., the source of âproletariateâ); pereant quÄ« ante nÅs nostra dÄ«xÄrunt is a proverbial curse on folks who had all our best ideas before we had them ourselves (!); iter (lit. a going) is related to eÅ and also to the adverb obiter, which gives us obiter dictum, something said along the way (or âin passingâ), and likewise obiter scrÄ«ptum; Monty Python fans will recall the RÅmÄnÄ«, Ä«te domum routine from the âLife of Brianâ; and finally aut bibat aut abeat, let him either drink or go away, is an old Roman proverb and the motto of our local pub!

Et cÄtera: grÄtus is related to grÄtia, favor, kindness, gratitude, as in grÄtiÄs agere, to give thanks, DeÄ« grÄtiÄ, by the grace of God, and also English âgratis,â something done âfor thanksâ (grÄtÄ«s), i.e., without a fee. R.I.P., also found on tombstones (though not Trimalchioâs!), stands for requiÄscat in pÄce (remember the jussive subjunctive?); rÅ«s in urbe, a phrase from Martial, refers to a city park or garden or some other rustic setting or view that reminds one of the countryside. VidÄlicet, namely, derives from vidÄre licet, lit., it is permitted to see, i.e., it is plain to see. In medieval manuscripts the word was often contracted to vi-et, and one abbreviation for et resembled a z; hence the abbreviation viz. From another compound of licet is the much more common abbreviation sc. for scÄ«licet, namely, clearly (from scÄ«re licet, you may understand), which we use as an instruction to supply some word or idea that has been omitted from a text but is readily understood (see the example above in the notes on âTrimalchioâ). Well, enough for today: nunc domum eÄmus!

CAPVT XXXVIII

Relative Clauses of Characteristic; Dative of Reference; Supines

GRAMMATICA

RELATIVE CLAUSES OF CHARACTERISTIC

The type of relative clause you have encountered thus far provides some factual description of its antecedent, an actual person or thing, and thus has an indicative verb (Capvt XVII); e.g., haec est discipula quae LatÄ«nam amat, this is the student who loves Latin. The RELATIVE CLAUSE OF CHARACTERISTIC, by contrast, describes some general quality of an antecedent that is itself either general, indefinite, interrogative, or negative, and accordingly has its verb in the subjunctive; e.g., haec est discipula quae LatÄ«nam amet, this is a student (or the sort of student) who would love Latin.

Recognition: The relative clause of characteristic is easily recognized, since its verb is subjunctive and its antecedent is often obviously general, negative, etc. (typical examples are sunt quÄ«, there are people who; quis est quÄ«, who is there who; nÄmÅ est quÄ«, there is no one who). Translation: the auxiliary âwouldâ is sometimes used in translating the subjunctive verb, and sometimes a phrase like âthe sort ofâ or âthe kind ofâ is employed in the main clause to make it clear that the antecedent is indefinite:

Quis est quÄ« huic crÄdat? Who is there who trusts this man (of such a sort that he would trust this man)?

NÄmÅ erat quÄ« hoc scÄ«ret. There was no one who knew this.

Sunt quÄ« hoc faciant. There are some who do this (of such a sort as to do this).

Is nÅn est quÄ« hoc faciat. He is not a person who does (would do) this.

Hic est liber quem omnÄs legant. This is the kind of book that all read (a book that all would read).

Hic est liber quem omnÄs legunt. This is the book that all are reading (= a fact, hence the indicative).

Some relative clauses have the force of result (e.g., S.A. 4 below), purpose (see âMore Examples of Roman Witâ below), causal, or adversative clauses (i.e., clauses otherwise generally introduced by ut, cum, etc.) and so also have subjunctive verbs.

DATIVE OF REFERENCE OR INTEREST

The dative case is often used to indicate a person (or a thing) to whom some statement refers, or from whose perspective it is true, or to whom it is of special interest. This DATIVE OF REFERENCE OR INTEREST (which should be compared to the dative uses discussed in Capvt XXXV) can sometimes be translated with âtoâ or âfor,â but often some more elaborate phrase is required, depending upon the context, as you will see from the following examples; occasionally the function seems to be simply possessive (as in the second example below), but the intended force is generally more emotional.

SÄ« quis metuÄns vÄ«vet, lÄ«ber mihi nÅn erit umquam.

If anyone lives in fear, he will not ever be freeâas I see it (mihi) or to my way of thinking or in my opinion.

Caret tibi pectus inÄnÄ« ambitiÅne?

Is your breast free from vain ambitionâare you sure (tibi)?

NÅ«llÄ«us culpae mihi cÅnscius sum.

In my own heart (mihi), I am conscious of no fault.

Claudia est sapiÄns multÄ«s.

To many people Claudia is wise.

Remember to add this usage to your list of other dative case constructions (indirect object, dative of agent, dative with adjectives, dative with special verbs and compounds).

SUPINES

The SUPINE is a defective fourth declension verbal noun, based on the same stem as the perfect passive participle; only two forms were in common use, the accusative and ablative singular. The supines for our model verbs are: acc. laudtum, abl. laudtÅ«; mÃ³nitum, mÃ³nitÅ«; ctum, ctÅ«; audtum, audtÅ«; cÃ¡ptum, cÃ¡ptÅ«.

The ablative is used with the neuter of certain adjectives to indicate in what respect a particular quality is applicable: e.g., mÄ«rÄbile dictÅ«, amazing to say (lit., amazing in respect to saying); facile factÅ«, easy to do. The accusative (which must not be confused with the perfect passive participle) is employed with verbs of motion to indicate purpose: e.g., Ä«bant RÅmam rogÄtum pecÅ«niam, they were going to Rome to ask for money; persuÄsum amÄ«cÄ«s vÄnÄrunt, they came to persuade their friends (note that the supine can take a direct object, a dative, or any other construction the basic verb can govern).

VOCÄBVLA

Not only is arbor, tree, feminine, but so regularly are the names of individual trees, regardless of declension, e.g.: betulla, -ae, birch; fÄ«cus, -Ä«, fig; abies, -etis, fir; quercus, -Å«s, oak. Some more look-alikes to beware of: opus/ops, queror/quaerÅ, odium/Åtium. As you learn the verbs in this list, see if you can form the supines for the four regular ones (excluding metuÅ, which lacks a fourth principal part, and the deponent queror); your instructor can check your answers, or you can simply compare the supines of the five model verbs presented above. Finally, donât forget the sound of gn in dignitÄs: listen to this, and all new words, online or on the CDs, and practice saying each aloud several times.

Â 

Ã¡rbor, Ã¡rboris, f., tree (arbor, Arbor Day, arboretum, arboriculture)

dÃgnitÄs, dignittis, f., merit, prestige, dignity (indignity, deign, dignify, indignant, indignation; cf. dignus)

dÃ³lor, dolris, m., pain, grief (doleful, dolorous, condolences; cf. doleÅ)

Ã³dium, Ã³diÄ«, n., hatred (odium, odious, annoy, ennui, noisome; cf. ÅdÄ«)

Ã³pus, Ã³peris, n., a work, task; deed, accomplishment (opus, opera, operate, operative, inoperative, co-operate, hors dâoeuvre, maneuver, manure)

ÅrtiÅ, ÅrÄtinis, f., speech (oration, oratory; cf. ÅrÅ, ÅrÄtor)

pÄs, pÃ©dis, m., lower leg, foot (pedal, pedate, pedestal, pedestrian, pedicel, pedigree, piedmont, pawn, peon, pioneer, biped, quadruped, impede, impediment, expedite, expedition, expeditious)

sÃ¡tor, satris, m., sower, planter; begetter, father; founder (cf. serere, to plant, sow; serial, series, assert, desert, exert, insert)

frmus, frma, frmum, firm, strong; reliable (firmament, affirm, affirmation, affirmative, confirm, confirmation, farm, farmer)

Ä«nfrmus, Ä«nfrma, Ä«nfrmum, not strong, weak, feeble (infirm, infirmary, infirmity)

mÄ«rbilis, mÄ«rbile, amazing, wondrous, remarkable (mirabilia, admirable, marvel, miracle, mirador, mirage, mirror; cf. mÄ«ror)

prstinus, prstina, prstinum, ancient; former, previous (pristine)

sublmis, sublme, elevated, lofty; heroic, noble (sublimate, sublime, sublimity; not subliminal)

Ã©tsÄ« (et + sÄ«), conj. with indic. or subjunct. according to rules for sÄ«, even if, although

Ã©rgÄ, prep. + acc., toward

libÃ©nter, adv., with pleasure, gladly (ad lib.; cf. the IMPERSONAL VERB libet, it pleases, is pleasing; cognate with âloveâ)

impÃ©diÅ, impedre, impedvÄ«, impedtum, to impede, hinder, prevent (impediment, impedance, impeach; cf. pÄs above and see LÄtina Est Gaudium)

mÃ©tuÅ, metÃºere, mÃ©tuÄ«, to fear, dread; be afraid for + dat. (meticulous; cf. metus)

quÃ©ror, quÃ©rÄ«, quÃ©stus sum, to complain, lament (querulous; cf. quarrel, from querÄla, -ae, complaint)

recognscÅ, recognscere, recognvÄ«, recognitum, to recognize, recollect (recognition, recognizance, reconnaisance, reconnoitre; cf. nÅscÅ, cognÅscÅ)

suspÃ©ndÅ, suspÃ©ndere, suspÃ©ndÄ«, suspnsum, to hang up, suspend; interrupt (suspense, suspension; cf. pendere, to hang, pendant, pendulum)

vndÅ, vndere, vndidÄ«, vnditum, to sell (vend, vendor)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After testing your mastery of the chapterâs new material with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, scan the readings for each (a) relative clause of characteristic, (b) dative of reference, and (c) supine; remember that in translating the relative clause of characteristic you often must supply some word/phrase indicating the indefinite nature of the antecedent or action, e.g., âa book that all would enjoy,â âthe sort of book that all enjoy.â Listen to the CDs, if you have them, and read aloud for comprehension before translating.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

RÄgÄ« persuÄsÄ« ut sorÅrÄ« frÄtrÄ«que tuÅ grÄtiÅra praemia libenter daret.

Deinde, ab eÄ Ä«nsulÄ nÄve profecta, vÄ«sum amÄ«cÅs AthÄnÄs iniit.

Eum hortÄtÄ« sumus ut ad Caesarem sine timÅre accÄdere cÅnÄrÄtur.

SolitÄ« sunt eÄ« crÄdere quÄ« philosophiae servÄ«ret, virtÅ«tem sequerÄtur, et cupÄ«dinÄs superÄret.

SapiÄns nÅs Årat nÄ virÄ«s sententiÄrum adversÄrum noceÄmus.

In illÄ«s terrÄ«s nÅn licet litterÄ«s bonÄ«s vÄrÄ«sque studÄre, ut sub tyrannÅ saepe fit; dÄbÄs, igitur, exÄ«re et peregrÄ«nÄrÄ«.

CÅ«rÄmus nÄ cÄ«vitÄtem eÄ«s trÄdÄmus quÄ« sÄ patriae antepÅnant.

Sunt Ä«nfÄ«rmÄ« quÄ« levia opera mÄ«rentur et semper sibi ignÅscant.

Iste dux, diÅ« absÄns, tam stultÄ«s cÅnsiliÄ«s cÄ«vitÄtÄ« Å«tÄbÄtur ut mÄ«lia cÄ«vium adversa patÄ« cÅgerentur atque multÄ« bonÄ« perÄ«rent.

Haec locÅ«tus, fassus est illÅs, quÄ« odium immÅtum ergÄ cÄ«vitÄtem multÅs annÅs habÄbant, RÅmae interfectÅs esse.

Initium operis nÅs saepe impeditâinÄ«te opus nunc!

Sator sublÄ«mis hominum atque animÄlium omnibus nÅbÄ«s animÄs dedit; cum corpora obeant, animae numquam morientur.

Cum rÅ«s rediimus, tum domÄ« invÄnimusâmÄ«rÄbile vÄ«sÅ«!âplÅ«rimÅs amÄ«cÅs.

Cicero, who was the greatest Roman orator, was a consul who would obey the senate.

I shall persuade him to become a better student and to return to Syracuse soon, I assure you.

We begged them not to trust a man whom a tyrant pleased.

Wherefore, let that man who hesitates to defend our country depart (use abeÅ) to another land.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

SÄ omnÄs CaesarÄ« ad pedÄs prÅiÄcÄrunt. (Caesar.âprÅ-iaciÅ; âproject,â âprojectile.â)

HÄ«c in nostrÅ numerÅ sunt quÄ« lÄgÄs contemnant ac dÄ exitiÅ huius urbis cÅtÄ«diÄ cÅgitent. (Cicero.)

Quis est cui haec rÄs pÅ«blica atque possessiÅ lÄ«bertÄtis nÅn sint cÄrae et dulcÄs? (Id.âpossessiÅ, -Ånis, f.; âpossess,â âpossessive.â)

Quae domus tam stabilis est, quae cÄ«vitÄs tam fÄ«rma est quae nÅn odiÄ«s, invidiÄ, atque Ä«nsidiÄ«s possit contundÄ«? (Id.âstabilis, -e; âstability,â âestablish.ââquaeâ¦ contundÄ«: here the characteristic clause has the force of result.)

QuÄrÄ, quid est quod tibi iam in hÄc urbe placÄre possit, in quÄ nÄmÅ est quÄ« tÄ nÅn metuat? (Id.)

Quis enim aut eum dÄ«ligere potest quem metuat aut eum Ä quÅ sÄ metuÄ« putet? (Id.)

Tibi sÅlÄ« necÄs multÅrum cÄ«vium impÅ«nÄ«tae ac lÄ«berae fuÄrunt. (Id.ânex, necis, f., murder; âinternecine,â âpernicious;â cf. necÅ.âimpÅ«nÄ«tus, -a, -um, unpunished; âimpune,â âimpunity,â âpunitiveâ; cf. poena.)

HabÄtis autem eum cÅnsulem quÄ« exigere officium et pÄrÄre vestrÄ«s dÄcrÄtÄ«s nÅn dubitet atque vÅs dÄfendere possit. (Id.âdÄcrÄtum, -Ä«, n., decree; âdecretal.â)

Ille mihi semper deus erit. (Vergil.)

NÅ«llus dolor est quem nÅn longinquitÄs temporis minuat ac molliat. (*Cicero.âlonginquitÄs, -tÄtis, n., length; âlonginquity.â)

ParÄvisse dÄ«vitiÄs fuit multÄ«s hominibus nÅn fÄ«nis sed mÅ«tÄtiÅ malÅrum. (Epicurus quoted by Seneca.âmÅ«tÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., change; âmutation,â âpermutation.â)

Nihil est opere et manÅ« factum quod tempus nÅn cÅnsÅ«mat. (Cicero.)

VÄ«ribus corporis dÄficientibus, vigor tamen animÄ« dÅ«rÄvit illÄ« ad vÄ«tae fÄ«nem. (Pliny.âdÄficiÅ, -ere, to fail; âdefect,â âdeficient,â âdeficit.ââvigor, -gÅris, m. âdÅ«rÄre, to last; âdurable,â âduration.â)

Nunc est bibendum; nunc pede lÄ«berÅ pulsanda tellus. (*Horace; from his ode celebrating the death of the Egyptian queen Cleopatra.âsc. nÅbÄ«s as dat. of agent with both pass. periphrastics.âpulsÄre, to strike, beat; with pulsanda, sc. est, should be struck, i.e., danced upon; âpulse,â âpulsar.ââtellÅ«s, -lÅ«ris, f., = terra; âtellurian,â âtellurium.â)

Ä tacitÅ vultÅ« scÄ«re futÅ«ra licet. (*Ovid.âtacitus, -a, -um, silent; âtacit,â âtaciturn.ââvultus, -Å«s, m., countenance, face.)

Stultitiast, pater, vÄnÄtum dÅ«cere invÄ«tÄs canÄs. (*Plautus.âstultitia, -ae, f., noun from stultus, -a, -um; âstultifying.ââstultitiast: a common type of contraction known as prodelision, = stultitia est.âvÄnor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, to go hunting, hunt.âinvÄ«tus, -a, -um, unwilling, against oneâs will; cf. volÅ.âcanis, -is, m./f., dog; âcanine.â)

Note on a Book by Lucan

Sunt quÄ«dam quÄ« mÄ dÄ«cant nÅn esse poÄtam;

sed quÄ« mÄ vÄndit bibliopÅla putat.

*Martial Epig. 14.194: In this note from a gift copy of Lucanâs poetry (compare the note from a copy of Catullus in Capvt XXX), the author is himself imagined as speaking; meter: elegiac couplet.âbibliopÅla, -ae, m., book-dealer, antecedent of quÄ«; âbibliopole,â âbibliopolist,â and cf. âbibliographyâ and âbibliophile,â all Gk. in origin.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Is the accusation in line 1 real or hypothetical?âhow do you know? The language of verse, as of daily speech, is often elliptical; what must be understood following putat?

More Examples of Roman Wit

Cum quÄ«dam, querÄns, dÄ«xisset uxÅrem suam dÄ fÄ«cÅ« suspendisse sÄ, amÄ«cus illÄ«us âAmÄbÅ tÄ,â inquit, âdÄ mihi ex istÄ arbore surculÅs quÅs seram!â

Cum quÄ«dam ÅrÄtor sÄ misericordiam ÅrÄtiÅne fortasse mÅvisse putÄret, rogÄvit Catulum vidÄrÄturne misericordiam mÅvisse. âAc magnam quidem, mihi,â inquit, âputÅ enim nÄminem esse tam dÅ«rum cui ÅrÄtiÅ tua nÅn vÄ«sa sit digna misericordiÄ!â

Â 

Cicero De Or. 2.278: You read another joke (âSorry, Nobodyâs Home!â) from the same section of DÄ ÅrÄtÅre in Capvt XXXV; the first one here you ought not tell your wife, but the second just might get a laugh in a class on public speaking!âfÄ«cus, -Å«s, f., fig tree; âficus.ââsurculus, -Ä«, m., shoot, sprig; âsurculose.ââquÅs: = ut eÅs, RELATIVE CLAUSE OF PURPOSE, a common alternative, introducing the purp. clause with a rel. pron. instead of ut. âserÅ, -ere, to plant, sow; âseason.ââmisericordia, -ae, f., pity; âmisericordâ; cf. miser; an important objective for the ancient orator, and one for which he was trained, was to arouse the audienceâs emotions.âCatulus, -Ä«, m.; Quintus Lutatius Catulus, orator, author, and statesman, consul in 102 B.C. âvidÄrÄturne: the -ne, whether, signals an ind. question.âmagnam: sc. misericordiam mÅvistÄ«!âcui: = ut eÄ«, RELATIVE CLAUSE OF RESULT; like the rel. clause of purp., this construction is a common variant in which the clause is introduced by a rel. pron., rather than by ut.

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: The first of these jokes, albeit unkind, is clear enough, but how about the second: âpitifulâ in contemporary American English can carry a double entendre identical to the one intended hereâcan you explain the joke?

Two Letters to Cicero

Gn. Magnus PrÅcÅnsul SalÅ«tem DÄ«cit CicerÅnÄ« ImperÄtÅrÄ«

SÄ« valÄs, bene est. TuÄs litterÄs libenter lÄgÄ«; recognÅvÄ« enim tuam prÄ«stinam virtÅ«tem etiam in salÅ«te commÅ«nÄ«. CÅnsulÄs, RÅmÄ abientÄs, ad eum exercitum vÄnÄrunt quem in ÄpÅ«liÄ habuÄ«. Magnopere tÄ hortor ut occÄsiÅnem carpÄs et tÄ ad nÅs cÅnferÄs, ut commÅ«nÄ« cÅnsiliÅ reÄ« publicae miserae opem atque auxilium ferÄmus. MoneÅ ut RÅmÄ exeÄs, viÄ AppiÄ iter faciÄs, et quam celerrimÄ Brundisium veniÄs.

Â 

Caesar ImperÄtor SalÅ«tem DÄ«cit CicerÅnÄ« ImperÄtÅrÄ«

Cum Brundisium celerius adeam atque sim in itinere, exercitÅ« iam praemissÅ, dÄbeÅ tamen ad tÄ scrÄ«bere et grÄtiÄs idÅneÄs tibi agere, etsÄ« hoc fÄcÄ« saepe et saepius factÅ«rus videor; ita dignus es. ImprÄ«mÄ«s, quoniam crÄdÅ mÄ celeriter ad urbem ventÅ«rum esse, Ä tÄ petÅ ut tÄ ibi videam ut tuÅ cÅnsiliÅ, dignitÄte, ope Å«tÄ« possim. FestÄ«nÄtiÅnÄ« meae brevitÄtÄ«que litterÄrum ignÅscÄs; cÄtera ex FurniÅ cognÅscÄs.

Â 

Cicero Atticum 8.11c and 9.6a: Among the hundreds of letters surviving from Ciceroâs correspondence, several were written, not by him, but to him, including these two adapted from the collection of his epistles to his friend Atticus, Epistulae ad Atticum; one is from Gnaeus Pompeius Magnus, âPompey the Great,â written on February 20, 49 B.C., and the other was sent about two weeks later, on March 5, by Julius Caesar, both of whom were at this point bidding for the statesmanâs support in the civil war that broke out between them after Caesarâs crossing of the Rubicon on January 10.âprÅcÅnsul, -sulis, m., proconsul, governor (of a province).âsalÅ«te commÅ«nÄ«: here the public welfare. âÄpÅ«liÄ: Apulia was a district in southeastern Italy.âviÄ AppiÄ: ABLATIVE OF ROUTE (see S.A. 7, Capvt XXVII); the Via Appia, or âAppian Way,â built in the 4th cent. B.C., was the highway leading south from Rome and, ultimately, to Brundisium (see Map 1), the port of departure for Greece, where Pompey was fleeing with his army, in order to regroup and then take a stand against Caesarâs forces.âcommÅ«nÄ«: with cÅnsiliÅ, mutual, collaborative. âprae + mittÅ, -ere; âpremise.â âimprÄ«mÄ«s, adv., especially. âfestÄ«nÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., haste, rush; âfestination.ââbrevitÄs, -tÄtis, f.; cf. brevis; âabbreviate.â âFurnius: Gaius Furnius was tribune of the plebs and a friend of both Cicero and Caesar.

Marble bust of Pompey the Great 1st cent. B.C. Museo Archeologico, Venice, Italy
Bildarchiv Preussischer Kulturbesitz / Art Resource, NY; photo: Alfredo Dagli Orti

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What one thing in particular (look for a repeated noun) are both generals seeking from Cicero? Do you detect any difference of tone between the two letters that might suggest one of the two men was on better terms with Cicero?

Ask Me If I Care

NÄ«l nimium studeÅ, Caesar, tibi velle placÄre,

nec scÄ«re utrum sÄ«s albus an Äter homÅ!

*Catullus Carm. 93: As noted earlier, Catullus wrote not only love poems, but also satiric zingers aimed at the high and mighty. Here he deals Julius Caesar the ultimate insult, pretending to know nothing of the manânot even the color of his skin!âthis is not a racial slur, as the Romans were largely without color prejudice, but rather a barb aimed at Caesarâs pride in being a nÅbilis or âknown man.â Meter: elegiac couplet.ânÄ«l: = nÅn.âalbus, -a, -um, white; âalbino,â âalbum,â âalbumen.ââÄter, Ätra, Ätrum, black; âatrabilious,â âatrous.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What is the effect of using nÄ«l nimium instead of simply nÅn? How does Catullusâ use of homÅ vs. vir contribute to the intended tone?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Nunc est Ä«ra recÄns, nunc est disc[Ädere tempus.]

SÄ« dolor Äfuerit, crÄde: redÄ«bit [amor]!

CIL 4.4491: An elegiac couplet inscribedâafter a loversâ spat?âat the entrance to the House of Sextus Pompeius Axiochus (Reg. VI, Ins. 13). The text of the two damaged verses is easily restored, as the writer was copying out lines from the elegist Propertius (El. 2.5.9â10), lines perhaps memorized in school.ârecÄns, gen. -centis, of recent origin, recent; fresh in the mind/memory.âabsum, -esse, ÄfuÄ«, ÄfutÅ«rum, to be away, be absent; be removed, be distant; âabsence.â

ETYMOLOGIA

Here are Romance derivatives from a few of the new vocÄbula:

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte! Have you noticed that we like to ad lib. in this section of each chapter? Ad libitum, at oneâs pleasure, is connected with libenter, which is how Latin should be both taught and learned: gladly! So, libenter carpite diem et hÄs rÄs novÄs: first, note that impediÅ is from in + pÄs; when youâre âimpeded,â youâve got something on your feet (like âfetters,â from the same base as âfootâ), so perhaps you should consult a podiatrist (pod- is the Greek cognate of Latin ped-) and ask him to âexpediteâ your treatment (expedÄ«re is essentially âto de-fetter,â the opposite of impedÄ«re; cf. âimplicateâ and âexplicateâ from implicÄre/explicÄre); otherwise, just give up your pedestrian ways and start pedaling. Odium means rivalry as well as hatred; guess who the rivals are in odium medicum, odium scholasticum, and odium theologicum? And speaking of odious types, the emperor Tiberius (A.D. 14â37) is said to have remarked of his subjects, Åderint dum metuant, let them hate (me), so long as they fear (me)! The abbreviation op. cit. is from opere citÄtÅ, in the work cited; and opera omnia are an authorâs complete works. The use of opus in the titles of musical works is well known, e.g., Beethovenâs âSymphony No. 5 in C Minor, Opus 67â; âoperaâ comes to us through It. from opera, -ae, effort, pains, work, which clearly has the same root as opus. The term magnum opus, on the other hand, is commonly used in the literary field. An old legal prescript provides that vÄndÄns eandem rem duÅbus est falsÄrius (fraudulent); such a swindle would be Ä«nfrÄ dignitÄtem, beneath oneâs dignity, so remember the familiar admonition caveat Ämptor, let the buyer beware! Iterum tempus fÅ«git: valeÄtis, amÄ«cÄ« et amÄ«cae!

CAPVT XXXIX

Gerund and Gerundive

GRAMMATICA

THE GERUNDIVE

You are already familiar with the GERUNDIVE, or future passive participle, a verbal adjective formed with the endings -ndus, -nda, -ndum (Capvt XXIII). Besides functioning occasionally as a simple adjective (liber legendus, a book to be read), the gerundive is commonly employed in the passive periphrastic conjugation (Capvt XXIV: hic liber legendus est, this book should be read); some further uses are examined in this chapter.

THE GERUND

The GERUND is a verbal noun resembling the gerundive, except that it has only four forms, the neuter singular of the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative. These forms are identical to the corresponding cases of the gerundive, but are active in meaning and correspond to the English gerund in â-ingâ (legendÄ«, of reading, as in magnum amÅrem legendÄ« habet, he has a great love of reading). Following are the complete gerund declensions for some representative Latin verbs:

Since the gerund is a verbal noun, it can be modified as a verb and used as a noun in the various cases. Having no nominative case, however, the gerund was not used as a subject, a function performed instead by the infinitive, another of Latinâs verbal nouns (i.e., Latin could say errÄre est humÄnum, to err is human, but not erring is human); the accusative was ordinarily employed as an object of ad and certain other prepositions, but not as a direct object (a function again performed by the infinitive, e.g., iussit eÅs venÄ«re, he ordered them to come: see App., SUBORDINATE CLAUSES IN INDIRECT STATEMENT). The following sentences illustrate typical uses of the gerund in its four cases:

Studium vÄ«vendÄ« cum amÄ«cÄ«s habet. She has a fondness of (for) living with friends.

Bene vÄ«vendÅ operam dat. He gives attention to living well.

Ad bene vÄ«vendum AthÄnÄs iit. She went to Athens to live well.

Bene vÄ«vendÅ fÄlÄ«ciÅrÄs fÄ«mus. We become happier by living well.

Differences between Gerund and Gerundive

Remember these distinctions between gerund and gerundive: (1) the gerundive is a verbal adjective (liber legendus, a book to be read), the gerund a verbal noun (amor legendÄ«, love of reading); (2) as an adjective, the gerundive has a full set of masculine, feminine, and neuter endings, singular and plural, for all cases, whereas the gerund has only neuter singular forms and only in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative, i.e., a total of four forms altogether; (3) the gerundive is passive in meaning, the gerund active.

Gerund and Gerundive Phrases

As a verbal noun, the gerund may take the case construction required by its verb:

Studium legendÄ« librÅs habet. She has a fondness of reading books.

LibrÅs legendÅ discimus. We learn by reading books.

In actual practice, however, when the gerund would take a noun in the accusative as direct object, the Romans preferred to put this noun in the case in which the gerund would otherwise appear and to use instead a gerundive in agreement with the noun. The translation is the same no matter which construction is used, since English requires the gerund construction rather than the unidiomatic gerundive. In the following examples, those marked âAâ are what we would expect on the basis of English idiom; those marked âBâ are the gerundive phrases more common in Latin:

Â 

A.

studium legendÄ« librÅs (acceptable)

B.

studium librÅrum legendÅrum (preferred)
fondness of reading books (not fondness of books to be read, which is unidiomatic)

Â 

A.

LibrÅs legendÅ operam dat.

B.

LibrÄ«s legendÄ«s operam dat.
He gives attention to reading books.

Â 

A.

LibrÅs legendÅ discimus.

B.

LibrÄ«s legendÄ«s discimus.
We learn by reading books.

Â 

A.

DÄ legendÅ librÅs hoc locÅ«ta est.

B.

DÄ librÄ«s legendÄ«s hoc locÅ«ta est.
She said this about reading books.

Â 

The preposition ad + an accusative gerundive (or gerund) phrase and postpositive causÄ + a genitive phrase were often employed to indicate purpose:

Â 

A.

Ad legendum librÅs vÄnit.

B.

Ad librÅs legendÅs vÄnit.
He came to read books.

Â 

A.

LegendÄ« librÅs causÄ Åtium petit.

B.

LibrÅrum legendÅrum causÄ Åtium petit.
She seeks leisure for the sake of reading books.

Â 

Remember that purpose can be expressed in Latin, not only with gerundive/gerund phrases, but also with ut/nÄ + the subjunctive and, after a main verb of motion, the accusative supine: venit ut hÅs librÅs legat and hÅs librÅs lÄctum venit both mean she is coming to read these books.

VOCÄBVLA

Knowing that diphthongs in Latin often drop their first vowel in English derivatives will help you recall the meanings of some words like aedificium, edifice, building, in the list below. Whereas fÄmina means woman or female in its most basic sense, the new noun mulier (which gives us Spanish mujer) more often connotes an experienced woman, a wife, a lover (as opposed to a virgÅ). As you learn the new verbs in this list, you might practice with a synopsis or two; and can you identify the gerund and gerundive forms of, e.g., ÅrnÅ?

Â 

aedifÃcium, aedifÃciÄ«, n., building, structure (edification, edifice, edify, aedile)

iniria, iniriae, f., injustice, injury, wrong (injurious; cf. iÅ«dex, iÅ«dicium, iÅ«s)

mÃºlier, mulÃeris, f., woman (muliebrity)

trnsitus, trnsitÅ«s, m., passing over, transit; transition

vÃ©ntus, vÃ©ntÄ«, m., wind (vent, ventilate, ventilation, ventilator)

cÃºpidus, cÃºpida, cÃºpidum, desirous, eager, fond; + gen., desirous of, eager for (cf. cupiÅ, cupiditÄs, cupÄ«dÅ)

lÄ«berlis, lÄ«berle, of, relating to a free person; worthy of a free man, decent, liberal; generous (liberal arts, liberality; cf. lÄ«ber, lÄ«berÅ, lÄ«bertÄs)

necÃ©sse, indecl. adj. used as nom. or acc., necessary, inevitable; often necesse est + infin., it is necessary (to) (necessitate, necessitous; from nec + cÄdÅ, in the sense of a requirement that is ânot going awayâ)

vÃ©tus, gen. vÃ©teris, old (veteran, inveterate, veterinary, veterinarian)

quÃ¡si, adv. or conj., as if, as it were (quasi; = quam + sÄ«)

Ã¡mbulÅ, ambulre, ambulvÄ«, ambultum, to walk (amble, ambulance, ambulate, ambulatory, preamble, somnambulist)

expÃ©rior, experrÄ«, expÃ©rtus sum, to try, test; experience (experiment, expert, inexpert, inexperience; cf. perÄ«culum)

lbÅ, lÄ«bre, lÄ«bvÄ«, lÄ«btum, to pour a libation of, on; pour ritually; sip; touch gently (libation)

opÃ³rtet, oportre, opÃ³rtuit, impers., + infin., it is proper, right, necessary

oppÃºgnÅ, oppugnre, oppugnvÄ«, oppugntum, to fight against, attack, assault, assail (oppugn, impugn, pugnacious; cf. pugnrnÅ)

rnÅ, Årnre, ÅrnvÄ«, Årntum, to equip, furnish, adorn (adornment, ornate, ornament, ornamental, suborn)

pernÃ³ctÅ, pernoctre, pernoctvÄ«, pernocttum, to spend or occupy the night (nocturnal, nocturne; cf. nox)

trnseÅ, trÄnsre, trnsiÄ«, trnsitum, to go across, cross; pass over, ignore (transition, transitive, transitory, trance; cf. trÄnsitus above)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

After thorough study of the new grammar and vocabulary, identify all gerunds and gerundives in the following readings. Then read each sentence and passage aloud, listening to the CDs if you have them, and translate; remember that, for natural English idiom, gerundive phrases generally must be translated as active constructions, e.g., in Ex. 7 below, in rÄ pÅ«blicÄ gerendÄ = in governing the republic, not in the republic to be governed.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

Caesar, bellum inÄ«tÅ«rus, eÅs cÅtÄ«diÄ ÅrÄbat nÄ fÄta adversa metuerent.

EtsÄ« hoc fÄ«at, illÄ« mÄ«litÄs urbem oppugnÄtum fortasse accÄdant et multÄ« cÄ«vÄs obeant.

SÄ« licÄbit, septem diÄbus domum Ä«bimus ad nostrÅs amÄ«cÅs videndÅs.

AmÄ«cus lÄ«berÄlissimus noster, quÅcum pernoctÄbÄmus, dÄ«s vÄ«num ante cÄnam lÄ«bÄvit, et deinde mÄnsam ÅrnÄvit.

CÅnsul, vir maximae dignitÄtis, Åtium cÅnsÅ«mere solet in operibus sublÄ«mibus scrÄ«bendÄ«s.

Sunt autem quÄ« dolÅrum vÄ«tandÅrum causÄ, ut Äiunt, semper levia opera faciant, labÅrem contemnant, et dÄ officiÄ«s querantur.

In rÄ pÅ«blicÄ gerendÄ istÄ« nÅn dubitant praemia grÄta sibi requÄ«rere, officia suspendere, atque honÅrem suum vÄndere.

LÄctrÄ«x doctissima mox surget ad tria carmina recitanda, quae omnÄs audÄ«tÅrÄs oblectÄbunt atque animÅs serÄnÄbunt.

NÄmÅ est cui iniÅ«ria placeat, ut nÅs omnÄs recognÅscimus.

Nisi vincula patÄ« ac sub pedibus tyrannÅrum humÄ« contundÄ« volumus, lÄ«bertÄtÄ« semper studeÄmus et eam numquam impediÄmus.

Pauca opera mihi sedendÅ fÄ«unt, multa agendÅ et experiendÅ.

Illa mulier mÄ«rÄbilis frÅ«ctÅ«s amÅris libenter carpsit et virÅ grÄtissimÅ nÅ«psit.

They are returning to Rome to talk about conquering the Greeks.

By remaining at Rome he persuaded them to become braver.

Who is there who has hope of doing great works without pain?

We urged the consul to serve the state and preserve our dignity by attacking these injustices.

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

ConiÅ«rÄtiÅnem nÄscentem nÅn crÄdendÅ corrÅborÄvÄrunt. (*Cicero.âconiÅ«rÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., conspiracy; âconjure,â âconjurerâ; cf. coniÅ«rÄtÄ«. âcorrÅborÄre, to strengthen; âcorroborate,â âcorroborationâ; cf. rÅbur, rÅboris, n., oak tree; hard wood.)

MalÄ« dÄsinant Ä«nsidiÄs reÄ« pÅ«blicae cÅnsulÄ«que parÄre et ignÄs ad Ä«nflammandam urbem. (Cicero.âdÄsinÅ, -ere, to cease.âÄ«nflammÄre, to set on fire; âinflame,â âinflammatory.â)

MultÄ« autem propter glÅriae cupiditÄtem sunt cupidÄ« bellÅrum gerendÅrum. (Cicero.)

Veterem iniÅ«riam ferendÅ invÄ«tÄmus novam. (Publilius Syrus.)

CÅ«rÄmus nÄ poena maior sit quam culpa; prohibenda autem maximÄ est Ä«ra in pÅ«niendÅ. (Cicero.âpÅ«nÄ«re, to punish; âpunitive,â âimpunityâ; cf. poena)

SyrÄcÅ«sÄ«s captÄ«s, MÄrcellus aedificiÄ«s omnibus sÄ«c pepercitâmÄ«rÄbile dictÅ«âquasi ad ea dÄfendenda, nÅn oppugnanda vÄnisset. (Cicero.)

RÄgulus laudandus est in cÅnservandÅ iÅ«re iÅ«randÅ. (*Cicero.âRegulus, prisoner of the Carthaginians, swore to them that he would return to Carthage after a mission to Rome.âiÅ«s iÅ«randum, iÅ«ris iÅ«randÄ«, n., oath.)

In ÅrÄtiÅne meÄ dÄ«cam dÄ mÅribus fÄ«rmÄ«s SÄstiÄ« et dÄ studiÅ cÅnservandae salÅ«tis commÅ«nis. (Cicero.âSÄstius, -iÄ«, m.)

TrÄnsitus ad senectÅ«tem nÅs Ävocat Ä rÄbus gerendÄ«s et corpus facit Ä«nfÄ«rmius. (Cicero.)

Cum recreandae vÅcis Ä«nfÄ«rmae causÄ necesse esset mihi ambulÄre, hÄs litterÄs dictÄvÄ« forÄ«s ambulÄns. (Cicero.âdictÄre, to dictate; âdictation,â âdictator.â)

Semper metuendÅ sapiÄns vÄ«tat malum. (Publilius Syrus.)

Haec virtÅ«s ex prÅvidendÅ est appellÄta âprÅ«dentia.â (Cicero.âprÅvidÄre; âprovident,â âprovision.ââprÅ«dentia: = prÅ-videntia; âprudence,â âjurisprudent.â)

FÄma vÄ«rÄs acquÄ«rit eundÅ. (Vergil.âacquÄ«rÅ, from ad-quaerÅ, to acquire; âacquirable,â âacquisition.â)

Hae vicissitÅ«dinÄs fortÅ«nae, etsÄ« nÅbÄ«s iÅ«cundae in experiendÅ nÅn fuÄrunt, in legendÅ tamen erunt iÅ«cundae. RecordÄtiÅ enim praeteritÄ« dolÅris dÄlectÄtiÅnem nÅbÄ«s habet. (Cicero.âvicissitÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f.; âvicissitude,â âvicissitudinous.âârecordÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., recollection; ârecord,â ârecorder.ââpraeteritus, -a, -um, past; âpreterit,â âpreteritive.â)

Äcerrimus ex omnibus nostrÄ«s sÄnsibus est sÄnsus videndÄ«. (Cicero.)

Promises, Promises!

NÅ«llÄ« sÄ dÄ«cit mulier mea nÅ«bere mÄlle

quam mihi, nÅn sÄ« sÄ Iuppiter ipse petat.

DÄ«cit: sed mulier cupidÅ quod dÄ«cit amantÄ«,

in ventÅ et rapidÄ scrÄ«bere oportet aquÄ.

*Catullus Carm. 70: No mention of Lesbia here, but doubtless the woman Catullus had in mind; no longer puella, Lesbia is now mulierâ¦ mulier: as distinct from virgÅ and even fÄmina, the word here, as often, denotes a woman with sexual experience, a wife or a mistress. Meter: elegiac couplet.âNÅ«llÄ« â¦ mihi: both are dat. with nÅ«bere, and quam = magis quam; the prose order might be mulier mea dÄ«cit sÄ nÅ«llÄ« quam mihi nÅ«bere mÄlle.âamantÄ«: lover. ârapidus, -a, -um, = Eng.; ârapidity,â ârapaciousâ; cf. rapiÅ.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What is the poemâs one key word, and in what ways does Catullus emphasize it? Read the opening verse aloud and comment on the multiple sound effects. What makes the imagery in the last line so remarkable; how does word order underscore its impact?

Paete, NÅn Dolet

Casta suÅ gladium cum trÄderet Arria PaetÅ,

quem dÄ vÄ«sceribus strÄ«nxerat ipsa suÄ«s,

âSÄ« qua fidÄs, vulnus quod fÄcÄ« nÅn dolet,â inquit,

âsed quod tÅ« faciÄs, hoc mihi, Paete, dolet.â

*Martial Epig. 1.13: Caecina Paetus was compelled to commit suicide in A.D. 42, because of the role he had played in a conspiracy against the emperor Claudius; his courageous and devoted wife Arria, choosing to die with him, stabbed herself before passing the sword to her husband, and assured him that the pain would be slight. Pliny the Younger relates the story in one of his letters, excerpted below in LocÄ« Im. XXXIX. Meter: elegiac couplet.âcastus, -a, -um, loyal, chaste; âcaste,â âchastity.ââgladius, -Ä«, m., sword; âgladiator,â âgladiola.ââvÄ«scera, -rum, n. pl., vital organs, abdomen; âvisceral,â âeviscerate.ââstringÅ, -ere, strÄ«nxÄ«, strictum, to draw tight, tie; pull, draw out; âstringent,â ârestrict.ââsÄ« qua (=quae, indef.) fidÄs: i.e., if you have any faith in me, if you will trust me.

Arria and Paetus. Pierre Lepautre (1659â1744) Louvre, Paris, France
Timothy McCarthy / Art Resource, NY

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What common device of verse word order is seen in line 1, and what is its particular effect here? How does Martialâs use of pronouns and the parallel word order and repetitions add to the pathos in verses 3-4?

Hannibal and the Beginnings of the Second Punic War

Hannibal, fÄ«lius Hamilcaris, CarthÄgine nÄtus est. In adulÄscentiÄ prÄ«stinum odium patris ergÄ RÅmÄnÅs sÄ«c fÄ«rmÄ cÅnservÄvit ut numquam id dÄpÅneret. Cum patre exiit CarthÄgine et in HispÄniam longÅ itinere prÅfectus est; et post multÅs annÅs, Hamilcare interfectÅ, exercitus eÄ« imperium trÄdidit. SÄ«c Hannibal, quÄ«nque et vÄ«gintÄ« annÅs nÄtus, imperÄtor factus est. Tribus annÄ«s nÅn requiÄvit, sed omnÄs gentÄs HispÄniae superÄvit et trÄs exercitÅ«s maximÅs parÄvit. Ex hÄ«s Å«num in Äfricam mÄ«sit, alterum cum frÄtre in HispÄniÄ relÄ«quit, tertium in Italiam sÄcum dÅ«xit.

Ad AlpÄs adiit, quÄs nÄmÅ umquam ante eum cum exercitÅ« trÄnsierat. PopulÅs cÅnantÄs prohibÄre eum trÄnsitÅ« necÄvit; loca patefÄcit; et cum multÄ«s elephantÄ«s mÄ«litibusque in Italiam iniit. In hÅc itinere tam gravÄ« morbÅ oculÅrum adfectus est ut posteÄ numquam dextrÅ oculÅ bene Å«tÄ« posset. MultÅs ducÄs, tamen, exercitÅ«sque RÅmÄnÅs vÄ«cit, et propter illum imperÄtÅrem mÄ«lia mÄ«litum RÅmÄnÅrum periÄrunt.

Â 

Nepos Hann., excerpts: In this passage adapted from his life of Hannibal, Nepos summarizes some major events in the life of the Carthaginian general who led the Carthaginians against the Romans in the Second Punic War, 218â202 B.C.; for longer excerpts, see LocÄ« Ant. VIII, and cf. the reading from Neposâ biography of Cimon in Capvt XXXII above.âHamilcar, -caris, m.; Hamilcar Barca had commanded Carthageâs army in the First Punic War (264â241 B.C.). âdÄ + pÅnÅ; âdeponent,â âdepose.â âHispÄnia, -ae, f., Spain; âHispanicâ; see Maps 1â2 for the locations mentioned in this passage.âquÄ«nqueâ¦ nÄtus: the phrase annÅs nÄtus was a common idiom for indicating a personâs age; we would say âat the age ofâ¦,â but what is the lit. translation? For the case usage of annÅs here, see Capvt XXXVII.âÄfrica, -ae, f. âAlpÄs, -pium, f. pl., the Alps. âadficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, to affect, afflict, weaken; âaffection,â âaffectionate.â

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Though Hannibal was viewed by Romans for many generations after his death as one of their nationâs bitterest and most terrifying enemiesâhe had very nearly brought his invading forces to the gates of Romeânevertheless Nepos attributes to him qualities that even Romans would admire; what are some of those traits seen in this brief passage?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

QuÄ« mihi docendÄ« dederit mercÄdem, <h>abeat quod petit Ä superÄ«s!

CIL 4.8562: Graffito from a column in the colonnade around the Large Palaestra near the amphitheater in Pompeii (Reg. II); here, among many other activities, teachers instructed schoolboys for a fee, a common practice in Pompeii as in Rome, and this pedagogue prayed the gods would bless his paying customers!âmercÄs, -cÄdis, f., wage, fee; payment (for), + gen. for the service rendered.â<h>abeat: the letter h in the Roman alphabet represented a weak aspirate that was often dropped in speech and sometimes, even by teachers (!), in spelling.

ETYMOLOGIA

In recordÄtiÅ (S.A. 14) you see the stem of cor, cordis, n., heart: in antiquity the heart was regarded as the seat not only of the emotions, but also of the intellect and memory, a belief reflected in the Eng. expression âlearn by heartâ; derivatives, besides ârecordâ and ârecorder,â include: accord, concord, discord, cordial, courage.

The terms âgerundâ and âgerundiveâ derive ultimately from gerundum, variant of gerendum, fom gerÅ, to carry on, do. The gerund indicates âdoingâ (action); the gerundive indicates what is âto be done.â In late Lat. the abl. of the gerund was used increasingly as the equivalent of a pres. participle; from this usage derive the following Romance language participles:

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte, discipulÄ« discipulaeque; haec sunt discenda: Catoâs definition of an orator, as quoted by the 1st cent. A.D. educator Quintilian (ÄªnstitÅ«tiÅ ÅrÄtÅria 12.1.1), is quite well known, and you can easily translate it now that youâve studied gerunds (and with the explanation that perÄ«tus, -a, -um + gen. = experienced in): ÅrÄtor est vir bonus dÄ«cendÄ« perÄ«tus. Here are some more familiar items with gerunds and gerundives: New Mexicoâs state motto, crÄscit eundÅ (review Capvt XXXVII, if you have trouble with that one!); docendÅ discimus, something all teachers know; spectÄmur agendÅ, let us be judged by what we do (lit., by our doing); modus vÄ«vendÄ« and modus operandÄ« (âm.o.â to you detective show buffs!); onus probandÄ«, the burden of proof (lit., of proving); then, of course, there are these many âthings to be doneâ: agenda, addenda, corrigenda, memorandum, referendum.

Et duo cÄtera ex vocÄbulÄ«s novÄ«s huius capitis: iniÅ«ria nÅn excÅ«sat iniÅ«riam, (one) injury does not excuse (another) injury, is an old legal tenet, and expertÅ crÄdite is still good advice. HabÄte fÄlÄ«cem modum vÄ«vendÄ«, studentÄs, et valÄte!

CAPVT XL

-Ne, Num, and NÅnne in Direct Questions; Fear Clauses; Genitive and Ablative of Description

GRAMMATICA

-Ne, Num, AND NÅnne IN DIRECT QUESTIONS

As we have already seen, a Roman could ask a direct question in a variety of ways, by beginning a sentence with an interrogative pronoun (quis, quid) or such other interrogatives as ubi or cÅ«r, or by suffixing -ne to the first word of the sentence (often the verb, or some other word on which the question hinged). But âleading questionsâ can also be asked in Latin: if the speaker expected âyesâ as an answer, the question was introduced with nÅnne (a construction already encountered, though not formally discussed); if a negative reply was anticipated, num was the introductory word:

Quis venit? Who is coming?

CÅ«r venit? Why is he coming?

Venitne? Is he coming?

NÅnne venit? He is coming, isnât he? or Isnât he coming?

Num venit? He isnât coming, is he?

ScrÄ«psistÄ«ne illÄs litterÄs? Did you write that letter?

NÅnne illÄs litterÄs scrÄ«psistÄ«? You wrote that letter, didnât you? or Didnât you write that letter?

Num illÄs litterÄs scrÄ«psistÄ«? You didnât write that letter, did you?

FEAR CLAUSES

Verbs denoting fear or apprehension often take subjunctive noun clauses introduced by nÄ (that) or ut (thatâ¦ not; occasionally nÄ nÅn was employed instead of ut); the conjunctions in these FEAR CLAUSES are the opposite of what might be expected, because in origin the clauses they introduced were essentially independent jussive clauses (i.e., timeÅ nÄ abeÄs, I fear that you may go away, = TimeÅ. NÄ abeÄs!, Iâm afraidâDonât go away!). Auxiliaries commonly employed in translating include âwillâ or âmayâ (in primary sequence) and âwouldâ or âmightâ (in secondary sequence):

TimeÅ nÄ id crÄdant. I fear that they will (may) believe this.

Vereor ut id crÄdant. I am afraid that they will (may) not believe this.

TimuÄrunt nÄ amÄ«cÅs Ämitterent. They feared that they might (would) lose their friends.

MetuistÄ« ut mulierÄs ex casÄ exÄ«ssent. You were afraid that the women had not left the house.

GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF DESCRIPTION

A noun in either the ablative or genitive case plus a modifying adjective may be employed to modify another noun; both the ABLATIVE OF DESCRIPTION and the GENITIVE OF DESCRIPTION (already encountered in the readings) might describe a noun by indicating its character, quality, or size, although the ablative usage was especially common in describing physical traits. Like adjectives, these descriptive phrases usually follow the nouns they modify:

fÄmina magnae sapientiae, a woman of great intellect

pÄx in hominibus bonae voluntÄtis, peace among men of good will

cÅnsilium eius modÄ«, a plan of this kind

DÄ«ligÅ hominem antÄ«quÄ virtÅ«te, I esteem a man of old-fashioned morality.

mÄ«les fÄ«rmÄ manÅ«, the soldier with the strong hand

Es mÅribus bonÄ«s. You are a person of good character.

VOCÄBVLA

Welcome to your final Wheelock VocÄbula! While fewer than a thousand words have been formally introduced in these 40 chapter lists, you have actually been introduced to nearly a thousand more through the glosses in the hundreds of Sententiae AntÄ«quae, reading passages, and graffiti, and there are countless others whose meanings you can now easily intuit based on English derivatives and your knowledge of compounding, prefixes, suffixes, assimilation, and vowel shortening, and of the interrelations of word families like regÅ, rÄx, rÄgina, and cupiÅ, cupidus, cupiditÄs, etc.; from dominus and domina below, e.g., you should be able to guess the meanings of dominÄre and dominÄtiÅ, from lacrima you should know lacrimÄre and lacrimÅsus, etc. So in your future readings, when you encounter some word youâve not formally learned, take a closer look, both at the word itself and at its context, and very often you will find one or more secure clues to its meaning. Watch out for these last few look-alikes: metus/mÄta, vultus/vulgus/vulnus. And be sure this one final time to use the CDs or online audio, in order to learn this new vocabulary by listening to and pronouncing each word aloud and not just by reading mutely from the written page.

Â 

aes, aÃ©ris, n., bronze (era; cf. aerÄrium, -Ä«, treasury; aereus, -a, -um, made of bronze)

dÃ³minus, dÃ³minÄ«, m., master (of a household), lord, and dÃ³mina, dÃ³minae, f., mistress, lady (dominate, domineer, dominion, domain, domino, don, dungeon, belladonna, madonna, dame, damsel; cf. domus)

lÃ¡crima, lÃ¡crimae, f., tear (lacrimal, lacrimation, lachrymose, lacrimoso)

mta, mmtae, f., turning point, goal; limit, boundary

monumÃ©ntum, monumÃ©ntÄ«, n., monument (monumental; cf. moneÅ)

nsus, nsÄ«, m., nose (nasal, nasalize, nasogastric; cognates: nostril, nozzle)

sÃ¡xum, sÃ¡xÄ«, n., rock, stone (saxifrage, saxicolous; cf. secÅ, to cut, saw)

vÃºltus, vÃºltÅ«s, m., countenance, face

istus, ista, istum, just, right (justice, unjust, justify, justification, adjust; cf. iÅ«s, iÅ«dex, iniÅ«ria)

tot, indecl. adj., so many, as many; totâ¦ quot, as manyâ¦ as; cf. totidem, indecl. adj., the same number; totiÄns, adv., that number of times, so often

praÃ©ter, prep. + acc., besides, except; beyond, past (preterit, preterition, pretermit, preternatural; cf. prae)

nnne, interrog. adv. which introduces questions expecting the answer âyesâ

num, interrog. adv.: (1) introduces direct questions which expect the answer ânoâ; (2) introduces indirect questions and means whether

omnnÅ, adv., wholly, entirely, altogether; with negatives, at all (cf. omnis)

postrmum, adv., after all, finally; for the last time (cf. post)

quÄ«n, adv., indeed, in fact, furthermore

Ã©xplicÅ, explicre, explicvÄ«, explictum, to unfold; explain; spread out, deploy (explicate, inexplicable; implicate, from implicÅ, to enfold, interweave)

fatgÅ, fatÄ«gre, fatÄ«gvÄ«, fatÄ«gtum, to weary, tire out (fatigue, indefatigable)

for, frÄ«, ftus sum, to speak (prophetically), talk, foretell (affable, ineffable, infant, infantry, preface; cf. fÄbula, fÄma, fateor, fÄtum: what is âforetoldâ is oneâs âfateâ)

opnor, opÄ«nrÄ«, opÄ«ntus sum, to suppose (opine, opinion)

repÃ©riÅ, reperre, rÃ©pperÄ«, repÃ©rtum, to find, discover, learn; get (repertoire, repertory; cf. parÄns and pariÅ, to give birth to)

vÃ©reor, verrÄ«, vÃ©ritus sum, to show reverence for, respect; be afraid of, fear (revere, reverend, reverent, reverential, irreverent)

LÄCTIÅ ET TRÄNSLÄTIÅ

One last reminder, for the following selections and your future readings, always to read aloud and for comprehension, before attempting to translate. Test your mastery of the new grammar with the Self-Tutorial Exercises, then scan the sentences and passages below for all occurrences of fear clauses, the genitive and ablative of description, and -ne, num, and nÅnne questions. In your translations of fear clauses, recall the seeming anomaly that ut = âthat notâ and nÄ = âthatâ; and whenever translating, always choose meanings that best suit the contextâe.g., in the Vergil passage below will receive/take over is a better choice than will capture for excipiet, and will call/name makes better sense for dÄ«cet than will say.

EXERCITÄTIÅNÄS

NÅnne RÅmulus, sator huius urbis, fuit vir mÄ«rÄbilis virtÅ«tis et fideÄ« prÄ«stinae atque quÄ« deÅs semper vereÄtur?

At postrÄmum vereor, heu, ut Ä virÄ«s parvae sapientiae hoc studium vetus intellegÄ« possit.

NÅn oportet nÅs trÄnsÄ«re haec lÄ«berÄlia hÅ«mÄnaque studia, nam praemia eÅrum certÄ sunt maxima.

DignitÄs illÄ«us ÅrÄtiÅnis fuit omnÄ«nÅ idÅnea occÄsiÅnÄ«.

EquÄ« eius, cum fatÄ«gÄtÄ« essent et ventus esset eÄ«s adversus, ad mÄtam tamen quam celerrimÄ currÄbant.

Vir corpore Ä«nfÄ«rmÅ id nÅn facere poterat.

EtsÄ« trÄs fÄ«liÄ« sunt cupidÄ« magnÅrum operum faciendÅrum, eÄ«s nÅn licet domÅ abÄ«re.

Domina fÄ«rma acerbÄ querÄbÄtur plÅ«rimÅs servÅs fuisse absentÄsâvae illÄ«s miserÄ«s!

MÄ«rÄbile rogÄtÅ«, num istam mulierem amÄs, mÄ« amÄ«ce?

NÅnne timent nÄ et RÅmae et rÅ«rÄ« magnÄ« tumultÅ«s sint?

Num opÄ«nÄris tot hominÄs iÅ«stÅs omnÄ«nÅ errÄre?

RecognÅvistÄ«ne, ut illa aedificia vÄ«sum ambulÄbÄs, mulierem sub arbore humÄ« requiÄscentem?

I am afraid, in my heart, that few things can be accomplished now even by trying.

You do not hesitate to say this, do you?

They supposed that, after all, he was a man of very little faith.

You do recognize how great the danger is, do you not?

SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

Quattuor causÄs reperiÅ cÅ«r senectÅ«s misera videÄtur. VideÄmus quam iÅ«sta quaeque eÄrum sit. (Cicero.)

VerÄrÄ« videntur ut habeam satis praesidÄ«. (*Cicero.âpraesidium, -iÄ«, n., guard; âpreside,â âpresident.â)

Necesse est enim sit alterum dÄ duÅbus: aut mors sÄnsÅ«s omnÄ«nÅ aufert aut animus in alium locum morte abit. SÄ« mors somnÅ similis est sÄnsÅ«sque exstinguuntur, dÄ« bonÄ«, quid lucrÄ« est morÄ«! (Cicero.ânecesse est: here + subjunct. rather than infinitive.âaufert: = ab + fert; âablate,â âablative.ââexstinguÅ, -ere; âextinct,â âextinction.ââlucrum, -Ä«, m., gain, profit; âlucrative,â âlucre.â)

AetÄs semper trÄnsitum et aliquid novÄ« adfert. (Terence.)

NÅnne Å«num exemplum luxuriae aut cupiditÄtis multum malÄ« facit? (Seneca.âluxuria, -ae, f.; âluxury,â âluxuriant.â)

MÄ«ror tot mÄ«lia virÅrum tam puerÄ«liter identidem cupere currentÄs equÅs vidÄre. (Pliny.âpuerÄ«liter, adv., based on puer, childishly; âpuerile,â âpuerility.ââidentidem, adv., again and again.âcurrentÄs: i.e., in the races.)

NÅnne vidÄs etiam guttÄs, in saxa cadendÅ, pertundere illa saxa? (Lucretius.âgutta, -ae, f., drop [of water]; âgout,â âgutter,â âgtt.,â medical abbreviation for âdrops.ââpertundÅ, -ere, to bore a hole through, erode.)

MetuÅ nÄ id cÅnsilÄ« cÄperÄ«mus quod nÅn facile explicÄre possÄ«mus. (*Cicero.âcÅnsilÄ«: gen. of the whole with id.)

AntÅnius, Å«nus ex inimÄ«cÄ«s et vir minimae clÄmentiae, iussit CicerÅnem interficÄ« et caput eius inter duÄs manÅ«s in RÅstrÄ«s pÅnÄ«. (Livy.âinimÄ«cus, -Ä«, m., from in + amÄ«cus, personal enemy; âinimical,â âenemy.ââRÅstra, -Årum, n., the Rostra, the speakerâs stand in the Roman Forum; ârostrum.â)

OmnÄs quÄ« habent aliquid nÅn sÅlum sapientiae sed etiam sÄnitÄtis volunt hanc rem pÅ«blicam salvam esse. (*Cicero.âsÄnitÄs, -tÄtis, f.; âsanitary,â âsanity.â)

SalvÄ, nec minimÅ puella nÄsÅ nec bellÅ pede nec nigrÄ«s ocellÄ«s nec longÄ«s digitÄ«s nec Åre siccÅ! (*Catullus.âniger, -gra, -grum, black, dark; âdenigrate.ââocellus: diminutive of oculus.âsiccus, -a, -um, dry; âdesiccate,â âdesiccation.â)

HomÅ sum; nihil hÅ«mÄnÄ« aliÄnum Ä mÄ putÅ. (Terence.âaliÄnus, -a, -um, of/belonging to another; + Ä/ab, idiom, foreign to; cf. alius; âalien,â âalienate.â)

AmÄ«cus animum amÄ«cÄ« ita cum suÅ miscet quasi facit Å«num ex duÅbus. (Cicero.)

Sex diÄbus fÄcit Dominus caelum et terram et mare et omnia quae in eÄ«s sunt, et requiÄvit diÄ septimÅ. (Exodus.)

MÄ«sit legÄtum Valerium Procillum, summÄ virtÅ«te et hÅ«mÄnitÄte adulÄscentem, cum imperÄtÅre hostium colloquendÄ« causÄ. (Caesar.âlegÄtus, -Ä«, m., ambassador; âlegate,â âlegation.ââValerius Procillus.âhÅ«mÄnitÄs, -tÄtis, f.; âhumanitarianâ; cf. hÅ«mÄnus, homÅ.âcolloquor, -loquÄ«, -locÅ«tus sum, to talk to, hold discussions/parley with; âcolloquy,â âcolloquium.â)

Num negÄre audÄs? Quid tacÄs? Convincam, sÄ« negÄs; videÅ enim esse hÄ«c in senÄtÅ« quÅsdam quÄ« tÄcum Å«nÄ fuÄrunt. Å dÄ« immortÄlÄs! (*Cicero.âquid: here = why?âcon + vincÅ, to prove wrong; sc. tÄ; âconvince,â âconvict.ââÅ«nÄ, adv., together, in concert.)

Nunc timeÅ nÄ nihil tibi praeter lacrimÄs queam reddere. (*Ciceroâqueam: = possim.âreddÅ, -dere, to give back, return; ârender,â ârent.â)

Jupiter Prophesies to Venus the Future Glory of Rome

OllÄ« subrÄ«dÄns hominum sator atque deÅrum

255 Â Â vultÅ«, quÅ caelum tempestÄtÄsque serÄnat,

Åscula lÄ«bÄvit nÄtae, dehinc tÄlia fÄtur:

âParce metÅ«, CytherÄa; manent immÅta tuÅrum

fÄta tibÄ«. CernÄs urbem et prÅmissa LavÄ«nÄ«

moenia sublÄ«memque ferÄs ad sÄ«dera caelÄ«

260 Â Â magnanimum AenÄan; neque mÄ sententia vertit.

â¦

263 Â Â Bellum ingÄns geretÄª taliÄ populÅsque ferÅcÄ«s

contundet mÅrÄsque virÄ«s et moenia pÅnet.

â¦

RÅmulus excipiet gentem et MÄvortia condet

moenia RÅmÄnÅsque suÅ dÄ nÅmine dÄ«cet.

HÄ«s ego nec mÄtÄs rÄrum nec tempora pÅnÅ:

imperium sine fÄ«ne dedÄ«. QuÄ«n aspera IÅ«nÅ,

280 Â Â quae mare nunc terrÄsque metÅ« caelumque fatÄ«gat,

cÅnsilia in melius referet, mÄcumque fovÄbit

RÅmÄnÅs, rÄrum dominÅs gentemque togÄtam.â

*Vergil Aen. 1.254ff: At this point in Aeneid Book One, the Trojan prince Aeneas and his followers have been shipwrecked in a storm caused by the ever hostile Juno. The heroâs divine mother, Venus, has come to her father (and Junoâs husband) Jupiter to ask whether his intentions toward the Trojans have changed, or if Aeneas is still destined to found a new Trojan nation in Italy; the passage here, in its original dactylic hexameter verse form, is part of Jupiterâs reply.âOllÄ«: = illÄ«, i.e., Venus.âvultÅ«: abl. of means with subrÄ«dÄns.âÅscula lÄ«bÄvit: i.e., he kissed her in ritual fashion.ânÄtae: ind. object.âdehinc: if you have been studying Latin metrics, you will need to know that this word is here scanned as a monosyllable.âmetÅ«: an alternate form of the dat. metuÄ«.âCytherÄa, -ae, f., the Cytherean, i.e., Venus, so-called for the Aegean island of Cythera, her birthplace and a cult center.âimmÅta: pred. adj., after manent.âtuÅrum: i.e., Aeneas and his Trojan followers.âLavÄ«nium, -iÄ«, n., Lavinium, the town Aeneas was destined to found in Latium, near the future city of Rome.âsublÄ«mem: in the pred. with AenÄan (a Gk. acc. form), you will carry Aeneas on high. ânequeâ¦ vertit:, i.e., âI have not changed my mind,â but what is the lit. translation?âgeretâ¦ pÅnet: Aeneas is subj. of all three verbs.âÄªtaliÄ: sc. in; prepositions usual in prose were commonly omitted in verse.âferÅcÄ«s: = ferÅcÄs, acc. pl.âpÅnet: through a device known as ZEUGMA, the verb has different senses with its two objects, institute with mÅrÄs and build with moenia.âMÄvortius, -a, -um, of Mars, the walls were so called from the legend that Mars was father of Romulus, Romeâs first king.ârÄrum: of their affairs, i.e., for their empire. âtempora: here = time limits. âterrÄsqueâ¦ caelumque: this use of the double -que, rather like the use of etâ¦ etâ¦ you have often seen, is common in epic.âin melius: cf. the Eng. idiom âto change for the betterâ; Juno had sided with the Greeks in the Trojan war and had continued to resist Aeneasâ fated mission.âtogÄtus, -a, -um, togaed, toga-clad; the toga was the formal woolen outer garment worn by freeborn Roman men, particularly in the conduct of civic enterprise, whether in the forum, the courts, or legislative bodies.

Vergil flanked by two Muses Mosaic, Hadrumetum (modern Sousse), Tunisia. 3rd cent. A.D. MusÃ©e National du Bardo, Tunis, Tunisia
Gilles Mermet / Art Resource, NY

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: Jupiterâs speechâthe first of several major prophecies in the Aeneidânot only briefly foretells the fulfillment of Aeneasâ mission, and Romulusâ, but also alludes to the destiny of the Roman empire; how specifically does he characterize the future nation in verses 278â282, and to what different realms of activity does he seem to allude in the two distinct phrases rÄrum dominÅs and gentemâ¦ togÄtam?

The Value of Literature

SÄ« ex hÄ«s studiÄ«s dÄlectÄtiÅ sÅla peterÄtur, tamen, ut opÄ«nor, hanc animÄ« remissiÅnem hÅ«mÄnissimam ac lÄ«berÄlissimam iÅ«dicÄrÄtis. Nam cÄterae neque temporum sunt neque aetÄtum omnium neque locÅrum; at haec studia adulÄscentiam alunt, senectÅ«tem oblectant, rÄs secundÄs Årnant, adversÄ«s perfugium ac sÅlÄcium praebent, dÄlectant domÄ«, nÅn impediunt forÄ«s, pernoctant nÅbÄ«scum, peregrÄ«nantur, rÅ«sticantur.

Â 

*Cicero Arch. 7.16: Along with this passage you should review the selections you have read previously from Ciceroâs PrÅ ArchiÄ, including his anecdote on Alexander the Great in Capvt XIII and his remarks on ambition and literature in Capvt XXII; this speech has remained over the centuries one of the oratorâs most admired, particularly for its eloquent defense of the value of the humanities.âstudiÄ«sâ¦ studia: i.e., literary pursuits; Cicero has in his preceding remarks discussed their âpracticalâ benefits, and here turns to their value as a remissiÅ animÄ«. âhanc: sc. esse.âiÅ«dicÄre, to judge, consider; âjudicious,â âadjudicate.ââcÄterae: sc. remissiÅnÄs. âomnium: modifies all three nouns, temporum, aetÄtum, and locÅrum; this construction, a gen. following a verb (often sum, esse) and in one way or another describing the subj., is often termed a PREDICATE GENITIVE. ânÅbÄ«scum: construe with each of the three verbs.

Â 

QVAESTIÅNÄS: What are the multiple implications of the adjs. hÅ«mÄnissimam and lÄ«berÄlissimam?âthink of the root meanings of both words, which certainly Cicero himself had in mind. Looking back at the passages from this speech read earlier, compare specifically the benefits of literature he recounts there with those he describes here.

A Monument More Lasting than Bronze

ExÄgÄ« monumentum aere perennius.

â¦

NÅn omnis moriar, multaque pars meÄ«

vÄ«tÄbit LibitÄ«nam.

*Horace Carm. 3.30.1, 6â7: In the closing poem of his third volume of Odes (a longer excerpt from which appears below in LocÄ« Im. XXVIII), Horace proudly lays claim to a degree of immortality; meter: first Asclepiadean.âperennis, -e, lasting (throughout the years, per annÅs); âperennial.ââmulta: here = magna.âLibitÄ«na, -ae, f., Libitina, ancient Italic goddess of funerals and here a symbol of death.

Â 

QVAESTIÅ: Likely it is too obvious to ask, but as a fitting final quaestiÅ for this book, what do you understand to be Horaceâs monumentum, though he does not explicitly identify it, and that multaâ¦ pars meÄ« which he here proclaims will be deathless?

SCRÄªPTA IN PARIETIBVS

Catus valeatâet vÅs!

CIL 4.5200: This graffito was etched on the wall of a house in Reg. IX, Ins. 6; nearby was a painting of the Athenian hero Theseus and Ariadne, princess of Crete. The inscription seemed an apt one with which to conclude this final chapterâs readings, as the writer here bids farewell not only to Catus, presumably a friend, but to you as well, and to all who would read this message inscribed so graciously by its anonymous scribbler nearly two thousand years agoâ¦.

LATÄªNA EST GAVDIVMâET TILIS!

SalvÄte postrÄmum, discipulÄ« et discipulae! Here are some rÄs novae ex hÅc capite ultimÅ: dominus illÅ«minÄtiÅ mea, the Lord is my light, is the motto of Oxford University; lacrima ChristÄ« is a well known Latin phrase for the tear of Christ (and also the name of a sweet Italian wine). An oft quoted line from Vergilâs Aeneid comes as the hero Aeneas, shipwrecked in North Africa, gazes upon a Carthaginian mural that depicts the suffering of both his own people and the Greeks in the Trojan war: hÄ«c etiamâ¦ sunt lacrimae rÄrum et mentem mortÄlia tangunt. The Latin works better than a literal English translation (which you can now easily provide for yourself), but a free rendering would be: even here there are tears for the ways of the world, and manâs mortality touches the heart.

Not to be so lacrimose (or âlachrymose,â an alternate spelling), letâs move to some more upbeat items: remember how to make masculine agent nouns from verbs?âe.g., from reperiÅ is repertor, discover. Well, the feminine agentive suffix is -trÄ«x, -trÄ«cis (cf. Eng. âaviatorâ and âaviatrix,â and lÄctor/lÄctrÄ«x, which weâve seen before), hence this proverb: paupertÄs omnium artium repertrÄ«x, something like our ânecessity is the mother of inventionâ (but what is the literal meaning?). Vultus est index animÄ«, the face is an indication of the soul, it has often been said. And speaking of faces, to âstick your nose up in the airâ and to âlook down your noseâ on someone are not wholly modern idioms for viewing others critically or with disdain; the Neronian satirist Persius says of his predecessor Horace, in a brilliant and not wholly complimentary metaphor, that he hung the people from his well-blown nose (excussÅ populum suspendere nÄsÅ). And finally, the Augustan poet Ovidâs cognomen was NÄsÅ, a less than flattering appellation often given someone with a big snub noseâa reminder of Ciceroâs poor wart-nosed ancestor, as you may recall from the notes to Capvt XVIâs ScrÄ«pta in Parietibus!

May your love of Latin be aere perennius: rÄ«dÄte, gaudÄte, carpite omnÄs dÄ«Äs vestrÅs, atque postrÄmum, lÄctÅrÄs et lÄctrÄ«cÄs dulcÄs, valÄte!

Fresco from Pompeii, depicting a woman and a man with writing implements Museo Archeologico Nazionale, Naples, Italy
Scala / Art Resource, NY

LOCÄª ANTÄªQVÄª

Although these passages selected from ancient authors have been adapted to accommodate the limited experience you have had with Latin thus far, they have been edited as little as possible; the language and thoughts are those of the ancient writers. In the case of poetry, one or more verses have been omitted from each excerpt, but the lines actually presented here have not been altered at all. In the case of a prose passage, some words or sentences may have been omitted or the wording may have been somewhat simplified at one point or another.

Not only will you find reading these varied LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ« interesting per se, but you should also gain considerable satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment in being able to read and translate passages of such complexity at this early stage in your study of âThe Mother Tongue.â As always, you should begin each passage by reading it aloud, at least once or twice, and reading for comprehensionâattempting to gain a good sense of what the author is saying, before you attempt a translation into English.

Words appearing in these selections that have not been introduced in the 40 chapter VocÄbula lists are glossed at their first one or two occurrences at least, and especially important words are listed in the VocÄbula following the glosses to each passage; most are also included in the Latin-English VocÄbula at the end of the book for easy reference.

I. DISILLUSIONMENT

Miser Catulle, dÄsinÄs¹ ineptÄ«re,²

et quod vidÄs perÄ«sse perditum³ dÅ«cÄs.

FulsÄre⁴ quondam candidÄ« tibÄ«⁵ sÅlÄs,

cum ventitÄbÄs⁶ quÅ⁷ puella dÅ«cÄbat,

5 Â Â Â Â Â  amÄta nÅbÄ«s quantum amÄbitur nÅ«lla.

FulsÄre vÄrÄ candidÄ« tibÄ« sÅlÄs.

Nunc iam illa nÅn vult; tÅ« quoque, impotÄns,⁸ nÅlÄ«;

nec quae fugit sectÄre⁹ nec miser vÄ«ve,

sed obstinÄtÄ¹⁰ mente perfer,¹¹ obdÅ«rÄ.¹²

10 Â Â Â Â Â ValÄ, puella, iam Catullus obdÅ«rat,

nec tÄ requÄ«ret nec rogÄbit invÄ«tam¹³;

at tÅ« dolÄbis, cum rogÄberis nÅ«lla.

Scelesta, vae tÄ! Quae tibÄ« manet vÄ«ta!¹⁴

Quis nunc tÄ adÄ«bit? Cui vidÄberis bella?

15 Â Â Â Â Â Quem nunc amÄbis? Cuius esse dÄ«cÄris?

At tÅ«, Catulle, dÄstinÄtus obdÅ«rÄ. (Catullus 8)

II. HOW DEMOSTHENES OVERCAME HIS HANDICAPS

ÅrÄtor imitÄtur¹ illum cui summa vÄ«s dÄ«cendÄ« concÄditur,² DÄmosthenem, in quÅ tantum studium fuisse dÄ«citur ut impedÄ«menta³ nÄtÅ«rae dÄ«ligentiÄ⁴ industriÄque⁵ superÄret. Nam cum ita balbus⁶ esset ut illÄ«us ipsÄ«us artis⁷ cui studÄret prÄ«mam litteram nÅn posset dÄ«cere, perfÄcit⁸ meditandÅ⁹ ut nÄmÅ plÄnius¹⁰ loquerÄtur.

5 Â Â Â  Deinde, cum spÄ«ritus eius esset angustior,¹¹ spÄ«ritÅ« continendÅ multum perfÄcit in dÄ«cendÅ; et coniectÄ«s¹² in Ås calculÄ«s,¹³ summÄ vÅce versÅ«s multÅs Å«nÅ spÄ«ritÅ« prÅnÅ«ntiÄre cÅnsuÄscÄbat¹⁴; neque id faciÄbat stÄns Å«nÅ in locÅ sed ambulÄns. (Cicero, DÄ ÅrÄtÅre 1.61.260â61)

III. THE TYRANT CAN TRUST NO ONE

MultÅs annÅs tyrannus SyrÄcÅ«sÄnÅrum¹ fuit Dionsius. Pulcherrimam urbem servitÅ«te oppressam tenuit. At Ä bonÄ«s auctÅribus cognÅvimus eum fuisse hominem summae temperantiae² in vÄ«ctÅ«³ et in rÄbus gerendÄ«s Äcrem et industrium,⁴ eundem tamen malum et iniÅ«stum.⁵ QuÄrÄ, omnibus virÄ«s bene vÄritÄtem quaerentibus

5 Â Â Â  hunc vidÄrÄ« miserrimum necesse est, nam nÄminÄ« crÄdere audÄbat. Itaque propter iniÅ«stam cupiditÄtem dominÄtÅ«s⁶ quasi in carcerem⁷ ipse sÄ inclÅ«serat.⁸ QuÄ«n etiam,⁹ nÄ tÅnsÅrÄ«¹⁰ collum¹¹ committeret, fÄ«liÄs suÄs artem tÅnsÅriam docuit.¹² Ita hae virginÄs tondÄbant¹³ barbam¹⁴ et capillum¹⁵ patris. Et tamen ab hÄ«s ipsÄ«s, cum iam essent adultae,¹⁶ ferrum remÅvit, eÄ«sque imperÄvit ut carbÅnibus¹⁷

10 Â Â Â barbam et capillum sibi adÅ«rerent.¹⁸ (Cicero, TusculÄnae DisputÄtiÅnÄs 5.20.57â58)

IV. THE SWORD OF DAMOCLES

Hic tyrannus ipse dÄmÅnstrÄvit quam beÄtus esset. Nam cum quÄ«dam ex eius assentÄtÅribus,¹ DÄmoclÄs,² commemorÄret³ cÅpiÄs eius, maiestÄtem⁴ dominÄtÅ«s, rÄrum abundantiam,⁵ negÄretque quemquam⁶ umquam beÄtiÅrem fuisse, Dionsius âVÄ«sne igitur,â inquit, âÅ DÄmocle, ipse hanc vÄ«tam dÄgustÄre⁷ et fortÅ«nam

5 Â Â Â  meam experÄ«rÄ«?â Cum ille sÄ cupere dÄ«xisset, hominem in aureÅ⁸ lectÅ⁹ collocÄrÄ«¹⁰ iussit mÄnsÄsque ÅrnÄvit argentÅ¹¹ aurÅque.¹² Tum puerÅs bellÅs iussit cÄnam exquÄ«sÄ«tissimam¹³ Ä«nferre. FortÅ«nÄtus sibi DÄmoclÄs vidÄbÄtur. EÅdem autem tempore Dionsius gladium suprÄ¹⁴ caput eius saetÄ equÄ«nÄ¹⁵ dÄmittÄ«¹⁶ iussit. DÄmoclÄs, cum gladium vÄ«disset, timÄns ÅrÄvit tyrannum ut eÄ« abÄ«re licÄret, quod iam âbeÄtusâ

10 Â Â  nÅllet esse. Satisne Dionsius vidÄtur dÄmÅnstrÄvisse nihil esse eÄ« beÄtum cui semper aliquÄ«¹⁷ metus impendeat?¹⁸ (Cicero, TusculÄnae DisputÄtiÅnÄs 5.20.61â62)

V. DERIVATION OF âPHILOSOPHUSâ AND
SUBJECTS OF PHILOSOPHY

EÄ« quÄ« studia in contemplÄtiÅne¹ rÄrum pÅnÄbant âsapientÄsâ appellÄbantur, et id nÅmen usque ad Pthagorae² aetÄtem mÄnÄvit.³ Hunc aiunt doctÄ et cÅpiÅsÄ⁴ quaedam cum Leonte⁵ disputÄvisse⁶; et LeÅn, cum illÄ«us ingenium et Äloquentiam⁷ admÄ«rÄtus esset,⁸ quaesÄ«vit ex eÅ quÄ arte maximÄ Å«terÄtur. At ille dÄ«xit sÄ artem

5 Â Â Â  nÅ«llam scÄ«re sed esse philosophum. Tum LeÅn, admÄ«rÄtus novum nÅmen, quaesÄ«vit quÄ« essent philosophÄ«. PthagorÄs respondit multÅs hominÄs glÅriae aut pecÅ«niae servÄ«re sed paucÅs quÅsdam esse quÄ« cÄtera prÅ nihilÅ⁹ habÄrent sed nÄtÅ«ram rÄrum cognÅscere cuperent; hÅs sÄ appellÄre âstudiÅsÅs¹⁰ sapientiae,â id est enim âphilosophÅs.â¹¹ SÄ«c PthagorÄs huius nÅminis inventor¹² fuit.

10 Â Â Â Â Â Â  Ab antÄ«quÄ philosophiÄ usque ad SÅcratem¹³ philosophÄ« numerÅs et sÄ«dera tractÄbant¹⁴ et unde omnia orÄ«rentur¹⁵ et quÅ¹⁶ discÄderent. SÅcratÄs autem prÄ«mus philosophiam dÄvocÄvit Ä caelÅ et in urbibus hominibusque collocÄvit et coÄgit eam dÄ vÄ«tÄ et mÅribus rÄbusque bonÄ«s et malÄ«s quaerere. (Cicero, TusculÄnae DisputÄtiÅnÄs 5.3.8â9; 5.4.10)

VI. CICERO ON THE VALUE AND THE NATURE OF FRIENDSHIP

Ego vÅs hortor ut amÄ«citiam omnibus rÄbus hÅ«mÄnÄ«s antepÅnÄtis. SentiÅ equidem,¹ exceptÄ² sapientiÄ, nihil melius hominÄ« Ä deÄ«s immortÄlibus datum esse. DÄ«vitiÄs aliÄ« antepÅnunt; aliÄ«, salÅ«tem; aliÄ«, potestÄtem³; aliÄ«, honÅrÄs; multÄ«, etiam voluptÄtÄs. Illa autem incerta sunt, posita nÅn tam in cÅnsiliÄ«s nostrÄ«s quam in fortÅ«nae

5 Â Â Â  vicissitÅ«dinibus.⁴ QuÄ« autem in virtÅ«te summum bonum pÅnunt, bene illÄ« quidem faciunt; sed ex ipsÄ virtÅ«te amÄ«citia nÄscitur nec sine virtÅ«te amÄ«citia esse potest.

DÄnique cÄterae rÄs, quae petuntur, opportÅ«nae⁵ sunt rÄbus singulÄ«s⁶: dÄ«vitiae, ut eÄ«s Å«tÄris; honÅrÄs, ut laudÄris; salÅ«s, ut dolÅre careÄs et rÄbus corporis Å«tÄris. AmÄ«citia rÄs plÅ«rimÄs continet; nÅ«llÅ locÅ exclÅ«ditur⁷; numquam intempestÄ«va,⁸

10 Â Â Â  numquam molesta⁹ est. Itaque nÅn aquÄ, nÅn igne in locÄ«s plÅ«ribus Å«timur quam amÄ«citiÄ; nam amÄ«citia secundÄs rÄs clÄriÅrÄs facit et adversÄs rÄs leviÅrÄs.

Quis est quÄ« velit in omnium rÄrum abundantiÄ ita¹⁰ vÄ«vere ut neque dÄ«ligat quemquam¹¹ neque ipse ab Å«llÅ dÄ«ligÄtur? Haec enim est tyrannÅrum vÄ«ta, in quÄ nÅ«lla fidÄs, nÅ«lla cÄritÄs,¹² nÅ«lla benevolentia¹³ potest esse; omnia semper metuun-

15 Â Â  tur, nÅ«llus locus est amÄ«citiae. Quis enim aut eum dÄ«ligat¹⁴ quem metuat aut eum Ä quÅ sÄ metuÄ« putet? MultÄ« autem sÄ« cecidÄrunt, ut saepe fit, tum intellegunt quam inopÄs¹⁵ amÄ«cÅrum fuerint. Quid vÄrÅ stultius quam cÄtera parÄre quae parantur pecÅ«niÄ sed amÄ«cÅs nÅn parÄre, optimam et pulcherrimam quasi supellectilem¹⁶ vÄ«tae?

20 Â Â Â Â Â Â  Quisque ipse sÄ dÄ«ligit nÅn ut aliam mercÄdem¹⁷ Ä sÄ ipse petat sed quod per sÄ quisque sibi cÄrus est. Nisi idem in amÄ«citiam trÄnsferÄtur,¹⁸ vÄrus amÄ«cus numquam reperiÄtur. AmÄ«cus enim est is quÄ« est tamquam alter Ä«dem. Ipse sÄ dÄ«ligit et alterum quaerit cuius animum ita cum suÅ misceat ut faciat Å«num ex duÅbus. Quid enim dulcius quam habÄre quÄ«cum¹⁹ audeÄs sÄ«c loquÄ« ut tÄcum? (Ci-

25 Â Â cero, DÄ AmÄ«citiÄ, excerpts from Chs. 5, 6, 15, 21)

VII. CICERO ON WAR

Quaedam officia sunt servanda etiam adversus¹ eÅs Ä quibus iniÅ«riam accÄpimus. Atque in rÄ pÅ«blicÄ maximÄ cÅnservanda sunt iÅ«ra bellÄ«. Nam sunt duo genera dÄcertandÄ«²: Å«num per disputÄtiÅnem,³ alterum per vim. Illud est proprium⁴ hominis, hoc bÄluÄrum⁵; sed bellum vÄ« gerendum est sÄ« disputÄtiÅne Å«tÄ« nÅn licet.

5 Â Â Â  QuÄrÄ suscipienda quidem bella sunt ut sine iniÅ«riÄ in pÄce vÄ«vÄmus; post autem victÅriam eÄ« cÅnservandÄ« sunt quÄ« nÅn crÅ«dÄlÄs,⁶ nÅn dÅ«rÄ« in bellÅ fuÄrunt, ut maiÅrÄs nostrÄ« SabÄ«nÅs⁷ in cÄ«vitÄtem etiam accÄpÄrunt. At CarthÄginem omnÄ«nÅ sustulÄrunt; etiam Corinthum sustulÄruntâquod nÅn approbÅ⁸; sed crÄdÅ eÅs hoc fÄcisse nÄ locus ipse ad bellum faciendum hortÄrÄ« posset. MeÄ quidem sententiÄ,⁹

10 Â Â  pÄx quae nihil Ä«nsidiÄrum habeat semper quaerenda est. Ac aequitÄs¹⁰ bellÄ« fÄtiÄlÄ«¹¹ iÅ«re populÄ« RÅmÄnÄ« perscrÄ«pta est.¹² QuÄrÄ potest intellegÄ« nÅ«llum bellum esse iÅ«stum nisi quod aut rÄbus repetÄ«tÄ«s¹³ gerÄtur aut ante dÄnÅ«ntiÄtum sit.¹⁴

NÅ«llum bellum dÄbet suscipÄ« Ä cÄ«vitÄte optimÄ nisi aut prÅ fidÄ aut prÅ salÅ«te. Illa bella sunt iniÅ«sta quae sine causÄ sunt suscepta. Nam extrÄ¹⁵ ulcÄ«scendÄ«¹⁶ aut

15 Â Â  prÅpulsandÅrum¹⁷ hostium causam nÅ«llum bellum cum aequitÄte gerÄ« potest. Noster autem populus sociÄ«s¹⁸ dÄfendendÄ«s terrÄrum¹⁹ omnium potÄ«tus est.²⁰ (Cicero, DÄ OfficiÄ«s 1.11.34â36 and DÄ RÄ PÅ«blicÄ 3.23.34â35)

VIII. HANNIBAL; THE SECOND PUNIC WAR

Hannibal,¹ fÄ«lius Hamilcaris,² CarthÄgine nÄtus est. Odium patris ergÄ RÅmÄnÅs sÄ«c cÅnservÄvit ut numquam id dÄpÅneret.³ Nam post bellum PÅ«nicum,⁴ cum ex patriÄ in exsilium expulsus esset, nÅn relÄ«quit studium bellÄ« RÅmÄnÄ«s Ä«nferendÄ«.⁵ QuÄrÄ, cum in Syriam⁶ vÄnisset, AntiochÅ⁷ rÄgÄ« haec locÅ«tus est ut hunc quoque

5 Â Â Â  ad bellum cum RÅmÄnÄ«s indÅ«cere⁸ posset:

âMÄ novem annÅs nÄtÅ, pater meus Hamilcar, in HispÄniam⁹ imperÄtor proficÄ«scÄns CarthÄgine, sacrificium¹⁰ dÄ«s fÄcit. EÅdem tempore quaesÄ«vit Ä mÄ vellemne sÄcum proficÄ«scÄ«. Cum id libenter audÄ«vissem et ab eÅ petere coepissem nÄ dubitÄret mÄ dÅ«cere, tum ille âFaciam,â inquit, âsÄ« mihi fidem quam quaerÅ ded-

10 Â Â eris.â Tum mÄ ad Äram¹¹ dÅ«xit et mÄ iÅ«rÄre¹² iussit mÄ numquam in amÄ«citiÄ cum RÅmÄnÄ«s futÅ«rum esse. Id iÅ«s iÅ«randum¹³ patrÄ« datum usque ad hanc aetÄtem ita cÅnservÄvÄ« ut nÄmÅ sit quÄ« plÅ«s odiÄ« ergÄ RÅmÄnÅs habeat.â

HÄc igitur aetÄte Hannibal cum patre in HispÄniam profectus est. Post multÅs annÅs, Hamilcare et Hasdrubale¹⁴ interfectÄ«s, exercitus eÄ« imperium trÄdidit. SÄ«c

15 Â Â Hannibal, quÄ«nque et vÄ«gintÄ« annÅs nÄtus, imperÄtor factus est. Tribus annÄ«s omnÄs gentÄs HispÄniae superÄvit et trÄs exercitÅ«s maximÅs parÄvit. Ex hÄ«s Å«num in Äfricam¹⁵ mÄ«sit, alterum cum frÄtre in HispÄniÄ relÄ«quit, tertium in Italiam sÄcum dÅ«xit.

Ad AlpÄs¹⁶ vÄnit, quÄs nÄmÅ umquam ante eum cum exercitÅ« trÄnsierat.

20 Â Â AlpicÅs¹⁷ cÅnantÄs prohibÄre eum trÄnsitÅ« occÄ«dit¹⁸; loca patefÄcit; itinera mÅ«nÄ«vit¹⁹; effÄcit²⁰ ut²¹ elephantus Ä«re posset quÄ²² anteÄ²³ Å«nus homÅ vix²⁴ poterat rÄpere.²⁵ SÄ«c in Italiam pervÄnit et, ScÄ«piÅne²⁶ superÄtÅ, EtrÅ«riam²⁷ petÄ«vit. HÅc in itinere tam gravÄ« morbÅ²⁸ oculÅrum adfectus est²⁹ ut posteÄ numquam dextrÅ oculÅ bene Å«terÄtur.

25 Â Â Â Â Â Â  MultÅs ducÄs exercitÅ«sque RÅmÄnÅs superÄvit; longum est omnia proelia³⁰ ÄnumerÄre.³¹ Post CannÄnsem³² autem pugnam nÄmÅ eÄ« in aciÄ³³ in ItaliÄ restitit.³⁴ Cum autem P. ScÄ«piÅ tandem³⁵ in Äfricam invÄsisset,³⁶ Hannibal, ad patriam dÄfendendam revocÄtus, Zamae³⁷ victus est. SÄ«c post tot annÅs RÅmÄnÄ« sÄ perÄ«culÅ PÅ«nicÅ lÄ«berÄvÄrunt. (Nepos, Hannibal, excerpts)

IX. AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL NOTES BY HORACE

NÅ«lla fors¹ mihi tÄ, MaecÄnÄs,² obtulit: optimus Vergilius et post hunc Varius³ dÄ«xÄrunt quid essem. Ut ad tÄ vÄnÄ«, singultim⁴ pauca locÅ«tus (nam pudor⁵ prohibÄbat plÅ«ra profÄrÄ«⁶), ego nÅn dÄ«xÄ« mÄ clÄrÅ patre nÄtum esse sed nÄrrÄvÄ« quod eram. RespondÄs,⁷ ut tuus mÅs est, pauca. AbeÅ et post nÅnum mÄnsem⁸ mÄ

5 Â Â Â  revocÄs iubÄsque esse in amÄ«cÅrum numerÅ. Hoc magnum esse dÅ«cÅ, quod⁹ placuÄ« tibi, quÄ« bonÅs Ä turpibus sÄcernis¹⁰ nÅn patre clÄrÅ sed vÄ«tÄ et pectore pÅ«rÅ.¹¹

AtquÄ«¹² sÄ« mea nÄtÅ«ra est mendÅsa¹³ vitiÄ«s mediocribus ac paucÄ«s sed aliÅquÄ«¹⁴ rÄcta,¹⁵ sÄ« neque avÄritiam neque sordÄs¹⁶ quisquam¹⁷ mihi obiciet,¹⁸ sÄ« pÅ«rus sum et Ä«nsÅns¹⁹ (ut mÄ laudem!) et vÄ«vÅ cÄrus amÄ«cÄ«s, causa fuit pater meus. Hic enim,

10 Â Â cum pauper in parvÅ agrÅ esset, tamen nÅluit mÄ puerum in lÅ«dum FlÄviÄ«²⁰ mittere sed ausus est mÄ RÅmam ferre ad artÄs discendÄs quÄs senÄtÅrÄs²¹ suÅs filiÅs docent. Ipse mihi paedagÅgus²² incorruptissimus²³ erat. MÄ lÄ«berum servÄvit nÅn sÅlum ab omnÄ« factÅ sed etiam ab turpÄ« opprobriÅ.²⁴ QuÄrÄ laus illÄ« Ä mÄ dÄbÄtur et grÄtia²⁵ magna.

15 Â Â Â Â Â Â  SÄ«c RÅmae nÅ«trÄ«tus sum²⁶ atque doctus sum quantum²⁷ Ä«rÄtus AchillÄs GraecÄ«s nocuisset. Deinde bonae AthÄnae mihi plÅ«s artis adiÄcÄrunt,²⁸ scÄ«licet²⁹ ut vellem rÄctum Ä curvÅ³⁰ distinguere³¹ atque inter silvÄs³² AcadÄmÄ«³³ quaerere vÄritÄtem. Sed dÅ«ra tempora mÄ illÅ locÅ grÄtÅ ÄmÅvÄrunt et aestus³⁴ cÄ«vÄ«lis³⁵ bellÄ« mÄ tulit in arma BrÅ«tÄ«.³⁶ Tum post bellum PhilippÄnse³⁷ dÄ«missus sum³⁸ et audÄx³⁹ paupertÄs

20 Â Â mÄ humilem et pauperem coÄgit versÅ«s facere. (Horace, Saturae 1.6 and Epistulae 2.2; excerpts in prose form)

X. HORACE LONGS FOR THE SIMPLE, PEACEFUL
COUNTRY LIFE ON HIS SABINE FARM

Å rÅ«s, quandÅ tÄ aspiciam?¹ QuandÅ mihi licÄbit nunc librÄ«s veterum auctÅrum, nunc somnÅ et ÅtiÅ Å«tÄ« sine cÅ«rÄ«s sollicitae² vÄ«tae? Å noctÄs cÄnaeque deÅrum! SermÅ³ oritur⁴ nÅn dÄ vÄ«llÄ«s⁵ et domibus aliÄnÄ«s⁶; sed id quaerimus quod magis ad nÅs pertinet⁷ et nescÄ«re malum est: utrum dÄ«vitiÄ«s an virtÅ«te hominÄs fÄ«ant beÄtÄ«;

5 Â Â Â  quid nÅs ad amÄ«citiam trahat, Å«sus⁸ an rÄctum⁹; et quae sit nÄtÅ«ra bonÄ«¹⁰ et quid sit summum bonum.

Inter haec Cervius¹¹ fÄbulam nÄrrat. MÅ«s¹² rÅ«sticus,¹³ impulsus¹⁴ ab urbÄnÅ mÅ«re, domÅ rÅ«sticÄ ad urbem abiit ut, dÅ«rÄ vÄ«tÄ relictÄ, in rÄbus iÅ«cundÄ«s cum illÅ vÄ«veret beÄtus. Mox, autem, multa perÄ«cula urbÄna expertus, rÅ«sticus âHaec vÄ«ta,â

10 Â Â inquit, ânÅn est mihi necessÄria.¹⁵ ValÄ; mihi silva cavusque¹⁶ tÅ«tus¹⁷ ab Ä«nsidiÄ«s placÄbit.â (Horace, Saturae 2.6, excerpts in prose form)

XI. WHY NO LETTERS?

C.¹ PlÄ«nius FabiÅ² SuÅ S.³

Mihi nÅ«llÄs epistulÄs⁴ mittis. âNihil est,â inquis, âquod scrÄ«bam.â At hoc ipsum scrÄ«be: nihil esse quod scrÄ«bÄs; vel⁵ illa verba sÅla Ä quibus maiÅrÄs nostrÄ« incipere solÄbant: âSÄ« valÄs, bene est; ego valeÅ.â Hoc mihi sufficit⁶; est enim maximum. MÄ

5 Â Â Â  lÅ«dere⁷ putÄs? SÄriÅ⁸ petÅ. Fac ut sciam quid agÄs. ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 1.11)

XII. WHAT PLINY THINKS OF THE RACES

C. PlÄ«nius CalvisiÅ¹ SuÅ S.

Hoc omne tempus inter tabellÄs² ac libellÅs iÅ«cundissimÄ quiÄte³ cÅnsÅ«mpsÄ«. âQuemadmodum,⁴â inquis, âin urbe potuisti?â CircÄnsÄs⁵ erant quÅ genere spectÄculÄ«⁶ nÄ levissimÄ quidem teneor. Nihil novum, nihil varium,⁷ nihil quod semel

5 Â Â Â  spectÄvisse nÅn sufficiat. QuÄrÄ mÄ«ror tot mÄ«lia virÅrum tam puerÄ«liter⁸ identidem⁹ cupere currentÄs equÅs vidÄre. ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 9.6)

XIII. PLINY ENDOWS A SCHOOL

NÅ«per cum CÅmÄ«¹ fuÄ«, vÄnit ad mÄ salÅ«tandum² fÄ«lius amÄ«cÄ« cuiusdam. Huic ego âStudÄs?â inquam. Respondit: âEtiam.â âUbi?â âMediolÄnÄ«.³â âCÅ«r nÅn hÄ«c?â Et pater eius, quÄ« ipse puerum ad mÄ addÅ«xerat, respondit: âQuod nÅ«llÅs magistrÅs hÄ«c habÄmus.â Huic aliÄ«sque patribus quÄ« audiÄbant ego: âQuÄrÄ nÅ«llÅs?â inquam.

5 Â Â Â  âNam ubi iÅ«cundius lÄ«berÄ«⁴ vestrÄ« discere possunt quam hÄ«c in urbe vestrÄ et sub oculÄ«s patrum? Atque ego, quÄ« nÅndum⁵ lÄ«berÅs habeÅ, prÅ rÄ pÅ«blicÄ nostrÄ quasi prÅ parente tertiam partem eius pecÅ«niae dabÅ quam cÅnferre vÅbÄ«s placÄbit. Nihil enim melius praestÄre lÄ«berÄ«s vestrÄ«s, nihil grÄtius patriae potestis.â (Pliny, Epistulae 4.13)

XIV. LARGE GIFTSâYES, BUT ONLY BAIT

âMÅ«nera¹ magna tamen mÄ«sit.â Sed mÄ«sit in hÄmÅ²;

et piscÄtÅrem³ piscis⁴ amÄre potest? (Martial 6.63.5â6)

XV. THE LORDâS PRAYER

Et cum ÅrÄtis nÅn eritis sÄ«cut¹ hypocritae,² quÄ« amant in synagÅgÄ«s³ et in angulÄ«s⁴ plateÄrum⁵ stantÄs ÅrÄre ut videantur ab hominibus: ÄmÄn⁶ dÄ«cÅ vÅbÄ«s, recÄpÄrunt mercÄdem⁷ suam. TÅ« autem cum ÅrÄbis, intrÄ⁸ in cubiculum⁹ tuum et, clausÅ¹⁰ ÅstiÅ¹¹ tuÅ, ÅrÄ Patrem tuum in absconditÅ¹²; et Pater tuus quÄ« videt in absconditÅ

5 Â Â Â  reddet¹³ tibiâ¦. SÄ«c ergÅ¹⁴ vÅs ÅrÄbitis: Pater noster quÄ« es in caelÄ«s, sÄnctificÄtur¹⁵nÅmen tuum; adveniat rÄgnum¹⁶ tuum; fÄ«at voluntÄs¹⁷ tua sÄ«cut in caelÅ et¹⁸ in terrÄ. PÄnem¹⁹ nostrum supersubstantiÄlem²⁰ dÄ nÅbÄ«s hodiÄ, et dÄ«mitte²¹ nÅbÄ«s dÄbita²² nostra, sÄ«cut et nÅs dÄ«mittimus dÄbitÅribus²³ nostrÄ«s; et nÄ indÅ«cÄs nÅs in temptÄtiÅnem²⁴: sed lÄ«berÄ nÅs Ä malÅ. (Vulgate, Matthew 6.5â6, 9â13)

XVI. CAEDMONâS ANGLO-SAXON VERSES
AND THE DIFFICULTIES OF TRANSLATION

Cum Caedmon¹ corpus somnÅ dedisset, angelus² DominÄ« eÄ« dormientÄ« âCaedmon,â inquit, âcantÄ³ mihi prÄ«ncipium creÄtÅ«rÄrum.⁴â Et statim⁵ coepit cantÄre in laudem DeÄ« creÄtÅris⁶ versÅ«s quÅs numquam audÄ«verat, quÅrum hic est sÄnsus: âNunc laudÄre dÄbÄmus auctÅrem rÄgni⁷ caelestis,⁸ potestÄtem⁹ creatÅris et cÅn-

5 Â Â Â  silium illÄ«us, facta Patris glÅriae, quÄ«, omnipotÄns¹⁰ custÅs¹¹ hÅ«mÄnÄ« generis, fÄ«liÄ«s hominum caelum et terram creÄvit.â Hic est sÄnsus, nÅn autem ÅrdÅ¹² ipse verbÅrum quae dormiÄns ille cantÄvit; neque enim possunt carmina, quamvÄ«s¹³ optimÄ composita,¹⁴ ex aliÄ in aliam linguam ad verbum¹⁵ sine dÄtrÄ«mentÅ¹⁶ suÄ« decÅris¹⁷ ac dignitÄtis trÄnsferrÄ«.¹⁸ (Bede, Historia EcclÄsiastica Gentis AnglÅrum 4.24; 8th cent.)

XVII. WHO WILL PUT THE BELL ON THE CATâS NECK?

MÅ«rÄs¹ iniÄrunt cÅnsilium quÅ modÅ sÄ Ä cattÅ² dÄfendere possent et quaedam sapientior quam cÄterae Äit: âLigÄtur³ campÄna⁴ in collÅ⁵ cattÄ«. SÄ«c poterimus eum eiusque Ä«nsidiÄs vÄ«tÄre.â Placuit omnibus hoc cÅnsilium, sed alia mÅ«s âQuis igitur,â inquit, âest inter nÅs tam audÄx⁶ ut campÄnam in collÅ cattÄ« ligÄre audeat?â Re-

5 Â Â Â  spondit Å«na mÅ«s: âCertÄ nÅn ego.â Respondit alia: âCertÄ nÅn ego audeÅ prÅ tÅtÅ mundÅ cattÅ ipsÄ« appropinquÄre.⁷â Et idem cÄterae dÄ«xÄrunt.

SÄ«c saepe hominÄs, cum quendam Ämovendum esse arbitrantur et contrÄ eum insurgere⁸ volunt, inter sÄ dÄ«cunt: âQuis appÅnet sÄ contrÄ eum? Quis accÅ«sÄbit⁹ eum?â Tum omnÄs, sibi timentÄs, dÄ«cunt: âNÅn ego certÄ! Nec ego!â SÄ«c illum

10 Â Â vÄ«vere patiuntur. (Odo de Cerinton, NÄrrÄtiÅnÄs, 12th cent.)

XVIII. THE DEVIL AND A THIRTEENTH-CENTURY SCHOOLBOY

In illÄ ecclÄsiÄ¹ erat scholÄris² parvus. Cum hic diÄ quÄdam³ versÅ«s compÅnere ex eÄ mÄteriÄ⁴ Ä magistrÅ datÄ nÅn posset et trÄ«stis sedÄret, diabolus⁵ in fÅrmÄ hominis vÄnit. Cum dÄ«xisset: âQuid est, puer? CÅ«r sÄ«c trÄ«stis sedÄs?â respondit puer: âMagistrum meum timeÅ quod versÅ«s compÅnere nÅn possum dÄ themate⁶ quod

5 Â Â Â  ab eÅ recÄpÄ«.â Et ille: âVÄ«sne mihi servÄ«re sÄ« ego versÅ«s tibi compÅnam?â Puer, nÅn intellegÄns quod⁷ ille esset diabolus, respondit: âEtiam, domine, parÄtus sum facere quidquid iusserisâdummodo versÅ«s habeam et verbera⁸ vÄ«tem.â Tum, versibus statim⁹ dictÄtÄ«s,¹⁰ diabolus abiit. Cum puer autem hÅs versÅ«s magistrÅ suÅ dedisset, hic, excellentiam¹¹ versuum mÄ«rÄtus, timuit, dÅ«cÄns scientiam in illÄ«s dÄ«vÄ«nam,¹²

10 Â Â nÅn hÅ«mÄnam. Et ait: âDÄ«c mihi, quis tibi hÅs versÅ«s dictÄvit?â PrÄ«mum puer respondit: âEgo, magister!â MagistrÅ autem nÅn crÄdente et verbum interrogÄtiÅnis¹³ saepius repetente, puer omnia tandem¹⁴ cÅnfessus est.¹⁵ Tum magister âFÄ«lÄ«,â inquit, âille versificÄtor¹⁶ fuit diabolus. CÄrissime, semper illum sÄductÅrem¹⁷ et eius opera cavÄ.¹⁸â Et puer diabolum eiusque opera relÄ«quit. (Caesar of Heisterbach, MÄ«rÄcula 2.14; 13th cent.)

LOCÄª IMMTÄTÄª

The LocÄ« ImmÅ« tÄtÄ« are offered for those who may finish reading all the LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ« and wish to try their wits on some unaltered classical Latin. These passages are straight Latin, unchanged except for occasional omissions, which have been regularly indicated by three dots. Naturally this unadapted literary material had to be rather heavily annotated, but more in the matter of vocabulary than in other respects. As in the case of the LocÄ« AntÄ«quÄ«, words appearing here that have not been introduced in the regular chapter VocÄbula are glossed at their first one or two occurrences, and most are also included in the Latin-English VocÄbula at the back of the book for quick reference, if needed. New grammatical principles have been treated as they occur, either by a brief statement in the notes or by reference to the Appendix.

Take the time, as always, to begin each passage by reading it aloud, once or twice at least, and always read first for comprehensionâattempting to gain a clear sense of what the author is saying, before you attempt a translation into English.

I. A DEDICATION

Cui dÅnÅ¹ lepidum² novum libellum

ÄridÅ³ modo⁴ pÅ«mice⁵ expolÄ«tum⁶?

CornÄlÄ«,⁷ tibi, namque⁸ tÅ« solÄbÄs

meÄs esse aliquid putÄre nÅ«gÄs,⁹

5 Â Â Â  iam tum cum ausus es Å«nusÄª talÅrum¹⁰

omne aevum¹¹ tribus explicÄre¹² chartÄ«s,¹³

doctÄ«sâIupitter!âet labÅriÅsÄ«s.¹⁴

QuÄrÄ habÄ tibi quidquid hoc libellÄ«¹⁵

quÄlecumque,¹⁵ quod, Å patrÅna¹⁶ virgÅ,

10 Â Â plÅ«s Å«nÅ maneat¹⁷ perenne¹⁸ saeclÅ.¹⁹ (Catullus 1)

II. HOW MANY KISSES¹

Quaeris quot mihi bÄsiÄtiÅnÄs²

tuae, Lesbia, sint satis superque.³

Quam magnus numerus Libyssae⁴ harÄnae⁵

laserpÄ«ciferÄ«s⁶ iacet CyrÄnÄ«s,⁷

â¦

5 Â Â Â  aut quam sÄ«dera multa, cum tacet nox,

fÅ«rtÄ«vÅs⁸ hominum vident amÅrÄs,

tam tÄ⁹ bÄsia multa bÄsiÄre¹⁰

vÄsÄnÅ¹¹ satis et super CatullÅ est. (Catullus 7.1â4, 7â10)

III. DEATH OF A PET SPARROW

LÅ«gÄte,¹ Å VenerÄs² CupÄ«dinÄsque³

et quantum est hominum⁴ venustiÅrum⁵!

Passer⁶ mortuus est meae puellae,

passer, dÄliciae⁷ meae puellae,

5 Â Â Â  quem plÅ«s illa oculÄ«s suÄ«s amÄbat.

Nam mellÄ«tus⁸ erat, suamque nÅrat⁹

ipsam¹⁰ tam bene quam puella mÄtrem;

nec sÄsÄ¹¹ Ä gremiÅ¹² illius movÄbat,

sed circumsiliÄns¹³ modo hÅ«c¹⁴ modo illÅ«c¹⁵

10 Â Â ad sÅlam dominam usque pÄ«piÄbat.¹⁶

QuÄ«¹⁷ nunc it per iter tenebricÅsum¹⁸

illÅ«c unde negant redÄ«re quemquam.¹⁹

At vÅbÄ«s male sit, malae tenebrae²⁰

OrcÄ«,²¹ quae omnia bella dÄvorÄtis;²²

15 Â Â tam bellum mihi²³ passerem abstulistis.²⁴

Å factum male! IÅ²⁵ miselle²⁶ passer!

TuÄ nunc operÄ²⁷ meae puellae

flendÅ²⁸ turgidulÄ«²⁹ rubent³⁰ ocellÄ«.³¹ (Catullus 3)

IV. FRÄTER AVÄ, ATQUE VALÄ¹

MultÄs per gentÄs et multa per aequora² vectus³

adveniÅ hÄs miserÄs, frÄter, ad Ä«nferiÄs,⁴

ut tÄ postrÄmÅ⁵ dÅnÄrem⁶ mÅ«nere⁷ mortis

et mÅ«tam⁸ nÄquÄ«quam⁹ adloquerer¹⁰ cinerem,¹¹

5 Â Â Â  quandoquidem¹² fortÅ«na mihÄ«¹³ tÄtÄ¹⁴ abstulit¹⁵ ipsum,

heu miser indignÄ¹⁶ frÄter adempte¹⁷ mihÄ«.

Nunc tamen intereÄ¹⁸ haec,¹⁹ prÄ«scÅ²⁰ quae mÅre parentum

trÄdita sunt trÄ«stÄ« mÅ«nere ad Ä«nferiÄs,

accipe frÄternÅ²¹ multum²² mÄnantia²³ flÄtÅ«,²⁴

10 Â Â Â Â Â Â Â  atque in perpetuum,²⁵ frÄter, avÄ²⁶ atque valÄ. (Catullus 101)

V. VITRIOLIC DENUNCIATION¹ OF THE LEADER OF A CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE ROMAN STATE

QuÅ usque² tandem abÅ«tÄre,³ CatilÄ«na, patientiÄ nostrÄ? Quam diÅ« etiam furor⁴ iste tuus nÅs ÄlÅ«det⁵? Quem ad fÄ«nem sÄsÄ⁶ effrÄnÄta⁷ iactÄbit⁸ audÄcia⁹? Nihilne¹⁰ tÄ nocturnum¹¹ praesidium¹² PalÄtÄ«,¹³ nihil urbis vigiliae,¹⁴ nihil timor populÄ«, nihil concursus¹⁵ bonÅrum omnium, nihil hic mÅ«nÄ«tissimus¹⁶ habendÄ« senÄtÅ«s locus, nihil

5 Â Â Â  hÅrum Åra¹⁷ vultÅ«sque mÅvÄrunt? PatÄre tua cÅnsilia nÅn sentÄ«s? CÅnstrictam¹⁸ iam omnium hÅrum scientiÄ tenÄrÄ« coniÅ«rÄtiÅnem¹⁹ tuam nÅn vidÄs? Quid proximÄ,²⁰ quid superiÅre²¹ nocte ÄgerÄ«s, ubi fuerÄ«s, quÅs convocÄverÄ«s,²² quid cÅnsilÄ« cÄperÄ«s, quem nostrum²³ ignÅrÄre²⁴ arbitrÄris?

Å tempora²⁵! Å mÅrÄs! SenÄtus haec intellegit, cÅnsul videt; hic tamen vÄ«vit.

10 Â Â VÄ«vit? ImmÅ²⁶ vÄrÅ²⁷ etiam in senÄtum venit, fit pÅ«blicÄ« cÅnsilÄ« particeps,²⁸ notat²⁹ et dÄsignat³⁰ oculÄ«s ad caedem³¹ Å«num quemque nostrum. NÅs, autem, fortÄs virÄ«, satis facere reÄ« pÅ«blicae vidÄmur sÄ« istÄ«us furÅrem ac tÄla³² vÄ«tÄmus. Ad mortem tÄ, CatilÄ«na, dÅ«cÄ« iussÅ«³³ cÅnsulis iam prÄ«dem³⁴ oportÄbat, in tÄ cÅnferrÄ« pestem³⁵ quam tÅ« in nÅs mÄchinÄris³⁶â¦

15 Â Â Â Â Â Â  HabÄmus senÄtÅ«s cÅnsultum³⁷ in tÄ, CatilÄ«na, vehemÄns³⁸ et grave. NÅn deest³⁹ reÄ« pÅ«blicae cÅnsilium, neque auctÅritÄs⁴⁰ huius Årdinis⁴¹; nÅs, nÅs, dÄ«cÅ apertÄ,⁴² cÅnsulÄs dÄsumusâ¦ At nÅs vÄ«cÄsimum⁴³ iam diem patimur hebÄscere⁴⁴ aciem⁴⁵ hÅrum auctÅritÄtis. HabÄmus enim eius modÄ«⁴⁶ senÄtÅ«s cÅnsultum,â¦ quÅ ex⁴⁷ senÄtÅ«s cÅnsultÅ cÅnfestim⁴⁸ tÄ interfectum esse, CatilÄ«na, convÄnit.⁴⁹ VÄ«vis, et

20 Â Â vÄ«vis nÅn ad dÄpÅnendam,⁵⁰ sed ad cÅnfÄ«rmandam⁵¹ audÄciam. CupiÅ, patrÄs cÅnscrÄ«ptÄ«,⁵² mÄ esse clÄmentem⁵³; cupiÅ in tantÄ«s reÄ« pÅ«blicae perÄ«culÄ«s mÄ nÅn dissolÅ«tum⁵⁴ vidÄrÄ«, sed iam mÄ ipse inertiae⁵⁵ nÄquitiaeque⁵⁶ condemnÅ.⁵⁷

Castra⁵⁸ sunt in ItaliÄ contrÄ populum RÅmÄnum in EtrÅ«riae⁵⁹ faucibus⁶⁰ collocÄta⁶¹; crÄscit in diÄs singulÅs⁶² hostium numerus; eÅrum autem castrÅrum

25 Â Â imperÄtÅrem ducemque hostium intrÄ⁶³ moenia atque adeÅ⁶⁴ in senÄtÅ« vidÄmus, intestÄ«nam⁶⁵ aliquam cotÄ«diÄ perniciem⁶⁶ reÄ« pÅ«blicae mÅlientem⁶⁷â¦

Quae⁶⁸ cum ita sint, CatilÄ«na, perge⁶⁹ quÅ⁷⁰ coepistÄ«. Ägredere⁷¹ aliquandÅ⁷² ex urbe; patent portae; proficÄ«scere. Nimium diÅ« tÄ imperÄtÅrem tua illa MÄnliÄna⁷³ castra dÄsÄ«derant. ÄdÅ«c tÄcum etiam omnÄs tuÅs; sÄ« minus,⁷⁴ quam plÅ«rimÅs;

30 Â Â pÅ«rgÄ⁷⁵ urbem. MagnÅ mÄ metÅ« lÄ«berÄveris dum modo inter mÄ atque tÄ mÅ«rus⁷⁶ intersit.⁷⁷ NÅbÄ«scum versÄrÄ«⁷⁸ iam diÅ«tius nÅn potes; nÅn feram, nÅn patiar, nÅn sinam⁷⁹â¦

Quamquam⁸⁰ nÅn nÅ«llÄ«⁸¹ sunt in hÅc Årdine quÄ« aut ea quae imminent⁸² nÅn videant, aut ea quae vident dissimulent⁸³; quÄ«⁸⁴ spem CatilÄ«nae mollibus⁸⁵ sententiÄ«s

35 Â Â aluÄrunt coniÅ«rÄtiÅnemque nÄscentem nÅn crÄdendÅ corrÅborÄvÄrunt⁸⁶; quÅrum⁸⁷ auctÅritÄtem secÅ«ti,⁸⁸ multÄ« nÅn sÅlum improbÄ«,⁸⁹ vÄrum⁹⁰ etiam imperÄ«tÄ«,⁹¹ sÄ« in hunc animadvertissem,⁹² crÅ«dÄliter⁹³ et rÄgiÄ⁹⁴ factum esse⁹⁵ dÄ«cerent. Nunc intellegÅ, sÄ« iste, quÅ intendit,⁹⁶ in MÄnliÄna castra pervÄnerit,⁹⁷ nÄminem tam stultum fore⁹⁸ quÄ« nÅn videat coniÅ«rÄtiÅnem esse factam, nÄminem tam improbum quÄ«

40 Â Â nÅn fateÄtur.

HÅc autem Å«nÅ interfectÅ, intellegÅ hanc reÄ« pÅ«blicae pestem paulÄ«sper⁹⁹ reprimÄ«,¹⁰⁰ nÅn in perpetuum¹⁰¹ comprimÄ«¹⁰² posse. Quod sÄ«¹⁰³ sÄ ÄiÄcerit,¹⁰⁴ sÄcumque suÅs¹⁰⁵ ÄdÅ«xerit, et eÅdem¹⁰⁶ cÄterÅs undique¹⁰⁷ collÄctÅs¹⁰⁸ naufragÅs¹⁰⁹ adgregÄrit,¹¹⁰ exstinguÄtur¹¹¹ atque dÄlÄbitur nÅn modo haec tam adulta¹¹² reÄ« pÅ«blicae pestis, vÄrum

45 Â Â etiam stirps¹¹³ ac sÄmen¹¹⁴ malÅrum omniumâ¦ Quod sÄ«¹⁰³ ex tantÅ latrÅciniÅ¹¹⁵ iste Å«nus tollÄtur, vidÄbimur fortasse ad¹¹⁶ breve quoddam tempus cÅ«rÄ et metÅ« esse relevÄtÄ«;¹¹⁷ perÄ«culum autem residÄbit¹¹⁸â¦

QuÄrÄ sÄcÄdant¹¹⁹ improbÄ«; sÄcernant¹²⁰ sÄ Ä bonÄ«s; Å«num in locum congregentur¹²¹; mÅ«rÅ dÄnique (id quod saepe iam dÄ«xÄ«) sÄcernantur Ä nÅbÄ«s; dÄsinant¹²²

50 Â Â Ä«nsidiÄrÄ«¹²³ domÄ« suae¹²⁴ cÅnsulÄ«, circumstÄre¹²⁵ tribÅ«nal¹²⁶ praetÅris urbÄnÄ«,¹²⁷ obsidÄre¹²⁸ cum gladiÄ«s cÅ«riam,¹²⁹ malleolÅs¹³⁰ et facÄs¹³¹ ad Ä«nflammandam¹³² urbem comparÄre¹³³; sit dÄnique Ä«nscrÄ«ptum¹³⁴ in fronte¹³⁵ Å«nÄ«us cuiusque quid dÄ rÄ pÅ«blicÄ sentiat. Polliceor¹³⁶ hoc vÅbÄ«s, patrÄs cÅnscrÄ«ptÄ«,⁵² tantam in nÅbÄ«s cÅnsulibus fore⁹⁸ dÄ«ligentiam,¹³⁷ tantam in vÅbÄ«s auctÅritÄtem,⁴⁰ tantam in equitibus¹³⁸ RÅmÄnÄ«s

55 Â Â virtÅ«tem, tantam in omnibus bonÄ«s cÅnsÄnsiÅnem,¹³⁹ ut CatilÄ«nae profectiÅne¹⁴⁰ omnia patefacta, illÅ«strÄta,¹⁴¹ oppressa, vindicÄta¹⁴² esse videÄtis.

HÄ«sce¹⁴³ Åminibus,¹⁴⁴ CatilÄ«na, cum summÄ reÄ« pÅ«blicae salÅ«te,¹⁴⁵ cum tuÄ peste ac perniciÄ,¹⁴⁶ cumque eÅrum exitiÅ quÄ« sÄ tÄcum omnÄ« scelere parricÄ«diÅque¹⁴⁷ iÅ«nxÄrunt, proficÄ«scere ad impium¹⁴⁸ bellum ac nefÄrium.¹⁴⁹ TÅ«, Iuppiter, quÄ«

60 Â Â eÄ«sdem¹⁵⁰ quibus haec urbs auspiciÄ«s Ä RÅmulÅ¹⁵¹ es cÅnstitÅ«tus,¹⁵² quem StatÅrem¹⁵³ huius urbis atque imperiÄ« vÄrÄ nÅminÄmus,¹⁵⁴ hunc et huius sociÅs Ä tuÄ«s cÄterÄ«sque templÄ«s,¹⁵⁵ Ä tÄctÄ«s¹⁵⁶ urbis ac moenibus, Ä vÄ«tÄ fortÅ«nÄ«sque cÄ«vium arcÄbis¹⁵⁷, et hominÄs bonÅrum inimÄ«cÅs,¹⁵⁸ hostÄs patriae, latrÅnÄs¹⁵⁹ Italiae, scelerum foedere¹⁶⁰ inter sÄ ac nefÄriÄ societÄte¹⁶¹ coniÅ«nctÅs,¹⁶² aeternÄ«s¹⁶³ suppliciÄ«s¹⁶⁴ vÄ«vÅs mortuÅsque

65 Â Â mactÄbis.¹⁶⁵ (Cicero, In CatilÄ«nam ÅrÄtiÅ I, excerpts)

VI. THE ARREST AND TRIAL OF THE CONSPIRATORS¹

Rem pÅ«blicam, QuirÄ«tÄs,² vÄ«tamque³ omnium vestrum, bona,⁴ fortÅ«nÄs, coniugÄs⁵ lÄ«berÅsque⁶ vestrÅs, atque hoc domicilium⁷ clÄrissimÄ« imperÄ«, fortÅ«nÄtissimam pulcherrimamque urbem, hodiernÅ⁸ diÄ deÅrum immortÄlium summÅ ergÄ vÅs amÅre, labÅribus, cÅnsiliÄ«s, perÄ«culÄ«s meÄ«s, Ä flammÄ⁹ atque ferrÅ ac paene¹⁰ ex fau-

5 Â Â Â  cibus¹¹ fÄtÄ« Äreptam et vÅbÄ«s cÅnservÄtam ac restitÅ«tam¹² vidÄtis¹³â¦ Quae¹⁴ quoniam in senÄtÅ« illÅ«strÄta, patefacta, comperta¹⁵ sunt per mÄ, vÅbÄ«s iam expÅnam breviter, QuirÄ«tÄs, ut¹⁶ et¹⁷ quanta¹⁸ et quÄ ratiÅne investÄ«gÄta¹⁹ et comprehÄnsa sint, vÅs, quÄ« ignÅrÄtis et exspectÄtis, scÄ«re possÄ«tis.

PrÄ«ncipiÅ, ut²⁰ CatilÄ«na paucÄ«s ante diÄbus²¹ ÄrÅ«pit²² ex urbe, cum sceleris suÄ«

10 Â Â sociÅs, huiusce²³ nefÄriÄ« bellÄ« ÄcerrimÅs ducÄs, RÅmae relÄ«quisset, semper vigilÄvÄ«²⁴ et prÅvÄ«dÄ«,²⁵ QuirÄ«tÄs, quem ad modum²⁶ in tantÄ«s et tam absconditÄ«s²⁷ Ä«nsidiÄ«s salvÄ« esse possÄmus. Nam tum cum ex urbe CatilÄ«nam ÄiciÄbam (nÅn enim iam vereor huius verbÄ« invidiam, cum illa²⁸ magis²⁹ sit timenda, quod³⁰ vÄ«vus exierit)âsed tum cum³¹ illum exterminÄrÄ«³² volÄbam, aut³³ reliquam³⁴ coniÅ«rÄtÅrum manum simul³⁵

15 Â Â exitÅ«ram³⁶ aut eÅs quÄ« restitissent³⁷ Ä«nfÄ«rmÅs sine illÅ ac dÄbilÄs³⁸ fore³⁹ putÄbam. Atque ego, ut vÄ«dÄ«, quÅs maximÅ furÅre et scelere esse Ä«nflammÄtÅs sciÄbam, eÅs nÅbÄ«scum esse et RÅmae remÄnsisse, in eÅ⁴⁰ omnÄs diÄs noctÄsque cÅnsÅ«mpsÄ« ut quid agerent, quid mÅlÄ«rentur, sentÄ«rem ac vidÄremâ¦ Itaque, ut comperÄ« lÄgÄtÅs⁴¹ Allobrogum⁴² bellÄ« TrÄnsalpÄ«nÄ«⁴³ et tumultÅ«s⁴⁴ GallicÄ«⁴⁵ excitandÄ«⁴⁶ causÄ, Ä

20 Â Â P. LentulÅ⁴⁷ esse sollicitÄtÅs,⁴⁸ eÅsque in Galliam⁴⁹ ad suÅs cÄ«vÄs eÅdemque itinere cum litterÄ«s mandÄtÄ«sque⁵⁰ ad CatilÄ«nam esse missÅs, comitemque⁵¹ eÄ«s adiÅ«nctum esse⁵² T. Volturcium,⁵³ atque huic esse ad CatilÄ«nam datÄs litterÄs, facultÄtem⁵⁴ mihi oblÄtam putÄvÄ« utâquod⁵⁵ erat difficillimum quodque ego semper optÄbam⁵⁶ ab dÄ«s immortÄlibusâtÅta rÄs nÅn sÅlum Ä mÄ sed etiam Ä senÄtÅ« et Ä vÅbis

25 Â Â manifestÅ⁵⁷ dÄprehenderÄtur.⁵⁸

Itaque hesternÅ⁵⁹ diÄ L. Flaccum et C. PomptÄ«num praetÅrÄs,⁶⁰ fortissimÅs atque amantissimÅs⁶¹ reÄ« pÅ«blicae⁶² virÅs, ad mÄ vocÄvÄ«, rem exposuÄ«, quid fierÄ«⁶³ placÄret ostendÄ«. IllÄ« autem, quÄ« omnia dÄ rÄ pÅ«blicÄ praeclÄra⁶⁴ atque Ägregia⁶⁵ sentÄ«rent,⁶⁶ sine recÅ«sÄtiÅne⁶⁷ ac sine Å«llÄ morÄ negÅtium⁶⁸ suscÄpÄrunt et, cum

30 Â Â advesperÄsceret,⁶⁹ occultÄ⁷⁰ ad pontem⁷¹ Mulvium pervÄnÄrunt atque ibi in proximÄ«s vÄ«llÄ«s⁷² ita bipertÄ«tÅ⁷³ fuÄrunt ut Tiberis⁷⁴ inter eÅs et pÅns interesset.⁷⁵ EÅdem⁷⁶ autem et ipsÄ« sine cuiusquam suspÄ«ciÅne⁷⁷ multÅs fortÄs virÅs ÄdÅ«xerant, et ego ex praefectÅ«rÄ⁷⁸ ReÄtÄ«nÄ⁷⁹ complÅ«rÄs⁸⁰ dÄlÄctÅs⁸¹ adulÄscentÄs, quÅrum operÄ⁸² Å«tor assiduÄ⁸³ in rÄ pÅ«blicÄ, praesidiÅ⁸⁴ cum gladiÄ«s mÄ«seram. Interim,⁸⁵ tertiÄ ferÄ⁸⁶

35 Â Â vigiliÄ⁸⁷ exÄctÄ, cum iam pontem Mulvium magnÅ comitÄtÅ«⁸⁸ lÄgÄtÄ« Allobrogum ingredÄ«⁸⁹ inciperent Å«nÄque⁹⁰ Volturcius, fit in eÅs impetus⁹¹; ÄdÅ«cuntur⁹² et ab illÄ«s gladiÄ« et Ä nostrÄ«s.⁹³ RÄs praetÅribus erat nÅta sÅlÄ«s, ignÅrÄbÄtur Ä cÄterÄ«s. Tum interventÅ«⁹⁴ PomptÄ«nÄ« atque FlaccÄ« pugna⁹⁵ sÄdÄtur.⁹⁶ Litterae, quaecumque⁹⁷ erant in eÅ comitÄtÅ«, integrÄ«s⁹⁸ signÄ«s praetÅribus trÄduntur; ipsÄ«, comprehÄnsÄ«, ad mÄ,

40 Â Â cum iam dÄ«lÅ«cÄsceret,⁹⁹ dÄdÅ«cuntur. Atque hÅrum omnium scelerum improbissimum¹⁰⁰ mÄchinÄtÅrem,¹⁰¹ Cimbrum GabÄ«nium,¹⁰² statim¹⁰³ ad mÄ nihildum¹⁰⁴ suspicantem,¹⁰⁵ vocÄvÄ«. Deinde item¹⁰⁶ arcessÄ«tus est¹⁰⁷ L. Statilius, et post eum C. CethÄgus. TardissimÄ¹⁰⁸ autem Lentulus vÄnitâ¦

SenÄtum frequentem¹⁰⁹ celeriter, ut vÄ«distis, coÄgÄ«. Atque intereÄ¹¹⁰ statim ad-

45 Â Â monitÅ«¹¹¹ Allobrogum C. Sulpicium praetÅrem, fortem virum, mÄ«sÄ« quÄ« ex aedibus¹¹² CethÄgÄ«, sÄ« quid tÄlÅrum¹¹³ esset, efferret¹¹⁴; ex quibus¹¹⁵ ille maximum sÄ«cÄrum¹¹⁶ numerum et gladiÅrum extulit.¹¹⁷

IntrÅdÅ«xÄ«¹¹⁸ Volturcium sine GallÄ«s; fidem pÅ«blicam¹¹⁹ iussÅ«¹²⁰ senÄtÅ«s dedÄ«; hortÄtus sum ut ea quae scÄ«ret sine timÅre indicÄret.¹²¹ Tum ille dÄ«xit, cum vix¹²²

50 Â Â sÄ ex magnÅ timÅre recreÄsset,¹²³ Ä P. LentulÅ sÄ habÄre ad CatilÄ«nam mandÄta et litterÄs ut servÅrum praesidiÅ Å«terÄtur,¹²⁴ ut ad urbem quam prÄ«mum¹²⁵ cum exercitÅ« accÄderet; id¹²⁶ autem eÅ cÅnsiliÅ ut,¹²⁷ cum urbem ex¹²⁸ omnibus partibus, quem ad modum¹²⁹ discrÄ«ptum distribÅ«tumque erat,¹³⁰ incendissent¹³¹ caedemque¹³² Ä«nfÄ«nÄ«tam¹³³ cÄ«vium fÄcissent, praestÅ¹³⁴ esset ille¹³⁵ quÄ« et fugientÄs exciperet¹³⁶ et sÄ

55 Â Â cum hÄ«s urbÄnÄ«s ducibus coniungeret.¹³⁷

IntrÅductÄ« autem GallÄ« iÅ«s iÅ«randum¹³⁸ sibi et litterÄs ab LentulÅ, CethÄgÅ, StatiliÅ ad suam gentem datÄs esse dÄ«xÄrunt atque ita sibi ab hÄ«s et Ä L. CassiÅ esse praescrÄ«ptum¹³⁹ ut equitÄtum¹⁴⁰ in Italiam quam prÄ«mum mitterent¹⁴¹â¦

Ac nÄ longum sit,¹⁴² QuirÄ«tÄs, tabellÄs¹⁴³ prÅferrÄ«¹⁴⁴ iussimus quae Ä quÅque

60 Â Â dÄ«cÄbantur datae.¹⁴⁵ PrÄ«mum ostendimus CethÄgÅ signum; cognÅvit. NÅs lÄ«num¹⁴⁶ incÄ«dimus¹⁴⁷; lÄgimus. Erat scrÄ«ptum ipsÄ«us¹⁴⁸ manÅ« Allobrogum senÄtuÄ« et populÅ sÄsÄ¹⁴⁹ quae eÅrum lÄgÄtÄ«s cÅnfÄ«rmÄsset¹⁵⁰ factÅ«rum esse; ÅrÄre ut item illÄ« facerent quae sibi eÅrum lÄgÄtÄ« recÄpissent. Tum CethÄgus (quÄ« paulÅ¹⁵¹ ante aliquid tamen dÄ gladiÄ«s ac sÄ«cÄ«s, quae apud ipsum erant dÄprehÄnsa,¹⁵² respondisset

65 Â Â dÄ«xissetque¹⁵³ sÄ semper bonÅrum ferrÄmentÅrum¹⁵⁴ studiÅsum¹⁵⁵ fuisse) recitÄtÄ«s litterÄ«s dÄbilitÄtus¹⁵⁶ atque abiectus¹⁵⁷ cÅnscientiÄ,¹⁵⁸ repente conticuit.¹⁵⁹

IntrÅductus est Statilius; cognÅvit et signum et manum suam. RecitÄtae sunt tabellae in eandem ferÄ sententiam; cÅnfessus est.

Tum ostendÄ« tabellÄs LentulÅ, et quaesÄ«vÄ« cognÅsceretne signum. Adnuit¹⁶⁰â¦

70 Â Â Leguntur eÄdem ratiÅne ad senÄtum Allobrogum populumque litterae. SÄ« quid dÄ hÄ«s rÄbus dÄ«cere vellet,¹⁶¹ fÄcÄ« potestÄtem.¹⁶² Atque ille prÄ«mÅ quidem negÄvit. Post¹⁶³ autem aliquantÅ,¹⁶⁴ tÅtÅ iam indiciÅ¹⁶⁵ expositÅ atque ÄditÅ,¹⁶⁶ surrÄxit; quaesÄ«vit Ä GallÄ«s quid sibi esset cum eÄ«s, quam ob rem¹⁶⁷ domum suam vÄnissent, itemque Ä VolturciÅ. QuÄ« cum illÄ« breviter cÅnstanterque¹⁶⁸ respondissent per quem ad eum

75 Â Â quotiÄnsque¹⁶⁹ vÄnissent, quaesÄ«ssentque¹⁷⁰ ab eÅ nihilne sÄcum¹⁷¹ esset dÄ fÄtÄ«s SibyllÄ«nÄ«s¹⁷² locÅ«tus, tum ille subitÅ, scelere dÄmÄns,¹⁷³ quanta cÅnscientiae vÄ«s esset ostendit. Nam cum id posset Ä«nfitiÄrÄ«,¹⁷⁴ repente praeter opÄ«niÅnem¹⁷⁵ omnium cÅnfessus estâ¦

GabÄ«nius deinde intrÅductus, cum prÄ«mÅ impudenter¹⁷⁶ respondÄre coepisset,

80 Â Â ad extrÄmum¹⁷⁷ nihil ex eÄ«s¹⁷⁸ quae GallÄ« Ä«nsimulÄbant¹⁷⁹ negÄvit.

Ac mihi¹⁸⁰ quidem, QuirÄ«tÄs, cum¹⁸¹ illa¹⁸² certissima vÄ«sa sunt argÅ«menta atque indicia sceleris, tabellae, signa, manÅ«s, dÄnique Å«nÄ«us cuiusque cÅnfessiÅ,¹⁸³ tum multÅ¹⁸⁴ certiÅra illa, color,¹⁸⁵ oculÄ«, vultÅ«s, taciturnitÄs.¹⁸⁶ SÄ«c enim obstupuerant,¹⁸⁷ sÄ«c terram intuÄbantur,¹⁸⁸ sÄ«c fÅ«rtim nÅn numquam inter sÄsÄ aspiciÄbant ut nÅn

85 Â Â iam ab aliÄ«s indicÄrÄ«¹⁸⁹ sed indicÄre sÄ ipsÄ« vidÄrentur.

IndiciÄ«s expositÄ«s atque ÄditÄ«s, QuirÄ«tÄs, senÄtum cÅnsuluÄ«¹⁹⁰ dÄ summÄ rÄ pÅ«blicÄ¹⁹¹ quid fierÄ« placÄret. Dictae sunt Ä prÄ«ncipibus Äcerrimae ac fortissimae sententiae, quÄs senÄtus sine Å«llÄ varietÄte¹⁹² est secÅ«tusâ¦

Quibus prÅ tantÄ«s rÄbus, QuirÄ«tÄs, nÅ«llum ego Ä vÅbÄ«s praemium virtÅ«tis,

90 Â Â nÅ«llum Ä«nsigne¹⁹³ honÅris, nÅ«llum monumentum laudis postulÅ¹⁹⁴ praeterquam¹⁹⁵ huius diÄÄ« memoriam sempiternam¹⁹⁶â¦

VÅs, QuirÄ«tÄs, quoniam iam est nox, venerÄtÄ«¹⁹⁷ Iovem illum custÅdem huius urbis ac vestrum, in vestra tÄcta¹⁹⁸ discÄdite; et ea, quamquam¹⁹⁹ iam est perÄ«culum dÄpulsum,²⁰⁰ tamen aequÄ ac²⁰¹ priÅre nocte custÅdiÄ«s vigiliÄ«sque dÄfendite. Id

95 Â Â nÄ vÅbÄ«s diÅ«tius faciendum sit atque ut in perpetuÄ pÄce esse possÄ«tis prÅvidÄbÅ. (Cicero, In CatilÄ«nam ÅrÄtiÅ III, excerpts)

DÄ VÄªTÄ ET MORTE (VIIâIX)

VII. SOCRATESâ âEITHER-ORâ BELIEF¹

Quae est igitur eius ÅrÄtiÅ quÄ² facit eum PlatÅ Å«sum apud iÅ«dicÄs iam morte multÄtum³?

âMagna mÄ,â inquit âspÄs tenet iÅ«dicÄs, bene mihi ÄvenÄ«re⁴ quod mittar⁵ ad mortem. Necesse⁶ est enim sit⁷ alterum dÄ duÅbus, ut aut⁸ sÄnsÅ«s omnÄ«nÅ omnÄs

5 Â Â Â  mors auferat aut in alium quendam locum ex hÄ«s locÄ«s morte migrÄtur.⁹ Quam ob rem,¹⁰ sÄ«ve¹¹ sÄnsus exstinguitur morsque eÄ« somnÅ similis est quÄ« nÅn numquam etiam sine vÄ«sÄ«s¹² somniÅrum¹³ plÄcÄtissimam¹⁴ quiÄtem adfert, dÄ« bonÄ«, quid lucrÄ« est ÄmorÄ«¹⁵! Aut quam multÄ« diÄs reperÄ«rÄ« possunt quÄ« tÄlÄ« noctÄ« antepÅnantur? Cui sÄ« similis futÅ«ra est¹⁶ perpetuitÄs¹⁷ omnis cÅnsequentis¹⁸ temporis, quis¹⁹ mÄ

10 Â Â beÄtior?

âSin²⁰ vÄra²¹ sunt quae dÄ«cuntur, migrÄtiÅnem²² esse mortem in eÄs ÅrÄs²³ quÄs quÄ«²⁴ Ä vÄ«tÄ excessÄrunt²⁵ incolunt,²⁶ id multÅ²⁷ iam beÄtius estâ¦ Haec peregrÄ«nÄtiÅ²⁸ mediocris vÅbÄ«s vidÄrÄ« potest? Ut vÄrÅ colloquÄ«²⁹ cum OrpheÅ, MÅ«saeÅ,³⁰ HomÄrÅ, HÄsiodÅ³¹ liceat, quantÄ«³² tandem aestimÄtis³³?â¦ Nec enim cuiquam³⁴

15 Â Â bonÅ malÄ«³⁵ quicquam ÄvenÄ«re potest nec vÄ«vÅ nec mortuÅ³⁶â¦

âSed tempus est iam hinc³⁷ abÄ«re mÄ, ut moriar, vÅs, ut vÄ«tam agÄtis. Utrum autem sit melius, dÄ« immortÄlÄs sciunt; hominem quidem scÄ«re arbitror nÄminem.â³⁸ (Cicero, TusculÄnae DisputÄtiÅnÄs 1.40.97â1.41.99, excerpts)

VIII. A MORE POSITIVE VIEW ABOUT IMMORTALITY¹

Artior² quam solÄbÄt³ somnus (mÄ) complexus est⁴â¦ (et) ÄfricÄnus sÄ ostendit eÄ fÅrmÄ⁵ quae mihi ex imÄgine⁶ eius quam ex ipsÅ erat nÅtior.⁷ Quem ubi agnÅvÄ«,⁸ equidem cohorruÄ«⁹,â¦ quaesÄ«vÄ« tamen vÄ«veretne ipse et Paulus¹⁰ pater et aliÄ« quÅs nÅs exstÄ«nctÅs¹¹ arbitrÄrÄmur.

5 Â Â Â  âImmÅ vÄrÅ,â inquit, âhÄ« vÄ«vunt quÄ« Ä corporum vinclÄ«s tamquam Ä carcere¹² ÄvolÄvÄrunt¹³; vestra vÄrÅ quae dÄ«citur vÄ«ta mors est. QuÄ«n¹⁴ tÅ« aspicis ad tÄ venientem Paulum patrem?â

Quem ut vÄ«dÄ«, equidem vim¹⁵ lacrimÄrum prÅfÅ«dÄ«. Ille autem mÄ complexus⁴ atque ÅsculÄns¹⁶ flÄre¹⁷ prohibÄbat. Atque ego ut prÄ«mum¹⁸ flÄtÅ«¹⁹ repressÅ²⁰ loquÄ«

10 Â Â posse coepÄ«, âQuaesÅ,²¹â inquam, âpater sÄnctissime²² atque optime, quoniam haec est vÄ«ta, ut ÄfricÄnum audiÅ dÄ«cere, quid moror²³ in terrÄ«s? QuÄ«n²⁴ hÅ«c²⁵ ad vÅs venÄ«re properÅ²⁶?

âNÅn est ita,²⁷â inquit ille. âNisi enim deus is,²⁸ cuius hoc templum²⁹ est omne quod cÅnspicis,³⁰ istÄ«s tÄ corporis custÅdiÄ«s lÄ«berÄverit, hÅ«c tibi aditus³¹ patÄre nÅn

15 Â Â potest. HominÄs enim sunt hÄc lÄge³² generÄtÄ«,³³ quÄ« tuÄrentur³⁴ illum globum³⁵ quem in hÅc templÅ medium vidÄs, quae terra dÄ«citur, iÄ«sque³⁶ animus datus est ex illÄ«s sempiternÄ«s ignibus quae sÄ«dera et stÄllÄs vocÄtisâ¦ QuÄrÄ et tibi, PÅ«blÄ«,³⁷ et piÄ«s omnibus retinendus³⁸ est animus in custÅdiÄ corporis, nec iniussÅ«³⁹ eius Ä quÅ ille⁴⁰ est vÅbÄ«s datus ex hominum vÄ«tÄ migrandum est, nÄ mÅ«nus⁴¹ hÅ«mÄnum

20 Â Â adsignÄtum⁴² Ä deÅ dÄfÅ«gisse⁴³ videÄminÄ«â¦ IÅ«stitiam⁴⁴ cole⁴⁵ et pietÄtem,⁴⁶ quae cum sit magna⁴⁷ in parentibus et propinquÄ«s,⁴⁸ tum⁴⁹ in patriÄ maxima est. Ea vÄ«ta via est in caelum et in hunc coetum⁵⁰ eÅrum quÄ« iam vÄ«xÄrunt et corpore laxÄtÄ«⁵¹ illum incolunt locumâ¦ quem vÅs, ut Ä GraÄ«s accÄpistis, orbem lacteum,⁵² nuncupÄtis.⁵³ââ¦

25 Â Â Â Â Â Â  Et ille, âTÅ« vÄrÅâ¦ sÄ«c habÄtÅ⁵⁴ nÅn esse tÄ mortÄlem, sed corpus hoc⁵⁵; nec enim tuÄ«s⁵⁶ es quem fÅrma ista dÄclÄrat,⁵⁷ sed mÄns cuiusque is est quisque, nÅn ea figÅ«ra⁵⁸ quae digitÅ dÄmÅnstrÄrÄ« potest. Deum tÄ igitur scÄ«tÅ⁵⁹ esse; sÄ«quidem⁶⁰ deus est quÄ« viget,⁶¹ quÄ« sentit, quÄ« meminit,⁶² quÄ« prÅvidet, quÄ« tam regit et moderÄtur⁶³ et movet id corpus cui praepositus est⁶⁴ quam⁶⁵ hunc mundum ille prÄ«nceps deus.â⁶⁶ (Cicero, excerpts from Somnium ScÄ«piÅnis 2ff. = DÄ RÄ PÅ«blicÄ 6.10 ff.)

IX. ON CONTEMPT OF DEATH¹

Sed quid² ducÄs et prÄ«ncipÄs nÅminem³ cum legiÅnÄs⁴ scrÄ«bat CatÅ⁵ saepe alacrÄs⁶ in eum locum profectÄs⁷ unde reditÅ«rÄs sÄ nÅn arbitrÄrentur? ParÄ« animÅ LacedaemoniÄ«⁸ in ThermopylÄ«s⁹ occidÄrunt, in quÅs¹⁰ SimÅnidÄs:

DÄ«c, hospes,¹¹ Spartae¹² nÅs tÄ¹³ hÄ«c vÄ«disse iacentÄ«s,¹⁴

5 Â Â Â Â Â  Â  Â  dum sÄnctÄ«s patriae lÄgibus obsequimur.¹⁵

VirÅs commemorÅ.¹⁶ QuÄlis¹⁷ tandem Lacaena? Quae, cum fÄ«lium in proelium mÄ«sisset et interfectum¹⁸ audÄ«sset, âIdcircÅ,¹⁹â inquit, âgenueram²⁰ ut esset quÄ«²¹ prÅ patriÄ mortem nÅn dubitÄret occumbere.²²â

â¦Admoneor²³ ut aliquid etiam dÄ humÄtiÅne²⁴ et sepultÅ«rÄ²⁵ dÄ«cendum²⁶

10 Â Â exÄ«stimem²⁷â¦ SÅcratÄs, rogÄtus Ä CritÅne²⁸ quem ad modum sepelÄ«rÄ«²⁹ vellet, âMultam vÄrÅ,â inquit, âoperam,³⁰ amÄ«cÄ«, frÅ«strÄ³¹ cÅnsÅ«mpsÄ«. CritÅnÄ« enim nostrÅ nÅn persuÄsÄ« mÄ hinc ÄvolÄtÅ«rum,³² neque meÄ«³³ quicquam relictÅ«rum³⁴â¦ Sed, mihi crÄde, (CritÅ), nÄmÅ mÄ vestrum,³⁵ cum hinc excesserÅ,³⁶ cÅnsequÄtur.³⁷â¦

DÅ«rior DiogenÄs³⁸ Cynicus prÅicÄ«³⁹ sÄ iussit inhumÄtum.⁴⁰ Tum amÄ«cÄ«, âVo-

15 Â Â lucribusne⁴¹ et ferÄ«s⁴²?â âMinimÄ⁴³ vÄrÅ,â inquit; âsed bacillum⁴⁴ propter⁴⁵ mÄ, quÅ abigam,⁴⁶ pÅnitÅte.⁴⁷â âQuÄ«⁴⁸ poteris?â illÄ«; ânÅn enim sentiÄs.â âQuid igitur mihi ferÄrum laniÄtus⁴⁹ oberit⁵⁰ nihil sentientÄ«⁵¹?â (Cicero, TusculÄnae DisputÄtiÅnÄs 1.42.101â43.104, excerpts)

X. LITERATURE: ITS VALUE AND DELIGHT¹

QuaerÄs Ä nÅbÄ«s, GrattÄ«, cÅ«r tantÅ opere² hÅc homine dÄlectÄmur.³ Quia⁴ suppeditat⁵ nÅbÄ«s ubi⁶ et animus ex hÅc forÄnsÄ«⁷ strepitÅ«⁸ reficiÄtur⁹ et aurÄs convÄ«ciÅ¹⁰ dÄfessae¹¹ conquiÄscant¹²â¦ QuÄrÄ quis tandem mÄ reprehendat,¹³ aut quis mihi iÅ«re¹⁴ suscÄnseat,¹⁵ sÄ«,¹⁶ quantum¹⁷ cÄterÄ«s ad suÄs rÄs obeundÄs¹⁸ quantum ad fÄstÅs¹⁹

5 Â Â Â  diÄs lÅ«dÅrum celebrandÅs,²⁰ quantum ad aliÄs voluptÄtÄs et ad ipsam requiem²¹ animÄ« et corporis concÄditur²² temporum, quantum aliÄ« tribuunt²³ tempestÄ«vÄ«s²⁴ convÄ«viÄ«s,²⁵ quantum dÄnique alveolÅ,²⁶ quantum pilae,²⁷ tantum²⁸ mihi egomet²⁹ ad haec studia recolenda³⁰ sÅ«mpserÅ³¹? Atque hoc ideÅ³² mihi concÄdendum est magis quod ex hÄ«s studiÄ«s haec quoque crÄscit ÅrÄtiÅ et facultÄs,³³ quae, quantacumque³⁴

10 Â Â est in mÄ, numquam amÄ«cÅrum perÄ«culÄ«s dÄfuit³⁵â¦

PlÄnÄ« omnÄs sunt librÄ«, plÄnae sapientium vÅcÄs, plÄna exemplÅrum³⁶ vetustÄs³⁷; quae iacÄrent in tenebrÄ«s³⁸ omnia, nisi litterÄrum lÅ«men³⁹ accÄderet. Quam multÄs nÅbÄ«s imÄginÄs⁴⁰ânÅn sÅlum ad intuendum,⁴¹ vÄrum⁴² etiam ad imitandum⁴³âfortissimÅrum virÅrum expressÄs⁴⁴ scrÄ«ptÅrÄs et GraecÄ« et LatÄ«nÄ« reliquÄrunt! QuÄs

15 Â Â ego mihi semper in adminÄ«strandÄ⁴⁵ rÄ pÅ«blicÄ prÅpÅnÄns⁴⁶ animum et mentem meam ipsÄ cÅgitÄtiÅne⁴⁷ hominum excellentium⁴⁸ cÅnfÅrmÄbam.⁴⁹

Quaeret quispiam,⁵⁰ âQuid? illÄ« ipsÄ« summÄ« virÄ« quÅrum virtÅ«tÄs litterÄ«s prÅditae sunt,⁵¹ istÄne doctrÄ«nÄ⁵² quam tÅ« effers⁵³ laudibus ÄrudÄ«tÄ« fuÄrunt⁵⁴?â Difficile est hoc dÄ omnibus cÅnfÄ«rmÄre,⁵⁵ sed tamen est certum quid respondeamâ¦: sae-

20 Â Â pius ad laudem atque virtÅ«tem nÄtÅ«ram sine doctrÄ«nÄ quam sine nÄtÅ«rÄ valuisse⁵⁶ doctrÄ«nam. Atque Ä«dem⁵⁷ ego contendÅ,⁵⁸ cum ad nÄtÅ«ram eximiam⁵⁹ et illÅ«strem⁶⁰ accesserit⁶¹ ratiÅ quaedam cÅnfÅrmÄtiÅque⁶² doctrÄ«nae, tum illud nesciÅ quid⁶³ praeclÄrum ac singulÄre⁶⁴ solÄre exsistere⁶⁵â¦

Quod sÄ« nÅn hic tantus frÅ«ctus ostenderÄtur, et sÄ« ex hÄ«s studiÄ«s dÄlectÄtiÅ

25 Â Â sÅla peterÄtur, tamen, ut opÄ«nor, hanc animÄ« remissiÅnem hÅ«mÄnissimam ac lÄ«berÄlissimam iÅ«dicÄrÄtis. Nam cÄterae⁶⁶ neque temporum⁶⁷ sunt neque aetÄtum omnium neque locÅrum; at haec studia adulÄscentiam alunt, senectÅ«tem oblectant, rÄs secundÄs Årnant, adversÄ«s perfugium ac sÅlÄcium praebent, dÄlectant domÄ«, nÅn impediunt forÄ«s, pernoctant nÅbÄ«scum, peregrÄ«nantur, rÅ«sticantur. (Cicero, PrÅ ArchiÄ 6.12â7.16, excerpts).

ANECDOTES FROM CICERO (11â15)

XI. DEATH OF A PUPPY (EXAMPLE OF AN OMEN)

L. Paulus¹ cÅnsul iterum, cum eÄ«² bellum³ ut cum rÄge Perse⁴ gereret⁵ obtigisset,⁶ ut eÄ ipsÄ diÄ domum ad vesperum rediit, fÄ«liolam⁷ suam Tertiam,⁸ quae tum erat admodum⁹ parva, ÅsculÄns¹⁰ animadvertit¹¹ trÄ«sticulam.¹² âQuid est,¹³â inquit, âmea Tertia? Quid¹⁴ trÄ«stis es?â âMÄ« pater,â inquit, âPersa¹⁵ periit.â Tum ille artius¹⁶ puel-

5 Â Â Â  lam complexus,¹⁷ âAccipiÅ,â inquit, âmea fÄ«lia, Åmen.¹⁸â Erat autem mortuus catellus¹⁹ eÅ nÅmine. (Cicero, DÄ DÄ«vÄ«nÄtiÅne 1.46.103)

XII. TOO CONSCIENTIOUS (AN EXAMPLE OF IRONY)

Est huic fÄ«nitimum¹ dissimulÄtiÅnÄ«² cum honestÅ³ verbÅ vitiÅsa⁴ rÄs appellÄtur: ut cum ÄfricÄnus cÄnsor⁵ tribÅ«⁶ movÄbat eum centuriÅnem⁷ quÄ« in PaulÄ« pugnÄ⁸ nÅn adfuerat,⁹ cum ille sÄ custÅdiae causÄ dÄ«ceret in castrÄ«s¹⁰ remÄnsisse quaereretque cÅ«r ab eÅ notÄrÄtur¹¹: âNÅn amÅ,â inquit, ânimium dÄ«ligentÄs.â (Cicero, DÄ ÅrÄtÅre 2.67.272)

XIII. QUAM MULTA NÅN DÄSÄªDERÅ!

SÅcratÄs, in pompÄ¹ cum magna vÄ«s² aurÄ«³ argentÄ«que⁴ ferrÄtur, âQuam multa nÅn dÄsÄ«derÅ!â inquit.

XenocratÄs,⁵ cum lÄgÄtÄ« ab AlexandrÅ⁶ quÄ«nquÄgintÄ⁷ eÄ« talenta⁸ attulissent (quae erat pecÅ«nia temporibus illÄ«s, AthÄnÄ«s praesertim,⁹ maxima), abdÅ«xit lÄgÄtÅs

5 Â Â Â  ad cÄnam in AcadÄmÄ«am¹⁰; iÄ«s apposuit¹¹ tantum quod satis esset, nÅ«llÅ apparÄtÅ«.¹² Cum postrÄ«diÄ¹³ rogÄrent eum cui numerÄrÄ«¹⁴ iubÄret, âQuid? VÅs hesternÄ,¹⁵â inquit, âcÄnulÄ¹⁶ nÅn intellÄxistis mÄ pecÅ«niÄ nÅn egÄre?â QuÅs cum trÄ«stiÅrÄs vÄ«disset, trÄ«gintÄ¹⁷ minÄs¹⁸ accÄpit nÄ aspernÄrÄ«¹⁹ rÄgis lÄ«berÄlitÄtem²⁰ vidÄrÄtur.

At vÄrÅ DiogenÄs²¹ lÄ«berius,²² ut²³ Cynicus, AlexandrÅ rogantÄ« ut dÄ«ceret sÄ« quid

10 Â Â opus²⁴ esset: âNunc quidem paululum,²⁵â inquit, âÄ sÅle.²⁶â OffÄcerat²⁷ vidÄlicet²⁸ aprÄ«cantÄ«.²⁹ (Cicero, TusculÄnae DisputÄtiÅnÄs 5.32.91â92)

XIV. WHAT MAKES A GOOD APPETITE

DÄrÄus¹ in fugÄ² cum aquam turbidam³ et cadÄveribus⁴ inquinÄtam⁵ bibisset, negÄvit umquam sÄ bibisse iÅ«cundius. Numquam vidÄlicet sitiÄns⁶ biberat. Nec ÄsuriÄns⁷ Ptolemaeus⁸ Äderat,⁹ cui cum peragrantÄ«¹⁰ Aegyptum,¹¹ comitibus¹² nÅn cÅnsecÅ«tÄ«s¹³ cibÄrius¹⁴ in casÄ pÄnis datus esset, nihil vÄ«sum est illÅ pÄne iÅ«cundius.

5 Â Â Â  SÅcratem ferunt,¹⁵ cum usque ad vesperum contentius¹⁶ ambulÄret quaesÄ«tumque esset¹⁷ ex eÅ quÄrÄ id faceret, respondisse sÄ, quÅ¹⁸ melius cÄnÄret, obsÅnÄre¹⁹ ambulandÅ famem.²⁰

Quid? VÄ«ctum²¹ LacedaemoniÅrum in philitiÄ«s²² nÅnne vidÄmus? Ubi²³ cum tyrannus cÄnÄvisset Dionsius, negÄvit sÄ iÅ«re²⁴ illÅ nigrÅ quod cÄnae²⁵ caput erat

10 Â Â dÄlectÄtum.²⁶ Tum is quÄ« illa coxerat,²⁷ âMinimÄ mÄ«rum²⁸; condÄ«menta²⁹ enim dÄfuÄrunt.³⁰â âQuae tandem?â inquit ille. âLabor in vÄnÄtÅ«,³¹ sÅ«dor,³² cursus ad EurÅtam,³³ famÄs, sitis.³⁴ HÄ«s enim rÄbus LacedaemoniÅrum epulae³⁵ condiuntur.³⁶â

CÅnfer sÅ«dantÄs,³⁷ ructantÄs,³⁸ refertÅs³⁹ epulÄ«s tamquam opÄ«mÅs bovÄs.⁴⁰ Tum intellegÄs quÄ« voluptÄtem maximÄ sequantur, eÅs minimÄ cÅnsequÄ«⁴¹; iÅ«cunditÄtemque⁴² vÄ«ctÅ«s⁴³ esse in

15 Â Â dÄsÄ«deriÅ,⁴⁴ nÅn in satietÄte.⁴⁵ (Cicero, TusculÄnae DisputÄtiÅnÄs 5.34.97â98 and 100, excerpts)

XV. THEMISTOCLES; FAME AND EXPEDIENCY

ThemistoclÄs fertur¹ SerÄ«phiÅ² cuidam in iÅ«rgiÅ³ respondisse, cum ille dÄ«xisset nÅn eum suÄ sed patriae glÅriÄ splendÅrem⁴ assecÅ«tum⁵: âNec hercule,⁶â inquit, âsÄ« ego SerÄ«phius essem, nec tÅ«, sÄ« AthÄniÄnsis⁷ essÄs, clÄrus umquam fuissÄs.â (Cicero, DÄ SenectÅ«te, 3.8)

5 Â Â Â Â  ThemistoclÄs, post victÅriam eius bellÄ« quod cum PersÄ«s⁸ fuit, dÄ«xit in cÅntiÅne⁹ sÄ habÄre cÅnsilium reÄ« pÅ«blicae salÅ«tÄre,¹⁰ sed id scÄ«rÄ« nÅn opus esse.¹¹ PostulÄvit¹² ut aliquem populus daret quÄ«cum¹³ commÅ«nicÄret.¹⁴ Datus est AristÄ«dÄs. Huic¹⁵ ille (dixit) classem¹⁶ LacedaemoniÅrum, quae subducta esset¹⁷ ad GythÄum,¹⁸ clam¹⁹ incendÄ«²⁰ posse, quÅ factÅ frangÄ«²¹ LacedaemoniÅrum opÄs necesse esset.²²

10 Â Â Quod AristÄ«dÄs cum audÄ«sset, in cÅntiÅnem magnÄ exspectÄtiÅne²³ vÄnit dÄ«xitque perÅ«tile²⁴ esse cÅnsilium quod ThemistoclÄs adferret, sed minimÄ honestum. Itaque AthÄniÄnsÄs, quod honestum nÅn esset, id nÄ Å«tile quidem putÄvÄrunt, tÅtamque eam rem, quam nÄ audierant quidem, auctÅre AristÄ«de²⁵ repudiÄvÄrunt.²⁶ (Cicero, DÄ OfficiÄ«s 3.11.48â49)

XVI. GET THE TUSCULAN COUNTRY HOUSE READY¹

Tullius² S.D.³ Terentiae⁴ Suae

In TusculÄnum⁵ nÅs ventÅ«rÅs⁶ putÄmus aut NÅnÄ«s⁷ aut postrÄ«diÄ.⁸ Ibi ut⁹ sint omnia parÄta. PlÅ«rÄs¹⁰ enim fortasse¹¹ nÅbÄ«scum erunt et, ut arbitror, diÅ«tius ibi commorÄbimur.¹² LÄbrum¹³ sÄ« in balneÅ¹⁴ nÅn est, ut¹⁵ sit; item¹⁶ cÄtera quae sunt

5 Â Â Â  ad vÄ«ctum et ad valÄtÅ«dinem¹⁷ necessÄria.¹⁸ ValÄ. Kal. Oct.¹⁹ dÄ VenusÄ«nÅ.²⁰ (Cicero, Epistulae ad FamiliÄrÄs 14.20)

XVII. LIVY ON THE DEATH OF CICERO¹

M. CicerÅ sub adventum² triumvirÅrum³ cesserat urbeâ¦ PrÄ«mÅ in TusculÄnum⁴ fÅ«git; inde trÄnsversÄ«s⁵ itineribus in FormiÄnum,⁶ ut ab CaiÄtÄ⁷ nÄvem cÅnscÄnsÅ«rus,⁸ proficÄ«scitur. Unde aliquotiÄns⁹ in altum¹⁰ provectum,¹¹ cum modo ventÄ« adversÄ« rettulissent, modo ipse iactÄtiÅnem¹² nÄvisâ¦ patÄ« nÅn posset, taedium¹³

5 Â Â Â  tandem eum et fugae¹⁴ et vÄ«tae cÄpit, regressusque¹⁵ ad superiÅrem vÄ«llamâ¦ âMoriar,â inquit, âin patriÄ saepe servÄtÄ.â Satis cÅnstat¹⁶ servÅs fortiter fidÄliterque parÄtÅs fuisse ad dÄ«micandum,¹⁷ ipsum dÄpÅnÄ« lectÄ«cam¹⁸ et quiÄtÅs¹⁹ patÄ« quod sors²⁰ inÄ«qua²¹ cÅgeret iussisse. PrÅminentÄ«²² ex lectÄ«cÄ praebentÄ«que immÅtam cervÄ«cem²³ caput praecÄ«sum est.²⁴

10 Â Â Â Â Â Â  ManÅ«s quoque, scrÄ«psisse in AntÅnium aliquid exprobrantÄs,²⁵ praecÄ«dÄrunt. Ita relÄtum caput ad AntÅnium, iussÅ«que eius inter duÄs manÅ«s in RÅstrÄ«s positum,²⁶ ubi ille cÅnsul, ubi saepe cÅnsulÄris,²⁷ ubi eÅ ipsÅ annÅ adversus²⁸ AntÅniumâ¦ (quanta nÅ«lla umquam hÅ«mÄna vÅx²⁹!) cum admÄ«rÄtiÅne³⁰ Äloquentiae³¹ audÄ«tus fuerat. Vix attollentÄs³² prae lacrimÄ«s oculÅs, hominÄs intuÄrÄ«³³ trucÄ«dÄta³⁴ membra³⁵

15 Â Â eius poterant. VÄ«xit trÄs et sexÄgintÄ³⁶ annÅsâ¦ Vir magnus, Äcer, memorÄbilis³⁷ fuit, et in cuius laudÄs persequendÄs³⁸ CicerÅne laudÄtÅre opus³⁹ fuerit.⁴⁰ (Livy 120.50)

XVIII. MILTIADES AND THE BATTLE OF MARATHON¹

EÄ«sdem temporibus PersÄrum rÄx DÄrÄus, ex AsiÄ in EurÅpam² exercitÅ« trÄiectÅ,³ ScythÄ«s⁴ bellum Ä«nferre⁵ dÄcrÄvit. Pontem fÄcit in HistrÅ⁶ flÅ«mine, quÄ⁷ cÅpiÄs trÄdÅ«ceret.⁸ Eius pontis, dum ipse abesset,⁹ custÅdÄs¹⁰ relÄ«quit prÄ«ncipÄs quÅs sÄcum ex IÅniÄ et Aeolide¹¹ dÅ«xerat; quibus singulÄrum¹² urbium perpetua dederat

5 Â Â Â  imperia. SÄ«c enim facillimÄ putÄvit sÄ¹³ GraecÄ linguÄ loquentÄs¹⁴ quÄ« Asiam incolerent¹⁵ sub suÄ retentÅ«rum¹⁶ potestÄte, sÄ« amÄ«cÄ«s suÄ«s oppida¹⁷ tuenda¹⁸ trÄdidisset.¹⁹ In hÅc²⁰ fuit tum numerÅ MiltiadÄs.²¹ Hic, cum crÄbrÄ«²² adferrent nÅ«ntiÄ«²³ male rem gerere DÄrÄum premÄ«que Ä ScythÄ«s, hortÄtus est pontis custÅdÄs nÄ Ä FortÅ«nÄ²⁴ datam occÄsiÅnem lÄ«berandae Graeciae dÄ«mitterent.²⁵

10 Â Â Â Â Â Â  Nam sÄ« cum eÄ«s cÅpiÄ«s, quÄs sÄcum trÄnsportÄrat,²⁶ interÄ«sset DÄrÄus, nÅn sÅlum EurÅpam fore²⁷ tÅ«tam,²⁸ sed etiam eÅs quÄ« Asiam incolerent GraecÄ« genere²⁹ lÄ«berÅs Ä PersÄrum futÅ«rÅs dominÄtiÅne³⁰ et perÄ«culÅ. Id facile efficÄ«³¹ posse³²; ponte enim rescissÅ³³ rÄgem vel³⁴ hostium ferrÅ vel inopiÄ³⁵ paucÄ«s diÄbus interitÅ«rum. Ad hoc cÅnsilium cum plÄrÄ«que³⁶ accÄderent, Histiaeus³⁷ MÄ«lÄsiusâ¦ [dÄ«xit] adeÅ³⁸

15 Â Â sÄ abhorrÄre³⁹ Ä cÄterÅrum cÅnsiliÅ ut nihil putet ipsÄ«s Å«tilius quam cÅnfirmÄrÄ«⁴⁰ rÄgnum⁴¹ PersÄrum. Huius cum sententiam plÅ«rimÄ« essent secÅ«tÄ«, MiltiadÄsâ¦ ChersonÄsum relÄ«quit ac rÅ«rsus⁴² AthÄnÄs dÄmigrÄvit.⁴³ Cuius⁴⁴ ratiÅ etsÄ« nÅn valuit, tamen magnopere est laudanda cum amÄ«cior omnium libertÄtÄ« quam suae fuerit dominÄtiÅnÄ«.

20 Â Â Â Â Â  DÄrÄus autem, cum ex EurÅpÄ in Asiam redÄ«sset, hortantibus amicÄ«s ut Graeciam redigeret⁴⁵ in suam potestÄtem, classem quÄ«ngentÄrum⁴⁶ nÄvium comparÄvit⁴⁷ eÄ«que⁴⁸ DÄtim praefÄcit⁴⁹ et Artaphernem,⁵⁰ eÄ«sque ducenta⁵¹ (mÄ«lia) peditum,⁵² decem equitum⁵³ mÄ«lia deditâcausam interserÄns⁵⁴ sÄ hostem esse AthÄniÄnsibus quod eÅrum auxiliÅ IÅnes⁵⁵ SardÄ«s⁵⁶ expugnÄssent⁵⁷ suaque⁵⁸ praesidia interfÄcissent.

25 Â Â IllÄ« praefectÄ«⁵⁹ rÄgiÄ«,⁶⁰ classe ad Euboeam⁶¹ appulsÄ⁶² celeriter Eretriam⁶³ cÄpÄrunt, omnÄsque eius gentis cÄ«vÄs abreptÅs⁶⁴ in Asiam ad rÄgem mÄ«sÄrunt. Inde⁶⁵ ad Atticam⁶⁶ accessÄrunt ac suÄs cÅpiÄs in campum⁶⁷ MarathÅna⁶⁸ dÄdÅ«xÄrunt. Is abest ab oppidÅ circiter⁶⁹ mÄ«lia passuum⁷⁰ decem.

HÅc tumultÅ«⁷¹ AthÄniÄnsÄs tam propinquÅ⁷² tamque magnÅ permÅtÄ«⁷³ auxil-

30 Â Â ium nÅ«squam⁷⁴ nisi Ä LacedaemoniÄ«s petÄ«vÄrunt PhÄ«dippumque,⁷⁵ cursÅrem eius generis quÄ« hÄmerodromoe⁷⁶ vocantur, Lacedaemonem⁷⁷ mÄ«sÄrunt ut nÅ«ntiÄret quam celerrimÅ opus esse⁷⁸ auxiliÅ. DomÄ« autem creant⁷⁹ decem praetÅrÄs,⁸⁰ quÄ« exercituÄ« praeessent,⁸¹ in eÄ«s Miltiadem; inter quÅs magna fuit contentiÅ⁸² utrum moenibus sÄ dÄfenderent an obviam⁸³ Ä«rent hostibus aciÄque⁸⁴ dÄcernerent. Åªnus⁸⁵

35 Â Â MiltiadÄs maximÄ nÄ«tÄbÄtur⁸⁶ ut prÄ«mÅ tempore castra fierent⁸⁷â¦

HÅc tempore nÅ«lla cÄ«vitÄs AthÄniÄnsibus auxiliÅ⁸⁸ fuit praeter PlataeÄnsÄs⁸⁹; ea mÄ«lle mÄ«sit mÄ«litum.⁹⁰ Itaque hÅrum adventÅ«⁹¹ decem mÄ«lia armÄtÅrum⁹² complÄta sunt,⁹³ quae manus mÄ«rÄbilÄ«⁹⁴ flagrÄbat⁹⁵ pugnandÄ« cupiditÄte; quÅ⁹⁶ factum est⁹⁷ ut plÅ«s quam collÄgae⁹⁸ MiltiadÄs valÄret.⁹⁹

40 Â Â Â Â Â Â Â Â Â Â Â Â Â Â Â  Eius ergÅ auctÅritÄte impulsÄ«¹⁰⁰ AthÄniÄnsÄs cÅpiÄs ex urbe ÄdÅ«xÄrunt locÅque¹⁰¹ idÅneÅ castra fÄcÄrunt. Dein¹⁰² posterÅ¹⁰³ diÄ sub montis rÄdÄ«cibus¹⁰⁴ aciÄ regiÅne¹⁰⁵ Ä«nstrÅ«ctÄ¹⁰⁶ nÅn apertissimÄ¹⁰⁷ânamque¹⁰⁸ arborÄs multÄ«s locÄ«s erant rÄrae¹⁰⁹âproelium commÄ«sÄrunt¹¹⁰ hÅc cÅnsiliÅ ut et montium altitÅ«dine¹¹¹ tegerentur¹¹² et arborum tractÅ«¹¹³ equitÄtus¹¹⁴ hostium impedÄ«rÄtur, nÄ multitÅ«dine¹¹⁵ clau-

45 Â Â derentur.¹¹⁶ DÄtis, etsÄ« nÅn aequum locum¹¹⁷ vidÄbat suÄ«s, tamen frÄtus¹¹⁸ numerÅ cÅpiÄrum suÄrum cÅnflÄ«gere¹¹⁹ cupiÄbat, eÅque¹²⁰ magis quod, priusquam¹²¹ LacedaemoniÄ« subsidiÅ¹²² venÄ«rent, dÄ«micÄre Å«tile arbitrÄbÄtur.

Itaque in aciem peditum centum (mÄ«lia), equitum decem mÄ«lia prÅdÅ«xit proeliumque commÄ«sit. In quÅ¹²³ tantÅ¹²⁴ plÅ«s¹²⁵ virtÅ«te valuÄrunt AthÄniÄnsÄs ut decem-

50 Â Â plicem¹²⁶ numerum hostium prÅfligÄrint,¹²⁷ adeÅque eÅs perterruÄrunt ut Persae nÅn castra sed nÄvÄs petierint. QuÄ pugnÄ nihil adhÅ«c¹²⁸ exsistit¹²⁹ nÅbilius¹³⁰; nÅ«lla enim umquam tam exigua¹³¹ manus tantÄs opÄs prÅstrÄvit.¹³² (Nepos, MiltiadÄs 3â5, excerpts)

XIX. THEMISTOCLES AND THE BATTLE OF SALAMIS¹

ThemistoclÄs² ad (bellum Corcraeum³) gerendum praetor Ä populÅ factus, nÅn sÅlum praesentÄ«⁴ bellÅ sed etiam reliquÅ⁵ tempore ferÅciÅrem reddidit cÄ«vitÄtem. Nam cum pecÅ«nia pÅ«blica, quae ex metallÄ«s⁶ redÄ«bat, largÄ«tiÅne⁷ magistrÄtuum⁸ quotannÄ«s⁹ interÄ«ret,¹⁰ ille persuÄsit populÅ ut eÄ pecÅ«niÄ classis centum nÄvium

5 Â Â Â  Â  aedificÄrÄtur.¹¹ QuÄ¹² celeriter effectÄ, prÄ«mum CorcraeÅs frÄgit,¹³ deinde maritimÅs praedÅnÄs¹⁴ cÅnsectandÅ¹⁵ mare tÅ«tum reddidit. In quÅ¹⁶â¦ perÄ«tissimÅs¹⁷ bellÄ« nÄvÄlis¹⁸ fÄcit AthÄniÄnsÄs. Id quantae salÅ«tÄ«¹⁹ fuerit Å«niversae²⁰ Graeciae, bellÅ cognitum est PersicÅ.²¹ Nam cum XerxÄs²² et marÄ« et terrÄ²³ bellum Å«niversae Ä«nferret EurÅpae, cum tantÄ«s cÅpiÄ«s eam invÄsit²⁴ quantÄs neque ante nec posteÄ habuit

10 Â Â quisquam. Huius enim classis mÄ«lle et ducentÄrum nÄvium longÄrum²⁵ fuit, quam duo mÄ«lia onerÄriÄrum²⁶ sequÄbantur. Terrestris²⁷ autem exercitus septingenta²⁸ (mÄ«lia) peditum, equitum quadringenta²⁹ mÄ«lia fuÄrunt.³⁰

Cuius dÄ adventÅ«³¹ cum fÄma in Graeciam esset perlÄta³² et maximÄ AthÄni-ÄnsÄs petÄ« dÄ«cerentur propter pugnam MarathÅniam, mÄ«sÄrunt DelphÅs³³ cÅn-

15 Â Â sultum³⁴ quidnam³⁵ facerent³⁶ dÄ rÄbus suÄ«s. DÄlÄ«berantibus³⁷ Pthia³⁸ respondit ut moenibus lÄ«gneÄ«s³⁹ sÄ mÅ«nÄ«rent.⁴⁰ Id respÅnsum⁴¹ quÅ⁴² valÄret cum intellegeret nÄmÅ, ThemistoclÄs persuÄsit cÅnsilium esse⁴³ Apollinis ut in nÄvÄs sÄ suaque⁴⁴ cÅnferrent: eum⁴⁵ enim Ä deÅ significÄrÄ«⁴⁶ mÅ«rum ligneum. TÄlÄ« cÅnsiliÅ probÄtÅ, addunt⁴⁷ ad superiÅrÄs (nÄvÄs) totidem⁴⁸ nÄvÄs trirÄmÄs,⁴⁹ suaque omnia quae

20 Â Â moverÄ« poterant partim⁵⁰ SalamÄ«na,⁵¹ partim TroezÄna⁵² dÄportant.⁵³ Arcem⁵⁴ sacerdÅtibus paucÄ«sque maiÅribus nÄtÅ«⁵⁵ ad sacra⁵⁶ prÅcÅ«randa⁵⁷ trÄdunt; reliquum⁵ oppidum relinquunt.

Huius⁵⁸ cÅnsilium plÄrÄ«sque cÄ«vitÄtibus⁵⁹ displicÄbat⁶⁰ et in terrÄ dÄ«micÄrÄ«⁶¹ magis placÄbat. Itaque missÄ« sunt dÄlÄctÄ«⁶² cum LeÅnidÄ,⁶³ LacedaemoniÅrum rÄge,

25 Â Â quÄ« ThermopylÄs⁶⁴ occupÄrent⁶⁵ longiusque barbarÅs⁶⁶ prÅgredÄ« nÅn paterentur. IÄ« vim hostium nÅn sustinuÄrunt,⁶⁷ eÅque locÅ omnÄs interiÄrunt.¹⁰

At classis commÅ«nis Graeciae trecentÄrum⁶⁸ nÄvium, in quÄ ducentae⁶⁸ erant AthÄniÄnsium,⁶⁹ prÄ«mum apud ArtemÄ«sium⁷⁰ inter Euboeam continentemque⁷¹ terram cum classiÄriÄ«s⁷² rÄgiÄ«s⁷³ cÅnflÄ«xit.⁷⁴ AngustiÄs⁷⁵ enim ThemistoclÄs

30 Â Â quaerÄbat, nÄ multitÅ«dine⁷⁶ circumÄ«rÄtur.⁷⁷ Hinc etsÄ« parÄ« proeliÅ⁷⁸ discesserant, tamen eÅdem locÅ nÅn sunt ausÄ« manÄre, quod erat perÄ«culum nÄ,⁷⁹ sÄ« pars nÄvium adversÄriÅrum⁸⁰ Euboeam superÄsset,⁸¹ ancipitÄ«⁸² premerentur perÄ«culÅ. QuÅ⁸³ factum est ut⁸⁴ ab ArtemÄ«siÅ discÄderent et exadversum⁸⁵ AthÄnÄs apud SalamÄ«na classem suam cÅnstituerent.⁸⁶

35 Â Â Â Â Â Â  At XerxÄs, ThermopylÄ«s expugnÄtÄ«s, prÅtinus accessit astÅ«,⁸⁷ idque, nÅ«llÄ«s dÄfendentibus, interfectÄ«s sacerdÅtibus quÅs in arce invÄnerat, incendiÅ⁸⁸ dÄlÄvit. Cuius flammÄ perterritÄ«⁸⁹ classiÄriÄ« cum manÄre nÅn audÄrent et plÅ«rimÄ« hortÄrentur ut domÅs⁹⁰ suÄs discÄderent moenibusque sÄ dÄfenderent, ThemistoclÄs Å«nus restitit⁹¹ et Å«niversÅs parÄs esse posse⁹² aiÄbat,⁹³ dispersÅs⁹⁴ testÄbÄtur⁹⁵ peritÅ«rÅs;

40 Â Â idque EurybiadÄ«,⁹⁶ rÄgÄ« LacedaemoniÅrum, quÄ« tum summae⁹⁷ imperiÄ« praeerat,⁹⁸ fore⁹⁹ adfÄ«rmÄbat.¹⁰⁰

Quem cum minus quam vellet movÄret, noctÅ«¹⁰¹ dÄ servÄ«s suÄ«s¹⁰² quem habuit¹⁰³ fidÄlissimum ad rÄgem mÄ«sit ut eÄ« nÅ«ntiÄret suÄ«s verbÄ«s¹⁰⁴ adversÄriÅs eius¹⁰⁵ in fugÄ¹⁰⁶ esse; quÄ«¹⁰⁷ sÄ« discessissent,¹⁰⁸ maiÅre cum labÅreâ¦ (eum) bellum

45 Â Â cÅnfectÅ«rum, cum singulÅs¹⁰⁹ cÅnsectÄrÄ« cÅgerÄtur; quÅs sÄ« statim aggrederÄtur,¹¹⁰ brevÄ« (tempore) Å«niversÅs oppressÅ«rumâ¦ HÄc rÄ audÄ«tÄ barbarus, nihil dolÄ«¹¹¹ subesse¹¹² crÄdÄns, postrÄ«diÄ aliÄnissimÅ¹¹³ sibi locÅ, contrÄ¹¹⁴ opportÅ«nissimÅ¹¹⁵ hostibus, adeÅ angusto marÄ«¹¹⁶ cÅnflÄ«xit ut eius multitÅ«dÅ nÄvium explicÄrÄ« nÅn potuerit¹¹⁷â¦ Victus ergÅ est magis etiam cÅnsiliÅ ThemistoclÄ« quam armÄ«s Graeciaeâ¦

50 Â Â SÄ«c Å«nÄ«us virÄ« prÅ«dentiÄ¹¹⁸ Graecia lÄ«berÄta est EurÅpaeque succubuit¹¹⁹ Asia.

Haec (est) altera victÅria quae cum MarathÅniÅ possit comparÄrÄ« tropaeÅ.¹²⁰ Nam parÄ« modÅ apud SalamÄ«na parvÅ numerÅ nÄvium maxima post hominum memoriam classis est dÄvicta.¹²¹ (Nepos, ThemistoclÄs 2â4, excerpts)

XX. ARISTIDES THE JUST

AristÄ«dÄs,¹ LsimachÄ«² fÄ«lius, AthÄniÄnsis, aequÄlis³ ferÄ fuit ThemistoclÄ«⁴ atque cum eÅ dÄ prÄ«ncipÄtÅ«⁵ contenditâ¦ In hÄ«s autem cognitum est quantÅ⁶ antistÄret⁷ Äloquentia innocentiae.⁸ Quamquam enim adeÅ excellÄbat⁹ AristÄ«dÄs abstinentiÄ¹⁰ ut Å«nus post hominum memoriamâ¦ cognÅmine¹¹ âIÅ«stusâ sit appellÄtus, tamen Ä

5 Â Â Â  Themistocle collabefactus¹² testulÄ¹³ illÄ¹⁴ exsiliÅ¹⁵ decem annÅrum¹⁶ multÄtus est.¹⁷

QuÄ« quidem cum intellegeret reprimÄ«¹⁸ concitÄtam¹⁹ multitÅ«dinem nÅn posse, cÄdÄnsque animadvertisset quendam scrÄ«bentem ut patriÄ pellerÄtur,²⁰ quaesÄ«sse ab eÅ²¹ dÄ«citur quÄrÄ id faceret aut quid AristÄ«dÄs commÄ«sisset cÅ«r²² tantÄ poenÄ dignus dÅ«cerÄtur. Cui ille respondit sÄ ignÅrÄre²³ AristÄ«dÄn, sed sibi nÅn placÄre²⁴

10 Â Â quod tam cupidÄ labÅrÄsset ut praeter cÄterÅs âIÅ«stusâ appellÄrÄtur. Hic decem annÅrum lÄgitimam²⁵ poenam nÅn pertulit. Nam postquam²⁶ XerxÄs in Graeciam dÄscendit,²⁷ sextÅ ferÄ annÅ quam²⁸ erat expulsus, populÄ« scÄ«tÅ²⁹ in patriam restitÅ«tus est.³⁰

Interfuit³¹ autem pugnae nÄvÄlÄ« apud SalamÄ«na quae facta est priusquam³²

15 Â Â poenÄ lÄ«berÄrÄtur. Äªdem³³ praetor fuit AthÄniÄnsium apud PlataeÄs³⁴ in proeliÅ quÅ fÅ«sus³⁵ (est) barbarÅrum exercitus Mardoniusque³⁶ interfectus estâ¦ Huius aequitÄte³⁷ factum est,³⁸ cum in commÅ«nÄ« classe esset Graeciae simul cum PausaniÄ³⁹ (quÅ duce⁴⁰ Mardonius erat fugÄtus⁴¹), ut summa imperiÄ«⁴² maritimÄ« ab LacedaemoniÄ«s trÄnsferrÄtur ad AthÄniÄnsÄs; namque ante id tempus et marÄ« et

20 Â Â terrÄ ducÄs erant LacedaemoniÄ«. Tum autem et intemperantiÄ⁴³ Pausaniae et iÅ«stitiÄ factum est AristÄ«dis ut omnÄs ferÄ cÄ«vitÄtÄs Graeciae ad AthÄniÄnsium societÄtem⁴⁴ sÄ applicÄrent⁴⁵ et adversus barbarÅs hÅs ducÄs dÄligerent⁴⁶ sibi.

QuÅs⁴⁷ quÅ⁴⁸ facilius repellerent,⁴⁹ sÄ« forte⁵⁰ bellum renovÄre⁵¹ cÅnÄrentur, ad classÄs aedificandÄs exercitÅ«sque comparandÅs⁵² quantum pecÅ«niae quaeque⁵³ cÄ«vi-

25 Â Â tÄs daret, AristÄ«dÄs dÄlÄctus est quÄ« cÅnstitueret,⁵⁴ eiusque arbitriÅ⁵⁵ quadringÄna⁵⁶ et sexÄgÄna talenta quotannÄ«s DÄlum⁵⁷ sunt conlÄta; id enim commÅ«ne aerÄrium⁵⁸ esse voluÄrunt. Quae omnis pecÅ«nia posterÅ⁵⁹ tempore AthÄnÄs trÄnslÄta est. Hic quÄ⁶⁰ fuerit⁶¹ abstinentiÄ, nÅ«llum est certius indicium⁶² quam quod,⁶³ cum tantÄ«s rÄbus praefuisset,⁶⁴ in tantÄ paupertÄte dÄcessit,⁶⁵ ut quÄ«⁶⁶ efferrÄtur vix relÄ«querit.

30 Â Â QuÅ⁶⁷ factum est ut fÄ«liae eius pÅ«blicÄ⁶⁸ alerentur et dÄ commÅ«nÄ« aerÄriÅ dÅtibus⁶⁹ datÄ«s collocÄrentur.⁷⁰ (Nepos, AristÄ«dÄs, excerpts)

XXI. TIMOLEON¹

DiÅne² SyrÄcÅ«sÄ«s interfectÅ, Dionsius³ rÅ«rsus SyrÄcÅ«sÄrum potÄ«tus est.⁴ Cuius adversÄriÄ« opem Ä CorinthiÄ«s⁵ petiÄrunt ducemque, quÅ in bellÅ Å«terentur, postulÄrunt. HÅ«c TÄ«moleÅn⁶ missus incrÄdibilÄ«⁷ fÄlÄ«citÄte⁸ Dionsium tÅtÄ SiciliÄ dÄpulit.⁹ Cum (eum) interficere posset, nÅluit, tÅ«tÅque¹⁰ ut Corinthum¹¹ pervenÄ«ret

5 Â Â Â  effÄcit,¹² quod utrÅrumque¹³ DionsiÅrum opibus CorinthiÄ« saepe adiÅ«tÄ« fuerantâ¦ eamque praeclÄram victÅriam dÅ«cÄbat in quÄ plÅ«s esset clÄmentiae quam crÅ«dÄlitÄtis¹⁴â¦

Quibus rÄbus cÅnfectÄ«s,¹⁵ cum propter diÅ«turnitÄtem¹⁶ bellÄ« nÅn sÅlum regiÅnÄs¹⁷ sed etiam urbÄs dÄsertÄs¹⁸ vidÄret, conquÄ«sÄ«vit¹⁹â¦ colÅnÅs.²⁰ CÄ«vibus vet-

10 Â Â eribus sua²¹ restituit, novÄ«s²² bellÅ vacuÄfactÄs²³ possessiÅnÄs²⁴ dÄ«vÄ«sit²⁵; urbium moenia disiecta²⁶ fÄnaque²⁷ dÄtÄcta²⁸ refÄcit²⁹; cÄ«vitÄtibus lÄgÄs lÄ«bertÄtemque reddiditâ¦ Cum tantÄ«s esset opibus³⁰ ut etiam invÄ«tÄ«s³¹ imperÄre posset, tantum³² autem amÅrem haberet omnium SiculÅrum³³ ut nÅ«llÅ recÅ«sante rÄgnum obtinÄre³⁴ licÄret, mÄluit sÄ dÄ«ligÄ« quam metuÄ«. Itaque, cum prÄ«mum³⁵ potuit, imperium

15 Â Â dÄposuit ac prÄ«vÄtus³⁶ SyrÄcÅ«sÄ«sâ¦ vÄ«xit. Neque vÄrÅ id imperÄ«tÄ³⁷ fÄcit, nam quod cÄterÄ« rÄgÄs imperiÅ potuÄrunt, hic benevolentiÄ³⁸ tenuitâ¦

Hic cum aetÄte iam prÅvectus esset,³⁹ sine Å«llÅ morbÅ lÅ«mina⁴⁰ oculÅrum ÄmÄ«sit. Quam calamitÄtem⁴¹ ita moderÄtÄ⁴² tulit utâ¦ (nÄmÅ) eum querentem audierit⁴³â¦ Nihil umquam neque Ä«nsolÄns⁴⁴ neque glÅriÅsum⁴⁵ ex Åre eius exiit.

20 Â Â QuÄ« quidem, cum suÄs laudÄs audÄ«ret praedicÄrÄ«,⁴⁶ numquam aliud dÄ«xit quam⁴⁷ sÄ in eÄ rÄ maximÄ dÄ«s agere grÄtiÄsâ¦ quod, cum Siciliam recreÄre cÅnstituissent, tum sÄ potissimum⁴⁸ ducem esse voluissent. Nihil enim rÄrum hÅ«mÄnÄrum sine deÅrum nÅ«mine⁴⁹ gerÄ« putÄbatâ¦

Proelia maxima nÄtÄlÄ«⁵⁰ suÅ diÄ fÄcit omnia; quÅ factum est ut⁵¹ eius diem

25 Â Â nÄtÄlem fÄstum⁵² habÄret Å«niversa Siciliaâ¦

Cum quÄ«dam DÄmaenetus⁵³ in cÅntiÅne⁵⁴ populÄ« dÄ rÄbus gestÄ«s⁵⁵ eius dÄtrahere⁵⁶ coepisset ac nÅnnÅ«lla inveherÄtur⁵⁷ in Timoleonta, dÄ«xit nunc dÄmum⁵⁸ sÄ vÅtÄ« esse damnÄtum⁵⁹; namque hoc Ä dÄ«s immortÄlibus semper precÄtum⁶⁰ ut tÄlem lÄ«bertÄtem restitueret SyrÄcÅ«sÄnÄ«s in quÄ cuivÄ«s⁶¹ licÄret dÄ quÅ vellet impÅ«ne⁶²

30 Â Â dÄ«cere.⁶³

Hic cum diem suprÄmum obÄ«sset, pÅ«blicÄ⁶⁴ Ä SyrÄcÅ«sÄnÄ«s in gymnasiÅ,⁶⁵ quod TÄ«moleontÄum⁶⁶ appellÄtur, tÅtÄ celebrante⁶⁷ SiciliÄ, sepultus est.⁶⁸ (Nepos, TÄ«moleÅn 2â5, excerpts)

XXII. HORACEâS âCARPE DIEMâ

TÅ« nÄ quaesierÄ«s¹âscÄ«re nefÄs²âquem mihi, quem³ tibi

fÄ«nem dÄ« dederint, LeuconoÄ,⁴ nec BabylÅniÅs

temptÄrÄ«s⁵ numerÅs.⁶ Ut melius,⁷ quidquid erit, patÄ«.

â¦

Spem longam⁸ resecÄs.⁹ Dum loquimur, fÅ«gerit invida¹⁰

5 Â Â Â aetÄs. Carpe diem, quam minimum¹¹ crÄdula¹² posterÅ.¹³ (Horace, Odes 1.11, excerpts)

XXIII. INTEGER VÄªTAE

Integer¹ vÄ«tae scelerisque pÅ«rus²

nÅn eget MaurÄ«s³ iaculÄ«s⁴ neque arcÅ«⁵

nec venÄnÄtÄ«s⁶ gravidÄ⁷ sagittÄ«s,⁸

Fusce,⁹ pharetrÄ.¹⁰

â¦

5 Â Â Â Namque mÄ silvÄ lupus¹¹ in SabÄ«nÄ¹²

dum meam cantÅ¹³ LalagÄn¹⁴ et ultrÄ

terminum¹⁵ cÅ«rÄ«s vagor¹⁶ expedÄ«tÄ«s¹⁷

fÅ«git¹⁸ inermem.¹⁹

â¦

PÅne mÄ pigrÄ«s²⁰ ubi nÅ«lla campÄ«s

10 Â Â arbor aestÄ«vÄ²¹ recreÄtur aurÄ,²²

quod²³ latus mundÄ« nebulae²⁴ malusque²⁵

Iuppiter urget²⁶;

pÅne sub currÅ«²⁷ nimium propinquÄ«

sÅlis in terrÄ domibus negÄta:

15 Â Â dulce²⁸ rÄ«dentem LalagÄn amÄbÅ

dulce loquentem. (Horace, Odes 1.22.1â4, 9â12, 17â24)

XXIV. AUREA MEDIOCRITÄSâTHE GOLDEN MEAN

RÄctius¹ vÄ«vÄs, LicinÄ«,² neque altum³

semper urgendÅ⁴ neque, dum procellÄs⁵

cautus⁶ horrÄscis,⁷ nimium premendÅ

lÄ«tus⁸ inÄ«quum.⁹

5 Â Â Â Auream¹⁰ quisquis mediocritÄtem¹¹

dÄ«ligit, tÅ«tus¹² caret obsolÄtÄ«¹³

sordibus¹⁴ tÄctÄ«, caret invidendÄ¹⁵

sÅbrius¹⁶ aulÄ.¹⁷

Saepius ventÄ«s agitÄtur¹⁸ ingÄns

10 Â Â pÄ«nus¹⁹ et celsae²⁰ graviÅre cÄsÅ«²¹

dÄcidunt²² turrÄs²³ feriuntque²⁴ summÅs

fulgura²⁵ montÄs.

SpÄrat²⁶ Ä«nfestÄ«s,²⁷ metuit secundÄ«s²⁸

alteram²⁹ sortem³⁰ bene praeparÄtum³¹

15 Â Â pectus.³² ÄªnfÅrmÄs³³ hiemÄs³⁴ redÅ«cit

Iuppiter³⁵; Ä«dem³⁶

summovet.³⁷ NÅn, sÄ« male³⁸ nunc, et Ålim³⁹

sÄ«c erit: quondam⁴⁰ citharÄ⁴¹ tacentem

suscitat⁴² MÅ«sam,⁴³ neque semper arcum

20 Â Â Â Â Â Â  tendit⁴⁴ ApollÅ.⁴⁵

RÄbus angustÄ«s⁴⁶ animÅsus⁴⁷ atque

fortis appÄrÄ⁴⁸; sapienter⁴⁹ Ä«dem⁵⁰

contrahÄs⁵¹ ventÅ nimium secundÅ

turgida⁵² vÄla.⁵³ (Horace, Odes 2.10)

XXV. LÄBUNTUR ANNÄª

Äheu!¹ fugÄcÄs,² Postume, Postume,

lÄbuntur³ annÄ«; nec pietÄs⁴ moram

rÅ«gÄ«s⁵ et Ä«nstantÄ«⁶ senectae⁷

adferet indomitaeque⁸ mortÄ«.

â¦

5 Â Â Â  FrÅ«strÄ⁹ cruentÅ¹⁰ MÄrte¹¹ carÄbimus

frÄctÄ«sque¹² raucÄ«¹³ flÅ«ctibus¹⁴ Hadriae¹⁵;

frÅ«strÄ⁹ per autumnÅs¹⁶ nocentem

corporibus¹⁷ metuÄmus Austrum.¹⁸

VÄ«sendus¹⁹ Äter²⁰ flÅ«mine languidÅ²¹

10 Â Â CÅctos²² errÄns et DanaÄ« genus²³

Ä«nfÄme²⁴ damnÄtusque²⁵ longÄ«

SÄ«syphus²⁶ AeolidÄs²⁷ labÅris.²⁸

Linquenda²⁹ tellÅ«s³⁰ et domus et placÄns

uxor, neque hÄrum, quÄs colis, arborum

15 Â Â Â Â Â Â  tÄ praeter invÄ«sÄs³¹ cupressÅs³²

Å«lla³³ brevem dominum³⁴ sequÄtur. (Horace, Odes 2.14.1â4, 13â24)

XXVI. A SENSE OF BALANCE IN LIFE

VÄ«vitur¹ parvÅ bene cui² paternum³

splendet⁴ in mÄnsÄ tenuÄ«⁵ salÄ«num,

nec levÄs⁶ somnÅs timor aut cupÄ«dÅ

sordidus⁷ aufert.⁸

5 Â Â Â  Quid⁹ brevÄ« fortÄs¹⁰ iaculÄmur¹¹ aevÅ

multa? Quid¹² terrÄs aliÅ calentÄs

sÅle mÅ«tÄmus? Patriae quis exsul¹³

sÄ quoque fÅ«git?¹⁴

Scandit¹⁵ aerÄtÄs¹⁶ vitiÅsa nÄvÄs

10 Â Â cÅ«ra nec turmÄs¹⁷ equitum relinquit,

Åcior¹⁸ cervÄ«s¹⁹ et agente nimbÅs²⁰

Åcior EurÅ.²¹

Laetus²² in praesÄns²³ animus quod ultrÄ est

Åderit²⁴ cÅ«rÄre et amÄra²⁵ lentÅ²⁶

15 Â Â temperet²⁷ rÄ«sÅ«²⁸: nihil est ab omnÄ«

parte²⁹ beÄtum. (Horace, Odes 2.16.13â28)

XXVII. DIÄS FÄSTUS

Hic diÄs¹ vÄrÄ mihi fÄstus ÄtrÄs

eximet² cÅ«rÄs: ego nec tumultum

nec morÄ« per vim metuam tenente

Caesare³ terrÄs.

5 Â Â Â  Äª, pete unguentum,⁴ puer,⁵

et corÅnÄs,⁶ et cadum⁷ MÄrsÄ«⁸ memorem⁹ duellÄ«,

Spartacum¹⁰ sÄ« quÄ¹¹ potuit vagantem

fallere¹² testa.¹³ (Horace, Odes 3.14.13â20)

XXVIII. A MONUMENT MORE LASTING THAN BRONZE

ExÄgÄ« monumentum aere perennius¹

rÄgÄlÄ«que² sitÅ«³ pramidum⁴ altius,⁵

quod nÅn imber⁶ edÄx,⁷ nÅn AquilÅ⁸ impotÄns⁹

possit dÄ«ruere¹⁰ aut innumerÄbilis¹¹

5 Â Â Â  annÅrum seriÄs¹² et fuga temporum.

NÅn omnis moriar, multaque pars meÄ«

vÄ«tÄbit LibitÄ«nam¹³â¦ (Horace, Odes 3.30.1â7)

XXIX. THE OTHER PERSONâS FAULTS AND OUR OWN

PÄrÄs¹ imposuit² Iuppiter nÅbÄ«s duÄs:

propriÄ«s³ replÄtam⁴ vitiÄ«s post tergum⁵ dedit,⁶

aliÄnÄ«s⁷ ante pectus⁸ suspendit⁹ gravem.

HÄc rÄ vidÄre nostra mala nÅn possumus;

5 Â Â Â  aliÄ« simul¹⁰ dÄlinquunt,¹¹ cÄnsÅrÄs¹² sumus. (Phaedrus, FÄbulae 4.10)

XXX. SOUR GRAPES

FamÄ¹ coÄcta vulpÄs² altÄ in vÄ«neÄ³

Å«vam⁴ appetÄbat,⁵ summÄ«s saliÄns⁶ vÄ«ribus.

Quam⁷ tangere ut nÅn potuit, discÄdÄns ait:

âNÅndum mÄtÅ«ra⁸ est; nÅlÅ acerbam sÅ«mere.⁹â

5 Â Â Â  QuÄ« facere¹⁰ quae nÅn possunt verbÄ«s Älevant,¹¹

adscrÄ«bere¹² hoc dÄbÄbunt exemplum sibÄ«. (Phaedrus, FÄbulae 4.3)

XXXI. THE FOX AND THE TRAGIC MASK

PersÅnam¹ tragicam² forte³ vulpÄs vÄ«derat.

âÅ quanta speciÄs,⁴â inquit, âcerebrum⁵ nÅn habet!â

Hoc illÄ«s dictum est quibus honÅrem et glÅriam

FortÅ«na tribuit,⁶ sÄnsum commÅ«nem abstulit. (Phaedrus, FÄbulae 1.7)

XXXII. THE STAG AT THE SPRING

Ad fontem¹ cervus, cum bibisset, restitit,²

et in liquÅre³ vÄ«dit effigiem⁴ suam.

Ibi dum rÄmÅsa⁵ mÄ«rÄns⁶ laudat cornua,

crÅ«rumque⁷ nimiam⁸ tenuitÄtem⁹ vituperat,¹⁰

5 Â Â Â  vÄnantum¹¹ subitÅ vÅcibus conterritus,¹²

per campum fugere coepit, et cursÅ« levÄ«

canÄs¹³ ÄlÅ«sit.¹⁴ Silva tum excÄpit ferum,¹⁵

in quÄ retentÄ«s¹⁶ impedÄ«tus cornibus,

lacerÄri¹⁷ coepit morsibus¹⁸ saevÄ«s¹⁹ canum.

10 Â Â Tunc moriÄns vÅcem hanc Ädidisse²⁰ dÄ«citur:

âÅ mÄ Ä«nfÄlÄ«cem²¹! quÄ« nunc dÄmum²² intellegÅ

Å«tilia mihi quam²³ fuerint quae²⁴ dÄspexeram,²⁵

et quae laudÄram,²⁶ quantum lÅ«ctÅ«s²⁷ habuerint.â (Phaedrus, FÄbulae 1.12)

XXXIII. THE FOX GETS THE RAVENâS CHEESE

QuÄ« sÄ laudÄrÄ« gaudet verbÄ«s subdolÄ«s,¹

ferÄ dat poenÄs turpÄ« paenitentiÄ.²

Cum dÄ fenestrÄ corvus³ raptum cÄseum⁴

comÄsse⁵ vellet, celsÄ residÄns⁶ arbore,

5 Â Â Â  hunc vÄ«dit vulpÄs; deinde sÄ«c coepit loquÄ«:

âÅ quÄ« tuÄrum, corve, pennÄrum⁷ est nitor⁸!

Quantum decÅris⁹ corpore et vultÅ« geris!¹⁰

SÄ« vÅcem habÄrÄs, nÅ«lla prior¹¹ Äles¹² foret.â¹³

At ille stultus, dum vult vÅcem ostendere,

10 Â Â ÄmÄ«sit¹⁴ Åre cÄseum, quem celeriter

dolÅsa¹⁵ vulpÄs avidÄ«s¹⁶ rapuit dentibus.¹⁷ (Phaedrus, FÄbulae 1.13.1â10)

XXXIV. THE ASS AND THE OLD SHEPHERD

In prÄ«ncipÄtÅ«¹ commÅ«tandÅ² cÄ«vium

nÄ«l praeter dominÄ« nÅmen mÅ«tant pauperÄs.

Id esse vÄrum parva haec fÄbella³ indicat.

Asellum⁴ in prÄtÅ⁵ timidus⁶ pÄscÄbat⁷ senex.

5 Â Â Â  Is, hostium clamÅre⁸ subitÅ⁹ territus,

suÄdÄbat¹⁰ asinÅ fugere nÄ possent capÄ«.

At ille lentus:¹¹ âQuaesÅ,¹² num bÄ«nÄs¹³ mihÄ«

clÄ«tellÄs¹⁴ impositÅ«rum¹⁵ victÅrem¹⁶ putÄs?â

Senex negÄvit. âErgÅ quid rÄfert meÄ¹⁷

10 Â Â cui serviam clÄ«tellÄs dum portem¹⁸ meÄs?â (Phaedrus, FÄbulae 1.15)

XXXV. THE TWO MULES AND THE ROBBERS

MÅ«lÄ«¹ gravÄtÄ«² sarcinÄ«s³ Ä«bant duÅ.

Åªnus ferÄbat fiscÅs⁴ cum pecÅ«niÄ;

alter tumentÄs⁵ multÅ saccÅs⁶ hordeÅ.⁷

Ille onere⁸ dÄ«ves, celsÄ cervÄ«ce⁹ ÄminÄns¹⁰

5 Â Â Â  clÄrumque collÅ¹¹ iactÄns¹² tintinnÄbulum¹³;

comes¹⁴ quiÄtÅ¹⁵ sequitur et placidÅ¹⁶ gradÅ«.¹⁷

SubitÅ latrÅnÄs¹⁸ ex Ä«nsidiÄ«s advolant,¹⁹

interque caedem ferrÅ mÅ«lum lancinant²⁰;

dÄ«ripiunt²¹ nummÅs,²² neglegunt vÄ«le²³ hordeum.

10 Â Â SpoliÄtus²⁴ igitur cÄsÅ«s²⁵ cum flÄret suÅs,

âEquidem,â inquit alter, âmÄ contemptum gaudeÅ.

Nam nihil ÄmÄ«sÄ«, nec sum laesus²⁶ vulnere.â

HÅc argÅ«mentÅ tÅ«ta est hominum tenuitÄs²⁷;

magnae perÄ«clÅ²⁸ sunt opÄs obnoxiae.²⁹ (Phaedrus, FÄbulae 2.7)

XXXVI. DELIGHTS OF THE COUNTRY

C.¹ PlÄ«nius CalpurniÅ MacrÅ² SuÅ S.³

Bene est⁴ mihi quia⁴ tibi est bene. HabÄs uxÅrem tÄcum, habÄs fÄ«lium; fru-eris⁵ marÄ«, fontibus, viridibus,⁶ agrÅ, vÄ«llÄ amoenissimÄ.⁷ Neque enim dubitÅ esse amoenissimam,⁸ in quÄ sÄ composuerat⁹ homÅ¹⁰ fÄlÄ«cior antequam¹¹ âfÄlÄ«cissimusâ fieret. Ego in TuscÄ«s¹² et vÄnor¹³ et studeÅ, quae¹⁴ interdum¹⁵ alternÄ«s,¹⁶ interdum

5 Â Â Â  simul¹⁷ faciÅ; nec tamen adhÅ«c¹⁸ possum prÅnÅ«ntiÄre utrum sit difficilius capere aliquid an scrÄ«bere. ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 5.18)

XXXVII. MORE COUNTRY PLEASURES

C. PlÄ«nius CanÄ«niÅ¹ SuÅ S.

StudÄs an² piscÄris³ an vÄnÄris an simul omnia? Possunt enim omnia simul fierÄ« ad LÄrium⁴ nostrum. Nam lacus⁵ piscem,⁶ ferÄs⁷ silvae quibus lacus cingitur,⁸ studia altissimus iste sÄcessus⁹ adfatim¹⁰ suggerunt.¹¹ Sed sÄ«ve¹² omnia simul sÄ«ve

5 Â Â Â  aliquid facis, nÅn possum dÄ«cere âinvideÅâ; angor¹³ tamenâ¦ Numquamne hÅs artissimÅs laqueÅs¹⁴â¦ abrumpam?¹⁵ Numquam, putÅ. Nam veteribus negÅtiÄ«s¹⁶ nova accrÄscunt,¹⁷ nec tamen priÅra peraguntur¹⁸; tot nexibus,¹⁹ tot quasi catÄnÄ«s²⁰ maius in diÄs²¹ occupÄtiÅnum²² agmen²³ extenditur.²⁴ ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 2.8, excerpts)

XXXVIII. HAPPY MARRIED LIFE

C. PlÄ«nius GeminÅ SuÅ S.

Grave vulnus Macrinus noster accÄpit: ÄmÄ«sit¹ uxÅrem singulÄris² exemplÄ«â¦ VÄ«xit cum hÄc trÄ«gintÄ novem annÄ«s³ sine iÅ«rgiÅ,⁴ sine offÄnsÄ.⁵ Quam illa reverentiam⁶ marÄ«tÅ⁷ suÅ praestitit, cum ipsa summam merÄrÄtur!⁸ Quot quantÄsque

5 Â Â Â  virtÅ«tÄs ex dÄ«versÄ«s⁹ aetÄtibus sÅ«mptÄs collÄgit et miscuit! Habet quidem Macrinus grande¹⁰ sÅlÄcium, quod tantum bonum tam diÅ« tenuit; sed hinc¹¹ magis exacerbÄtur¹² quod ÄmÄ«sit. Nam fruendÄ«s voluptÄtibus crÄscit carendÄ« dolor. ErÅ ergÅ suspÄnsus¹³ prÅ homine amÄ«cissimÅ dum¹⁴ admittere¹⁵ ÄvocÄmenta¹⁶ et cicÄtrÄ«cem¹⁷ patÄ« possit, quam nihil aequÄ ac¹⁸ necessitÄs¹⁹ ipsa et diÄs²⁰ longa et satietÄs²¹ dolÅris

10 Â Â indÅ«cit.²² ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 8.5, excerpts)

XXXIX. FAITHFUL IN SICKNESS AND IN DEATH

C. PlÄ«nius NepÅtÄ« SuÅ S.

(â¦Fannia¹) neptis² Arriae³ illÄ«us⁴ quae marÄ«tÅ⁵ et sÅlÄcium mortis et exemplum fuit. Multa referÄbat⁶ aviae⁷ suae nÅn minÅra hÅc,⁸ sed obscÅ«riÅra,⁹ quae tibi exÄ«stimÅ tam mÄ«rÄbilia legentÄ«¹⁰ fore¹¹ quam mihi audientÄ« fuÄrunt.

5 Â Â Â Â Â Â Â  AegrÅtÄbat¹² CaecÄ«na Paetus, marÄ«tus eius, aegrÅtÄbat et fÄ«lius, uterque mortiferÄ,¹³ ut vidÄbÄtur. FÄ«lius dÄcessit¹⁴ eximiÄ¹⁵ pulchritÅ«dine,¹⁶ parÄ« verÄcundiÄ,¹⁷ et parentibus nÅn minus ob¹⁸ alia cÄrus quam quod fÄ«lius erat. Huic illa ita fÅ«nus¹⁹ parÄvitâ¦ ut ignÅrÄret marÄ«tus. QuÄ«n immÅ,²⁰ quotiÄns²¹ cubiculum²² eius intrÄret,²³ vÄ«vere fÄ«lium atque etiam commodiÅrem²⁴ esse simulÄbat²⁵; ac persaepe²⁶

10 Â Â interrogantÄ«²⁷ quid ageret puer respondÄbat, âBene quiÄvit,²⁸ libenter cibum²⁹ sÅ«mpsit.â Deinde, cum diÅ« cohibitae³⁰ lacrimae vincerent prÅrumperentque,³¹ ÄgrediÄbÄtur; tunc sÄ dolÅrÄ« dabat. SatiÄta, siccÄ«s³² oculÄ«s, compositÅ vultÅ« redÄ«bat, tamquam orbitÄtem³³ forÄ«s relÄ«quisset.³⁴ PraeclÄrum quidem illud³⁵ eiusdem: ferrum stringere,³⁶ perfodere³⁷ pectus, extrahere³⁸ pugiÅnem,³⁹ porrigere⁴⁰ marÄ«tÅ, ad-

15 Â Â dere⁴¹ vÅcem immortÄlem ac paene⁴² dÄ«vÄ«nam,⁴³ âPaete, nÅn dolet.ââ¦ ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 3.16, excerpts)

XL. A SWEET, BRAVE GIRL

C. PlÄ«nius MarcellÄ«nÅ SuÅ S.

TrÄ«stissimus haec tibi scrÄ«bÅ, FundÄnÄ« nostrÄ« fÄ«liÄ minÅre defÅ«nctÄ,¹ quÄ puellÄ² nihil umquam fÄstÄ«vius,³ amÄbilius,⁴ nec longiÅre vÄ«tÄâ¦ dignius vÄ«dÄ«. NÅndum annÅs trÄdecim implÄverat,⁵ et iam illÄ«⁶ anÄ«lis⁷ prÅ«dentia, mÄtrÅnÄlis⁸ gravitÄs⁹

5 Â Â Â  erat, et tamen suÄvitÄs¹⁰ puellÄris¹¹â¦ Ut¹² illa patris cervÄ«cibus¹³ inhaerÄbat¹⁴! Ut nÅs, amÄ«cÅs paternÅs,¹⁵ et amanter¹⁶ et modestÄ¹⁷ complectÄbÄtur!¹⁸ Ut nÅ«trÄ«cÄs,¹⁹ ut paedagÅgÅs,²⁰ ut praeceptÅrÄs²¹ prÅ suÅ quemque officiÅ dÄ«ligÄbat! Quam studiÅsÄ,²² quam intelligenter²³ lÄctitÄbat²⁴!â¦

QuÄ illa temperantiÄ,²⁵ quÄ patientiÄ, quÄ etiam cÅnstantiÄ²⁶ novissimam va-

10 Â Â lÄtÅ«dinem²⁷ tulit! MedicÄ«s obsequÄbÄtur;²⁸ sorÅrem, patrem adhortÄbÄtur²⁹; ipsamque sÄ dÄstitÅ«tam³⁰ corporis vÄ«ribus vigÅre³¹ animÄ« sustinÄbat.³² DÅ«rÄvit³³ hic³⁴ illÄ« usque ad extrÄmum,³⁵ nec aut spatiÅ³⁶ valÄtÅ«dinis aut metÅ« mortis Ä«nfrÄctus est³⁷â¦ Å trÄ«ste plÄnÄ³⁸ acerbumque fÅ«nus³⁹â¦ Iam dÄstinÄta erat⁴⁰ ÄgregiÅ⁴¹ iuvenÄ«,⁴² iam ÄlÄctus⁴³ nÅ«ptiÄrum⁴⁴ diÄs, iam nÅs vocÄtÄ«. Quod gaudium quÅ

15 Â Â maerÅre⁴⁵ mÅ«tÄtum est!

NÅn possum exprimere⁴⁶ verbÄ«s quantum animÅ vulnus accÄperim cum audÄ«vÄ« FundÄnum ipsum praecipientem,⁴⁷ quod⁴⁸ in vestÄs,⁴⁹ margarÄ«ta,⁵⁰ gemmÄs⁵¹ fuerat ÄrogÄtÅ«rus,⁵² hoc in tÅ«s⁵³ et unguenta et odÅrÄs⁵⁴ impenderÄtur⁵⁵â¦ SÄ« quÄs ad eum dÄ dolÅre tam iÅ«stÅ litterÄs mittÄs, mementÅ⁵⁶ adhibÄre⁵⁷ sÅlÄciumâ¦

20 Â Â molle⁵⁸ et hÅ«mÄnum. (Pliny, Epistulae 5.16, excerpts)

XLI. PLINYâS CONCERN ABOUT A SICK FREEDMAN

C. PlÄ«nius ValeriÅ PaulÄ«nÅ SuÅ S.

VideÅ quam molliter¹ tuÅs² habeÄs³; quÅ simplicius⁴ tibi cÅnfitÄbor quÄ indulgentiÄ⁵ meÅs tractem.⁶ Quod sÄ« essem nÄtÅ«rÄ asperior et dÅ«rior, frangeret mÄ tamen Ä«nfÄ«rmitÄs⁷ lÄ«bertÄ«⁸ meÄ« ZÅsimÄ«,⁹ cui tantÅ maior hÅ«mÄnitÄs¹⁰ exhibenda¹¹

5 Â Â Â  Â  est, quantÅ nunc illÄ magis eget. HomÅ probus,¹² officiÅsus,¹³ litterÄtus¹⁴; et ars quidem eius et quasi Ä«nscrÄ«ptiÅ¹⁵âcÅmoedusâ¦ Åªtitur et citharÄ perÄ«tÄ.¹⁶ Äªdem tam commodÄ¹⁷ ÅrÄtiÅnÄs et historiÄs¹⁸ et carmina legit ut hoc sÅlum didicisse videÄtur.

Haec tibi sÄdulÅ¹⁹ exposuÄ« quÅ magis scÄ«rÄs quam multa Å«nus mihi et quam iÅ«cunda ministeria²⁰ praestÄret. AccÄdit longa iam cÄritÄs²¹ hominis, quam ipsa

10 Â Â perÄ«cula auxÄrunt²²â¦ Ante aliquot²³ annÅs,²⁴ dum intentÄ instanterque²⁵ prÅnÅ«ntiat, sanguinem²⁶ reiÄcit²⁷; atque ob hoc in Aegyptum²⁸ missus Ä mÄ, post longam peregrÄ«nÄtiÅnem²⁹ cÅnfÄ«rmÄtus³⁰ rediit nÅ«per. Deindeâ¦ veteris Ä«nfÄ«rmitÄtis³¹ tussiculÄ³² admonitus,³³ rÅ«rsus sanguinem reddidit.³⁴

QuÄ ex causÄ dÄstinÄvÄ«³⁵ eum mittere in praedia³⁶ tua quae ForÅ IÅ«liÄ«³⁷

15 Â Â possidÄs.³⁸ AudÄ«vÄ« enim tÄ referentem esse ibi Äera³⁹ salÅ«brem⁴⁰ et lac⁴¹ eius modÄ« cÅ«rÄtiÅnibus⁴² accommodÄtissimum.⁴³ RogÅ ergÅ scrÄ«bÄs⁴⁴ tuÄ«s⁴⁵ ut illÄ« vÄ«lla, ut domus⁴⁶ pateatâ¦ ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 5.19, excerpts)

XLII. ON BEHALF OF A PENITENT FREEDMAN (42â43)

C. PlÄ«nius SabÄ«niÄnÅ SuÅ S.

LÄ«bertus tuus, cui suscÄnsÄre¹ tÄ dÄ«xerÄs, vÄnit ad mÄâ¦ FlÄvit multum, multum rogÄvit, multum etiam tacuit; in summÄ,² fÄcit mihi fidem paenitentiae.³ VÄrÄ crÄdÅ ÄmendÄtum⁴ quia dÄlÄ«quisse⁵ sÄ sentit. ÄªrÄsceris, sciÅ; et Ä«rÄsceris

5 Â Â Â  Â  me-ritÅ,⁶ id quoque sciÅ; sed tunc praecipua⁷ mÄnsuÄtÅ«dinis⁸ laus cum Ä«rae causa iÅ«stissima est. AmÄstÄ«⁹ hominem et, spÄrÅ, amÄbis; interim¹⁰ sufficit¹¹ ut exÅrÄrÄ«¹² tÄ sinÄs¹³â¦ NÄ torserÄ«s¹⁴ illum, nÄ torserÄ«s etiam tÄ; torquÄris¹⁵ enim, cum tam lÄnis¹⁶ Ä«rÄsceris. Vereor nÄ videar nÅn rogÄre sed cÅgere, sÄ« precibus¹⁷ eius meÄs iÅ«nxerÅ. Iungam tamen tantÅ plÄnius¹⁸ et effÅ«sius,¹⁹ quantÅ²⁰ ipsum²¹ Äcrius sevÄriusque²²

10 Â Â corripuÄ«²³â¦ ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 9.21, excerpts)

XLIII. THANKS FOR A FRIENDâS CLEMENCY

C. PlÄ«nius SabÄ«niÄnÅ SuÅ S.

Bene fÄcistÄ«¹ quod lÄ«bertum² aliquandÅ³ tibi cÄrum redÅ«centibus⁴ epistulÄ«s⁵ meÄ«s in domum,⁶ in animum recÄpistÄ«. IuvÄbit hoc tÄ, mÄ certÄ iuvat; prÄ«mum,⁷ quod tÄ tam tractÄbilem⁸ videÅ ut in Ä«rÄ regÄ« possÄ«s; deinde, quod tantum mihi tribuis⁹ ut

5 Â Â Â  vel¹⁰ auctÅritÄtÄ« meae pÄreÄs vel precibus indulgeÄs.¹¹ Igitur laudÅ et grÄtiÄs agÅâ¦ ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 9.24, excerpts)

XLIV. SELECTION OF A TEACHER

C. PlÄ«nius MauricÅ SuÅ S.

Quid Ä tÄ mihi iÅ«cundius potuit iniungÄ«¹ quam ut praeceptÅrem frÄtris tuÄ« lÄ«berÄ«s quaererem? Nam beneficiÅ² tuÅ in scholam³ redeÅ et illam dulcissimam aetÄtem quasi resÅ«mÅ.⁴ SedeÅ inter iuvenÄs, ut solÄbam, atque etiam experior quan-

5 Â Â Â  tum apud illÅs auctÅritÄtis⁵ ex studiÄ«s habeam. Nam proximÄ⁶ frequentÄ«⁷ audÄ«tÅriÅ⁸ inter sÄ cÅram⁹ multÄ«s Årdinis¹⁰ nostrÄ« clÄrÄ¹¹ loquÄbantur: intrÄvÄ«, conticuÄrunt¹²; quod¹³ nÅn referrem, nisi ad illÅrum magis laudem quam ad meam pertinÄret¹⁴â¦ Cum omnÄs quÄ« profitentur¹⁵ audierÅ, quid dÄ quÅque sentiam scrÄ«bam efficiamque,¹⁶ quantum tamen epistulÄ cÅnsequÄ«¹⁷ poterÅ, ut ipse omnÄs audÄ«sse videÄris. DÄbeÅ

10 Â Â  enim tibi, dÄbeÅ memoriae frÄtris tuÄ« hanc fidem, hoc studium, praesertim¹⁸ super¹⁹ tantÄ rÄ. Nam quid magis interest vestrÄ²⁰ quam ut lÄ«berÄ«â¦ dignÄ« illÅ patre, tÄ patruÅ²¹ reperiantur?â¦ ValÄ. (Pliny, Epistulae 2.8 excerpts)

XLV. THE OLD BOY DYED HIS HAIR

MentÄ«ris¹ iuvenem tÄ«nctÄ«s,² LaetÄ«ne,³ capillÄ«s,⁴

tam subitÅ corvus quÄ« modo cycnus⁵ erÄs.

NÅn omnÄs fallis⁶; scit tÄ PrÅserpina⁷ cÄnum⁸:

persÅnam capitÄ« dÄtrahet⁹ illa¹⁰ tuÅ. (Martial 3.43)

XLVI. FAKE TEARS

Ämissum¹ nÅn flet cum sÅla est Gellia² patrem;

sÄ« quis adest, iussae³ prÅsiliunt⁴ lacrimae.

NÅn lÅ«get⁵ quisquis laudÄrÄ«, Gellia, quaerit;

ille dolet vÄrÄ quÄ« sine teste⁶ dolet. (Martial 1.33)

XLVII. EVEN THOUGH YOU DO INVITE MEâIâLL COME!

Quod convÄ«vÄris¹ sine mÄ tam saepe, Luperce,²

invÄnÄ« noceam quÄ ratiÅne tibi.

ÄªrÄscor: licet³ usque vocÄs mittÄsque⁴ rogÄsqueâ

âQuid faciÄs?â inquis. Quid faciam? Veniam! (Martial 6.51)

XLVIII. PRO-CRAS-TINATION

CrÄs tÄ vÄ«ctÅ«rum,¹ crÄs dÄ«cis, Postume,² semper.

DÄ«c mihi, crÄs istud,³ Postume, quando venit?

Quam longÄ est crÄs istud? ubi est? aut unde petendum⁴?

Numquid⁵ apud ParthÅs ArmeniÅsque⁶ latet⁷?

5 Â Â Â  Iam crÄs istud habet PriamÄ«⁸ vel Nestoris⁹ annÅs.

CrÄs istud quantÄ«¹⁰ dÄ«c mihi possit emÄ«¹¹?

CrÄs vÄ«vÄs? HodiÄ iam vÄ«vere, Postume, sÄrum¹² est.

Ille sapit quisquis, Postume, vÄ«xit heri. (Martial 5.58)

XLIX. ISSA

Issa¹ est passere² nÄquior³ CatullÄ«:

Issa est pÅ«rior ÅsculÅ columbae;⁴

Issa est blandior⁵ omnibus puellÄ«s;

Issa est cÄrior IndicÄ«s⁶ lapillÄ«s⁷;

5 Â Â Â  Issa est dÄliciae⁸ catella⁹ PÅ«blÄ«.¹⁰

Hanc tÅ«, sÄ« queritur,¹¹ loquÄ« putÄbis.

Sentit trÄ«stitiamque¹² gaudiumque.

â¦

Hanc nÄ lÅ«x rapiat suprÄma¹³ tÅtam,

pict¹⁴ PÅ«blius exprimit¹⁵ tabellÄ

10 Â Â in quÄ tam similem vidÄbis Issam¹⁶

ut sit tam similis sibÄ« nec¹⁷ ipsa.

Issam dÄnique pÅne cum tabellÄ:

aut utramque putÄbis esse vÄram

aut utramque putÄbis esse pictam. 355

SELF-TUTORIAL EXERCISES

These exercises have been included in the hope of enriching the potential of this book for its various types of users.

1. RepetÄ«tiÅ est mÄter memoriae. In language study the value of repetition is indisputable. To the already large amount of repetition achieved in the regular chapters these exercises add even more practice. The phrases and sentences have deliberately been made simple so that the immediate points in forms and syntax may stand out strikingly. The words are purposely limited to those of the formal lesson vocabularies, which obviously should be memorized before turning to these self-tutorial exercises. As a result of their very nature and purpose, such sentences can make no claim to inspiration. Some hints of the worthwhile reading matter for which one studies Latin are to be found in the Sententiae AntÄ«quae and the reading passages from the ancient authors, which are the heart of this book; but if one wants additional repetitious drill by which to establish linguistic reflexes, one can find it here in these exercises. As has been suggested elsewhere, be sure always to read aloud every Latin word and sentenceâcarefully, for such a practice enables one to learn through the ear as well as the eye and can provide many of the benefits of a language laboratory.

2. To students enrolled in a regular Latin course these exercises with their keys can prove valuable for review and self-testing and can be helpful in preparation for examinations.

3. Also to the private individual who wishes to learn or review Latin independently, these exercises are certain to be valuable, since they can be used as self-tests which can be corrected via the key. Likewise, completing these practice exercises with benefit of key will provide greater confidence in tackling the regular exercises of the book.

4. All students can test themselves in simple Latin composition by translating the English sentences of the key back into Latin and checking this work via the corresponding Latin sentences of the exercises.

5. In the translations ordinarily only one of the various meanings of a word given in the vocabulary will be used in any specific instance. If at times the translations are somewhat formal, the reason is that they can in this way follow the Latin more closely; and certainly these particular sentences are intended to provide practice in understanding Latin rather than practice in literary expression. Polished literary expression in translation is most desirable and should be practiced in connection with the other exercises in this book.

6. The answer keys have been placed by themselves after the exercises to facilitate self-testing and so that the exercises may be used for practice in class when the instructor wishes. It hardly need be added that the surest way to test oneself is to write out the answers before turning to the key.

7. Finally, let it be emphasized once again that for maximum value you must read aloud all the Latin words, phrases, and sentences, and that you must have studied the text of each lesson carefully through the vocabulary before turning to these exercises.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt I

Give the English pronouns equivalent to each of the following Latin personal endings: (1) -t, (2) -mus, (3) -Å, (4) -nt, (5) -s, (6) -tis.

Name the following forms and translate each: (1) monÄre, (2) vidÄre, (3) valÄre, (4) dÄbÄre.

Name the following forms and translate each: (1) vocÄre, (2) servÄre, (3) dare, (4) cÅgitÄre, (5) laudÄre, (6) amÄre, (7) errÄre.

Name the following forms and translate each: (1) vocÄ, (2) servÄ, (3) dÄ, (4) cÅgitÄ, (5) laudÄ, (6) amÄ, (7) monÄ, (8) vidÄ, (9) valÄ.

Name the following forms and translate each: (1) vocÄte, (2) servÄte, (3) date, (4) cÅgitÄte, (5) laudÄte, (6) amÄte, (7) monÄte, (8) vidÄte, (9) valÄte.

Translate the following words: (1) vocat, (2) cÅgitÄmus, (3) amant, (4) dÄbÄs, (5) videt, (6) vident, (7) dÄbÄmus, (8) valÄs, (9) errÄtis, (10) vidÄmus, (11) amat, (12) vidÄtis, (13) errÄs, (14) dant, (15) servÄmus, (16) dat, (17) amant, (18) vidÄs.

7. Monent mÄ sÄ« errÅ. 8. Monet mÄ sÄ« errant. 9. MonÄte mÄ sÄ« errat. 10. DÄbÄs monÄre mÄ. 11. DÄbÄtis servÄre mÄ. 12. NÅn dÄbent laudÄre mÄ. 13. âQuid dat?â âSaepe nihil dat.â 14. MÄ saepe vocant et (and) monent. 15. Nihil videÅ. Quid vidÄs? 16. MÄ laudÄ sÄ« nÅn errÅ, amÄbÅ tÄ. 17. SÄ« valÄtis, valÄmus. 18. SÄ« valet, valeÅ. 19. SÄ« mÄ amat, dÄbet mÄ laudÄre. 20. CÅnservÄte mÄ. 21. NÅn dÄbeÅ errÄre. 22. Quid dÄbÄmus laudÄre? 23. Videt; cÅgitat; monet.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt II

Give the Latin for the definite article âtheâ and the indefinite article âa.â

Name the Latin case for each of the following constructions or ideas: (1) direct object of a verb; (2) possession; (3) subject of a verb; (4) means; (5) direct address; (6) indirect object of a verb.

Name the case, number, and syntactical usage indicated by each of the following endings of the 1st declension: (1) -Äs; (2) -a; (3) -am; (4) -ae (pl.).

Name the case(s) and number indicated by the following endings, and wherever possible name the English preposition(s) which can be associated with them: (1) -Ärum; (2) -Ä; (3) -ae; (4) -Ä«s.

Translate the following nouns and state the syntactical usage of each as indicated by its ending: (1) puellam; (2) puella; (3) puellÄs; (4) puellae (plural form); (5) patriÄs; (6) patriam; (7) patria; (8) patriae (pl.); (9) pecÅ«niam; (10) pecÅ«nia; (11) poenÄs; (12) poenam.

Translate the following nouns in accordance with their case endings: (1) puellae (sg.); (2) puellÄrum; (3) Å patria; (4) patriae (sg.); (5) pecÅ«niÄ; (6) pecÅ«niae (sg.); (7) poenÄ«s; (8) poenÄ; (9) poenÄrum.

Given the following nominative singular forms, write the Latin forms requested in each instance: (1) multa pecÅ«nia in the genitive and the accusative singular; (2) magna fÄma in dat. and abl. sg.; (3) vÄ«ta mea in gen. sg. and nom. pl.; (4) fortÅ«na tua in acc. sg. and pl.; (5) magna patria in gen. sg. and pl.; (6) fortÅ«na mea in abl. sg. and pl.; (7) magna poena in dat. sg. and pl.; (8) multa philosophia in dat. and abl. pl.

Translate each of the following phrases into Latin according to the case either named or indicated by the English preposition in each instance: (1) by much money; (2) of many girls; (3) to / for my country; (4) great life (as direct object of a verb); (5) by your penalties; (6) many countries (subject of a verb); (7) to / for many girls; (8) of my life; (9) O fortune; (10) girlâs; (11) girlsâ; (12) girls (direct address); (13) the girls (direct object of a verb); (14) the girls (subject of a verb).

9. ValÄ, patria mea. 10. FortÅ«na puellae est magna. 11. Puella fortÅ«nam patriae tuae laudat. 12. Å puella, patriam tuam servÄ. 13. Multae puellae pecÅ«niam amant. 14. Puellae nihil datis. 15. PecÅ«niam puellae videt. 16. PecÅ«niam puellÄrum nÅn vidÄs. 17. MonÄre puellÄs dÄbÄmus. 18. LaudÄre puellam dÄbent. 19. VÄ«ta multÄ«s puellÄ«s fortÅ«nam dat. 20. VÄ«tam meam pecÅ«niÄ tuÄ cÅnservÄs. 21. FÄma est nihil sine fortÅ«nÄ. 22. VÄ«tam sine pecÅ«niÄ nÅn amÄtis. 23. Sine fÄmÄ et fortÅ«nÄ patria nÅn valet. 24.Äª ram puellÄrum laudÄre nÅn dÄbÄs. 25. VÄ«tam sine poenÄ«s amÄmus. 26. Sine philosophiÄ nÅn valÄmus. 27. Quid est vÄ«ta sine philosophiÄ?

EXERCISES FOR Capvt III

Name the case, number, and syntactical usage indicated by each of the following endings of masculines of the 2nd declension: (1) -um; (2) -Ä« (pl.); (3) -us; (4) -Ås; (5) -e.

Name the case(s) and number of the following endings, and name the English preposition which can be associated with each: (1) -Å; (2) -Årum; (3) -Ä« (sg.); (4) -Ä«s.

Translate the following nouns and state the syntactical usage of each as indicated by its ending: (1) fÄ«liÅs; (2) fÄ«liÄ« (pl.); (3) fÄ«lium; (4) populum; (5) popule; (6) populus; (7) vir; (8) virÅs; (9) virÄ« (pl.); (10) virum; (11) amÄ«ce; (12) amÄ«cÄ« (pl.); (13) amÄ«cÅs; (14) amÄ«cum.

Translate the following in accordance with their case endings: (1) fÄ«liÅrum meÅrum; (2) fÄ«liÅ meÅ; (3) populÄ« RÅmÄnÄ« (sg.); (4) populÅ RÅmÄnÅ; (5) virÄ«s; (6) virÄ« (sg.); (7) virÅrum; (8) amÄ«cÅrum paucÅrum; (9) amÄ«cÄ«s paucÄ«s; (10) amÄ«cÅ meÅ; (11) amÄ«cÄ« meÄ« (sg.); (12) multÄ«s puerÄ«s.

Given the following nom. sg. forms, write the Latin forms requested in each instance: (1) populus RÅmÄnus in gen. and abl. sg.; (2) magnus vir in acc. and abl. pl.; (3) puer meus in dat. and abl. pl.; (4) magnus numerus in dat. and abl. sg.; (5) magnus vir in voc. sg. and pl.; (6) fÄ«lius meus in gen. sg. and pl.

Translate the following phrases into Latin according to the case named or indicated by the English preposition in each instance: (1) of many boys; (2) to / for the Roman people; (3) my sons (object of verb); (4) O my sons; (5) a great number (obj. of verb); (6) by the great number; (7) O great man; (8) to / for many boys; (9) the great man (subj. of verb); (10) of the Roman people.

7. ValÄ, mÄ« amÄ«ce. 8. Populus RÅmÄnus sapientiam fÄ«liÄ« tuÄ« laudat. 9. Å vir magne, populum RÅmÄnum servÄ. 10. Numerus populÄ« RÅmÄnÄ« est magnus. 11. MultÄ« puerÄ« puellÄs amant. 12. FÄ«liÅ meÅ nihil datis. 13. VirÅs in agrÅ videÅ. 14. AmÄ«cum fÄ«liÄ« meÄ« vidÄs. 15. AmÄ«cum fÄ«liÅrum tuÅrum nÅn videt. 16. DÄbÄmus fÄ«liÅs meÅs monÄre. 17. DÄbent fÄ«lium tuum laudÄre. 18. VÄ«ta paucÄ«s virÄ«s fÄmam dat. 19. MÄ in numerÅ amÄ«cÅrum tuÅrum habÄs. 20. VirÄ« magnÄ« paucÅs amÄ«cÅs saepe habent. 21. AmÄ«cus meus semper cÅgitat. 22. FÄ«lius magnÄ« virÄ« nÅn semper est magnus vir. 23. Sapientiam magnÅrum virÅrum nÅn semper vidÄmus. 24. Philosophiam, sapientiam magnÅrum virÅrum, laudÄre dÄbÄtis.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt IV

A 2nd-declension neuter has the same forms as the regular 2nd-declension masculine except in three instances. Name these three instances and give their neuter endings.

Name the case(s), number, and syntactical usage indicated by each of the following endings of the 2nd-declension neuter nouns: (1) -a; (2) -um.

Name the case(s) and number of the following 2nd-declension neuter endings and name the English preposition(s) which can be associated with each: (1) -Å; (2) -Årum; (3) -Ä«; (4) -Ä«s.

Translate the following neuter nouns and state the syntactical usage of each as indicated by its ending: (1) bella; (2) bellum; (3) officium; (4) officia; (5) perÄ«cula.

Translate the following phrases in accordance with their case endings: (1) bellÅrum malÅrum; (2) bellÅ malÅ; (3) bellÄ« malÄ«; (4) bellÄ«s malÄ«s; (5) officiÄ« magnÄ«; (6) officiÄ«s magnÄ«s; (7) perÄ«culÅ parvÅ.

Given the following nom. sg. forms, write the Latin forms requested in each instance: (1) bellum parvum in nom. and acc. pl.; (2) Åtium bonum in acc. sg. and pl.; (3) perÄ«culum magnum in gen. sg. and pl.; (4) officium vÄrum in acc. and abl. sg.

Translate the following phrases into Latin in accordance with the case named or indicated by the English preposition in each instance: (1) O evil war; (2) to / for great duty; (3) by the great danger; (4) good leisure (object of verb); (5) by many wars; (6) of good leisure; (7) by the dangers of many wars; (8) small wars (subject of verb); (9) small wars (obj. of verb); (10) O foolish wars; (11) the small war (subj.)

8. Åtium est bonum. 9. Multa bella Åtium nÅn cÅnservant. 10. PerÄ«culum est magnum. 11. In magnÅ perÄ«culÅ sumus. 12. Et Åtium perÄ«cula saepe habet. 13. VÄ«ta nÅn est sine multÄ«s perÄ«culÄ«s. 14. BonÄ« virÄ« Åtium amant. 15. Stultus vir perÄ«cula bellÄ« laudat. 16. Åtium bellÅ saepe nÅn cÅnservÄmus. 17. Populus RÅmÄnus Åtium bonum nÅn semper habet. 18. Patriam et Åtium bellÄ«s parvÄ«s saepe servant. 19. Multae puellae sunt bellae. 20. VÄrÄ« amÄ«cÄ« sunt paucÄ«. 21. AmÄ«cus meus est vir magnÄ« officiÄ«. 22. Officia magistrÄ« sunt multa et magna. 23. Vir parvÄ« ÅtiÄ« es. 24. VirÄ« magnae cÅ«rae estis. 25. Sine morÄ cÅ«ram officiÅ dare dÄbÄmus. 26. Sine oculÄ«s vÄ«ta est nihil.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt V

1. Identify the personal endings of the future and imperfect tenses of the first two conjugations.

2. Are these the same as the endings of the present tense? If not, point out the differences.

3. Identify the future and imperfect tense signs in the first two conjugations.

4. How, in effect, can the following verb endings be translated: (1) -bÄmus; (2) -bit; (3) -bitis; (4) -bÅ; (5) -bunt; (6) -bat?

5. When an adjective of the 1st and 2nd declensions has the masculine ending in -er, how can you tell whether the e survives in the other forms or is lost?

6. How do English words like liberty, pulchritude, and nostrum help with the declension of Latin adjectives?

7. Translate the following forms: (1) manÄbant; (2) manÄbit; (3) manÄbimus; (4) dabam; (5) dabitis; (6) dabit; (7) vidÄbis; (8) vidÄbimus; (9) vocÄbant; (10) vocÄbis; (11) habÄbis; (12) habÄbant.

8. Translate into Latin: (1) we shall give; (2) you (sg.) were remaining; (3) they will see; (4) we shall call; (5) he was calling; (6) you (pl.) will see; (7) I shall see; (8) they were saving; (9) we shall have; (10) we were having; (11) he will have; (12) he has.

9. Magister noster mÄ laudat et tÄ crÄs laudÄbit. 10. LÄ«berÄ« virÄ« perÄ«cula nostra superÄbant. 11. FÄ«liÄ« nostrÄ« puellÄs pulchrÄs amant. 12. AmÄ«cus noster in numerÅ stultÅrum nÅn remanÄbit. 13. CulpÄs multÄs habÄbÄmus et semper habÄbimus. 14. PerÄ«cula magna animÅs nostrÅs nÅn superant. 15. Pulchra patria nostra est lÄ«bera. 16. LÄ«berÄ« virÄ« estis; patriam pulchram habÄbitis. 17. MagistrÄ« lÄ«berÄ« officiÅ cÅ«ram dabant. 18. MalÅs igitur in patriÄ nostrÄ superÄbimus. 19. SÄ« Ä«ram tuam superÄbis, tÄ superÄbis. 20. Propter nostrÅs animÅs multÄ« sunt lÄ«berÄ«. 21. TÄ, Å patria lÄ«bera, semper amÄbÄmus et semper amÄbimus. 22. Sapientiam pecÅ«niÄ nÅn cÅnservÄbitis. 23. Habetne animus tuus satis sapientiae?

EXERCISES FOR Capvt VI

1. What connection can be traced between the spelling of complementary in the term complementary infinitive and the syntactical principle?

2. In the verb sum and its compounds what do the following personal endings mean: (1) -mus; (2) -nt; (3) -s; (4) -t; (5) -Å; (6) -m; (7) -tis?

3. If the verb possum is composed of pot + sum, where among the various forms is the t changed to s and where does it remain unchanged?

4. Translate the following random forms: (1) erat; (2) poterat; (3) erit; (4) poterit; (5) sumus; (6) possumus; (7) poterÄmus; (8) poterimus; (9) poteram; (10) eram; (11) erÅ; (12) poterÅ; (13) erunt; (14) poterunt; (15) poterant; (16) esse; (17) posse.

5. Translate into Latin: (1) we are; (2) we were; (3) we shall be; (4) we shall be able; (5) he is able; (6) he will be able; (7) he was able; (8) to be able; (9) they were able; (10) they are able; (11) they will be able; (12) they are; (13) to be; (14) I was able.

6. Patria vestra erat lÄ«bera. 7. Poteram esse tyrannus. 8. AmÄ«cus vester erit tyrannus. 9. Ubi tyrannus est, ibi virÄ« nÅn possunt esse lÄ«berÄ«. 10. In patriÄ nostrÄ heri nÅn poterat remanÄre. 11. TyrannÄ« multa vitia semper habÄbunt. 12. TyrannÅs superÄre nÅn poterÄmus. 13. Tyrannum nostrum superÄre dÄbÄmus. 14. Tyrannus bonÅs superÄre poterat; sed ibi remanÄre nÅn poterit. 15. Poteritis perÄ«cula tyrannÄ« vidÄre. 16. Vitia tyrannÅrum tolerÄre nÅn possumus. 17.Äª nsidiÄs tyrannÄ« nÅn tolerÄbÄs. 18. Åtium in patriÄ vestrÄ nÅn potest esse perpetuum. 19. DÄbÄs virÅs lÄ«berÅs dÄ tyrannÄ«s monÄre. 20. Magister vester librÅs pulchrÅs semper amÄbat. 21. LibrÄ« bonÄ« vÄrÄ«que poterant patriam cÅnservÄre. 22. LibrÄ«s bonÄ«s patriam vestram cÅnservÄre poteritis. 23. TyrannÄ« sapientiam bonÅrum librÅrum superÄre nÅn poterunt. 24. MalÄ« librÅs bonÅs nÅn possunt tolerÄre.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt VII

In the 3rd declension do the case endings of feminine nouns differ from those of masculine nouns as they do in the 1st and 2nd declensions already learned?

Do neuter nouns of the 3rd declension have any case endings which are identical with those of neuter nouns of the 2nd declension? If so, name them.

Name the gender(s) and case(s) indicated by each of the following endings in the 3rd declension: (1) -Äs; (2) -a; (3) -em.

Name the case(s) and number of the following 3rd-declensional endings: (1) -ibus; (2) -Ä«; (3) -e; (4) -em; (5) -um; (6) -is; (7) -Äs.

To indicate the gender of the following nouns give the proper nominative singular form of magnus, -a, -um with each: (1) tempus; (2) virtÅ«s; (3) labor; (4) cÄ«vitÄs; (5) mÅs; (6) pÄx; (7) rÄx; (8) corpus; (9) vÄritÄs; (10) amor.

Translate the following phrases in accordance with their case endings wherever possible; where they are nominative or accusative so state: (1) labÅre multÅ; (2) labÅrÄ« multÅ; (3) labÅris multÄ«; (4) labÅrÄs multÄ«; (5) pÄcis perpetuae; (6) pÄce perpetuÄ; (7) pÄcÄ« perpetuae; (8) cÄ«vitÄtum parvÄrum; (9) cÄ«vitÄtem parvam; (10) cÄ«vitÄtÄs parvÄs; (11) cÄ«vitÄtÄs parvae; (12) cÄ«vitÄte parvÄ; (13) tempora mala; (14) tempus malum; (15) temporÄ« malÅ; (16) temporum malÅrum; (17) temporis malÄ«; (18) mÅrÄ« tuÅ; (19) mÅre tuÅ; (20) mÅris tuÄ«; (21) mÅrÄs tuÄ«; (22) mÅrÄs tuÅs; (23) mÅrum tuÅrum.

Translate the following phrases into Latin in accordance with the case named or indicated by the English preposition: (1) to / for great virtue; (2) great virtue (subject); (3) great virtues (object of verb); (4) of great virtues; (5) with great courage; (6) our time (obj. of verb); (7) our times (subj.); (8) our times (obj.); (9) to / for our times; (10) to / for our time; (11) of our time; (12) of our times; (13) my love (obj.); (14) my loves (obj.); (15) to / for my love; (16) by my love; (17) of my love; (18) of my loves.

8. Meum tempus ÅtiÅ est parvum. 9. VirtÅ«s tua est magna. 10. PecÅ«nia est nihil sine mÅribus bonÄ«s. 11. VirtÅ«tÄs hominum multÅrum sunt magnae. 12. MÅrÄs hominis bonÄ« erunt bonÄ«. 13. HominÄ« litterÄs dabunt. 14. HominÄs multÅs in cÄ«vitÄte magnÄ vidÄre poterÄmus. 15. Magnum amÅrem pecÅ«niae in multÄ«s hominibus vÄ«dÄbÄmus. 16. PaucÄ« hominÄs virtÅ«tÄ« cÅ«ram dant. 17. CÄ«vitÄs nostra pÄcem hominibus multÄ«s dabit. 18. PÄx nÅn potest esse perpetua. 19. Sine bonÄ pÄce cÄ«vitÄtÄs temporum nostrÅrum nÅn valÄbunt. 20. Post multa bella tempora sunt mala. 21. In multÄ«s cÄ«vitÄtibus terrÄ«sque pÄx nÅn poterat valÄre. 22. Sine magnÅ labÅre homÅ nihil habÄbit. 23. VirgÅ pulchra amÄ«cÅs mÅrum bonÅrum amat. 24. HominÄs magnae virtÅ«tis tyrannÅs superÄre audÄbant. 25. Amor patriae in cÄ«vitÄte nostrÄ valÄbat.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt VIII

(1) In the 3d conjugation what tense is indicated by the stem vowel Ä? (2) Can you think of some mnemonic device to help you remember this important point?

(1) In the 3d conjugation what tense is indicated by the vowels i, Å, u? (2) What mnemonic device may help here?

State the person, number, and tense indicated by the following 3d conjugation endings: (1) -imus; (2) -Äs; (3) -unt; (4) -et; (5) -itis; (6) -Ämus; (7) -Å; (8) -ent; (9) -it; (10) -Ätis; (11) -is; (12) -am; (13) -Äbant.

What form of the verb does each of the following endings indicate: (1) -e; (2) -ere; (3) -ite?

Given the verbs mittÅ, mittere, send; agÅ, agere, do; scrÄ«bÅ, scrÄ«bere, write, translate each of the following forms according to its ending: (1) mittÄbant; (2) mittit; (3) mittunt; (4) mittam; (5) mitte; (6) mittimus; (7) mittÄbÄtis; (8) mittis; (9) mittite; (10) mittitis; (11) mittet; (12) mittÄmus; (13) agit; (14) agent; (15) agunt; (16) agÄtis; (17) agÄbÄmus; (18) agam; (19) agÄmus; (20) agis; (21) agitis; (22) scrÄ«bet; (23) scrÄ«bunt; (24) scrÄ«bam; (25) scrÄ«bÄbam; (26) scrÄ«bitis; (27) scrÄ«bÄmus; (28) scrÄ«bit; (29) scrÄ«bis; (30) scrÄ«bent; (31) scrÄ«be.

Given pÅnÅ, pÅnere, put, translate the following phrases into Latin: (1) they were putting; (2) we shall put; (3) put (imperative sg.); (4) he puts; (5) they will put; (6) I shall put; (7) you (sg.) were putting; (8) you (pl.) will put; (9) put (imperat. pl.); (10) we put; (11) you (pl.) are putting; (12) he will put.

7. Quid agunt? Quid agÄtis? 8. Hominem ad mÄ dÅ«cÄbant. 9. DÅ«c hominem ad mÄ, et hominÄ« grÄtiÄs agam. 10. Dum tyrannus cÅpiÄs dÅ«cit, possumus nihil agere. 11. LitterÄs ad virginem scrÄ«bit. 12. Librum magnum scrÄ«bÄbÄs. 13. LibrÅs bonÅs scrÄ«bÄs. 14. LibrÅs dÄ pÄce scrÄ«bÄmus. 15. CÅpiamne librÅrum bonÅrum habÄtis? 16. Magister multÅs puerÅs docet. 17. PuerÄ« magistrÅ grÄtiÄs nÅn agunt. 18. PaucÄ« cÄ«vitÄtÄ« nostrae grÄtiÄs agÄbant. 19. Tyrannus magnÄs cÅpiÄs ex cÄ«vitÄte nostrÄ dÅ«cet. 20. Magna cÅpia pecÅ«niae hominÄs ad sapientiam nÅn dÅ«cit. 21. LibrÄ«ne bonÄ« multÅs ad ratiÅnem dÅ«cent? 22. DÅ«cimusne saepe hominÄs ad ratiÅnem? 23. RatiÅ hominÄs ad bonam vÄ«tam dÅ«cere potest. 24. Agitisne bonam vÄ«tam? 25. AmÄ«cÅ bonÅ grÄtiÄs semper agite.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt IX

Explain the term demonstrative pronoun and adjective.

Translate each of the following according to case(s) and number, indicating also the gender(s) in each instance:

(1) illÄ«

(2) illa

(3) illÄ«us

(4) ille

(5) illÄ

(6) illud

(7) illÅrum

(8) illae

(9) illÅs

(10) illÄ«s

(11) illÅ

(12) illÄrum

(13) hÅc

(14) hoc

(15) haec

(16) hae

(17) hÄc

(18) hanc

(19) huius

(20) hunc

(21) hÅs

(22) huic

(23) hÅrum

(24) hÄs

(25) hÄ«s

(26) Å«nÄ«us

(27) Å«nÄ«

(28) Å«nÄ

(29) tÅtÄ«

(30) tÅtÄ«us

(31) tÅta

(32) tÅtum

(33) nÅ«llÄ«us

(34) nÅ«llÄ«

(35) nÅ«lla

(36) nÅ«llÅs

How can the presence of a noun be helpful in determining the form of a modifying demonstrative?

Translate the following phrases into Latin in the declensional forms indicated:

(1) this girl (nom.)

(2) these girls (nom.)

(3) these times (acc. pl.)

(4) to / for this time

(5) to / for this boy

(6) of this time

(7) of that time

(8) by this book

(9) by that book

(10) that girl (nom.)

(11) those times (nom.)

(12) those times (acc.)

(13) that time (nom.)

(14) to / for this state alone

(15) of this state alone

(16) to / for that boy alone

(17) to / for that girl alone

(18) of that girl alone

(19) of tyrants alone

(20) the whole state (acc.)

(21) of the whole country

(22) to / for the whole country

(23) of no reason

(24) no reason (acc.)

(25) no girls (nom.)

(26) to / for no book

(27) no books (acc.)

(28) to / for one state

(29) to / for one girl

(30) of one time

(31) of one war

(32) to / for the other book

(33) by another book

5. HÄ« tÅtam cÄ«vitÄtem dÅ«cent (dÅ«cunt, dÅ«cÄbant). 6. Ille haec in illÄ terrÄ vidÄbit (videt, vidÄbat). 7. In illÅ librÅ illa dÄ hÅc homine scrÄ«bÅ (scrÄ«bam, scrÄ«bÄbam). 8. Åªnus vir istÄs cÅpiÄs in hanc terram dÅ«cit (dÅ«cet). 9. Magister haec alterÄ« puerÅ dat. 10. Hunc librum dÄ aliÅ bellÅ scrÄ«bimus (scrÄ«bÄmus). 11. TÅta patria huic sÅlÄ« grÄtiÄs agit (aget, agÄbat). 12. TÅtam cÅ«ram illÄ« cÅnsiliÅ nunc dant. 13. AmÄ«cus huius hanc cÄ«vitÄtem illÅ cÅnsiliÅ cÅnservÄbit. 14. Alter amÄ«cus tÅtam vÄ«tam in aliÄ terrÄ aget. 15. Hic vir sÅlus mÄ dÄ vitiÄ«s huius tyrannÄ« monÄre poterat. 16. NÅ«llÄs cÅpiÄs in alterÄ terrÄ habÄbÄtis. 17. IllÄ« sÅlÄ« nÅ«lla perÄ«cula in hÅc cÅnsiliÅ vident. 18. NÅn sÅlum mÅrÄs sed etiam Ä«nsidiÄs illÄ«us laudÄre audÄs. 19. Propter Ä«nsidiÄs enim Å«nÄ«us hominis haec cÄ«vitÄs nÅn valÄbat.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt X

Name the conjugation indicated by each of the following endings: (1) -ere; (2) -Äre;(3) -Ä«re; (4) -Äre.

State the person, number, and tense indicated by the following endings from the 4th conjugation and the -iÅ 3d: (1) -iunt; (2) -iÄs; (3) -Ä«s; (4) -iÄbÄmus; (5) -Ä«mus; (6) -Ä«; (7) -iÄtis; (8) -Ä«te; (9) -Ä«tis; (10) -iÅ; (11) -it; (12) -e; (13) -iÄbÄs.

State three points at which -iÅ verbs of the 3d conjugation differ from verbs of the 4th conjugation.

Translate the following in accordance with their specific forms:

(1) veniet

(2) venit

(3) veniunt

(4) venient

(5) audÄ«s

(6) audiÄtis

(7) audÄ«tis

(8) venÄ«te

(9) veniÄs

(10) venÄ«

(11) venÄ«re

(12) facit

(13) faciet

(14) faciÄmus

(15) facimus

(16) faciunt

(17) facis

(18) faciam

(19) faciÄs

(20) facere

Given sentiÅ, sentÄ«re, feel, and iaciÅ, iacere, throw, translate the following phrases into Latin:

(1) I shall feel

(2) we shall feel

(3) he feels

(4) you (pl.) feel

(5) they will feel

(6) they do feel

(7) to feel

(8) feel (imperat. sg.)

(9) he will feel

(10) we feel

(11) he is throwing

(12) he will throw

(13) I shall throw

(14) we are throwing

(15) throw (imperat. sg.)

(16) you (pl.) are throwing

(17) we shall throw

(18) throw (imperat. pl.)

(19) to throw

(20) you (sg.) are throwing

6. Ex hÄc terrÄ fugiÄbÄmus. 7. Cum fÄ«liÄ tuÄ fuge. 8. In illum locum fugient. 9. Tempus fugit; hÅrae fugiunt; senectÅ«s venit. 10. VenÄ«te cum amÄ«cÄ«s vestrÄ«s. 11. In patriam vestram veniÄbant. 12. Å vir magne, in cÄ«vitÄtem nostram venÄ«. 13. FÄ«liam tuam in illÄ cÄ«vitÄte inveniÄs. 14. Parvam pecÅ«niam in viÄ«s invenÄ«re possunt. 15. Tyrannus viam in hanc cÄ«vitÄtem invenit. 16. IllÅs cum amÄ«cÄ«s ibi capiÄtis. 17. Ad tÄ cum magnÄ«s cÅpiÄ«s venÄ«mus. 18. Invenietne multam fÄmam glÅriamque ibi? 19. Iste bellum semper faciÄbat. 20. IstÄ« hominÄs pÄcem nÅn facient. 21. MultÄ« hominÄs illa faciunt sed haec nÅn faciunt. 22. Officium nostrum facimus et faciÄmus. 23. Magnam cÅpiam librÅrum faciam. 24. PuerÄ« cum illÅ virÅ bonÅ vÄ«vÄbant. 25. In librÄ«s virÅrum antÄ«quÅrum multam philosophiam et sapientiam inveniÄtis.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XI

Name the nominative singular and plural of the following: (1) 3d personal pronoun; (2) 1st per. pron.; (3) 2nd per. pron.

Translate the following pronouns in accordance with case(s) and number; where a form is nom. or acc. so specify.
(1) vÅbÄ«s; (2) nÅbÄ«s; (3) nÅs; (4) vÅs; (5) tuÄ«; (6) meÄ«; (7) mihi; (8) tibi; (9) tÄ; (10) mÄ.

Translate the following third-person pronouns in accordance with their gender(s), number(s), and case(s): (1) eÅs; (2) eÄs; (3) eÅrum; (4) eÄrum; (5) eius; (6) eÄ; (7) ea;(8) eÅ; (9) eÄ«; (10) eÄ«s; (11) eae; (12) id.

Give the Latin for the following:

(1) his

(2) her (possess.)

(3) their (m.)

(4) their (f.)

(5) them (f.)

(6) them (m.)

(7) them (n.)

(8) its

(9) to him

(10) to her

(11) by / with / from her

(12) by / withfrom him

(13) to / for you (pl.)

(14) to / for you (sg.)

(15) they (m.)

(16) they (n.)

(17) they (f.)

(18) to / for it

(19) it (n. acc.)

(20) you (emphatic nom. pl.)

(21) you (emphatic nom. sg.)

(22) you (acc. pl.)

(23) us

(24) we

(25) to / for us

(26) I (emphatic form)

(27) to / for me

5. HÄ« tibi id dabunt. 6. Ego vÅbÄ«s id dabam. 7. VÅs eÄ«s id dÅnum dabitis. 8. EÄ« idem dabÅ. 9. NÅs eÄ« ea dabimus. 10. Ille mihi id dabit. 11. VÅbÄ«s librÅs eius dabimus. 12. NÅbÄ«s librÅs eÅrum dabis. 13. PecÅ«niam eÅrum tibi dabimus. 14. PecÅ«niam eius mihi dabunt. 15. EÅs librÅs ad eam mittÄmus. 16. Librum eius ad tÄ mittam. 17. Ille autem pecÅ«niam eÅrum ad nÅs mittÄbat. 18. EÄs cum eÄ mittimus. 19. Eum cum eÄ«s mittÅ. 20. EÅs cum amÄ«cÄ«s eius mittÄmus. 21. TÅ« mÄ cum amÄ«cÅ eÅrum mittÄs. 22. VÅs mÄcum ad amÄ«cum eius mittÄbant. 23. NÅs tÄcum in terram eÅrum mittit. 24. EÄs nÅbÄ«scum ad amÄ«cÅs eÅrum mittent. 25. Eum vÅbÄ«scum ad amÄ«cÅs eÅrum mittam. 26. TÄ cum eÅ ad mÄ mittent.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XII

Name the principal parts of a Latin verb in their regular sequence.

Give the principal parts of mittÅ, labeling and translating each one.

What is the major difference between the perfect and imperfect tenses?

You must be able to tell from what verb any specific verb form comes. Practice on the following list by naming the first principal part of each of the verbs in the list.

(1) mÄ«sÄrunt

(2) laudÄveram

(3) vincÄbÄmus

(4) dictum

(5) fÄcistÄ«

(6) Äctum

(7) est

(8) dedimus

(9) futÅ«rum

(10) Ägimus

(11) remÄnserant

(12) scrÄ«psimus

(13) fuit

(14) fÄcit

(15) fugere

(16) dÄ«xÄrunt

(17) erat

(18) vÄ«xÄ«

(19) faciÄbÄs

(20) vÄ«sum

Translate the following endings of the perfect system according to person, number, and tense in each instance, using these conventions: -Ä« = I (perfect)â¦; -eram= I hadâ¦; -erÅ = I shall haveâ¦; (1) -istis; (2) -it; (3) -Ärunt; (4) -istÄ«; (5) -imus; (6) -erat; (7) -erimus; (8) -erÄmus; (9) -erÄs; (10) -erint; (11) -erant; (12) -erit; (13) -erÄtis.

Translate the following in accordance with the person, number, and tense of each:

(1) vidÄbant

(2) vÄ«derant

(3) vÄ«distÄ«

(4) fÄcit

(5) faciÄbat

(6) fÄcerÄmus

(7) fÄcimus

(8) faciÄmus

(9) fÄcÄrunt

(10) vÄ«xistÄ«

(11) vÄ«xÄrunt

(12) vincet

(13) vÄ«cit

(14) vÄ«cimus

(15) vincimus

(16) dedistÄ«

(17) dederÄtis

(18) dedimus

(19) fugit

(20) fÅ«git

(21) fugiunt

(22) fÅ«gÄrunt

(23) servÄvit

(24) servÄvÄrunt

(25) servÄvistis

(26) servÄverat

(27) servÄverit

(28) remÄnsimus

(29) remÄnserÄmus

(30) vÄnit

(31) venit

(32) veniÄbÄtis

(33) vÄnistis

(34) vÄnÄrunt

(35) veniunt

(36) vÄnerant

7. IllÄ« fÅ«gerant (fugient; fugiunt; fugiÄbant; fÅ«gÄrunt). 8. HÄ« remÄnsÄrunt (remanent; remanÄbunt; remanÄbant; remÄnserant). 9. RÄx Asiam vÄ«cerat (vincit; vÄ«cit; vincet). 10. RÄgÄs Asiam vÄ«cÄrunt (vincent; vincunt; vÄ«cerant). 11. RÄgÄs Asiam habuÄrunt (habent; habÄbunt; habuerant). 12. Caesar in eandem terram vÄnerat (vÄnit; venit; veniet). 13. Caesar eadem dÄ«xit (dÄ«cit; dÄ«xerat; dÄ«cet). 14. VÅs nÅbÄ«s pÄcem dedistis (dabitis; dabÄtis; dederÄtis). 15. TÅ« litterÄs ad eam mÄ«sistÄ« (mittÄs; mittis; mÄ«serÄs). 16. EÅs in eÄdem viÄ vÄ«dimus (vidÄmus; vÄ«derÄmus). 17. DiÅ« vÄ«xerat (vÄ«xit; vÄ«vet). 18. Id bene fÄcerÄs (faciÄs; fÄcistÄ«; facis). 19. CÄ«vitÄtem eÅrum (eius) servÄvÄ« (servÄbÅ; servÄbam; servÄveram). 20. Eum in eÅdem locÅ invÄnÄrunt (invÄnerant; invenient). 21. Deus hominibus lÄ«bertÄtem dederat (dedit; dat; dabit). 22. Mihi grÄtiÄs ÄgÄrunt (agent; agÄbant; Ägerant; agunt). 23. VÅs fuistis (erÄtis; estis; eritis; fuerÄtis) virÄ« lÄ«berÄ«.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XIII

State the essential nature of reflexive pronouns, showing how, as a logical consequence, they differ from other pronouns.

Explain why the declension of reflexive pronouns begins with the genitive rather than with the nominative.

In what reflexive pronouns is the spelling the same as that of the corresponding simple pronoun?

Translate the following reflexive forms in accordance with their case(s) and number(s): (1) mihi; (2) tÄ; (3) nÅbÄ«s; (4) sibi; (5) vÅs; (6) sÄ; (7) vÅbÄ«s.

Explain why the singular of suus can mean their own as well as his own, and the plural can mean his own as well as their own.

Explain why eÅrum always means their and eius always means his (her, its) regardless of whether the nouns on which they depend are singular or plural.

Although sÄ and ipse can both be translated into English by himself, explain the basic difference between the Latin words.

8. Caesar eÅs servÄvit. 9. Caesar eum servÄbat. 10. Caesar sÄ servÄvit. 11. RÅmÄnÄ« sÄ servÄvÄrunt. 12. RÅmÄnÄ« eÅs servÄvÄrunt. 13. RÅmÄnÄ« eum servÄvÄrunt. 14. Caesar amÄ«cum suum servÄvit. 15. Caesar amÄ«cÅs suÅs servÄvit. 16. Caesar amÄ«cum eius servÄvit. 17. Caesar amÄ«cÅs eius servÄvit. 18. Caesar amÄ«cum eÅrum servÄvit. 19. Caesar amÄ«cÅs eÅrum servÄvit. 20. RÅmÄnÄ« amÄ«cum suum servÄvÄrunt. 21. RÅmÄnÄ« amÄ«cÅs suÅs servÄvÄrunt. 22. RÅmÄnÄ« amÄ«cum eÅrum servÄvÄrunt. 23. RÅmÄnÄ« amÄ«cÅs eÅrum servÄvÄrunt. 24. RÅmÄnÄ« amÄ«cum eius servÄvÄrunt. 25. RÅmÄnÄ« amÄ«cÅs eius servÄvÄrunt. 26. Caesar ipse eum servÄvit. 27. Caesar ipse sÄ servÄvit. 28. Caesarem ipsum servÄvÄrunt. 29. AmÄ«cum Caesaris ipsÄ«us servÄbant. 30. AmÄ«cum RÅmÄnÅrum ipsÅrum servÄvÄrunt. 31. AmÄ«cus Caesaris ipsÄ«us sÄ servÄvit. 32. AmÄ«cÄ« Caesaris ipsÄ«us sÄ servÄvÄrunt. 33. AmÄ«cus Caesaris ipsÄ«us eum servÄvit. 34. IpsÄ« amÄ«cÄ« Caesaris eum servÄvÄrunt. 35. NÅs nÅn servÄvÄrunt. 36. NÅs servÄvimus. 37. RÅmÄnÅs ipsÅs servÄvimus. 38. RÅmÄnÄ« ipsÄ« tÄ nÅn servÄvÄrunt. 39. TÅ« tÄ servÄvistÄ«. 40. TÅ« RÅmÄnÅs ipsÅs servÄvistÄ«. 41. Mihi nihil dabat. 42. Mihi nihil dedÄ«. 43. Sibi nihil dedit. 44. Sibi nihil dedÄrunt. 45. EÄ«s nihil dedÄrunt. 46. EÄ« nihil dedÄrunt. 47. MÄ vÄ«cÄ«. 48. MÄ vÄ«cÄrunt. 49.Äª ram eÅrum vÄ«cÄrunt. 50.Äª ram suam vÄ«cÄrunt. 51.Äª ram suam vÄ«cit. 52. FÄ«liÅs suÅs vÄ«cit. 53. FÄ«liÅs suÅs vÄ«cÄrunt.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XIV

In what specific case ending of all i -stem nouns does the characteristic i appear?

What are the other i -stem peculiarities of neuters in -e, -al, and -ar?

Translate each of the following according to its case(s) and number; when a form is nom. or acc. label it as such.

(1) arte

(2) artium

(3) artÄs

(4) marÄ«

(5) maribus

(6) mare

(7) maria

(8) corpora

(9) corporum

(10) partis

(11) partibus

(12) partium

(13) urbe

(14) urbÄ«

(15) urbium

(16) urbÄs

(17) rÄgum

(18) rÄgÄ«

(19) nÅmina

(20) animÄlia

(21) animÄlÄ«

(22) animÄlis

(23) animÄlium

(24) vÄ«rium

(25) virÅs

(26) virÄ«

(27) vÄ«rÄs

(28) virÄ«s

(29) vÄ«s

(30) vim

(31) vÄ«ribus

(32) vÄ«

Of the forms in #3 above, list those which are i- stem forms.

Translate the following phrases into Latin:

(1) by / with / from great force

(2) great man (acc.)

(3) of great strength

(4) to / for great force

(5) of many citizens

(6) by / with / from a good citizen

(7) to / for many citizens

(8) many seas (nom.)

(9) by / with / from a great sea

(10) a great sea (acc.)

(11) great force (acc.)

(12) of many men (vir)

(13) by / with / from great strength

(14) great strength (acc.)

What kind of idea is expressed by each of the following ablatives? (1) cum rÄge; (2) oculÄ«s meÄ«s; (3) cum cÅ«rÄ; (4) labÅre meÅ.

Translate each of the following verb forms and name the verb from which each comes: (1) cucurrÄrunt; (2) currÄbÄmus; (3) cucurristÄ«; (4) trÄxerÄmus; (5) trahet; (6) trahunt; (7) gerÄbat; (8) gerit; (9) gerunt; (10) gerÄmus; (11) tenent; (12) tenÄbunt; (13) tenuÄrunt; (14) tenuimus.

8. Multa bella cum RÅmÄnÄ«s gessit. 9. CÄ«vitÄtem magnÄ cum sapientiÄ gerÄbant. 10. Ipse cÄ«vitÄtem vÄ« cÅpiÄrum tenuit. 11. Illa animÄlia multÅs hominÄs in mare trÄxÄrunt. 12. Hoc magnÄ cum arte dÄ«xistÄ«. 13. Cum cÅ«rÄ trÄns urbem cucurrimus. 14. MagnÄ cum parte cÄ«vium ad nÅs veniÄbat. 15. IÅ«ra cÄ«vium vÄ« vincet. 16. Eum ad mortem trÄns terram eius trÄxistis. 17. NÅs cum cÄ«vibus multÄrum urbium iungÄmus. 18. RÄgÄ« ipsÄ« hÄs litterÄs cum virtÅ«te scrÄ«psit. 19. VÄ«s illÅrum marium erat magna. 20. Artem GraecÅrum oculÄ«s meÄ«s vÄ«dÄ«. 21. SententiÄs multÄs pulchrÄsque ex virÄ«s antÄ«quÄ«s trÄximus.

22. Name the type of ablative found in each of the following sentences above: 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 20.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XV

State the difference between cardinal and ordinal numerals.

What cardinals are declined?

What ordinals are declined?

State the form or possible forms of each of the following: (1) duÅbus; (2) mÄ«lle; (3) tria; (4) duo; (5) quÄ«nque; (6) mÄ«lia; (7) decem; (8) duÄbus; (9) centum; (10) trium; (11) vÄ«gintÄ«; (12) octÅ.

Why is the genitive of the whole so called?

What construction did the Romans use after cardinal numerals?

Translate each of the following phrases.

(1) Å«nus cÄ«vis

(2) decem cÄ«vÄs

(3) pars cÄ«vium

(4) trÄs cÄ«vÄs

(5) trÄs ex sex cÄ«vibus

(6) quÄ«nque ex cÄ«vibus

(7) quÄ«nque cÄ«vÄs

(8) centum cÄ«vÄs

(9) centum ex cÄ«vibus

(10) mÄ«lle cÄ«vÄs

(11) tria mÄ«lia cÄ«vium

(12) quid novÄ«

(13) multum laudis

(14) satis pecÅ«niae

(15) nihil aquae

When the Romans put a word of time in the ablative case without a preposition, what kind of ideas did they express?

Study the ablatives in the following sentences. Then translate the sentences and name the type of ablative found in each one.

(1) Cum amÄ«cÄ«s veniÄbat.

(2) ÅªnÄ hÅrÄ veniet.

(3) EÅdem tempore vÄnit.

(4) PaucÄ«s hÅrÄ«s librum scrÄ«psit.

(5) IllÅ tempore librum scrÄ«psit.

(6) Cum cÅ«rÄ librum scrÄ«bÄbat.

10. IllÅ tempore sÅlÅ illa tria perÄ«cula timuit; sed mortem semper timÄbat. 11. IstÄ« duo rÄgÄs pecÅ«niam inter mÄ«lia cÄ«vium iaciÄbant. 12. Iste Å«nus tyrannus sÄ semper laudÄbat. 13. CÄ«vÄs illÄrum quÄ«nque urbium lÄ«bertÄtem exspectÄbant. 14. Urbem duÄbus hÅrÄ«s sapientiÄ suÄ cÅnservÄvÄrunt. 15. In urbem cum tribus ex amÄ«cÄ«s meÄ«s veniÄbam. 16. Bella magna cum virtÅ«te gerÄbÄtis. 17. Itaque centum RÅmÄnÄ« mÄ«lle GraecÅs vÄ«cÄrunt. 18. PatrÄs fÄ«liÅs suÅs saepe timÄbantâet nunc multum timÅris habent. 19. VÄ«distÄ«ne duÅs patrÄs nostrÅs eÅ tempore? 20. Ubi satis lÄ«bertÄtis invÄnistis? 21. Tribus hÅrÄ«s vÄnÄrunt, et idem nÅbÄ«s dÄ«cÄbat. 22. Parvum argÅ«mentÄ« intellegÄbam. 23. NÅ«llam partem vÄ«tÄrum nostrÄrum mÅ«tÄvimus. 24. CÄ«vitÄs nostra lÄ«bertÄtem et iÅ«ra cÄ«vium cÅnservÄbat. 25. RÅmÄnÄ« mÅrÄs temporum antÄ«quÅrum laudÄbant. 26. Duo patrÄs quattuor ex fÄ«liÄ«s mÄ«sÄrunt. 27. Decem virÄ« satis sapientiae et multum virtÅ«tis habuÄrunt. 28. Quid novÄ«, mÄ« amÄ«ce?

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XVI

If one has carefully learned the declension of cÄ«vis and mare one can easily decline the 3d-declension adjective fortis, forte with the exception of one form. What is that form?

(1) Adjectives of the 3d declension may be classified as adjectives of 3 endings, 2 endings, or 1 ending. Which type is by far the most common? (2) In what one case do adjectives of 1 and 3 endings differ from those of 2 endings?

Cite and label three endings in which adjectives of the 3d declension show themselves to be i -stems.

Of the endings of the 3d-declension adjectives none is likely to cause recognition difficulty except perhaps the ablative singular. What is the normal ending of the ablative singular in all genders?

Can 3d-declension adjectives be used with nouns of the 1st or the 2nd declension?

Translate the following phrases in accordance with their case(s) and number. When they are nom. or acc., so indicate.

(1) dulcÄ« puellae

(2) dulcÄ« puellÄ

(3) dulcÄ« mÄtre

(4) dulcÄ« mÄtrÄ«

(5) beÄtae mÄtrÄ«

(6) beÄtÄ mÄtre

(7) omnia bella

(8) omnia nÅmina

(9) omnia maria

(10) omnÄ« parte

(11) omnium partium

(12) omnium rÄgum

(13) omnium bellÅrum

(14) beÄtÅ homine

(15) beÄtÅ hominÄ«

(16) omnÄ« marÄ«

(17) omnÄ« bonae artÄ«

(18) omnÄ« bonÄ arte

(19) omnis bonae artis

(20) vÄ« celerÄ«

7. AetÄs longa saepe est difficilis. 8. AetÄs difficilis potest esse beÄta. 9. Quam brevis erat dulcis vÄ«ta eius! 10. Memoria dulcis aetÄtis mÄ«lia hominum adiuvat. 11. Librum brevem centum hÅrÄ«s scrÄ«psistÄ«. 12. In omnÄ« marÄ« haec duo animÄlia potentia inveniÄbÄmus. 13. In omnÄ« terrÄ multa mÄ«lia virÅrum fortium vidÄbitis. 14. Celer rÅ«mor (celeris fÄma) per omnem terram cucurrit. 15. Illud bellum breve erat difficile. 16. Omnia perÄ«cula sex hÅrÄ«s superÄvimus. 17. Tyrannus potÄns patriam eÅrum vÄ« celerÄ« vincet. 18. BrevÄ« tempore omnia iÅ«ra cÄ«vium mÅ«tÄbit. 19. Difficilem artem lÄ«bertÄtis dulcis nÅn intellÄxÄrunt, nam parvum sapientiae habuÄrunt. 20. HominÄs officia difficilia in omnibus terrÄ«s timent.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XVII

Define the terms âantecedentâ and ârelative pronoun.â

(1) What determines the case of the Latin relative pronoun? (2) What determines the gender and the number of the relative pronoun?

State in what ways a relative agrees with its antecedent.

Name (1) the English relative pronoun which refers to persons and (2) the one which refers to anything else. (3) Since in Latin the one relative pronoun serves both purposes, what two English meanings does it have?

Translate the following in accordance with their case(s) and number(s). When a form is nom. or acc., so indicate if the translation does not make the point clear.

(1) cui

(2) quÅs

(3) quae

(4) cuius

(5) quibus

(6) quod

(7) quÄ

(8) quÄ«

(9) quem

(10) quÄs

(11) quÅrum

(12) quam

6. CÄ«vem laudÄvÄrunt quem mÄ«serÄtis. 7. Decem cÄ«vÄs laudÄvÄrunt quÅs mÄ«serÄtis. 8. CÄ«vem laudÄvÄrunt quÄ« patriam servÄverat. 9. Centum cÄ«vÄs laudÄvÄrunt quÄ« patriam servÄverant. 10. CÄ«vem laudÄvÄrunt cuius fÄ«lius patriam servÄverat. 11. CÄ«vÄs laudÄvÄrunt quÅrum septem fÄ«liÄ« patriam servÄverant. 12. CÄ«vem laudÄvÄrunt cui patriam commÄ«serant. 13. MultÅs ex cÄ«vibus laudÄvÄrunt quibus patriam commÄ«serant. 14. CÄ«vem laudÄvÄrunt quÅcum vÄnerant. 15. CÄ«vÄs laudÄvÄrunt quibuscum vÄnerant. 16. Cum cÄ«ve vÄnit cui vÄ«tam suam commÄ«serat. 17. TyrannÄ« iÅ«ra cÄ«vium dÄlent quÅs capiunt. 18. Tyrannus urbem dÄlÄvit ex quÄ mÄ«lia cÄ«vium fÅ«gerant. 19. Tyrannus urbem dÄlÄvit in quam illÄ« novem cÄ«vÄs fÅ«gerant. 20. Tyrannus urbÄs dÄlÄvit ex quibus cÄ«vÄs fÅ«gerant. 21. Tyrannus urbÄs dÄlÄvit in quÄs cÄ«vÄs fÅ«gerant. 22. PerÄ«culum superÄvit quod timuimus. 23. PerÄ«cula superÄvit quae timuimus. 24. PuellÄ«s quÄs laudÄbat librÅs dedit. 25. Vir cuius fÄ«liam amÄs in urbem veniÄbat. 26. VirÅ cuius fÄ«liam amÄs vÄ«tam suam commÄ«sit. 27. MÄtrem adiuvÄbat, quae multum virtÅ«tis habuit. 28. MÄtribus quae multÅs fÄ«liÅs habuÄrunt rÄx pecÅ«niam dabat.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XVIII

Define the term âpassive voiceâ by explaining the etymology of âpassive.â

What is the difference between the ablative of means and the ablative of agent in both meaning and construction?

(1) What one letter occurs in 5 of the 6 passive personal endings and can thus be regarded as the peculiar sign of the passive? (2) Does this characteristically passive letter occur in any of the corresponding active personal endings?

Give the English pronoun by which each of the following passive endings can be translated: (1) -mur; (2) -tur; (3) -r; (4) -ntur; (5) -ris; (6) -minÄ«.

(1) Name the tense signs of the imperfect and the future in the passive voice of the 1st and 2nd conjugations. (2) Are these the same as the tense signs in the active voice?

If -bar can be translated âI was beingâ¦â and -bor, âI shall beâ¦,â translate each of the following: (1) -bimur; (2) -bÄminÄ«; (3) -bÄtur; (4) -beris; (5) -buntur; (6) -bÄmur; (7) -bitur; (8) -bÄris; (9) -biminÄ«; (10) -bantur.

7. MÄ terrent; ab eÄ«s terreor; vÄ« eÅrum terreor. 8. Tyrannus hanc urbem dÄlÄbat. 9. Haec urbs Ä tyrannÅ dÄlÄbÄtur; Ä«nsidiÄ«s dÄlÄbitur. 10. Ab amÄ«cÄ«s movÄbÄtur; cÅnsiliÄ«s eÅrum movÄbÄtur. 11. VÄ«ribus hominum nÅn dÄlÄmur, sed possumus Ä«nsidiÄ«s dÄlÄrÄ«. 12. NÅn bellÅ dÄlÄbiminÄ«, sed amÅre ÅtiÄ« et cÅnsiliÄ«s hominum malÅrum. 13. TÅ« ipse nÅn mÅ«tÄris, sed nÅmen tuum mÅ«tÄtur. 14. MÄ«lia hominum amÅre pecÅ«niae tenentur. 15. AliÄ« ab tyrannÄ«s tenÄbantur. 16. PaucÄ« amÅre vÄritÄtis amÄ«citiaeque tenÄbuntur. 17. Puer ab amÄ«cÄ«s cÅnservÄbitur. 18. LibrÄ« huius generis puerÄ«s Ä magistrÅ dabantur. 19. LÄ«bertÄs populÅ ab rÄge tertiÅ brevÄ« tempore dabitur. 20. Patria nostra Ä cÄ«vibus fortibus etiam nunc servÄrÄ« potest. 21. FortÅ«nÄ aliÅrum monÄrÄ« dÄbÄmus. 22. CÅnsiliÄ«s istÄ«us tyrannÄ« quÄ« trÄns mare vÄ«vit terrÄmur; sed lÄ«bertÄtem amÄmus et bellum magnÄ cum virtÅ«te gerÄmus. 23. Ab amÄ«cÄ«s potentibus adiuvÄbimur. 24. OmnÄs virÅs nostrÅs laudÄmus, quÄ« virtÅ«te et vÄritÄte moventur, nÅn amÅre suÄ«.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XIX

Name the two basic verbal elements (1) of which the perfect passive indicative of all verbs is composed, and (2) of which the pluperfect passive indicative is composed.

In translation how does (1) vir missus est differ from vir mittitur, and (2) vir missus erat, from vir mittÄbÄtur?

What is the use of the interrogative pronoun?

In what forms does the interrogative pronoun differ conspicuously in spelling from the relative?

By what two syntactical criteria can the interrogative pronoun be distinguished from the relative even when both have the same spelling?

Translate the following in accordance with their forms:

(1) movÄtur

(2) mÅtus est

(3) mÅtum erat

(4) movÄbÄtur

(5) dÄlÄtÄ« erant

(6) dÄlÄbantur

(7) dÄlÄtÄ« sunt

(8) tenÄmur

(9) tentÄ« sumus

(10) tentÄ« erÄmus

(11) tenÄbÄmur

(12) mÅ«tÄtus erat

(13) mÅ«tÄtus est

(14) mÅ«tÄtur

(15) mÅ«tÄbÄtur

Translate the following forms of the interrogative pronoun: (1) cuius?; (2) quem?; (3) quÄ«?; (4) quid?; (5) quÅrum?; (6) cui?; (7) quÄs?; (8) quis?; (9) quae?

8. Ä quÅ liber parÄtus est (parÄtus erat, parÄbÄtur)? 9. Magister Ä quÅ liber parÄtus est labÅre superÄtur. 10. Cui liber datus est (dabÄtur, datus erat)? 11. QuÄ« puer servÄtus est? 12. Puerum quÄ« servÄtus est ego ipse vÄ«dÄ«. 13. Cuius duo fÄ«liÄ« servÄtÄ« sunt? 14. Senem cuius fÄ«liÄ« servÄtÄ« sunt numquam vÄ«dÄ«. 15. Quis missus est? 16. Ä cÄ«ve quÄ« missus erat pÄx et lÄ«bertÄs laudÄtae sunt. 17. QuÄ« missÄ« sunt? 18. Ä decem cÄ«vibus quÄ« missÄ« erant amÄ«citia laudÄta est. 19. QuÅs in urbe vÄ«distÄ«? 20. Ubi sunt trÄs novÄ« amÄ«cÄ« quÅs in urbe vÄ«distÄ«? 21. Quae Ä tÄ ibi inventa sunt? 22. Ubi sunt tria corpora quae Ä tÄ ibi inventa sunt? 23. Ä quibus hoc dictum est? 24. Quibus hoc dictum est? 25. OctÅ hominÄs miserÄ« quibus haec dicta sunt ex urbe fÅ«gÄrunt. 26. QuÅrum fÄ«liÄ« ab eÅ laudÄtÄ« sunt? 27. PatrÄs quÅrum fÄ«liÄ« laudÄtÄ« sunt eÄ« grÄtiÄs agent. 28. Quid vÅs terret? 29. Quod perÄ«culum vÅs terret? 30. At perÄ«culum quod vÅs terret Ä cÄ«vibus fortibus victum est.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XX

Indicate the force of the following masculine and feminine endings of the 4th declension: (1) -um; (2) -uum; (3) -Å«; (4) -us; (5) -Å«s; (6) -uÄ«.

Translate the following nouns in accordance with their case forms:

(1) manuÄ«

(2) manus

(3) manuum

(4) manÅ«

(5) manÅ«s

(6) frÅ«ctibus

(7) frÅ«ctum

(8) frÅ«ctÅ«s

(9) frÅ«ctuum

(10) frÅ«ctÅ«

(11) senÄtÅ«s (sg.)

(12) senÄtuÄ«

(13) senÄtus

(14) senÄtÅ«

(1) What gender predominates in the 4th declension?
(2) Name the noun which is the most common exception to this rule.

(1) Explain the difference of idea between the ablative of place from which and the ablative of separation.
(2) Which of the two is regular with verbs of freeing, lacking, and depriving?
(3) Which of the two is regular with verbs of motion?

State any differences of construction between them.

6. Quis ad nÅs eÅ tempore vÄnit? 7. Senex magnae fÄmae ex patriÄ suÄ ad senÄtum nostrum fÅ«git. 8. Quid novÄ« ab eÅ dictum est? 9. Hoc ab illÅ virÅ dictum est: âLÄ«bertÄte carÄmus.â 10. NÅs servitÅ«te et gravÄ« metÅ« lÄ«berÄte. 11. CÅpiae nostrae bellum longum contrÄ ÄcrÄs manÅ«s tyrannÄ« gessÄrunt. 12. Illae manÅ«s ÄcrÄs quÄs tyrannus contrÄ nÅs illÄ ex terrÄ mÄ«sit Ä nÅbÄ«s victae sunt. 13. Post haec cÄ«vÄs quÄ« tyrannum timuÄrunt ex patriÄ suÄ in cÄ«vitÄtem nostram ductÄ« sunt. 14. EÅs sceleribus istÄ«us tyrannÄ« lÄ«berÄvimus. 15. Nunc omnÄ« metÅ« carent. 16. FÄ«liÄ« eÅrum bonÅs librÅs in lÅ«dÄ«s nostrÄ«s cum studiÅ legunt. 17. Itaque mÄ«lle versÅ«s manibus suÄ«s scrÄ«psÄrunt. 18. HÄ« centum versÅ«s nÅbÄ«s grÄtiÄs magnÄs agunt. 19. In hÄ«s versibus senÄtus populusque RÅmÄnus laudantur. 20. Nam illÄ« miserÄ« nunc frÅ«ctÅ«s pÄcis et multum lÄ«bertÄtis sine metÅ« habent. 21. Quoniam aliÅs adiÅ«vimus, etiam nÅs ipsÄ« frÅ«ctum magnum habÄmus. 22. VirÄ« bonÄ« cÅpiÄ hÅrum frÅ«ctuum numquam carÄbunt. 23. AetÄte nostrÄ multÄ« hominÄs vÄ«tam in metÅ« et servitÅ«te agunt. 24. DÄbÄmus illÅs miserÅs metÅ« lÄ«berÄre. 25. Nam quis potest beÄtus esse sÄ« aliÄ« hominÄs frÅ«ctibus pÄcis lÄ«bertÄtisque carent?

Â 

26 What idea is expressed by each of the following ablatives, respectively? tempore (6), patriÄ (7), eÅ (8), virÅ (9), metÅ« (10), nÅbÄ«s (12), patriÄ (13), sceleribus (14), metÅ« (15), studiÅ (16), manibus (17), cÅpiÄ (22), aetÄte (23), metÅ« (24).

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXI

Give the passive personal endings of the present and future tenses.

Repeat aloud the present and future passive of the model verbs agÅ, audiÅ, and capiÅ.

How can the present passive infinitive be distinguished from the active in the 1st, 2nd, and 4th conjugations? Illustrate by changing the following active infinitives into passive ones: (1) sentÄ«re; (2) movÄre; (3) servÄre; (4) scÄ«re; (5) tenÄre. Translate each.

What is exceptional about the form of the present passive infinitive of the 3d conjugation? Illustrate by changing the following active infinitives into passive ones: (1) mittere; (2) iacere; (3) tangere; (4) trahere. Translate each.

Translate each of the following in accordance with its form:

(1) mittar

(2) mitteris

(3) mittÄris

(4) mittÄ«

(5) mittuntur

(6) mittor

(7) rapitur

(8) rapiÄtur

(9) rapÄ«

(10) rapimur

(11) rapientur

(12) rapiuntur

(13) raperis

(14) rapiÄris

(15) tanguntur

(16) tangentur

(17) tangÄ«

(18) tangeris

(19) tangÄminÄ«

(20) sciÄris

(21) scÄ«ris

(22) sciÄtur

(23) scÄ«tur

(24) scÄ«rÄ«

6. Quis mittitur (mittÄtur, mittÄbÄtur, missus est)? 7. Ä quÅ hae litterae mittentur (missae sunt, mittuntur)? 8. Cuius manÅ« illae litterae scrÄ«ptae sunt (scrÄ«bentur)? 9. Quid dictum est (dÄ«cÄbÄtur, dÄ«cÄtur, dÄ«citur)? 10. âQuis rapiÄtur?â âTÅ« rapiÄris.â 11. âQuÄ« rapientur?â âVÅs rapiÄminÄ«.â 12. DiÅ« neglegÄris / neglegÄminÄ« (neglÄctus es / neglÄctÄ« estis). 13. Post multÄs hÅrÄs lÄ«berÄtÄ« sumus (lÄ«berÄbimur). 14. CÄ«vitÄtis causÄ eum rapÄ« iussÄrunt. 15. LÄ«bertÄtis causÄ cÄ«vitÄs nostra ab alterÅ virÅ gerÄ« dÄbet. 16. Animus eius pecÅ«niÄ tangÄ« nÅn poterat. 17. Amor patriae in omnÄ« animÅ sentiÄbÄtur (sentiÄtur, sentÄ«tur, sÄnsus est). 18. AmÅre patriae cum aliÄ«s cÄ«vibus iungimur (iungÄbÄmur, iungÄmur). 19. AmÄ«citia nÅn semper intellegitur, sed sentÄ«tur. 20. Sapientia et vÄritÄs in illÄ«s duÅbus hominibus nÅn invenientur (inveniuntur, inventae sunt). 21. Sapientia etiam multÄ pecÅ«niÄ nÅn parÄtur (parÄbitur, parÄta est). 22. VÄritÄs saepe nÅn scÄ«tur (sciÄtur, scÄ«ta est), quod studium eius est difficile. 23. NÅn sine magnÅ labÅre vÄritÄs inveniÄtur (inventa est, potest invenÄ«rÄ«). 24. AliÄ« studiÅ pecÅ«niae atque laudis trahuntur; nÅs dÄbÄmus amÅre vÄritÄtis sapientiaeque trahÄ«.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXII

As u is characteristic of the 4th declension, what vowel is characteristic of the 5th declension?

List the case endings of the 5th declension which are enough like the corresponding endings of the 3rd declension that they can be immediately recognized without difficulty.

(1) What is the gender of most nouns of the 5th declension?
(2) Name the chief exception.

Translate each of the following in accordance with its case(s) and number(s). Where a form is nom. or acc., so state.

(1) speÄ«

(2) spÄrum

(3) spem

(4) spÄbus

(5) spÄs

(6) fidÄ

(7) fidem

(8) fideÄ«

(9) diÄrum

(10) diÄs

(11) diÄbus

(12) rem

(13) rÄrum

(14) rÄ

(15) rÄbus

(16) reÄ«

(17) ignium

(18) ignem

(19) ignibus

(20) ignÄs

Name the type of adverbial idea in each of the following, and then translate the sentence.

(1) In urbe remÄnsit.

(2) ÅªnÄ hÅrÄ veniet.

(3) EÅ tempore vÄnit.

(4) Cum eÄ«s vÄnit.

(5) Ex urbe vÄnit.

(6) Igne carent.

(7) Illud igne factum est.

(8) Id ab eÄ«s factum est.

(9) Id cum fidÄ factum est.

Concerning each of the following adverbial ideas, state whether in Latin the ablative alone expresses the idea, or whether the Romans used a preposition with the ablative, or whether a preposition was sometimes used and sometimes not. Base your answers on the rules learned thus far.

(1) personal agent

(2) accompaniment

(3) separation

(4) place where

(5) means

(6) manner

(7) place from which

(8) time when or within when

7. EÅ tempore lÄ«bertÄtem illÅrum decem cÄ«vium cum fidÄ cÅnservÄvit. 8. Rem pÅ«blicam magnÄ cum cÅ«rÄ gessit. 9. RÄs pÅ«blica magnÄ cÅ«rÄ ab eÅ gesta est. 10. Multae rÄs bonae in mediÄ urbe vÄ«sae sunt. 11. EÅ diÄ multÄs rÄs cum spÄ parÄvÄrunt. 12. Ignem ex manibus puerÄ« Äripuimus. 13. QuÄ«nque diÄbus CicerÅ rem pÅ«blicam Ä perÄ«culÅ Äripiet. 14. DuÄs rÄs pÅ«blicÄs metÅ« lÄ«berÄvistÄ«. 15. Terra hominÄs frÅ«ctibus bonÄ«s alit. 16. IncertÄs spÄs eÅrum virtÅ«te suÄ aluit. 17. HÄc aetÄte spÄs nostrae Ä hÄ«s tribus tyrannÄ«s tolluntur. 18. Septem ex amÄ«cÄ«s nostrÄ«s ex illÄ rÄ pÅ«blicÄ magnÅ cum metÅ« vÄnÄrunt. 19. TÅta gÄns in fÄ«nÄs huius reÄ« pÅ«blicae magnÄ cum manÅ« amÄ«cÅrum Å«nÅ diÄ vÄnit. 20. NÅn omnÄs virÄ« lÄ«berÄ« audent sÄ cum hÄc rÄ pÅ«blicÄ iungere. 21. SÄ« illÄ« fidÄ carent, nÅ«lla spÄs est amÄ«citiae et pÄcis. 22. Bona fidÄs et amor huius reÄ« pÅ«blicae possunt nÅs cÅnservÄre. 23. TÅtam vÄ«tam huic reÄ« pÅ«blicae dedistÄ«.

24. What idea is expressed by each of the following ablatives? (The numbers refer to the sentences.) (7) tempore, fidÄ; (8) cÅ«rÄ; (9) cÅ«rÄ; (10) urbe; (11) diÄ, spÄ; (13) diÄbus, perÄ«culÅ; (14) metÅ«; (15) frÅ«ctibus; (16) virtÅ«te; (17) aetÄte, tyrannÄ«s; (18) rÄ pÅ«blicÄ, metÅ«; (19) manÅ«, diÄ; (21) fidÄ.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXIII

State what Latin participle is indicated by each of the following endings and give the English suffix or phrase which can be used as an approximate equivalent in each instance: (1) -tus; (2) -ns; (3) -sÅ«rus; (4) -ntem; (5) -tÅ«rus; (6) -ndus; (7) -sus; (8) -ntÄs; (9) -sÄ«; (10) -tÄ«s. Such forms should be practiced aloud until you have an immediate linguistic reflex to each one. These reflexes can be tested in the following exercise.

Translate the following participles in accordance with their tense and voice.

(1) futÅ«rus

(2) pressÅ«rus

(3) premÄns

(4) pressus

(5) premendus

(6) vertÄns

(7) versus

(8) versÅ«rus

(9) dictus

(10) dÄ«cÄns

(11) dictÅ«rus

(12) factus

(13) faciendus

(14) rapientÄs

(15) raptÅ«rÅs

(16) cupÄ«ta

(17) cupientÄs

(18) dandum

(19) datÄ«

(20) datÅ«rÅs

(21) dantem

(22) mÅtus

(23) moventem

(24) mÅtÅ«rÄ«

Translate the following participles or participial phrases into Latin in their nom. sg. m. form.

(1) (having been) seen

(2) seeing

(3) about to see

(4) to be written

(5) about to write

(6) (having been) written

(7) sending

(8) (having been) sent

(9) about to send

(10) (having been) conquered

(11) about to conquer

(12) conquering

(13) about to join

(14) joining

(15) (having been) dragged

(16) dragging

(17) about to throw

(18) (having been) thrown

4. Captus nihil dÄ«xit. 5. ServitÅ«te lÄ«berÄtus, vÄ«tam iÅ«cundam aget. 6. DÅna dantibus grÄtiÄs Ägit. 7. Aliquem dÅna petentem nÅn amÅ. 8. HominÄ« multam pecÅ«niam cupientÄ« pauca dÅna sÅla dabat. 9. Ad lÅ«dum tuum fÄ«lium meum docendum mÄ«sÄ«. 10. Iste, aliam gentem victÅ«rus, magistrÅs librÅsque dÄlÄre cupiÄbat. 11. HÄ«s Ä«nsidiÄ«s territÄ«, vÄ«tam miseram vÄ«vÄmus. 12. DiÅ« oppressÄ«, sÄ contrÄ opprimentem tyrannum vertere coepÄrunt. 13. IllÄ« quattuor virÄ« miserÄ«, Ä tyrannÅ vÄ«sÄ«, trÄns fÄ«nem cucurrÄrunt. 14. ÅrÄtor, tyrannum timÄns, iÅ«cunda semper dÄ«cÄbat. 15. Aliquem nÅs timentem timÄmus. 16. HÄ« vincentÄs omnia iÅ«ra cÄ«vium victÅrum tollent. 17. Ille miser fugitÅ«rus cÅnsilium trium amÄ«cÅrum petÄbat. 18. Senex, ab duÅbus ex amÄ«cÄ«s monitus, ad nÅs fÅ«git. 19. Ipse, Ä sene secundÅ adiÅ«tus, pecÅ«niÄ carentibus multÄs rÄs dabat. 20. Quis, hÄ«s perÄ«culÄ«s lÄ«berÄtus, deÄ«s grÄtiÄs nÅn dabit? 21. IÅ«nctÄ« vÅbÄ«scum, rem pÅ«blicam cÅnservÄbimus. 22. Fidem habentibus nihil est incertum.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXIV

(1) What are the two essential parts of a regular ablative absolute in Latin?
(2) Can the noun or pronoun of an ablative absolute also appear as the subject or the object of the verb?

(1) Explain the term âabsolute.â
(2) Guided by the examples in Capvt XXIV, ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE, tell what punctuation usually indicates an ablative absolute, and show how this harmonizes with the term âabsolute.â

Should the ablative absolute always be translated literally? Explain.

Name five subordinating conjunctions in English which may be used to translate the ablative absolute depending on the requirements of the context.

State whether the Romans would have regarded any or all of the following sentences as incorrect, and explain why. (Examples in Capvt XXIV will help you.)
(1) Urbe captÄ, Caesar eam dÄlÄvit.
(2) Caesar, urbem captus, eam dÄlÄvit.
(3) Caesar urbem captam dÄlÄvit.
(4) Urbe captÄ, Caesar multÄs gentÄs dÄlÄvit.

(1) What idea is expressed by the -ndus participle (gerundive) + sum?
(2) Explain the agreement of the -ndus, -nda, -ndum participle.
(3) What Latin verb + the infinitive expresses a similar idea?

(1) Explain the syntax of mihi in the following sentence: CÄ«vitÄs mihi cÅnservanda est.
(2) Fill out the blank in the following sentence with the Latin for âby meâ and explain the construction: CÄ«vitÄsâcÅnservÄta est.

8. HÄ«s duÅbus virÄ«s imperium tenentibus, rÄs pÅ«blica valÄbit. 9. HÄc fÄmÄ nÄrrÄtÄ, dux urbem sine morÄ relÄ«quit. 10. OmnÄ« cupiditÄte pecÅ«niae glÅriaeque ex animÅ expulsÄ, ille dux sÄ vÄ«cit. 11. Omnis cupiditÄs rÄrum malÄrum nÅbÄ«s vincenda est sÄ« bonam vÄ«tam agere cupimus. 12. CÄ«vibus patriam amantibus, possumus habÄre magnÄs spÄs. 13. OmnÄs cÄ«vÄs istum tyrannum timÄbant, quÄ« expellendus erat. 14. TyrannÅ superÄtÅ, cÄ«vÄs lÄ«bertÄtem et iÅ«ra recÄpÄrunt. 15. At tyrannÅ expulsÅ, alius tyrannus imperium saepe accipit. 16. Quis imperium accipiÄns adiuvÄre cÄ«vitÄtem sÅlam, nÅn sÄ, cupit? 17. MultÄ«s gentibus victÄ«s, tÅtum mundum tenÄre cupÄ«vistÄ«. 18. ServitÅ«s omnis generis per tÅtum mundum opprimenda est. 19. SÄ« rÄs pÅ«blica nostra valet, nihil tibi timendum est. 20. Patria nostra cuique adiuvanda est quÄ« nostrum modum vÄ«tae amat. 21. Omnia igitur iÅ«ra cÄ«vibus magnÄ cÅ«rÄ cÅnservanda sunt. 22. OfficiÄ«s Ä cÄ«vibus relictÄ«s, rÄs pÅ«blica in magnÅ perÄ«culÅ erit. 23. HÄ«s rÄbus gravibus dictÄ«s, ÅrÄtor Ä nÅbÄ«s laudÄtus est. 24. VÄritÄs et virtÅ«s omnibus virÄ«s semper quaerendae sunt. 25. VÄritÄte et virtÅ«te quaesÄ«tÄ«s, rÄs pÅ«blica cÅnservÄta est.

26. From the above sentences list:

A. 10 instances of the ablative absolute.

B. 7 instances of the -ndus sum construction (passive periphrastic).

C. 5 instances of the dative of agent.

D. 2 instances of the ablative of agent.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXV

Review the present active and passive infinitives of all four conjugations.

If -tÅ«rus (-sÅ«rus) marks the future active participle, what form logically is -tÅ«rus (-sÅ«rus) esse?

If -tus (-sus) marks the perfect passive participle, what form logically is -tus (-sus) esse?

With what do the participial elements of the above infinitives (the -tÅ«rus, -tÅ«ra, -tÅ«rum and the -tus, -a, -um) agree?

To what English verb phrase is the Latin ending -isse equivalent? Repeat this sufficiently so that when you see -isse your linguistic reflex automatically and instantly gives you the proper tense and voice of the infinitive.

Now try your reflexes by translating the following forms in accordance with their tense and voice.

(1) mÅvisse

(2) mÅtus esse

(3) mÅtÅ«rus esse

(4) movÄrÄ«

(5) dÄ«cÄ«

(6) scÄ«rÄ«

(7) servÄrÄ«

(8) rapÄ«

(9) mittÄ«

(10) crÄdidisse

(11) sustulisse

(12) trÄxisse

(13) tetigisse

(14) amÄvisse

(15) vÄ«cisse

(16) vÄ«xisse

(17) trÄctÅs esse

(18) vÄ«sam esse

(19) raptum esse

(20) missÅs esse

(21) quaesÄ«tum esse

(22) expulsum esse

(23) relictÅs esse

(24) data esse

(25) datÅ«ra esse

(26) versÅ«rum esse

(27) pressÅ«rÅs esse

(28) raptÅ«rÅs esse

(29) iussÅ«rum esse

(30) tÄctÅ«rÅs esse

Explain the difference between a direct and an indirect statement.

Indicate what verbs in the following list may introduce an indirect statement and give their meanings.

(1) mittÅ

(2) nÅ«ntiÅ

(3) rÄ«deÅ

(4) intellegÅ

(5) accipiÅ

(6) cupiÅ

(7) videÅ

(8) nesciÅ

(9) parÅ

(10) crÄdÅ

(11) terreÅ

(12) neglegÅ

(13) audiÅ

(14) sentiÅ

(15) agÅ

(16) scrÄ«bÅ

(17) audeÅ

(18) gerÅ

(19) ostendÅ

(20) spÄrÅ

(21) iungÅ

(22) putÅ

(23) amÅ

(24) negÅ

In what main categories can we list most verbs which frequently introduce indirect statements?

In English the indirect statement most often appears as a âthatâ clause, though an infinitive with subject accusative is sometimes used (âI believe that he is braveâ; âI believe him to be braveâ). What is the form of the indirect statement in classical Latin?

In what case did the Romans put the subject of an infinitive?

In Latin indirect statement does the tense of the infinitive depend on the tense of the verb of saying? In other words, must a present infinitive be used only with a present main verb, a perfect only with a perfect main verb, etc.?

What time relative to that of the main verb does each of the following infinitive tenses indicate: (1) perfect; (2) future; (3) present?

14. SciÅ tÄ hoc fÄcisse (factÅ«rum esse, facere). 15. ScÄ«vÄ« tÄ hoc fÄcisse (factÅ«rum esse, facere). 16. CrÄdidimus eÅs ventÅ«rÅs esse (vÄnisse, venÄ«re). 17. CrÄdimus eÅs ventÅ«rÅs esse (vÄnisse, venÄ«re). 18. CrÄs audiet (A) eÅs venÄ«re (i.e., crÄs); (B) eÅs vÄnisse (e.g., heri); (C) eÅs ventÅ«rÅs esse (e.g., paucÄ«s diÄbus). 19. HodiÄ audit (A) eÅs venÄ«re (hodiÄ); (B) eÅs vÄnisse (heri); (C) eÅs ventÅ«rÅs esse (mox, soon). 20. Heri audÄ«vit (A) eÅs venÄ«re (heri); (B) eÅs vÄnisse (e.g., prÄ«diÄ, the day before yesterday); (C) eÅs ventÅ«rÅs (paucÄ«s diÄbus). 21. SpÄrant vÅs eum vÄ«sÅ«rÅs esse. 22. SciÅ hoc Ä tÄ factum esse. 23. NescÄ«vÄ« illa ab eÅ facta esse. 24. NegÄvÄrunt urbem ab hostibus capÄ« (captam esse). 25. ScÄ«tis illÅs esse (futÅ«rÅs esse, fuisse) semper fidÄlÄs. 26. ScÄ«vistis illÅs esse (futÅ«rÅs esse, fuisse) semper fidÄlÄs. 27. PutÄbant tyrannum sibi expellendum esse. 28. CrÄdimus pÄcem omnibus ducibus quaerendam esse. 29. DÄ«cit pÄcem ab decem ducibus quaerÄ« (quaesÄ«tam esse). 30. DÄ«xit duÅs ducÄs pÄcem quaesÄ«tÅ«rÅs esse (quaerere, quaesÄ«visse). 31. HostÄs spÄrant sÄ omnÄs rÄs pÅ«blicÄs victÅ«rÅs esse. 32. Bene sciÅ mÄ multa nescÄ«re; nÄmÅ enim potest omnia scÄ«re.

33. All infinitives except one in the above sentences are infinitives in indirect statement. Name that one exception.

34. Explain the syntax of the following words by stating in each instance (A) the form and (B) the reason for the form: (14) tÄ; fÄcisse; (16) eÅs; (17) ventÅ«rÅs esse; (21) eum; (22) hoc; (23) eÅ; (24) hostibus; (25) fidÄlÄs; (27) sibi; (28) pÄcem; ducibus; (29) ducibus; (30) pÄcem; (31) rÄs pÅ«blicÄs.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXVI

(1) In the comparison of adjectives, to what English ending does the Latin -ior correspond?
(2) What mnemonic aid can be found in their superficial similarity?

(1) To what English adjectival ending does -issimus correspond?
(2) Can any mnemonic device be found here?

(1) To what part of an adjective are -ior and -issimus normally added?
(2) Illustrate by adding these endings to the following adjectives: turpis; vÄlÅx, gen. vÄlÅcis, swift; prÅ«dÄns, gen. prÅ«dentis, prudent.

If acerbus means harsh give (1) three possible forces of the comparative acerbior and (2) two possible forces of the superlative acerbissimus.

Give the meaning of quam (1) with the comparative degree (e.g., hic erat acerbior quam ille) and (2) with the superlative (e.g., hic erat quam acerbissimus).

What case follows quam, than?

(1) Do most adjectives of the 3rd declension have consonant stems or i -stems?
(2) Do comparatives have consonant stems or i -stems?

8. NÅ«ntiÄvÄrunt ducem quam fortissimum vÄnisse. 9. LÅ«ce clÄrissimÄ ab quattuor virÄ«s vÄ«sÄ, cÅpiae fortissimae contrÄ hostÄs missae sunt. 10. IstÅ homine turpissimÅ expulsÅ, senÄtus cÄ«vibus fidÄliÅribus dÅna dedit. 11. BeÄtiÅrÄs cÄ«vÄs prÅ cÄ«vibus miseriÅribus haec dulcia faciÄbant. 12. Hic auctor est clÄrior quam ille. 13. QuÄ«dam dÄ«xÄrunt hunc auctÅrem esse clÄriÅrem quam illum. 14. LibrÅs sapientiÅrum auctÅrum legite, sÄ« vÄ«tam sapientissimam agere cupitis. 15. Sex auctÅrÄs quÅrum librÅs lÄgÄ« sunt acerbiÅrÄs. 16. Quibusdam librÄ«s sapientissimÄ«s lÄctÄ«s, illa vitia turpiÅra vÄ«tÄvimus. 17. Hic vir, quÄ« turpia vitia sua superÄvit, fortior est quam dux fortissimus. 18. Quis est vir fÄlÄ«cissimus? Is quÄ« vÄ«tam sapientissimam agit fÄlÄ«cior est quam tyrannus potentissimus. 19. Remedium vitiÅrum vestrÅrum vidÄtur difficilius. 20. Ille dux putÄvit patriam esse sibi cÄriÅrem quam vÄ«tam. 21. Manus adulÄscentium quam fidÄlissimÅrum senÄtuÄ« quaerenda est.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXVII

(1) What is peculiar about the comparison of adjectives in which the masculine of the positive degree ends in -er?
(2) Does this hold for adjectives of any declension or only for those of the 1st and 2nd declension?

(1) What is peculiar about the comparison of facilis?
(2) Do all adjectives in -lis follow this rule? Be specific.

Some of the most common adjectives are the most irregular in their comparison. To illustrate how helpful English can be in learning these irregular forms, write each of the following Latin words on a separate line:

parvus, malus, bonus, (prÅ), magnus, superus, multus;

and then, choosing from the following list, write opposite each of them the English words which suggest the comparative and the superlative respectively:

pessimist, prime, minus, ameliorate, summit, maximum, supreme, optimist, plus, superior, pejorative, prior, major, minimum.

4. Translate the following:

(1) bellum minus

(2) bellum pessimum

(3) bellum maius

(4) bella priÅra

(5) liber simillimus

(6) liber difficilior

(7) puer minimus

(8) puer melior

(9) puella pulcherrima

(10) puella pulchrior

(11) puellae plÅ«rimae

(12) fidÄs maior

(13) fidÄs minima

(14) mare minus

(15) in marÄ« minÅre

(16) maria maiÅra

(17) frÅ«ctÅ«s optimÄ«

(18) frÅ«ctus peior

(19) hominÄs ÄcerrimÄ«

(20) hominÄs ÄcriÅrÄs

(21) hominÄs plÅ«rÄs

(22) labor difficillimus

(23) labor suprÄmus

(24) plÅ«s labÅris

(25) plÅ«rÄs labÅrÄs

(26) ducÄs optimÄ«

(27) ducÄs maiÅrÄs

(28) ducÄs meliÅrÄs

(29) dÅna minima

(30) dÅna plÅ«ra

(31) dÅna prÄ«ma

(32) plÅ«s laudis

(33) plÅ«rÄs laudÄs

(34) cÄ«vÄs pessimÄ«

(35) cÄ«vÄs meliÅrÄs

(36) cÄ«vÄs lÄ«berrimÄ«

5. Facillima saepe nÅn sunt optima. 6. Difficilia saepe sunt maxima. 7. MeliÅra studia sunt difficiliÅra. 8. PessimÄ« auctÅrÄs librÅs plÅ«rimÅs scrÄ«bunt. 9. HÄ« librÄ« peiÅrÄs sunt quam librÄ« auctÅrum meliÅrum. 10. Puer minor maius dÅnum accÄpit. 11. Illa rÄs pÅ«blica minima maximÄs spÄs habuit. 12. PlÅ«rÄs virÄ« crÄdunt hoc bellum esse peius quam prÄ«mum bellum. 13. Dux melior cum cÅpiÄ«s maiÅribus veniet. 14. ÄcrÄs ducÄs ÄcriÅrÄs cÅpiÄs ÄcerrimÅrum hostium saepe laudÄbant. 15. TyrannÅ pessimÅ expulsÅ, cÄ«vÄs ducem meliÅrem et sapientiÅrem quaesivÄrunt. 16. MeliÅrÄ« ducÄ« maius imperium et plÅ«s pecÅ«niae dedÄrunt. 17. CÄ«vÄs urbium minÅrum nÅn sunt meliÅrÄs quam eÄ« urbium maximÄrum. 18. NÅs nÅn meliÅrÄs sumus quam plÅ«rimÄ« virÄ« priÅrum aetÄtum. 19. MaiÅrÄs nostrÄ« Apollinem (ApollÅ, acc.) deum sÅlis appellÄbant.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXVIII

What does the subjunctive usually indicate in Latinâa fact or something other than a fact?

Is the subjunctive more or less common in Latin than it is in English?

What vowel is the sign of the present subjunctive (1) in the 1st conjugation and (2) in the other conjugations?

When the verb of the main clause is in the subjunctive, what is the force of this subjunctive?

What idea is expressed by the subjunctive in a subordinate clause introduced by ut or nÄ?

In this chapter when nÄ is used with a main verb in the subjunctive, what kind of subjunctive is it?

Did the Roman prose-writers of the classical period use the infinitive to express purpose as we do in English?

Whenever in the following list a form is subjunctive, so label it, indicating also its person and number. The indicative forms are to be translated in accordance with their person, number, and tense.

(1) mittet

(2) mittat

(3) mittit

(4) det

(5) dat

(6) crÄdant

(7) crÄdunt

(8) crÄdent

(9) movent

(10) moveant

(11) audiÄmur

(12) audiÄmur

(13) audÄ«mur

(14) ÄripiÄs

(15) Äripis

(16) ÄripiÄs

(17) sciuntur

(18) scientur

(19) sciantur

(20) lÄ«berÄminÄ«

(21) lÄ«berÄminÄ«

(22) lÄ«berÄbiminÄ«

(23) dÄlentur

(24) dÄleantur

(25) vincÄris

(26) vinceris

(27) vincÄris

(28) dÄ«cimus

(29) dÄ«cÄmus

(30) dÄ«cÄmus

9. Ille dux veniat. Eum exspectÄmus. 10. CÄ«vÄs turpÄs ex rÄ pÅ«blicÄ discÄdant ut in pÄce vÄ«vÄmus. 11. SÄ« illÄ« duo amÄ«cÅs cupiunt, vÄra beneficia faciant. 12. Beneficia aliÄ«s praestat ut amÄtur. 13. Haec verba fÄlÄ«cia vÅbÄ«s dÄ«cÅ nÄ discÄdÄtis. 14. Patriae causÄ haec difficillima faciÄmus. 15. IllÄ«s miserÄ«s plÅ«s pecÅ«niae date nÄ armÄ«s contrÄ hostÄs careant. 16. Putat eÅs id factÅ«rÅs esse ut Ä«ram meam vÄ«tent. 17. Arma parÄmus nÄ lÄ«bertÄs nostra tollÄtur. 18. ArmÄ«sne sÅlÄ«s lÄ«bertÄs nostra Ä perÄ«culÅ ÄripiÄtur? 19. NÄ sapientÄs librÅs difficiliÅrÄs scrÄ«bant. 20. Satis sapientiae enim Ä librÄ«s difficiliÅribus nÅn accipiÄmus. 21. MeliÅra et maiÅra faciat nÄ vÄ«tam miserrimam agat. 22. Haec illÄ« auctÅrÄ« clÄrissimÅ nÄrrÄ ut in librÅ eius scrÄ«bantur. 23. VÄritÄtem semper quaerÄmus, sine quÄ maximÄ« animÄ« nÅn possunt esse fÄlÄ«cÄs.

24. Explain the syntax of the following words (i.e., copy the words each on a new line, state the form, and give the reason for that form): (9) veniat; (10) discÄdant, vÄ«vÄmus; (11) faciant; (12) praestat, amÄtur; (13) discÄdÄtis; (14) faciÄmus; (15) date, armÄ«s, careant; (16) eÅs, factÅ«rÅs esse, vÄ«tent; (17) parÄmus, tollÄtur; (18) armÄ«s, ÄripiÄtur; (19) scrÄ«bant; (20) accipiÄmus; (21) faciat, agat; (22) nÄrrÄ, scrÄ«bantur; (23) quaerÄmus.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXIX

What is the easy rule for the recognition and the formation of the imperfect subjunctive active and passive?

Does this rule apply to such irregular verbs as sum and possum?

The indicatives in the following list are to be translated according to their forms. The subjunctives are to be so labeled, with indication also of their tense, person, and number.

(1) vocÄret

(2) invenÄ«rent

(3) vidÄrÄmus

(4) dÄ«cerem

(5) ÄriperÄs

(6) servet

(7) servÄrÄtis

(8) videat

(9) inveniÄs

(10) inveniÄs

(11) dÄ«cat

(12) dÄ«cet

(13) dÄ«cit

(14) sint

(15) posset

(16) possit

(17) discÄderent

(18) discÄdent

(19) discÄdant

(20) dÄmus

(21) possÄ«mus

(22) essent

(23) accipiÄs

(24) accipiÄs

(25) acciperÄs

(26) expellÄminÄ«

(27) expellerÄminÄ«

(28) expellÄminÄ«

(29) movÄrentur

(30) moventur

How can the idea of result be expressed in Latin?

How can result clauses be distinguished from purpose clauses?

When and where is the imperfect subjunctive used?

7. OptimÅs librÅs tantÄ cum cÅ«rÄ lÄgÄrunt ut multum sapientiae discerent. 8. BonÅs librÅs cum cÅ«rÄ legÄbÄmus ut sapientiam discerÄmus. 9. OptimÄ« librÄ« discipulÄ«s legendÄ« sunt ut vÄritÄtem et mÅrÄs bonÅs discant. 10. SapientissimÄ« auctÅrÄs plÅ«rÄs librÅs scrÄ«bant ut omnÄs gentÄs adiuvÄre possint. 11. AnimÄ« plÅ«rimÅrum hominum tam stultÄ« sunt ut discere nÅn cupiant. 12. At multae mentÄs ita ÄcrÄs sunt ut bene discere possint. 13. QuÄ«dam magistrÄ« discipulÅs tantÄ cum arte docÄbant ut ipsÄ« discipulÄ« quidem discere cuperent. 14. Imperium istÄ«us tyrannÄ« tantum erat ut senÄtus eum expellere nÅn posset. 15. OmnÄs cÄ«vÄs sÄ patriae dent nÄ hostÄs lÄ«bertÄtem tollant. 16. Caesar tam Äcer dux erat ut hostÄs mÄ«litÄs RÅmÄnÅs nÅn vincerent. 17. DÅ«cimusne aliÄs gentÄs tantÄ cum sapientiÄ et virtÅ«te ut lÄ«bertÄs cÅnservÄtur? 18. Tanta beneficia faciÄbÄtis ut omnÄs vÅs amÄrent. 19. Tam dÅ«rus erat ut nÄmÅ eum amÄret. 20. MÄ«lia cÄ«vium ex eÄ terrÄ fugiÄbant nÄ Ä tyrannÅ opprimerentur. 21. LÄ«bertÄtem sÄ«c amÄvÄrunt ut numquam ab hostibus vincerentur.

22. Explain the syntax of the following words: (7) discerent; (8) discerÄmus; (9) discant; (10) scrÄ«bant, possint; (11) cupiant; (12) possint; (13) cuperent; (14) posset; (15) dent, tollant; (16) vincerent; (17) cÅnservÄtur; (18) amÄrent; (19) amÄret; (20) opprimerentur; (21) vincerentur.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXX

As the form of the imperfect subjunctive active is the present active infinitive plus personal endings, how can the pluperfect subjunctive active be easily recognized?

As the pluperfect indicative passive is the perfect passive particle + eram (i.e., the imperfect indicative of sum), what parallel rule holds for the pluperfect subjunctive passive?

If positus est is the perfect indicative passive, what most naturally is positus sit?

What forms of the active indicative do the forms of the perfect subjunctive active resemble in most instances?

State the tense, voice, person, and number of each of the following subjunctives:

(1) ponerÄtur

(2) posuissem

(3) positÄ« sint

(4) ponÄmur

(5) posuerint

(6) ponerÄmus

(7) posuissÄtis

(8) positus esset

(9) darent

(10) datÄ« essÄmus

(11) det

(12) datus sÄ«s

(13) dedissÄs

(14) darÄtur

(15) dederÄ«mus

(16) dedissent

(1) Name the primary tenses of the indicative.
(2) Name the primary tenses of the subjunctive.
(3) Name the historical tenses of the indicative.
(4) Name the historical tenses of the subjunctive.

(1) What time does the present subjunctive indicate relative to that of a primary main verb?
(2) What time does the imperfect subjunctive indicate relative to that of a historical main verb?
(3) What time does the perfect subjunctive indicate relative to that of a primary main verb?
(4) What time does the pluperfect subjunctive indicate relative to that of a secondary main verb?

8. Ubi dux est (fuit)? 9. Rogant ubi dux sit (fuerit). 10. RogÄbant ubi dux esset (fuisset). 11. RogÄbunt ubi dux sit (fuerit). 12. NesciÅ ubi pecÅ«nia posita sit. 13. ScÄ«sne ubi pecÅ«nia ponÄtur? 14. ScÄ«vÄrunt ubi pecÅ«nia ponerÄtur. 15. NescÄ«vit ubi pecÅ«nia posita esset. 16. VÅbÄ«s dÄ«cÄmus cÅ«r mÄ«les hoc fÄcerit (faciat). 17. Mihi dÄ«xÄrunt cÅ«r mÄ«les hoc fÄcisset (faceret). 18. DÄ«c mihi quis vÄnerit (veniat). 19. ÅrÄtor rogÄvit cÅ«r cÄterÄ« cÄ«vÄs haec cÅnsilia nÅn cognÅvissent. 20. DucÄ« nÅ«ntiÄvimus cÄterÅs mÄ«litÄs in illam terram fugere (fÅ«gisse). 21. DucÄ« nÅ«ntiÄvimus in quam terram cÄterÄ« mÄ«litÄs fugerent (fÅ«gissent). 22. AudÄ«vimus cÄ«vÄs tam fidÄlÄs esse ut rem pÅ«blicam cÅnservÄrent. 23. AudÄ«vimus quid cÄ«vÄs fÄcissent ut rem pÅ«blicam cÅnservÄrent. 24. QuaerÄbant quÅrum in rÄ pÅ«blicÄ pÄx invenÄ«rÄ« posset. 25. CognÅvimus pÄcem in patriÄ eÅrum nÅn inventam esse. 26. IllÄ« stultÄ« semper rogant quid sit melius quam imperium aut pecÅ«nia. 27. NÅs quidem putÄmus pecÅ«niam ipsam nÅn esse malam; sed crÄdimus vÄritÄtem et lÄ«bertÄtem et amÄ«citiam esse meliÅrÄs et maiÅrÄs. 28. Haec cupimus ut vÄ«tam pulchriÅrem agÄmus; nam pecÅ«nia sÅla et imperium possunt hominÄs dÅ«rÅs facere, ut fÄlicÄs nÅn sint. 29. DÄnique omnia expÅnat ut iam comprehendÄtis quanta scelera contrÄ rem pÅ«blicam commissa sint.

30. Explain the syntax of the following: (15) posita esset; (16) fÄcerit; (17) fÄcisset; (18) vÄnerit; (20) fugere; (21) fugerent; (22) esse, cÅnservÄrent; (23) fÄcissent, cÅnservÄrent; (24) posset; (25) inventam esse; (26) sit; (27) esse; (28) agÄmus, sint; (29) expÅnat, comprehendÄtis, commissa sint.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXI

Name the three possible meanings of cum + the subjunctive.

When tamen follows a cum -clause, what does cum regularly mean?

(1) To what conjugation does ferÅ belong?
(2) State the irregularity which the following forms of ferÅ have in common: ferre, fers, fert, fertis, ferris, fertur.

In the following list label the subjunctives and translate the rest according to their forms.

(1) ferat

(2) fert

(3) ferret

(4) feret

(5) ferre

(6) ferunt

(7) ferent

(8) ferant

(9) fertur

(10) ferte

(11) fertis

(12) ferÄris

(13) ferris

(14) fer

(15) ferrÄ«

(16) tulisse

(17) lÄtÅ«rus esse

(18) ferendus

(19) lÄtus esse

(20) tulisset

5. Cum hoc dÄ«xissÄmus, illÄ« vÄ«gintÄ« respondÄrunt sÄ pÄcem aequam oblÄtÅ«rÅs esse. 6. Cum sÄ in aliam terram contulisset, tamen amÄ«cÅs novÅs invÄnit. 7. Cum amÄ«citiam nÅbÄ«s offerant, eÄ«s auxilium offerÄmus. 8. Cum perÄ«culum magnum esset, omnÄs cÅpiÄs et arma brevÄ« tempore contulÄrunt. 9. Quid tÅ« fers? Quid ille fert? DÄ«c mihi cÅ«r haec dÅna offerantur. 10. Cum exposuisset quid peteret, negÄvistÄ« tantum auxilium posse offerrÄ«. 11. Cum dÅna iÅ«cunda tulissent, potuÄ« tamen Ä«nsidiÄs eÅrum cognÅscere. 12. Cum cÅnsilia tua nunc comprehendÄmus, Ä«nsidiÄs tuÄs nÅn ferÄmus. 13. Tanta mala nÅn ferenda sunt. CÅnfer tÄ in exsilium. 14. DÄnique hÄ« centum cÄ«vÄs reÄ« pÅ«blicae auxilium ferant. 15. PutÄbam eÅs vÄ«num nÄvibus lÄtÅ«rÅs esse. 16. Cum mÄ«litÄs nostrÄ« hostÄs vicissent, tamen eÄ«s multa beneficia obtulÄrunt. 17. Cum cognÅvisset quanta beneficia cÄterÄ« trÄs offerrent, ipse aequa beneficia obtulit. 18. CÄ«vibus miserÄ«s gentium parvÄrum satis auxiliÄ« dÄbÄmus offerre. 19. Cum cÅnsul haec verba dÄ«xisset, senÄtus respondit pecÅ«niam ad hanc rem collÄtam esse.

20. Explain the syntax of the following words: (5) dÄ«xissÄmus, oblÄtÅ«rÅs esse; (6) contulisset; (7) offerant; (8) esset; (9) offerantur; (10) exposuisset, peteret; (11) tulissent; (12) comprehendÄmus; (13) cÅnfer; (14) ferant; (15) nÄvibus, lÄtÅ«rÅs esse; (16) vÄ«cissent; (17) offerrent; (19) dÄ«xisset.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXII

What is the regular positive ending (1) of adverbs made from adjectives of the 1st and the 2nd declensions and (2) of adverbs made from adjectives of the 3rd declension?

In English what adverbial ending is equivalent to the Latin adverbial -Ä or -iter?

Do all Latin adverbs of the positive degree end in -Ä or -iter?

(1) What is the ending of the comparative degree of an adverb in Latin?
(2) With what form of the adjective is this identical?
(3) In English how is the comparative degree of the adverb usually formed?

How does the base of the superlative degree of a Latin adverb compare with that of the corresponding adjective?

Translate each of the following adverbs in two ways: (1) lÄ«berius; (2) lÄ«berrimÄ.

Translate each of the following adverbs in accordance with its form.

(1) iÅ«cundÄ

(2) iÅ«cundius

(3) iÅ«cundissimÄ

(4) melius

(5) fidÄlissimÄ

(6) breviter

(7) celerrimÄ

(8) peius

(9) fidÄlius

(10) facilius

(11) minimÄ

(12) magis

(13) diÅ«tius

(14) male

(15) miserius

(16) minus

(17) facile

(18) maximÄ

(19) gravissimÄ

(20) celerius

(1) What is the stem of volÅ in the indicative?
(2) What is the stem of volÅ in the present and the imperfect subjunctive?

To what other irregular verb is volÅ similar in the present subjunctive?

Label the subjunctives in the following list and translate the other forms.

(1) volÄs

(2) velÄ«s

(3) vÄ«s

(4) vellÄs

(5) mÄvult

(6) velÄ«mus

(7) mÄllÄmus

(8) voluissÄs

(9) volam

(10) volÄbant

(11) volet

(12) vultis

(13) voluisse

(14) volunt

(15) voluimus

(16) velle

(17) voluerat

(18) voluÄrunt

(19) voluistÄ«

(20) vellet

(21) nÅlunt

(22) nÅllet

(23) mÄlit

(24) nÅlet

11. QuÄ«dam mÄlunt crÄdere omnÄs esse parÄs. 12. QuÄ«dam negant mentÄs quidem omnium hominum esse parÄs. 13. HÄ« dÄ«vitiÄs celerrimÄ invÄnÄrunt; illÄ« diÅ«tissimÄ erunt pauperÄs. 14. Hic plÅ«rimÅs honÅrÄs quam facillimÄ accipere vult. 15. NÅlÄ«te hanc scientiam Ämittere. 16. CÄ«vÄs ipsÄ« rem publicam melius gessÄrunt quam ille dux. 17. Ibi terra est aequior et plÅ«s patet. 18. NÅs Ä scientiÄ prohibÄre nÅlent virÄ« lÄ«berÄ«; sed tyrannÄ« maximÄ sÄ«c volunt. 19. Tyrannus cÄ«vÄs suÅs ita male opprimÄbat ut semper lÄ«berÄ« esse vellent. 20. PlÅ«rima dÅna lÄ«berrimÄ offeret ut exercitus istum tyrannum adiuvÄre velit. 21. Cum auxilium offerre minimÄ vellent, nÅluimus eÄ«s beneficia multa praestÄre. 22. Cum hostÄs contrÄ nÅs celeriter veniant, volumus nostrÅs ad arma quam celerrimÄ vocÄre. 23. Cum lÄ«bertÄtem lÄgÄsque cÅnservÄre vÄrÄ vellent, tamen scelera tyrannÄ« diÅ«tissimÄ ferenda erant. 24. MÄvult haec sapientius facere nÄ hanc quidem occasiÅnem Ämittat. 25. NÅlÄ« discÄdere, mÄ« amÄ«ce.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXIII

(1) What form of the verb is found in both clauses of a future less vivid condition?
(2) Explain why this construction is called âless vividâ as compared with the simple future (or âfuture more vividâ)

(1) Name the specific type of condition (A) that has the imperfect subjunctive in both clauses and (B) that has the pluperfect subjunctive in both clauses.
(2) In each of these conditions which part of the sentence is essentially the same in both Latin and English?

What is the regular negative of the conditional clause in Latin?

What type of Latin condition is translated by âshouldâ¦ wouldâ and hence can be called a âshould-would conditionâ?

What is the meaning of quis, quid after sÄ«, nisi, nÄ, and num?

6. SÄ« ratiÅ dÅ«cit, fÄlÄ«x es. 7. SÄ« ratiÅ dÅ«cet, fÄlÄ«x eris. 8. SÄ« ratiÅ dÅ«cat, fÄlÄ«x sÄ«s. 9. SÄ« ratiÅ dÅ«ceret, fÄlÄ«x essÄs. 10. SÄ« ratiÅ dÅ«xisset, fÄlÄ«x fuissÄs. 11. SÄ« pecÅ«niam amÄs, sapientiÄ carÄs. 12. SÄ« pecÅ«niam amÄbis, sapientiÄ carÄbis. 13. SÄ« pecÅ«niam amÄs, sapientiÄ carÄas. 14. SÄ« pecÅ«niam amÄrÄs, sapientiÄ carÄrÄs. 15. SÄ« pecÅ«niam amÄvissÄs, sapientiÄ caruissÄs. 16. SÄ« vÄritÄtem quaerimus, scientiam invenÄ«mus. 17. SÄ« vÄritÄtem quaerÄmus, scientiam inveniÄmus. 18. SÄ« vÄritÄtem quaerÄmus, scientiam inveniÄmus. 19. SÄ« vÄritÄtem quaererÄmus, scientiam invenÄ«rÄmus. 20. SÄ« vÄritÄtem quaesÄ«vissÄmus, scientiam invÄnissÄmus. 21. Nisi Ä«ram vÄ«tÄbitis, duÅs amÄ«cÅs ÄmittÄtis. 22. Nisi Ä«ram vÄ«tÄvissÄtis, quÄ«nque amÄ«cÅs ÄmÄ«sissÄtis. 23. Nisi Ä«ram vÄ«tÄtis, multÅs amÄ«cÅs ÄmittÄtis. 24. Nisi Ä«ram vÄ«tÄrÄtis, multÅs amÄ«cÅs ÄmitterÄtis. 25. Nisi Ä«ram vÄ«tÄtis, multÅs amÄ«cÅs Ämittitis. 26. Nisi Ä«ram vÄ«tÄvistis, multÅs amÄ«cÅs ÄmÄ«sistis. 27. SÄ« quis bonÅs mÅrÄs habet, eum laudÄmus. 28. SÄ« quis bonÅs mÅrÄs habuisset, eum laudÄvissÄmus. 29. SÄ« quis bonÅs mÅrÄs habeat, eum laudÄmus. 30. SÄ« quis bonÅs mÅrÄs habuit, eum laudÄvimus (laudÄbÄmus). 31. SÄ« quis bonÅs mÅrÄs habÄret, eum laudÄrÄmus. 32. SÄ« quis bonÅs mÅrÄs habÄbit, eum laudÄbimus. 33. SÄ« istÄ« vincent, discÄdÄmus. 34. SÄ« istÄ« vincant, discÄdÄmus. 35. SÄ« istÄ« vÄ«cissent, discessissÄmus. 36. SÄ« librÅs bene lÄgissÄs, melius scrÄ«psissÄs. 37. SÄ« librÅs bene legÄs, melius scrÄ«bÄs. 38. SÄ« librÅs bene legÄs, melius scrÄ«bÄs.

39. Name in sequence the types of conditions found in sentences 6â10 and 21â26.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXIV

State the chief peculiarity of deponent verbs.

Write a synopsis of the following verbs in the 6 tenses of the indicative and the 4 tenses of the subjunctive as indicated: (1) cÅnor in the 1st person plural.
(2) loquor in the 3d person singular.

(1) Write, label, and translate all the participles of patior.
(2) Write, label, and translate all the infinitives of patior.

Using the proper form of illud cÅnsilium fill in the following blanks to complete the idea suggested by the English sentence in each instance.
(1) He will not follow that plan: nÅn sequÄtur __________________.
(2) He will not use that plan: nÅn utÄtur __________________.
(3) He will not permit that plan: nÅn patiÄtur __________________.

Explain the proper form of illud cÅnsilium in #4 (2) above.

Name the active forms found in deponent verbs.

Give the imperative forms of (1) cÅnor and (2) loquor, and translate each one.

Translate the following participles: (1) locÅ«tus; (2) mortuus; (3) cÅnÄtus; (4) passus; (5) secÅ«tus; (6) Ägressus; (7) profectus.

In the following list label any subjunctive forms and translate the rest:

(1) Å«tÄtur

(2) Å«tÄtur

(3) Å«titur

(4) Å«terÄtur

(5) Å«sus

(6) Å«sus esset

(7) Å«sÅ«rum esse

(8) patiÄris

(9) pateris

(10) patere

(11) patÄ«

(12) passÄ« sunt

(13) passum esse

(14) patientÄs

(15) patiÄtur

(16) patitur

(17) patiÄmur

(18) arbitrÄtur

(19) arbitrÄrÄtur

(20) patiendum est

10. ArbitrÄtur haec mala patienda esse. 11. CÅnÄbimur haec mala patÄ«. 12. Nisi morÄ« vÄ«s, patere haec mala. 13. Maxima mala passus, homÅ miser mortuus est. 14. Tyrannus arbitrÄtus est eÅs duÅs haec mala diÅ« passÅ«rÅs esse. 15. Cum tria bella passÄ« essent, istum tyrannum in exsilium expellere ausÄ« sunt. 16. SÄ« hunc ducem novum sequÄminÄ«, lÄ«bertÄte et ÅtiÅ Å«tÄminÄ«. 17. HÄ«s verbÄ«s dictÄ«s, eum sequÄ« ausÄ« sumus. 18. Haec verba locÅ«tÄ«, profectÄ« sumus nÄ in eÅ locÅ miserÅ morerÄmur. 19. Cum vÅs cÅnsiliÅ malÅ Å«sÅs esse arbitrÄrÄtur, tamen vÅbÄ«scum lÄ«berÄ locÅ«tus est. 20. SÄ« quis vÄ«nÅ eius generis Å«tÄ« audeat, celeriter moriÄtur. 21. EÅdem diÄ fÄ«lius eius nÄtus est et mortuus est. 22. Omnibus opibus nostrÄ«s Å«tÄmur ut patria nostra servÄtur. 23. Cum in aliam terram proficÄ«scÄ« cÅnÄrÄtur, Ä mÄ«litibus captus est. 24. ArbitrÄbar eum ex urbe cum decem amÄ«cÄ«s ÄgressÅ«rum esse. 25. EÄ nocte profectus, Caesar ad quandam Ä«nsulam clÄrissimam vÄnit. 26. SÄ« meliÅribus librÄ«s Å«sÄ« essent, plÅ«ra didicissent. 27. SÄ« multÅs amÄ«cÅs habÄre vÄ«s, nÅlÄ« esse superbus.

28. Name the type of condition found above in each of the following sentences: 12, 16, 20, 26.

29. Explain the syntax of the following: (14) passÅ«rÅs esse; (17) verbÄ«s; (18) locÅ«tÄ«, morerÄmur; (19) cÅnsiliÅ, arbitrÄrÄtur; (21) diÄ; (22) Å«tÄmur; (25) nocte; (26) librÄ«s.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXV

A certain number of verbs, which in English apparently take a direct object, in Latin take a dative. In lieu of a good rule to cover such verbs, what procedures can prove helpful?

Some other verbs also, when compounded with certain prepositions, may take a dative.
(1) What is the concept that underlies this?
(2) Do all compound verbs take the dative?

Copy each of the following verbs on a new line; after it write that one of the three forms eÄ«, eum, eÅ which is in the case required by the verb; and then translate the whole expression, using the pronoun to mean âhimâ generally and âitâ where necessary.

(1) cognÅscunt

(2) ignÅscunt

(3) serviunt

(4) servant

(5) parÄvÄ«

(6) pÄruÄ«

(7) patiuntur

(8) invenient

(9) nocent

(10) iuvant

(11) placent

(12) iaciunt

(13) superant

(14) crÄdunt

(15) carent

(16) student

(17) hortantur

(18) sequuntur

(19) persuÄdent

(20) Å«tuntur

(21) pellunt

(22) parcunt

(23) imperant

(24) iubent

4. Ducem servÄvit. 5. DucÄ« servÄ«vit. 6. ServÄ« aliÄ«s hominibus serviunt. 7. VirÄ« fortÄs aliÅs servant. 8. Ille servus fÄ«liÅ meÅ servÄ«vit et eum servÄvit. 9. SÄ« quis sibi sÅlÄ« serviet, rem publicam numquam servÄbit. 10. SÄ« quis hunc labÅrem suscÄpisset, mÄ«lle virÅs servÄvisset. 11. DeÄ« mihi ignÅscent; vÅs, Å cÄ«vÄs, tÅtÄ« exercituÄ« ignÅscite. 12. SÄ« Deum nÅbÄ«s ignÅscere volumus, nÅs dÄbÄmus aliÄ«s hominibus ignÅscere. 13. Mihi nunc nÅn crÄdunt, neque umquam duÅbus fÄ«liÄ«s meÄ«s crÄdere volent. 14. IllÄ« amÄ«cÄ« sunt mihi cÄrissimÄ«. 15. Cum bonÄ fidÄ carÄrÄs, tibi crÄdere nÅn poterant. 16. Huic ducÄ« pÄreÄmus ut nÅbÄ«s parcat et urbem servet. 17. Nisi Caesar cÄ«vibus placÄbit, vÄ«tae eius nÅn parcent. 18. LitterÄ«s LatÄ«nÄ«s studeÅ, quae mihi placent etiam sÄ« amÄ«cÄ«s meÄ«s persuadÄre nÅn possum. 19. VÄritÄtÄ« et sapientiae semper studeÄmus et pÄreÄmus. 20. OptimÄ«s rÄbus semper studÄte sÄ« vÄrÄ esse fÄlÄ«cÄs vultis. 21. HÄ«s rÄbus studentÄs, et librÄ«s et vÄ«tÄ Å«tÄmur. 22. Vir bonus nÄminÄ« nocÄre vult: omnibus parcit, omnÄs iuvat. 23. Praemia mea sunt simillima tuÄ«s.

24. Explain the syntax of the following: (5) ducÄ«; (8) eum; (9) sibi; (11) exercituÄ«; (12) hominibus; (13) fÄ«liÄ«s; (14) mihi; (15) fidÄ; (16) ducÄ«, pÄreÄmus, servet; (17) cÄ«vibus, vÄ«tae; (18) litterÄ«s, amÄ«cÄ«s; (21) rÄbus, librÄ«s, Å«tÄmur; (22) omnibus; (23) tuÄ«s.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXVI

We have already learned how the Romans expressed indirect statements (Capvt XXV) and indirect questions (Capvt XXX). Now after a verb having the connotation of command, how did the Romans express an indirect command?

List some common Latin verbs which can take an indirect command.

In the following list label the subjunctives and translate the other forms.

(1) fÄ«et

(2) fit

(3) fÄ«at

(4) fieret

(5) fierÄ«

(6) fÄ«unt

(7) fÄ«Äbant

(8) fÄ«Äs

(9) factus esse

(10) fierent

(11) fÄ«mus

(12) fÄ«ent

(13) fÄ«s

(14) fierem

(15) fÄ«ant

(16) faciendus

(17) fÄ«Ämus

4. DÄ«xit eÅs litterÄ«s LatÄ«nÄ«s studÄre. 5. DÄ«xit cÅ«r litterÄ«s LatÄ«nÄ«s studÄrent. 6. DÄ«xit ut litterÄ«s LatÄ«nÄ«s studÄrent. 7. Ab eÄ«s quaesÄ«vimus cÅ«r philosophiae Graecae studÄrent. 8. Quaerisne ut nÄtÅ«ram omnium rÄrum cognÅscÄmus? 9. TÄ moneÅ ut hÄ«s sapientibus parcÄs. 10. MÄ«litÄs monuit nÄ eÄ«s pÄcem petentibus nocÄrent. 11. NÅbÄ«s imperÄbit nÄ hostibus crÄdÄmus. 12. Tibi imperÄvit ut ducÄ« pÄrÄrÄs. 13. TÄ rogÅ cÅ«r hoc fÄcerÄ«s. 14. TÄ rogÅ ut hoc faciÄs. 15. Ä tÄ petÅ ut pÄx fÄ«at. 16. Ä mÄ petÄbant nÄ bellum facerem. 17. Eum ÅrÄvÄ« nÄ rÄgÄ« turpÄ« pÄrÄret. 18. VÅs ÅrÄmus ut discipulÄ« ÄcerrimÄ« fÄ«atis. 19. NÅlÄ« esse similis istÄ« tyrannÅ dÅ«rÅ. 20. Caesar cÅ«rÄvit ut imperium suum maximum in cÄ«vitÄte fieret. 21. ÅrÄtor nÅs hortÄtus est ut lÄ«berae patriae nostrae cum studiÅ servÄ«rÄmus. 22. NÅbÄ«s persuÄsit ut aequÄ«s lÄgibus semper Å«terÄmur. 23. CÅnÄmur ducÄ« persuÄdÄre nÄ artibus et lÄgibus patriae noceat. 24. Tyrannus imperat ut pecÅ«nia fÄ«at; et pecÅ«nia fit. At ille stultus nÅn sentit hanc pecÅ«niam sine bonÄ fidÄ futÅ«ram esse nihil. 25. PlÅ«rÄs quidem discipulÅs hortÄmur ut linguae LatÄ«nae studeant.

26. Explain the syntax of the following: (4) studÄre; (5) studÄrent; (6) studÄrent; (7) studÄrent; (8) cognÅscÄmus; (9) parcÄs; (10) eÄ«s, pÄcem; (11) hostibus; (13) fÄcerÄ«s; (14) faciÄs; (16) facerem; (18) fÄ«Ätis; (22) lÄgibus; (23) lÄgibus; (24) futÅ«ram esse; (25) hortÄmur.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXVII

(1) Name the tenses and moods in which the stem of Ä«re is changed to e before a, o, and u.
(2) Otherwise, what is the stem of eÅ in the indicative, subjunctive, imperative, and infinitives?

State the nominative singular and the nominative plural of the present participle of eÅ.

Write a synopsis of eÅ in the 2nd singular and the 3d plural indicative and subjunctive active.

In the following list label the subjunctives and translate the other forms.

(1) iimus

(2) Ä«mus

(3) Ä«rÄmus

(4) Ä«bimus

(5) Ä«ssÄmus

(6) eÄmus

(7) itÅ«rus esse

(8) euntem

(9) iÄrunt

(10) eunt

(11) eant

(12) Ä«bunt

(13) iÄ«

(14) Ä«bat

(15) ierant

(16) ierim

(17) Ä«ret

(18) Ä«sse

(19) euntÄs

(20) Ä«bÅ

(21) iit

(22) Ä«bÄmus

(23) Ä«sset

(24) eat

State how the Romans regularly expressed the following place concepts and translate the English example into Latin:
(1) place from which: from (out of) that land.
(2) place where: in that land; on that island.
(3) place to which: into (to) that land.

State the general rules for these place constructions when the name of a city is involved.

Define the locative case, and state the nature of the locative forms.

State how the Romans expressed each of the following time concepts and translate the English example:
(1) time when: on the same day.
(2) time how long: for many days.
(3) time within which: in one day.

What is peculiar about the principal parts of licet? Explain. Translate into Latin âYou may go.â

Translate each of the following words or phrases in accordance with the principles of this chapter.

(1) Å«num diem

(2) Å«nÅ diÄ

(3) illÅ diÄ

(4) RÅmÄ

(5) RÅmae

(6) RÅmam

(7) paucÄ«s diÄbus

(8) eÄdem nocte

(9) multÅs diÄs

(10) in nÄvem

(11) in nÄve

(12) ex nÄve

(13) domum

(14) AthÄnÄ«s

(15) domÄ«

(16) AthÄnÄs

(17) domÅ

(18) paucÄs hÅrÄs

11. PaucÄ«s hÅrÄ«s RÅmam Ä«bimus. 12. NÅs ad urbem Ä«mus; illÄ« domum eunt. 13. Ut saepe fassÄ« sumus, tibi nÅn licet RÅmÄ AthÄnÄs Ä«re. 14. CÅ«r domÅ tam celeriter abÄ«stÄ«? 15. RÅmam veniunt ut cum frÄtre meÅ AthÄnÄs eant. 16. NÅlÄ«te abÄ«re RÅmÄ. 17. FrÄtre tuÅ RÅmae interfectÅ, hortÄbÄmur tÄ ut AthÄnÄs redÄ«rÄs. 18. SÄ« in fÄ«nÄs hostium hÅc tempore eat, paucÄ«s hÅrÄ«s pereat. 19. NegÄvit sÄ velle in istÄ terrÄ multÅs diÄs remanÄre. 20. DÄ«xistÄ« tÄ domum AthÄnÄ«s Å«nÄ hÅrÄ reditÅ«rum esse. 21. Ä tÄ petÅ ut ex nÄve ad Ä«nsulam brevÄ« tempore redeÄs. 22. EÄ«s diÄbus solitÄ« sumus AthÄnÄ«s esse. 23. SÄ« amÄ«cÄ«s eius RÅmae nocuissent, RÅmam brevissimÅ tempore redÄ«sset. 24. Cum frÄter meus domÄ« remanÄret, ego tamen in novÄs terrÄs domÅ abiÄ«. 25. RÅmÄnÄ«, sÄ« quid malÄ« loquÄ« volebant, saepe dÄ«cÄbant: âAbÄ« in malam rem.â 26. EÄ«s persuÄdet ut LatÄ«nae studeant.

27. Explain the syntax of the following words: (11) hÅrÄ«s, RÅmam; (12) domum; (13) RÅmÄ, AthÄnÄs, Ä«re; (14) domÅ; (15) RÅmam; (17) frÄtre; (18) tempore, eat, hÅrÄ«s; (19) velle, diÄs; (20) domum, AthÄnÄ«s, hÅrÄ, reditÅ«rum esse; (21) tempore, redeÄs; (22) diÄbus, AthÄnÄ«s; (23) amÄ«cÄ«s, RÅmae, redÄ«sset; (24) domÄ«, terrÄs, domÅ; (26) studeant.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXVIII

What does a relative clause with the indicative tell about the antecedent?

What does a relative clause with the subjunctive tell about its antecedent, and what is the nature of the antecedent?

What is the basic difference between the dative of indirect object and the dative of reference?

How are supines formed and what are their functions?

5. AmÄ«cus meus quÄ« cÅnsulem dÄfendit ipse erat vir clÄrissimus. 6. At nÄmÅ erat quÄ« istum hominem turpem dÄfenderet. 7. Quid est quod virÄ« plÅ«s metuant quam tyrannum? 8. Quis est quÄ« inter lÄ«bertÄtem et imperium tyrannÄ« dubitet? 9. RÅmae antiquae erant quÄ« pecÅ«niam plÅ«s quam rem pÅ«blicam amÄrent. 10. Abeat Ä patriÄ iste homÅ malus quÄ« odium omnium cÄ«vium bonÅrum passus est. 11. CatilÄ«na (= Catiline), quÄ« tantÄs Ä«nsidiÄs contrÄ rem pÅ«blicam fÄcerat, ex urbe Ä CicerÅne expulsus est. 12. IstÄ« ducÄ« in exsilium abeuntÄ« quae vÄ«ta potest esse iÅ«cunda? 13. Quis est quÄ« tantum dolÅrem ferre possit? 14. Nisi quis iÅ«cundus bonusque erit, vÄ«tam vÄrÄ fÄlÄ«cem mihi nÅn vÄ«vet. 15. CÅnsulÄ« nÅn crÄdent quÄ« opera turpia faciat. 16. NÅlÄ« crÄdere eÄ« quÄ« sit acerbus amÄ«cÄ«s. 17. CicerÅ erat cÅnsul quÄ« rem pÅ«blicam salÅ«tÄ« suae antepÅneret. 18. ScÄ«vÄrunt quÄrÄ cÅnsulem tam fortem sequÄ« vellÄmus. 19. Nihil sciÅ quod mihi facilius esse possit. 20. Ducem quaerÅ quem omnÄs laudent. 21. RÅmam Ä«bant rogÄtum lÄ«bertÄtem. 22. RÅmÄnÄ«, quÄ« decem rÄs pÅ«blicÄs GraecÄs exercitibus suÄ«s cÄperant, ipsÄ«âmÄ«rÄbile dictÅ«âGraecÄ«s artibus captÄ« sunt! 23. VirÄ«s antÄ«quÄ«s nihil erat quod melius esset quam virtÅ«s et sapientia. 24. Nihil metuendum est quod animÅ nocÄre nÅn possit.

25. Analyze the relative clauses in the following pair of sentences, showing how they differ in their force: 5 and 6.

26. Explain the syntax of the following words: (7) metuant; (8) dubitet; (9) RÅmae, amÄrent; (10) abeat, passus est; (11) fÄcerat; (12) ducÄ«, potest; (13) possit; (14) erit, mihi; (15) cÅnsulÄ«; (16) amÄ«cÄ«s; (17) salÅ«tÄ«, antepÅneret; (18) vellÄmus; (19) mihi, possit; (21) rogÄtum; (22) cÄperant, dictÅ«; (23) virÄ«s; (24) animÅ, possit.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XXXIX

(1) Define the term gerund.
(2) What is the ending of the gerund in English?
(3) How is the gerund declined in Latin?
(4) As a noun, what is the syntax of the gerund in Latin?
(5) What serves in place of the nominative of the gerund in Latin?

(1) What part of speech is the Latin gerundive?
(2) What mnemonic device may help you to remember this?
(3) As an adjective, what is the syntax of the gerundive?
(4) How is the gerundive declined?
(5) How can the gerundive be distinguished from the gerund in Latin usage (though not in English translation)?

(1) How is the Latin gerund to be translated?
(2) How is a noun-gerundive phrase usually best translated?
(3) For example, translate:

(A) Discimus legendÅ cum cÅ«rÄ (gerund).

(B) Discimus librÄ«s legendÄ«s cum cÅ«rÄ (gerundive).

4. ExperiendÅ discimus. 5. Ad discendum vÄnÄrunt. 6. SÄ discendÅ dedit. 7. DiscendÄ« causÄ ad lÅ«dum tuum vÄnÄrunt. 8. Puer cupidus discendÄ« ad lÅ«dum iit. 9. Metus moriendÄ« eum terrÄbat. 10. SpÄs vÄ«vendÄ« post mortem multÅs hortÄtur. 11. CÅgitandÅ eÅs superÄvit. 12. SÄ deditâ

(1) glÅriae quaerendae.

(2) bellÅ gerendÅ.

(3) pecÅ«niae faciendae.

(4) imperiÅ accipiendÅ.

(5) cÄ«vitÄtibus delendÄ«s.

(6) huic ducÄ« sequendÅ.

(7) patriae servandae.

(8) pÄcÄ« petendae.

(9) iniÅ«riÄ«s oppugnandÄ«s.

(10) librÄ«s scrÄ«bendÄ«s.

(11) librÄ«s legendÄ«s.

(12) philosophiae discendae.

(13) litterÄ«s LatÄ«nÄ«s discendÄ«s.

(14) vÄritÄtÄ« intellegendae.

(15) sapientiae quaerendae.

(16) hominibus adiuvandÄ«s.

13. RÅmam vÄnitâ

(1) ad hoc opus suscipiendum.

(2) ad lÅ«dÅs RÅmÄnÅs videndÅs.

(3) ad aedificia vetera videnda.

(4) ad pÄcem petendam.

(5) huius operis suscipiendÄ« causÄ.

(6) philosophiae discendae causÄ.

(7) novÅrum librÅrum legendÅrum causÄ.

(8) lÅ«dÅs vÄ«sum.

14. Librum scrÄ«psitâ

(1) dÄ dolÅre ferendÅ.

(2) dÄ metÅ« superandÅ.

(3) dÄ bonÄ vÄ«tÄ vÄ«vendÄ.

(4) dÄ rÄ pÅ«blicÄ gerendÄ.

(5) dÄ bellÅ gerendÅ.

(6) dÄ lÄ«bertÄte dÄfendendÄ.

(7) dÄ hostibus vincendÄ«s.

(8) dÄ dÅnÄ«s dandÄ«s.

15. SapientiÅrÄs fÄ«musâ

(1) LatÄ«nÄ«s litterÄ«s legendÄ«s.

(2) philosophiÄ discendÄ.

(3) vÄ«tÄ experiendÄ.

(4) metÅ« vincendÅ.

(5) vÄritÄte sequendÄ.

16. NÅs ipsÅs adiuvÄmusâ

(1) bonÄ«s librÄ«s semper legendÄ«s.

(2) virÄ«s miserÄ«s metÅ« lÄ«berandÄ«s.

(3) auxiliÅ offerendÅ.

(4) aliÄ«s adiuvandÄ«s.

17. Multum tempus cÅnsÅ«mpsitâ

(1) in cÅgitandÅ (loquendÅ, currendÅ).

(2) in hÄ«s operibus faciendÄ«s.

(3) in viÄ inveniendÄ.

(4) in exercitÅ« parandÅ.

(5) in cÅpiÄ«s parandÄ«s.

18. Tempus huic librÅ sÅlÄ« scrÄ«bendÅ habuit.

EXERCISES FOR Capvt XL

Explain the essential differences involved in introducing questions with -ne, nÅnne, and num.

What word is used to introduce a positive fear clause? a negative fear clause? Can you explain why this is the opposite of what one might expect?

In order for a noun to function as either a descriptive genitive or a descriptive ablative, what condition must be met?

4. Magnopere vereor ut imperÄtor nÅbÄ«s satis auxiliÄ« mittat. 5. Fuit fÄmina maximÄ virtÅ«te et fidÄ atque simillima mÄtrÄ«. 6. NÅlÄ« timÄre nÄ omnÄs virÄ« et fÄminae magnÅrum animÅrum RÅmÄ discÄdant. 7. Id quidem est facile dictÅ« sed difficile factÅ«! 8. Parentibus placitum domum vÄnÄrunt. 9. NÅnne vÄ«s audÄ«re aliquid bonÄ«? 10. VÄ«sne habÄre multum sapientiae? StudÄ LatÄ«nae! 11. ImperÄvit tribus mÄ«litibus ut pÄcem petÄ«tum RÅmam adÄ«rent. 12. Num dubitÄs hoc dÄ«cere, mÄ« amÄ«ce? 13. TÅ« mÄ hortÄris ut sim animÅ magnÅ et spem salÅ«tis habeam, sed timeÅ nÄ sim Ä«nfÄ«rmior. 14. Ego dÄ«vitiÄs sapientiae antepÅnÅ. NÅn enim arbitror hominÄs vÄ«tam fÄlÄ«cem sine cÅpiÄ pecÅ«niae reperÄ«re posse. 15. PlÅ«rimÄ« autem virÄ« dÄ«vitÄs multum metÅ«s sentiunt. 16. PauperÄs saepe sunt fÄlÄ«ciÅrÄs et minus metÅ«s habent. 17. PecÅ«nia ipsa nÅn est mala: sed rÄs mentis animÄ«que plÅ«s opis ad fÄlÄ«citer vÄ«vendum offerunt. 18. Novem ex ducibus nÅs hortÄtÄ« sunt ut plÅ«s auxiliÄ« praestÄrÄmus. 19. QuÄ«nque ex custÅdiÄ«s interfectÄ«s, pater meus cum duÅbus ex fÄ«liÄ«s et cum magnÅ numerÅ amÄ«cÅrum in illam terram lÄ«beram fÅ«git. 20. Numquam satis ÅtiÄ« habÄbit; at aliquid ÅtiÄ« melius est quam nihil. 21. NostrÄ«s temporibus omnÄs plÅ«s metÅ«s et minus speÄ« habÄmus. 22. Magna fidÄs et virtÅ«s omnibus virÄ«s reperiendae sunt.

KEY TO SELF-TUTORIAL EXERCISES

KEY FOR Capvt I

(1) he, she, it; (2) we; (3) I; (4) they; (5) you (sg.); (6) you (pl.)

The forms are present active infinitives of the 2nd conjugation. (1) to advise / warn; (2) to see; (3) to be strong; (4) to owe.

The forms are present active infinitives of the 1st conjugation. (1) to call; (2) to save; (3) to give; (4) to think; (5) to praise; (6) to love; (7) to err.

The forms are present active imperatives 2nd person singular of the 1st or the 2nd conjugations. (1) call; (2) save; (3) give; (4) think; (5) praise; (6) love; (7) advise / warn; (8) see; (9) be strong / good-bye.

The forms are present active imperatives 2nd person plural of the 1st or the 2nd conjugations. (1) call; (2) save; (3) give; (4) think; (5) praise; (6) love; (7) advise / warn; (8) see; (9) be strong / good-bye.

1) he / she / it calls, is calling, does call; (2) we think; (3) they love; (4) you (sg.) owe / ought; (5) he sees; (6) they see; (7) we owe / ought; (8) you (sg.) are strong; (9) you (pl.) err / are mistaken; (10) we see; (11) he / she / it loves; (12) you (pl.) see; (13) you (sg.) err; (14) they give; (15) we save; (16) he gives; (17) they love; (18) you (sg.) see.

7. They warn me if I err. 8. He warns me if they err. 9. Warn me if he errs. 10. You (sg.) ought to warn me. 11. You (pl.) ought to save me. 12. They ought not to praise me. 13. âWhat does he give?â âHe often gives nothing.â 14. They often call me and advise me. 15. I see nothing. What do you see? 16. Praise me, please, if I do not make a mistake. 17. If you (pl.) are well, we are well. 18. If he is well, I am well. 19. If he (she) loves me, he (she) ought to praise me. 20. Save me. 21. I ought not to err. 22. What ought we to praise? 23. He sees; he ponders; he advises.

KEY FOR Capvt II

In classical Latin there was no regular definite or indefinite article. The words the and a have to be added in the English translation according to the sense of a Latin passage. Thus puella may mean the girl or a girl, and puellae may mean the girls or girls according to the Latin context. Often in an isolated sentence the and a can be used interchangeably, or perhaps no article at all need be used.

(1) acc. case; (2) gen. case; (3) nom. case; (4) abl.; (5) voc.; (6) dat.

(1) acc. pl. as direct object of a verb; (2) nom. sg. as subject of a verb or voc. sg. for direct address; (3) acc. sg. as direct object; (4) nom. pl. subject, or voc. for direct address.

(1) gen. pl., of; (2) abl. sg., by / with / from, etc.; (3) gen. sg., of; dat. sg., to / for; nom. pl.; voc. pl.; (4) dat. pl., to / for; abl. pl., by / with / from, etc.

(1) girl, direct obj. of verb; (2) girl, subject or vocative; (3) girls, object; (4) girls, subj. or voc.; (5) countries, obj.; (6) country, obj.; (7) country, subj. or voc.; (8) countries, subj. or voc.; (9) money, obj.; (10) money, subj. or voc.; (11) penalties, obj.; (12) penalty, obj.

(1) of the girl, girlâs, or to / for the girl; (2) of the girls, girlsâ; (3) O fatherland; (4) of or to / for the fatherland; (5) by / with, etc., money; (6) of or to / for money; (7) to / for or by / with, etc., penalties; (8) by / with etc., a penalty; (9) of penalties.

(1) multae pecÅ«niae, multam pecÅ«niam; (2) magnae fÄmae, magnÄ fÄmÄ; (3) vÄ«tae meae, vÄ«tae meae; (4) fortÅ«nam tuam, fortÅ«nÄs tuÄs; (5) magnae patriae, magnÄrum patriÄrum; (6) fortÅ«nÄ meÄ, fortÅ«nÄ«s meÄ«s; (7) magnae poenae, magnÄ«s poenÄ«s; (8) multÄ«s philosophiÄ«s, multÄ«s philosophiÄ«s.

(1) multÄ pecÅ«niÄ; (2) multÄrum puellÄrum; (3) meae patriae; (4) magnam vÄ«tam; (5) tuÄ«s poenÄ«s; (6) multae patriae; (7) multÄ«s puellÄ«s; (8) meae vÄ«tae; (9) Å fortÅ«na; (10) puellae; (11) puellÄrum; (12) puellae; (13) puellÄs; (14) puellae.

9. Farewell (goodbye), my native land. 10. The fortune of the girl (the girlâs fortune) is great. 11. The girl is praising the fortune of your (sg.) country. 12. O girl, save your country. 13. Many girls love money. 14. You (pl.) are giving nothing to the girl, or you give nothing to a girl. 15. He sees the money of the girl, or the girlâs money. 16. You (sg.) do not see the girlsâ money. 17. We ought to warn the girls. 18. They ought to praise the girl. 19. Life gives (good) fortune to many girls. 20. You (sg.) are saving my life by or with your money. 21. Fame is nothing without fortune. 22. You (pl.) do not like life without money. 23. A country is not strong without fame and fortune. 24. You (sg.) ought not to praise the anger of the girls. 25. We like a life without punishments. 26. We are not strong without philosophy. 27. What is life without philosophy?

KEY FOR Capvt III

(1) acc. sg., obj.; (2) nom. pl. as subj., voc. pl. for direct address; (3) nom. sg., subj.; (4) acc. pl. obj.; (5) voc. sg., direct address.

(1) dat. sg., to / for; abl. sg., by / with, etc.; (2) gen. pl., of; (3) gen. sg., of; (4) dat. pl., to / for; abl. pl., by / with, etc.

(1) sons, obj.; (2) sons, subj. or direct address; (3) son, obj.; (4) people, obj.; (5) people, direct address; (6) people, subj.; (7) man, subj. or direct address; (8) men, obj.; (9) men, subj. or direct address; (10) man, obj.; (11) friend, direct address; (12) friends, subj. or direct address; (13) friends, obj.; (14) friend, obj.

(1) of my sons; (2) to / for my son, by / with, etc., my son; (3) of the Roman people; (4) to / for the Roman people, by / with, etc., the Roman people; (5) to / for the men, by / with, etc., the men; (6) of the man; (7) of the men; (8) of a few friends; (9) to / for or by / with, etc., a few friends; (10) to / for or by / with, etc., my friend; (11) of my friend; (12) to / for or by / with, etc., many boys.

(1) populÄ« RÅmÄnÄ«, populÅ RÅmÄnÅ; (2) magnÅs virÅs, magnÄ«s virÄ«s; (3) puerÄ«s meÄ«s, puerÄ«s meÄ«s; (4) magnÅ numerÅ, magnÅ numerÅ; (5) magne vir, magnÄ« virÄ«; (6) fÄ«liÄ« meÄ«, fÄ«liÅrum meÅrum.

(1) multÅrum puerÅrum; (2) populÅ RÅmÄnÅ; (3) fÄ«liÅs meÅs; (4) Å fÄ«liÄ« meÄ«; (5) magnum numerum; (6) magnÅ numerÅ; (7) Å vir magne; (8) multÄ«s puerÄ«s; (9) vir magnus; (10) populÄ« RÅmÄnÄ«.

7. Good-bye, my friend. 8. The Roman people praise your (sg.) sonâs wisdom. 9. O great man, save the Roman people. 10. The number of the Roman people is great. 11. Many boys love girls. 12. You (pl.) are giving nothing to my son. 13. I see men in the field. 14. You (sg.) see the friend of my son. 15. He does not see your (sg.) sonsâ friend. 16. We ought to warn my sons. 17. They ought to praise your (sg.) son. 18. Life gives fame to few men. 19. You (sg.) consider me in the number (circle) of your friends. 20. Great men often have few friends. 21. My friend is always thinking. 22. The son of a great man is not always a great man. 23. We do not always see (understand) the wisdom of great men. 24. You (pl.) ought to praise philosophy, the wisdom of great men.

KEY FOR Capvt IV

Nom. sg. in -um; nom. and acc. pl. in -a. Actually the vocative should also be added here; but henceforth, since aside from the singular of 2nd-declension masculines in -us the vocatives follow the rule of having the same form as the nominative, little specific mention is made of the vocative.

(1) nom. pl. as subject; acc. pl. as obj.; (2) nom. sg. as subj.; acc. sg. as obj.

(1) dat. sg., to / for; abl. sg., by / with, etc.; (2) gen. pl., of; (3) gen. sg., of; (4) dat. pl., to / for; abl. pl., by / with, etc.

(1) wars, subj. or obj.; (2) war, subj. or obj.; (3) duty, subj. or obj.; (4) duties, subj. or obj.; (5) dangers, subj. or obj. Of course any of these forms could also be vocative.

(1) of evil wars; (2) to / for evil war, by / with, etc., evil war; (3) of evil war; (4) to / for evil wars, by / with, etc., evil wars; (5) of great duty or service; (6) to / for great duties, by / with, etc., great duties; (7) to / for small danger, by / with, etc., small danger.

(1) bella parva, bella parva; (2) Åtium bonum, Åtia bona; (3) perÄ«culÄ« magnÄ«, perÄ«culÅrum magnÅrum; (4) officium vÄrum, officiÅ vÄrÅ.

(1) Å bellum malum; (2) officiÅ magnÅ; (3) perÄ«culÅ magnÅ; (4) Åtium bonum; (5) multÄ«s bellÄ«s; (6) ÅtiÄ« bonÄ«; (7) perÄ«culÄ«s multÅrum bellÅrum; (8) bella parva; (9) bella parva; (10) Å bella stulta; (11) bellum parvum.

8. Peace (leisure) is good. 9. Many wars do not preserve peace. 10. The danger is great. 11. We are in great danger. 12. And leisure often has dangers. 13. Life is not without many dangers. 14. Good men love peace. 15. The foolish man praises the dangers of war. 16. Often we do not preserve the peace by war. 17. The Roman people do not always have good peace. 18. They often save the fatherland and peace by small wars. 19. Many girls are pretty. 20. True friends are few. 21. My friend is a man of great service. 22. The duties of a teacher are many and great. 23. You (sg.) are a man of little leisure. 24. You (pl.) are men of great care. 25. We ought to give attention to duty without delay. 26. Life is nothing without eyes.

KEY FOR Capvt V

future: -Å, -s, -t, -mus, -tis, -nt; imperfect: -m, -s, -t, -mus, -tis, -nt.

They are the same in the future, but the imperfect has -m instead of -Å in the first pers. sg.

future: -bi- (-b- in 1st pers. sg.; -bu- in 3d pers. pl.); imperfect: -bÄ- (with the -a- shortened before -m, -t, and -nt).

(1) we were; (2) he will; (3) you (pl.) will; (4) I shall; (5) they will; (6) he was.

By learning the vocabulary form of the adjective: lÄ«ber, lÄ«bera, lÄ«berum, pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum; and often by learning English derivatives.

They show whether the e of a masculine in -er survives throughout the rest of the paradigm; liberty, lÄ«ber, lÄ«bera, lÄ«berum; pulchritude, pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum.

(1) they were remaining, remained; (2) he will remain; (3) we shall remain; (4) I was giving, I gave; (5) you (pl.) will give; (6) he will give; (7) you (sg.) will see; (8) we shall see; (9) they were calling, called; (10) you (sg.) will call; (11) you (sg.) will have; (12) they were having, had.

(1) dabimus; (2) manÄbÄs; (3) vidÄbunt; (4) vocÄbimus; (5) vocÄbat; (6) vidÄbitis; (7) vidÄbÅ; (8) servÄbant; (9) habÄbimus; (10) habÄbÄmus; (11) habÄbit; (12) habet.

9. Our teacher praises me and he will praise you tomorrow (sg.). 10. Free men were overcoming our dangers. 11. Our sons love pretty girls. 12. Our friend will not stay in the company (number) of fools. 13. We used to have many faults and always shall have. 14. Great dangers do not overcome our courage. 15. Our beautiful country is free. 16. You (pl.) are free men; you will have a beautiful country. 17. Free teachers were giving attention to duty. 18. Therefore, we shall overcome evil men in our country. 19. If you (sg.) overcome (lit., will overcome) your anger, you will overcome yourself. 20. Because of our courage many men are free. 21. Free fatherland, we always used to love you and we always shall love (you). 22. You (pl.) will not preserve wisdom by means of money. 23. Does your (sg.) soul possess enough wisdom?

KEY FOR Capvt VI

See Capvt VI, GRAMMATICA, s.v. âComplementary Infinitive.â

(1) we; (2) they; (3) you (sg.); (4) he, she, it; (5) I; (6) I; (7) you (pl.).

See in Chapter VI.

(1) he, she, it was; (2) he, etc., was able; (3) he will be; (4) he will be able; (5) we are; (6) we are able; (7) we were able; (8) we shall be able; (9) I was able; (10) I was; (11) I shall be; (12) I shall be able; (13) they will be; (14) they will be able; (15) they were able; (16) to be; (17) to be able.

(1) sumus; (2) erÄmus; (3) erimus; (4) poterimus; (5) potest; (6) poterit; (7) poterat; (8) posse; (9) poterant; (10) possunt; (11) poterunt; (12) sunt; (13) esse; (14) poteram.

6. Your (pl.) country was free. 7. I was able to be a tyrant. 8. Your friend will be a tyrant. 9. Where (there) is a tyrant, there men cannot be free. 10. He could not remain in our country yesterday. 11. Tyrants will always have many faults. 12. We were not able to overcome the tyrants. 13. We ought to overcome our tyrant. 14. The tyrant was able to overcome (the) good men; but he will not be able to remain there. 15. You (pl.) will be able to see the dangers of a tyrant. 16. We cannot tolerate the faults of tyrants. 17. You (sg.) were not tolerating (did not tolerate) the treachery of the tyrant. 18. The peace in your (pl.) country cannot be perpetual. 19. You (sg.) ought to warn free men about tyrants. 20. Your (pl.) teacher always used to like (liked) fine books. 21. Good and true books were able to save the country. 22. You (pl.) will be able to save your country with good books. 23. Tyrants will not be able to overcome the wisdom of good books. 24. Bad men cannot tolerate good books.

KEY FOR Capvt VII

No.

Yes: nom. and acc. pl.

(1) nom. and acc. pl. of m. and f.; (2) nom. and acc. pl. n.; (3) acc. sg. m. and f.

(1) dat. and abl. pl.; (2) dat. sg.; (3) abl. sg.; (4) acc. sg. m. and f.; (5) gen. pl.; (6) gen. sg.; (7) nom. and acc. pl. m. and f.

(1) magnum tempus; (2) magna virtÅ«s; (3) magnus labor; (4) magna cÄ«vitÄs; (5) magnus mÅs; (6) magna pÄx; (7) magnus rÄx; (8) magnum corpus; (9) magna vÄritÄs; (10) magnus amor.

(1) by / with much labor; (2) to / for much labor; (3) of much labor; (4) many labors (nom.); (5) of perpetual peace; (6) by / with perpetual peace; (7) to / for perpetual peace; (8) of small states; (9) a small state (acc.); (10) small states (acc.); (11) small states (nom.); (12) by a small state; (13) bad times (nom. or acc. pl.); (14) bad time (nom. or acc. sg.); (15) to / for a bad time; (16) of bad times; (17) of a bad time; (18) to / for your habit; (19) by your habit; (20) of your habit; (21) your character (nom.); (22) your character (acc.); (23) of your character.

(1) magnae virtÅ«tÄ«; (2) magna virtÅ«s; (3) magnÄs virtÅ«tÄs; (4) magnÄrum virtÅ«tum; (5) magnÄ virtÅ«te; (6) tempus nostrum; (7) tempora nostra; (8) tempora nostra; (9) temporibus nostrÄ«s; (10) temporÄ« nostrÅ; (11) temporis nostrÄ«; (12) temporum nostrÅrum; (13) amÅrem meum; (14) amÅrÄs meÅs; (15) amÅrÄ« meÅ; (16) amÅre meÅ; (17) amÅris meÄ«; (18) amÅrum meÅrum.

8. My time for leisure is small. 9. Your (sg.) courage is great. 10. Money is nothing without good character. 11. The virtues of many human beings are great. 12. The character of a good man will be good. 13. They will give a letter to the man. 14. We were able to see many men in the great state. 15. We used to see (saw, were seeing) a great love of money in many men. 16. Few men give attention to excellence. 17. Our state will give peace to many men. 18. Peace cannot be perpetual. 19. Without good peace the states of our times will not be strong. 20. Times are bad after many wars. 21. In many states and lands peace could not be strong. 22. Without great labor the man will have nothing. 23. The beautiful maiden loves friends of good character. 24. Men of great courage were daring to overcome tyrants. 25. Love of country was strong in our state.

KEY FOR Capvt VIII

(1) Future. (2) It may be helpful to note that our word âfutureâ ends in -e. The -a- in the 1st sg. is the only exception among six forms.

(1) Present. (2) The vowel alternation is the same seen in the future of 1stâ2nd conjugation verbs.

(1) 1st pers. pl. pres.; (2) 2nd sg. fut.; (3) 3d pl. pres.; (4) 3d sg. fut.; (5) 2nd pl. pres.; (6) 1st pl. fut.; (7) 1st sg. pres.; (8) 3d pl. fut.; (9) 3d sg. pres.; (10) 2nd pl. fut.; (11) 2nd sg. pres.; (12) 1st sg. fut.; (13) 3d pl. impf.

(1) imper. sg.; (2) pres. infin.; (3) imper. pl.

(1) they were sending; (2) he is sending; (3) they are sending; (4) I shall send; (5) send (sg.); (6) we are sending; (7) you (pl.) were sending; (8) you (sg.) are sending; (9) send (pl.); (10) you (pl.) send; (11) he will send; (12) we shall send; (13) he does; (14) they will do; (15) they are doing; (16) you (pl.) will do; (17) we were doing; (18) I shall do; (19) we shall do; (20) you (sg.) are doing; (21) you (pl.) are doing; (22) he will write; (23) they are writing; (24) I shall write; (25) I was writing; (26) you (pl.) are writing; (27) we shall write; (28) he is writing; (29) you (sg.) are writing; (30) they will write; (31) write!

(1) pÅnÄbant; (2) pÅnÄmus; (3) pÅne; (4) pÅnit; (5) pÅnent; (6) pÅnam; (7) pÅnÄbÄs; (8) pÅnÄtis; (9) pÅnite; (10) pÅnimus; (11) pÅnitis; (12) pÅnet.

7. What are they doing? What will you (pl.) do? 8. They were leading the man to me. 9. Lead (sg.) the man to me, and I shall thank the man. 10. While the tyrant leads the troops, we can do nothing. 11. He is writing a letter to the maiden. 12. You (sg.) were writing a great book. 13. You (sg.) will write good books. 14. We shall write books about peace. 15. Do you (pl.) have an abundance of good books? 16. The teacher teaches many boys. 17. The boys do not thank the teacher. 18. Few men were thanking our state. 19. The tyrant will lead great forces out of our state. 20. A great abundance of money does not lead men to wisdom. 21. Will good books lead many men to reason? 22. Do we often lead men to reason? 23. Reason can lead men to a good life. 24. Are you (pl.) leading a good life? 25. Always thank (pl.) a good friend.

KEY FOR Capvt IX

See in Chapter IX.

(1) to / for that (m., f., n.); those (nom. m.)

(2) that (nom. f.); those (nom. / acc. n.)

(3) of that (m., f., n.)

(4) that (nom. m.)

(5) by that (f.)

(6) that (nom. / acc. n.)

(7) of those (m., n.)

(8) those (nom. f.)

(9) those (acc. m.)

(10) to / for by / with / from those (m., f., n.)

(11) by that (m., n.)

(12) of those (f.)

(13) by this (m., n.)

(14) this (nom. / acc. n.)

(15) this (nom. f.); these (nom. / acc. n.)

(16) these (nom. f.)

(17) by this (f.)

(18) this (acc. f.)

(19) of this (m., f., n.)

(20) this (acc. m.)

(21) these (acc. m.)

(22) to this (m., f., n.)

(23) of these (m., n.)

(24) these (acc. f.)

(25) to / for these; by these (m., f., n.)

(26) of one (m., f., n.)

(27) to / for one (m., f., n.)

(28) by one (f.)

(29) to / for the whole (m., f., n.); whole (nom. pl. m.)

(30) of the whole (m., f., n.)

(31) the whole (nom. f.); whole (nom. / acc. pl. n.)

(32) the whole (acc. m.; nom. / acc. n.)

(33) of no (sg. m., f., n.)

(34) to / for no (sg. m., f., n.); no (nom. pl. m.)

(35) no (nom. sg. f.; nom. / acc. pl. n.)

(36) no (acc. pl. m.)

See text and examples in Chapter IX.

(1) haec puella

(2) hae puellae

(3) haec tempora

(4) huic temporÄ«

(5) huic puerÅ

(6) huius temporis

(7) illÄ«us temporis

(8) hÅc librÅ

(9) illÅ librÅ

(10) illa puella

(11) illa tempora

(12) illa tempora

(13) illud tempus

(14) huic cÄ«vitÄtÄ« sÅlÄ«

(15) huius cÄ«vitÄtis sÅlÄ«us

(16) illÄ« puerÅ sÅlÄ«

(17) illÄ« puellae sÅlÄ«

(18) illÄ«us puellae sÅlÄ«us

(19) tyrannÅrum sÅlÅrum

(20) tÅtam cÄ«vitÄtem

(21) tÅtÄ«us patriae

(22) tÅtÄ« patriae

(23) nÅ«llÄ«us ratiÅnis

(24) nÅ«llam ratiÅnem

(25) nÅ«llae puellae

(26) nÅ«llÄ« librÅ

(27) nÅ«llÅs librÅs

(28) Å«nÄ« cÄ«vitÄtÄ«

(29) Å«nÄ« puellae

(30) Å«nÄ«us temporis

(31) Å«nÄ«us bellÄ«

(32) alterÄ« librÅ

(33) aliÅ librÅ

5. These men will lead (lead, were leading) the whole state. 6. That man will see (sees, was seeing / saw) these things in that land. 7. In that book I am writing (I shall write, I was writing) those things about this man. 8. One man is leading (will lead) those forces into this land. 9. The teacher gives these things to the other boy. 10. We are writing (shall write) this book about another war. 11. The whole country thanks (will thank, was thanking) this man alone. 12. They are now giving their entire attention to that plan. 13. This manâs friend will save this state by that plan. 14. The other friend will lead (his) entire life in another land. 15. This man alone was able to warn me about the faults of this tyrant. 16. You (pl.) had no forces in the other land. 17. Those men alone see no dangers in this plan. 18. You (sg.) dare to praise not only the character but also the treachery of that man. 19. In fact, on account of the treachery of one man this state was not strong.

KEY FOR Capvt X

(1) 3d; (2) 2nd; (3) 4th; (4) 1st.

(1) 3d pl. pres.; (2) 2nd sg. fut.; (3) 2nd sg. pres.; (4) 1st pl. impf.; (5) 1st pl. pres.; (6) imper. sg.; (7) 2nd pl. fut.; (8) imper. pl.; (9) 2nd pl. pres.; (10) 1st sg. pres.; (11) 3d sg. pres.; (12) imper. sg. (13) 2nd sg. impf. Note: nos. 3, 5, 6, 8, 9 are 4th only; 12 is 3d only. The chief difference is the -Ä«- of the 4th and the -i- of the 3d. See in Chapter X.

(1) pres. infin.; (2) imper. sg.; (3) short stem vowels in 2nd sg. and 1st and 2nd pl. of pres. indic. and in the imper. pl.

(1) he will come

(2) he is coming

(3) they are coming

(4) they will come

(5) you (sg.) hear

(6) you (pl.) will hear

(7) you (pl.) hear

(8) come (pl.)

(9) you (sg.) will come

(10) come (sg.)

(11) to come

(12) he makes / does

(13) he will make / do

(14) we shall make

(15) we are making

(16) they make

(17) you (sg.) make

(18) I shall make

(19) you (sg.) will make

(20) to make

(1) sentiam

(2) sentiÄmus

(3) sentit

(4) sentÄ«tis

(5) sentient

(6) sentiunt

(7) sentÄ«re

(8) sentÄ«

(9) sentiet

(10) sentÄ«mus

(11) iacit

(12) iaciet

(13) iaciam

(14) iacimus

(15) iace

(16) iacitis

(17) iaciÄmus

(18) iacite

(19) iacere

(20) iacis

6. We were fleeing from this land. 7. Flee (sg.) with your daughter. 8. They will flee into that place. 9. Time flees; the hours flee; old age is coming. 10. Come (pl.) with your friends. 11. They were coming into your country. 12. O great man, come into our state. 13. You (sg.) will find your daughter in that state. 14. They can find little money in the streets. 15. The tyrant is finding a way into this state. 16. You (pl.) will capture those men there with (their) friends. 17. We are coming to you with great forces. 18. Will he find much fame and glory there? 19. That man was always making war. 20. Those men (of yours or such men) will not make peace. 21. Many men do those things but do not do these things. 22. We are doing and will do our duty. 23. I shall make a great supply of books. 24. The boys were living with that good man. 25. In the books of ancient men you (pl.) will find much philosophy and wisdom.

KEY FOR Capvt XI

(1) is, ea, id and eÄ«, eae, ea; (2) ego and nÅs; (3) tÅ« and vÅs.

(1) to / for you (pl.); by / with / from you; (2) to / for us; by / w / from us; (3) we (nom.); us (acc.); (4) you (nom. pl.); you (acc. pl.); (5) of you (sg.); (6) of me; (7) to / for me; (8) to / for you (sg.); (9) you (acc. sg.); by / w / from you; (10) me (acc.); by / w / from me.

(1) them (m.); (2) them (f.); (3) their (m., n.); (4) their (f.); (5) his, her, its; (6) by / with / from her; (7) she (nom.); they (nom. and acc. pl. n.); (8) by / with / from him, it; (9) to / for him, her, it; they (m. nom.); (10) to / for them (m., f., n.); by / with / from them; (11) they (nom. f.); (12) it (nom. or acc. sg.). N.B. in the sg. any one of the three Latin genders of is, ea, id may be translated by it when the antecedent of the pronoun is a word which in English is neuter. For instance, suppose that in a preceding sentence the word pÄx appears. Then we read: Sine eÄ nÅ«lla cÄ«vitÄs valet. The Latin feminine eÄ becomes English it because in English peace is regarded as neuter.

(1) eius

(2) eius

(3) eÅrum

(4) eÄrum

(5) eÄs

(6) eÅs

(7) ea

(8) eius

(9) eÄ«

(10) eÄ«

(11) eÄ

(12) eÅ

(13) vÅbÄ«s

(14) tibi

(15) eÄ«

(16) ea

(17) eae

(18) eÄ«

(19) id

(20) vÅs

(21) tÅ«

(22) vÅs

(23) nÅs

(24) nÅs

(25) nÅbÄ«s

(26) ego

(27) mihi

5. These men will give it to you (sg.). 6. I was giving it to you (pl.). 7. You (pl.) will give this gift to them. 8. I shall give the same thing to him (her, it). 9. We shall give them (= those things) to him (her). 10. That man will give it to me. 11. We shall give you (pl.) his books. 12. You (sg.) will give us their (m.) books. 13. We shall give their money to you (sg.). 14. They will give his (her) money to me. 15. We shall send these / those books to her. 16. I shall send his (her) book to you (sg.). 17. That man, however, was sending their money to us. 18. We are sending them (f.) with her. 19. I am sending him with them. 20. We shall send them with his (her) friends. 21. You (sg.) will send me with their friend. 22. They were sending you (pl.) with me to his friend. 23. He is sending us with you (sg.) into their land. 24. They will send them (f.) with us to their friends. 25. I shall send him with you (pl.) to their friends. 26. They will send you (sg.) with him to me.

KEY FOR Capvt XII

(1) pres. act. indic.; (2) pres. act. infin.; (3) perf. act. indic.; (4) perf. pass. partic.

(1) mittÅ, pres. act. indic., I send

(2) mittere, pres. act. infin., to send

(3) mÄ«sÄ«, perf. act. indic., I sent

(4) missum, perf. pass. partic., having been sent, sent

The perfect is like a âsnapshotâ of a past, completed action; the imperfect looks at continuing or progressive past action, like a video.

(1) mittÅ

(2) laudÅ

(3) vincÅ

(4) dÄ«cÅ

(5) faciÅ

(6) agÅ

(7) sum

(8) dÅ

(9) sum

(10) agÅ

(11) remaneÅ

(12) scrÄ«bÅ

(13) sum

(14) faciÅ

(15) fugiÅ

(16) dÄ«cÅ

(17) sum

(18) vÄ«vÅ

(19) faciÅ

(20) videÅ

(1) you (pl. perf.)â¦; (2) he (perf.)â¦; (3) they (perf.)â¦; (4) you (sg. perf.)â¦; (5) we (perf.)â¦; (6) he hadâ¦; (7) we shall haveâ¦; (8) we hadâ¦; (9) you (sg.) hadâ¦; (10) they will havev (11) they hadâ¦; (12) he will haveâ¦; (13) you (pl.) hadâ¦.

(1) they saw, were seeing

(2) they had seen

(3) you (sg.) saw

(4) he did

(5) he was doing

(6) we had done

(7) we did

(8) we shall do

(9) they did

(10) you (sg.) lived

(11) they lived

(12) he will conquer

(13) he conquered

(14) we conquered

(15) we conquer

(16) you (sg.) gave

(17) you (pl.) had given

(18) we gave

(19) he flees

(20) he fled

(21) they flee

(22) they fled

(23) he saved

(24) they saved

(25) you (pl.) saved

(26) he had saved

(27) he will have saved

(28) we remained

(29) we had remained

(30) he came

(31) he comes

(32) you (pl.) were coming

(33) you (pl.) came

(34) they came

(35) they come

(36) they had come

7. Those men had fled (will flee; are fleeing; were fleeing; fled). 8. These men remained (remain; will remain; were remaining; had remained). 9. The king had conquered (is conquering; conquered; will conquer) Asia. 10. The kings conquered (will conquer; are conquering; had conquered) Asia. 11. Kings possessed (possess; will possess; had possessed) Asia. 12. Caesar had come (came; is coming; will come) into the same land. 13. Caesar said (says; had said; will say) the same things. 14. You (pl.) gave (will give; were giving; had given) us peace. 15. You (sg.) sent (will send; are sending; had sent) a letter to her. 16. We saw (see; had seen) them in the same street. 17. He had lived (lived; will live) a long time. 18. You (sg.) had done (will do; did; are doing) it well. 19. I saved (shall save; was saving; had saved) their (his) state. 20. They found (had found; will find) him in the same place. 21. God had given (gave; gives; will give) liberty to men. 22. They thanked (will thank; were thanking; had thanked; thank) me. 23. You (pl.) were (were; are; will be; had been) free men.

KEY FOR Capvt XIII

See in Chapter XIII, s.v. âReflexive Pronouns.â

See in Chapter XIII, s.v. âDeclension of Reflexive Pronouns.â

In pronouns of the first and the second persons.

(1) to / for myself.

(2) yourself (sg. acc.); by / with / from yourself.

(3) to / for ourselves; by / with / from ourselves.

(4) to / for himself (herself, itself); to / for themselves.

(5) yourselves (acc.).

(6) himself (acc.); by / with / from himself; themselves (acc.); by / with / from themselves.

(7) to / for yourselves; by / with / from yourselves.

Since suus, -a, -um is an adjective, it must agree in number with the noun which it modifies. Since suus is a reflexive, it means his own or their own according to whether the subject of the verb is singular or plural. See, for example, sentences 15 and 20 below.

EÅrum and eius are fixed genitives of possession; and therefore, they do not, like suus, agree with the nouns on which they depend. See, for example, sentences 16â19 below.

See in Chapter XIII, s.v. âThe Intensive Pronoun.â SÄ, being reflexive, is used in the predicate and refers to the subject. Ipse can be used to emphasize a noun or pronoun in any part of a sentence. See, for example, sentences 27, 28, and 31 below.

8. Caesar saved them. 9. Caesar was saving him (= another person). 10. Caesar saved himself. 11. The Romans saved themselves. 12. The Romans saved them (= others). 13. The Romans saved him. 14. Caesar saved his own friend. 15. Caesar saved his own friends. 16. Caesar saved his (= anotherâs) friend. 17. Caesar saved his (= anotherâs) friends. 18. Caesar saved their friend. 19. Caesar saved their friends. 20. The Romans saved their (own) friend. 21. The Romans saved their (own) friends. 22. The Romans saved their (= othersâ) friend. 23. The Romans saved their (= othersâ) friends. 24. The Romans saved his friend. 25. The Romans saved his friends. 26. Caesar himself saved him. 27. Caesar himself saved himself. 28. They saved Caesar himself. 29. They were saving the friend of Caesar himself. 30. They saved the friend of the Romans themselves. 31. The friend of Caesar himself saved himself. 32. The friends of Caesar himself saved themselves. 33. The friend of Caesar himself saved him. 34. Caesarâs friends themselves saved him. 35. They did not save us. 36. We saved ourselves. 37. We saved the Romans themselves. 38. The Romans themselves did not save you. 39. You (sg.) saved yourself. 40. You (sg.) saved the Romans themselves. 41. He was giving nothing to me. 42. I gave nothing to myself. 43. He gave nothing to himself. 44. They gave nothing to themselves. 45. They gave nothing to them (= others). 46. They gave nothing to him. 47. I conquered myself. 48. They conquered me. 49. They conquered their (= othersâ) anger. 50. They conquered their own anger. 51. He conquered his own anger. 52. He conquered his own sons. 53. They conquered their own sons.

KEY FOR Capvt XIV

In the gen. pl.

-Ä« in abl. sg.; -ia in nom. and acc. pl.

(1) by / with / from art

(2) of the arts

(3) arts (nom. or acc.)

(4) to / for the sea; by / with / from the sea

(5) to / for the seas; by / with / from the seas

(6) the sea (nom. or acc.)

(7) the seas (nom. or acc.)

(8) bodies (nom. or acc.)

(9) of bodies

(10) of a part

(11) to / for parts; by / with / from parts

(12) of parts

(13) by / with / from / the city

(14) to / for the city

(15) of cities

(16) cities (nom. or acc.)

(17) of the kings

(18) to / for the king

(19) names (nom. or acc.)

(20) animals (nom. or acc.)

(21) to / for an animal; by / with / from an animal

(22) of an animal

(23) of animals

(24) of strength

(25) men (acc.)

(26) of the man; men (nom.)

(27) strength (nom. or acc. pl.)

(28) to / for men; by / with / from men

(29) force (nom.); of force

(30) force (acc.)

(31) to / for strength; by / with / from strength

(32) to / for force; by / with / from force

(2); (4) as abl.; (7); (12); (15); (20); (21) as abl; (23); (24); (30); (32) as abl.

(1) vÄ« magnÄ

(2) virum magnum

(3) vÄ«rium magnÄrum

(4) vÄ« magnae

(5) cÄ«vium multÅrum

(6) cÄ«ve bonÅ

(7) cÄ«vibus multÄ«s

(8) maria multa

(9) marÄ« magnÅ

(10) mare magnum

(11) vim magnam

(12) virÅrum multÅrum

(13) vÄ«ribus magnÄ«s

(14) vÄ«rÄs magnÄs

(1) accompaniment; (2) means; (3) manner; (4) means

(1) they ran (currÅ); (2) we were running (currÅ); (3) you (sg.) ran (currÅ); (4) we had dragged (trahÅ); (5) he will drag (trahÅ); (6) they are dragging (trahÅ); (7) he was managing (gerÅ); (8) he manages (gerÅ); (9) they manage (gerÅ); (10) we shall manage (gerÅ); (11) they hold (teneÅ); (12) they will hold (teneÅ); (13) they held (teneÅ); (14) we held (teneÅ).

8. He waged many wars with the Romans. 9. They were managing the state with great wisdom. 10. He himself held the state by the power of troops. 11. Those animals dragged many men into the sea. 12. You (sg.) said this with great skill. 13. We ran with care (carefully) across the city. 14. He was coming to us with a large part of the citizens. 15. He will conquer the rights of the citizens by force. 16. You (pl.) dragged him to death across his land. 17. We shall join ourselves with the citizens of many cities. 18. He wrote this letter to the king himself with courage (courageously). 19. The violence of those seas was great. 20. I have seen the art of the Greeks with my own eyes. 21. We have drawn many beautiful thoughts from the ancients.

22. 8, accompaniment; 9, manner; 10, means; 12, manner; 13, manner; 14, accompaniment; 15, means; 17, accompaniment; 18, manner; 20, means.

KEY FOR Capvt XV

See in Chapter XV.

See in Chapter XV.

See in Chapter XV.

(1) dat. / abl. pl. m. and n.; (2) indecl. adj. agreeing with noun in any case; (3) nom. / acc. pl. n.; (4) nom. pl. m. and n., acc. pl. n.; (5) any form in pl.; (6) nom. / acc. pl. n.; (7) any form in pl.; (8) dat. / abl. pl. f.; (9) any form in pl.; (10) gen. pl. any gender; (11) any form in pl.; (12) any form in pl.

The word which indicates the whole number or amount out of which a part is taken is normally put in the genitive case. See in Chapter XV s.v. âGenitive of the Whole.â

Ex or dÄ + abl.

(1) one citizen

(2) ten citizens

(3) part of the citizens

(4) three citizens

(5) 3 of the 6 citizens

(6) 5 of the citizens

(7) 5 citizens

(8) 100 citizens

(9) 100 of the citizens

(10) 1000 citizens

(11) 3000 citizens

(12) what (is) new?

(13) much praise

(14) enough money

(15) no water

Time when, at which, within which.

(1) He used to come (was coming, kept coming) with his friends. Ablative of accompaniment.

(2) He will come in one hour. Abl. of time within which.

(3) He came at the same time. Abl. of time when.

(4) He wrote the book in a few hours. Time within which.

(5) At that time he wrote a book. Time when.

(6) He was writing the book with care. Manner.

10. At that time alone he feared those three dangers; but he always used to fear (was afraid of) death. 11. Those two kings used to throw money among the thousands of citizens. 12. That one tyrant (of yours) always used to praise himself. 13. The citizens of those five cities kept expecting liberty. 14. They saved the city in two hours by their own wisdom. 15. I used to come into the city with three of my friends. 16. You (pl.) used to wage great wars with courage (= courageously). 17. Therefore a hundred Romans conquered a thousand Greeks. 18. Fathers often used to fear their own sonsâand now they have much (of) fear. 19. Did you (sg.) see our two fathers at that time? 20. Where did you (pl.) find enough freedom? 21. They came in three hours, and he kept saying the same thing to us. 22. I understood little of the argument. 23. We have changed no part of our lives. 24. Our state used to preserve the liberty and rights of the citizens. 25. The Romans used to praise the customs of ancient times. 26. The two fathers sent four of their sons. 27. The ten men had enough wisdom and much virtue. 28. Whatâs new, my friend?

KEY FOR Capvt XVI

Abl. sg. m. and f.: fortÄ« as compared with cÄ«ve.

(1) The adjective of 2 endings.
(2) Nom. sg. m. and f.: fortis, fortis; Äcer, Äcris; potÄns, potÄns.

-Ä«, in the abl. sg. of all genders; -ium, in the gen. pl. of all genders; -ia, in the nom. and acc. n. pl.

-Ä«.

Yes.

(1) to / for a sweet girl

(2) by / with / from a sweet girl

(3) by / with / from a sweet mother

(4) to / for a sweet mother

(5) to / for a happy mother

(6) by / with / from a happy mother

(7) all wars, nom. or acc. pl.

(8) all names, nom. or acc. pl.

(9) all seas, nom. or acc. pl.

(10) by / with / from every part

(11) of all parts

(12) of all kings

(13) of all wars

(14) by / with / from a happy man

(15) to / for a happy man

(16) to / for or by / with / from every sea

(17) to / for every good art

(18) by / with / from every good art

(19) of every good art

(20) to / for, by / with / from swift force

7. A long life is often difficult. 8. A difficult life can be happy. 9. How brief was his sweet life! 10. The memory of a sweet period of life helps thousands of men. 11. You (sg.) wrote a short book in a hundred hours. 12. In every sea we kept finding these two powerful animals. 13. In every land you (pl.) will see many thousands of brave men. 14. Swift rumor ran through every land. 15. That short war was difficult. 16. We overcame all dangers in six hours. 17. The powerful tyrant will conquer their country with swift violence. 18. In a short time he will change all the rights of the citizens. 19. They did not understand the difficult art of sweet liberty, for they had little wisdom. 20. Men fear difficult duties in all lands.

KEY FOR Capvt XVII

See Capvt XVII, The Relative Pronoun, s.v. âUsage and Agreement.â

(1) Its use in its own clause. (2) The antecedent.

In gender and number.

(1) who. (2) which. (3) who, which.

(1) to / for whom or which, m. sg.

(2) whom or which, m. pl.

(3) who / which, nom. sg. f.
who / which, nom. pl. f.
which, nom. or acc. pl. n.

(4) of whom / which, whose, sg.

(5) to / for or by / with / from whom / which, pl.

(6) which, nom. or acc. n. sg.

(7) by / with / from whom / which, f. sg.

(8) who / which, m. sg. and pl.

(9) whom / which, m. sg.

(10) whom / which, f. pl.

(11) of whom / which, whose, m. and n. pl.

(12) whom / which, f. sg.

6. They praised the citizen whom you (pl.) had sent. 7. They praised the ten citizens whom you (pl.) had sent. 8. They praised the citizen who had saved the country. 9. They praised the hundred citizens who had saved the country. 10. They praised the citizen whose son had saved the country. 11. They praised the citizens whose seven sons had saved the country. 12. They praised the citizen to whom they had entrusted the country. 13. They praised many of the citizens to whom they had entrusted the country. 14. They praised the citizen with whom they had come. 15. They praised the citizens with whom they had come. 16. He came with the citizen to whom he had entrusted his own life. 17. Tyrants destroy the rights of the citizens whom they capture. 18. The tyrant destroyed the city from which thousands of citizens had fled. 19. The tyrant destroyed the city into which those nine citizens had fled. 20. The tyrant destroyed the cities from which the citizens had fled. 21. The tyrant destroyed the cities into which the citizens had fled. 22. He overcame the danger which we feared. 23. He overcame the dangers which we feared. 24. He gave books to the girls whom he was praising. 25. The man whose daughter you (sg.) love kept coming into the city. 26. He entrusted his own life to the man whose daughter you (sg.) love. 27. He used to help the mother, who had much courage. 28. The king used to give money to the mothers who had many sons.

KEY FOR Capvt XVIII

See in Chapter XVIII s.v. âThe Passive Voice.â

See in Chapter XVIII s.v. âAblative of Personal Agent.â Note that âagentâ is a person; âmeansâ is something other than a person.

(1) The letter r.

(2) No.

(1) we; (2) he; (3) I; (4) they; (5) you (sg.); (6) you (pl.).

(1) -bÄ-, imperf.; -bi- (-bÅ-, -be-, -bu-), fut.

(2) Yes, with the minor exception of -be- in the 2nd pers. sg.

(1) we shall beâ¦; (2) you (pl.) were beingâ¦; (3) he was beingâ¦; (4) you (sg.) will beâ¦; (5) they will beâ¦; (6) we were beingâ¦; (7) he will beâ¦; (8) you (sg.) were beingâ¦; (9) you (pl.) will beâ¦; (10) they were beingâ¦.

7. They terrify me; I am terrified by them; I am terrified by their violence. 8. The tyrant was destroying this city. 9. This city was being destroyed by the tyrant; it will be destroyed by a plot. 10. He used to be aroused (moved) by his friends; he used to be aroused by their plans. 11. We are not being destroyed by the strength of men, but we can be destroyed by a plot. 12. You (pl.) will be destroyed not by war but by love of leisure and by the plans of evil men. 13. You yourself (sg.) are not being changed, but your name is being changed. 14. Thousands of men are possessed by the love of money. 15. Others used to be held by tyrants. 16. A few will be possessed by love of truth and friendship. 17. The boy will be saved by his friends. 18. Books of this sort used to be given to the boys by the teacher. 19. Liberty will be given to the people by the third king in a short time. 20. Our country can even now be saved by brave citizens. 21. We ought to be warned by the fortune of other men (others). 22. We are terrified by the plans of that tyrant who lives across the sea; but we love liberty, and we shall wage war with great courage. 23. We shall be helped by powerful friends. 24. We praise all our men, who are moved by courage and truth, not by love of themselves.

KEY FOR Capvt XIX

(1) The perfect passive participle plus the present of sum.

(2) The perfect passive participle plus the imperfect of sum.

(1) Vir missus est = a man was (has been) sent; vir mittitur = a man is (is being) sent.

(2) Vir missus erat = a man had been sent; vir mittÄbÄtur = a man was being (used to be) sent.

An interrogative pronoun introduces a question.

quis (nom. sg. m. and f.); quid (nom. and acc. sg. n.).

See in Chapter XIX.

(1) he is (is being) moved

(2) he was (has been)

(3) it had been moved

(4) he was being moved

(5) they had been destroyed

(6) they were being destroyed

(7) they were destroyed

(8) we are held

(9) we were held

(10) we had been held

(11) we were being held

(12) he had been changed

(13) he was (has been) changed

(14) he is (is being) changed

(15) he was being changed

(1) whose (sg.)?

(2) whom (sg.)?

(3) who (pl.)?

(4) what (nom. and acc. sg.)?

(5) whose (pl.)?

(6) to whom (sg.)?

(7) whom (f. pl.)?

(8) who (sg.)?

(9) who (f. pl.)?; what (n. nom. and acc.pl.)?

8. By whom was the book prepared (had been prepared; was being prepared)? 9. The teacher by whom the book was prepared is overcome with work. 10. To whom was the book given (was being given, had been given)? 11. What boy was saved? 12. I myself saw the boy who was saved. 13. Whose (sg.) two sons were saved? 14. I never saw the old man whose sons were saved. 15. Who (sg.) was sent? 16. Peace and liberty were praised by the citizen who had been sent. 17. Who (pl.) were sent? 18. Friendship was praised by the ten citizens who had been sent. 19. Whom (pl.) did you (sg.) see in the city? 20. Where are the three new friends whom you (sg.) saw in the city? 21. What things were found by you (sg.) there? 22. Where are the three bodies which were found there by you (sg.)? 23. By whom was this (thing) said? 24. To whom was this said? 25. The eight wretched men to whom these things were said fled from the city. 26. Whose sons were praised by him? 27. The fathers whose sons were praised will thank him. 28. What terrifies you? 29. What danger terrifies you? 30. But the danger which terrifies you has been conquered by brave citizens.

KEY FOR Capvt XX

(1) object, acc. sg.; (2) of, pl.; (3) by / with / from, sg.; (4) subject, sg.; (5) of (sg.); subject or object (pl.); (6) to / for, sg.

(1) to / for a hand (band)

(2) a hand (subj.)

(3) of hands

(4) by / with / from a hand

(5) of a hand; hands (subj. / obj.)

(6) to / for or by / with / from fruits

(7) fruit (obj.)

(8) of fruit; fruits (subj. / obj.)

(9) of fruits

(10) by / with / from fruit

(11) of the senate

(12) to / for the senate

(13) the senate (subj.)

(14) by / with / from the senate

(1) Masculine; (2) manus.

(1) The ablative of place from which = motion apart; the ablative of separation = distance apart.

(2) The ablative of separation.

(3) The ablative of place from which.

Place from which regularly has a preposition (ab, dÄ, ex); for separation, see in Chapter XX.

6. Who came to us at that time? 7. An old man of great fame fled from his country to our senate. 8. What new was said by him? 9. This (thing) was said by that man: âWe lack liberty.â 10. Free us from slavery and heavy fear. 11. Our forces waged long war against the tyrantâs fierce bands. 12. Those fierce bands which the tyrant sent against us from that land were conquered by us. 13. After this (lit. these things) the citizens who feared the tyrant were led from their own country into our state. 14. We freed them from the crimes of that tyrant. 15. Now they lack (are free from) every fear (anxiety). 16. Their sons eagerly (with zeal) read good books in our schools. 17. And so they have written a thousand verses with their own hands. 18. These one hundred verses give great thanks to us. 19. In these verses the senate and the Roman people are praised. 20. For those unfortunate men now have the fruits of peace and much liberty without fear. 21. Since we have helped others, even we ourselves have great enjoyment. 22. Good men will never lack an abundance of these fruits. 23. In our age many human beings pass their life in fear and slavery. 24. We ought to free those unfortunate men from fear. 25. For who can be happy if other human beings lack the enjoyments of peace and liberty?

26. (6) time when; (7) place from which; (8) agent; (9) agent; (10) separation; (12) agent; (13) place from which; (14) separation; (15) separation; (16) manner; (17) means; (22) separation; (23) time when; (24) separation.

KEY FOR Capvt XXI

See in Chapter XXI.

Check with paradigms in Chapter XXI and repeat them until you can say them without hesitation; listen to the CDs if you have them.

In the passive infinitive the final -e of the active infinitive has been changed to -Ä«: (1) sentÄ«rÄ«, to be felt; (2) movÄrÄ«, to be moved; (3) servÄrÄ«, to be saved; (4) scÄ«rÄ«, to be known; (5) tenÄrÄ«, to be held.

The whole active ending -ere is changed to -Ä«: (1) mittÄ«, to be sent; (2) iacÄ«, to be thrown; (3) tangÄ«, to be touched; trahÄ«, to be drawn.

(1) I shall be sent

(2) you (sg.) are sent

(3) you (sg.) will be sent

(4) to be sent

(5) they are sent

(6) I am sent

(7) he is seized

(8) he will be seized

(9) to be seized

(10) we are seized

(11) they will be seized

(12) they are seized

(13) you (sg.) are seized

(14) you (sg.) will be seized

(15) they are touched

(16) they will be touched

(17) to be touched

(18) you (sg.) are touched

(19) you (pl.) will be touched

(20) you (sg.) will be known

(21) you (sg.) are known

(22) he will be known

(23) he is known

(24) to be known

6. Who is being sent (will be sent, used to be sent, was sent)? 7. By whom will this letter be sent (was sent, is sent)? 8. By whose hand was that letter written (will be written)? 9. What was said (was being said, will be said, is said)? 10. âWho (sg.) will be seized?â âYou (sg.) will be seized.â 11. âWho (pl.) will be seized?â âYou (pl.) will be seized.â 12. For a long time you (sg. / pl.) will be neglected (were neglected). 13. After many hours we were freed (shall be freed). 14. For the sake of the state they ordered him to be seized. 15. For the sake of liberty our state ought to be managed by the other man. 16. His soul could not be touched by money. 17. In every soul the love of country used to be felt (will be felt, is felt, was felt). 18. We are joined (used to be joined, will be joined) to (lit., with) other citizens by love of country. 19. Friendship is not always understood, but it is felt. 20. Wisdom and truth will not be found (are not found, were not found) in those two men. 21. Wisdom is not obtained (will not be obtained, was not obtained) by even a great deal of (= much) money. 22. Truth often is not known (will not be known, was not known), because the study of it is difficult. 23. Not without great labor will truth be found (was found, can be found). 24. Others are drawn by eagerness for (lit., of) money and fame; we ought to be drawn by love of truth and wisdom.

KEY FOR Capvt XXII

Ä.

-em, -Ä; -Äs, -Äbus, -Äs, -Äbus (also -eÄ«, dat., and -Ärum, gen.)

(1) Feminine. (2) DiÄs.

(1) of hope; to / for hope

(2) of hopes

(3) hope (acc.)

(4) to / for or by / with / from hopes

(5) hope (nom.); hopes (nom., acc.)

(6) by / with / from faith

(7) faith (acc.)

(8) of or to / for faith

(9) of days

(10) day (nom.); days (nom., acc.)

(11) to / for or by / with / from days

(12) thing (acc.)

(13) of things

(14) by / with / from a thing

(15) to / for or by / with / from things

(16) of or to / for a thing

(17) of fires

(18) fire (acc.)

(19) to / for or by / with / from fires

(20) fires (nom., acc.)

(1) place where; he remained in the city.

(2) time within which; he will come in one hour.

(3) time when; he came at that time.

(4) accompaniment; he came with them.

(5) place from which; he came from the city.

(6) separation; they lack fire.

(7) means; that was done by fire.

(8) agent; it was done by them.

(9) manner; it was done faithfully (with faith).

(1) ab + abl.

(2) cum + abl.

(3) abl. alone after verbs of freeing, lacking, and depriving; with other verbs ab, dÄ, ex is often used.

(4) in + abl.

(5) abl. alone

(6) cum + abl.; cum may be omitted when the noun is modified by an adj.

(7) ab, dÄ, ex + abl.

(8) abl. alone.

7. At that time he faithfully preserved the liberty of those ten citizens. 8. He managed the state with great care (= very carefully). 9. The state was managed by him with great care. 10. Many good things were seen in the middle of the city. 11. On that day they prepared many things hopefully. 12. We snatched the fire from the hands of the boy. 13. In five days Cicero will rescue the republic from danger. 14. You (sg.) freed the two republics from fear. 15. The earth nourishes human beings with good fruits. 16. He nourished their uncertain hopes by his own courage. 17. In this age our hopes are being destroyed by these three tyrants. 18. Seven of our friends came from that state with great fear. 19. The whole clan came into the territory of this state with a large band of friends in one day. 20. Not all free men dare to join themselves with this republic. 21. If those men lack faith, there is no hope of friendship and peace. 22. Good faith and the love of this republic can save us. 23. You (sg.) have given (your) whole life to this state.

24. (7) time when; manner; (8) manner; (9) manner; (10) place where; (11) time when; manner; (13) time within which; separation; (14) separation; (15) means; (16) means; (17) time when; agent; (18) place from which; manner; (19) accompaniment; time within which; (21) separation.

KEY FOR Capvt XXIII

(1) perf. pass. = having beenâ¦ or Eng. perf. partic.

(2) pres. act. = -Ä«ng

(3) fut. act. = about toâ¦

(4) pres. act. = -ing

(5) fut. act. = about toâ¦

(6) fut. pass. = (about) to beâ¦

(7) perf. pass. = having beenâ¦

(8) pres. act. = -ing.

(9) perf. pass. = having been (e.g., nom. pl.)

(10) perf. pass. = having been (dat. or abl. pl.)

(1) about to be

(2) about to press

(3) pressing

(4) (having been) pressed

(5) (about) to be pressed

(6) turning

(7) (having been) turned

(8) about to turn

(9) (having been) said

(10) saying

(11) about to say

(12) (having been) done

(13) (about) to be done

(14) seizing

(15) about to seize

(16) (having been) desired

(17) desiring

(18) (about) to be given

(19) (having been) given

(20) about to give

(21) giving

(22) (having been) moved

(23) moving

(24) about to move

(1) vÄ«sus

(2) vidÄns

(3) vÄ«sÅ«rus

(4) scrÄ«bendus

(5) scrÄ«ptÅ«rus

(6) scrÄ«ptus

(7) mittÄns

(8) missus

(9) missÅ«rus

(10) victus

(11) victÅ«rus

(12) vincÄns

(13) iÅ«nctÅ«rus

(14) iungÄns

(15) tractus

(16) trahÄns

(17) iactÅ«rus

(18) iactus

4. When captured (lit., having been captured) he said nothing. 5. Freed from slavery he will lead a pleasant life. 6. He thanked those giving the gifts. 7. I do not like someone seeking gifts. 8. To a man desiring much money he used to give only a few gifts. 9. I sent my son to your school to be taught. 10. That man, when about to conquer another people, kept wishing to destroy (their) teachers and books. 11. Terrified by this plot we shall live a wretched life. 12. Long oppressed, they began to turn themselves against the oppressing tyrant. 13. Those four unfortunate men, when seen by the tyrant, ran across the border. 14. The orator, because he feared the tyrant, always used to say pleasing things. 15. We fear someone fearing us. (= who fears us). 16. These men, if they conquer, will take away all the rights of the conquered citizens. 17. That wretched man on the point of fleeing kept seeking the advice of his three friends. 18. The old man, warned by two of his friends, fled to us. 19. Having himself been helped by the second old man, he kept giving many things to those lacking money. 20. Who, when freed from these dangers, will not thank the gods? 21. Joined with you (pl.), we shall save the republic. 22. To those having faith nothing is uncertain.

KEY FOR Capvt XXIV

(1) A noun (pronoun) + participle in abl.

(2) No. (See in Chapter XXIV.)

(1) See in Chapter XXIV.

(2) As a rule commas separate an abl. abs. from the rest of the sentence. This makes it appear somewhat apart from the rest of the sentence.

No. Since this âabsoluteâ construction is not too commonly favored in English, the literal translation if regularly adhered to would make rather clumsy English.

When, since, after, although, if. (See in Chapter XXIV.)

(1) Incorrect because the noun (urbe) of the abl. abs. is used (through its pronoun eam) as the object.

(2) Incorrect because captus means having been captured, not having captured.

(3) Correct because urbem captam (the captured city) stands as the natural object of dÄlÄvit.

(4) Correct because urbe captÄ is a normal abl. abs., the noun of which is not used elsewhere as subject or object.

(1) Obligation or necessity.

(2) It is really a predicate adjective; and so it naturally agrees with the subject of sum.

(3) DÄbeÅ + infin., though dÄbeÅ more often expresses the idea of moral obligation.

(1) Mihi is dat. of agent.

(2) Ä mÄ; abl. of agent.

8. If (since, etc.) these two men hold the power, the republic will be strong. 9. When (since, etc.) this rumor had been reported, the leader left the city without delay. 10. When every desire for (lit., of) money and glory had been banished from his soul, that leader conquered himself. 11. Every desire for evil things ought to be conquered by us (= we ought to conquerâ¦) if we wish to lead a good life. 12. If (since, etc.) the citizens love (their) country, we can have great hopes. 13. All citizens kept fearing that tyrant (of yours), who had to be banished. 14. When the tyrant had been overcome, the citizens regained their liberty and rights. 15. But after a tyrant has been expelled, another tyrant often gets the power. 16. Who in taking the power desires to help the state alone, not himself? 17. When many peoples had been conquered, you (sg.) desired to possess the whole world. 18. Slavery of every sort must be checked throughout the whole world. 19. If our republic is strong, nothing is to be feared by you (sg.). 20. Our country ought to be helped by each one who likes our mode of life. 21. All rights, therefore, ought to be preserved by the citizens with great care. 22. When duties have been deserted by the citizens, the state will be in great danger. 23. When these important things had been said, the orator was praised by us. 24. Truth and virtue ought always to be sought by all men. 25. When (since) truth and virtue had been sought, the republic was saved.

26. A. (8) virÄ«s tenentibus; (9) fÄmÄ nÄrrÄtÄ; (10) cupiditÄte expulsÄ; (12) cÄ«vibus amantibus; (14) tyrannÅ superÄtÅ; (15) tyrannÅ expulsÅ; (17) gentibus victÄ«s; (22) officiÄ«s relictÄ«s; (23) rÄbus dictÄ«s; (25) vÄritÄteâ¦ quaesÄ«tÄ«s.

B. (11) vincenda est; (13) expellendus erat; (18) opprimenda est; (19) timendum est; (20) adiuvanda est; (21) cÅnservanda sunt; (24) quaerendae sunt.

C. (11) nÅbÄ«s; (19) tibi; (20) cuique; (21) cÄ«vibus; (24) virÄ«s.

D. (22) Ä cÄ«vibus; (23) Ä nÅbÄ«s.

KEY FOR Capvt XXV

See in Chapter XXV, SvmmÄrivm FÅrmÄrvm.

Future active infinitive.

Perfect passive infinitive.

They agree with the subject of the infinitive. See in Chapter XXV.

Since it is the ending of the perfect active infinitive, -isse in effect means âto haveâ¦.â

(1) to have moved

(2) to have been moved

(3) to be about to move

(4) to be moved

(5) to be said

(6) to be known

(7) to be saved

(8) to be seized

(9) to be sent

(10) to have believed

(11) to have destroyed

(12) to have drawn

(13) to have touched

(14) to have loved

(15) to have conquered

(16) to have lived

(17) to have been drawn

(18) to have been seen

(19) to have been seized

(20) to have been sent

(21) to have been sought

(22) to have been expelled

(23) to have been left

(24) to have been given

(25) to be about to give

(26) to be about to turn

(27) to be about to press

(28) to be about to seize

(29) to be about to order

(30) to be about to touch

See in Chapter XXV.

(2) nÅ«ntiÅ, I announce

(4) intellegÅ, I understand

(7) videÅ, I see

(8) nesciÅ, I do not know

(10) crÄdÅ, I believe

(13) audiÅ, I hear

(14) sentiÅ, I feel, think

(16) scrÄ«bÅ, I write

(19) ostendÅ, I show

(20) spÄrÅ, I hope

(22) putÅ, I think

(24) negÅ, I say thatâ¦ not, deny

Saying, knowing, thinking, perceiving, etc. See in Chapter XXV.

The infinitive with subject accusative; not a âthatâ clause.

The accusative.

No.

(1) The perfect infinitive = time before that of the main verb.

(2) The future infinitive = time after that of the main verb.

(3) The present infinitive = the same time as that of the main verb. See in Chapter XXV.

14. I know that you did (will do, are doing) this (thing). 15. I knew that you had done (would do, were doing) this. 16. We believed that they would come (had come, were coming). 17. We believe that they will come (came, are coming). 18. Tomorrow he will hear (A) that they are coming (i.e., tomorrow); (B) that they came (e.g., yesterday) or that they have come; (C) that they will come (e.g., in a few days). 19. Today he hears (A) that they are coming (today); (B) that they came (yesterday); (C) that they will come (soon). 20. Yesterday he heard (A) that they were coming (yesterday); (B) that they had come (e.g., the day before yesterday); (C) that they would come (in a few days). 21. They hope that you (pl.) will see him. 22. I know that this was done by you. 23. I did not know that those things had been done by him. 24. They said that the city was not being captured by the enemy (had not been captured). 25. You (pl.) know that those men are (will be, were / have been) always faithful. 26. You (pl.) knew that those men were (would be, had been) always faithful. 27. They kept thinking that the tyrant ought to be driven out by them (by themselves). 28. We believe that peace ought to be sought by all leaders. 29. He says that peace is being sought (was sought) by the ten leaders. 30. He said that the two leaders would seek (were seeking, had sought) peace. 31. The enemy hope that they will conquer all states. 32. I well know that I do not know many things, for no one can know all things.

Â 

33. ScÄ«re (sentence 32) is a complementary infinitive depending on potest.

34. Word: (14) tÄ

Form: acc.

Reason: subj. of infin. (fÄcisse)

34. Word: (14) fÄcisse

Form: perf. act. infin.

Reason: indir. state.

34. Word: (16) eÅs

Form: acc.

Reason: subj. of infin. (ventÅ«rÅs esse)

34. Word: (17) ventÅ«rÅs esse

Form: fut. act. infin.

Reason: indir. state.

34. Word: (21) eum

Form: acc.

Reason: obj. of infin. (vÄ«sÅ«rÅs esse)

34. Word: (22) hoc

Form: acc.

Reason: subj. of infin. (factum esse)

34. Word: (23) eÅ

Form: abl.

Reason: agent

34. Word: (24) hostibus

Form: abl.

Reason: agent

34. Word: (25) fidÄlÄs

Form: acc.

Reason: pred. adj. agreeing with illÅs

34. Word: (27) sibi

Form: dat.

Reason: agent with pass. periphrastic

34. Word: (28) pÄcem

Form: acc.

Reason: subj. of infin. (quaerendam esse)

34. Word: (28) ducibus

Form: dat.

Reason: agent with pass. periphr.

34. Word: (29) ducibus

Form: abl.

Reason: agent

34. Word: (30) pÄcem

Form: acc.

Reason: obj. of infin. (quaesitÅ«rÅs esse)

34. Word: (31) rÄs pÅ«blicÄs

Form: acc.

Reason: obj. of infin.

KEY FOR Capvt XXVI

1. (1) Latin -ior corresponds to English -er.

(2) They have a slight similarity in sound and they both have a final -r as a sign of the comparative.

2. (1) Latin -issimus corresponds to English -est.

(2) The sâs which they have in common suggest s as a sign of the superlative.

3. (1) They are added to the base of the adjective. (See in Chapter XXVI.)

(2) turpior, turpissimus; vÄlÅcior, vÄlÅcissimus; prÅ«dentior, prÅ«dentissimus

4. (1) Acerbior = harsher, rather harsh, too harsh.

(2) Acerbissimus = harshest, very harsh.

5. (1) Quam with the comparative = than (this man was harsher than that one).

(2) Quam with the superlative = asâ¦ as possible, -st possible (this man was as harsh as possible, the harshest possible).

6. There is no fixed case after quam, which is an adverb or conjunction of comparison. The second word of a comparison, which comes after quam, is put in the same case as that of the first of the two words compared. (See in Chapter XXVI.)

7. (1) Most have i-stems.

(2) Comparatives have consonant stems. (Note, incidentally, that comparative and consonant both begin with the same sound.)

8. They announced that the bravest possible leader had come. 9. After a very clear light had been seen by the four men, the bravest troops were sent against the enemy. 10. When that very base man had been banished, the senate gave gifts to the more faithful citizens. 11. The more fortunate citizens used to do these pleasant things on behalf of the more unfortunate citizens. 12. This author is more famous than that one. 13. Certain men said that this author was more famous than that one. 14. Read the books of wiser authors if you wish to lead the wisest (a very wise) life. 15. The six authors whose books I have read are too (rather) harsh. 16. After certain very wise books had been read, we avoided those baser faults. 17. This man, who has overcome his base faults, is braver than the very brave leader. 18. Who is the happiest man? He who leads the wisest life is happier than the most powerful tyrant. 19. The cure of your vices seems rather (too) difficult. 20. That leader thought that his country was dearer to him than life. 21. A band of the most faithful young men possible ought to be sought by the senate.

KEY FOR Capvt XXVII

1. (1) and (2)âsee in Chapter XXVII.

2. (1) and (2)âsee in Chapter XXVII.

3. Positive: parvus

Comparative: minus (minor, minus)

Superlative: minimum (minimus)

3. Positive: malus

Comparative: pejorative (peior)

Superlative: pessimist (pessimus)

3. Positive: bonus

Comparative: ameliorate (melior)

Superlative: optimist (optimus)

3. Positive: (prÅ)

Comparative: prior (prior)

Superlative: prime (prÄ«mus)

3. Positive: magnus

Comparative: major (maior)

Superlative: maximum (maximus)

3. Positive: superus

Comparative: superior (superior)

Superlative: supreme (suprÄmus)

3. Positive: multus

Comparative: plus (plÅ«s)

Superlative: summit (summus)

4. (1) a smaller war

(2) the worst (very bad) war

(3) a greater war

(4) former wars

(5) a very similar book

(6) a more difficult book

(7) the smallest boy

(8) the better boy

(9) a very (most) beautiful girl

(10) a more beautiful girl

(11) very many girls

(12) greater faith

(13) very small faith

(14) a smaller sea

(15) in a smaller sea

(16) larger seas

(17) the best fruits

(18) worse fruit

(19) the fiercest (very fierce) men

(20) fiercer men

(21) more men

(22) most (very) difficult labor

(23) the last (supreme) labor

(24) more labor

(25) more labors

(26) the best leaders

(27) greater leaders

(28) better leaders

(29) the smallest gifts

(30) more gifts

(31) the first gifts

(32) more praise

(33) more praises

(34) the worst citizens

(35) better citizens

(36) very free citizens

5. The easiest things often are not the best. 6. The difficult things are often the greatest. 7. The better pursuits are more (rather) difficult. 8. The worst authors write very many books. 9. These books are worse than the books of better authors. 10. The smaller boy received a larger gift. 11. That very small republic had the greatest hopes. 12. More men believe that this war is worse than the first war. 13. A better leader will come with greater forces. 14. Fierce leaders often used to praise the fiercer forces of the fiercest enemy. 15. When the very evil tyrant had been banished, the citizens sought a better and a wiser leader. 16. They gave the better leader greater power and more money. 17. Citizens of the smaller cities are not better than those of the largest cities. 18. We are not better than very many men of former ages. 19. Our ancestors used to call Apollo the god of the sun.

KEY FOR Capvt XXVIII

1. Something other than a fact; e.g., the jussive and purpose clauses learned in this chapter. See in Chapter XXVIII.

2. See in Chapter XXVIII.

3. (1) Ä; (2) Ä (except that in the 3rd and 4th conjugations the forms dÅ«cam and audiam are identical in the future indicative and the present subjunctive).

4. Command, called âjussive.â

5. Purpose.

6. Jussive.

7. No. (See in Chapter XXVIII.)

8. (1) he will send

(2) subjunct., 3rd sg.

(3) he is sending

(4) subjunct., 3rd sg.

(5) he gives

(6) subjunct., 3rd pl.

(7) they believe

(8) they will believe

(9) they move

(10) subjunct., 3rd pl.

(11) we shall be heard

(12) subjunct., 1st pl. pass.

(13) we are heard

(14) subjunct., 2nd sg.

(15) you (sg.) are seizing

(16) you (sg.) will seize

(17) they are known

(18) they will be known

(19) subjunct., 3rd pl. pass.

(20) you (pl.) are freed

(21) subjunct., 2d. pl. pass.

(22) you (pl.) will be freed

(23) they are destroyed

(27) subjunct., 2nd sg. pass.

(24) subjunct., 3rd pl. pass.

(28) we say

(25) you (sg.) will be conquered

(29) we shall say

(26) you (sg.) are conquered

(30) subjunct., 1st pl.

9. Let that leader come. We are awaiting him. 10. Let the base citizens depart from (our) republic so that we may live in peace. 11. If those two men desire friends, let them do real kindnesses. 12. He shows kindnesses to others in order to be loved (so that he may be loved). 13. I say these happy words to you so that you may not depart. 14. Let us do these very difficult things for the sake of our country. 15. Give more money to those unfortunate people so that they may not lack arms against the enemy. 16. He thinks that they will do it to avoid my anger. 17. Let us prepare arms so that our liberty may not be taken away. 18. Will our freedom be rescued from danger by arms alone? 19. Let philosophers not write too difficult books. 20. For (= the truth is) we shall not receive enough wisdom from too difficult books. 21. Let him do better and greater things so that he may not lead a most wretched life. 22. Tell these things to that very famous author so that they may be written in his book. 23. Let us always seek the truth, without which the greatest souls cannot be happy.

Â 

24. Word: (9) veniat

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command (jussive)

24. Word: (10) discÄdant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

24. Word: vÄ«vÄmus

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

24. Word: (11) faciant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

24. Word: (12) praestat

Form: pres. indic.

Reason: statement of fact

24. Word: amÄtur

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

24. Word: (13) discÄdÄtis

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

24. Word: (14) faciÄmus

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

24. Word: (15) date

Form: imper.

Reason: command in 2nd per.

24. Word: armÄ«s

Form: abl.

Reason: separation

24. Word: careant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

24. Word: (16) eÅs

Form: acc.

Reason: subj. of infin.

24. Word: factÅ«rÅs esse

Form: fut. act. infin.

Reason: indirect statement

24. Word: vÄ«tent

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

24. Word: (17) parÄmus

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

24. Word: tollÄtur

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

24. Word: (18) armÄ«s

Form: abl.

Reason: means

24. Word: ÄripiÄtur

Form: fut. indic.

Reason: fact

24. Word: (19) scrÄ«bant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

24. Word: (20) accipiÄmus

Form: fut. indic.

Reason: fact

24. Word: (21) faciat

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

24. Word: agat

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

24. Word: (22) nÄrrÄ

Form: imper.

Reason: command in 2nd per.

24. Word: scrÄ«bantur

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

24. Word: (23) quaerÄmus

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

KEY FOR Capvt XXIX

1. Present active infinitive + personal endings. See in Chapter XXIX.

2. Yes.

3. (1) impf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(2) impf. subjunct., 3 pl.

(3) impf. subjunct, 1 pl.

(4) impf. subjunct., 1 sg.

(5) impf. subjunct., 2 sg.

(6) pres. subjunct, 3 sg.

(7) impf. subjunct., 2 pl.

(8) pres. subjunct, 3 sg.

(9) you (sg.) will find

(10) pres. subjunct., 2 sg.

(11) pres. subjunct., 3 sg.

(12) he will say

(13) he says

(14) pres. subjunct, 3 pl.

(15) impf. subjunct, 3 sg.

(16) pres. subjunct., 3 sg.

(17) impf. subjunct., 3 pl.

(18) they will depart

(19) pres. subjunct., 3 pl.

(20) pres. subjunct., 1 pl.

(21) pres. subjunct., 1 pl.

(22) impf. subjunct., 3 pl.

(23) pres. subjunct., 2 sg.

(24) you will receive

(25) impf. subjunct., 2 sg.

(26) you (pl.) will be banished

(27) impf. subjunct., 2 pl.

(28) pres. subjunct., 2 pl.

(29) impf. subjunct., 3 pl.

(30) they are moved

4. Ut or ut nÅn + subjunctive.

5. See in Chapter XXIX.

6. See in Chapter XXIX.

7. They read the best books with such great care that they learned much wisdom. 8. We used to read good books with care so that we might learn wisdom. 9. The best books ought to be read by students in order that they may learn the truth and good character. 10. Let the wisest authors write more books so that they may be able to help all peoples. 11. The souls of very many men are so foolish that they do not wish to learn. 12. But many minds are so keen that they can learn well. 13. Some teachers used to teach their pupils so skillfully (with such great skill) that even the pupils themselves wanted to learn. 14. The power of that tyrant was so great that the senate could not drive him out. 15. Let all citizens dedicate (give) themselves to the country so that the enemy may not take away their liberty. 16. Caesar was such a keen leader that the enemy did not conquer the Roman soldiers. 17. Are we leading other peoples with such great wisdom and courage that liberty is being preserved? 18. You (pl.) used to do such great kindnesses that all loved you. 19. He was so harsh that no one loved him. 20. Thousands of citizens kept fleeing from that land in order not to be oppressed by the tyrant. 21. They so loved liberty that they were never conquered by the enemy.

Â 

22. Word: (7) discerent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (8) discerÄmus

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

22. Word: (9) discant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

22. Word: (10) scrÄ«bant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

22. Word: possint

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

22. Word: (11) cupiant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (12) possint

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (13) cuperent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (14) posset

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (15) dent

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: command

22. Word: tollant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

22. Word: (16) vincerent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (17) cÅnservÄtur

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (18) amÄrent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (19) amÄret

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: result

22. Word: (20) opprimerentur

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

22. Word: (21) vincerentur

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: result

KEY FOR Capvt XXX

1. It is the perfect active infinitive (-isse) + personal endings; e.g., pÅnere-m and posuisse-m.

2. It is the perfect passive participle + essem (the imperfect subjunctive of sum); e.g., positus eram and positus essem.

3. Positus sit is perfect subjunctive passive.

4. The future perfect indicative.

5. (1) impf. pass., 3 sg.

(2) pluperf. act., 1 sg.

(3) perf. pass., 3 pl.

(4) pres. pass., 1 pl.

(5) perf. act., 3 pl.

(6) impf. act., 1 pl.

(7) pluperf. act., 2 pl.

(8) pluperf. pass., 3 sg.

(9) impf. act., 3 pl.

(10) pluperf. pass., 1 pl.

(11) pres. act., 3 sg.

(12) perf. pass., 2 sg.

(13) pluperf. act., 2 sg.

(14) impf. pass., 3 sg.

(15) perf. act., 1 pl.

(16) pluperf. act., 3 pl.

6. (1) Present and future. See in Chapter XXX.

(2) Present and perfect.

(3) The past tenses.

(4) Imperfect and pluperfect.

7. (1) The same time or time after (contemporaneous or subsequent). See in Chapter XXX.

(2) The same time or time after.

(3) Time before (prior).

(4) Time before (prior).

8. Where is (was) the leader? 9. They ask where the leader is (was). 10. They kept asking where the leader was (had been). 11. They will ask where the leader is (was). 12. I do not know where the money was put. 13. Do you (sg.) know where the money is being put? 14. They knew where the money was being put. 15. He did not know where the money had been put. 16. We shall tell you (pl.) why the soldier did (does) this. 17. They told me why the soldier had done (was doing) this. 18. Tell me who came (is coming). 19. The orator asked why the other citizens had not learned these plans. 20. We announced to the leader that the other soldiers were fleeing (had fled) into that land. 21. We announced to the leader into what land the other soldiers were fleeing (had fled). 22. We heard that the citizens were so faithful that they preserved the state. 23. We heard what the citizens had done to preserve the state. 24. They kept inquiring in whose state peace could be found. 25. We learned that peace had not been found in their country. 26. Those foolish men always ask what is better than power or money. 27. We certainly think that money itself is not bad; but we believe that truth and liberty and friendship are better and greater. 28. These things we desire so that we may live a finer life; for money alone and power can make men harsh, so that they are not happy. 29. Finally, let him explain all things so that you (pl.) may now understand what great crimes have been committed against the republic.

Â 

30. Word: (15) posita esset

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

30. Word: (16) fÄcerit

Form: perf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

30. Word: (17) fÄcisset

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

30. Word: (18) vÄnerit

Form: perf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

30. Word: (20) fugere

Form: pres. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

30. Word: (21) fugerent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

30. Word: (22) esse

Form: pres. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

30. Word: cÅnservÄrent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: result

30. Word: (23) fÄcissent

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest

30. Word: cÅnservÄrent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

30. Word: (24) posset

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

30. Word: (25) inventam esse

Form: perf. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

30. Word: (26) sit

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

30. Word: (27) esse

Form: pres. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

30. Word: (28) agÄmus

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

30. Word: sint

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: result

30. Word: (29) expÅnat

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive

30. Word: comprehendÄtis

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

30. Word: commissa sint

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

KEY FOR Capvt XXXI

1. When (circumstantial, which is to be distinguished from cum temporal), since, although.

2. Although.

3. (1) The 3rd conjugation.

(2) They lack the connecting vowel e / i, which is seen in the corresponding forms of dÅ«cÅ. (See in Chapter XXXI.)

4. (1) pres. subjunct. act., 3 sg.

(2) he bears

(3) impf. subjunct. act., 3 sg.

(4) he will bear

(5) to bear

(6) they bear

(7) they will bear

(8) pres. subjunct. act., 3 pl.

(9) he is borne

(10) bear (2 pl.)

(11) you (pl.) bear

(12) you (sg.) will be borne

(13) you (sg.) are borne

(14) bear (2 sg.)

(15) to be borne

(16) to have borne

(17) to be about to bear

(18) to be borne (gerundive)

(19) to have been borne

(20) pluperf. subjunct. act., 3 sg.

5. When we had said this, those twenty men replied that they would offer a just peace. 6. Although he had gone into another country, nevertheless he found new friends. 7. Since they offer us friendship, we shall offer them aid. 8. Since the danger was great, they brought all their troops and arms together in a short time. 9. What do you (sg.) bring? What does he bring? Tell me why these gifts are offered. 10. When he had explained what he was seeking, you (sg.) said that such great aid could not be offered. 11. Although they had brought pleasing gifts, I was able nevertheless to recognize their treachery. 12. Since we now understand your plans, we will not endure your treachery. 13. Such great evils are not to be endured. Go (betake yourself) into exile. 14. Finally, let these hundred citizens bear aid to the republic. 15. I kept thinking that they would bring the wine in ships (lit., by ships). 16. Although our soldiers had conquered the enemy, nevertheless they offered them many kindnesses. 17. When he had learned what great benefits the other three men were offering, he himself offered equal benefits. 18. We ought to offer sufficient aid to the unfortunate citizens of small nations. 19. When the consul had spoken these words, the senate replied that money had been brought together for this purpose.

20. Word: (5) dÄ«xissÄmus

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: cum circumstantial

20. Word: oblÄtÅ«rÅs esse

Form: fut. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

20. Word: (6) contulisset

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: cum although

20. Word: (7) offerant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: cum since

20. Word: (8) esset

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: cum since

20. Word: (9) offerantur

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

20. Word: (10) exposuisset

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: cum circumstantial

20. Word: peteret

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

20. Word: (11) tulissent

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: cum although

20. Word: (12) comprehendÄmus

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: cum since

20. Word: (13) cÅnfer

Form: imper. 2 sg.

Reason: command

20. Word: (14) ferant

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive (command)

20. Word: (15) nÄvibus

Form: abl. pl.

Reason: means

20. Word: lÄtÅ«rÅs esse

Form: fut. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

20. Word: (16) vÄ«cissent

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: cum although

20. Word: (17) offerrent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

20. Word: (19) dÄ«xisset

Form: pluperf. subjunct.

Reason: cum circumstantial

KEY FOR Capvt XXXII

1. (1) -Ä; (2) -iter (e.g., lÄ«berÄ, celeriter).

2. The ending -ly (e.g., freely, quickly).

3. No. For example, see the list in Chapter XXXII.

4. (1) -ius (e.g., lÄ«berius, celerius).

(2) It is identical with the nom. and acc. n. sg.

(3) It is usually formed by using more (too, rather) with the positive degree of the adverb (e.g., more / too freely, more quickly).

5. The base is the same in both instances.

6. (1) lÄ«berius = more / too / rather freely.

(2) lÄ«berrimÄ = most / very freely.

7. (1) pleasantly (11) very little, least of all

(2) more / too pleasantly

(3) most / very pleasantly

(4) better

(5) very faithfully

(6) briefly

(7) very quickly

(8) worse

(9) more faithfully

(10) more easily

(11) very little, least of all

(12) more, rather

(13) longer

(14) badly

(15) more wretchedly

(16) less

(17) easily

(18) especially, most of all

(19) very seriously

(20) more swiftly

8. (1) vol-; (2) vel-. See in Chapter XXXII.

9. It is similar to sum. in Chapter XXXII.

10. (1) you (sg.) will wish

(2) pres. subjunct., 2 sg.

(3) you (sg.) wish

(4) impf. subjunct., 2 sg.

(5) he prefers

(6) pres. subjunct., 1 pl.

(7) impf. subjunct., 1 pl.

(8) pluperf. subjunct., 2 sg.

(9) I shall wish

(10) they kept wishing

(11) he will wish

(12) you (pl.) wish

(13) to have wished

(14) they wish

(15) we wished

(16) to wish

(17) he had wished

(18) they wished

(19) you (sg.) wished

(20) impf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(21) they do not wish

(22) impf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(23) pres. subjunct., 3 sg.

(24) he will not wish

11. Certain men prefer to believe that all men are equal. 12. Certain men say that all menâs minds at least are not equal. 13. These men obtained wealth very quickly; those will be poor for a very long time. 14. This man wishes to get very many honors as easily as possible. 15. Do not lose this knowledge. 16. The citizens themselves managed the state better than the leader. 17. There the land is more level and is more open. 18. Free men will not wish to keep us from knowledge; but tyrants especially so wish. 19. The tyrant used to oppress his citizens so badly that they always wished to be free. 20. He will offer very many gifts very freely so that the army may be willing to help that tyrant. 21. Since they had very little wish to offer aid, we were unwilling to show them many favors. 22. Since the enemy are coming swiftly against us, we want to call our men to arms as quickly as possible. 23. Although they truly wanted to preserve their liberty and laws, nevertheless the crimes of the tyrant had to be endured very long. 24. He prefers to do these things more wisely so that he may not lose this occasion at least. 25. Do not leave, my friend.

KEY FOR Capvt XXXIII

1. (1) The present subjunctive. (2) See in Chapter XXXIII.

2. (1) (A) Present contrary to fact; (B) past contrary to fact.

(2) The conditional clause. See in Chapter XXXIII.

3. Nisi.

4. The future less vivid condition.

5. See VocÄbula CAPVT XXXIII.

6. If reason leads, you (sg.) are happy. 7. If reason leads, you will be happy. 8. If reason should lead, you would be happy. 9. If reason were leading, you would be happy. 10. If reason had led, you would have been happy. 11. If you (sg.) love money, you lack wisdom. 12. If you love money, you will lack wisdom. 13. If you should love money, you would lack wisdom. 14. If you were in love with money, you would lack wisdom. 15. If you had loved money, you would have lacked wisdom. 16. If we seek the truth, we find knowledge. 17. If we seek the truth, we shall find knowledge. 18. If we should seek the truth, we would find knowledge. 19. If we were seeking the truth, we would find knowledge. 20. If we had sought the truth, we would have found knowledge. 21. If you do not avoid anger, you will lose your two friends. 22. If you had not avoided anger, you would have lost your five friends. 23. If you should not avoid anger (if you should fail to avoid anger), you would lose many friends. 24. If you were not avoiding anger, you would be losing many friends. 25. If you do not avoid anger, you are losing many friends. 26. If you did not avoid anger, you lost many friends. 27. If anyone has a good character, we praise him. 28. If anyone had had a good character, we would have praised him. 29. If anyone should have a good character, we would praise him. 30. If anyone had a good character, we praised (used to praise) him. 31. If anyone were in possession of a good character, we would praise him. 32. If anyone has a good character, we shall praise him. 33. If those men win, we shall depart. 34. If those men should win, we would depart. 35. If those men had won, we would have departed. 36. If you had read books well, you would have written better. 37. If you read books well, you will write better. 38. If you should read books well, you would write better.

39. (6) simple present (21) simple fut.

(7) simple fut.

(8) fut. less vivid

(9) pres. contrary to fact

(10) past contrary to fact

(22) past contrary to fact

(23) fut. less vivid

(24) pres. contrary to fact

(25) simple present

(26) simple past

KEY FOR Capvt XXXIV

1. See in Chapter XXXIV.

3. (1) Participles

Pres. patiÄns, suffering

Perf. passus, having suffered

Fut. passÅ«rus, about to suffer

Ger. patiendus, to be endured

(2) Infinitives

Pres. patÄ«, to suffer

Perf. passus esse, to have suffered

Fut. passÅ«rus esse, to be about to suffer

4. (1) illud cÅnsilium; (2) illÅ cÅnsiliÅ; (3) illud cÅnsilium

5. Ablative (of means) with special deponent verbs. See in Chapter XXXIV.

6. Pres. partic.; fut. partic.; fut. infin.; e.g., patiÄns, passÅ«rus, passÅ«rus esse in 3 above.

7. (1) cÅnor

2 sg. cÅnÄre, try

2 pl. cÅnÄminÄ«, try

(2) loquor

loquere, speak

loquiminÄ«, speak

8. (1) locÅ«tus, having said

(2) mortuus, having died

(3) cÅnÄtus, having tried

(4) passus, having suffered

(5) secÅ«tus, having followed

(6) Ägresssus, having gone out

(7) profectus, having set out

9. (1) he will use

(2) pres. subjunct., 3 sg.

(3) he uses

(4) impf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(5) having used

(6) pluperf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(7) to be about to use

(8) you (sg.) will endure

(9) you (sg.) are enduring

(10) endure (imper.)

(11) to endure

(12) they endured

(13) to have endured

(14) enduring

(15) pres. subjunct., 3 sg.

(16) he endures

(17) we shall endure

(18) pres. subjunct., 3 sg.

(19) impf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(20) it must be endured

Â 

10. He thinks that these evils ought to be endured. 11. We shall try to endure these evils. 12. If you do not wish to die, endure these evils. 13. Having endured the greatest evils, the poor man died. 14. The tyrant thought that those two men would endure these evils a long time. 15. When they had endured three wars, they dared to force that tyrant into exile. 16. If you follow this new leader, you will enjoy liberty and leisure. 17. When these words had been said, we dared to follow him. 18. Having spoken these words, we set out so that we might not die in that miserable place. 19. Although he thought that you had used a bad plan, nevertheless he spoke with you freely. 20. If anyone should dare to use wine of that sort, he would quickly die. 21. His son was born and died on the same day. 22. Let us use all our resources so that our country may be saved. 23. When he tried to set out into another land, he was captured by soldiers. 24. I kept thinking that he would go out of the city with his ten friends. 25. Having set out that night, Caesar came to a certain very famous island. 26. If they had used better books, they would have learned more. 27. If you wish to have many friends, do not be arrogant.

Â 

28. (12) simple pres.; (16) simple fut.; (20) fut. less vivid; (26) past contrary to fact.

29. Word: (14) passÅ«rÅs esse

Form: fut. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

29. Word: (17) verbÄ«s

Form: abl.

Reason: abl. abs.

29. Word: (18) locÅ«tÄ«

Form: nom. pl. of perf. partic.

Reason: agrees with subject of verb

29. Word: morerÄmur

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

29. Word: (19) cÅnsiliÅ

Form: abl.

Reason: special deponents

29. Word: arbitrÄrÄtur

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: cum although

29. Word: (21) diÄ

Form: abl.

Reason: time when

29. Word: (22) Å«tÄmur

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive

29. Word: (25) nocte

Form: abl.

Reason: time when

29. Word: (26) librÄ«s

Form: abl.

Reason: special deponents

KEY FOR Capvt XXXV

1. See in Chapter XXXV.

2. See in Chapter XXXV.

3. (1) eum; they recognize him.

(2) eÄ«; they forgive him.

(3) eÄ«; they serve him.

(4) eum; they save him.

(5) eum; I prepared him.

(6) eÄ«; I obeyed him.

(7) eum; they endure him.

(8) eum; they will find him.

(9) eÄ«; they injure him.

(10) eum; they help him.

(11) eÄ«; they please him.

(12) eum; they throw him.

(13) eum; they overcome him.

(14) eÄ«; they trust him.

(15) eÅ; they lack it.

(16) eÄ«; they study it.

(17) eum; they urge him.

(18) eum; they follow him.

(19) eÄ«; they persuade him.

(20) eÅ; they use it (him).

(21) eum; they strike him.

(22) eÄ«; they spare him.

(23) eÄ«; they command him.

(24) eum; they order him.

4. He saved the leader. 5. He served the leader. 6. Slaves serve other men. 7. Brave men save others. 8. That slave served my son and saved him. 9. If anyone serves himself alone, he will never save the republic. 10. If someone had undertaken this work, he would have saved a thousand men. 11. The gods will pardon me; you, O citizens, pardon the whole army. 12. If we want God to forgive us, we ought to forgive other men. 13. They do not trust me now, and they will never be willing to trust my two sons. 14. Those friends are very dear to me. 15. Since you lacked good faith, they could not trust you. 16. Let us obey this leader so that he may spare us and save the city. 17. If Caesar does not please the citizens, they will not spare his life. 18. I am studying Latin literature, which I like (pleases me) even if I cannot persuade my friends. 19. Let us always study and obey truth and wisdom. 20. Always study the best subjects if you wish to be truly happy. 21. As we study these subjects, let us enjoy both books and life. 22. A good man wishes to harm nobody; he spares all, he helps all. 23. My rewards are very similar to yours.

Â 

24. Word: (5) ducÄ«

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (8) eum

Form: acc.

Reason: obj. of servÄvit

Word: (9) sibi

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (11) exercituÄ«

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (12) hominibus

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (13) fÄ«liÄ«s

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (14) mihi

Form: dat.

Reason: dat. with adjs.

Word: (15) fidÄ

Form: abl.

Reason: separation

Word: (16) ducÄ«

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: pÄreÄmus

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive

Word: servet

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: purpose

Word: (17) cÄ«vibus

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: vÄ«tae

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (18) litterÄ«s

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: amÄ«cÄ«s

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (21) rÄbus

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: librÄ«s

Form: abl.

Reason: special depon. verbs

Word: Å«tÄmur

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive

Word: (22) omnibus

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (23) tuÄ«s

Form: dat.

Reason: dat. with adjs.

KEY FOR Capvt XXXVI

1. Indirect command = ut (nÄ) + subjunctive. See in Chapter XXXVI.

2. ImperÅ, dÄ«cÅ, cÅ«rÅ, moneÅ, hortor, persuÄdeÅ, petÅ, quaerÅ, ÅrÅ, rogÅ. See in Chapter XXXVI.

3. (1) it will be made / done, he will become

(2) it is made / done, he becomes

(3) pres. subjunct., 3 sg.

(4) impf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(5) to be made / done, to become

(6) they are made / done, they become

(7) they were being made / done, they were becoming

(8) you (sg.) will be made, become

(9) to have been made / done, become

(10) impf. subjunct., 3 pl.

(11) we are made, become

(12) they will be made, become

(13) you (sg.) are made, become

(14) impf. subjunct., 1 sg.

(15) pres. subjunct., 3 pl.

(16) gerundive, to be made / done

(17) pres. subjunct., 1 pl.

4. He said that they were studying Latin literature. 5. He told why they were studying Latin literature. 6. He said that they should study Latin literature (he told them to studyâ¦). 7. We asked them why they were studying Greek philosophy. 8. Do you ask that we learn (= ask us to learn) the nature of all things? 9. I warn you to spare these wise men. 10. He warned the soldiers not to injure those seeking peace. 11. He will command us not to trust the enemy. 12. He commanded you to obey the leader. 13. I ask you why you did this. 14. I ask you to do this. 15. I beg of you that peace be made. 16. They kept begging me not to make war. 17. I begged him not to obey the disgraceful king. 18. We beg you to become very keen pupils. 19. Do not be like that harsh tyrant. 20. Caesar took care that his power be made greatest in the state. 21. The speaker urged us to serve our free country eagerly. 22. He persuaded us that we should always use just laws. 23. We are trying to persuade the leader not to harm the arts and laws of the country. 24. A tyrant commands that money be made; and money is made. But that fool does not perceive that this money will be nothing without good faith. 25. Let us urge more students certainly to study the Latin language.

Â 

26. Word: (4) studÄre

Form: pres. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

Word: (5) studÄrent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

Word: (6) studÄrent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: jussive noun

Word: (7) studÄrent

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

Word: (8) cognÅscÄmus

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive noun

Word: (9) parcÄs

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive noun

Word: (10) eÄ«s

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: pÄcem

Form: acc.

Reason: obj. petentibus

Word: (11) hostibus

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (13) fÄcerÄ«s

Form: perf. subjunct.

Reason: ind. quest.

Word: (14) faciÄs

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive noun

Word: (16) facerem

Form: impf. subjunct.

Reason: jussive noun

Word: (18) fÄ«Ätis

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive noun

Word: (22) lÄgibus

Form: abl.

Reason: special depon. verbs

Word: (23) lÄgibus

Form: dat.

Reason: special verbs

Word: (24) futÅ«ram esse

Form: fut. infin.

Reason: ind. state.

Word: (25) hortÄmur

Form: pres. subjunct.

Reason: jussive

KEY FOR Capvt XXXVII

1. (1) Present indicative and present subjunctive.

(2) It is Ä«-.

2. Nom. sg. = iÄns; nom. pl. = euntÄs.

3. In writing the synopsis of a verb one should follow the sequence of tenses in the indicative and the subjunctive as given above in #2 of the Key of Capvt XXXIV. If this is done there is no need to label the tenses.

EÅ 2nd sg.: IndicativeâÄ«s, Ä«bÄs, Ä«bis, Ä«stÄ«, ierÄs, ieris.

SubjunctiveâeÄs, Ä«rÄs, ierÄ«s, Ä«ssÄs.

EÅ 3d pl.: Indicativeâeunt, Ä«bant, Ä«bunt, iÄrunt, ierant, ierint.

Subjunctiveâeant, Ä«rent, ierint, Ä«ssent.

4. (1) we went

(2) we are going

(3) impf. subjunct., 1 pl.

(4) we shall go

(5) pluperf. subjunct., 1 pl.

(6) pres. subjunct., 1 pl.

(7) to be about to go

(8) going (acc. sg.)

(9) they went

(10) they are going

(11) pres. subjunct., 3 pl.

(12) they will go

(13) I went

(14) he was going

(15) they had gone

(16) perf. subjunct., 1 sg.

(17) impf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(18) to have gone

(19) going (nom. / acc. pl.)

(20) I shall go

(21) he went

(22) we were going

(23) pluperf. subjunct., 3 sg.

(24) pres. subjunct., 3 sg.

5. (1) ab, dÄ, ex + abl.; ab (ex) eÄ terrÄ.

(2) in + abl.: in eÄ terrÄ; in eÄ Ä«nsulÄ.

(3) in or ad + acc.: in (ad) eam terram.

6. (1) Place from which = abl. without a preposition.

(2) Place where = locative without a preposition.

(3) Place to which = accusative without a preposition.

7. The locative is the case which expresses the idea of âplace whereâ when domus or the name of a city, town, or small island is used; for Forms, see in Chapter XXXVII.

8. (1) Time when = abl. without a prep.: eÅdem diÄ.

(2) Time how long = acc. usually without a prep.: multÅs diÄs.

(3) Time within which = abl. without a prep.: Å«nÅ diÄ.

9. Since an impersonal verb lacks the 1st and the 2nd persons sg. and pl., the 1st and the 3rd principal parts are given in the 3rd pers. sg. See in Chapter XXXVII, VocÄbula, s.v. licet. Licet tibi Ä«re.

10. (1) (for) one day

(2) in one day

(3) on that day

(4) from Rome

(5) at Rome

(6) to Rome

(7) in a few days

(8) on the same night

(9) (for) many days

(10) into the ship

(11) in the ship

(12) out of the ship

(13) home (= to home)

(14) at / from Athens

(15) at home

(16) to Athens

(17) from home

(18) (for) a few hours

Â 

11. In a few hours we shall go to Rome. 12. We are going to the city; they are going home. 13. As we have often admitted, you may not (are not permitted to) go from Rome to Athens (lit., to go is not permitted to you). 14. Why did you leave home (go away from home) so quickly? 15. They are coming to Rome in order to go to Athens with my brother. 16. Do not go away from Rome. 17. When your brother had been killed at Rome, we kept urging you to return to Athens. 18. If he should go into the territory of the enemy at this time, he would perish in a few hours. 19. He said that he did not want to stay in that country of yours many days. 20. You said that you would return home from Athens in one hour. 21. I beg of you to return from the ship to the island in a short time. 22. In those days we were accustomed to be at Athens. 23. If they had injured his friends at Rome, he would have returned to Rome in a very short time. 24. Although my brother stayed at home, I nevertheless went away from home into new lands. 25. The Romans, if they wanted to say something bad, often used to say: âGo to the devil.â 26. He is persuading them to study Latin.

27. (11) hÅrÄ«s = abl.: time within which; RÅmam = acc.: place to which; (12) domum = acc.: place to which; (13) RÅmÄ = abl.: place from; AthÄnÄs = acc.: place to; Ä«re = pres. infin.: subject of licet; (14) domÅ = abl.: place from; (15) RÅmam = acc.: place to; (18) frÄtre = abl.: abl. abs.; (18) tempore = abl.: time when; eat = pres. subjunct.: fut. less vivid; hÅrÄ«s = abl.: time within; (19) velle = pres. infin.: ind. state.; diÄs = acc.: time how long; (20) domum = acc.: place to; AthÄnÄ«s = abl.: place from; hÅrÄ = abl.: time within; reditÅ«rum esse = fut. infin.: ind. state.; (21) tempore = abl. time within; redeÄs = pres. subjunct.: jussive noun clause; (22) diÄbus = abl.: time when; AthÄnÄ«s = locative: place where; (23) amÄ«cÄ«s = dat.: special verbs; RÅmae = locative: place where; redÄ«sset = pluperf. subjunct.: past contrary to fact condit.; (24) domÄ« = locative: place where; terrÄs = acc.: place to; domÅ = abl.: place from; (26) studeant = pres. subjunct.: jussive noun clause.

KEY FOR Capvt XXXVIII

A relative clause with the indicative tells a fact about the antecedent.

A relative clause with the subjunctive tells a characteristic of the antecedent, indicates it to be a person or thing of such a sort. See in Chapter XXXVIII.

See in Chapter XXXVIII.

See in Chapter XXXVIII.

5. My friend who defended the consul was himself a very famous man. 6. But there was no one who would defend that base fellow. 7. What is there which men fear more than a tyrant? 8. Who is there who would hesitate between liberty and the command of a tyrant? 9. At ancient Rome there were those who loved money more than the state. 10. Let that evil man depart from his countryâhe who has endured the hatred of all good citizens. 11. Catiline, who had made such a great plot against the state, was driven from the city by Cicero. 12. What life can be pleasant for that leader as he goes off into exile? 13. Who is there who would be able to bear such pain? 14. If a person is not agreeable and good, he will not live a truly happy life, it seems to me. 15. They will not trust a consul who would do base deeds. 16. Do not trust a man who is harsh to his friends. 17. Cicero was a consul who would place the state before his own safety. 18. They knew why we wanted to follow such a brave consul. 19. I know nothing which could be easier for me. 20. I am seeking a leader whom all men would praise. 21. They were going to Rome to ask for freedom. 22. The Romans, who had captured ten Greek republics with their own armies, were themselvesâamazing to sayâtaken captive by the Greek arts! 23. For the ancient men there was nothing which was better than courage and wisdom. 24. Nothing is to be feared which cannot injure the soul.

25. The quÄ«â¦ dÄfendit states a fact about the amÄ«cus; it does not describe his character. The subjunctive clause in #6 tells what kind of person the imagined nÄmÅ might be.

26. Syntax: (7) metuat = pres. subjunct.: characteristic; (8) dubitet = pres. subjunct.: characteristic; (9) RÅmae = loc.: place where; amÄrent = impf. subjunct.: characteristic; (10) abeat = pres. subjunct.: jussive; passus est = perf. indic. rel. clause of fact; (11) fÄcerat = pluperf. indic.: rel. clause of fact; (12) ducÄ« = dat.: reference; potest = pres. indic.: main verb in a direct question; (13) possit = pres. subjunct.: characteristic; (14) erit = fut. indic.: simple fut. condit.; mihi = dat.: ref.; (15) cÅnsulÄ« = dat.: special verbs; (16) amÄ«cÄ«s = dat.: dat. with adjs.; (17) salÅ«tÄ« = dat.: compound verb; antepÅneret = impf. subjunct.: characteristic; (18) vellÄmus = impf. subjunct.: ind. quest.; (19) mihi = dat.: ref.; possit = pres. subjunct.: characteristic; (21) rogÄtum = acc. supine: purpose; (22) cÄperant = pluperf. indic.: rel. clause of fact; dictÅ« = abl. supine: respect; (23) virÄ«s = dat.: ref.; (24) animÅ = dat.: special verbs; possit = pres. subjunct.: characteristic.

KEY FOR Capvt XXXIX

(1) See in Chapter XXXIX s.v. âThe Gerund.â
(2) See in Chapter XXXIX.
(3) See in Chapter XXXIX.
(4) It is used as a noun is used, except not as a subject or direct object. See in Chapter XXXIX.
(5) The infinitive; see in Chapter XXXIX.

(1) See in Chapter XXXIX s.v. âThe Gerundive.â
(2) The gerundive is an adjective.
(3) As an adjective it modifies a noun or pronoun and agrees with that noun or pronoun in gender, number, and case.
(4) The gerundive (e.g., laudandus, -a, -um) is declined as magnus, -a, -um is. See in Chapter XXXIX.
(5) Since the gerund has only the endings -Ä«, -Å, -um, -Å, any feminine or any plural ending on an -nd- base is bound to indicate a gerundive; and also, if an -nd- form agrees with a noun as an adjectival modifier, it must be a gerundive.

(1) The Latin gerund is normally translated by the English gerund in -ing with any attending noun constructions or adverbial modifiers.
(2) The gerundive is to be translated as if it were a gerund with an object and any adverbial modifiers. In other words, both the gerund and the gerundive are to be translated in the same way. See in Chapter XXXIX.
(3) (A) We learn by reading with care.
(B) We learn by reading books with care.

4. We learn by experiencing. 5. They came to learn (for learning). 6. He gave (devoted) himself to learning. 7. They came to your school to learn (for the sake of learning). 8. The boy went to the school desirous of learning (eager to learn). 9. The fear of dying kept terrifying him. 10. The hope of living after death encourages many people. 11. By thinking (= by using his head) he overcame them.

12. He devoted (gave) himselfâ(1) to seeking glory. (2) to waging war. (3) to making money. (4) to getting power. (5) to destroying states. (6) to following this leader. (7) to saving his country. (8) to seeking peace. (9) to attacking wrongs. (10) to writing books. (11) to reading books. (12) to learning philosophy. (13) to learning Latin literature. (14) to understanding the truth. (15) to seeking wisdom. (16) to helping human beings.

13. He came to Romeâ(1) to undertake this work. (2) to see the Roman games. (3) to see the old buildings. (4) to seek peace. (5) for the sake of undertaking this work (to undertakeâ¦). (6) for the sake of learning philosophy (to learnâ¦). (7) for the sake of reading new books (to readâ¦). (8) to see the games.

14. He wrote a bookâ(1) about enduring pain. (2) about overcoming fear. (3) about living a good life. (4) about managing the state. (5) about waging war. (6) about defending liberty. (7) about conquering the enemy. (8) about giving gifts.

15. We become wiserâ(1) by reading Latin literature. (2) by learning philosophy. (3) by experiencing life. (4) by conquering fear. (5) by following truth.

16. We help our very selvesâ(1) by always reading good books. (2) by freeing unfortunate men from fear. (3) by offering aid. (4) by helping others.

17. He consumed much timeâ(1) in thinking (speaking, running). (2) in doing these tasks. (3) in finding the way. (4) in preparing an army. (5) in preparing supplies (troops).

18. He had time for writing this book only.

KEY FOR Capvt XL

1. See p. 341.

2. Positive fear clauses are introduced by nÄ negative clauses by ut.

3. The noun must itself be modified by an adjective.

Â 

4. I greatly fear that the general may not send us enough help. 5. She was a woman of the greatest courage and loyalty and in fact very like her mother. 6. Do not fear that all the men and women of great courage will depart from Rome. 7. This is, indeed, easy to say but difficult to do! 8. They came home to please their parents. 9. You do wish to hear something good, donât you? 10. Do you wish to have much wisdom? Study Latin! 11. He ordered the three soldiers to go to Rome to seek peace. 12. You do not hesitate to say this, do you, my friend? 13. You urge me to be of great courage and to have hope of safety, but I fear that I may be too weak. 14. For my part I place wealth ahead of wisdom. For I do not think that human beings can find a happy life without a great deal of money. 15. However, very many rich men experience much fear. 16. Poor men are often happier and have less fear. 17. Money itself is not bad; but the things of the mind and the soul offer more help for living happily. 18. Nine of the leaders urged us to supply more aid. 19. When five of the guards had been killed, my father fled into that free land with two of his sons and with a large number of friends. 20. Never will he have enough leisure; yet some leisure is better than nothing. 21. In our times we all have too much of fear and too little of hope. 22. Great faith and courage must be found by all men.

APPENDIX

SOME ETYMOLOGICAL AIDS

Two Rules of Phonetic Change

Prefixes

Suffixes

SUPPLEMENTARY SYNTAX

SVMMÄRIVM FÅRMÄRVM

SOME ETYMOLOGICAL AIDS

TWO RULES OF PHONETIC CHANGE

âPhoneticâ derives from Greek phÅn, sound, voice, speech (cf. phonograph, phonology, symphony, telephone). Consequently, phonetic change means a change which occurs in original speech sounds for one reason or another. Of the many instances of this in Latin, the following two rules of phonetic change are probably the most important ones for the beginner.

A. Vowel weakening usually occurs in the medial syllables of compounds according to the following outline.

1.Â  > before a single consonant and before ng.

> before two consonants.

cpiÅ, cptum: ac-cpiÅ, ac-cptum

fciÅ, fctum: per-fciÅ, per-fctum

fcilis: dif-fcilis

cdÅ, cÄsum: oc-cdÅ, oc-cÄsum (Note that longÂ Ä does not change.)

tngÅ, tctum: con-tngÅ, con-tctum

2.Â  > before a single consonant.

tneÅ: con-tneÅ (but contentum)

prmÅ: com-prmÅ (but compressum)

3. ae > Ä«.

quaerÅ, quaesÄ«tum: re-quÄ«rÅ, re-quÄ«sÄ«tum

laedÅ, laesum: col-lÄ«dÅ, col-lÄ«sum

caedÅ, caesum: in-cÄ«dÅ, in-cÄ«sum; oc-cÄ«dÅ, oc-cÄ«sum

aestimÅ: ex-Ä«stimÅ

4. au > Å«.

claudÅ: in-clÅ«dÅ, ex-clÅ«dÅ

causor: ex-cÅ«sÅ

Â 

B. Assimilation of the final consonant of a prefix to the initial consonant of the base word commonly occurs.

ad-capiÅ > ac-cipiÅ

dis-facilis > dif-ficilis

in-mortÄlis > im-mortÄlis

in-ruÅ > ir-ruÅ

PREFIXES

Listed here are important prefixes helpful in the analysis of both Latin words and English derivatives. The Latin prefixes have passed over into English unchanged except where indicated. Incidentally, most Latin prefixes were also used by the Romans as prepositions; but the few labeled âinseparableâ appear only as prefixes.

Â 

Ä-, ab-, away, from.

Ä-vocÅ, call away (avocation)

Ä-vertÅ, turn away (avert)

Ä-mittÅ, send away, let go, lose

ab-sum, be away (absent)

ab-eÅ, go away

ab-dÅ«cÅ, lead away (abduct)

ad- (by assimilation ac-, af-, ag-, al-, an-, ap-, ar-, as-, at-), to, towards, in addition.

ad-vocÅ, call to, call (advocate)

ad-dÅ«cÅ, lead to (adduce)

ad-mittÅ, send to, admit

ac-cÄdÅ, go to, approach (accede)

ac-cipiÅ (ad-capiÅ), get, accept

ap-pÅnÅ, put to (apposition)

as-sentiÅ, feel towards, agree to, assent

ante-, before.

ante-pÅnÅ, put before, prefer

ante-cÄdÅ, go before, precede, excel (antecedent)

circum-, around.

circum-dÅ«cÅ, lead around

circum-veniÅ, come around, surround (circumvent)

circum-stÅ, stand around (circumstance)

com- (com = cum; also appears as con-, cor-, col-, co-), with, together; intensive force: completely, very, greatly, deeply, forcibly.

con-vocÅ, call together (convoke)

con-dÅ«cÅ, lead together (conduct)

com-pÅnÅ, put together, compose (component)

com-mittÅ, send together, bring together, entrust (commit)

cÅn-sentiÅ, feel together, agree (consent)

cÅ-gÅ (co-agÅ), drive together, force (cogent)

com-pleÅ, fill completely, fill up (complete)

cÅn-servÅ, save completely, preserve (conserve)

con-cÄdÅ, go completely, go away, yield, grant (concede)

con-tendÅ, stretch greatly, strive, hurry (contend)

col-laudÅ, praise greatly or highly

cor-rÅborÅ, strengthen greatly (corroborate)

contrÄ-, against, opposite. (Not common as a prefix in Latin but fairly common in English, especially in the form counter-.)

contrÄ-dicÅ, speak against or opposite, oppose, rely (contradict)

contrÄ-veniÅ (late Latin), come against, oppose (contravene)

dÄ-, down, away, aside, out, off; intensive force: utterly, completely.

dÄ-dÅ«cÅ, lead down or away, drawn down (deduce, deduct)

dÄ-pÅnÅ, put aside, lay aside, entrust (deponent, deposit)

dÄ-mittÅ, send down, throw down, let fall (demit)

dÄ-veniÅ, come from, arrive at, reach

dÄ-vocÅ, call away or off

dÄ-cÄdÅ, go away (decease)

dÄ-mÄns, out of oneâs mind, demented

dÄ-certÅ, fight it out, fight to the finish

dis- (dif-, dÄ«-; inseparable), apart, away, not.

dis-pÅnÅ, put apart in different places, arrange (disposition)

dis-cÄdÅ, go away, depart

dÄ«-mittÅ, send away in different directions, let go (dismiss)

dif-ferÅ, dÄ«-lÄtus, bear apart, scatter, put off, differ (different, dilate)

dis-similis, not similar, unlike, dissimilar

dif-ficilis, not easy, difficult

Ä-, ex- (ef-), from out, forth; intensive force: exceedingly, up.

Ä-dÅ«cÅ, lead out (educe)

ex-cÄdÅ, go out, from, away; go beyond (exceed)

Ä-mittÅ, send out, forth (emit)

Ä-vocÅ, call out, forth (evoke)

ex-pÅnÅ, put out, set forth, explain (exponent, exposition)

Ä-veniÅ, come out, forth; turn out, happen (event)

ef-ficiÅ, (ex-faciÅ), produce, accomplish, perform (efficient, effect)

ex-pleÅ, fill up, complete

ex-asperÅ, roughen exceedingly, irritate (exasperate)

in- (im-, il-, ir-; sometimes en- or em- in Eng.), in, into, on, upon, against. (Also see in- below.)

in-vocÅ, call in, call upon (invoke)

in-dÅ«cÅ, lead in or into, introduce, impel (induce)

im-mittÅ, send into, send against, let loose against

im-pÅnÅ, put in, lay upon (impose)

in-veniÅ, come upon, find (invent)

in-clÅ«dÅ, shut in, shut (include, enclose)

in-vÄdÅ, go into, move against (invade)

ir-ruÅ, rush into or upon

il-lÄ«dÅ (in-laedÅ), strike or dash against

in-genium (in + gen-, from gignÅ, beget, give birth to), inborn nature, natural capacity, talent, character (engine, ingenious)

in- (im-, il-, ir-; inseparable prefix; cognate with Eng. un-), not, un-.

in-certus, not certain, uncertain

in-iÅ«stus, not just, unjust (cf. injustice)

Ä«n-fÄ«nÄ«tus, not limited, unlimited (infinite)

Ä«n-fÄ«rmus, not firm, weak (infirm)

im-mortÄlis, not mortal, deathless (immortal)

il-litterÄtus, unlearned, ignorant (illiterate)

ir-revocÄbilis, not-call-back-able, unalterable (irrevocable)

inter-, between, among.

inter-veniÅ, come between; interrupt (intervene)

inter-cÄdÅ, go between (intercede)

inter-mittÅ, place between, leave off (intermittent)

inter-pÅnÅ, put between, bring forward (interpose)

inter-rÄgnum, period between two reigns (interregnum)

intrÅ-, within, in. (Also used as adv.)

intrÅ-dÅ«cÅ, lead in (introduce)

intrÅ-mittÅ, send in

intrÅ-spiciÅ, look within (introspect)

ob- (oc-, of-, op-), towards, to, opposite, against, over.

ob-dÅ«cÅ, lead toward or against

ob-veniÅ, come opposite, meet

oc-currÅ, run to meet, meet (occur)

of-ferÅ, bear towards, furnish (offer)

op-pÅnÅ, put opposite, set against, oppose (opposition)

per- (pel-), through; intensive force: thoroughly, very, completely.

per-dÅ«cÅ, lead through or along

per-veniÅ, come through to, arrive at, reach

per-ferÅ, carry through, bear thoroughly, endure

per-mittÅ, let go through, entrust, allow (permit)

per-ficiÅ (-faciÅ), do thoroughly, accomplish, finish (perfect)

per-facilis, very easy

per-paucus, very small

pel-lÅ«cidus, shining through, transparent

post-, after.

post-pÅnÅ, put after, esteem less, disregard (postpone)

post-ferÅ, put after, esteem less, disregard (postpone)

post-scrÄ«bÅ, write after, add (postscript)

prae-, before, in front, forth; intensive force: very. (In Eng. also spelled pre-.)

prae-moneÅ, warn before, forewarn (premonition)

prae-cÄdÅ, go before, excel (precede)

prae-pÅnÅ, put before, place in command of, prefer (preposition)

prae-mittÅ, send before or forth, set before (premise)

prae-scrÄ«bÅ, write before, order (prescribe, prescription)

prae-ferÅ, bear before, set before, prefer

prae-clÄrus, very noble, very famous, excellent

prÅ-, before, in front, forth, out, away, instead of, for. (Sometimes pur- in Eng.)

prÅ-vocÅ, call forth or out, challenge, excite (provoke)

prÅ-videÅ, see ahead, foresee, care for (provide, provision, purvey)

prÅ-dÅ«cÅ, lead before or out, bring forth, prolong (produce)

prÅ-cÄdÅ, go forward, advance (proceed)

prÅ-pÅnÅ, put in front, set forth, declare (proponent, purpose)

prÅ-mittÅ, send forth, assure (promise)

prÅ-cÅnsul, one who served in place of a consul (proconsul)

re- (red-; inseparable), back again.

re-vocÅ, call back, recall (revoke)

re-dÅ«cÅ, lead back (reduce)

re-cÄdÅ, go back, retire (recede)

re-pÅnÅ, put back, replace, restore (repository)

re-mittÅ, send back, give up (remit)

red-dÅ, give back, restore, return

red-eÅ, go back, return

sÄ- (inseparable), apart, aside, without.

sÄ-dÅ«cÅ, lead aside, separate (seduce)

sÄ-cÄdÅ, go apart, withdraw, retire (secede)

sÄ-pÅnÅ, put aside, select

sÄ-moveÅ, move aside, separate

sÄ-cÅ«rus, without care, untroubled, serene (secure)

sub- (suc-, suf-, sug-, sup-, sur-, sus-), under, up (from beneath); rather, somewhat, a little, secretly.

sub-dÅ«cÅ, draw from under, withdraw secretly

suc-cÄdÅ, go under, go up, approach, prosper (succeed)

sup-pÅnÅ, put under; substitute (supposition, supposititious)

sub-veniÅ, come under, help (subvene, subvention)

sus-tineÅ (-teneÅ), hold up, support, endure (sustain)

super- (also sur- in Eng.), over, above.

super-pÅnÅ, place over or upon, set over (superposition)

super-sedeÅ, sit above or upon, be superior to, be above, refrain from, desist (supersede)

super-sum, be over and above, be left, survive

superÅ, be above, surpass, conquer (insuperable)

superbus, above others, haughty, proud (superb)

super-vÄ«vÅ, survive

super-ficiÄs, surface

trÄns- (trÄ-), across, over.

trÄns-mittÅ, send across, cross over (transmit)

trÄ-dÅ«cÅ, lead across (traduce)

trÄns-eÅ, go across (transition)

trÄ-dÅ, give over, surrender, hand down (tradition)

SUFFIXES

Of the very numerous Latin suffixes only a few of the more important ones are listed here with their English equivalents.

Suffix denoting the agent, the doer, the one who (-tor or -sor, m.; -trÄ«x, f.).

-tor or -sor (cf. Eng. -er)

victor (vincÅ, victum, conquer), conqueror, victor

scrÄ«ptor (scrÄ«bÅ, scrÄ«ptum, write), writer

lÄctor, lÄctrÄ«x (legÅ, lÄctum, read), reader

ÅrÄtor (ÅrÅ, ÅrÄtum, [speak], plead), speaker, orator

repertor, repertrÄ«x (reperiÅ, repertum, discover), discoverer

auctor (augeÅ, auctum, increase), increaser, author

lÄ«berÄtor (lÄ«berÅ, lÄ«berÄtum, free), liberator

tÅnsor (tondeÅ, tÅnsum, shave, clip), barber

amÄtor (amÅ, amÄtum, love), lover

These nouns have the same base as that of the perfect participle.

2. Suffixes denoting action or result of action (-or, -ium, -tiÅ).

-or (Eng. -or)

amor (amÅ, love), love, amour

timor (timeÅ, fear), fear

dolor (doleÅ, suffer pain), pain, suffering, grief

error (errÅ, go astray, err), error

terror (terreÅ, frighten, terrify), fright, terror

-ium (Eng. -y; -ce when -ium is preceded by c or t)

studium (studeÅ, be eager), eagerness, study

colloquium (colloquor, talk with), talk, conference, colloquy

imperium (imperÅ, command), command, power

odium ($obar$dÄ«, hate), hate

aedificium (aedificÅ, build) building, edifice

silentium (silÄns, silentis, silent), silence

-tiÅ, -tiÅnis, or -siÅ, -siÅnis (Eng. -tion or -sion)

admonitiÅ (admoneÅ, admonitum, admonish) admonition

ratiÅ (reor, ratum, reckon, think), reckoning, plan, reason (ration)

ÅrÄtiÅ (ÅrÅ, ÅrÄtum, [speak], plead), oration

nÄtiÅ (nÄscor, nÄtum, be born), birth, nation

occÄsiÅ (occidÅ, occÄsum, fall down) a befalling, occasion, opportunity

3. Suffixes denoting quality, state, or condition (-ia, -tia, -tÄs, -tÅ«dÅ).

-ia (Eng. -y)

miseria (miser, miserable), misery

Ä«nsÄnia (Ä«nsÄnus, insane), insanity

victÅria (victor, victor), victory

invidia (invidus, envious), envy

iniÅ«ria (iniÅ«rus, wrong, unjust), injustice, injury

-tia (Eng. -ce)

amÄ«citia (amÄ«cus, friendly), friendship

sapientia (sapiÄns, wise), wisdom, sapience

scientia (sciÄns, knowing), knowledge, science

iÅ«stitia (iÅ«stus, just), justice

dÄ«ligentia (dÄ«ligÄns, diligent), diligence

-tÄs, -tÄtis (Eng. -ty)

lÄ«bertÄs (liber, free), freedom, liberty

vÄritÄs (vÄrus, true), truth, verity

paupertÄs (pauper, poor), poverty

cupiditÄs (cupidus, desirous, greedy), greed, cupidity

gravitÄs (gravis, heavy, grave), weight, seriousness, gravity

celeritÄs (celer, swift), swiftness, celerity

-tÅ«dÅ, -tÅ«dinis (Eng. -tude)

multitÅ«dÅ (multus, much, many), multitude

magnitÅ«dÅ (magnus, large, great), magnitude

pulchritÅ«dÅ (pulcher, beautiful), beauty, pulchritude

sÅlitÅ«dÅ (sÅlus, alone), solitude

sollicitÅ«dÅ (sollicitus, agitated, solicitous), solicitude

4. Adjectival suffix meaning full of (-Åsus).

-Åsus, -Åsa, -Åsum (Eng. -ous or -ose)

studiÅsus (studium, zeal), full of zeal, eager (studious)

imperiÅsus (imperium, command), full of command, imperious

perÄ«culÅsus (perÄ«culum, danger), full of danger, dangerous

vitiÅsus (vitium, fault, vice), faulty, vicious

verbÅsus (verbum, word), wordy, verbose

5. Adjectival suffix meaning able to be, worthy to be; sometimes able to (-bilis).

-bilis, -bile (Eng. -able, -ible, -ble)

laudÄbilis (laudÅ, praise), worthy to be praised, laudable

amÄbilis (amÅ, love), worthy to be loved, lovable, amiable

incrÄdibilis (crÄdÅ, believe), not worthy to be believed, incredible

mÅbilis (moveÅ, move), able to be moved, movable, mobile

inexpugnÄbilis (expugnÅ, conquer), unconquerable

stabilis (stÅ, stand), able to stand, stable

6. Adjectival suffixes denoting pertaining to (-Älis or -Äris, -Änus, -icus).

-Älis, -Äle, or -Äris, -Äre (Eng. -al or -ar)

mortÄlis (mors, death), pertaining to death, mortal

vÄ«tÄlis (vÄ«ta, life), pertaining to life, vital

fÄtÄlis (fÄtum, fate), fatal

populÄris (populus, people), popular

vulgÄris (vulgus, the common people), common, vulgar

-Änus, -Äna, -Änum (Eng. -an or -ane)

RÅmÄnus (RÅma, Rome), pertaining to Rome, Roman

hÅ«mÄnus (homÅ, man), pertaining to man, human, humane

urbÄnus (urbs, city), urban, urbane

mundÄnus (mundus, world), worldly, mundane

-icus, -ica, -icum (Eng. -ic)

domesticus (domus, house), pertaining to the house, domestic

pÅ«blicus (populus, people), pertaining to the people, public

rÅ«sticus (rÅ«s, country), rustic

cÄ«vicus (cÄ«vis, citizen), civic

classicus (classis, class), pertaining to the classes, of the highest class; classic

SUPPLEMENTARY SYNTAX

The following constructions are listed for the benefit of students who plan to continue their study of Latin beyond the introductory year. A number of these constructions have already been encountered here and there in the 40 formal chapters of this book. However, although often these can be easily translated without benefit of syntactical labels, it seems wise to catalog them here along with the more difficult items.

GENITIVE OF MATERIAL

The genitive may indicate the material of which a thing is made.

pÅculum aurÄ«, a goblet of gold

Numerus hostium crÄscit, the number of the enemy is increasing.

MÅns aquae secÅ«tus est et tempestÄs trÄs nÄvÄs cÄ«nxit aggere harÄnae, a mountain of water followed and the storm surrounded three ships with a mound of sand.

OBJECTIVE GENITIVE

The objective genitive depends on a noun of verbal meaning and is used as the object of the verbal idea. It is sometimes translated by for.

amor laudis, love of praise (= amat laudem, he loves praise.)

cupiditÄs pecÅ«niae, greed for money (= cupit pecÅ«niam, he longs for money.)

metus mortis, fear of death (= metuit mortem, he fears death.)

spÄs salÅ«tis, hope for safety (= spÄrat salÅ«tem, he hopes for safety.)

FÄmina erat dux factÄ«, a woman was the leader of the enterprise (= dÅ«xit factum.)

laudÄtor temporis ÄctÄ«, a praiser of the past (= laudat tempus Äctum.)

DATIVE OF PURPOSE

The dative may express the purpose for which a person or thing serves. A dative of reference (Capvt XXXVIII) often appears in conjunction with the dative of purpose, and this combination is called the âdouble dativeâ construction.

PetÄ«tiÅ mea tibi (dat. of ref.) summae cÅ«rae (dat. of purp.) est, my candidacy is (for) the greatest concern to you.

Ea rÄs mihi (ref.) summae voluptÄtÄ« (purp.) erat, that matter was for the greatest pleasure to me = gave me the greatest pleasure.

IllÄ« nÅbÄ«s (ref.) auxiliÅ (purp.) vÄnÄrunt, they came as an aid to us.

HÅs librÅs dÅnÅ (purp.) mÄ«sit, he sent these books as a gift.

Hoc mÄ iuvat et mihi (ref.) mellÄ« (purp.) est, this gratifies me and is (as) honey to me.

Optant locum tÄctÅ (purp.), they desire a place for a roof (building).

DATIVE OF POSSESSION

The dative can be used with sum to express the idea of possession.

Liber est mihi, a book is to me = I have a book.

(Contrast: liber est meus, the book is mine.)

IllÄ« maior turba clientium est, that man has a greater throng of retainers.

Sunt tibi animus et mÅrÄs, you have a soul and character.

Haec eÄ«s semper erunt, they will always have these things.

PrÅ«dentia est illÄ« puellae, that girl has prudence.

Å virgÅ, nÅn tibi est vultus mortÄlis, O maiden, you do not have the face of a mortal.

SÄ« umquam mihi fÄ«lius eritâ¦, if I ever have a sonâ¦.

ABLATIVE OF RESPECT OR SPECIFICATION

The ablative may be used to tell in what specific respect a verb or an adjective holds true.

HÄ« omnÄs linguÄ, Ä«nstitÅ«tÄ«s, lÄgibus inter sÄ differunt, these all differ from one another in language, customs, and laws.

IllÄ« virtÅ«te omnibus (dat.) praestÄbant, those men used to excel all in courage.

Id genus erat intractÄbile bellÅ, that race was unmanageable in war.

Quis est praestantior aut nÅbilitÄte aut probitÄte aut studiÅ optimÄrum artium? Who is more outstanding in nobility or integrity or the pursuit of the finest arts?

Ager bene cultus est Å«ber Å«sÅ« et ÅrnÄtus speciÄ, a field well cultivated is rich in usefulness and beautiful in appearance.

Asia omnibus terrÄ«s (dat.) antecellit Å«bertÄte agrÅrum et varietÄte frÅ«ctuum et multitÅ«dine eÄrum quae exportantur, Asia excels all lands in richness of fields and variety of fruits and large number of those things which are exported.

ABLATIVE OF CAUSE

The ablative can be used to indicate a cause or reason.

Miser timÅre dÄlÄ«rat, the wretched man is insane with fear.

Corpora eÅrum metÅ« dÄbilia sunt, their bodies are weak from fear.

Aper dentibus timÄtur, the boar is feared because of his teeth.

Nihil arduum mortÄlibus est; caelum ipsum stultitiÄ petimus, nothing is (too) arduous for mortals; we seek the sky itself in our folly.

OdiÅ tyrannÄ« in exsilium fÅ«git, because of his hatred of the tyrant he fled into exile.

BonÄ« amÅre virtÅ«tis peccÄre ÅdÄrunt, good men because of their love of virtue hate to sin.

ABLATIVE OF DEGREE OF DIFFERENCE

With comparatives and adverbs suggesting comparison the ablative can be used to indicate the degree of difference in the comparison.

TantÅ melius, the better by so much = so much the better.

Senex nÅn facit ea quae iuvenis, at multÅ maiÅra et meliÅra facit, an old man does not do the things which a young man does, but he does much greater and better things (greater by much).

MultÅ Äcrius iam vigilÄbÅ, I shall now watch much more keenly.

RÅmam paucÄ«s post diÄbus vÄnistÄ«, you came to Rome a few days afterwards (afterwards by a few days).

Aberat ab eÄ urbe tribus mÄ«libus passuum, he was three miles from that city (was away by three miles).

Bonae AthÄnae paulÅ plÅ«s artis adiÄcÄrunt, good Athens added a little more skill (more by a little).

SUBORDINATE CLAUSES IN INDIRECT STATEMENT

In indirect statement, subordinate clauses regularly have verbs in the subjunctive mood, even though they had the indicative in the direct form.

OBJECTIVE INFINITIVE

The complementary infinitive has no subject accusative (see Capvt VI). However, when an infinitive with subject accusative is used as the object of a verb, it is called an objective infinitive.

Volunt venÄ«re, they wish to come. (complem. infin.)

Iussit eÅs venÄ«re, he ordered them to come. (obj. infin.)

NÅn possum loquÄ«, I cannot speak. (complem. infin.)

NÅn patitur mÄ loquÄ«, he does not permit me to speak. (obj. infin.)

NÅn audet Ä«re, he does not dare to go. (complem. infin.)

CoÄgÄrunt eum Ä«re, they forced him to go. (obj. infin.)

SVMMÄRIVM FÅRMÄRVM

NOUNSâDECLENSIONS

¹ The vocative singular of nouns like amÄ«cus and of masculine adjectives like magnus ends in -e. The vocative singular of fÄ«lius and of names in -ius ends in a single - Ä« (fÄ«lÄ«, VergilÄ«); the vocative singular of the masculine adjective meus is mÄ«; the vocative singular of masculine adjectives in -ius ends in -ie (Ägregius; Ägregie). Otherwise, the vocative has the same form as the nominative in all declensions.

ADJECTIVESâDECLENSIONS

² The plural follows the pattern of the singular except that it has the plural endings.
₃ Present participles follow the declension of potÄns except that they have -e in the ablative singular when used as genuine participles.
⁴ For -Ä«s (acc. pl.) see Capvt XVI.
⁵ For irregular plÅ«s see Capvt XXVII.

PRONOUNS

⁶ The interrogative adjective quÄ«? quae? quod? meaning what? which? what kind of? has the same declension as that of the relative pronoun.

PRONOUNS

⁷ Also Ä«sdem.
⁸ Similarly Å«nus, tÅtus, Å«llus, nÅ«llus, alius, alter, uter, neuter (see Capvt IX).
₉ All forms of the pronouns of the first and second persons except the nom. sg. and the nom. pl. may also be used as reflexive pronouns.
¹⁰ These forms are reflexive only. The nonreflexive forms of the third person are supplied by is, ea, id (see Capita XI, XIII).
¹¹ The form sÄsÄ is also frequently found.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

NUMERALS

Declension of Numerals

For the declension of Å«nus see Capvt IX or sÅlus above.

For duo, trÄs, and mÄ«lle see Capvt XV.

The forms from trecentÄ« through nÅngentÄ« are declined in the plural like ducentÄ«, -ae, -a.

The ordinals are declined like prÄ«mus, -a, -um.

The other forms are indeclinable.

CONJUGATIONS 1â4

Indicative Active

Subjunctive Active

Present Imperative Active

Indicative Passive

Subjunctive Passive Present

¹² The participles laudatus (-a, -um), monitus (-a, -um), etc., are used as predicate adjectives, and so their endings vary to agree with the subject.

Present Imperative Passive

In classical Latin, passive form imperatives are found chiefly in deponent verbs (for forms, see Capvt XXXIV).

Participles

DEPONENT VERBS

Indicative

Subjunctive

Present Imperative

Participles

Infinitives

IRREGULAR VERBS

Indicative¹³

Subjunctive

Participles

Infinitives

IRREGULAR: ferÅ, ferre, tulÄ«, lÄtum, to bear, carry

Indicative

Subjunctive

IRREGULAR: fÄ«Å, fierÄ«, factus sum, to happen, become; be made, be done

VOCÄBVLA: ENGLISH-LATIN

An Arabic (1) in parentheses after a verb shows that this is a regular verb of the 1st conjugation with a sequence of principal parts ending in -Äre, -ÄvÄ«, -Ätum (or, if deponent, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum). For prefixes and suffixes see the lists in the Appendix. For more complete definitions of the Latin words, see the Latin-English VocÄbula.

A

abandon, relinquÅ, -ere, -liquÄ«, -lictum

able (be), possum, posse, potuÄ«

about (concerning), dÄ + abl.

absolute ruler, tyrannus, -Ä«, m.

abundance, cÅpia, -ae, f.

accomplish, faciÅ, -ere, fÄcÄ«, factum; be accomplished, fÄ«o, fierÄ«, factus sum

across, trÄns + acc.

advice, cÅnsilium, -iÄ«, n.

advise, moneÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum

affect, adficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum

afraid (be), metuÅ, -ere, -uÄ«

after, post + acc.

afterwards, posteÄ

after all, postrÄmum

again, iterum

against, contrÄ + acc.

age, aetÄs, -tÄtis, f.

alas, heu, vae

all, omnis, -e

alone, sÅlus, -a, -um

also, quoque

although, cum + subjunct.

always, semper

among, inter + acc.

ancestors, maiÅrÄs, maiÅrum, m. pl.

ancient, antÄ«quus, -a, -um

and, et, -que, ac, atque

anger, Ä«ra, -ae, f.

angry, Ä«rÄtus, -a, -um

animal, animal, -mÄlis, n.

announce, nÅ«ntiÅ (1)

another, alius, -a, -ud

answer, respondeÅ, -Äre, -spondÄ«, -spÅnsum

any, Å«llus, -a, -um; aliquis, aliquid

any (anyone, anything, after sÄ«, nisi, nÄ, num), quis, quid

argument, argÅ«mentum, -Ä«, n.

army, exercitus, -Å«s, m.

arms, arma, -Årum, n. pl.

arrest, comprehendÅ, -ere, -Ä«, -hÄnsum

arrogant, superbus, -a, -um

art, ars, artis, f.

as, ut + indic.

asâ¦ as possible, quam + superlative

Asia, Asia, -ae, f.

ask, rogÅ (1)

assure (I assure you, you may be assured), use personal pron. in dat. case (dat. of ref., e.g., tibi)

at (= time), abl. of time; (= place), loc. of names of cities

Athens, AthÄnae, -Ärum, f. pl.

attack, oppugnÅ (1)

author, auctor, -tÅris, m.

avert, ÄvertÅ, -ere, -Ä«, -versum

away from, ab + abl.

B

bad, malus, -a, -um

band, manus, -Å«s, f.

banish, expellÅ, -ere, -pulÄ«, -pulsum

base, turpis, -e

be, sum, esse, fuÄ«, futÅ«rum

beard, barba, -ae, f.

beautiful, pulcher, -chra, -chrum; bellus, -a, -um

beauty, fÅrma, -ae, f.

because, quod

become, fÄ«Å, fierÄ«, factus sum

before, ante + acc.

beg, ÅrÅ (1)

began, coepÄ«, coepisse, coeptum (pres. system supplied by incipiÅ)

begin, incipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum (see

began above)

believe, crÄdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum

benefit, beneficium, -iÄ«, n.

best, optimus, -a, -um

better, melior, -ius

blind, caecus, -a, -um

body, corpus, -poris, n.

(be) born, nÄscor, -Ä«, nÄtus sum

book, liber, -brÄ«, m.

bothâ¦ and, etâ¦ et

boy, puer, puerÄ«, m.

brave, fortis, -e

brief, brevis, -e

bright, clÄrus, -a, -um

bring, ferÅ, ferre, tulÄ«, lÄtum

bring (back), referÅ, -ferre, -ttulÄ«, -lÄtum

brother, frÄter, -tris, m.

bull, bÅs, bovis, m. / f.

but, sed, at

by (= agent), Ä or ab + abl.; (= means), simple abl.

C

Caesar, Caesar, -saris, m.

call, vocÅ (1); appellÅ (1)

can, possum, posse, potuÄ«

capture, capiÅ, -ere, cÄpÄ«, captum

care, cÅ«ra, -ae, f.

certain (definite, sure), certus, -a, -um; (indef.) quÄ«dam, quaedam, quiddam (pron.) or quoddam (adj.)

certainly, certÄ

change, mÅ«tÅ (1)

character, mÅrÄs, mÅrum, m. pl.

cheer, recreÅ (1)

Cicero, CicerÅ, -rÅnis, m.

citizen, cÄ«vis, -is, m. / f.

citizenship, cÄ«vitÄs, -tÄtis, f.

city, urbs, urbis, f.

come, veniÅ, -Ä«re, vÄnÄ«, ventum

come back, reveniÅ, -Ä«re, -vÄnÄ«, -ventum

comfort, sÅlÄcium, -iÄ«, n.

command (noun), imperium, -iÄ«, n.; (verb), imperÅ (1)

common, commÅ«nis, -e

commonwealth, rÄs pÅ«blica, reÄ« pÅ«blicae, f.

compare, comparÅ (1)

complain, queror, -Ä«, questus sum

concerning, dÄ + abl.

confess, fateor, -ÄrÄ«, fassus sum

conquer, superÅ (1); vincÅ, -ere, vÄ«cÄ«, victum

conspirators, coniÅ«rÄtÄ«, -Årum, m. pl.

constellation, sÄ«dus, -deris, n.

consul, cÅnsul, -sulis, m.

country, patria, -ae, f.; terra, -ae, f.

courage, virtÅ«s, -tÅ«tis, f.

create, creÅ (1)

custom, mÅs, mÅris, m.

crime, scelus, -leris, n.

D

danger, perÄ«culum, -Ä«, n.

dare, audeÅ, -Äre, ausus sum

daughter, fÄ«lia, -ae, f. (dat. and abl. pl. fÄ«liÄbus) day, diÄs, -ÄÄ«, m.

dear, cÄrus, -a, -um

death, mors, mortis, f.

dedicate, dÄdicÅ (1)

deed, factum, -Ä«, n.

defend, dÄfendÅ, -ere, -Ä«, -fÄnsum

delay, mora, -ae, f.

delight, dÄlectÅ (1)

deny, negÅ (1)

depart, discÄdÅ, -ere, -cessÄ«, -cessum; abeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum

deprived of (be), careÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itÅ«rum

descendant, nepÅs, -pÅtis, m.

desire (verb), cupiÅ, -ere, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum; dÄsÄ«derÅ (1);(noun), voluptÄs, -tÄtis, f.

despise, contemnÅ, -ere, -tempsÄ«, -temptum

destroy, dÄleÅ, -Äre, -ÄvÄ«, -Ätum

destruction, exitium, -Ä«, n.

die, morior, -Ä«, mortuus sum

difficult, difficilis, -e

dignity, dignitÄs, -tÄtis, f.

dine, cÄnÅ (1)

dinner, cÄna, -ae, f.

discover, reperiÅ, -Ä«re, -pperÄ«, -pertum

disgraceful, turpis, -e

dissimilar, dissimilis, -e

do, faciÅ, -ere, fÄcÄ«, factum; be done, fÄ«Å, fierÄ«, factus sum

doctor, medica, -ae, f.; medicus, -Ä«, m.

drag, trahÅ, -ere, trÄxÄ«, tractum

dread (verb), metuÅ, -ere, -uÄ«; (noun), metus, -Å«s, m.

drive out, expellÅ, -ere, -pulÄ«, -pulsum

E

eagerness, studium, -iÄ«, n.

ear, auris, -is, f.

easy, facilis, -e

eight, octÅ

either, uter, utra, utrum

eitherâ¦ or, autâ¦ aut

eleven, Å«ndecim

emperor, imperÄtor, -tÅris, m.

end, fÄ«nis, -is, m.

endure, ferÅ, ferre, tulÄ«, lÄtum; patior, -Ä«, passus sum

enemy, hostis, -is, m. (usually pl.)

enjoy, Å«tor, -Ä«, Å«sus sum + abl.

enjoyment, frÅ«ctus, -Å«s, m.

enough, satis

entire, tÅtus, -a, -um

entrust, committÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum

envy, (be) envious, invideÅ, -Äre, -vÄ«dÄ«, -vÄ«sum + dat.

err, errÅ (1)

esteem, dÄ«ligÅ, -ere, -lÄxÄ«, -lÄctum

even, etiam; not even, nÄâ¦ quidem

ever, umquam

every(one), omnis, -e

evil (adj.), malus, -a, -um; (noun), malum, -Ä«, n.

exhibit, ostendÅ, -ere, -Ä«, -tentum

expect, exspectÅ (1)

expel, expellÅ, -ere, -pulÄ«, -pulsum

eye, oculus, -Ä«, m.

F

face, vultus, -Å«s, m.

faith, fidÄs, -eÄ«, f.

faithful, fidÄlis, -e

fall, cadÅ, -ere, cecidÄ«, casÅ«rum

false, falsus, -a, -um

fame, fÄma, -ae, f.

family, familia, -ae, f.

farmer, agricola, -ae, m.

father, pater, -tris, m.

fault, culpa, -ae, f.; vitium, -iÄ«, n.

fear (verb), timeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«; (noun), metus, -Å«s, m.; timor, -mÅris, m.

feel, sentiÅ, -Ä«re, sÄnsÄ«, sÄnsum

feeling, sÄnsus, -Å«s, m.

ferocious, ferÅx, gen. ferÅcis

few, paucÄ«, -ae, -a (pl.)

fidelity, fidÄs, -eÄ«, f.

fierce, Äcer, Äcris, Äcre; ferÅx, gen. ferÅcis

fifth, quÄ«ntus, -a, -um

finally, dÄnique

find, inveniÅ, -Ä«re, -vÄnÄ«, -ventum

first (adj.), prÄ«mus, -a, -um; (adv.) prÄ«mum, prÄ«mÅ

five, quÄ«nque

flee, fugiÅ, -ere, fÅ«gÄ«, fugitÅ«rum

follow, sequor, -Ä«, secÅ«tus sum

foolish, stultus, -a, -um

for (conj.), nam, enim; (= since, because), quod, quoniam; (prep.), prÅ + abl.; often simply the dat. case.

force, vÄ«s, vÄ«s, f.

forces (troops), cÅpiae, -Ärum, f. pl.

forgive, ignÅscÅ, -ere, -nÅvÄ«, -nÅtum + dat.

former, prior, prius

fortunate, fortÅ«nÄtus, -a, -um

fortune, fortÅ«na, -ae, f.

forum, forum -Ä«, n.

four, quattuor

free (verb), lÄ«berÅ (1); (adj.), lÄ«ber, -era, -erum

freedom, lÄ«bertÄs, -tÄtis, f.

freely, lÄ«berÄ

friend, amÄ«ca, -ae, f.; amÄ«cus, -Ä«, m.

friendly, amÄ«cus, -a, -um

friendship, amÄ«citia, -ae, f.

frighten, terreÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum

from (away), ab; (out) ex; (down) dÄ: all + abl.

fruit, frÅ«ctus, -Å«s, m.

full, plÄnus, -a, -um

G

game, lÅ«dus, -Ä«, m.

gate, porta, -ae, f.

general, dux, ducis, m.; imperÄtor, -tÅris, m.

gift, dÅnum, -Ä«, n.

girl, puella, -ae, f.

give, dÅ, dare, dedÄ«, datum

(be) glad, gaudeÅ, -Äre, gÄvÄ«sus sum

glory, glÅria, -ae, f.

go, eÅ, Ä«re, iÄ«, itum

go astray, errÅ (1)

go away, abeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum

god, deus, -Ä«, m. (voc. sg. deus, nom. pl. deÄ« or dÄ«, dat. and abl. pl. dÄ«s)

goddess, dea, -ae, f. (dat. and abl. pl. deÄbus)

good, bonus, -a, -um

gratitude, grÄtia, -ae, f.

great, magnus, -a, -um

greedy, avÄrus, -a, -um

Greek, Graecus, -a, -um; a Greek, Graecus, -Ä«, m.

grieve, doleÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itÅ«rum

ground, humus, -Ä«, f.; terra, -ae, f.

guard, custÅdia, -ae, f.

H

hand, manus, -Å«s, f.

happy, beÄtus, -a, -um; fÄlÄ«x, gen. fÄlÄ«cis

harm, noceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum + dat.

harsh, dÅ«rus, -a, -um; acerbus, -a, -um

have, habeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum

he, is; often indicated only by the personal ending of verb

head, caput, -pitis, n.

healthy, sÄnus, -a, -um

hear, audiÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum

heart (in oneâs), use personal pron. in dat. case (dat. of ref., e.g., mihi, tibi)

heavy, gravis, -e

help (verb), adiuvÅ, -Äre, -iÅ«vÄ«, -iÅ«tum; (noun), auxilium, -iÄ«, n.

her (possessive) eius (not reflexive); suus, -a, -um (reflexive)

herself, suÄ« (reflexive); ipsa (intensive)

hesitate, dubitÅ (1)

high, altus, -a, -um

higher, altior, -ius; superior, -ius

himself, suÄ« (reflexive); ipse (intensive)

his, eius (not reflexive); suus, -a, -um (reflexive)

hold, teneÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, tentum

home, domus, -Å«s, f.; at home, domÄ«; (to) home, domum; from home, domÅ

honor, honor, -nÅris, m.

hope (noun), spÄs, -eÄ«, f.; (verb), spÄrÅ (1)

horn, cornÅ«, -Å«s, n.

horse, equus, -Ä«, m.

hour, hÅra, -ae, f.

house, casa, -ae, f.

however, autem (postpositive)

how great, quantus, -a, -um

how many, quot

human, hÅ«mÄnus, -a, -um

human being, homÅ, -minis, m.

humane, hÅ«mÄnus, -a, -um

humble, humilis, -e

hundred, centum

hurt, noceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum + dat.

I

I, ego, meÄ«; often expressed simply by the personal ending of verb

if, sÄ«; ifâ¦ not, nisi

ill, malum, -Ä«, n.

illustrious, clÄrus, -a, -um

immortal, immortÄlis, -e

in, in + abl.

infancy, Ä«nfantia, -ae, f.

injustice, iniÅ«ria, -ae, f.

into, in + acc.

invite, invÄ«tÅ (1)

iron, ferrum, -Ä«, n.

it, is, ea, id; often indicated only by personal ending of verb.

Italy, Italia, -ae, f.

itself, suÄ« (reflexive); ipsum (intensive)

J

join, iungÅ, -ere, iÅ«nxÄ«, iÅ«nctum

judge, iÅ«dex, -dicis, m.

judgment, iÅ«dicium, -iÄ«, n.

just, iÅ«stus, -a, -um>

K

keen, Äcer, Äcris, Äcre

keenly, Äcriter

kindness, beneficium, -iÄ«, n.

king, rÄx, rÄgis, m.

kiss, bÄsium, -iÄ«, n.

knee, genÅ«, -Å«s, n.

know, sciÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum; not know, nesciÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum

knowledge, scientia, -ae, f.

L

labor, labor, -bÅris, m.

lack, careÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itÅ«rum + abl.

land, patria, -ae, f.; terra, -ae, f.

language, lingua, -ae, f.

large, magnus, -a, -um

Latin, LatÄ«nus, -a, -um

law, lÄx, lÄgis, f.

lead, dÅ«cÅ, -ere, dÅ«xÄ«, ductum

leader, dux, ducis, m.

learn (in the academic sense), discÅ, -ere, didicÄ«; (get information), cognÅscÅ, -ere, -nÅvÄ«, -nitum

leave, abeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum

left, sinister, -tra, -trum

leisure, Åtium, -iÄ«, n.

let (someone do something), express this with jussive subjunct.

letter (epistle), litterae, -Ärum, f. pl.

liberty, lÄ«bertÄs, -tÄtis, f.

life, vÄ«ta, -ae, f.

light, lÅ«x, lÅ«cis, f.

listen (to), audiÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum

literature, litterae, -Ärum, f. pl.

little, parvus, -a, -um; little book, libellus, -Ä«, m.

live, vÄ«vÅ, -ere, vÄ«xÄ«, vÄ«ctum; live oneâs life, vÄ«tam agÅ, -ere, ÄgÄ«, Äctum

long (for a long time), diÅ«

lose, ÄmittÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum

love (verb), amÅ (1); (noun), amor, amÅris, m.

loyal, fidÄlis, -e

luck, fortÅ«na, -ae, f.

M

make, faciÅ, -ere, fÄcÄ«, factum

man, vir, virÄ«, m.; homÅ, -minis, m.; often expressed by m. of an adj.

many, multÄ«, -ae, -a

master, magister, -trÄ«, m.; dominus, -Ä«, m.

may (indicating permission to do something), licet + dat. + infin.

me. See I.

memory, memoria, -ae, f.

mercy, clÄmentia, -ae, f.

method, modus, -Ä«, m.

middle, medius, -a, -um

mind, mÄns, mentis, f.

mix, misceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, mixtum

mob, vulgus, -Ä«, n. (sometimes m.)

modest, pudÄ«cus, -a, -um

money, pecÅ«nia, -ae, f.

monument, monumentum, -Ä«, n.

moon, lÅ«na, -ae, f.

more, plÅ«s, plÅ«ris; compar. of adj. or adv.

most, plÅ«rimus, -a, -um; superl. of adj. or adv.

mother, mÄter, -tris, f.

mountain, mÅns, montis, m.

move, moveÅ, -Äre, mÅvÄ«, mÅtum

much, multus, -a, -um

murder, necÅ (1)

must, dÄbeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum; or, for pass., use pass. periphrastic

my, meus, -a, -um (m. voc. sg. mÄ«)

myself (reflexive), meÄ«, mihi, etc.; (intensive) ipse, ipsa

N

name, nÅmen, -minis, n.

narrate, nÄrrÅ (1)

nation, gÄns, gentis, f.

nature, nÄtÅ«ra, -ae, f.

neglect, neglegÅ, -ere, -glÄxÄ«, -glÄctum

neighbor, vÄ«cÄ«na, -ae, f.; vÄ«cÄ«nus, -Ä«, m.

neitherâ¦ nor, nequeâ¦ neque

never, numquam

nevertheless, tamen

new, novus, -a, -um

night, nox, noctis, f.

nine, novem

no, nÅ«llus, -a, -um

nobody, no one, nÄmÅ, m. / f.; for decl. see Lat.-Eng. Vocab.

not, nÅn; nÄ with jussive, jussive noun, and purp-clauses; ut with fear clauses

nothing, nihil (indecl.), n.

now, nunc

number, numerus, -Ä«, m.

O

obey, pÄreÅ, -Äre, -uÄ« + dat.

offer, offerÅ, -ferre, obtulÄ«, oblÄtum

office, officium, -iÄ«, n; honor, honÅris, m.

often, saepe

old, antÄ«quus, -a, -um; senex, senis

old man, senex, senis, m.

on (= place), in + abl.; (= time), simple abl.

on account of, propter + acc.

once, semelone, Å«nus, -a, -um

only (adv.), tantum; (adj.), sÅlus, -a, -um

opinion, sententia, -ae, f.; (in oneâs) opinion, use personal pron. in dat. case (dat. of ref., e.g., mihi, tibi)

opportunity, occÄsiÅ, -Ånis, f.

or, aut

oration, ÅrÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f.

orator, ÅrÄtor, -tÅris, m.

order, iubeÅ, -Äre, iussÄ«, iussum; imperÅ (1) + dat. (in) order to, ut (+ subjunct.); in order not to, nÄ (+ subjunct.)

other, another, alius, alia, aliud; the other (of two), alter, -era, -erum; (all) the other, cÄterÄ«, -ae, -a

ought, dÄbeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum; or, for pass., use pass. periphrastic

our, noster, -tra, -trum

out of, ex + abl.

overcome, superÅ (1)

overpower, opprimÅ, -ere, -pressÄ«, -pressum

own, his own, suus, -a, -um; my own, meus, -a, -um

P

pain, dolor, -lÅris, m.

part, pars, partis, f.

passage, locus, -Ä«, m.

passion, cupiditÄs, -tÄtis, f.

patience, patientia, -ae, f.

pay. See penalty.

peace, pÄx, pÄcis, f.

penalty, poena, -ae, f.; pay the penalty, poenÄs dare

people, populus, -Ä«, m.

perceive, sentiÅ, -Ä«re, sÄnsÄ«, sÄnsum

perhaps, fortasse

period (of time), aetÄs, -tÄtis, f.

perish, pereÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum

permit, patior, -Ä«, passus sum; it is permitted, licet, licÄre, licuit (impers.)

perpetual, perpetuus, -a, -um

persuade, persuÄdeÅ, -Äre, -suÄsÄ«, -suÄsum + dat.

philosopher, sapiÄns, -entis, m.; philosopha, -ae, f.; philosophus, -Ä«, m.

philosophy, philosophia, -ae, f.

place, locus, -Ä«, m.; pl., loca, -Årum, n.

plan, cÅnsilium, -iÄ«, n.

pleasant, iÅ«cundus, -a, -um

please, placeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum + dat.; with a request, amÄbÅ tÄ

pleasure, voluptÄs, -tÄtis, f.

plebeians, plÄbs, plÄbis, f.

plot, Ä«nsidiae, -Ärum, f. pl.

poem, carmen, -minis, n.

poet, poÄta, -ae, m.

point out, dÄmÅnstrÅ (1)

(asâ¦ as) possible (or greatest possible, brightest possible, etc.), quam + superl. of adj. or adv.

poverty, paupertÄs, -tÄtis, f.

power (command), imperium, -iÄ«, n.

powerful, potÄns, gen. potentis

praise (verb), laudÅ (1); (noun), laus, laudis, f.

prefer, mÄlÅ, mÄlle, mÄluÄ«

prepare, parÅ (1)

preserve, cÅnservÅ (1)

press, premÅ, -ere, pressÄ«, pressum

pretty, bellus, -a, -um; pulcher, -chra, -chrum

priest, sacerdÅs, -dÅtis, m.

prohibit, prohibeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum

promise, prÅmitto, -ere, mÄ«sÄ«, -missum

provided that, dummodo + subjunct.

pupil, discipula, -ae, f.; discipulus, -Ä«, m.

pursuit, studium, -iÄ«, n.

put, pÅnÅ, -ere, posuÄ«, positum

Q

queen, rÄgÄ«na, -ae, f.

quick, celer, -eris, -ere

quickly, celeriter, cito

R

raise, tollÅ, -ere, sustulÄ«, sublÄtum

rather: express this with compar. degree of adj. or adv.

read, legÅ, -ere, lÄgÄ«, lÄctum

real, vÄrus, -a, -um

reason, ratiÅ, -Ånis, f.

receive, accipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum

recite, recitÅ (1)

recognize, recognÅscÅ, -ere, -nÅvÄ«, -nitum

refuse, recÅ«sÅ (1)

regain, recipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum

region, loca, -Årum, n.

remain, remaneÅ, -Äre, -mÄnsÄ«, -mÄnsum

report, nÅ«ntiÅ (1)

republic, rÄs pÅ«blica, reÄ« pÅ«blicae, f.

reputation, fÄma, -ae, f.

rescue, ÄripiÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, -reptum

rest, the rest, cÄterÄ«, -ae, -a

restrain, teneÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -tentum

return (go back), redeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum

return (in return for), prÅ + abl.

riches, dÄ«vitiae, -Ärum, f. pl.

right (noun), iÅ«s, iÅ«ris, n.; (adj.), dexter, -tra, -trum

road, via, -ae, f.

Roman, RÅmÄnus, -a, -um

Rome, RÅma, -ae, f.

rose, rosa, -ae, f.

rule (noun), regnum, -Ä«, n.; (verb), regÅ, -ere, rÄxÄ«, rÄctum

rumor, rÅ«mor, -mÅris, m.

run, currÅ, -ere, cucurrÄ«, cursum

S

sad, tristis, -e

safe, salvus, -a, -um

safety, salÅ«s, -lÅ«tis, f.

sailor, nauta, -ae, m.

sake (for the sake of), gen. + causÄ

salt, sÄl, salis, m.

same, Ä«dem, eadem, idem

satisfy, satiÅ (1)

save, servÅ (1); cÅnservÅ (1)

say, dÄ«cÅ, -ere, dÄ«xÄ«, dictum

school, lÅ«dus, -Ä«, m.

sea, mare, -is, n.

second, secundus, -a, -um; alter, -era, -erum

see, videÅ, -Äre, vÄ«dÄ«, vÄ«sum

seek, petÅ, -ere, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum; quaerÅ, -ere, -sÄ«vÄ«, -sÄ«tum

seem, videor, -ÄrÄ«, vÄ«sus sum

seize, rapiÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, raptum

senate, senÄtus, -Å«s, m.

send, mittÅ, -ere, mÄ«sÄ«, missum

serious, gravis, -e

serve, serviÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum + dat.

service, officium, -iÄ«, n.

seven, septem

she, ea; often indicated only by the personal ending of verb

ship, nÄvis, -is, f.

short, brevis, -e

show, ostendÅ, -ere, -Ä«, -tentum; dÄmÅnstrÅ (1)

shun, vÄ«tÅ (1); fugiÅ, -ere, fÅ«gÄ«, fugitÅ«rum

sign, signum, -Ä«, n.

similar, similis, -e

since, quoniam + indic.; cum + subjunct.; abl. abs.

sister, soror, -rÅris, f.

six, sex

skill, ars, artis, f.

slave, servus, -Ä«, m.;

slavegirl, serva, -ae, f.

slavery, servitÅ«s, -tÅ«tis, f.

sleep (verb), dormiÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -itum; (noun), somnus, -Ä«, m.

slender, gracilis, -e

small, parvus, -a, -um

so, ita, sÄ«c (usually with verbs), tam (usually with adjs. and advs.); so great, tantus, -a, -um

soldier, mÄ«les, -litis, m.

some, a certain one (indef.), quÄ«dam, quaedam, quiddam; (more emphatic pron.), aliquis, aliquid

someâ¦ others, aliÄ«â¦ aliÄ«

son, fÄ«lius, -iÄ«, m.

soon, mox

sort, genus, -neris, n.

soul, animus, -Ä«, m.

sound, sÄnus, -a, -um; salvus, -a, -um

spare, parcÅ, -ere, pepercÄ«, parsÅ«rum + dat.

speak, dÄ«cÅ, -ere, dÄ«xÄ«, dictum; loquor, -Ä«, locÅ«tus sum

spirit, spÄ«ritus, -Å«s, m.

stand, stÅ, stÄre, stetÄ«, statum

star, stÄlla, -ae, f.

start, proficÄ«scor, -Ä«, -fectus sum

state, cÄ«vitÄs, -tÄtis, f.; rÄs pÅ«blica, reÄ« pÅ«blicae, f.

story, fÄbula, -ae, f.

street, via, -ae, f.

strength, vÄ«rÄs, -ium, f. pl.

strong, fortis, -e; be strong, valeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itÅ«rum

student, discipula, -ae, f.; discipulus, -Ä«, m.

study (noun), studium, -iÄ«, n.; (verb), studeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ« + dat.

suddenly, subitÅ

summer, aestÄs, -tÄtis, f.

sun, sÅl, sÅlis, m.

support, alÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, altum

suppose, opÄ«nor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum; putÅ (1)

suppress, opprimÅ, -primere, -pressÄ«, -pressum

supreme power, imperium, -iÄ«, n.

sure, certus, -a, -um

surrender, trÄdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum

sweet, dulcis, -e

swift, celer, -eris, -ere

sword, ferrum, -Ä«, n.; gladius, -iÄ«, m.

Syracuse, SyrÄcÅ«sae, -Ärum, f. pl.

T

talk, loquor, -Ä«, -cÅ«tus sum

teach, doceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, doctum

teacher, magister, -trÄ«, m.; magistra, -ae, f.

tear, lacrima, -ae, f.

tell, dÄ«cÅ, -ere, dÄ«xÄ«, dictum

ten, decem

terrify, terreÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum

territory, fÄ«nÄs, -ium, m. pl.

than, quam; or simple abl.

thank, grÄtiÄs agÅ, -ere, ÄgÄ«, Äctum + dat.

that (demonstrative), ille, illa, illud; is, ea, id; that (of yours), iste, ista, istud

that (subord. conj.), not expressed in ind. state.; ut (purp. and result); nÄ (fear)

thatâ¦ not, nÄ (purp.); utâ¦ nÅn (result); ut (fear)

that (rel. pron.), quÄ«, quae, quod

their, suus, -a, -um (reflexive); eÅrum, eÄrum (not reflexive)

them. See he, she, it.

then, tum, deinde

there, ibi

therefore, igitur (postpositive)

these. See this, demonstrative.

they. See he, she, it; often expressed simply by the personal ending of verb

thing, rÄs, reÄ«, f.; often merely the n. of an adj.

think, putÅ (1); arbitror, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum

third, tertius, -a, -um

this, hic, haec, hoc; is, ea, id

those. See that, demonstrative.

thousand, mÄ«lle (indecl. adj. sg.), mÄ«lia, -iÅ«m, n. (noun in pl.)

three, trÄs, tria

through, per + acc.

throughout, per + acc.

throw, iaciÅ, -ere, iÄcÄ«, iactum

thus, sÄ«c

time, tempus, -poris, n.; (period of) time, aetÄs, -tÄtis, f.

to (place to which), ad + acc.; (ind. obj.), dat.; (purp.), ut + subjunct., ad + gerund or gerundive

today, hodiÄ

tolerate, tolerÅ (1)

tomorrow, crÄs

too, nimis, nimium; or use compar. degree of adj. or adv.

touch, tangÅ, -ere, tetigÄ«, tÄctum

travel (abroad), peregrÄ«nor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum

trivial, levis, -e

troops, cÅpiae, -Ärum, f. pl.

Troy, TrÅia, -ae, f.

true, vÄrus, -a, -um

truly, vÄrÄ

trust, crÄdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum + dat.

truth, vÄritÄs, -tÄtis, f.

try, experior, -Ä«rÄ«, expertus sum

turn, vertÅ, -ere, -Ä«, versum

twenty, vÄ«gintÄ«

two, duo, duae, duo

type, genus, -neris, n.

tyrant, tyrannus, -Ä«, m.

U

unable (be), nÅn possum

uncertain, incertus, -a, -um

under, sub + abl. (= place where), + acc. (= place to which)

understand, intellegÅ, -ere, -lÄxÄ«, -lÄctum; comprehendÅ, -ere, -Ä«, -hÄnsum

unfortunate, miser, -era, -erum

unless, nisi

unwilling (be), nÅlÅ, nÅlle, nÅluÄ«

urban, urbane, urbÄnus, -a, -um

urge, hortor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum

use, Å«tor, -Ä«, Å«sus sum + abl.

V

Vergil, Vergilius, -iÄ«, m.

verse, versus, -Å«s, m.

very, express this by the superl. degree of adj. or adv.

vice, vitium, -iÄ«, n.

virtue, virtÅ«s, -tÅ«tis, f.

W

wage, gerÅ, -ere, gessÄ«, gestum

walls, moenia, -ium, n. pl.

want, volÅ, velle, voluÄ«

war, bellum, -Ä«, n.

warn, moneÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum

water, aqua, -ae, f.

we. See I; often expressed simply by the personal ending of verb

wealth, dÄ«vitiae, -Ärum, f. pl.

weapons, arma, -Årum, n. pl.

well, bene

what (pron.), quid; (adj.), quÄ«, quae, quod

whatever, quisquis, quidquid

when, participial phrase; abl. abs.; cum + subjunct.; (interrog.), quandÅ; (rel.), ubi

whence, unde, adv.

where, ubi

wherefore, quÄrÄ

which (rel. pron. and interrog. adj.), quÄ«, quae, quod

while, dum

who (rel.), quÄ«, quae, quod; (interrog.), quis, quid

whole, tÅtus, -a, -um

why, cÅ«r

wicked, malus, -a, -um

wife, uxor, uxÅris, f.

willing (be), volÅ, velle, voluÄ«

window, fenestra, -ae, f.

wine, vÄ«num, -Ä«, n.

wisdom, sapientia, -ae, f.

wise, sapiÄns, gen. sapientis

wisely, sapienter

wish, cupiÅ, -ere, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum; volÅ, velle, voluÄ«

with, cum + abl.; abl. of means (no prep.)

without, sine + abl.

woman, fÄmina, -ae, f.; often expressed by f. of an adj.

word, verbum, -Ä«, n.

work, labor, -bÅris, m.; opus, operis, n.

world, mundus, -Ä«, m.

worse, peior, -ius

worst, pessimus, -a, -um

write, scrÄ«bÅ, -ere, scrÄ«psÄ«, scrÄ«ptum

writer, scrÄ«ptor, -tÅris, m.

Y

year, annus, -Ä«, m.

yesterday, heri

yield, cÄdÅ, -ere, cessÄ«, cessum

you, tÅ«, tuÄ«; often expressed simply by the personal ending of verb

young man, adulÄscÄns, -centis, m.

your (sg.), tuus, -a, -um; (pl.), vester, -tra, -trum

yourself (reflexive), tuÄ«, tibi, etc.; (intensive), ipse, ipsa

youth, iuvenis, -is, m.

VOCÄBVLA: LATIN-ENGLISH

An Arabic numeral after a vocabulary entry indicates the chapter VocÄbula in which the word is first introduced. Arabic (1) in parentheses after a verb shows that this is a regular verb of the 1st conjugation with a sequence of principal parts ending in -Äre, -ÄvÄ«, -Ätum. For prefixes and suffixes see the lists in the Appendix.

A

Ä or ab, prep. + abl., from, away from; by (agent). 14

abeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, go away, depart, leave. 37

absconditus, -a, -um, hidden, secret

absÄns, gen. -sentis, adj., absent, away. 37

absum, -esse, ÄfuÄ«, ÄfutÅ«rum, be away, be absent

abundantia, -ae, f., abundance

ac. See atque.

accÄdÅ, -ere, -cessÄ«, -cessum, come near, approach. 36

accipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, take, receive, accept. 24

accommodÅ (1), adjust, adapt

accÅ«sÄtor, -tÅris, m., accuser

accÅ«sÅ (1), accuse

Äcer, Äcris, Äcre, sharp, keen, eager, severe, fierce. 16

acerbitÄs, -tÄtis, f., harshness

acerbus, -a, -um, harsh, bitter, grievous. 12

AchillÄs, -is, m., Achilles, Greek hero, chief character in the Iliad

aciÄs, -ÄÄ«, f., sharp edge, keenness, line of battle

acquÄ«rÅ, -ere, -quÄ«sÄ«vÄ«, -quÄ«sÄ«tum, acquire, gain

Äcriter, adv., keenly, fiercely. 32

ad, prep. + acc., to, up to, near to. 8

addiscÅ, -ere, -didicÄ«, learn in addition

addÅ«cÅ, -ere, -dÅ«xÄ«, -ductum, lead to, induce

adeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, go to, approach. 37

adferÅ, -ferre, attulÄ«, allÄtum, bring to. 31

adficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, affect, afflict, weaken

adiciÅ, -ere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectum, add

adiuvÅ, -Äre, -iÅ«vÄ«, -iÅ«tum, help, aid, assist; please. 4

admÄ«ror, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, wonder at, admire

admittÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, admit, receive, let in. 17

admoneÅ = moneÅ

adnuÅ, -ere, -nuÄ«, nod assent

adoptÅ (1), wish for oneself, select, adopt

adsum, -esse, -fuÄ«, -futÅ«rum, be near, be present, assist

adÅ«lÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., fawning, flattery

adulÄscÄns, -centis, m. and f., young man or woman. 12

adulÄscentia, -ae, f., youth, young manhood; youthfulness. 5

adultus, -a, -um, grown up, mature, adult

adÅ«rÅ, -ere, -ussÄ«, -ustum, set fire to, burn, singe

adveniÅ, -Ä«re, -vÄnÄ«, -ventum, come (to), arrive

adversus, -a, -um, facing, opposite, adverse. 34

adversus, prep. + acc., toward, facing; against

advesperÄscit, advesperÄscere, advesperÄvit, impers., evening is coming on, it is growing dark

aedificium, -iÄ«, n., building, structure. 39

aegrÄ, adv., with difficulty, hardly, scarcely

aequitÄs, -tÄtis, f., justice, fairness, equity

aequus, -a, -um, level, even, calm, equal, just, favorable. 22

aes, aeris, n., bronze. 40

aestÄs, -tÄtis, f., summer. 35

aestus, -Å«s, m., heat, tide

aetÄs, -tÄtis, f., period of life, life, age, an age, time. 16

aeternus, -a, -um, eternal

Agamemnon, -nonis, m., Agamemnon, commander-in-chief of the Greek forces at Troy

ager, agrÄ«, m., field, farm. 3

agÅ, -ere, ÄgÄ«, Äctum, drive, lead, do, act; of time or life, pass, spend; grÄtiÄs agere + dat., thank. 8

agricola, -ae, m., farmer. 3

agrÄ«cultÅ«ra, -ae, f., agriculture

Äit, Äiunt, he says, they say, assert. 25

Alexander, -drÄ«, m., Alexander the Great, renowned Macedonian general and king, 4th cent., B.C.

aliÄnus, -a, -um, belonging to another (cf. alius), foreign, strange, alien

aliÅquÄ«, adv., otherwise

aliquÄ«, aliqua, aliquod, indef. pronominal adj., some

aliquis, aliquid (gen. alicuius; dat. alicui), indef. pron., someone, somebody, something. 23

aliter, adv., otherwise

alius, alia, aliud, other, another; aliÄ«â¦ aliÄ«, someâ¦ others. 9

alÅ, -ere, aluÄ«, altum, nourish, support, sustain, increase; cherish. 13

alter, -era, -erum, the other (of two), second. 9

altus, -a, -um, high, deep

ambitiÅ, -Ånis, f., a canvassing for votes; ambition; flattery

ambulÅ (1), walk. 39

ÄmÄn, adv. from Hebrew, truly, verily, so be it

amÄ«ca, -ae, f., (female) friend. 3

amÄ«citia, -ae, f., friendship. 10

amiculum, -Ä«, n., cloak

amÄ«cus, -a, -um, friendly. 11

amÄ«cus, -Ä«, m., (male) friend. 3

ÄmittÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, send away; lose, let go. 12

amÅ (1), love, like; amÄbÅ tÄ, please. 1

amor, amÅris, m., love. 7

ÄmoveÅ, -Äre, -mÅvÄ«, -mÅtum, move away, remove

an, adv. and conj. introducing the second part of a double question (see utrum), or; used alone, or, can it be that

ancilla, -ae, f., maidservant

angelus, -Ä«, m., angel

angulus, -Ä«, m., corner

angustus, -a, -um, narrow, limited

anima, -ae, f., air, breath; soul, spirit. 34

animal, -mÄlis, n., a living creature, animal. 14

animus, -Ä«, m., soul, spirit, mind; animÄ«, -Årum, high spirits, pride, courage. 5

annus, -Ä«, m., year. 12

ante, prep. + acc., before (in place or time), in front of; adv., before, previously. 13

anteÄ, adv., before, formerly

antepÅnÅ, -ere, -posuÄ«, -positum, put before, prefer + dat. 35

antÄ«quus, -a, -um, ancient, old-time. 2

ApollÅ, -linis, m., Phoebus Apollo, god of sun, prophecy, poetry, etc.

apparÄtus, -Å«s, m., equipment, splendor

appellÅ (1), speak to, address (as), call, name. 14

approbÅ (1), approve

appropinquÅ (1) + dat., approach, draw near to

aptus, -a, -um, fit, suitable

apud, prep. + acc., among, in the presence of, at the house of. 31

aqua, -ae, f., water. 14

Ära, -ae, f., altar

arÄnea, -ae, f., spiderâs web

arbitror, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, judge, think. 34

arbor, -boris, f., tree. 38

arcus, -Å«s, m., bow

argentum, -Ä«, n., silver, money

argÅ«mentum, -Ä«, n., proof, evidence, argument. 19

arma, -Årum, n., arms, weapons. 28

arÅ (1), plow

ars, artis, f., art, skill. 14

arx, arcis, f., citadel, stronghold. 23

as, assis, m., an as (a small copper coin roughly equivalent to a cent). 31

Asia, -ae, f., Asia, commonly the Roman province in Asia Minor. 12

asper, -era, -erum, rough, harsh. 21

aspiciÅ, -ere, -spexÄ«, -spectum, look at, behold

assentÄtor, -tÅris, m., yes-man, flatterer

astrum, -Ä«, n., star, constellation

at, conj., but; but, mind you; but, you say; a more emotional adversative than sed. 19

Äter, Ätra, Ätrum, dark, gloomy

AthÄnae, -Ärum, f. pl., Athens. 37

AthÄniÄnsis, -e, Athenian; AthÄniÄnsÄs, -ium, the Athenians

atque or ac, conj., and also, and even, and in fact. 21

atquÄ«, conj., and yet, still

auctor, -tÅris, m., increaser; author, originator. 19

auctÅritÄs, -tÄtis, f., authority

audÄcia, -ae, f., daring, boldness, audacity

audÄx, gen. audÄcis, daring, bold

audeÅ, -Äre, ausus sum, dare. 7

audiÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, hear, listen to. 10

audÄ«tor, -tÅris, m., hearer, listener, member of an audience. 16

auferÅ, -ferre, abstulÄ«, ablÄtum, bear away, carry off

Augustus, -Ä«, m., Augustus, the first Roman emperor

aureus, -a, -um, golden

auris, -is, f., ear. 14

aurum, -Ä«, n., gold

aut, conj., or; autâ¦ aut, eitherâ¦ or. 17

autem, postpositive conj., however; moreover. 11

auxilium, -iÄ«, n., aid, help. 31

avÄritia, -ae, f., greed, avarice

avÄrus, -a, -um, greedy, avaricious. 3

ÄvehÅ, -ere, -vexÄ«, -vectum, carry away

ÄvertÅ, -ere, -vertÄ«, -versum, turn away, avert. 23

ÄvocÅ (1), call away, divert

B

balbus, -a, -um, stammering, stuttering

barba, -ae, f., beard

bÄsium, -iÄ«, n., kiss. 4

beÄtus, -a, -um, happy, fortunate, blessed. 10

bellicus, -a, -um, relating to war, military

bellum, -Ä«, n., war. 4

bellus, -a, -um, pretty, handsome, charming. 4

bene, adv. of bonus, well, satisfactorily, quite. 11 (compar. melius; superl. optimÄ. 32)

beneficium, -iÄ«, n., benefit, kindness, favor. 19

benevolentia, -ae, f., good will, kindness

bÄstia, -ae, f., animal, beast

bibÅ, -ere, bibÄ«, drink. 30

bis, adv., twice

bonus, -a, -um, good, kind. 4 (compar. melior; superl. optimus. 27)

bÅs, bovis, m. / f., bull, ox, cow

brevis, -e, short, small, brief. 16

brevitÄs, -tÄtis, f., shortness, brevity

breviter, adv., briefly

Britannia, -ae, f., Britain

Brundisium, -iÄ«, n., important seaport in S. Italy

BrÅ«tus, -Ä«, m., famous Roman name: L. Junius Brutus, who helped establish the Roman republic; M. Junius Brutus, one of the conspirators against Julius Caesar

C

C., abbreviation for the common name GÄius

cadÅ, -ere, cecidÄ«, cÄsÅ«rum, fall. 12

caecus, -a, -um, blind. 17

caelestis, -e, heavenly, celestial

caelum, -Ä«, n., sky, heaven. 5

Caesar, -saris, m., Caesar, especially Gaius Julius Caesar. 12

calamitÄs, -tÄtis, f., misfortune, disaster

calculus, -Ä«, m., pebble

campana, -ae, f., bell (late Lat.)

candidus, -a, -um, shining, bright, white; beautiful. 33

canis, -is (gen. pl. canum), m. / f., dog

canÅ, -ere, cecinÄ«, cantum, to sing about

cantÅ (1), sing

capillus, -Ä«, m., hair (of head or beard)

capiÅ, -ere, cÄpÄ«, captum, take, capture, seize, get. 10

captÅ (1), grab, seek to get, hunt for (legacies, etc.)

caput, -pitis, n., head; leader; beginning; life; heading, Capvt XI

carbÅ, -bÅnis, m., coal, charcoal

careÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itÅ«rum + abl. of separation, be without, be deprived of, want, lack, be free from. 20

cÄritÄs, -tÄtis, f., dearness, affection

carmen, -minis, n., song, poem. 7

carpÅ, -ere, carpsÄ«, carptum, harvest, pluck; seize. 36

CarthÄgÅ, -ginis, f., Carthage (city in N. Africa). 24

cÄrus, -a, -um, dear. 11

casa, -ae, f., house, cottage, hut. 21

cÄsus, -Å«s, m., accident, chance

catÄna, -ae, f., chain

CatilÄ«na, -ae, m., L. Sergius Catiline, leader of the conspiracy against the Roman state in 63 B.C.

Catullus, -Ä«, m., Gaius Valerius Catullus, 1st cent. B.C. lyric poet

cattus, -Ä«, m., cat (late word for classical fÄlÄs, -is)

causa, -ae, f., cause, reason; case, situation; causÄ with a preceding gen., for the sake of, on account of. 21

caveÅ, -Äre, cÄvÄ«, cautum, beware, avoid

cavus, -Ä«, m., hole

cÄdÅ, -ere, cessÄ«, cessum, go, withdraw; yield to, submit, grant. 28

celer, -eris, -ere, swift, quick, rapid. 16

celeritÄs, -tÄtis, f., speed, swiftness

celeriter, swiftly, quickly

cÄna, -ae, f., dinner. 26

cÄnÅ (1), dine. 5

centum, indecl. adj., a hundred. 15

cernÅ, -ere, crÄvÄ«, crÄtum, distinguish, discern, perceive. 22

certÄ, adv., certainly

certus, -a, -um, definite, sure, certain, reliable. 19

cervus, -Ä«, m., stag, deer

cÄterÄ«, -ae, -a, the remaining, the rest, the other. 30

CicerÅ, -rÅnis, m., Marcus Tullius Cicero. 8

cicÅ«ta, -ae, f., hemlock (poison)

cinis, -neris, m., ashes

circÄnsÄs, -ium, m. pl. (sc. lÅ«dÄ«), games in the Circus

cito, adv., quickly. 17

cÄ«vÄ«lis, -e, civil, civic

cÄ«vis, -is, m. / f., citizen. 14

cÄ«vitÄs, -tÄtis, f., state, citizenship. 7

clÄrus, -a, -um, clear, bright; renowned, famous, illustrious. 18

claudÅ, -ere, clausÄ«, clausum, shut, close

clÄmentia, -ae, f., mildness, gentleness, mercy. 16

coepÄ«, coepisse, coeptum (defective verb; pres. system supplied by incipiÅ), began. 17

coÃ«rceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, curb, check, repress

cÅgitÅ (1), think, ponder, consider, plan. 1

cognÅscÅ, -ere, -nÅvÄ«, -nitum, become acquainted with, learn, recognize; in perf. tenses, know. 30

cÅgÅ, -ere, coÄgÄ«, coÄctum, drive or bring together, force, compel. 36

colligÅ, -ere, -lÄgÄ«, -lÄctum, gather together, collect

collocÅ (1), place, put, arrange

collum, -Ä«, n., neck

colÅ, -ere, coluÄ«, cultum, cultivate; cherish

color, -Åris, m., color

commemorÅ (1), remind, relate, mention

commisceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -mixtum, intermingle, join

committÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, entrust, commit. 15

commÅ«nis, -e, common, general, of / for the community. 20

comparÅ (1), compare

compÅnÅ, -ere, -posuÄ«, -positum, put together, compose

comprehendÅ, -ere, -hendÄ«, -hÄnsum, grasp, seize, arrest; comprehend, understand. 30

concÄdÅ, -ere, -cessÄ«, -cessum, yield, grant, concede concilium, -iÄ«, n., council

condÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, put together or into, store; build, found, establish. 29

cÅnferÅ, -ferre, contulÄ«, collÄtum, bring together, compare; confer, bestow; sÄ cÅnferre, take oneself, i.e., go. 31

cÅnfÄ«dÅ, -ere, -fÄ«sus sum, have confidence in, believe confidently, be confident

cÅnfiteor, -ÄrÄ«, -fessus sum, confess

congregÅ (1), gather together, assemble

coniciÅ, -ere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectum, throw, hurl, put with force; put together, conjecture

coniÅ«rÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., conspiracy

coniÅ«rÄtÄ«, -Årum, m. pl., conspirators. 20

cÅnor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, try, attempt. 34

cÅnscientia, -ae, f., consciousness, knowledge; conscience

cÅnscius, -a, -um, conscious, aware of

cÅnservÅ (1), preserve, conserve, maintain. 1

cÅnsilium, -iÄ«, n., counsel, advice, plan, purpose; judgment, wisdom. 4

cÅnsistÅ, -ere, -stitÄ« + in, depend on

cÅnstÅ, -Äre, -stitÄ«, -stÄtÅ«rum + ex, consist of

cÅnsuÄscÅ, -ere, -suÄvÄ«, -suÄtum, become accustomed

cÅnsul, -sulis, m., consul. 11

cÅnsulÅ, -ere, -suluÄ«, -sultum, look out for, have regard for

cÅnsultum, -Ä«, n., decree

cÅnsÅ«mÅ, -ere, -sÅ«mpsÄ«, -sÅ«mptum, use up, consume. 30

contemnÅ, -ere, -tempsÄ«, -temptum, despise, scorn. 36

contendÅ, -ere, -tendÄ«, -tentum, strive, struggle, contend, hasten. 29

contineÅ, -Äre, -tinuÄ«, -tentum, hold together, keep, enclose, restrain, contain. 21

contingÅ, -ere, -tigÄ«, -tÄctum, touch closely, befall, fall to oneâs lot

contrÄ, prep. + acc., against. 19

contundÅ, -tundere, -tudÄ«, -tÅ«sum, beat, crush, bruise, destroy. 36

conturbÅ (1), throw into confusion

convertÅ, -ere, -vertÄ«, -versum, turn around, cause to turn

convocÅ (1), call together, convene

cÅpia, -ae, f., abundance, supply; cÅpiae, -Ärum, supplies, troops, forces. 8

cÅpiÅsÄ, adv., fully, at length, copiously

Corinthus, -Ä«, f., Corinth

cornÅ«, -Å«s, n., horn. 20

corÅna, -ae, f., crown

corpus, -poris, n., body. 7

corrigÅ, -ere, -rÄxÄ«, -rÄctum, make right, correct

corrÅborÅ (1), strengthen

corrumpÅ, -ere, -rÅ«pÄ«, -ruptum, ruin, corrupt

cÅtÄ«diÄ, adv., daily, every day. 36

crÄs, adv., tomorrow. 5

creÄtor, -tÅris, m., creator

creÄtÅ«ra, -ae, f., creature (late Lat.)

crÄber, -bra, -brum, thick, frequent, numerous

crÄdÅ, -ere, crÄdidÄ«, crÄditum, believe, trust. 25; + dat. 35

creÅ (1), create. 12

crÄscÅ, -ere, crÄvÄ«, crÄtum, increase. 34

crÅ«dÄlis, -e, cruel

crÅ«stulum, -Ä«, n., pastry, cookie

cubiculum, -Ä«, n., bedroom, room

culpa, -ae, f., fault, blame. 5

culpÅ (1), blame, censure. 5

cultÅ«ra, -ae, f., cultivation

cum, conj., with subjunct., when, since, although; with indic., when. 31

cum, prep. + abl., with. 10

cÅ«nctÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., delay

cÅ«nctÄtor, -tÅris, m., delayer

cÅ«nctor (1), delay

cupiditÄs, -tÄtis, f., desire, longing, passion; cupidity, avarice. 10

cupÄ«dÅ, -dinis, f., desire, passion. 36

cupidus, -a, -um, desirous, eager, fond; + gen., desirous of, eager for. 39

cupiÅ, -ere, cupÄ«vÄ«, cupÄ«tum, desire, wish, long for. 17

cÅ«r, adv., why. 18

cÅ«ra, -ae, f., care, attention, caution, anxiety. 4

cÅ«rÅ (1), care for, attend to; heal, cure; take care. 36

currÅ, -ere, cucurrÄ«, cursum, run, rush, move quickly. 14

cursus, -Å«s, m., running, race; course. 28

curvus, -a, -um, curved, crooked, wrong

custÅdia, -ae, f., protection, custody; pl., guards. 32

custÅs, -tÅdis, m., guardian, guard

D

damnÅ (1), condemn

DÄmoclÄs, -is, m., Damocles, an attendant of Dionysius

dÄ, prep. + abl., down from, from; concerning, about. 3

dea, -ae, f. (dat. and abl. pl. deÄbus), goddess. 6

dÄbeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, owe, ought, must, should. 1

dÄbilitÅ (1), weaken

dÄcernÅ, -ere, -crÄvÄ«, -crÄtum, decide, settle, decree. 36

dÄcertÅ (1), fight it out, fight to the finish, contend

decimus, -a, -um, tenth. 15

dÄcipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpi, -ceptum, deceive

decor, -cÅris, m., beauty, grace

dÄcrÄtum, -Ä«, n., decree

dÄdicÅ (1), dedicate. 28

dÄfendÅ, -ere, -fendÄ«, -fÄnsum, ward off, defend, protect. 20

dÄficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, fail

dÄgustÅ (1), taste

dehinc, adv., then, next. 25

deinde, adv., thereupon, next, then. 18

dÄlectÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., delight, pleasure, enjoyment. 27

dÄlectÅ (1), delight, charm, please. 19

dÄleÅ, -Äre, dÄlÄvÄ«, dÄlÄtum, destroy, wipe out, erase. 17

dÄlÄ«berÅ (1), consider, deliberate

dÄmÄns, gen. -mentis, adj., out of oneâs mind, insane, foolish

dÄmittÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, let down, lower

dÄmÅnstrÅ (1), point out, show, demonstrate. 8

DÄmosthenÄs, -is, m., Demosthenes, the most famous Greek orator, 4th cent. B.C.

dÄnique, adv., at last, finally. 29

dÄns, dentis, m., tooth

dÄpÅnÅ, -ere, -posuÄ«, -positum, put down, lay aside

dÄportÅ (1), carry off

dÄsÄ«derÅ (1), desire, long for, miss. 17

dÄsidiÅsus, -a, -um, lazy

dÄsinÅ, -ere, -sÄ«vÄ«, -situm, cease, leave off

dÄsipiÅ, -ere, act foolishly

dÄstinÄtus, -a, -um, resolved, resolute, firm

dÄtrÄ«mentum, -Ä«, n., loss, detriment

deus, -Ä«, m. (voc. sg. deus, nom. pl. deÄ« or dÄ«, dat. and abl. pl. dÄ«s), god. 6

dÄvocÅ (1), call down or away

dexter, -tra, -trum, right, right-hand. 20

diabolus, -Ä«, m., devil

dÄ«cÅ, -ere, dÄ«xÄ«, dictum, say, tell, speak; call, name. 10

dictÄta, -Årum, n. pl., things dictated, lessons, precepts

dictÄtor, -tÅris, m., dictator

dictÅ (1), say repeatedly, dictate

diÄs, -ÄÄ«, m., day. 22

difficilis, -e, hard, difficult, troublesome. 16

digitus, -Ä«, m., finger, toe. 31

dignitÄs, -tÄtis, f., merit, prestige, dignity. 38

dignus, -a, -um + abl., worthy, worthy of. 29

dÄ«ligÄns, gen. -gentis, adj., diligent, careful. 27

dÄ«ligenter, adv., diligently

dÄ«ligentia, -ae, f., diligence

dÄ«ligÅ, -ere, dÄ«lÄxÄ«, dÄ«lÄctum, esteem, love. 13

dÄ«midium, -iÄ«, n., half

dÄ«mittÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, send away, dismiss

Dionsius, -iÄ«, m., Dionysius, tyrant of Syracuse

discÄdÅ, -ere, -cessÄ«, -cessum, go away, depart. 20

discipula, -ae, f., learner, pupil, disciple. 6

discipulus, -Ä«, m., learner, pupil, disciple. 6

discÅ, -ere, didicÄ«, learn. 8

disputÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., discussion

disputÅ (1), discuss

dissimilis, -e, unlike, different. 27

dissimulÅ (1), conceal

distinguÅ, -ere, -stÄ«nxÄ«, -stÄ«nctum, distinguish

diÅ«, adv., long, for a long time. 12

dÄ«ves, gen. dÄ«vitis or dÄ«tis, adj., rich, wealthy. 32

dÄ«vÄ«nus, -a, -um, divine, sacred

dÄ«vitiae, -Ärum, f. pl., riches, wealth. 13

dÅ, dare, dedÄ«, datum, give, offer. 1

doceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, doctum, teach. 8

doctrÄ«na, -ae, f., teaching, instruction, learning

doctus, -a, -um, taught, learned, skilled. 13

doleÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itÅ«rum, grieve, suffer; hurt, give pain. 31

dolor, -lÅris, m., pain, grief. 38

domesticus, -a, -um, domestic; civil

domina, -ae, f., mistress, lady. 40

dominÄtus, -Å«s, m., rule, mastery, tyranny

dominicus, -a, -um, belonging to a master; the Lordâs

dominus, -Ä«, m., master, lord. 40

domus, -Å«s (-Ä«), f., house, home; domÄ«, at home; domum, (to) home; domÅ, from home. 37

dÅnum, -Ä«, n., gift, present. 4

dormiÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, sleep. 31

dubitÅ (1), doubt, hesitate. 30

dubium, -iÄ«, n., doubt

dÅ«cÅ, -ere, dÅ«xÄ«, ductum, lead; consider, regard; prolong. 8

dulcis, -e, sweet, pleasant, agreeable. 16

dum, conj., while, as long as; at the same time that; until. 8

dummodo, conj., with subjunct., provided that, so long as. 32

duo, duae, duo, two. 15

dÅ«rÅ (1), harden, last, endure

dÅ«rus, -a, -um, hard, harsh, rough, stern, unfeeling, hardy, tough, difficult. 29

dux, ducis, m., leader, guide, commander, general. 23

E

Ä. See ex.

ecclÄsia, -ae, f., church (ecclesiastical Lat.)

ÄducÅ (1), bring up, educate. 23

ÄdÅ«cÅ, -ere, -dÅ«xÄ«, -ductum, lead out

efferÅ, -ferre, extulÄ«, ÄlÄtum, carry out; bury; lift up, exalt

efficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, accomplish, perform, bring about, cause

effugiÅ, -ere, -fÅ«gÄ«, -fugitÅ«rum, flee from, flee away, escape

egeÅ, -Äre, eguÄ« + abl. or gen., need, lack, want. 28

ego, meÄ«, I. 11

Ägredior, -Ä«, -gressus sum, go out, depart. 34

ÄiciÅ, -ere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectum, throw out, drive out. 15

elementum, -Ä«, n., element, first principle

elephantus, -Ä«, m., elephant. 31

ÄloquÄns, gen. -quentis, adj., eloquent

Äloquentia, -ae, f., eloquence

ÄmendÅ (1), correct, emend

emÅ, -ere, ÄmÄ«, Ämptum, buy

ÄmoveÅ, -Äre, -mÅvÄ«, -mÅtum, move away, remove

enim, postpositive conj., for, in fact, truly. 9

Ennius, -iÄ«, m., Quintus Ennius, early Roman writer

ÄnumerÅ (1), count up, enumerate

eÅ, Ä«re, iÄ« (or Ä«vÄ«), itum, go. 37

epigramma, -matis, n., inscription, epigram

epistula, -ae, f., letter, epistle

equa, -ae, f., horse. 23

eques, equitis, m., horseman

equidem, adv. especially common with 1st pers., indeed, truly, for my part

equitÄtus, -Å«s, m., cavalry

equus, -Ä«, m., horse. 23

ergÄ, prep. + acc., toward. 38

ergÅ, adv., therefore

ÄripiÅ, -ere, -ripuÄ«, -reptum, snatch away, take away, rescue. 22

errÅ (1), wander; err, go astray, make a mistake, be mistaken. 1

error, -rÅris, m., a going astray, error, mistake

et, conj., and; even (= etiam); etâ¦ et, bothâ¦ and. 2 etiam, adv., even, also. 11

etsÄ«, conj., even if (et-sÄ«), although. 38

ÄveniÅ, -Ä«re, -vÄnÄ«, -ventum, come out, turn out, happen

Äventus, -Å«s, m., outcome, result

ex or Ä, prep + abl., out of, from within, from; by reason of, on account of; following cardinal numerals, of.

Ex can be used before consonants or vowels; Ä, before consonants only. 8

excellentia, -ae, f., excellence, merit

excipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, take out, except; take, receive, capture. 24

exclÄmÅ (1), cry out, call out

exclÅ«dÅ, -ere, -clÅ«sÄ«, -clÅ«sum, shut out, exclude

excrusiÅ (1), torture, torment

excÅ«sÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., excuse

exemplar, -plÄris, n., model, pattern, original. 14

exemplum, -Ä«, n., example, model

exeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, go out, exit. 37

exercitus, -Å«s, m., army. 32

exigÅ, -igere, -ÄgÄ«, -Äctum (ex + agÅ), drive out, force out, extract, drive through, complete, perfect. 36

eximius, -a, -um, extraordinary, excellent

exitium, -iÄ«, n., destruction, ruin. 4

expellÅ, -ere, -pulÄ«, -pulsum, drive out, expel, banish. 24

experior, -Ä«rÄ«, -pertus sum, try, test; experience. 39

expleÅ, -Äre, -plÄvÄ«, -plÄtum, fill, fill up, complete. 28

explicÅ (1), unfold; explain; spread out, deploy. 40

expÅnÅ, -ere, -posuÄ«, -positum, set forth, explain, expose. 30

exquÄ«sÄ«tus, -a, -um, sought-out, exquisite, excellent

exsilium, -iÄ«, n., exile, banishment. 31

exspectÅ (1), look for, expect, await. 15

exstinguÅ, -ere, -stÄ«nxÄ«, -stÄ«nctum, extinguish

externus, -a, -um, foreign

extorqueÅ, -Äre, -torsÄ«, -tortum, twist away, extort

extrÄ, prep. + acc., beyond, outside

extrÄmus, -a, -um, outermost, last, extreme

F

Fabius, -iÄ«, m., Roman name; especially Quintus Fabius Maximus Cunctator (the Delayer), celebrated for his delaying tactics (Fabian tactics) against Hannibal

fÄbula, -ae, f., story, tale; play. 24

facile, adv., easily. 32

facilis, -e, easy; agreeable, affable. 16

faciÅ, -ere, fÄcÄ«, factum, make, do, accomplish, 10; pass.: fÄ«Å, fierÄ«, factus sum. 36

factum, -Ä«, n., deed, act, achievement. 13

facultÄs, -tÄtis, f., ability, skill, opportunity, means

falsus, -a, -um, false, deceptive

fÄma, -ae, f., rumor, report; fame, reputation. 2

familia, -ae, f., household, family. 19

fÄs (indecl.), n., right, sacred duty; fÄs est, it is right, fitting, lawful

fateor, -ÄrÄ«, fassus sum, confess, admit. 34

fatÄ«gÅ (1), weary, tire out. 40

fÄtum, -Ä«, n., fate; death; often pl., the Fates. 29

faucÄs, -ium, f. pl., jaws; narrow passage.

fÄlÄ«citer, adv., happily. 32

fÄlÄ«x, gen. -lÄ«cis, adj., lucky, fortunate, happy. 22

fÄmina, -ae, f., woman. 3

fenestra, -ae, f., window. 21

ferÄ, adv., almost, nearly, generally

ferÅ, ferre, tulÄ«, lÄtum, bear, carry, bring; suffer, endure, tolerate; say, report. 31

ferÅx, gen. -rÅcis, fierce, savage. 25

ferrum, -Ä«, n., iron, sword. 22

ferus, -a, -um, wild, uncivilized, fierce

festÄ«nÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., haste

festÄ«nÅ (1), hasten, hurry

fÄ«cus, -Ä« and -Å«s, f., fig tree

fidÄlis, -e, faithful, loyal. 25

fidÄs, -eÄ«, f., faith, trust, trustworthiness, fidelity; promise, guarantee, protection. 22

fÄ«lia, -ae, f. (dat. and abl. pl.

fÄ«liÄbus), daughter. 3

fÄ«lius, -iÄ«, m., son. 3

fÄ«nis, -is, m., end, limit, boundary; purpose; fÄ«nÄs, -ium (boundaries) territory. 21

fÄ«Å, fierÄ«, factus sum, occur, happen; become, be made, be done. 36

fÄ«rmus, -a, -um, firm, strong; reliable. 38

flamma, -ae, f., flame, fire

fleÅ, -Äre, flÄvÄ«, flÄtum, weep

flÅ«ctus, -Å«s, m., billow, wave

flÅ«men, -minis, n., river. 18

fluÅ, -ere, flÅ«xÄ«, flÅ«xum, flow. 18

for, fÄrÄ«, fÄtus sum, speak (prophetically), talk, foretell. 40

forÄ«s, adv., out of doors, outside. 37

fÅrma, -ae, f., form, shape, beauty. 2

formÄ«ca, -ae, f., ant

fÅrmÅ (1), form, shape, fashion

fors, fortis, f., chance, fortune

forsan, adv., perhaps

fortasse, adv., perhaps. 36

fortis, -e, strong, brave. 16

fortiter, adv., bravely. 32

fortÅ«na, -ae, f., fortune, luck. 2

fortÅ«nÄtÄ, adv., fortunately

fortÅ«nÄtus, -a, -um, lucky, fortunate, happy. 13

forum, -Ä«, n., market place, forum. 26

foveÅ, -Äre, fÅvÄ«, fÅtum, comfort, nurture, support. 35

frÄter, -tris, m., brother. 8

frÅns, frontis, f., forehead, brow, front

frÅ«ctus, -Å«s, m., fruit; profit, benefit, enjoyment. 20

frÅ«gÄlitÄs, -tÄtis, f., frugality

frÅ«strÄ, adv., in vain

fuga, -ae, f., flight

fugiÅ, -ere, fÅ«gÄ«, fugitÅ«rum, flee, hurry away; escape; go into exile; avoid, shun. 10

fugitÄ«vus, -Ä«, m., fugitive, deserter, runaway slave

fugÅ (1), put to flight, rout

fulgeÅ, -Äre, fulsÄ«, flash, shine

furor, -rÅris, m., rage, frenzy, madness

fÅ«rtificus, -a, -um, thievish

fÅ«rtim, adv., stealthily, secretly. 30

G

GÄius, -iÄ«, m., Gaius, a common praenomen (first name); usually abbreviated to C. in writing

Gallus, -Ä«, m., a Gaul. The Gauls were a Celtic people who inhabited the district which we know as France.

gaudeÅ, gaudÄre, gÄvÄ«sus sum, be glad, rejoice. 23

gaudium, -iÄ«, n., joy, delight

geminus, -a, -um, twin. 25

gÄns, gentis, f., clan, race, nation, people. 21

genÅ«, genÅ«s, n., knee. 20

genus, generis, n., origin; kind, type, sort, class. 18

gerÅ, -ere, gessÄ«, gestum, carry; carry on, manage, conduct, wage, accomplish, perform. 8

gladius, -iÄ«, m., sword

glÅria, -ae, f., glory, fame. 5

gracilis, -e, slender, thin. 27

Graecia, -ae, f., Greece. 19

Graecus, -a, -um, Greek; Graecus, -Ä«, m., a Greek. 6

grÄtia, -ae, f., gratitude, favor; grÄtiÄs agere + dat., to thank. 8

grÄtus, -a, -um, pleasing, agreeable; grateful. 37

gravis, -e, heavy, weighty; serious, important; severe, grievous. 19

gravitÄs, -tÄtis, f., weight, seriousness, importance, dignity

graviter, adv., heavily, seriously

gustÅ (1), taste

H

habeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, have, hold, possess; consider, regard. 3

hÄmus, -Ä«, m., hook

Hannibal, -balis, m., Hannibal, celebrated Carthaginian general in the 2nd Punic War, 218â201 B.C.

hasta, -ae, f., spear. 23

haud, adv., not, not at all (strong negative)

heri, adv., yesterday. 5

heu, interj., ah!, alas! (a sound of grief or pain). 33

hic, haec, hoc, demonstrative adj. and pron., this, the latter; at times weakened to he, she, it, they. 9

hÄ«c, adv., here. 25

hinc, adv., from this place, hence

hodiÄ, adv., today. 3

HomÄrus, -Ä«, m., Homer, the Greek epic poet

homÅ, hominis, m., human being, man. 7

honor, -nÅris, m., honor, esteem; public office. 30

hÅra, -ae, f., hour, time. 10

horrendus, -a, -um, horrible, dreadful

hortor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, urge, encourage. 34

hortus, -Ä«, m., garden

hospes, -pitis, m., stranger, guest; host

hostis, -is, m., an enemy (of the state); hostÄs, -ium, the enemy. 18

hui, interj., sound of surprise or approbation not unlike our âwheeâ

hÅ«mÄnitÄs, -tÄtis, f., kindness, refinement

hÅ«mÄnus, -a, -um, pertaining to man, human; humane, kind; refined, cultivated. 4

humilis, -e, lowly, humble. 27

humus, -Ä«, f., ground, earth; soil. 37

hypocrita, -ae, m., hypocrite (ecclesiastical Lat.)

I

iaceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, lie; lie prostrate; lie dead. 25

iaciÅ, -ere, iÄcÄ«, iactum, throw, hurl. 15

iaculum, -Ä«, n., dart, javelin

iam, adv., now, already, soon. 19

iÄnua, -ae, f., door. 35

ibi, adv., there. 6

Ä«dem, eadem, idem, the same. 11

identidem, adv., repeatedly, again and again

idÅneus, -a, -um, suitable, fit, appropriate. 37

igitur, postpositive conj., therefore, consequently. 5

ignÄrus, -a, -um, not knowing, ignorant

ignis, -is, m., fire. 22

ignÅscÅ, -ere, -nÅvÄ«, -nÅtum + dat., grant pardon to, forgive, overlook. 35

illacrimÅ (1) + dat., weep over

ille, illa, illud, demonstrative adj. and pron., that, the former; the famous; at times weakened to he, she, it, they. 9

illÅ«dÅ, -ere, -lÅ«sÄ«, -lÅ«sum, mock, ridicule

imÄgÅ, -ginis, f., image, likeness

imitor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, imitate

immineÅ, -Äre, overhang, threaten

immodicus, -a, -um, beyond measure, immoderate, excessive

immortÄlis, -e, not subject to death, immortal. 19

immÅtus, -a, -um, unmoved; unchanged; unrelenting. 37

impedÄ«mentum, -Ä«, n., hindrance, impediment

impediÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, impede, hinder, prevent. 38

impellÅ, -ere, -pulÄ«, -pulsum, urge on, impel

impendeÅ, -Äre, hang over, threaten, be imminent

imperÄtor, -tÅris, m., general, commander-in-chief, emperor. 24

imperiÅsus, -a, -um, powerful, domineering, imperious

imperium, -iÄ«, n., power to command, supreme power, authority, command, control. 24

imperÅ (1), give orders to, command + dat. + ut. 35

impleÅ, -Äre, implÄvÄ«, implÄtum, fill up, complete

imprÄ«mÄ«s, adv., especially, particularly

imprÅvidus, -a, -um, improvident

impudÄns, gen. -dentis, adj., shameless, impudent

impudenter, adv., shamelessly, impudently

impÅ«nÄ«tus, -a, -um, unpunished, unrestrained, safe

in, prep. + abl., in, on, 3; + acc., into, toward, against. 9

inÄnis, -e, empty, vain

incertus, -a, -um, uncertain, unsure, doubtful

incipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, begin, commence. 17

inclÅ«dÅ, -ere, -clÅ«sÄ«, -clÅ«sum, shut in, inclose

incorruptus, -a, -um, uncorrupted, genuine, pure

incrÄdibilis, -e, incredible

indicÅ (1), indicate, expose, accuse

indignus, -a, -um, unworthy

indÅ«cÅ, -ere, -dÅ«xÄ«, -ductum, lead in, introduce, induce

industria, -ae, f., industry, diligence

industrius, -a, -um, industrious, diligent

ineÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, go in, enter; enter into, begin. 37

ineptiÅ, -Ä«re, play the fool, trifle

inexpugnÄbilis, -e, impregnable, unconquerable

Ä«nfantia, -ae, f., infancy

Ä«nferi, -Årum, m. pl., those below, the dead

Ä«nferÅ, -ferre, intulÄ«, illÄtum, bring in, bring upon, inflict

Ä«nfÄ«nÄ«tus, -a, -um, unlimited, infinite

Ä«nfÄ«rmus, -a, -um, not strong, weak, feeble. 38

Ä«nflammÅ (1), set on fire, inflame

Ä«nfÅrmis, -e, formless, deformed, hideous

Ä«nfortÅ«nÄtus, -a, -um, unfortunate

ingenium, -iÄ«, n., nature, innate talent. 29

ingÄns, gen.

-gentis, adj., huge. 16

ingrÄtus, -a, -um, unpleasant, ungrateful

iniciÅ, -ere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectum, throw on or into, put on; inspire

inimÄ«cus, -Ä«, m., (personal) enemy

inÄ«quus, -a, -um, unequal, unfair, unjust

initium, -iÄ«, n., beginning, commencement. 33

iniÅ«ria, -ae, f., injustice, injury, wrong. 39

iniÅ«stus, -a, -um, unjust

inops, gen. -opis, adj., poor, needy

inquam. See inquit.

inquit, defective verb, he says, placed after one or more words of a direct quotation; other forms:

inquam, I say, inquis, you say. 22

Ä«nsÄnia, -ae, f., insanity, folly

Ä«nsciÄns, gen. -entis, unknowing, unaware

Ä«nscrÄ«bÅ, -ere, -scrÄ«psÄ«, -scrÄ«ptum, inscribe, entitle

Ä«nsidiae, -Ärum, f. pl., ambush, plot, treachery. 6

Ä«nsÅns, gen. -sontis, guiltless, innocent

Ä«nstituÅ, -ere, -stituÄ«, -stitÅ«tum, establish, institute

Ä«nsula, -ae, f., island. 23

Ä«nsurgÅ, -ere, -surrÄxÄ«, -surrÄctum, rise up

integer, -gra, -grum, untouched, whole, unhurt

intellegÅ, -ere, -lÄxÄ«, -lÄctum, understand. 11

intempestÄ«vus, -a, -um, untimely

inter, prep. + acc., between, among. 15

intercipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, intercept

interdum, adv., at times, sometimes

intereÄ, adv., meanwhile

interficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, kill, murder. 37

interrogÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., interrogation, inquiry

intrÅ (1), walk into, enter

intrÅdÅ«cÅ, -ere, -dÅ«xÄ«, -ductum, lead in, introduce

intus, adv., within

invÄdÅ, -ere, -vÄsÄ«, -vÄsum, enter on, move against, assail

inveniÅ, -Ä«re, -vÄnÄ«, -ventum, come upon, find. 10

inventor, -tÅris, m., inventor

invÄstÄ«gÅ (1), track out, investigate

invictus, -a, -um, unconquered; unconquerable

invideÅ, -Äre, -vÄ«dÄ«, -vÄ«sum, be envious; + dat., look at with envy, envy, be jealous of. 31

invidia, -ae, f., envy, jealousy, hatred. 31

invÄ«sus, -a, -um, hated; hateful

invÄ«tÅ (1), entertain; invite, summon. 26

invÄ«tus, -a, -um, unwilling, against oneâs will

iocus, -Ä«, m., joke, jest

ipse, ipsa, ipsum, intensive pron., myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself, etc.; the very, the actual. 13

Ä«ra, -ae, f., ire, anger. 2

Ä«rÄscor, -Ä«, Ä«rÄtus sum, be angry

Ä«rÄtus, -a, -um, angered, angry. 35

irrÄ«tÅ (1), excite, exasperate, irritate

is, ea, id, demonstrative pron. and adj., this, that; personal pron., he, she, it. 11

iste, ista, istud, demonstrative pron. and adj., that of yours, that; such (as you have, as you speak of); sometimes with contemptuous force, e.g., that despicable, that wretched. 9

ita, adv. used with adjs., verbs, and advs., so, thus. 29

Italia, -ae, f., Italy. 15

itaque, adv., and so, therefore. 15

iter, itineris, n., journey; route, road. 37

iterÅ (1), repeat

iterum, adv., again, a second time. 21

iubeÅ, -Äre, iussÄ«, iussum, bid, order, command. 21

iÅ«cunditÄs, -tÄtis, f., pleasure, charm

iÅ«cundus, -a, -um, agreeable, pleasant, gratifying. 16

iÅ«dex, -dicis, m., judge, juror. 19

iÅ«dicium, -iÄ«, n., judgment, decision, opinion; trial. 19

iÅ«dicÅ (1), judge, consider

iungÅ, -ere, iÅ«nxÄ«, iÅ«nctum, join. 13

Iuppiter, Iovis, m., Jupiter, Jove

iÅ«rÅ (1), swear

iÅ«s, iÅ«ris, n., right, justice, law. 14; iÅ«s iÅ«randum, iÅ«ris iÅ«randÄ«, n., oath

iussÅ«, defective noun, abl. sg. only, m., at the command of

iÅ«stus, -a, -um, just, right. 40

iuvenis, -is (gen. pl. iuvenum), m. / f., a youth, young person

iuvÅ, -Äre, iÅ«vÄ«, iÅ«tum, help, aid, assist; please. 4

L

lÄbor, -Ä«, lÄpsus sum, slip, glide

labor, -bÅris, m., labor, work, toil. 7

labÅrÅ (1), labor; be in distress. 21

labrum, -Ä«, n., lip

lacessÅ, -ere, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, harass, attack

lacrima, -ae, f., tear. 40

lacÅ«nar, -nÄris, n., paneled ceiling

laetÄns, gen.

-tantis, adj., rejoicing

laetus, -a, -um, happy, joyful

LatÄ«nus, -a, -um, Latin. 22

laudÄtor, -tÅris, m., praiser

laudÅ (1), praise. 1

laus, laudis, f., praise, glory, fame. 8

lÄctor, -tÅris, m., reader. 36

lÄctrÄ«x, -trÄ«cis, f., reader. 36

lectus, -Ä«, m., bed

lÄgÄtus, -Ä«, m., ambassador, deputy

legiÅ, -Ånis, f., legion

legÅ, -ere, lÄgÄ«, lÄctum, pick out, choose; read. 18

lÄnis, -e, smooth, gentle, kind

lentÄ, adv., slowly

Lentulus, -Ä«, m., P. Cornelius Lentulus Sura, chief conspirator under Catiline, left in charge of the conspiracy when Catiline was forced to flee from Rome

Lesbia, -ae, f., Lesbia, the name which Catullus gave to his sweetheart

levis, -e, light; easy, slight, trivial. 17

lÄx, lÄgis, f., law, statute. 26

libellus, -Ä«, m., little book. 17

libenter, adv., with pleasure, gladly. 38

lÄ«ber, -era, -erum, free. 5

liber, -brÄ«, m., book. 6

lÄ«berÄlis, -e, of, relating to a free person; worthy of a free man, decent, liberal, generous. 39

lÄ«berÄlitÄs, -tÄtis, f., generosity, liberality

lÄ«berÄtor, -tÅris, m., liberator

lÄ«berÄ, adv., freely. 32

lÄ«berÄ«, -Årum, m. pl., (oneâs) children

lÄ«berÅ (1), free, liberate. 19

lÄ«bertÄs, -tÄtis, f., liberty, freedom. 8

libÅ (1), pour a libation of, on; pour ritually; sip; touch gently. 39

licet, licÄre, licuit, impers. + dat. and infin., it is permitted, one may. 37

ligÅ (1), bind, tie

lÄ«men, -minis, n., threshold. 26

lingua, -ae, f., tongue; language. 25

linteum, -Ä«, n., linen, napkin

littera, -ae, f., a letter of the alphabet; litterae, -Ärum, a letter (epistle); literature. 7

lÄ«tus, -toris, n., shore, coast. 23

locÅ (1), place, put

locuplÄtÅ (1), enrich

locus, -Ä«, m., place; passage in literature; pl., loca, -Årum, n., places, region; locÄ«, -Årum, m., passages in literature. 9

longÄ, adv., far. 32

longinquitÄs, -tÄtis, f., distance, remoteness

longus, -a, -um, long. 16

loquÄx, gen. -quÄcis, adj., talkative, loquacious

loquor, -Ä«, locÅ«tus sum, say, speak, tell, talk. 34

lucrum, -Ä«, n., gain, profit

lÅ«dÅ, -ere, lÅ«sÄ«, lÅ«sum, play

lÅ«dus, -Ä«, m., game, sport; school. 18

lÅ«na, -ae, f., moon. 28

lupus, -Ä«, m., wolf

lÅ«x, lÅ«cis, f., light. 26

luxuria, -ae, f., luxury, extravagance

M

MaecÄnÄs, -Ätis, m., Maecenas, unofficial âprime ministerâ of Augustus, and patron and friend of Horace

magis, adv., more, rather

magister, -trÄ«, m., master, schoolmaster, teacher. 4

magistra, -ae, f., mistress, schoolmistress. 4

magnanimus, -a, -um, great-hearted, brave, magnanimous. 23

magnopere, adv., greatly, exceedingly (compar. magis; superl. maximÄ). 32

magnus, -a, -um, large, great; important. 2 (compar. maior; superl. maximus. 27); maiÅrÄs, -um, m. pl., ancestors. 27

maiestÄs, -tÄtis, f., greatness, dignity, majesty

maior. See magnus.

maiÅrÄs, -um, m. pl., ancestors. 27

male, adv., badly, ill, wrongly (compar. peius; superl. pessimÄ). 32

mÄlÅ, mÄlle, mÄluÄ«, to want (something) more, instead; prefer. 32

malum, -Ä«, n., evil, misfortune, hurt, injury. 30

malus, -a, -um, bad, wicked, evil. 4 (compar. peior; superl. pessimus. 27)

mandÄtum, -Ä«, n., order, command, instruction

maneÅ, -Äre, mÄnsÄ«, mÄnsum, remain, stay, abide, continue. 5

manus, -Å«s, f., hand; handwriting; band. 20

MÄrcellus, -Ä«, m., Marcellus, Roman general who captured Syracuse in 212 B.C.

MÄrcus, -Ä«, m., Marcus, a common Roman first name, usually abbreviated to M. in writing

mare, -is, n., sea. 14

marÄ«tus, -Ä«, m., husband

mÄter, -tris, f., mother. 12

mÄteria, -ae, f., material, matter

mÄtrimÅnium, -iÄ«, n., marriage

maximus. See magnus.

medica, -ae, f., doctor, physician. 12

medicus, -Ä«, m., doctor, physician. 12

mediocris, -e, ordinary, moderate, mediocre. 31

meditor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, reflect upon, practice

medius, -a, -um, middle; used partitively, the middle of. 22

mel, mellis, n., honey

melior. See bonus.

meminÄ«, meminisse, defective, remember

memor, gen. -moris, adj., mindful

memoria, -ae, f., memory, recollection. 15

mendÅsus, -a, -um, full of faults, faulty

mÄns, mentis, f., mind, thought, intention. 16

mÄnsa, -ae, f., table; dining; dish, course; mÄnsa secunda, dessert. 26

mÄnsis, -is, m., month

merces, -cÄdis, f., pay, reward, recompense

merÄ«diÄnus, -a, -um, of midday, noon; southern

merus, -a, -um, pure, undiluted. 33

mÄta, -ae, f., turning point, goal, limit, boundary. 40

metuÅ, -ere, metuÄ«, fear, dread; be afraid for + dat. 38

metus, -Å«s, m., fear, dread, anxiety. 20

meus, -a, -um (m. voc. mÄ«), my. 2

mÄ«les, mÄ«litis, m., soldier. 23

mÄ«litÄris, -e, military

mÄ«lle, indecl. adj. in sg., thousand; mÄ«lia, -ium, n., pl. noun, thousands. 15

minimus. See parvus.

minor. See parvus.

minuÅ, -ere, minuÄ«, minÅ«tum, lessen, diminish. 30

mÄ«rÄbilis, -e, amazing, wondrous, remarkable. 38

mÄ«ror, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, marvel at, admire, wonder. 35

mÄ«rus, -a, -um, wonderful, surprising, extraordinary

misceÅ, -Äre, miscuÄ«, mixtum, mix, stir up, disturb. 18

miser, -era, -erum, wretched, miserable, unfortunate. 15

miserÄ, adv., wretchedly

misericordia, -ae, f., pity, mercy

mÄ«tÄscÅ, -ere, become or grow mild

mÄ«tis, -e, mild, gentle; ripe

mittÅ, -ere, mÄ«sÄ«, missum, send, let go. 11

modo, adv., now, just now, only; modoâ¦ modo, at one timeâ¦ at another

modus, -Ä«, m., measure, bound, limit; manner, method, mode, way. 22

moenia, -ium, n. pl., walls of a city. 29

molestus, -a, -um, troublesome, disagreeable, annoying

mÅlior, -Ä«rÄ«, mÅlÄ«tus sum, work at, build, undertake, plan. 34

molliÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, soften; make calm or less hostile. 29

mollis, -e, soft, mild, weak

moneÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, remind, warn, advise, 1; moneÅ eum ut + subjunct. 36

monitiÅ, -Ånis, f., admonition, warning

mÅns, montis, m., mountain. 20

mÅnstrum, -Ä«, n., portent; monster

monumentum, -Ä«, n., monument. 40

mora, -ae, f., delay. 4

morbus, -Ä«, m., disease, sickness. 9

morior, -Ä«, mortuus sum, die. 34

mors, mortis, f., death. 14

mortÄlis, -e, mortal. 18

mortuus, -a, -um, dead. 28

mÅs, mÅris, m., habit, custom, manner; mÅrÄs, mÅrum, habits, morals, character. 7

moveÅ, -Äre, mÅvÄ«, mÅtum, move; arouse, affect. 18

mox, adv., soon. 30

mulier, -eris, f., woman. 39

multÅ (1), punish, fine

multum, adv., much (compar. plÅ«s; superl. plÅ«rimum). 32

multus, -a, -um, much, many, 2 (compar. plÅ«s; superl. plÅ«rimus. 27)

mundus, -Ä«, m., world, universe. 21

mÅ«nÄ«mentum, -Ä«, n., fortification, protection

mÅ«niÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, fortify, defend; build (a road)

mÅ«nus, -neris, n., service, office, function, duty; gift

mÅ«s, mÅ«ris, m. / f., mouse

MÅ«sa, -ae, f., a Muse (one of the goddesses of poetry, music, etc.)

mÅ«tÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., change

mÅ«tÅ (1), change, alter; exchange. 14

N

nam, conj., for. 13

nÄrrÅ (1), tell, narrate, report. 24

nÄscor, -Ä«, nÄtus sum, be born, spring forth, arise. 34

nÄsus, -Ä«, m., nose. 40

nÄta, -ae, f., daughter. 29

nÄtÄlis, -is (sc. diÄs), m., birthday

nÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., nation, people

nÄtÅ«ra, -ae, f., nature. 10

nauta, -ae, m., sailor. 2

nÄvigÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., voyage, navigation

nÄvigÅ (1), sail, navigate. 17

nÄvis, -is, f., ship. 21

nÄ, conj. with subjunct., thatâ¦ not, in order thatâ¦ not, in order not to, 28, 36; that, 40; adv. in nÄâ¦ quidem, notâ¦ even. 29

-ne, interrog. suffix attached to the first word of a sent., typically the verb or another word on which the question hinges, to introduce a question whose answer is uncertain. 5

nec. See neque.

necessÄrius, -a, -um, necessary

necesse, indecl. adj., necessary, inevitable. 39

necÅ (1), murder, kill. 7

nefÄs (indecl.), n., wrong, sin

neglegÅ, -ere, -lÄxÄ«, -lÄctum, neglect, disregard. 17

negÅ (1), deny, say thatâ¦ not. 25

nÄmÅ, (nullÄ«us), nÄminÄ«, nÄminem, (nÅ«llÅ, -Ä), m. / f., no one, nobody. 11

nepÅs, -pÅtis, m., grandson, descendant. 27

neque or nec, conj., and not, nor; nequeâ¦ neque, neitherâ¦ nor. 11

nesciÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, not to know, be ignorant. 25

neuter, -tra, -trum, not either, neither. 9

nÄve, and not, nor (used to continue ut or nÄ + subjunct.)

niger, -gra, -grum, black

nihil (indecl.), n., nothing. 1, 4

nihilum, -Ä«, n., nothing

nimis or nimium, adv., too, too much, excessively; in a positive sense, exceedingly, very. 9

nisi, ifâ¦ not, unless, except. 19

niveus, -a, -um, snowy, white

noceÅ, -Äre, nocuÄ«, nocitum + dat., do harm to, harm, injure. 35

nÅlÅ, nÅlle, nÅluÄ«, notâ¦ wish, be unwilling. 32

nÅmen, nÅminis, n., name. 7

nÅn, adv., not. 1

nÅndum, adv., not yet

nÅnne, interrog. adv. which introduces questions expecting the answer âyes.â 40

nÅnnÅ«llus, -a, -um, some, several

nÅnnumquam, sometimes

nÅnus, -a, -um, ninth

nÅs. See ego.

nÅscÅ, -ere, nÅvÄ«, nÅtum, become acquainted with, learn, recognize; in perf. tenses, know. 30

noster, -tra, -trum, our, ours. 5

notÄrius, -iÄ«, m., writer of shorthand, stenographer

novem, indecl. adj., nine. 15

novus, -a, -um, new, strange. 7

nox, noctis, f., night. 26

nÅ«bÄs, -is, f., cloud. 14

nÅ«bÅ, -ere, nÅ«psÄ«, nÅ«ptum, cover, veil; + dat. (of a bride) be married to, marry. 35

nÅ«llus, -a, -um, not any, no, none. 9

num, interrog. adv.: (1) introduces dir. questions which expect the answer ânoâ; (2) introduces ind. questions and means whether. 40

numerus, -Ä«, m., number. 3

numquam, adv., never. 8

nunc, adv., now, at present. 6

nÅ«ntiÅ (1), announce, report, relate. 25

nÅ«ntius, -iÄ«, m., messenger, message

nÅ«per, adv., recently. 12

nÅ«triÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, nourish, rear

O

Å, interj., O!, oh! 2

obdÅ«rÅ (1), be hard, persist, endure

obeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, go up against, meet; die. 37

obiciÅ, -ere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectum, offer; cite (as grounds for condemnation)

oblectÅ (1), please, amuse, delight; pass time pleasantly. 36

obruÅ, -ere, -ruÄ«, -rutum, overwhelm, destroy

obsequium, -iÄ«, n., compliance

obstinÄtus, -a, -um, firm, resolved

occÄsiÅ, -Ånis, f., occasion, opportunity. 28

occidÅ, -ere, -cidÄ«, -cÄsum (cadÅ, fall), fall down; die; set (of the sun). 31

occÄ«dÅ, -ere, -cÄ«dÄ«, -cÄ«sum (caedÅ, cut), cut down; kill, slay

occultÄ, adv., secretly

occupÅ (1), seize

oculus, -Ä«, m., eye. 4

ÅdÄ«, Ådisse, ÅsÅ«rum (defective verb), hate. 20

odium, -Ä«, n., hatred. 38

OedipÅ«s, -podis, m., Oedipus, Greek mythical figure said to have murdered his father and married his mother

offerÅ, -ferre, obtulÄ«, oblÄtum, offer. 31

officium, -iÄ«, n., duty, service. 4

Ålim, adv., once, long ago, formerly; some day, in the future. 13

omittÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, let go, omit

omnÄ«nÅ, adv., wholly, entirely, altogether; with negatives, at all. 40

omnipotÄns, gen. -tentis, adj., all-powerful, omnipotent

omnis, -e, every, all. 16

onerÅ (1), burden, load

onus, oneris, n., burden, load

opera, -ae, f., work, pains, help

opÄ«nor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, suppose. 40

oportet, -Äre, oportuit (impers.), + infin., it is necessary, proper, right. 39

oppÅnÅ, -ere, -posuÄ«, -positum, set against, oppose

opportÅ«nÄ, adv., opportunely

opportÅ«nus, -a, -um, fit, suitable, advantageous, opportune

opprimÅ, -ere, -pressÄ«, -pressum, suppress, overwhelm, overpower, check. 23

opprobrium, -iÄ«, n., reproach, taunt, disgrace

oppugnÅ (1), fight against, attack, assault, assail. 39

ops, opis, f., help, aid; opÄs, opum, power, resources, wealth. 33

optimus. See bonus.

optÅ (1), wish for, desire

opus, operis, n., a work, task; deed, accomplishment. 38

ÅrÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., speech. 38

ÅrÄtor, -tÅris, m., orator, speaker. 23

orbis, -is, m., circle, orb; orbis terrÄrum, the world, the earth

ÅrdÅ, Årdinis, m., rank, class, order

orior, -Ä«rÄ«, ortus sum, arise, begin, proceed, originate

ÅrnÅ (1), equip, furnish, adorn. 39

ÅrÅ (1), speak, plead; beg, beseech, entreat, pray. 36

Ås, Åris, n., mouth, face. 14

Åsculum, -Ä«, n., kiss. 29

ostendÅ, -ere, -tendÄ«, -tentum, exhibit, show, display. 23

Åstium, -iÄ«, n., entrance, door

Åtium, -iÄ«, n., leisure, peace. 4

ovis, -is, f., sheep

P

paedagÅgus, -Ä«, m., slave who attended children (particularly at school)

pÄgÄnus, -Ä«, m., a countryman, peasant; pagan

palam, adv., openly, plainly

palma, -ae, f., palm

pÄnis, -is, m., bread

pÄr, gen. paris, adj., equal, like. 32

parcÅ, -ere, pepercÄ«, parsÅ«rum + dat., be lenient to, spare. 35

parÄns, -rentis, m. / f., parent. 28

pÄreÅ, -Äre, -uÄ« + dat., be obedient to, obey. 35

pariÄs, -ietis, m., wall

pariÅ, -ere, peperÄ«, partum, beget, produce

parmula, -ae, f., little shield

parÅ (1), prepare, provide; get, obtain. 19

pars, partis, f., part, share; direction. 14

parum, adv., little, too little, not very (much) (compar. minus; superl. minimÄ). 32

parvus, -a, -um, small, little, 4 (compar. minor; superl. minimus. 27)

passer, -seris, m., sparrow

patefaciÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -factum, make open, open; disclose, expose. 25

pateÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, be open, lie open; be accessible; be evident. 32

pater, -tris, m., father. 12

patiÄns, gen. -entis, adj., patient; + gen., capable of enduring

patientia, -ae, f., suffering; patience, endurance. 12

patior, -Ä«, passus sum, suffer, endure; permit. 34

patria, -ae, f., fatherland, native land, (oneâs) country. 2

patrÅnus, -Ä«, m., patron, protector

paucÄ«, -ae, -a, usually pl., few, a few. 3

pauper, gen. -peris, adj., of small means, poor. 32

paupertÄs, -tÄtis, f., poverty, humble circumstances. 32

pÄx, pÄcis, f., peace. 7

peccÅ (1), sin, do wrong

pectus, -toris, n., breast, heart. 35

pecÅ«nia, -ae, f., money. 2

peior. See malus.

pellÅ, -ere, pepulÄ«, pulsum, strike, push; drive out, banish. 24

per, prep. + acc., through; with reflexive pron., by. 13

percipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, gain, learn, perceive

perdÅ, -ere, perdidÄ«, perditum, destroy, ruin, lose

pereÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, pass away, be destroyed, perish. 37

peregrÄ«nor, peregrÄ«nÄrÄ«, peregrÄ«nÄtus sum, travel abroad, wander. 37

perfectus, -a, -um, complete, perfect

perferÅ, -ferre, -tulÄ«, -lÄtum, bear, endure, suffer

perficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, do thoroughly, accomplish, bring about

perfugium, -iÄ«, n., refuge, shelter. 24

perÄ«culÅsus, -a, -um, dangerous

perÄ«culum, -Ä«, n., danger, risk. 4

perimÅ, -ere, -ÄmÄ«, -Ämptum, destroy

perÄ«tus, -a, -um, skilled, expert

permittÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, permit, allow

perniciÅsus, -a, -um, destructive, pernicious

pernoctÅ (1), spend or occupy the night. 39

perpetuus, -a, -um, perpetual, lasting, uninterrupted, continuous. 6

perscrÄ«bÅ, -ere, -scrÄ«psÄ«, -scrÄ«ptum, write out, place on record

persequor, -Ä«, -secÅ«tus sum, follow up, pursue, take vengeance on

Persicus, -a, -um, Persian

persuÄdeÅ, -Äre, -suÄsÄ«, -suÄsum, succeed in urging, persuade, convince

perterreÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, frighten thoroughly, terrify

pertineÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -tentum, pertain to, relate to, concern

perturbÅ (1), throw into confusion, trouble, disturb, perturb

perveniÅ, -Ä«re, -vÄnÄ«, -ventum + ad, come through to, arrive at, reach

pÄs, pedis, m., lower leg, foot. 38

pessimus. See malus.

pestis, -is, f., plague, pestilence, curse, destruction

petÅ, -ere, petÄ«vÄ«, petÄ«tum, seek, aim at, beg, beseech, 23;

petÅ ab eÅ ut + subjunct. 36

philosopha, -ae, f., philosopher. 33

philosophia, -ae, f., philosophy, love of wisdom. 2

philosophus, -Ä«, m., philosopher. 33

piger, -gra, -grum, lazy, slow, dull

pÄ«piÅ (1), chirp, pipe

piscÄtor, -tÅris, m., fisherman

piscis, -is, m., fish

placeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum + dat., be pleasing to, please. 35

plÄcÅ (1), placate, appease

plÄnÄ, adv., plainly, clearly

platea, -ae, f., broad way, street

PlatÅ, -tÅnis, m., Plato, the renowned Greek philosopher

plÄbs, plÄbis, f., the common people, populace, plebeians. 33

plÄnus, -a, -um, full, abundant, generous. 6

plÅ«rimus. See multus.

plÅ«s. See multus.

poÄma, -matis, n., poem

poena, -ae, f., penalty, punishment; poenÄs dare, pay the penalty. 2

poÄta, -ae, m., poet. 2

pÅmum, -Ä«, n., fruit, apple

pÅnÅ, -ere, posuÄ«, positum, put, place, set. 27

pÅns, pontis, m., bridge

populus, -Ä«, m., the people, a people, nation. 3

porta, -ae, f., gate, entrance. 2

possessiÅ, -Ånis, f., possession, property

possum, posse, potuÄ«, be able, can, have power. 6

post, prep. + acc., after, behind. 7

posteÄ, adv., afterwards. 24

postpÅnÅ, -ere, -posuÄ«, -positum, put after, consider secondary

postquam, conj., after

postrÄmum, adv., after all, finally; for the last time. 40

potÄns, gen. -tentis, pres. partic. of possum as adj., able, powerful, mighty, strong. 16

potestÄs, -tÄtis, f., power, ability, opportunity

potior, -Ä«rÄ«, potÄ«tus sum + gen. or abl., get possession of, possess, hold

potius, adv., rather, preferably

prae, prep. + abl., in front of, before. 26

praebeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, offer, provide. 32

praeceptum, -Ä«, n., precept

praeclÄrus, -a, -um, noble, distinguished, famous, remarkable

praeferÅ, -ferre, -tulÄ«, -lÄtum, bear before, display; place before, prefer

praeficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, put in charge of

praemittÅ, -ere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, send ahead or forward

praemium, -iÄ«, n., reward, prize. 35

praesidium, -iÄ«, n., guard, detachment, protection

praestÅ, -Äre, -stitÄ«, -stitum, excel (+ dat.); exhibit, show, offer, supply. 28

praesum, -esse, -fuÄ«, be at the head of, be in charge of

praeter, prep. + acc., besides, except; beyond, past. 40

praetereÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, go by, pass, omit

praeteritus, -a, -um, perf. partic. of praetereÅ as adj., past

premÅ, -ere, pressÄ«, pressum, press; press hard, pursue. 23

pretium, -iÄ«, n., price, value, reward

prex, precis, f., prayer

prÄ«mÅ, adv., at first, first, at the beginning. 30

prÄ«mum, adv., first, in the first place; quam prÄ«mum, as soon as possible

prÄ«mus. See prior. 27

prÄ«nceps, gen. -cipis, chief; m. / f. noun, leader, prince, emperor. 28

prÄ«ncipium, -iÄ«, n., beginning. 12

prior, prius, compar. adj., former, prior; prÄ«mus, -a, -um, first, foremost, chief, principal. 27

prÄ«stinus, -a, -um, ancient, former, previous. 38

prius, adv., before, previously

prÄ«vÄtus, -Ä«, m., private citizen

prÄ«vÅ (1), deprive

prÅ, prep. + abl., in front of, before, on behalf of, in return for, instead of, for, as. 12

probitÄs, -tÄtis, f., uprightness, honesty, probity. 18

probÅ (1), approve; recommend; test. 27

prÅcÅnsul, -sulis, m., proconsul, governor of a province

prÅditor, -tÅris, m., betrayer, traitor

proelium, -iÄ«, n., battle

prÅferÅ, -ferre, -tulÄ«, -lÄtum, bring forward, produce, make known, extend

proficÄ«scor, -Ä«, -fectus sum, set out, start. 34

profor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, speak out

prÅfundÅ, -ere, -fÅ«dÄ«, -fÅ«sum, pour forth

prohibeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, prevent, hinder, restrain, prohibit. 20

prÅiciÅ, -ere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectum, throw forward or out

prÅmittÅ, -mittere, -mÄ«sÄ«, -missum, send forth, promise. 32

prÅnÅ«ntiÅ (1), proclaim, announce; declaim; pronounce. 20

prÅpÅnÅ, -ere, -posuÄ«, -positum, put forward, propose

proprius, -a, -um, oneâs own, peculiar, proper, personal, characteristic

propter, prep. + acc., on account of, because of. 5

prÅtinus, adv., immediately. 22

prÅvideÅ, -Äre, -vÄ«dÄ«, -vÄ«sum, foresee, provide, make provision

proximus, -a, -um (superl. of

propior), nearest, next

prÅ«dÄns, gen. -dentis, adj., wise, prudent

prÅ«denter, adv., wisely, discreetly

prÅ«dentia, -ae, f., foresight, wisdom, discretion

pÅ«blicus, -a, -um, of the people, public; rÄs pÅ«blica, reÄ« pÅ«blicae, f., the state

pudÄ«cus, -a, -um, modest, chaste. 26

pudor, -dÅris, m., modesty, bashfulness

puella, -ae, f., girl. 2

puer, puerÄ«, m., boy; pl. boys, children. 3

puerÄ«liter, adv., childishly, foolishly

pugna, -ae, f., fight, battle

pugnÅ (1), fight. 29

pulcher, -chra, -chrum, beautiful, handsome; fine. 5

pulchrÄ, adv., beautifully, finely. 32

pulchritÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f., beauty

pÅ«niÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, punish

pÅ«rgÅ (1), cleanse

pÅ«rus, -a, -um, pure, free from

putÅ (1), reckon, suppose, judge, think, imagine. 25

PthagorÄs, -ae, m., Pythagoras, Greek philosopher and mathematician of 6th cent. B.C.

Q

quÄ, adv., by which route, where

quadrÄgintÄ, indecl. adj., forty

quaerÅ, -ere, quaesÄ«vÄ«, quaesÄ«tum, seek, look for, strive for; ask, inquire, inquire into. 24

quam, adv., how, 16; conj. (after compar.), than, 26; asâ¦ as possible (before superl.), 26

quamvÄ«s, adv. and conj., however much, however; although

quandÅ, interrog. and rel. adv. and conj., when;

sÄ« quandÅ, if ever. 5

quantus, -a, -um, how large, how great, how much. 30

quÄrÄ, adv., because of which thing, therefore, wherefore, why. 6

quÄrtus, -a, -um, fourth. 15

quasi, adv. or conj., as if, as it were. 39

quattuor, indecl. adj., four. 15

-que, enclitic conj., and. It is appended to the second of two words to be joined. 6

quemadmodum, adv., in what manner, how

queror, -Ä«, questus sum, complain, lament. 38

quÄ«, quae, quod, rel. pron., who, which, what, that. 17

quÄ«? quae? quod?, interrog. adj., what? which? what kind of?; sometimes with exclamatory force, what (a)! what sort of! 19

quia, conj., since, because

quid, what, why. See

quis. quÄ«dam, quaedam, quiddam (pron.) or

quoddam (adj.), indef. pron. and adj.: as pron., a certain one or thing, someone, something; as adj., a certain. 26

quidem, postpositive adv., indeed, certainly, at least, even; nÄâ¦ quidem, not even. 29

quiÄs, -Ätis, f., quiet, rest, peace

quÄ«n, adv., indeed, in fact. 40

quÄ«n etiam, adv., why even, in fact, moreover

QuÄ«ntus, -Ä«, m., Quintus, a Roman praenomen, abbreviated to Q. in writing

quis? quid?, interrog. pron., who? what? which? 19

quis, quid, indef. pron., after sÄ«, nisi, nÄ, and num, anyone, anything, someone, something. 33

quisquam, quidquam (or quicquam), indef. pron. and adj., anyone, anything

quisque, quidque, indef. pron., each one, each person, each thing. 13

quisquis, quidquid, indef. pron., whoever, whatever. 23

quÅ, adv., to which or what place, whither, where

quod, conj., because. 11

quÅmodo, adv., in what way, how

quondam, adv., formerly, once. 22

quoniam, conj., since, inasmuch as. 10

quoque, adv., also, too. 17

quot, indecl. adj., how many, as many. 27

quotiÄnscumque, adv., however often, whenever

R

rapiÅ, -ere, rapuÄ«, raptum, seize, snatch, carry away. 21

rÄrus, -a, -um, rare

ratiÅ, -Ånis, f., reckoning, account; reason, judgment, consideration; system, manner, method. 8

recÄdÅ, -ere, -cessÄ«, -cessum, go back, retire, recede

recipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, take back, regain; admit, receive. 24

recitÅ (1), read aloud, recite. 17

recognÅscÅ, -ere, -nÅvÄ«, -nitum, recognize, recollect. 38

recordÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., recollection

recreÅ (1), restore, revive; refresh, cheer. 36

rÄctus, -a, -um, straight, right; rÄctum, -Ä«, n., the right, virtue

recuperÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., recovery

recuperÅ (1), regain

recÅ«sÅ (1), refuse. 33

reddÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, give back, return

redeÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, go back, return. 37

redÅ«cÅ, -ere, -dÅ«xÄ«, -ductum, lead back, bring back

referÅ, -ferre, -ttulÄ«, -lÄtum, carry back, bring back; repeat, answer, report. 31

rÄgÄ«na, -ae, f., queen. 7

rÄgius, -a, -um, royal

rÄgnum, -Ä«, n., rule, authority, kingdom

regÅ, -ere, rÄxÄ«, rÄctum, rule, guide, direct. 16

relegÅ, -ere, -lÄgÄ«, -lÄctum, read again, reread

relevÅ (1), relieve, alleviate, diminish

relinquÅ, -ere, -lÄ«quÄ«, -lictum, leave behind, leave, abandon. 21

remaneÅ, -Äre, -mÄnsÄ«, -mÄnsum, remain, stay behind, abide, continue. 5

remedium, -iÄ«, n., cure, remedy. 4

remissiÅ, -Ånis, f., letting go, release; relaxation. 34

removeÅ, -Äre, -mÅvÄ«, -mÅtum, remove

repente, adv., suddenly. 30

reperiÅ, -Ä«re, -pperÄ«, -pertum, find, discover, learn; get. 40

repetÄ«tiÅ, -Ånis, f., repetition

repetÅ, -ere, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, seek again, repeat

rÄpÅ, -ere, rÄpsÄ«, rÄptum, creep, crawl

repugnÅ (1) + dat., fight against, be incompatible with

requiÄscÅ, -ere, -quiÄvÄ«, -quiÄtum, rest. 37

requÄ«rÅ, -ere, -quÄ«sÄ«vÄ«, -sÄ«tum, seek, ask for; miss, need, require. 36

rÄs, reÄ«, f., thing, matter, property, business, affair; rÄs pÅ«blica, reÄ« pÅ«blicae, state, commonwealth. 22

resistÅ, -ere, -stitÄ«, make a stand, resist, oppose

respondeÅ, -Äre, -spondÄ«, -spÅnsum, answer. 29

restituÅ, -ere, -stituÄ«, -stitÅ«tum, restore

retrahÅ, -ere, -trÄxÄ«, -tractum, drag or draw back

reveniÅ, -Ä«re, -vÄnÄ«, -ventum, come back, return

revertor, -Ä«, -vertÄ« (perf. is act.), -versum, return

revocÅ (1), call back, recall

rÄx, rÄgis, m., king. 7

rhÄtoricus, -a, -um, of rhetoric, rhetorical

rÄ«deÅ, -Äre, rÄ«sÄ«, rÄ«sum, laugh, laugh at. 24

rÄ«diculus, -a, -um, laughable, ridiculous. 30

rogÅ (1), ask, ask for. 30; rogÅ eum ut + subjunct., 36

RÅma, -ae, f., Rome. 14

RÅmÄnus, -a, -um, Roman. 3

rosa, -ae, f., rose. 2

rÅstrum, -Ä«, n., beak of a ship; RÅstra, -Årum, the Rostra, speakerâs platform

rota, -ae, f., wheel

rotundus, -a, -um, wheel-shaped, round

rÅ«mor, -mÅris, m., rumor, gossip. 31

ruÅ, -ere, ruÄ«, rutum, rush, fall, be ruined

rÅ«s, rÅ«ris, n., the country, countryside. 37

rÅ«sticor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum, live in the country. 34

rÅ«sticus, -a, -um, rustic, rural

S

sabbatum, -Ä«, n., the Sabbath

sacculus, -Ä«, n., little bag, purse

sacrificium, -iÄ«, n., sacrifice

sacerdÅs, sacerdÅtis, m., priest. 23

sacrilegus, -a, -um, sacrilegious, impious

saepe, adv., often. 1

saeta equÄ«na, -ae -ae, f., horse-hair

sagitta, -ae, f., arrow

sÄl, salis, m., salt; wit. 33

salsus, -a, -um, salty, witty

salÅ«bris, -e, healthy, salubrious

salÅ«s, salÅ«tis, f., health, safety; greeting. 21

salÅ«tÅ (1), greet

salveÅ, -Äre, be well, be in good health. 1

salvus, -a, -um, safe, sound. 6

sÄnctificÅ (1), sanctify, treat as holy

sÄnctus, -a, -um, sacred, holy

sÄnitÄs, -tÄtis, f., health, soundness of mind, sanity

sÄnÅ (1), heal

sÄnus, -a, -um, sound, healthy, sane. 5

sapiÄns, gen. -entis, adj., wise, judicious; as a noun, m., a wise man/woman, philosopher. 25

sapienter, adv., wisely, sensibly. 32

sapientia, -ae, f., wisdom. 3

sapiÅ, -ere, sapÄ«vÄ«, have good taste; have good sense, be wise. 35

satiÅ (1), satisfy, sate. 3

satis, indecl. noun, adj., and adv., enough, sufficient(ly). 5

sator, -tÅris, m., sower, planter; begetter, father. 38

satura, -ae, f., satire. 16

saxum, -Ä«, n., rock, stone. 40

scabiÄs, -ÄÄ«, f., the itch, mange

scelerÄtus, -a, -um, criminal, wicked, accursed

scelestus, -a, -um, wicked, accursed, infamous

scelus, -leris, n., evil deed, crime, sin, wickedness. 19

schola, -ae, f., school

scientia, -ae, f., knowledge, science, skill. 18

sciÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, know. 21

scrÄ«bÅ, -ere, scrÄ«psÄ«, scrÄ«ptum, write, compose. 8

scrÄ«ptor, -tÅris, m., writer, author. 8

sÄcernÅ, -ere, -crÄvÄ«, -crÄtum, separate

secundus, -a, -um, second; favorable. 6

sÄcÅ«rus, -a, -um, free from care, untroubled, safe

sed, conj., but. 2

sedeÅ, -Äre, sÄdÄ«, sessum, sit. 34

sÄductor, -tÅris, m. (ecclesiastical Lat.), seducer

semel, adv., a single time, once, once and for all, simultaneously. 31

semper, adv., always. 3

senÄtor, -tÅris, m., senator

senÄtus, -Å«s, m., senate. 20

senectÅ«s, -tÅ«tis, f., old age. 10

senex, senis, adj. and n., old, aged; old man. 16

sÄnsus, -Å«s, m., feeling, sense. 20

sententia, -ae, f., feeling, thought, opinion, vote; sentence. 2

sentiÅ, -Ä«re, sÄnsÄ«, sÄnsum, feel, perceive, think, experience. 11

septem, indecl. adj., seven. 15

sepulchrum, -Ä«, n., grave, tomb

sequor, -Ä«, secÅ«tus sum, follow. 34

serÄnÅ (1), make clear, brighten; cheer up, soothe. 36

sÄriÅ, adv., seriously

sÄrius, -a, -um, serious, grave

sermÅ, -mÅnis, m., conversation, talk

serÅ, -ere, sÄvÄ«, satum, sow

serva, -ae, f., slave. 24

serviÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum + dat., be a slave to, serve. 35

servitÅ«s, -tÅ«tis, f., servitude, slavery. 20

servÅ (1), preserve, keep, save, guard. 1

servus, -Ä«, m., slave. 24

sevÄritÄs, -tÄtis, f., severity, sternness, strictness

sÄ«, conj., if. 1

sÄ«c, adv. (most commonly with verbs), so, thus. 29

sÄ«cut, adv. and conj., as, just as, as it were

sÄ«dus, -deris, n., constellation, star. 29

signum, -Ä«, n., sign, signal, indication; seal. 13

silentium, -iÄ«, n., silence

silva, -ae, f., forest, wood

similis, -e, similar to, like, resembling. 27

simplex, gen. -plicis, adj., simple, unaffected

simulÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., pretense

sine, prep. + abl., without. 2

singulÄ«, -ae, -a, pl., one each, single, separate

singultim, adv., stammeringly

sinister, -tra, -trum, left, left-hand; harmful, ill-omened. 20

sitiÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, be thirsty

socius, -iÄ«, m., companion, ally

SÅcratÄs, -is, m., Socrates

sÅl, sÅlis, m., sun. 27

sÅlÄcium, -iÄ«, n., comfort, relief. 24

soleÅ, -Äre, solitus sum, be accustomed. 37

sÅlitÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f., solitude, loneliness

sollicitÅ (1), stir up, arouse, incite

sollicitÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f., anxiety, concern, solicitude

sollicitus, -a, -um, troubled, anxious, disturbed

SolÅn, -lÅnis, m., Solon, Athenian sage and statesman of the 7th-6th cent. B.C.

sÅlum, adv., only, merely; nÅn sÅlumâ¦ sed etiam, not onlyâ¦ but also. 9

sÅlus, -a, -um, alone, only, the only. 9

somnus, -Ä«, m., sleep. 26

SophoclÄs, -is, m., Sophocles, one of the three greatest writers of Greek tragedy

sopor, -pÅris, m., deep sleep

sordÄs, -dium, f. pl., filth; meanness, stinginess

soror, -rÅris, f., sister. 8

spargÅ, -ere, sparsÄ«, sparsum, scatter, spread, strew

spectÄculum, -Ä«, n., spectacle, show

spectÅ (1), look at, see. 34

speculum, -Ä«, n., mirror. 33

spernÅ, -ere, sprÄvÄ«, sprÄtum, scorn, despise, spurn

spÄrÅ (1), hope for, hope. 25

spÄs, -eÄ«, f., hope. 22

spÄ«ritus, -Å«s, m., breath, breathing; spirit, soul. 20

stabilis, -e, stable, steadfast

stadium, -iÄ«, n., stadium

statim, adv., immediately, at once

statua, -ae, f., statue

stÄlla, -ae, f., star, planet. 28

stilus, -Ä«, m., stilus (for writing)

stÅ, stÄre, stetÄ«, statum, stand, stand still or firm. 13

studeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ« + dat., direct oneâs zeal to, be eager for, study. 35

studiÅsus, -a, -um, full of zeal, eager, fond of

studium, -iÄ«, n., eagerness, zeal, pursuit, study. 9

stultus, -a, -um, foolish; stultus, -Ä«, m., a fool. 4

suÄvis, -e, sweet. 33

sub, prep. + abl. with verbs of rest, + acc. with verbs of motion, under, up under, close to, down to/into, to/at the foot of. 7

subitÅ, adv., suddenly. 33

subitus, -a, -um, sudden

subiungÅ, -ere, -iÅ«nxÄ«, -iÅ«nctum, subject, subdue

sublÄ«mis, sublÄ«me, elevated, lofty; heroic, noble. 38

subrÄ«deÅ, -rÄ«dÄre, -rÄ«sÄ«, -rÄ«sum, smile (down) upon. 35

succurrÅ, -ere, -currÄ«, -cursum, run up under, help

sufficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, be sufficient, suffice

suÄ« (sibi, sÄ, sÄ), reflexive pron. of 3rd pers., himself, herself, itself, themselves. 13

sum, esse, fuÄ«, futÅ«rum, be, exist. 4; est, sunt may mean there is, there are. 1

summa, -ae, f., highest part, sum, whole

summus, -a, -um. See superus.

sÅ«mÅ, -ere, sÅ«mpsÄ«, sÅ«mptum, take, take up, assume

sÅ«mptus, -Å«s, m., expense, cost

supellex, -lectilis, f., furniture, apparatus

superbus, -a, -um, arrogant, overbearing, haughty, proud. 26

superior. See superus.

superÅ (1), be above, have the upper hand, surpass, overcome, conquer. 5

superus, -a, -um, above, upper; superÄ«, -Årum, m., the gods (compar. superior, -ius, higher; superl. suprÄmus, -a, -um, last, or summus, -a, -um, highest). 27

supplicium, -iÄ«, n., punishment

suprÄ, adv. and prep. + acc., above

suprÄmus. See superus.

surculus, -Ä«, m., shoot, sprout

surgÅ, -ere, surrÄxÄ«, surrÄctum, get up, arise. 29

suscipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, undertake. 25

suspendÅ, -ere, -pendÄ«, -pÄnsum, hang up, suspend; interrupt. 38

sustineÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -tentum, hold up, sustain, endure

suus, -a, -um, reflexive possessive adj. of 3rd pers., his own, her own, its own, their own. 13

synagÅga, -ae, f., synagogue

SyrÄcÅ«sae, -Ärum, f. pl., Syracuse. 37

T

tabella, -ae, f., writing tablet; tabellae, -Ärum, letter, document

taceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, be silent, leave unmentioned. 28

tÄlis, -e, such, of such a sort. 34

tam, adv. used with adjs. and advs., so, to such a degree; tamâ¦ quam, soâ¦ as. 29

tamen, adv., nevertheless, still. 8

tamquam, adv., as it were, as if, so to speak. 29

tandem, adv., at last, finally

tangÅ, -ere, tetigÄ«, tÄctum, touch. 21

tantum, adv., only. 26

tantus, -a, -um, so large, so great, of such size. 29

tardus, -a, -um, slow, tardy

tÄctum, -Ä«, n., roof, house

tegÅ, -ere, tÄxÄ«, tÄctum, cover, hide, protect

temeritÄs, -tÄtis, f., rashness, temerity

temperantia, -ae, f., moderation, temperance, self-control

tempestÄs, -tÄtis, f., period of time, season; weather, storm. 15

templum, -Ä«, n., sacred area, temple

temptÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., trial, temptation

tempus, -poris, n., time; occasion, opportunity. 7

tendÅ, -ere, tetendÄ«, tentum or tÄnsum, stretch, extend; go

teneÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, tentum, hold, keep, possess, restrain. 14

terÅ, -ere, trÄ«vÄ«, trÄ«tum, rub, wear out

terra, -ae, f., earth, ground, land, country. 7

terreÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, frighten, terrify. 1

tertius, -a, -um, third. 15

thema, -matis, n., theme

ThemistoclÄs, -is, m., Themistocles, celebrated Athenian statesman and military leader who advocated a powerful navy at the time of the Persian Wars

timeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, fear, be afraid of, be afraid. 15

timor, -mÅris, m., fear. 10

titulus, -Ä«, m., label, title; placard

toga, -ae, f., toga, the garb of peace

tolerÅ (1), bear, endure, tolerate. 6

tollÅ, -ere, sustulÄ«, sublÄtum, raise, lift up; take away, remove, destroy. 22

tondeÅ, -Äre, totondÄ«, tÅnsum, shear, clip

tÅnsor, -sÅris, m., barber

tÅnsÅrius, -a, -um, of or pertaining to a barber, barberâs

tot, indecl. adj., so many, as many; totâ¦ quot, as manyâ¦ as. 40

tÅtus, -a, -um, whole, entire. 9

tractÅ (1), drag about; handle, treat, discuss

trÄdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, give over, surrender, hand down, transmit, teach. 33

tragoedia, -ae, f., tragedy

trahÅ, -ere, trÄxÄ«, tractum, draw, drag; derive, acquire. 8

trÄns, prep. + acc., across. 14

trÄnseÅ, -Ä«re, -iÄ«, -itum, go across, cross; pass over, ignore. 39

trÄnsferÅ, -ferre, -tulÄ«, -lÄtum, bear across, transfer, convey

trÄnsitus, -Å«s, m., passing over, transit; transition. 39

trÄdecim, indecl. adj., thirteen. 15

tremÅ, -ere, tremuÄ«, tremble

trepidÄ, adv., with trepidation, in confusion

trÄs, tria, three. 15

trÄ«gintÄ, indecl. adj., thirty

trÄ«stis, -e, sad, sorrowful; joyless, grim, severe. 26

triumphus, -Ä«, m., triumphal procession, triumph

TrÅia, -ae, f., Troy. 23

TrÅiÄnus, -a, -um, Trojan

tÅ«, tuÄ«, you. 11

Tullius, -iÄ«, m., Ciceroâs family name

tum, adv., then, at that time; thereupon, in the next place. 5

tumultus, -Å«s, m., uprising, disturbance

tumulus, -Ä«, m., mound, tomb

tunc, adv., then, at that time

turba, -ae, f., uproar, disturbance; mob, crowd, multitude. 14

turpis, -e, ugly; shameful, base, disgraceful. 26

tÅ«tus, -a, -um, protected, safe, secure

tuus, -a, -um, your, yours (sg.). 2

tyrannus, -Ä«, m., absolute ruler, tyrant. 6

U

ubi, rel. adv. and conj., where; when; interrog., where? 6

ulcÄ«scor, -Ä«, ultus sum, avenge, punish for wrong done

Å«llus, -a, -um, any. 9

ultimus, -a, -um, farthest, extreme; last, final. 25

ultrÄ, adv. and prep. + acc., on the other side of, beyond. 22

umbra, -ae, f., shade; ghost

umerus, -Ä«, m., shoulder, upper arm

umquam, adv., ever, at any time. 23

unde, adv., whence, from what or which place; from which, from whom. 30

Å«nus, -a, -um, one, single, alone. 9

urbÄnus, -a, -um, of the city, urban, urbane, elegant. 26

urbs, urbis, f., city. 14

usque, adv., all the way, up (to), even (to), continuously, always. 31

Å«sus, -Å«s, m., use, experience, skill, advantage

ut, conj.; A. with subjunct., introducing (1) purp., in order that, that, to (28); (2) result, so that, that (29); (3) jussive noun clauses, to, that (36); (4) fear clauses, thatâ¦ not (40); B. with indic., just as, as, when. 24

uter, utra, utrum, either, which (of two). 9

Å«tilis, -e, useful, advantageous. 27

Å«tilitÄs, -tÄtis, f., usefulness, advantage

Å«tor, -Ä«, Å«sus sum + abl., use; enjoy, experience. 34

utrumâ¦ an, conj., whetherâ¦ or. 30

uxor, -Åris, f., wife. 7

V

vacÅ (1), be free from, be unoccupied

vacuus, -a, -um, empty, devoid (of), free (from)

vae, interj., alas, woe to. 34

valeÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itÅ«rum, be strong, have power; be well, fare well; valÄ (valÄte), good-bye. 1

valÄtÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f., health, good health, bad health

varius, -a, -um, various, varied, different

-ve, conj., or 33

vehemÄns, gen. -mentis, adj., violent, vehement, emphatic, vigorous

vehÅ, -ere, vexÄ«, vectum, carry, convey

vel, conj., or (an optional alternative)

vÄlÅx, gen. -lÅcis, adj., swift

vÄndÅ, -ere, vÄndidÄ«, vÄnditum, sell. 38

venia, -ae, f., kindness, favor, pardon

veniÅ, -Ä«re, vÄnÄ«, ventum, come. 10

ventitÅ (1), come often

ventus, -Ä«, m., wind. 39

Venus, -neris, f., Venus, goddess of grace, charm, and love

verbera, -rum, n. pl., blows, a beating

verbum, -Ä«, n., word. 5

vÄrÄ, adv., truly, really, actually, rightly

vereor, -ÄrÄ«, veritus sum, show reverence for, respect; be afraid of, fear. 40

Vergilius, -iÄ«, m., Vergil, the Roman epic poet

vÄritÄs, -tÄtis, f., truth. 10

vÄrÅ, adv., in truth, indeed, to be sure, however. 29

versus, -Å«s, m., line, verse. 20

vertÅ, -ere, vertÄ«, versum, turn, change. 23

vÄrus, -a, -um, true, real, proper. 4

vesper, -peris or -perÄ«, m., evening; evening star. 28

vespillÅ, -lÅnis, m., undertaker

vester, -tra, -trum, your, yours (pl.). 6

vestiÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, clothe

vetus, gen. -teris, adj., old. 34

via, -ae, f., road, street, way. 10

vÄ«cÄ«na, -ae, f., neighbor. 21

vÄ«cÄ«nus, -Ä«, m., neighbor. 21

vicissitÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f., change, vicissitude

victor, -tÅris, m., victor

victÅria, -ae, f., victory. 8

vÄ«ctus, -Å«s, m., living, mode of life

videÅ, -Äre, vÄ«dÄ«, vÄ«sum, see, observe; understand, 1; videor, -ÄrÄ«, vÄ«sus sum, be seen, seem, appear. 18

vigilÅ (1), be awake, watch, be vigilant

vigor, -gÅris, m., vigor, liveliness

vÄ«lla, -ae, f., villa, country house

vincÅ, -ere, vÄ«cÄ«, victum, conquer, overcome. 8

vinculum, -Ä«, n., bond, chain. 36

vÄ«num, -Ä«, n., wine. 31

vir, virÄ«, m., man, hero. 3

virgÅ, -ginis, f., maiden, virgin. 7

virtÅ«s, -tÅ«tis, f., manliness, courage; excellence, virtue, character, worth. 7

vÄ«s, vÄ«s, f., force, power, violence; vÄ«rÄs, vÄ«rium, strength. 14

vÄ«ta, -ae, f., life, mode of life. 2

vitiÅsus, -a, -um, full of vice, vicious

vitium, -iÄ«, n., fault, vice, crime. 6

vÄ«tÅ (1), avoid, shun. 14

vÄ«vÅ, -ere, vÄ«xÄ«, vÄ«ctum, live. 10

vÄ«vus, -a, -um, alive, living. 30

vix, adv., hardly, scarcely, with difficulty

vocÅ (1), call, summon. 1

volÅ, velle, voluÄ«, wish, want, be willing, will. 32

volÅ (1), fly

voluntÄrius, -a, -um, voluntary

voluntÄs, -tÄtis, f., will, wish

voluptÄs, -tÄtis, f., pleasure. 10

vÅs. See tÅ«.

vÅx, vÅcis, f., voice, word. 34

vulgus, -Ä«, n. (sometimes m.), the common people, mob, rabble. 21

vulnus, -neris, n., wound. 24

vultus, -Å«s, m., countenance, face, 40.

X

XenophÅn, -phontis, m., Xenophon, Greek general and author

ABBREVIÄ€TIÅŒNÄ’S

AUTHORS AND WORKS CITED

Aug., St. Augustine

Conf., Confessions

Caes., Caesar

B Civ., Bellum Civile

B Gall., Bellum Gallicum

Catull., Catullus

Carm., Carmina

Cic., Cicero

Amic., De Amicitia

Arch., Pro Archia

Att., Epistulae ad Atticum

Cat., In Catilinam

De Or., De Oratore

Div., De Divinatione

Fam., Epistulae ad Familiares

Fin., De Finibus

Inv. rhet., De Inventione Rhetorica

Leg., De Legibus

Marcell, Pro Marcello

Nat. D., De Natura Deorum

Off., De Officiis

Or., Orator

Phil., Orationes Philippicae

Pis., In Pisonem

Planc., Pro Plancio

Q Fr., Epistulae ad Quintum Fratrem

Rep., De Republica

Rosc. Am., Pro Sexto Roscio Amerino

Sen., De Senectute

Sull., Pro Sulla

Tusc., Tusculanae Disputationes

Verr., In Verrem

Hor., Horace

Ars.P., Ars Poetica (Epist. 2.3)

Carm., Carmina or Odes

Epist., Epistulae

Epod., Epodi

Sat., Saturae or Sermones

Juv., Juvenal

Sat., Saturae

Liv., Livy

Urbe Cond., Ab Urbe Condita

Lucr., Lucretius

Rer. Nat., De Rerum Natura

Mart., Martial

Epig., Epigrammata

Macrob., Macrobius

Sat., Saturnalia

Nep., Nepos

Att., Atticus

Cim., Cimon

Milt., Miltiades

Ov., Ovid

Am., Amores

Ars. Am., Ars Amatoria

Her., Heroides

Met., Metamorphoses

Pers., Persius

Sat., Saturae

Petron., Petronius

Sat., Satyricon

Phaedr., Phaedrus

Fab., Fabulae

Plaut., Plautus

Aul., Aulularia

Mil., Miles Gloriosus

Mostell., Mostellaria

Pers., Persa

Stich., Stichus

Plin., Pliny (the Elder)

HN, Naturalis Historia

Plin., Pliny (the Younger)

Ep., Epistulae

Prop., Propertius

El., Elegiae

Publil. Syr., Publilius Syrus

Sent., Sententiae

Quint., Quintilian

Inst., Institutio Oratoria

Sall., Sallust

Cat., Bellum Catilinae

Sen., Seneca (the Elder)

Controv., Controversiae

Sen., Seneca (the Younger)

Brev. Vit., De Brevitate Vitae

Clem., De Clementia

Cons. Polyb., Ad Polybium de Consolatione

Ep., Epistulae Morales

Suet., Suetonius

Aug., Divus Augustus

Caes., Julius Caesar

Tac., Tacitus

Ann., Annales

Dial., Dialogus de Oratoribus

Ter., Terence

Ad., Adelphoe

An., Andria

Heaut., Heautontimorumenos

Hec., Hecyra

Phorm., Phormio

Veg., Vegetius

Mil., De Re Militari

Vell., Velleius Paterculus

Hist. Rom., Historia Romana

Verg., Vergil

Aen., Aeneid

Ecl., EcloguesG., Georgics

Vulg., Vulgate

Eccles., Ecclesiastes

Exod., Exodus

Gen., Genesis

OTHER ABBREVIATIONS

SEARCHABLE TERMS

The pagination of this electronic edition does not match the edition from which it was created. To locate a specific passage, please use the search feature of your e-book reader.

Â 

Page references to illustrations are italicized.

Â 

Ab

with ablative of personal agent, 148, 177

in place constructions, 313

Ablative case

absolute, 193â94, 196

of accompaniment, 13, 116â17, 177

as adverbial case, 13â14

with cardinal numerals, 125, 177

of cause, 493

of comparison, 212

of degree of difference, 493

of description, 342

forms of. See Declension

of manner, 13, 116â17, 177â78

of means or instrument, 13, 116â17, 178

of personal agent, 148, 177

of place from which, 13, 163, 177, 313â14

of place where 13, 177, 313â14

with prepositions summary of uses, 177

without prepositions, summary of uses, 178

of respect or specification, 216, 271, 492â93

of route, 317, 330

of separation, 163â64, 177â78

with special deponent verbs, 285

of time when or within which, 13â14, 125â26, 178,314

usage of, 13â14, 116â17

Accents, xl, 4

Accompaniment, ablative of, 116â17, 177

Accusative case

as direct object, 13

of duration of time, 102, 125, 314

of exclamation, 70

forms of. See Declension

infinitive in indirect statement with, 203â04

as object of preposition, 13

of place to which, 313â14

Achilles, 110â11

Active periphrastic, 247

Active voice, 2

deponent verbs, 282â85

infinitive, 201â02

participles, 184â85

perfect system. See Perfect system, active voice

personal endings for, 2â3

present system

1st and 2nd conjugation, 3â5, 40â42

3rd conjugation, 63â65, 80â82

4th conjugation, 80â81

subjunctive, 228, 236â37

Â 

Ad

with gerundive or gerund, 334

in place constructions, 313

Adjectives

1st declension, 14â15, 33, 42, 73â74

2nd declension, 23â25, 32â33, 42, 73â74

3rd declension, 131â33, 211

with adverbial force, 189

agreement of, 15, 33, 56

attributive, 15, 35, 133

comparison of, 210â11. See also Comparative degree and Superlative degree

declension, 211, 219

formation, 210â11

irregular formation, 218â19, 226

summary of forms, 499

usage and translation, 211

dative case with, 294

definition of, 15

demonstrative, 71â73

Ä«dem, eadem, idem, 90

is, ea, id, 90

with genitive ending in -Ä«us and dative ending in -Ä«, 73â74

interrogative, 155

objective complement, 133

positive degree, 210

possessive, 89

predicate, 34â35, 133

reflexive possessives, 106â07

substantive, 35, 133

summary of forms, 33, 496

UNUS NAUTA, 73â74

verbal. See Gerundive; Participles

word order and, 15â16, 25â26

Adverbs, 25

ablative case and, 13

comparison of, 264â65

irregular, 265â66

summary of forms, 499

definition of, 5, 13

formation of, 264â65

Aeneas, 190â91, 192, 346â48, 349

Agamemnon, 68

Agent

ablative of, 148

dative of, 195

Agreement

of adjectives, 15, 33, 56

of relative pronouns, 139â41

subject-verb, 15â16

Alexander the Great, 110â11, 278

Alliteration, 278, 290, 322

Allobroges, 166, 310

Alma-Tadema, Sir Lawrence, 20, 144

Alphabet, xxxvâxxxix

Ambiguous forms, 16, 24, 58, 111, 177

Anaphora, 94, 243, 278, 290

Anglo-Saxon language, xxviâxxix

Antecedent, 109, 139â44, 150, 155, 243, 291, 323, 326, 328

Antithesis, 137

Antony, Marc, 93, 345

Apex, xxxvii

Apodosis, 273

Aposiopesis, 321

Apposition, 25

Archaic Period of Latin Literature, xxxâxxxi

Archaising Period, xxxiii

Aristotle, 278â79

Arria, 337â38, 405

Articles, 14, 18, 78

Assimilation, 48, 58, 66, 195

Asyndeton, 137

Athena. See Minerva

AudiÅ, conjugation of, 80â81

Augustan Period (of Latin literature), xxxii

Augustine, Saint, xxxiv

Augustus, xxxii, 28, 197, 262

Â 

Bacon, Francis, xxxv

Bakalowicz, Stefan, 11, 22

Base, of nouns and adjectives, 14, 23â24, 32, 42, 50, 55â56

Bede, Caedmonâs Anglo-Saxon Verses and the Difficulties of Translation, 360â61

Browne, Sir Thomas, xxix

Brutus, Lucius, 101

Â 

Caecina Paetus, 337, 338, 405â06

Caelius (Rufus), 222

Caesar, xxxi, 101, 161, 215, 215, 318, 327, 329â30

The Nations of Gaul, 215â16

Caesar of Heisterbach, The Devil and a Thirteenth-Century Schoolboy, 361â62

Calendar, 199â200, 234

Calliope, 84

CapiÅ, conjugation of, 84

Cardinal numerals, 123â24, 129â30, 500

ablative with, 125

genitive with, 124

Carthage, 51, 192, 197, 349

Cases

definition of, 12

of nouns, 12â14, 15â16. See also Ablative case; Accusative case; Dative case; Declension; Genitive case; Locative case; Nominative case; Vocative case

Catiline (Lucius Sergius Catilina), 93â94, 120â21, 166â67, 252, 254, 263, 288, 309â10, 366â74

Catullus, xxxi, 20, 39, 244, 253, 318, 363â66

Alley Cat, 22

Ask Me if I Care, 330

Bids a Bitter Farewell to Lesbia, 159â60

Bids His Girlfriend Farewell, 20

B.Y.O.B., etc., etc., 277â78

Death of a Pet Sparrow, 364â65

Dedicates His Poetry Book, 60â61

A Dedication, 363â64

Disillusionment, 342â52

FrÄter AvÄ, Atque ValÄ, 365â66

Give Me a Thousand Kisses!, 260â61

How Many Kisses?, 364

I Love Herâ¦ I Love Her Not, 309

On Lesbiaâs Husband, 290â92

Promises, Promises!, 337

Thanks a Lot, Tully!, 223

CausÄ, with genitive phrase, 334

Cause, ablative of, 493

Chiasmus, 52, 77, 120, 253â54

Characteristic, relative clauses of, 323â24

Cicero, xxxi, xxxivâxxxv, 38, 94, 189, 223, 254, 262, 263, 299, 350, 366â84

The Aged Playwright Sophocles Holds His Own, 158â59

Alexander the Great and the Power of Literature, 110â11

On Ambition and Literature, Both Latin and Greek, 182

anecdotes from, 380â83

The Arrest and Trial of the Conspirators, 369â74

The Authority of a Teacherâs Opinion, 112

On Contempt of Death, 377â78

Cyrusâ Dying Words on Immortality, 128

Death of a Puppy (Example of an Omen), 380

Denounces Catiline in the Senate, 93

Derivation of âPhilosophusâ and Subjects of Philosophy, 354

DÄ VÄ«tÄ et Morte, 374â78

On the Ethics of Waging War, 69

Evidence and Confession, 252

Fabian Tactics, 128â29

Get the Tusculan Country House Ready, 383

How Demosthenes Overcame His Handicaps, 352

Imagines the State of Rome Itself Urging Him to Punish the Catilinarian Conspirators, 120

The Incomparable Value of Friendship, 86

Literature: Its Value and Delight, 378â80

MÄrcus QuÄ«ntÅ FrÄtrÄ« S., 319â20

More Examples of Roman Wit, 328â29

A More Positive View About Immortality, 375â77

The Nervousness of Even a Great Orator, 242

On the Pleasures of Love in Old Age, 143

Quam Multa NÅn DÄsÄ«derÅ!, 381

The Rarity of Friendship, 38

Socratesâ âEither-Orâ Belief, 374â75

Sorry, Nobodyâs Home!, 300

The Sword of Damocles, 353

Testimony Against the Conspirators, 309â10

Themistocles; Fame and Expediency, 382â83

Thermopylae: A Soldierâs Humor, 45â46

Too Conscientious (An Example of Irony), 380

Two Letters to, 329â30

The Tyrant Can Trust No One, 352â53

Urges Catilineâs Departure from Rome, 166â67

On the Value and the Nature of Friendship, 354â55

The Value of Literature, 348

Vitriolic Denunciation of the Leader of a Conspiracy Against the Roman State, 366â69

On War, 355â56

What Makes a Good Appetite, 381â82

Your Loss, My Gain, 279

Ciceronian Period (of Latin literature), xxxiâxxxii

Cimon, 270â71

Cincinnatus, 207

Circus, 150â51

Claudius, 289â90

Clauses

participial phrases translated as, 186â87

subjunctive, 227

conditional sentences, 274

cum, 255â56

fear, 341â42

indirect questions, 247

jussive, 228â29

jussive noun, 303â04

proviso, 267â68

purpose, 229â30, 237â38, 303

relative clause of characteristic, 323

result, 237â38

subordinate, 17, 139â40, 142, 155, 186, 203, 206, 229, 237, 247, 255â56, 267, 273, 303, 310, 493â94

in indirect statement, 493â94

Cleopatra, 327

Clodia. See Lesbia

Cognate languages, xxvi, xxviii

Cognomen, 30, 69, 113, 138

Collatinus, 59â60

Collective nouns, 108, 149

Commands

imperative, 2, 5, 64, 65, 81, 229, 256â57, 267, 284â85, 313

jussive noun clauses, 303â04

jussive subjunctive, 228â29

negative, nÅlÅ and, 267

Comparative degree

of adjectives, 210â11

declension, 211, 219

formation, 210â11

summary of forms, 499

usage and translation, 211

of adverbs, 264â65

irregular, 265â66

summary of forms, 499

Comparison, ablative of, 212

Complementary infinitive, 49

Compound verbs, 195

dative case with, 298

Conditional sentences, 69, 273â74

indicative, 273â74

mixed, 274

subjunctive, 274

Conjugation. See also First conjugation; Fourth conjugation; Second conjugation; Third conjugation definition of, 2

of deponent verbs, 282â85

personal endings for. See Personal endings

summary of forms of, 501â09

Conjunction

coordinating, 17

Correlative, 141

cum as, 255

definition of, 17

subordinating, 17

Consonantal i, xxxviii, 88, 220

Consonants, pronunciation of, xxxviiâxxxix

Consonant stems (3rd declension nouns), 114

Constantine, 113

Contraction, 10, 39, 48, 277, 308

Conversational Latin, 10â11, 138

Cornelius Nepos. See Nepos

Correlative adjectives, 249

Cum, with ablative case, 116â17, 177

Cum clauses, 255â56

Cyrus the Great, 128

Â 

Dante, xxxivâxxxv

Dative case

with adjectives, 294

of agent, 195

with compound verbs, 296

forms of. See Declension

general use of, 13

indirect object, 13

of possession, 492

of purpose, 492

of reference or interest, 260, 324

of separation, 291

with special verbs, 295â96

DÄ

ablative case with, 125, 177

in place constructions, 313

Declension, xxxiv

1st, 14â15

adjectives, 14â15, 33, 42, 73

2nd, 23â25

adjectives, 23â25, 33, 73

masculines ending in -er, 23â24, 42

masculines ending in -us, 23â25

neuters, 32â33

3rd, 55â56

adjectives, 131â33, 211

i-stem nouns, 114â15, 132

4th, 162â63

5th, 176â77

of adjectives, summary of forms, 498

definition of, 14

of gerund, 332

of participles, 185

of pronouns

demonstratives, 71â72, 90

intensive, 107

personal, 87â88

reflexive, 105â06

relative, 139

use of term, 14

Decline, 14, 15â16

Defective verbs, 141, 164, 204

Definite article, 14, 78

Degree of difference, ablative of, 493

Demonstratives

hic, ille, iste, 71â73, 75

Ä«dem, eadem, idem, 90

is, ea, id, 90

usage and translation of, 72â73

Demosthenes, 165, 241

Deponent verbs, 282â85

ablative case with, 285

definition of, 282

principal parts and conjugation of, 282â85

semi-deponent, 58, 187, 285

summary of forms of, 504â06

Derived languages, xxviii

Descartes, 39

Description, genitive and ablative of, 342

Diction, 52

DiÄsÄª rae, 183

Diminutive (form), 21, 53, 79

Dionysius, 51, 127, 143, 222, 318

Diphthongs, pronunciation of, xxxvii

Dipinti, 182â83, 234â35, 310â11

Direct address, 14

Direct object, 2, 13, 16, 18, 25â26, 34â35, 88, 140, 148, 186, 194, 202, 294â96, 324, 333

accusative case and, 13

Direct questions, -ne, num, and nÅnne, 341

Domus, in place constructions, 313â14

Dufresnoy, Charles, 251

Dummodo, 267â68

Â 

Ego/ nÅs

declension of, 87

usage of, 88â90

Ellipsis, 290

Enclitic, 50

Endings

1st declension, 14â15, 24â25

2nd declension, 23â25, 32

3rd declension, 55â56, 132

4th declension, 162â63

5th declension, 176â77

i-stem, 114â15, 132

personal, 2â3

deponent verbs, 282

perfect system active, 97â99

present system active, 2â3

present system passive, 146

English language, xxvâxxx

Ennius, 128, 300

EÅ, conjugation of, 312â13

-er adjectives, 1st and 2nd declension, 42

Erasmus, xxxv

Etymology. See also last section of several of the chapters

definition of, 21

Ex

ablative case with, 125, 177

in place constructions, 313â14

Â 

Fabius Maximus, Quintus, 128â29, 279

Fear clauses, 341â42, 344

FerÅ, conjugation of, 256â57

Ficherelli, Felice, 60

Fifth declension, 176â77

summary of forms of, 495

Finite verbs, 2

FÄ«Å, conjugation of, 304â05

First conjugation

future indicative

active, 40â41

passive, 147

imperative, 5

imperfect indicative

active, 40â41

passive, 147

present indicative

active, 4

passive, 146

present infinitive

active, 3

passive, 147

subjunctive, 227â28, 236, 245â46

summary of forms of, 501â04

First declension, 14â15

2nd declension compared with, 24â25

adjectives, 14â15, 33

ending in -er, 42

summary of forms of, 495â96

Fourth conjugation, 80â81, 169â70

future indicative

active, 81

passive, 169

imperative, 81

imperfect indicative

active, 81

passive, 170

present indicative

active, 80

passive, 169

present infinitive

active, 81

passive, 170

subjunctive, 227â28, 236, 245â46

summary of forms of, 501â04

Fourth declension, 162

summary of forms of, 495

French (including Old French), xxviiâxxix, 30, 39, 54, 61â62, 78, 82â83, 95, 121â22, 130, 145, 175, 183, 225â26, 243â44, 331

Fronto, xxxiii

Function (use), grammatical, 16

Future active periphrastic, 247

Future indicative

deponent verbs, 283

of possum, 49

of sum, 48

Future indicative active

1st and 2nd conjugation, 40â41

3rd conjugation, 63, 64

4th conjugation, 81

Future indicative passive

1st and 2nd conjugation, 147

3rd and 4th conjugation, 169

Future passive participle. See Gerundive

Future perfect

active, 98

deponent verbs, 283

passive, 153

Future tense, translation of, 41â42

Â 

Gaul, 215

Gellius, xxxiii

Gender, 15, 26

1st declension, 15

2nd declension, 23â24, 32â33

3rd declension, 55â56, 115

4th declension, 162

5th declension, 176

definition of, 15

Genitive case

of description, 342

forms of. See Declension

general use of, 13

of indefinite value, 260

of material, 491â92

objective, 492

partitive (of the whole), 124, 345

possessive, 13

predicate, 348

GÃ©rÃ´me, Jean-LÃ©on, 293

Gerundive (future passive participle), 184, 332â34, 340

gerund compared with, 332â34

in passive periphrastic, 194

phrases, 333â34

Gerunds, 332â34, 340

declension of, 332

gerundive compared with, 333â34

phrases, 333â34

Gladiators, 53, 280, 293

Golden Age (of Latin literature), xxxâxxxiii

Graffiti, 9â10, 21, 29â30, 38â39, 47, 53, 61, 69â70, 78, 86, 94, 103, 112, 121, 129, 137â38, 144â45, 152, 160â61, 167, 174, 182, 191, 199, 209, 216â17, 224â25, 234, 243, 253â54, 262â63, 272, 280, 292, 301â02, 310â11, 320â21, 330â31, 339, 349

Greek alphabet, xxxvi

Greek (language), xxviâxxvii, xxxvi, xxxviii, 3, 16, 17, 21, 30, 47, 54, 68, 82, 104, 108, 121, 160, 174, 181, 208, 222, 226, 233, 243, 261â62, 273, 289â90, 318, 328, 331, 346

Greek literature, xxxâxxxi

Â 

Hamilcar, 338â39

Hannibal, 128, 338â39

Head verbs, 203, 206

Hic

declension of, 71â72

is compared with, 90

use and translation of, 72â73

Historical present, 248

Historical (secondary) tenses, 247â48

Homer, 110, 144, 180

Horace, xxxii, 8â9, 226, 350, 394â99

Aurea MediocritÄsâThe Golden Mean, 396â97

Autobiographical Notes, 357â58

Carpe Diem, 394

Contemplates an Invitation, 8â9

DÄ CupiditÄte, 197â98

DiÄs FÄstus, 399

The Grass Is Always Greener, 29

Integer VÄ«tae, 395

LÄbuntur AnnÄ«, 397â98

Longs for the Simple, Peaceful Country Life on His Sabine Farm, 358â59

A Monument More Lasting than Bronze, 348, 399

The Satiristâs Modus Operandi, 199

A Sense of Balance in Life, 398â99

Who Is Truly Free?, 309

Humus, in place constructions, 314

Â 

Äªdem, eadem, idem, 90

Ille

declension of, 71â72

etymology and, 78

is compared with, 90

use and translation of, 72â73

Imperative, 229

1st and 2nd conjugation, 5

3rd conjugation, 64â65, 81

4th conjugation, 81

definition of, 5

of deponent verbs, 284â85

future, 292

nÅlÅ, 267

Imperfect indicative

deponent verbs, 283

of possum, 49

of sum, 48

Imperfect indicative active

1st and 2nd conjugation, 40â41

3rd conjugation, 64, 81

4th conjugation, 81

Imperfect indicative passive

1st and 2nd conjugation, 147

3rd and 4th conjugation, 170

Imperfect subjunctive, 236â37

deponent verbs, 283

usage and translation of, 237

Imperfect tense

perfect (present perfect) tense compared with, 98â99

translation, 41â42

Impersonal verbs, 315, 325

In

with ablative case, 177

in place constructions, 313

Incunabula, xxxv, n. 9

Indeclinable (nouns, adjectives), 35, 42, 123

Indefinite article, 14, 78

Independent clauses, 229

Indicative, xxxiv

definition of, 2

future. See Future indicative; Future indicative active; Future indicative passive

imperfect. See Imperfect indicative; Imperfect indicative active; Imperfect indicative passive; Imperfect tense

present. See Present indicative; Present indicative active; Present indicative passive

subjunctive compared with, 227

Indicative conditional sentences, 273â74

Indirect command (jussive noun clauses), 303â04

Indirect object, 13, 16, 25, 67, 88, 294

Indirect questions, 242, 247â48

Indirect statement

definition of, 202

infinitive in, with accusative subject, 202â03

list of verbs followed by, 205

subordinate clauses in, 493â94

Indo-European languages, xxvi, 178

Infinitive, 201

complementary, 49

definition of, 3

of deponent verbs, 284

to distinguish the conjugations, 3, 64

in indirect statement, with accusative subject, 202â04

irregular verbs

possum, posse, potuÄ«, 48

sum, 34

objective, 202

present passive, 147, 170

usage of, 202

Infix, 41

Inflected languages, xxvi

Inflections, xxvi, 3, 12

Instrument (means), ablative of, 116â17, 178

Intensive pronouns, 107, 109

Interest, dative of, 260, 324

Interlocked word order, 253

Interrogative adjectives, 155â56

Interrogative pronouns, 154â56

Intertextuality, 223

Intransitive verbs, 34. See also sum

-iÅ verbs

conjugation of, 80â82

participles, 185

subjunctive, 228, 236

Ipse, ipsa, ipsum, 107

Irregular verbs

eÅ, 312â13

ferÅ, 256â57

fÄ«Å, 304â05

mÄlÅ, 267

nÅlÅ, 267

possum, 48â49, 237

sum, 34, 48

summary of forms of, 506â09

volÅ, 266

Is, ea, id

declension of, 88

as demonstrative, 90

usage of, 88â90

Isidore of Seville, xxxiv

The Days of the Week, 233

Iste, declension of, 72

I-stem nouns of 3rd declension, 114â15, 125, 132

Italian, xxviiâxxviii, xxxiv, 30, 39, 61â62, 78, 95, 121, 130, 145, 175, 183, 217, 225, 243â44, 331, 340

IubeÅ, with jussive noun clauses, 304

Â 

Jalabert, Charles Francois, 8

Jerome, Saint, xxviii, xxxiv

Johnson, Samuel, xxxiii

Jussive noun clauses, 277, 303â04

Jussive subjunctive 228â29

Juvenal, xxxiii, 47, 254, 272, 293

Explains His Impulse to Satire, 136â37

Â 

Latin language, in linguistic history, xxvâxxx

Latin literature

brief survey of, xxxâxxxv

âvulgar,â xxviii, xxxiiiâxxxiv

Lentulus, 252, 310

Leonidas, 45â46

Lepautre, Pierre, 338

Lesbia (Clodia), xxxi, 20, 159, 222â23, 242, 260, 290â91

Linking verbs, intransitive, 34. See also sum

Literacy, 47, 321

Livy, xxxii, 52, 293

On the Death of Cicero, 383â84

Laments the Decline of Roman Morals, 52â53

The Rape of Lucretia, 59â60

Locative case, 314

Long marks. See Macrons

Lucretia, rape of, 59â60

Lucretius, xxxi

Â 

Maccari, Cesare, 94

Macrobius, FacÄtiae (Witticisms), 262

Macrons, xxxvii, 4, 17, 50, 64

Maecenas, 8â9, 28

MÄlÅ

conjugation of, 267

with jussive noun clauses, 304

Manlius, 167

Manner, ablative of, 13, 116â17, 177â78

Manuscripts, 53, 103, 145, 160, 291, 322

Martial, xxxiii, 410â11

A Covered Dish Dinner!, 252

Diaulus Still Buries His Clients, 102

Even Though You Do Invite MeâIâll Come!, 410

Fake Tears, 410

The Good Life, 216

To Have Friends One Must Be Friendly, 233

His Only Guest Was a Real Boar!, 45

âI Do.â âI Donât!,â 300

âI Do Not Love Thee, Doctor Fell,â 52

I Donât Cook for Cooks!, 308

Issa, 411

Itâs All in the Delivery, 143â44

Large GiftsâYes, but Only Bait, 360

A Legacy-Hunterâs Wish, 253

Maronilla Has a Cough, 301

Message from a Bookcase, 160

Note on a Book by Lucan, 328

Note on a Copy of Catullusâ Carmina, 253

Oh, Iâd Love to Read You My Poemsâ¦ Not!, 308

The Old Boy Dyed His Hair, 410

Paete, NÅn Dolet, 337

Pleaseâ¦ Donât!, 271

Please Remove My Name from Your Mailing List!, 232

Pretty Is as Pretty Does, 290

Pro-cras-tination, 410â11

The Quality of Martialâs Book, 308

The Rich Get Richer, 278

Ringo, 261â62

Store Teeth, 119â20

Summer Vacation, 301

On a Temperamental Friend, 137

Thanksâ¦ but No Thanks!, 318

A Vacationâ¦ from You!, 271

And Vice Is Not Nice!, 290

A Visit from the Young Interns, 181

When I Haveâ¦Enough!, 76

Youâre All Just Wonderful!, 242â43

Material, genitive of, 491â92

Matthew, The Lordâs Prayer, 360

Means (instrument), ablative of, 13, 116â17, 178

Medieval Period, xxxivâxxxv

Metaphor, 152, 183, 256, 294, 308, 350

Middle English, xxix

Milo, 259

Milton, John, xxxv

Minerva (Athena), 190â91, 207â08, 261

Mood

definition of, 2, 227

imperative, 2, 5, 64â65, 81, 227, 284â85

indicative, 2, 227

subjunctive, 2, 227

More, Sir Thomas, xxxv

Morphology, 1

Mycenae, 68

Â 

Names (Roman), 30

-ne, num, nÅnne, in direct questions, 341

Nepos, xxxii, 60â61, 384â94

Aristides the Just, 391â92

The Character of Cimon, 270â71

Hannibal; The Second Punic War, 356â57

Hannibal and the Beginnings of the Second Punic War, 338â39

Miltiades and the Battle of Marathon, 384â87

Themistocles and the Battle of Salamis, 388â90

Timoleon, 392â94

Newton, Sir Isaac, xxxv

NÅlÅ

conjugation of, 267

with jussive noun clauses, 304

negative commands and, 267

Nomen, 30

Nominative case

forms of. See Declension

predicate nominative, 13

as subject, 12

Nouns

1st declension, 14â15

2nd declension, 23â24, 32â33

3rd declension, 55â56, 114â15 See also I-stem nouns; Consonant stems

4th declension, 162â63

5th declension, 176â77

abstract, 12, 56

agentive, 56, 70, 86

in apposition, 25

cases of, 12. See also Ablative case; Accusative case; Dative case; Declension; Genitive case; Locative case; Nominative case; Vocative case

common, 12

concrete, 12

definition of, 12

predicate, 34

proper, 12

substantive adjectives as, 35

summary of forms, 495

verbal. See Gerund; Infinitive; Supine

Number, 2

Numerals, 129â30, 500

cardinal, 123â23

ablative case, 125

distributive, 130

multiplicative, 130

ordinal, 129

Â 

Objective complement, 119, 133

Objective genitives, 492

Objective infinitive, 494

Object of verb

direct, 2, 13, 25

indirect, 13, 25

Occitan (including Old Occitan), xxviii, 30, 39, 61â62, 78, 95, 121, 130, 145, 175, 183, 225â26, 244, 331, 340

Odo de Cerinton, Who Will Put the Bell on the Catâs Neck!, 361

Onomatopoeia, 277

Ordinal numerals, 129, 500

Orestes, 233

Ovid, xi, xxxii

Asks the Gods to Inspire His Work, 299â300

On Death and Metamorphosis, 151

Â 

Paetus, Caecina, 337â38

Paraclausithyron, 320

Paradigms

meaning and use of, 3

said aloud, 4

Participles (participial phrases), 184â87. See also Gerundive

ablative absolute, 193â94

declension of, 185

of deponent verbs, 284

passive periphrastic, 145, 194â95

translation of

as clauses, 186â87

as verbal adjectives, 185â86

Partitive genitive (genitive of the whole), 124, 345

Parts of speech, 1â2

Passive periphrastic (gerundive + sum), 145, 194â96

Passive voice, 2

definition of, 146

infinitive, 147, 170, 201â02

participles in, 184â85

perfect system, 153â54

subjunctive, 245â46

usage and translation, 157, 246

present system

1st and 2nd conjugation, 146â48

3rd and 4th conjugation, 169â70

subjunctive, 228, 236

Past perfect. See Pluperfect

Past tense (simple past). See Perfect

Patristic Period (of Latin literature), xxxiv

Perfect indicative

active, 96â98

active stem, 97

deponent verbs, 282â83

imperfect tense compared with, 98â99

passive, 153â54

translation of, 98â99

Perfect subjunctive

active, 245â46

deponent verbs, 283

passive, 246

Perfect system, 96

active voice, 96â98

perfect active stem and, 97

principal parts, 96â97

usage, translation and distinction from the imperfect, 98â99

definition of, 96

passive voice, 153â54

usage and translation, 154, 157

subjunctive, 245â46

Periphrasis, definition of, 194. See also Future active periphrastic; Passive periphrastic

Persia, 35â36, 128, 165, 259

Persius, 349â50

Person, 2, 16

Personal agent, ablative of, 148, 177

Personal endings

active voice, 2â3, 97

passive voice, 146

Personal pronouns, 87â90

declension of, 87â88

definition of, 87

reflexive pronouns compared with, 106

usage of, 87â90

Personification, 76

Petrarch, xxxv

Petronius, xxxiii

Trimalchioâs epitaph, 318â19

Phaedrus, 400â03

The Ass and the Old Shepherd, 402

DÄ CupiditÄte, 197â98

The Fox and the Tragic Mask, 400

The Fox Gets the Ravenâs Cheese, 401â02

The Other Personâs Faults and Our Own, 400

Sour Grapes, 400

The Stag at the Spring, 401

The Two Mules and the Robbers, 402â03

Phonetic change, 484â85

Phrases

gerund and gerundive, 333â34

participial

ablative absolute, 193â94

translation, 193â94

Place constructions

from which, 163, 177, 313â14

to which, 313â14

where, 177, 313â14

Plato, 189

Plautus, xxxâxxxi, xxxiv

Pliny, xxxiii, 403â10

On Behalf of a Penitent Freedman, 408â09

Concern about a Sick Freedman, 407â08

Delights of the Country, 403

Endows a School, 359â60

Faithful in Sickness and in Death, 405â06

Happy Married Life, 404â05

Selection of a Teacher, 409â10

A Sweet, Brave Girl, 406â07

What Pliny Thinks of the Races, 359

Why No Letters?, 359

Writes to Marcellinus about the Death of Fundanusâ Daughter, 102â03

Pluperfect (past perfect), usage of, 98â99

Pluperfect indicative

active, 98

deponent verbs, 283

passive, 153

Pluperfect subjunctive, 245â46

deponent verbs, 283

PlÅ«s, declension of, 219

Polyphemus, 135

Polysyndeton, 290

Pompeii, 9, 321. See also Graffiti

Pompey, 329

Pontilianus, 232

Portuguese, xxviiâxxviii, 30, 39, 61â62, 78, 95, 121, 130, 145, 175, 183, 217, 225, 244, 331, 340

Positive degree (of adjectives), 210

Possession

dative of, 492

genitive of, 13

Possessives

adjectives, 89

reflexive, 106â07

supplying in English translation, 28

Possum

with complementary infinitive, 49

conjugation of, 49

subjunctive, 237

Post-Augustan period (of Latin literature), xxxiii

Postpositive word, 42â43

Potential subjunctive, 308

Praenomen, 30

Predicate, definition of, 34

Predicate adjectives, 13, 34

Predicate genitive, 348

Predicate nouns, 13, 34

Prefixes, 18, 27, 36, 57, 66, 75, 78, 82, 100, 108, 117â18, 126, 151, 195, 213, 296, 342

Inseparable, 78, 195â96

Prepositions, xxxiv

with ablative case, 14, 74, 116â17, 148, 177â78, 313

with accusative case, 13, 74, 313

definition of, 13

object of, 13â14

phrases, 13

in place constructions, 313

Present imperative active

1st and 2nd conjugation, 5

3rd conjugation, 64â65, 81

4th conjugation, 81

Present imperative passive, deponent verbs, 284â85

Present indicative

deponent verbs, 282â83

of possum, 48â49

of sum, 34

Present indicative active

1st and 2nd conjugation, 4

3rd conjugation, 63, 80

4th conjugation, 80

Present indicative passive

1st and 2nd conjugation, 146

3rd and 4th conjugation, 169

Present perfect. See Perfect

Present stems. See Stems of verbs, present

Present subjunctive

conjugation of, 228

deponent verbs, 283

of possum, 236â37

of sum, 236â37

translation of, 228

Present system

1st and 2nd conjugation, 40, 43

imperative, 5

indicative, 3â4, 40â41, 146â47

subjunctive, 227â28, 236,

3rd conjugation

imperative, 64â65, 81

indicative, 63â65, 80â82, 169â70

subjunctive, 227â28, 236

4th conjugation

imperative, 81

indicative, 80â81, 169â70

subjunctive, 227â28, 236

definition of, 40, 96

Present tense

emphatic present, 4

progressive present, 4

simple present, 4

Primary tenses, 247â48

Principal parts. See Verbs

Prodelision, 328

Programmata, 182â83, 235, 310â11

Pronouns

demonstrative

hic, ille, iste, 71â73

Ä«dem, eadem, idem, 90

is, ea, id, 88â90

intensive, 107, 109

interrogative, 154â55

personal, 87â90

declension, 87â88

definition of, 87

reflexive pronouns compared with, 105â06

usage, 88â90

reflexive, 105â07

personal compared with, 105â06

relative, 139â41

declension, 139

interrogative adjectives compared with, 155â56

usage and agreement, 139â141

summary of forms of, 497â98

Pronunciation, xxxvâxl

accent and, xl

of consonants, xxxviiâxxxix, 17, 99, 178, 321, 325, 339

of diphthongs, xxxvii

syllables and, xxxix

of vowels, xxxviâxxxvii, 52, 57

Propertius, xxxii

Protasis, 69, 85, 273

ProvenÃ§al. See Occitan

Proviso clauses, 267â68

Publilius Syrus, xxxii

Punctum, 86, 292, 310â11

Purpose, dative of, 492

Purpose clauses, 229â30, 239â40

jussive noun clauses compared with, 303â04

relative clauses of, 328

Pylades, 233

Pyrrhus, 207

Pythagoras, 112

Â 

Quam

with comparative and superlative adjectives, 212

with comparative and superlative adverbs, 265

Questions

direct, -ne, num, and nÅnne, 341

indirect, 247

QuÄ«, quae, quod

as interrogative adjectives, 154â55

as relative pronouns, 139â41

QuÄ«dam, 125

Quintilian, xxxiii

Aristotle, Tutor of Alexander the Great, 278â79

Â 

Reading passages. See specific authors

Reference, dative of, 260, 324

Reflexive possessives, 106â07

Reflexive pronouns, 105â07

personal pronouns compared with, 105â06

Regulus, 336

Relative clause, 139â41

of characteristic, 323â24, 326

of purpose, 328

of result, 328â29

Relative pronouns, 139â41, 145

declension of, 139

interrogative adjectives compared with, 155â56

usage and agreement, 139â40

Result clauses, 237â40

relative clauses of result, 328â29

Romance languages, xxviii, xxxiv

etymology and, 30, 39, 62, 78, 95, 121, 129â30, 145, 175, 183, 217, 225â26, 243â44, 331, 340

Romanian, xxviiâxxviii, 30, 39, 61â62, 78, 95, 121, 130, 145, 175, 183, 225, 331, 340

Rome, 317

Rubicon river, 161, 330

RÅ«s, in place constructions, 314

Â 

Salinator, Marcus Livius, 279

Satire, 136â37, 199

Scipio Nasica, 300

Second conjugation,

future indicative

active, 40â41

passive, 147

imperative, 5

imperfect indicative

active, 40â41

passive, 147

present indicative

active, 4

passive, 146

present infinitive

active, 3

passive, 147

subjunctive, 227â28, 236, 245â46

summary of forms of, 501â04

Second declension, 23â25

1st declension compared with, 24â25

adjectives, 32â33

in -er, 42

masculines in -er, 24

masculines in -us, 23â24

neuters, 32â33

summary of forms of, 495â96

Semi-deponent verbs, 58, 285

Seneca, xxxiii, 77

Claudiusâ Excremental Expiration, 289

When I Haveâ¦ Enough!, 77

Separation, ablative of, 163â64, 177â78

Shakespeare, William, xxxi

Silver Age (of Latin literature), xxxiii

Simile, 209

Socrates, 189, 207, 251

Solon, 307

Sophocles, 101, 158â159

Spanish, xxviiâxxviii, 30, 39, 61â62, 78, 95, 121, 130, 145, 175, 183, 217, 225, 243â44, 331, 340

Specification, ablative of, 216, 271, 492â93

Spelling errors (in graffiti), 10

Stem vowel, 3, 33, 63, 80, 82

Stems of participles, 184â85

Stems of verbs

perfect active, 97

present

1st and 2nd conjugation, 3â4

3rd conjugation, 64, 82

4th conjugation, 80â82

Sub

with ablative case, 177

in place constructions, 177, 313

Subject, 25

agreement of with verb, 16

of indicative, accusative case, 202â04

nominative case as, 12

Subject-object-verb (SOV) pattern, 7, 25

Subjunctive, xxxiv, 227â30, 236â38, 245â48

clauses

by attraction, 310

conditional sentences, 273â74

cum, 255â56

fear, 341â42, 344

indirect questions, 242, 247â48

jussive, 228â29

jussive noun, 277, 303â04

potential, 308

proviso, 267â68

purpose, 229â30

relative clause of characteristic, 323â24, 326

result, 237â38

definition of, 2, 227

of deponent verbs, 283

imperfect, 236â37

usage and translation, 237

perfect, 245â46

pluperfect, 245â46

of possum, 236â37

presentof

sum, 236â37

translation of, 228, 237, 246

Subordinate clauses, 229

in indirect statement, 493â94

Substantive adjectives, 35

Suffixes, 489â91

Sum

conjugation of

future and imperfect indicative, 48

present indicative, 33â34

subjunctive, 236â37

with gerundive, 194â95

with predicate nouns or adjectives, 34

Superlative degree

of adjectives

declension, 211

irregular formation, 218â19

regular formation, 210â11

usage and translation, 211

of adverbs, 264â66

Supine, 201, 324

Suppletion, 91, 179

Syllables, xxxix

antepenult, xli

penult, xli

Syncope, 21, 308

Synopsis, 99, 154, 170, 246, 257, 266, 283â84

Syntax, 1, 16

Â 

Tacitus, xxxiii

Tarquinius Superbus, 59â60, 197

Tarquinius, Sextus, 59â60

Tense(s

definition of, 2

future, 40â41, 48â49, 63â65, 80â82, 146â48, 169â70

future perfect, 98, 153

imperfect

indicative, 40â41, 48â49, 63â65, 80â82, 146â48, 169â70

subjunctive, 236â37

infinitive, 201â04

participles, 184â85

perfect

indicative, 96â98, 153â54

subjunctive, 245â46

pluperfect

indicative, 96â98, 153â54

subjunctive, 245â46

present

imperative, 5

indicative, 4, 33â34, 49, 63â65, 80â82, 146â48, 169â70

subjunctive, 228, 237

sequence of, 247â48

subjunctive, 227

Tense sign, 40

Terence, xxx, 62

An Uncleâs Love for His Nephew and Adopted Son, 223â24

Themistocles, 165, 259

Thermopylae, 45â46, 207

Third conjugation

future indicative

active, 63â64, 81

passive, 169

imperative, 64

imperfect indicative

active, 64â65, 81

passive, 170

-iÅ verbs, 80â82

present indicative

active, 63â64, 80

passive, 169

present infinitive

active, 64, 82

passive, 170

subjunctive, 227â28, 236, 245â46

summary of forms of, 501â04

Third declension

adjectives, 131â33

usage, 133

i-stem nouns, 114â15, 132

summary of forms of, 145â46

Time constructions

when or within, 125, 178, 314

duration, 314

Transferred epithet, 291

Transitive verbs

definition of, 2

infinitive, 201â02

participles of, 184â85

voice and, 2

Translation

3rd declension and, 56

of comparative adjectives, 211

of demonstratives, 72â73

of future tense, 41â42

of imperfect tense, 41â42

of is, ea, id, 88â90

of perfect passive system, 154

of perfect tense, 98â99

of relative pronouns, 139â40

of subjunctive, 228, 237, 246

Troy, 189â91, 207â08, 232, 346â47

TÅ«/ vÅs

declension of, 88

usage of, 88â90

Â 

Åªnus, etymology and, 78

UNUS NAUTA adjectives, 73â74

Use (function), grammatical, 16

Â 

Verbs. See also Conjugation; Mood; Tense(s); Voice

agreement of with subject, 16

auxiliary, xxxiv

characteristics of, 1â2

dative case with

compound verbs, 296

special verbs, 295â96

definition of, 1

deponent, 282â85

summary of forms of, 504â06

finite, 2

intransitive, 34. See also sum

infinitive, 201

irregular. See Irregular verbs

principal parts, 5, 70, 86, 96â97, 104, 125, 153, 184, 280

transitive, 2

infinitive, 201

participles, 184

word order and, 7, 25â26

Vergil, xxxii, 8â9, 173â74, 192, 253, 349

The Death of Laocoonâ¦ and Troy, 207â08

Jupiter Prophesies to Venus the Future Glory of Rome, 346â48, 347

Laocoon Speaks Out Against the Trojan Horse, 189â90

Messianic Eclogue, 173â74

Vesuvius, 9

Vincotte, Thomas, 166

VÄ«s, declension of, 114â15

Vocative case

forms of. See Declension

usage of, 14

Voice. See also Active voice; Passive voice

definition of, 2

VolÅ

conjugation of, 266

with jussive noun clauses, 304

Vowel weakening, 179, 187

Vowels, pronunciation of, xxxviâxxxvii

Vulgate, xxviii, xxxiv

Â 

Whole, genitive of the (partitive genitive), 124, 345

Wilson, Thomas, xxix

Word order, 7, 15, 18, 25â26, 72

Â 

Xenophon, 173

Xerxes, 46

Â 

Zeugma, 347

LOCATION OF THE SENTENTIAE ANTÄªQVAE

(1) Pers., Sat. 6.27. (2) Plaut., Mostell. 1.3.30. (3) Suet., Aug. 25 (4) Hor., Sat. 1.2.11. (5) Sen., Clem. 1.2.2. (6) Cic., Sest. 67.141. (7) Cic., Cat. 4.3. (8) Verg., Aen. 3.121 and 4.173 and 184. (9) Ter., Heaut. 190 et passim. (10) Cic., Fam. 2.16.4. (11) Hor., Sat. 1.9.78. (12) Hor., Sat. 1.10.81â€“83. (13) Cic., Cat. 1.12.30. (14) Cic., Inv. rhet. 1.1.1. (15) Publil. Syr. 321.

(1) Plaut., Stich. 5.2.2. (2) Verg., Aen. 3.121. (3) Ter., Ad. 5.8.937. (4) Cic., Marcell. 4.12. (5) Cic., Verr. 2.4.54. (6) Hor., Sat. 2.7.22â€“24. (7) Sen., Ep. 8.1. (8) Sen., Ep. 17.5. (9) Cic., Fin. 3.1.2. (10) Sen., Ep. 8.5. (11) Sen., Ep. 18.14, De Ira 1.1.2; cf. Capvt XVI S.A.8. (12). Sen., Ep. 18.15. (13) Sen., Ep. 115.16. (14) Hor., Carm. 3.11.45. (15) Cic., Pis. 10.22.

(1) Cic., Cat. 4.1. (2) Hor., Sat. 2.6.41. (3) Phaedr., Fab. I. Prologus 4. (4) Cic., Tusc. 5.3.9. (5) Hor., Sat. 2.7.84 and 88. (6) Nep., Cim. 4. (7) Hor., Epist. 1.2.56. (8) Sen., Ep. 94.43. (9) Publil. Syr., 56. (10) Publil. Syr. 697. (11) Sen., Clem. 1.2.2.

(1) Cic., Amic. 15.54. (2) Ter., Heaut. 2.3.295â€“296. (3) Ter., Ad. 5.9.961. (4) Hor., Sat. 1.4.114. (5) Proverbial; cf. Cic., Phil. 12.2.5. (6) Hor., Carm. 2.16.27â€“28. (7) Sen., De Ira II 18ff. and III init.; cf. Ter., Phor. 1.4.185. (8) Verg., Ecl. 5.61. (9) Hor., Sat. 1.1.25. (10) Ter., Ad. 4.5.701â€“702. (11) Catull. 5.7. (12) Vulg., Eccles. 1.15. (13) Cic., Amic. 21.79. (14) Pers., Sat. 6.27. (15) Cic., Cat. 1.4.9.

(1) Cic., Cat. 1.9.23. (2) Cic., Cat. 1.13.31. (3) Cic., Off. 1.20.68. (4) Ov., Her. 3.85. (5) Cic., Fam. 14.3.1 (6) Ter., Ad. 5.8.937. (7) Ter., Ad. 5.9.992â€“993. (8) Cic., Att. 2.2. (9) Sen., Cons. Polyb. 9.6. (10) Ter., Ad. 5.8.937. (11) Sen., Ep. 17.5. (12) Verg., Ecl. 5.78. (13) Hor., Epist. 2.3.445â€“446 (Ars Poetica).

(1) Cic., Tusc. 5.20.57. (2) Cic., Tusc. 5.21.61. (3) Cic., Cat. 3.1.3. (4) Cic., Cat. 3.12.29. (5) Cic., Cat. 1.6.13. (6) Liv. 21.1.2. (7) Cic., Arch. 3.5. (8) Sen., Ep. 73.16. (9) Publil. Syr. 302. (10) Publil. Syr. 282.

(1) Ter., Heaut. 1.1.77. (2) Vulg., Eccles. 1.10. (3) Hor., Carm. 3.1.2â€“4. (4) Hor., Sat. 2.7.22â€“23. (5) Hor., Epist. 1.16.52. (6) Mart. 12.6.11â€“12. (7) Hor., Sat. 1.6.15â€“16. (8) Cic.; cf. graffiti. (9) Sen., Ep. 82.2. (10) Cic., Phil. 10.10.20. (11) Hor., Sat. 1.9.59â€“60. (12) Cic., Cat. 3.12.29. (13) Vulg., Luke 2.14.

(1) Ter., Ad. 5.4.863. (2) Ter., Heaut. 3.1.432. (3) Laberius; see Macrob. 2.7. (4) Cic., Cat. 3.1.3. (5) Publil. Syr. 507; also Macrob. 2.7. (6) Sen., Ep. 8.3. (7) Catull. 49. (8) Liv. 26.50.1. (9) Cic., Tusc. 1.42.98. (10) Cic., Arch. 11.26. (11) Cic., Marcell. 5.15. (12) Hor., Epist. 2.2.65â€“66. (13) Hor., Epist. 1.2.1â€“2. (14) Sen., Ep. 106.12. (15) Sen., Ep. 7.8. (16) Liv. 22.39.21.

(1) Ter., Phor. 4.5.727. (2) Ter., Phor. 4.3.670. (3) Ter., Heaut. 4.3.709. (4) Cic., Amic. 27.102. (5) Ter., Phor. 3.3.539. (6) Cic., Cat. 1.13.31. (7) Cic., Cat. 1.4.9. (8) Mart. 10.72.4. (9) Liv. 22.39.10.

(1) Cic., Off. 1.20.68. (2) Ter., Ad. 4.3.593. (3) Ter., Ad. 3.2.340. (4) Mart. 6.70.15. (5) Cic., Clu. 18.51. (6) Lucr. 6.93â€“95. (7) Pers. 5.153. (8) Hor., Epod. 13.3â€“4. (9) Cic., Sen. 19.67. (10) Verg., Georg. 3.284. (11) Verg., Aen. 3.395. (12) Publil. Syr. 764. (13) Cic., Amic. 24.89.

(1) Hor., Sat. 2.5.33. (2) Ter., Ad. 1.1.49. (3) Plin., Ep. 1.11.1. (4) Plin., Ep. 5.18.1. (5) Ter., Hec. 1.2.197. (6) Cic., Cat. 1.8.20. (7) Cic., Marcell. 11.33. (8) Cic., Fam. 1.5.b.2. (9) Liv. 120. (10) Hor., Epist. 2.2.58. (11) Mart. 12.47. (12) Cic., Amic. 21.80.

(1) Vulg., Gen. 1.1 and 27. (2) Suet., Caes. 37. (3) Ter., Hec. 3.5.461. (4) Cic., Sen. 19.68. (5) Sen., Brev. Vit.; see Duff, Silver Age p. 216. (6) Ter., Phor. 2.1.302. (7) Cic., Sen. 7.22. (8) Cic., Off. 1.24.84. (9) Tac., Ann. 1.1.1. (10) Laber. in Macrob. 2.7.

(1) Caes., B Gall. 1.21. (2) Cic., Sull. 24.67. (3) Cic. Cat. 3.10. (4) Cic., Amic. 21.80. (5) Publil. Syr. 206. (6) Sen., Ep. 7.8. (7) Sen., Ep. 80.3. (8) Phaedr. 4.21.1.

(1) Vulg., Gen. 1.10. (2) Lucr. 5.822â€“823. (3) Verg., Ecl. 2.33. (4) Hor., Sat. 1.1.33â€“34. (5) Ter., Phor. 3.2.506. (6) Hor., Carm. 3.1.13. (7) Ennius in Cic., Rep. 3.3.6. (8) Sall., Cat. 3.4. (9) Hor., Carm. 3.30.6â€“7. (10) Hor., Epist. 2.3.268â€“269. (11) Cic., Sen. 6.17. (12) Hor., Epist. 1.11.27.

(1) Ter., Hec. 3.4.421â€“422. (2) Cic., Fam. 16.9.2. (3) Cic., Arch. 3.5. (4) Tac., Ann. 12.32. (5) Cic., Cat. 3.2.3. (6) Cic., Verr. 2.5.62. (7) Catull. 3.5 and 10. (8) Ter., Ad. 5.4 passim. (9) Cic., Tusc. 5.20.58.

(1) Phaedr., 3.7.1. (2) Verg., G. 1.145. (3) Ter., Phor. 1.4.203. (4) Cic., Or. 59.200. (5) Verg., Aen. 3.657â€“658. (6) Verg., Aen. 4.569â€“570. (7) Mart. 7.85.3â€“4. (8) Hor., Epist. 1.2.62; cf. Capvt II S.A. 11. (9) Servius on Aen. 1.683. (10) Hor., Carm. 2.16.27â€“28. (11) Phaedr., Fab. 1. Prologus 3â€“4. (12) Cic., Leg. 1.22.58. (13) Sen., Clem. 1.19.6. (14) Sen. Brev. Vit. (15) Cic., Sen. 19.70. (16) Vell. 2.66.3 (cf. Duff., Silver Age p. 91).

(1) Ter., Phor. 2.1.287â€“288. (2) Cic., N.D. 3.34.83. (3) Cic., Cat. 1.12.30. (4) Publil. Syr. 321. (5) Hor., Epist. 1.2.40â€“41. (6) Publil. Syr. 353. (7) Publil. Syr. 232. (8) Cic., Amic. 15.54. (9) Publil. Syr. 86. (10) Cic., Amic. 25.92. (11) Cic., Amic. 27.102. (12) Sen., Ep. 7.1 and 8.

(1) Verg., Aen. 5.231. (2) Tac., Ann. 15.59. (3) Cic., Cat. 1.3.6. (4) Publil. Syr. 393. (5) Ov., Met. 4.428. (6) Plin., Ep. 9.6.1. (7) Cic., Fam. 9.20.3. (8) Lucr. 3.830â€“831. (9) Publil. Syr. 37. (10) Cic., Marcell. 2.7. (11) Ennius (See Duff, Golden Age p. 148.) (12) Hor., Sat. 1.2.11. (13) Juv. 1.74.

(1) Lucr. 1.112. (2) Cic., Cat. 3.5.13. (3) Cic., Sest. 67.141. (4) Ter., Hec. 1.2.132. (5) Cic., Cat. 1.4.9. (6) Cic., Planc. 33.80. (7) Cic., Amic. 15.55.

(1) Mart. 13.94.1. (2) Cic., Fin. 5.29.87. (3) Cic., Amic. 12.42. (4) Cic., De Or. 1.61.261. (5) Hor., Carm. 1.38.1. (6) Hor., Sat. 1.3.66. (7) Cic., Sen. 5.15. (8) Sen., Clem. 1.6.2â€“3. (9) Cic., Off. 1.2.4. (10) Quint., Inst. 8.3.41. (11) Hor., Carm. 1.22.1â€“2. (12) Cic., Fam. 16.9.3. (13) Cic., Cat. 3.5.10.

(1) Publil. Syr. 507. (2) Mart. 1.86.1â€“2. (3) Cic., Cat. 1.11.27. (4) Hor., Epod. 16.1â€“2. (5) Cic., Amic. 6.22. (6) Cic., Sen. 19.69. (7) Cic., N.D. 2.62.154. (8) Cic., Sen. 17.59. (9) Phaedr., App. 27. (10) Vulg., Job 28.12. (11) Liv., 22.39.19.

(1) Cic., Att. 9.10.3. (2) Hor., Carm. 2.3.1â€“2. (3) Cic., Rep. 3.31. (4) Cic., Cat. 1.1.3. (5) Cic., Marcell. 10.32. (6) Cic., Cat. 1.12.30. (7) Cic., Cat. 3.1.1. (8) Liv. 32.33.10. (9) Plaut., Aul. 4.10.772. (10) Cic., Amic. 17.64. (11) Hor., Epist. 2.3.148â€“149. (12) Verg., Georg. 2.490 and 493. (13) Sen., Ep. 17.12. (14) Hor., Epist. 1.1.19. (15) Hor., Sat. 1.1.106â€“107. (16) Mart. 10.76.1

(1) Cic., Cat. 1.2.6. (2) Liv. 44.42.4. (3) Hor., Sat. 1.1.68â€“69. (4) Cic., N.D. 2.4.12. (5) Hor., Epist. 2.1.156. (6) Nep., Att. 4. (7) Quint., Inst. Praef. 5. (8) Hor., Sat. 1.10.72. (9) Quint., Inst. 11.3.157. (10) Cic., N.D. 3.33.82. (11) Cic., Sen. 3.9. (12) Hor., Epist. 1.16.66. (13) Sen., Ep. 61.3. (14) Hor., Epist. 1.18.71.

(1) Cf. Plutarch, Cato ad fin. (2) Plin., HN 33.148. (3) Caes., B Civ. 2.43. (4) Cic., Rosc. Am. 1.3. (5) Cic., Marcell. 8.24. (6) Hor., Carm. 3.14.14â€“16. (7) Cic., Rep. 2.30. (8) Tac., Dial. 5. (9) Caes., B. Gall. 2.20

(1) Ter., Heaut. Prolog. 18. (2) Cic., 1.11.27. (3) Cic., Cat. 1.11.27. (4) Cic., Cat. 3.2.4. (5) Cic., Cat. 4.10.22. (6) Cic., Off. 1.1.1. (7) Ter., Phor. 4.1.581â€“582. (8) Cic., Sen. 16.56. (9) Ennius in Cic., Div. 2.56.116. (10) Cic., Tusc. 1.42.101. (11) Cic., Tusc. 5.37.108. (12) Cic., quoted in Dumesnilâ€™s Lat. Synonyms s.v. abnuere. (13) Cic., Tusc., 5.40.118. (14) Cic., Sen. 21.77. (15) Cic., Sen. 19.68. (16) Plin., Ep. 7.9.15.

(1) Cic., Sen. 16.55. (2) Cic., Cat. 1.3.6. (3) Sen., Controv. 6.7.2; Publil. Syr. 253. (4) Cic., Cat. 3.1.5. (5) Sen., Ep. 61.3. (6) Ov., Her. 17.71â€“72. (7) Hor., Epod. 2.1,7,8. (8) Cic., Amic. 26.99. (9) Cic., Sen. 19.68. (10) Mart. 1.107.1â€“2. (11) Mart. 14.208. (12) Cic., Off. 1.22.74. (13) Catull. 12.

(1) Ov., Met. 7.21â€“22. (2) Mart. 1.16.1. (3) Ter., Ad. 5.5.884, 5.7.922. (4) Plin., Ep. 10.88. (5) Cic., Sen. 6.19. (6) Cic., Off. 1.22.78. (7) Cic., Off. 1.22.77. (8) Cic., Sen. 2.5. (9) Sen., Ep. 17.9. (10) See Capvt IV S.A.7. (11) Cic., Marcell. 3.8. (12) Cic., Tusc. 5.20.57â€“5.21.62. (13) Verg., Aen. 7.312.

(1) Liv. 22.39.21. (2) Cic., Off. 1.22.77. (3) Cic., Cat. 1.7.18. (4) Ter., Phor. 5.5.831. (5) Hor., Epod. 13.3â€“4. (6) Sen., Ep. 80.3. (7) Sen. (8) Diog. Laert.: a Latin translation from his Greek. (9) Quint., Inst. 2.2.5. (10) Cic., Amic. 24.89. (11) Ov., Ars Am. 1.97. (12) Verg., Aen. 1.1â€“2.

(1) Verg., Ecl. 10.69. (2) Verg., Aen. 4.653, 655 (3) Ter., Phor. 3.2.497â€“498. (4) Hor., Epist. 1.1.40. (5) Juv. 1.30. (6) Cic., Cat. 1.1.3. (7) Cic., Phil. 10.10.20. (8) Cic., Phil. 4.5.9. (9) Nep., Milt. 5. (10) Cic., De Or. 1.61.260. (11) Hor., Ars. P. (Epist. 2.3) 335â€“336. (12) Ter., Heaut. 4.2.675. (13) Cic., Off. 1.23.80. (14) Cic., Amic. 9.29.

(1) Cic., Cat. 4.3.6. (2) Phaedr. 3.7.1. (3) Hor., Sat. 1.5.67â€“68. (4) Verg., Ecl. 8.43. (5) Hor., Sat. 1.4.16. (6) Cic., Marcell. 10.30. (7) Lucr. 1.55â€“56. (8) Lucr. 2.4. (9) Hor., Epist. 1.2.1â€“4. (10) Hor., Epist. 1.18.96â€“97, 100â€“101. (11) Sen., Ep. 115.14. (12) Prop. 2.15.29â€“30. (13) Cic., Tusc. 1.41.99.

(1) Cic., Cat. 1.6.15. (2) Cic., Amic. 12.42. (3) Cic., Cat. 1.5.10 and 1.9.23. (4) Hor., Carm. 1.14.1â€“2. (5) Cic., Marcell. 7.22. (6) Cic., Q. Fr. 1.2.4.14. (7) Cic., Cat. 3.5.12. (8) Cic., Sen. 10.33. (9) Liv. 45.8. (10) Ter., Ad. 2.1.155. (11) Ter., Phor. 1.2.137â€“138. 12. Cic., Cluent. 53.146.

(1) Publil. Syr. 512. (2) Cic., Cat. 1.5.10. (3) Hor., Epist. 1.6.29. (4) Ter., Ad. 5.9.996. (5) Ter., Heaut. 4.1.622. (6) Cic., Sen. 3.7. (7) Ter., Ad. 4.5.701. (8) Caes., B Gall. 3.18. (9) Plaut., Trin. 2.2.361. (10) Publil. Syr. 129. (11) Sall., Cat. 8. (12) Cic., Fin. 3.7.26. (13) See Capvt XVIII S.A. 11. (14) Sen., Ep. 80.6. (15) Hor., Sat. 1.1.25â€“26. 16. Hor., Epist. 2.3.102â€“103 (Ars Poetica).

(1) Veg., Mil. Prolog. 3. (2) Cic., Off. 1.22.76. (3) Cic., Sull. 31.87. (4) Cic., Q. Fr. 1.3.5. (5) Phaedr. App. 18. (6) Hor., Sat. 2.7.22â€“24. (7) Publil. Syr. 412. (8) Hor., Carm. 4.10.6. (9) Juv. 3.152â€“153. (10) Cic., Cat. 1.5.10. (11) Quint., Inst. 4.5.13.

(1) Verg., Aen. 3.188. (2) Hor., Sat. 1.3.68â€“69. (3) Cic., N.D. 2.62.154. (4) Cf. Sen., De Ira 2.9.1 and Cic., Tusc. 3.9.19. (5) Cic., Cat. 1.5.10. (6) Hor., Carm. 3.16.17. (7) Cic., Fam. 7.10.1. (8) Publil. Syr. 350. (9) Mart. Bk. I Praef. 1â€“2. (10) Cic., Sen. 19.69. (11) Ter., Heaut. 1.2.239â€“240. (12) Cic., Amic. 6.22. (13) Cic., De Or. 2.67.274. (14) Verg., Aen. 1.199.

(1) Sen., cf. Ep. 8.7; and Hor., Sat. 2.7.83 ff. and Epist. 1.16.66. (2) Publil. Syr. 290. (3) Publil. Syr. 99. (4) Hor., Sat. 1.1.86â€“87. (5) Cic., Fin. 1.18.60, 4.24.65; De Or. 1.3.10 et passim. (6) Publil. Syr. 767 and 493. (7) Vulg., Gen. 1.26. (8) Cic., Rep. 2.24.59. (9) Caes., B Gall. 4.23 and 5.45. (10) Quint., Inst. 10.1.112. (11) Hor., Epist. 2.2.41â€“42. (12) Publil. Syr. 687. (13) Hor., Sat. 2.2.135â€“136. (14) Verg., Aen. 1.630. (15) Publil. Syr. 288. (16) Aug., Conf. 10.20.29. (17) Plaut. Pers. 3.1.332.

(1) Vulg., Gen. 1.3. (2) Lucr. 1.205. (3) Ter., Heaut. 2.3.314. (4) Caes., B Civ. 2.43. (5) Ter., Ad. 3.4.505. (6) Ter., Heaut. 5.5.1049 and 1067. (7) Hor., Carm. 1.11.7â€“8. (8) Pers. 5.151â€“152. (9) Sen., Ep. 61.2. (10) Cic., Sen. 8.26. (11) Hor., Epist. 2.2.206â€“211. (12) Hor., Carm. 1.24.19â€“20. (13) Ov., Am. 1.2.10. (14) Cic., Amic. 5.7. (15) Cic., Arch. 2.3. (16) Pseudo-Sen., Proverbs 104. (17) Publil. Syr. 107.

(1) Hor., Epist. 2.3.68. (2) Verg., Aen. 6.127. (3) Ov., Ars Am. 3.62â€“65. (4) Ter., Hec. 1.2.132; Ad. 1.1.26. (5) Ter., Ad. 5.5.882. (6) Ter., Ad. 4.1.517, 4.2.556. (7) Hor., Sat. 1.9.1. (8) Cic., Tusc. 5.21.62. (9) Cic., Verr. 2.4.54.120. (10) Ter., Hec. 3.4.421 and 423. (11) Cic., Cat. 1.9.23. (12) Nep., Att. 8; Cic., Phil. 2.12.28, Tusc. 5.37.109 (names changed). (13) Cic., Att. 12.50. (14) Cic., Sen. 7.24. (15) Prop., 2.15.23â€“24. (16) Ter., An. 64â€“65.

(1) Caes., B Gall. 1.31. (2) Cic., Cat. 1.4.9. (3) Cat., 4.7.16. (4) Cic., Amic. 7.23. (5) Cic., Cat. 1.6.13. (6) Cic., Amic. 15.53. (7) Cic., Cat. 1.7.18. (8) Cic., Cat. 4.11.24. (9) Verg., Ecl. 1.7. (10) Cic., Fam. 4.5.6. (11) Sen., Ep. 17.11. (12) Cic., Marcell. 4.11. (13) Plin., Ep. 5.16.4â€“5. (14) Hor., Carm. 1.37.1â€“2. (15) Ov., Am. 1.11.18. (16) Plaut., Stich. 139.

(1) Cic., Cat. 1.12.30. (2) Cic., Cat. 1.13.32. (3) Cic., Off. 1.22.74. (4) Publil. Syr. 762. (5) Cic., Off. 1.25.89. (6) Cic., Verr. 2.4.54. (7) Cic., Off. 3.32.113. (8) Cic., Sest. 2.5 (9) Cic., Sen. 5.15. (10) Cic., Att. 2.23.1. (11) Publil. Syr. 704. (12) Cic., Leg. 1.23.60. (13) Verg., Aen. 4.175. (14) Cic., Fam. 5.12.4. (15) Cic., De Or. 2.87.3.

(1) Cic., Cat. 4.7.14. (2) Hor., Carm. 3.30.6â€“7. (3) Cic., Tusc. 1.41.97. (4) Ter., Ad. 5.4.856. (5) Sen., Ep. 7.7. (6) Plin., Ep. 9.6.2. (7) Lucr. 4.1286â€“87. (8) Cic., Fam. 14.12. (9) Liv.: see Loci Im. XVII. (10) Cic., Marcell. 10.32. (11) Catull. 43.1â€“3. (12) Ter., Heaut. 1.1.77. (13) Cic., Amic. 21.81. (14) Vulg., Exod. 20.11. (15) Caes., B Gall. 1.47. (16) Cic., Cat. 1.4.8. (17) Cic., Planc. 42.101.

ABOUT THE AUTHORS

Frederic M. Wheelock (1902â€“1987) received the A.B., A.M., and Ph.D. degrees from Harvard University. His long and distinguished teaching career included appointments at Haverford College, Harvard University, the College of the City of New York, Brooklyn College, Cazenovia Junior College (where he served as Dean), the Darrow School for Boys (New Lebanon, NY), the University of Toledo (from which he retired as full Professor in 1968), and a visiting professorship at Florida Presbyterian (now Eckerd) College. He published a number of articles and reviews in the fields of textual criticism, palaeography, and the study of Latin; in addition to Wheelockâ€™s Latin (previously titled Latin: An Introductory Course Based on Ancient Authors), his books include Wheelockâ€™s Latin Reader (previously titled Latin Literature: A Book of Readings) and Quintilian as Educator (trans. H. E. Butler; introd. and notes by Prof. Wheelock). Professor Wheelock was a member of the American Classical League, the American Philological Association, and the Classical Association of the Atlantic States. Biographies of Dr. Wheelock authored by Professor Ward Briggs appear in his book, A Biographical Dictionary of American Classicists (Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1994), as well as in the Winter, 2003, issue of The Classical Outlook. Frederic retired to Amherst, New Hampshire, and then to Kent, Connecticut with his beloved wife of 50 years, Dorothy Rathbone Wheelock. He is survived by his two daughters, Martha Wheelock and Deborah Wheelock Taylor, who have continued his tradition as teachers, and by his two grandchildren, Vanessa Taylor Sands and Ian Taylor.

Richard A. LaFleur received the B.A. and M.A. in Latin from the University of Virginia and the Ph.D. in Classical Studies from Duke. He has taught since 1972 at the University of Georgia, where he served for 21 years as head of one of the largest Classics programs in North America and was appointed in 1998 to the chair of Franklin Professor of Classics. He has numerous publications in Latin language, literature, and pedagogy, including the books The Teaching of Latin in American Schools: A Profession in Crisis, Latin Poetry for the Beginning Student, Love and Transformation: An Ovid Reader, Latin for the 21st Century: From Concept to Classroom, A Song of War: Readings from Vergilâ€™s Aeneid (with Alexander G. McKay), Scribblers, Scvlptors, and Scribes, and the revised editions of Wheelockâ€™s Latin, Wheelockâ€™s Latin Reader, and (with Paul Comeau) Workbook for Wheelockâ€™s Latin.

Professor LaFleur served as editor of The Classical Outlook for nearly 25 years and is a past President of the American Classical League. He has been recipient of more than a million dollars in grants from the National Endowment for the Humanities and other agencies, and of state, regional, and national awards for teaching and professional service, including the American Philological Associationâ€™s award for Excellence in the Teaching of Classics. He has three children (Jean-Paul, Caroline, and Kimberley) and five grandchildren (Zachary, Jackson, Lucas, Anna Caroline, and Charlotte), and joyfully resides with his wife Alice in the home she designed for them on the banks of Lake Oglethorpe, near Athens, Georgia.

Visit www.AuthorTracker.com for exclusive information on your favorite HarperCollins authors.

The WHEELOCKâ€™S LATIN Series

Wheelockâ€™s Latin
Frederic M. Wheelock, revised by Richard A. LaFleur

Workbook for Wheelockâ€™s Latin
Paul Comeau, revised by Richard A. LaFleur

Wheelockâ€™s Latin Reader: Selections from Latin Literature
Frederic M. Wheelock, revised by Richard A. LaFleur

Scribblers, Scvlptors, and Scribes
Richard A. LaFleur

CREDITS

Cover design by Christine Van Bree

Copyright

Editorial consultant: Prof. Ward Briggs, University of South Carolina

WHEELOCKâ€™Sâ„¢ is a trademark of Martha Wheelock and Deborah Wheelock Taylor.

WHEELOCKâ€™S LATIN (SEVENTH EDITION). Copyright Â© 2011 by Frederic M. Wheelock, Martha Wheelock, and Deborah Wheelock Taylor. All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conventions. By payment of the required fees, you have been granted the nonexclusive, nontransferable right to access and read the text of this e-book on-screen. No part of this text may be reproduced, transmitted, downloaded, decompiled, reverse-engineered, or stored in or introduced into any information storage and retrieval system, in any form or by any means, whether electronic or mechanical, now known or hereinafter invented, without the express written permission of HarperCollins e-books.

Revision text copyright Â© 2011 by Richard A. LaFleur.

SEVENTH EDITION

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication data is available upon request.

ISBN 978-0-06-199722-8 (pbk.)

EPub Edition Â© JUNE 2011 ISBN: 9780062094827

Version 07132012

11 12 13 14 15

About the Publisher

Australia

HarperCollins Publishers (Australia) Pty. Ltd.

25 Ryde Road (P.O. Box 321)

Pymble, NSW 2073, Australia

www.harpercollins.com.au/ebooks

Canada

HarperCollins Canada

2 Bloor Street East - 20th Floor

Toronto, ON, M4W, 1A8, Canada

http://www.harpercollins.ca

New Zealand

HarperCollins Publishers (New Zealand) Limited

P.O. Box 1

Auckland, New Zealand

http://www.harpercollins.co.nz

United Kingdom

HarperCollins Publishers Ltd.

77-85 Fulham Palace Road

London, W6 8JB, UK

http://www.harpercollins.co.uk

United States

HarperCollins Publishers Inc.

10 East 53rd Street

New York, NY 10022

http://www.harpercollins.com

⁷ Note that many world languages (e.g., the Semitic languages, Egyptian, Basque, Chinese, the native languages of Africa and the Americas) lie outside the Indo-European family.

⁸ Thomas Wilson (16th century) says: âThe unlearned or foolish fantastical, that smells but of learning (such fellows as have been learned men in their days), will so Latin their tongues, that the simple cannot but wonder at their talk, and think surely they speak by some revelation.â Sir Thomas Browne (17th century) says: âIf elegancy still proceedeth, and English pens maintain that stream we have of late observed to flow from many, we shall within a few years be fain to learn Latin to understand English, and a work will prove of equal facility in either.â These statements are quoted by permission from the âBrief History of the English Languageâ by Hadley and Kittredge in Websterâs New International Dictionary, Second Edition, copyright, 1934, 1939, 1945, 1950, 1953, 1954, by G. & C. Merriam Co.

⁹ Called âincunabulaâ because they were made in the âcradle daysâ of printing. The type is called âRomanâ to distinguish it from the âblack-letterâ type which was used in northern Europe (cp. the German type). The Italian printers based their Roman type on that of the finest manuscripts of the period, those written for the wealthy, artistic, exacting Renaissance patrons. The scribes of those manuscripts, seeking the most attractive kind of script with which to please such patrons, found it in manuscripts written in the best Carolingian book-hand.

¹ I METER: choliambic. dÄsinÅ, -ere, -siÄ«, -situm, cease (dÄsinÄs = juss. subjunct. for dÄsine)

² ineptiÅ (4), play the fool

³ perdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, destroy, lose

⁴ fulgeÅ, -Äre, fulsÄ«, shine (fulsÄre = fulsÄrunt)

⁵ final -Ä« is long here because of meter.

⁶ ventitÅ (1), frequentative form of veniÅ, come often

⁷ quÅ, adv., whither, where

⁸ im-potÄ“ns, gen. -tentis, powerless, weak, hopelessly in love

⁹ sectÄre, imperat. of sector (1), follow eagerly, pursue; word order: sectÄre (eam) quae fugit

¹⁰ obstinÄtus, -a, -um, firm

¹¹ per-ferÅ, endure

¹² obdÅ«rÅ (1), verb of adj. dÅ«rus

¹³ invÄ«tus, -a, -um, unwilling

¹⁴ see notes on excerpt in Capvt XIX.
VOCÄBVLA: perdÅ, quÅ, invÄ«tus.

¹ II imitor, -ÄrÄ«, -Ätus sum

² con-cÄdÅ

³ impedÄ«mentum, -Ä«

⁴ dÄ«ligentia, -ae

⁵ industria, -ae

⁶ balbus, -a, -um, stuttering

⁷ illÄ«usâ€¦ artis, i.e., rhetoric

⁸ per-ficiÅ, do thoroughly, bring about, accomplish

⁹ meditor (1), practice

¹⁰ plÄnius, compar. of adv. plÄnÄ

¹¹ angustus, -a, -um, narrow, short

¹² con-iciÅ (iaciÅ)

¹³ calculus, -Ä«, pebble

¹⁴ cÅnsuÄscÅ, -ere, -suÄvÄ«, -suÄtum, become accustomed VOCÄBVLA: concÄdÅ, perficiÅ, angustus, coniciÅ, cÅnsuÄscÅ.

¹ III SyrÄcÅ«sÄnÄ«, -Årum, Syracusans

² temperantia, -ae

³ vÄ«ctus, -Å«s, mode of life

⁴ industrius, -a, -um

⁵ in-iÅ«stus, -a, -um

⁶ dominÄtus, -Å«s, absolute rule or power

⁷ carcer, -eris, m., prison

⁸ inclÅ«dÅ, -ere, -clÅ«sÄ«, -clÅ«sum, shut in

⁹ quÄ«n etiam, moreover

¹⁰ tÅnsor, -Åris, m., barber

¹¹ collum, -Ä«, neck

¹² doceÅ may take two objects.

¹³ tondeÅ, -Äre, totondÄ«, tÅnsum, shear, clip

¹⁴ barba, -ae, beard

¹⁵ capillus, -Ä«, hair

¹⁶ adultus, -a, -um

¹⁷ carbÅ, -Ånis, m., glowing coal

¹⁸ adÅ«rÅ, -ere, -ussÄ«, -ustum, singe
VOCÄBVLA: temperantia, iniÅ«stus, inclÅ«dÅ.

¹ IV assentÄtor, -Åris, m., flatterer, âyes-manâ

² DÄmoclÄs, -is, m.

³ commemorÅ (1), mention, recount

⁴ maiestÄs, -tÄtis, f., greatness

⁵ abundantia, -ae

⁶ quisquam, quidquam, anyone, anything

⁷ dÄgustÅ (1), taste, try

⁸ aureus, -a, -um, golden

⁹ lectus, -Ä«, couch

¹⁰ col-locÅ, place

¹¹ argentum, -Ä«, silver

¹² aurum, -Ä«, gold

¹³ exquÄ«sÄ«tus, -a, -um: ex-quaesÄ«tus

¹⁴ suprÄ, adv. and prep. + acc., above

¹⁵ saetÄ equÄ«nÄ, by a horsehair

¹⁶ dÄmittÅ, let down

¹⁷ aliquÄ«, -qua, -quod, adj. of aliquis

¹⁸ impendeÅ, -Äre, hang over, threaten
VOCÄBVLA: quisquam, collocÅ, aurum, suprÄ.

¹ V contemplÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f.

² PthagorÄs, -ae, m.

³ mÄnÅ (1), flow, extend

⁴ cÅpiÅsÄ, adv., fully

⁵ LeÅn, -ontis, m., ruler of Phlius

⁶ disputÅ (1), discuss

⁷ Ä“loquentia, -ae

⁸ admÄ«ror (1), wonder at, admire

⁹ nihilum, -Ä«, = nihil

¹⁰ studiÅsus, -a, -um, fond of

¹¹ philosophus: Gk. philos, fond of, + sophia, wisdom

¹² inventor, -Åris, m., cf. inveniÅ

¹³ SÅcratÄs, -is

¹⁴ tractÅ (1), handle, investigate, treat

¹⁵ orior, -Ä«rÄ«, ortus sum, arise, proceed, originate

¹⁶ quÅ, adv., where
VOCÄBVLA: admÄ«ror, orior, quÅ.

¹ VI equidem, adv., indeed

² excipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpi, -ceptum, except

³ potestÄs, -tÄtis, f., power

⁴ vicissitÅ«dÅ, -inis, f.

⁵ opportÅ«nus, -a, -um, suitable

⁶ singulus, -a, -um, single, separate

⁷ exclÅ«dÅ, -ere, -clÅ«sÄ«, -clÅ«sum

⁸ intempestÄ«vus, -a, -um, unseasonable

⁹ molestus, -a, -um, troublesome

¹⁰ abundantia, -ae

¹¹ quemquam, LocÄ« Ant. IV, n. 6

¹² cÄritÄs, -tÄtis, f., affection

¹³ bene-volentia, -ae, goodwill

¹⁴ dÄ«ligat, deliberative subjunct., would esteem

¹⁵ inops, -opis, bereft of

¹⁶ supellex, -lectilis, f., furniture

¹⁷ mercÄ“s, -Ä“dis, f., pay, reward

¹⁸ trÄns-ferÅ, transfer, direct

¹⁹ habÄre quÄ«cum = habÄre eum cum quÅ
VOCÄBVLA: equidem, potestÄs, trÄnsferÅ.

¹ VII adversus, prep. + acc., toward

² dÄcertÅ (1), fight (to a decision)

³ disputÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., discussion

⁴ proprius, -a, -um, characteristic of

⁵ bÄ“lua, -ae, wild beast

⁶ crÅ«dÄ“lis, -e, cruel

⁷ SabÄ«nÄ«, -Årum

⁸ approbÅ (1), approve

⁹ sententiÄ: abl. here expressing accordance

¹⁰ aequitÄs, -tÄtis, f., fairness, justice

¹¹ fÄtiÄlis, -e, fetial, referring to a college of priests who were concerned with treaties and the ritual of declaring war

¹² per-scrÄ«bÅ, write out, place on record

¹³ re-petÅ, seek again

¹⁴ dÄnÅ«ntiÅ (1), declare officially

¹⁵ extrÄ, prep. + acc., beyond

¹⁶ ulcÄ«scor, -Ä«, ultus sum, avenge, punish

¹⁷ prÅpulsÅ (1), repel

¹⁸ socius, -iÄ«, ally

¹⁹ terrÄrum: depends on potÄ«tus est

²⁰ potior, -irÄ«, potÄ«tus sum, + gen. (or abl.), get possession of
VOCÄBVLA: dÄcertÅ, proprius, crÅ«dÄlis, potior.

¹ VIII Hannibal, -alis, m., illustrious general who led the Carthaginian forces against the Romans in the Second Punic (= Carthaginian) War, 218â€“202 B.C.

² Hamilcar, -aris, m.

³ dÄ-pÅnÅ

⁴ PÅ«nicus, -a, -um

⁵ bellum Ä«n-ferÅ, make war on

⁶ Syria, -ae

⁷ Antiochus, -Ä«

⁸ in-dÅ«cÅ

⁹ HispÄnia, -ae, Spain

¹⁰ sacrificium, -iÄ«

¹¹ Ära, -ae, altar

¹² iÅ«rÅ (1), swear

¹³ iÅ«s iÅ«randum, iÅ«ris iÅ«randÄ«, n., oath

¹⁴ Hasdrubal, -alis, m., next in command after Hamilcar

¹⁵ Ä€frica, -ae

¹⁶ AlpÄ“s, -ium, f. pl., the Alps

¹⁷ AlpicÄ«, -Årum, men of the Alps

¹⁸ occÄ«dÅ, -ere, -cÄ«dÄ«, -cÄ«sum, cut down

¹⁹ mÅ«niÅ (4), fortify, build

²⁰ efficiÅ, bring it about, cause

²¹ utâ€¦ posset: noun clause of result, obj. of effÄ“cit

²² quÄ, adv., where

²³ anteÄ, adv., before, formerly

²⁴ vix, adv., scarcely

²⁵ rÄpÅ, -ere, rÄpsÄ«, rÄptum, crawl

²⁶ ScÄ«piÅ, -Ånis, m., father of the Scipio mentioned below

²⁷ EtrÅ«ria, -ae, district north of Rome, Tuscany

²⁸ morbus, -Ä«, disease

²⁹ adficiÅ, afflict

³⁰ proelium, -iÄ«, battle

³¹ ÄnumerÅ (1)

³² CannÄ“nsis pugna, battle at Cannae, where in 216 B.C. Hannibal cut the Roman army to shreds

³³ aciÄ“s, -Ä“Ä«, battle line

³⁴ resistÅ, -ere, -stitÄ«, + dat., resist

³⁵ tandem, adv., at last, finally

³⁶ invÄdÅ, -ere, -vÄsÄ«, -vÄsum, go into, invade

³⁷ Zama, -ae, city south of Carthage in North Africa
VOCÄBVLA: occÄ«dÅ, efficiÅ, quÄ, anteÄ, vix, proelium, tandem.

¹ IX fors, fortis, f., chance, accident

² MaecÄnÄs, -Ätis, m., Augustusâ unofficial prime minister and Horaceâs patron

³ Varius, -iÄ«, an epic poet

⁴ singultim, adv., stammeringly

⁵ pudor, -Åris, m., bashfulness, modesty

⁶ profor (1), speak out

⁷ respondÄs, abeÅ, revocÄs, iubÄs: in vivid narration the pres. tense was often used by the Romans with the force of the perf. This is called the âhistorical pres.â

⁸ mÄ“nsis, -is, m., month

⁹ quod, the fact that

¹⁰ sÄcernÅ, -ere, -crÄvÄ«, -crÄtum, separate

¹¹ pÅ«rus, -a, -um

¹² atquÄ«, conj., and yet

¹³ mendÅsus, -a, -um, faulty

¹⁴ aliÅquÄ«, adv., otherwise

¹⁵ rÄ“ctus, -a, -um, straight, right

¹⁶ sordÄ“s, -ium, f. pl., filth

¹⁷ quisquam, anyone

¹⁸ ob-iciÅ, cast in oneâs teeth

¹⁹ Ä«nsÅns, gen. -ontis, guiltless

²⁰ FlÄvius, -iÄ«, teacher in Horaceâs small home town of Venusia

²¹ senÄtor, -Åris, m.

²² paedagÅgus, -Ä«, slave who attended a boy at school

²³ in-corruptus, -a, -um, uncorrupted

²⁴ opprobrium, -iÄ«, reproach

²⁵ grÄtia, -ae, gratitude

²⁶ nÅ«triÅ (4), nourish, bring up

²⁷ quantum, acc. as adv.

²⁸ ad-iciÅ, add

²⁹ scÄ«licet (scÄ«re-licet), adv., naturally, of course, clearly, namely

³⁰ curvus, -a, -um, curved, wrong

³¹ distinguÅ, -ere, -stÄ«nxÄ«, -stÄ«nctum, distinguish

³² silva, -ae, wood, forest

³³ AcadÄ“mus, -Ä«; Plato used to teach in the grove of Academus.

³⁴ aestus, -Å«s, tide

³⁵ cÄ«vÄ«lis, -e; after the assassination of Julius Caesar on the Ides of March, 44 B.C., civil war ensued between the Caesarians, led by Antony and Octavian, and the âRepublicans,â led by Brutus and Cassius.

³⁶ BrÅ«tus, -Ä«

³⁷ PhilippÄ“nsis, -e, at Philippi, where in 42 B.C. Brutus was defeated

³⁸ dÄ«-mittÅ, discharge

³⁹ audÄx, -Äcis, daring, bold
VOCÄBVLA: sÄcernÅ, quisquam, grÄtia, silva, audÄx.

¹ X aspiciÅ, -ere, -spexÄ«, -spectum, look at, see

² sollicitus, -a, -um, troubled, anxious

³ sermÅ, -Ånis, m., conversation

⁴ orior, LocÄ« Ant. V n. 15

⁵ vÄ«lla, -ae

⁶ aliÄ“nus, -a, -um, belonging to another

⁷ per-tineÅ, pertain

⁸ Å«sus, -Å«s, advantage

⁹ rÄ“ctum, -Ä«, the right

¹⁰ bonum, -Ä«, the good

¹¹ Cervius, -iÄ«, a rustic friend

¹² mÅ«s, mÅ«ris, m / f., mouse

¹³ rÅ«sticus, -a, -um, rustic, country

¹⁴ im-pellÅ, urge, persuade

¹⁵ necessÄrius, -a, -um

¹⁶ cavus, -Ä«, hole

¹⁷ tÅ«tus, -a, -um, safe
VOCÄBVLA: aspiciÅ, orior, tÅ«tus.

¹ XIC. = GÄius

² Fabius, -iÄ«

³ S. = salÅ«tem (dÄ«cit)

⁴ epistula, -ae, letter

⁵ vel, or, an optional alternative; aut means or without any option

⁶ sufficiÅ, suffice, be sufficient

⁷ lÅ«dÅ, -ere, lÅ«sÄ«, lÅ«sum, play, jest

⁸ sÄriÅ, adv., seriously
VOCÄBVLA: vel, sufficiÅ.

¹ XII Calvisius, -Ä«

² tabella, -ae, writing pad

³ quiÄ“s, -Ä“tis, f., quiet

⁴ quem-ad-modum, adv., how

⁵ CircÄ“nsÄ“s (lÅ«dÄ«), games, races in the Circus Maximus

⁶ spectÄculum, -Ä«

⁷ varius, -a, -um, different

⁸ puerÄ«liter, adv., based on puer

⁹ identidem, adv., repeatedly
VOCÄ€BVLA: quiÄ“s, quemadmodum, varius.

¹ XIII CÅmum, -Ä«, Como, Plinyâs birthplace in N. Italy

² salÅ«tÅ (1), greet

³ MediolÄnum, -Ä«, Milan

⁴ lÄ«berÄ«, -Årum, children

⁵ nÅndum, adv., not yet
VOCÄBVLA: lÄ«berÄ«, nÅndum.

¹ XIV METER: elegiac couplet. mÅ«nus, mÅ«neris, n., gift

² hÄmus, -Ä«, hook

³ piscÄtor, -Åris, m., fisherman

⁴ piscis, -is, m., fish
VOCÄ€BVLA: mÅ«nus.

¹ XV sÄ«cut, adv. and conj., just as

² hypocrita, -ae, m., hypocrite

³ synagÅga, -ae, synagogue

⁴ angulus, -Ä«, corner

⁵ platea, -ae, street

⁶ ÄmÄn, adv., truly, verily

⁷ mercÄ“s, -Ä“dis, f., wages, reward

⁸ intrÅ (1), enter

⁹ cubiculum, -Ä«, bedroom, room

¹⁰ claudÅ, -ere, clausÄ«, clausum, close

¹¹ Åstium, -iÄ«, door

¹² in absconditÅ, in (a) secret (place)

¹³ red-dÅ, -dere, -didÄ«, -ditum, give back, answer, requite

¹⁴ ergÅ, adv., therefore

¹⁵ sÄnctificÅ (1), treat as holy

¹⁶ rÄ“gnum, -Ä«, kingdom

¹⁷ voluntÄs, -tÄtis, f., will, wish

¹⁸ et, also

¹⁹ pÄnis, -is, m., bread

²⁰ supersubstantiÄlis, -e, necessary to the support of life

²¹ dÄ«-mittÅ, send away, dismiss

²² dÄ“bitum, -Ä«, that which is owing, debt (figuratively) = sin

²³ dÄbitor, -Åris, m., one who owes something, one who has not yet fulfilled his duty

²⁴ temptÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f.
VOCÄBVLA: sÄ«cut, claudÅ, reddÅ, ergÅ, rÄgnum, voluntÄs.

¹ XVI Caedmon, Anglo-Saxon poet of the 7th cent.

² angelus, -Ä«, angel

³ cantÅ (1), sing

⁴ creÄtÅ«ra, -ae, creature

⁵ statim, adv., immediately

⁶ creÄtor, -Åris, m.

⁷ rÄ“gnum, -Ä«, kingdom

⁸ caelestis, -e, adj. of caelum

⁹ potestÄs, -tÄtis, f., power

¹⁰ omni-potÄ“ns

¹¹ custÅs, -tÅdis, m., guardian

¹² ÅrdÅ, -inis, m., order

¹³ quamvÄ«s, adv. and conj., although

¹⁴ com-pÅnÅ, put together, compose

¹⁵ ad verbum, to a word, literally

¹⁶ dÄ“trÄ«mentum, -Ä«, loss

¹⁷ decor, -Åris, m., beauty

¹⁸ trÄns-ferÅ
VOCÄBVLA: statim, rÄgnum, potestÄs, custÅs, ÅrdÅ, compÅnÅ.

¹ XVII mÅ«s, mÅ«ris, m. / f., mouse

² cattus, -Ä« (late Lat. for fÄ“les, -is), cat

³ ligÅ (1), bind

⁴ campÄna, -ae (late Lat. for tintinnÄbulum), bell

⁵ collum, -Ä«, neck

⁶ audÄx, -Äcis, daring, bold

⁷ appropinquÅ (1), + dat., approach

⁸ Ä«nsurgÅ, -ere, -surrÄxÄ«, -surrÄctum, rise up

⁹ accÅ«sÅ (1)
VOCÄBVLA: audÄx, appropinquÅ.

¹ XVIII ecclÄ“sia, -ae, church

² scholÄris, -is, m., scholar

³ diÄ quÄdam: diÄs is sometimes f., esp. when referring to a specific day.

⁴ mÄteria, -ae, material

⁵ diabolus, -Ä«, devil

⁶ thema, -atis, n., theme, subject

⁷ quod, that, introducing an ind. state., common in Medieval Lat.

⁸ verbera, -um, n., blows, a beating

⁹ statim, adv., immediately

¹⁰ dictÅ (1), dictate

¹¹ excellentia, -ae

¹² dÄ«vÄ«nus, -a, -um; dÄ«vÄ«nam is pred. acc.

¹³ interrogÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f.

¹⁴ tandem, adv., at last

¹⁵ cÅnfiteor, -ÄrÄ«, -fessus sum

¹⁶ versificÄtor, -Åris, m., versifier

¹⁷ sÄductor, -Åris, m., seducer

¹⁸ caveÅ, -Äre, cÄvÄ«, cautum, beware, avoid
VOCÄBVLA: statim, tandem, cÅnfiteor, caveÅ.

¹ I METER: Phalaecean, or hendecasyllabic. dÅnÅ (1), (= dÅ), present, dedicate

² lepidus, -a, -um, pleasant, neat

³ Äridus, -a, -um, dry, arid

⁴ modo, adv., just now

⁵ pÅ«mex, -icis, m., pumice stone. The ends of a volume were smoothed with pumice.

⁶ expoliÅ (4), smooth, polish

⁷ Cornelius Nepos, biographer and historian; see Introd.

⁸ strong form of nam = for (indeed, surely)

⁹ nÅ«gae, -Ärum, trifles, nonsense

¹⁰ ÄªtalÄ«, -Årum, the Italians; initial i- long here for meter. This work, now lost, was apparently less annalistic than most histories by Romans.

¹¹ aevum, -Ä«, time

¹² explicÅ (1), unfold, explain

¹³ charta, -ae, leaf of (papyrus) paper; here = volume

¹⁴ labÅriÅsus, -a, -um, laborious

¹⁵ libellÄ«, gen. of whole; lit. whatever kind of book this is of whatsoever sort; i.e., this book such as it is. quÄliscumque, quÄlecumque, of whatever sort or kind

¹⁵ libellÄ«, gen. of whole; lit. whatever kind of book this is of whatsoever sort; i.e., this book such as it is. quÄliscumque, quÄlecumque, of whatever sort or kind

¹⁶ patrÅna, -ae, protectress; protectress maiden (virgÅ) = Muse

¹⁷ let or may it remain

¹⁸ perennis, -e, lasting, perennial

¹⁹ saeclum, syncopated form of saeculum, -Ä«, age, century

¹ II METER: Phalaecean. This poem is obviously a companion piece to Catullus 5 (see Capvt XXXI).

² bÄsiÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., kiss

³ and to spare, and more

⁴ Libyssus, -a, -um, Libyan

⁵ harÄ“na, -ae, sand (cf. arena)

⁶ laserpÄ«cifer, -a, -um, bearing laserpicium, a medicinal plant

⁷ CrÄnae, -Ärum, Cyrene, city of North Africa; short y here for meter.

⁸ fÅ«rtÄ«vus, -a, -um, stealthy, furtive (fÅ«r, thief)

⁹ subj. of bÄsiÄre

¹⁰ bÄsiÅ (1), to kiss kisses = to give kisses; bÄsiÄre is subj. of est satis.

¹¹ vÄsÄnus, -a, -um, mad, insane

¹ III METER: Phalaecean. lÅ«geÅ, -Äre, lÅ«xÄ«, lÅ«ctum, mourn, grieve

² Venus, -eris, f., Venus; here pl. as CupÄ«dinÄ“s is.

³ CupÄ«dÅ, -inis, m., Cupid, often in the pl. as is Gk. Eros and as we see in art.

⁴ gen. of whole with quantum: how much of people there is = all the people there are

⁵ venustus, -a, -um, charming, graceful; venustiÅrum = more charming (than ordinary men)

⁶ passer, -eris, m., sparrow (a bird which, incidentally, was sacred to Venus)

⁷ dÄliciae, -Ärum, delight, darling, pet

⁸ mellÄ«tus, -a, -um, sweet as honey

⁹ contracted form = nÅverat (from nÅscÅ)

¹⁰ suamâ€¦ ipsam, its very own (mistress)

¹¹ sÄ“sÄ“ = sÄ“ (acc.)

¹² gremium, -iÄ«, lap

¹³ circumsiliÅ (4), jump around

¹⁴ hÅ«c, adv., hither, to this place

¹⁵ illÅ«c, adv., thither, to that place

¹⁶ pÄ«piÅ (1), chirp

¹⁷ quÄ« = et hic, conjunctive use of the rel. at the beginning of a sent.

¹⁸ tenebricÅsus, -a, -um, dark, gloomy

¹⁹ LocÄ« Ant. IV n. 6.

²⁰ tenebrae, -Ärum, darkness

²¹ Orcus, -Ä«, Orcus, the underworld

²² dÄvorÅ (1), devour, consume

²³ dat. of separation

²⁴ auferÅ, auferre, abstulÄ«, ablÄtum, take away

²⁵ iÅ, exclamation of pain, oh!, or of joy, hurrah!

²⁶ misellus, -a, -um, diminutive of miser, wretched, poor, unhappy; a colloquial word

²⁷ tuÄ operÄ, thanks to you: opera, -ae, work, pains, effort

²⁸ fleÅ, -Äre, flÄvÄ«, flÄtum, weep

²⁹ turgidulus, -a, -um, (somewhat) swollen

³⁰ rubeÅ, -Äre, be red

³¹ ocellus, -Ä«, diminutive of oculus

¹ IV METER: elegiac couplet. Catullus journeyed to Bithynia on the staff of Memmius, the governor, apparently for two prime reasons. He undoubtedly wanted to get away from Rome in order to regain his equilibrium and fortitude after his final break with the notorious Lesbia. The present poem shows that he also deeply desired to carry out the final funeral rites for his dearly beloved brother, who had died in a foreign land far from his loved ones.

² aequor, -oris, n., flat surface, the sea

³ vehÅ, -ere, vexÄ«, vectum, carry

⁴ Ä«nferiae, -Ärum, offerings in honor of the dead

⁵ postrÄ“mus, -a, -um, last

⁶ dÅnÅ (1), present you with; cf. the idiom in LocÄ« Im. I line 1.

⁷ mÅ«nus, -eris, n., service, gift

⁸ mÅ«tus, -a, -um, mute, silent

⁹ nequÄ«quam, adv., in vain

¹⁰ ad-loquor, address

¹¹ cinis, -eris, m. but occasionally f. as here, ashes (cf. incinerator)

¹² quandoquidem, conj., since

¹³ dat. of separation. Final -Ä« is long here because of meter.

¹⁴ = tÄ“

¹⁵ LocÄ« Im. III n. 24

¹⁶ indignÄ“, adv., undeservedly

¹⁷ adimÅ, -ere, -ÄmÄ«, -Ämptum, take away; adÄmpte, voc. agreeing with frÄter

¹⁸ intereÄ, adv., meanwhile

¹⁹ n. acc. pl., obj. of accipe

²⁰ prÄ«scus, -a, -um, ancient

²¹ frÄternus, -a, -um, fraternal, of a brother, a brotherâs

²² multum, adv. with mÄnantia

²³ mÄnÅ (1), flow, drip with; mÄnantia modifies haec in line 7.

²⁴ flÄ“tus, -Å«s, weeping, tears

²⁵ in perpetuum, forever

²⁶ avÄ“ = salvÄ“

¹ V For the general situation of this speech see the introductory note to the reading passage in Capvt XXX. Since Cicero as yet lacked evidence that would stand in court, this speech is a magnificent example of bluff; but it worked to the extent of forcing Catiline (though not the other leaders of the conspiracy) to leave Rome for his army encamped at Fiesole near Florence.

² quÅ usque, how far

³ = abÅ«tÄ“ris; ab-Å«tor + abl., abuse

⁴ furor, -Åris, m., madness

⁵ ÄlÅ«dÅ, -ere, -lÅ«sÄ«, -lÅ«sum, mock, elude

⁶ quem ad fÄ«nem = ad quem fÄ«nem; sÄ“sÄ“ = sÄ“

⁷ effrÄnÄtus, -a, -um, unbridled; cf. frÄnum, bridle, and the frenum of the upper lip

⁸ iactÅ (1), frequentative form of iaciÅ, toss about, vaunt

⁹ audÄcia, -ae, boldness, audacity

¹⁰ nihil = strong nÅn; not at all

¹¹ nocturnus, -a, -um, adj. of nox

¹² praesidium, -iÄ«, guard

¹³ PalÄtium, -Ä«, the Palatine hill. From the sumptuous dwellings on the Palatine comes our word âpalace.â

¹⁴ vigilia, -ae, watch; pl., watchmen, sentinels

¹⁵ concursus, -Å«s, gathering

¹⁶ mÅ«nÄ«tus, -a, -um, fortified

¹⁷ here = expression

¹⁸ cÅnstringÅ, -ere, -strÄ«nxÄ«, -strictum, bind, curb

¹⁹ coniÅ«rÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., conspiracy (a swearing together)

²⁰ proximus, -a, -um, nearest, last (sc. nocte)

²¹ superiÅre (sc. nocte) = the night before

²² con-vocÅ

²³ gen. of nÅs (Capvt XI)

²⁴ ignÅrÅ (1), be ignorant, not know

²⁵ The acc. was used in exclamatory expressions.

²⁶ immÅ, adv., on the contrary; nay more

²⁷ vÄrÅ, adv., in fact

²⁸ particeps, -cipis, m., participant

²⁹ notÅ (1), mark out, note

³⁰ dÄsignÅ (1), mark out, designate, choose

³¹ caedÄ“s, -is, f., slaughter

³² tÄ“lum, -Ä«, weapon

³³ iussÅ«, chiefly in abl., by or at the command of

³⁴ iam prÄ«dem, adv., long ago

³⁵ pestis, -is, f., plague, destruction

³⁶ mÄchinor (1), contrive (cf. âmachineâ); in nÅs, in + acc. sometimes means against (contrÄ)

³⁷ cÅnsultum, -Ä«, decree

³⁸ vehemÄ“ns, gen. -entis, emphatic, vehement

³⁹ dÄ“ + sum, be wanting, fail + dat.

⁴⁰ auctÅritÄs, -tÄtis, f., authority

⁴¹ ÅrdÅ, -dinis, m., class, order

⁴² adv., openly

⁴³ vÄ«cÄ“simus, -a, -um, twentieth

⁴⁴ hebÄscÅ, -ere, grow dull

⁴⁵ aciÄ“s, -Ä“Ä«, sharp edge

⁴⁶ eius modÄ«, of this sort; modifies cÅnsultum

⁴⁷ here = in accordance with; with quÅâ¦ cÅnsultÅ

⁴⁸ cÅnfestim, adv., at once

⁴⁹ convenit, -Ä«re, -vÄ“nit, impers., it is fitting

⁵⁰ dÄ + pÅnÅ, put aside

⁵¹ cÅnfÄ«rmÅ (1), strengthen

⁵² patrÄs cÅnscrÄ«ptÄ«, senators

⁵³ clÄ“mÄ“ns, gen. -entis, merciful, gentle

⁵⁴ dissolÅ«tus, -a, -um, lax

⁵⁵ inertia, -ae, inactivity; example of gen. of thing charged: âI condemn myself on a charge of inactivity, find myself guilty of inactivity.â

⁵⁶ nÄ“quitia, -ae, worthlessness; gen. of charge

⁵⁷ condemnÅ (1), find guilty, condemn

⁵⁸ castra, -Årum, a camp (n. pl. form but sg. meaning)

⁵⁹ EtrÅ«ria, -ae, Etruria

⁶⁰ faucÄ“s, -ium, f. pl., jaws, narrow pass

⁶¹ collocÅ (1), to position

⁶² in diÄs singulÅs, from day to day

⁶³ intrÄ, prep. + acc., within

⁶⁴ adeÅ, adv., so even

⁶⁵ intestÄ«nus, -a, -um, internal

⁶⁶ perniciÄ“s, -Ä“Ä«, slaughter, destruction

⁶⁷ mÅlientem modifies ducem and has perniciem as its obj.

⁶⁸ = et haec, conjunctive use of the rel. pron.

⁶⁹ pergÅ, -ere, -rÄxÄ«, -rÄctum, proceed, continue

⁷⁰ quÅ, adv., where. A few lines before these words Cicero said: cÅnfÄ«rmastÄ« (you asserted) tÄ ipsum iam esse exitÅ«rum (from ex-eÅ).

⁷¹ Ä“gredior, -Ä«, -gressus sum, go out, depart. What is the form of Ä“gredere?

⁷² quandÅ, adv., at some time, at last

⁷³ Manlius was in charge of Catilineâ€™s army at Fiesole.

⁷⁴ minus = nÅn omnÄs

⁷⁵ pÅ«rgÅ (1), cleanse

⁷⁶ mÅ«rus, -Ä«, wall

⁷⁷ inter-sum

⁷⁸ versor (1), dwell, remain

⁷⁹ sinÅ, -ere, sÄ«vÄ«, situm, allow

⁸⁰ quamquam, conj., and yet

⁸¹ nÅn nÅ«llÄ«, not none = some, several

⁸² immineÅ, -Äre, overhang, threaten

⁸³ dissimulÅ (1), conceal

⁸⁴ quÄ« = et hÄ«

⁸⁵ mollis, -e, soft, weak

⁸⁶ corrÅborÅ (1), strengthen; cf. corroborate

⁸⁷ quÅrum = et eÅrum

⁸⁸ secÅ«tÄ«, partic. going with multÄ«

⁸⁹ improbus, -a, -um, wicked, depraved

⁹⁰ vÄ“rum etiam = sed etiam

⁹¹ imperÄ«tus, -a, -um, inexperienced

⁹² animadvertÅ, -ere, -vertÄ«, -versum, notice; with in + acc. = inflict punishment on. This is a mixed condition of what general category?

⁹³ crÅ«dÄ“liter, adv. of crÅ«dÄ“lis

⁹⁴ rÄ“giÄ“, adv., in the fashion of a king, tyrannically

⁹⁵ Sc. id as subject.

⁹⁶ intendÅ, -ere, -tendÄ«, -tÄnsum, intend; parenthetical clause

⁹⁷ per-veniÅ ad or in + acc., arrive at, reach; pervÄnerit = perf. subjunct. for a fut. perf. indic. in a more vivid condition. For the subjunct. in a subordinate clause in ind. state., see App.

⁹⁸ fore = futÅ«rus, -a, -um, esse

⁹⁹ paulÄ«sper, adv., for a little while

¹⁰⁰ re-primÅ, press back, check

¹⁰¹ = semper

¹⁰² comprimÅ, -ere, -pressÄ«, -pressum, suppress

¹⁰³ quod sÄ«, but if

¹⁰⁴ fut. perf. indic. What kind of condition?

¹⁰⁵ suÅs (virÅs)

¹⁰⁶ eÅdem, adv., to the same place

¹⁰⁷ undique, adv., from all sides

¹⁰⁸ colligÅ, -ligere, -lÄgÄ«, -lÄctum, gather together

¹⁰⁹ naufragus, -Ä«, (shipwrecked) ruined man

¹¹⁰ adgregÅ (1), gather; adgregÄrit = adgregÄverit

¹¹¹ exstinguÅ, -ere, -stÄ«nxÄ«, -stÄ«nctum, extinguish

¹¹² adultus, -a, -um, mature

¹¹³ stirps, stirpis, f., stem, stock

¹¹⁴ sÄ“men, -inis, n., seed

¹⁰³ quod sÄ«, but if

¹¹⁵ latrÅcinium, -iÄ«, brigandage; band of brigands

¹¹⁶ here = for

¹¹⁷ relevÅ (1), relieve

¹¹⁸ re-sideÅ (= sedeÅ), -Äre, -sÄdÄ«, -sessum, (sit down), remain

¹¹⁹ sÄ-cÄdÅ (sÄ = apart, away). Why subjunct.?

¹²⁰ sÄcernÅ, -ere, -crÄvÄ«, -cretum, separate

¹²¹ congregÅ (1), gather together

¹²² dÄsinÅ, -ere, -sÄ«vÄ«, -situm, cease

¹²³ Ä«nsidior (1), plot against + dat.

¹²⁴ domÄ« suae, loc. Catiline had tried to have Cicero assassinated.

¹²⁵ circum-stÅ, -Äre, -stetÄ«, stand around, surround

¹²⁶ tribÅ«nal, -Älis, n.

¹²⁷ praetor urbÄnus, judicial magistrate who had charge of civil cases between Roman citizens

¹²⁸ obsideÅ, -ere, -sÄdÄ«, -sessum, besiege, beset

¹²⁹ cÅ«ria, -ae, senate house

¹³⁰ malleolus, -Ä«, firebrand

¹³¹ fax, facis, f., torch

¹³² Ä«nflammÅ (1), set on fire

¹³³ = parÄre

¹³⁴ Ä«n-scrÄ«bÅ

¹³⁵ frÅns, frontis, f., forehead

¹³⁶ polliceor, -Ä“rÄ«, -licitus sum, promise

¹³⁷ dÄ«ligentia, -ae

¹³⁸ eques, equitis, m., horseman, knight. Here the equitÄ“s are the wealthy business class in Rome.

¹³⁹ cÅnsÄnsiÅ, -Ånis, f., agreement, harmony

¹⁴⁰ profectiÅ, -Ånis, f., departure; cf. profiscÄ«scor

¹⁴¹ illÅ«strÅ (1), bring to light

¹⁴² vindicÅ (1), avenge, punish

¹⁴³ hÄ«s-ce = hÄ«s + intensive enclitic -ce; abl. case with Åminibus

¹⁴⁴ Åmen, Åminis, n., omen: with these omens or with these words which I have uttered as omens, abl. of attendant circumstance without cum.

¹⁴⁵ cumâ¦ salÅ«te (peste, exitiÅ) abl. of attendant circumstance with cum, here indicating the result: to the safety of state, to your own destructionâ¦.

¹⁴⁶ perniciÄ“s, -Ä“Ä«, disaster, calamity

¹⁴⁷ parricÄ«dium, -iÄ«, murder

¹⁴⁸ impius, -a, -um, wicked, disloyal

¹⁴⁹ nefÄrius, -a, -um, infamous, nefarious

¹⁵⁰ eÄ«sdem auspiciÄ«s quibus haec urbs (cÅnstitÅ«ta est); auspicia, -Årum, auspices

¹⁵¹ RÅmulus, -Ä«, the founder of Rome

¹⁵² cÅnstituÅ, -ere, -stituÄ«, -stitÅ«tum, establish

¹⁵³ Stator, -Åris, m., the Stayer (of flight), the Supporter, Jupitor Stator

¹⁵⁴ nÅminÅ (1), name, call (cf. nÅmen)

¹⁵⁵ templum, -Ä«, temple

¹⁵⁶ tÄ“ctum, -Ä«, roof, house

¹⁵⁷ arceÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, ward off

¹⁵⁸ inimÄ«cus, -Ä«, personal enemy; inimÄ«cÅs, hostÄs, etc. are in apposition with hominÄs.

¹⁵⁹ latrÅ, -Ånis, m., robber, bandit

¹⁶⁰ foedus, -eris, n., treaty, bond

¹⁶¹ societÄs, -tÄtis, f., fellowship, alliance (cf. socius)

¹⁶² con (together) + iungÅ: coniÅ«nctÅs modifies latrÅnÄs, etc.

¹⁶³ aeternus, -a, -um, eternal

¹⁶⁴ supplicium, -iÄ«, punishment

¹⁶⁵ mactÅ (1), punish, pursue. The basic structure of the sent. is this: TÅ« (quÄ«â¦ es cÅnstitÅ«tus, quemâ¦ nÅminÄmus) hunc et sociÅs Ä templÄ«sâ¦ fortÅ«nÄ«sque cÄ«vium arcebis; et hominÄs (inimÄ«cÅsâ¦ coniÅ«nctÅs) suppliciÄ«s vÄ«vÅs mortuÅsque mactÄbis.

¹ VI Cicero here tells how, shortly after his first speech against Catiline, he secured the written evidence necessary for the trial and conviction of the conspirators.

² fellow-citizens, an old word of uncertain origin

³ The Romans regularly used the sg. even when referring to a number of people; we use the pl., âlives.â

⁴ n. pl., good things = goods

⁵ coniÅ«nx, -iugis, f., wife (cf. coniungÅ)

⁶ lÄ«berÄ«, -Årum, children

⁷ domicilium, -iÄ«, home (cf. domus)

⁸ hodiernus diÄ“s, this day, today (cf. hodiÄ“)

⁹ flamma, -ae, flame

¹⁰ paene, adv., almost

¹¹ faucÄ“s, -ium, f. pl., jaws; a narrow passage

¹² restituÅ, -ere, -stituÄ«, -stitÅ«tum, restore

¹³ The outline of the sent. is this: Rem pÅ«blicam (â¦urbem) amÅre deÅrum (â¦perÄ«culÄ«s meÄ«s) Ä flammÄ (â¦faucibus fÄtÄ«) Äreptam (â¦restitÅ«tam) vidÄtis.

¹⁴ conjunctive use of the rel.; n. nom. pl.

¹⁵ comperiÅ, -Ä«re, -perÄ«, -pertum, find out

¹⁶ introduces possÄ«tis

¹⁷ etâ€¦ et

¹⁸ nom. n. pl., subj. of comprehÄ“nsa sint

¹⁹ investÄ«gÅ (1), track out, investigate

²⁰ ut + indic., here = ever since

²¹ before by a few days (abl. of degree of difference, see S.S.) = a few days ago; actually some three weeks before

²² ÄrumpÅ, -ere, -rÅ«pÄ«, -ruptum, burst forth

²³ huius + ce, an intensifying suffix

²⁴ vigilÅ (1), watch, be vigilant

²⁵ prÅ-videÅ, foresee, make provision

²⁶ quem ad modum, how

²⁷ absconditus, -a, -um, hidden

²⁸ illa (invidia)

²⁹ compar. of magnopere

³⁰ This clause is a noun clause in apposition with illa (invidia). The perf. subjunct. (exierit) is used in informal ind. state. indicating what people may say: he went out alive (vÄ«vus).

³¹ tum cum, mere repetition of tum cum above as Cicero starts the sent. over again.

³² exterminÅ (1), banish (ex + terminus, boundary)

³³ autâ¦ exitÅ«ram (esse) autâ¦ fore putÄbam

³⁴ reliquus, -a, -um, remaining, the rest of

³⁵ simul, adv., at the same time

³⁶ ex-eÅ; exitÅ«ram (esse)

³⁷ restÅ, -Äre, -stitÄ«, stay behind, remain

³⁸ dÄ“bilis, -e, helpless, weak

³⁹ = futÅ«rÅs esse

⁴⁰ in eÅ ut sentÄ«rem et vidÄrem quidâ¦ mÅlÄ«rentur: in this that I might seeâ¦; the ut-clause of purpose is in apposition with eÅ.

⁴¹ lÄgÄtus, -Ä«, ambassador

⁴² AllobrogÄ“s, -um, m. pl., the Allobroges, a Gallic tribe whose ambassadors had come to Rome to make complaints about certain Roman magistrates.

⁴³ TrÄnsalpÄ«nus, -a, -um, Transalpine

⁴⁴ tumultus, -Å«s, m., uprising

⁴⁵ Gallicus, -a, -um, Gallic

⁴⁶ excitÅ (1), excite, arouse

⁴⁷ Publius Lentulus after having been consul in 71 B.C. was removed from the Senate on grounds of moral turpitude. He was now one of the leading conspirators and at the same time he was holding the office of praetor.

⁴⁸ sollicitÅ (1), stir up

⁴⁹ Gallia, -ae, Gaul

⁵⁰ mandÄtum, -Ä«, order, instruction

⁵¹ comes, -itis, m., companion

⁵² ad-iungÅ

⁵³ Titus Volturcius, an errand-boy for Lentulus

⁵⁴ facultÄs, -tÄtis, f., opportunity

⁵⁵ quod, a thing which. The antecedent of quod is the general idea in the ut-clause

⁵⁶ optÅ (1), desire

⁵⁷ manifestÅ, adv., clearly

⁵⁸ dÄprehendÅ (cf. comprehendÅ), detect, comprehend

⁵⁹ hesternÅ diÄ, yesterday

⁶⁰ Though praetors were judicial magistrates, they did possess the imperium by which they could command troops.

⁶¹ most loving of the state = very patriotic

⁶² obj. gen.; see App.

⁶³ fierÄ«, subj. of placÄ“ret (it was pleasing) used impersonally

⁶⁴ praeclÄrus, -a, -um, noble

⁶⁵ Ä“gregius, -a, -um, excellent, distinguished

⁶⁶ subjunct. in a characteristic clause

⁶⁷ recÅ«sÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., refusal

⁶⁸ negÅtium, -iÄ«, business, matter

⁶⁹ advesperÄscit, -ere, -perÄvit, impers. inceptive, it is approaching evening (cf. vespers)

⁷⁰ occultÄ“, adv., secretly

⁷¹ pÅns, pontis, m., bridge; the Mulvian bridge across the Tiber near Rome

⁷² vÄ«lla, -ae, country house

⁷³ bipertÄ«tÅ, adv., in two divisions

⁷⁴ Tiberis, -is, m., the Tiber

⁷⁵ inter-sum, be between

⁷⁶ eÅdem, adv., to the same place

⁷⁷ suspÄ«ciÅ, -Ånis, f., suspicion

⁷⁸ praefectÅ«ra, -ae, prefecture, a city of the Roman allies governed by a Roman prefect

⁷⁹ ReÄtÄ«nus, -a, -um, of Reate, a Sabine town about forty miles from Rome.

⁸⁰ complÅ«rÄ“s, -a, pl. adj., very many

⁸¹ dÄligÅ, -ere, -lÄgÄ«, -lÄctum, choose, select

⁸² opera, -ae, help; why abl.?

⁸³ assiduÄ“, adv., constantly

⁸⁴ praesidiÅ, as a guard, dat. of purpose (S.S.)

⁸⁵ interim, adv., meanwhile

⁸⁶ ferÄ“, adv., about, almost; usually follows the word it modifies

⁸⁷ vigilia, -ae, watch. The night was divided into four watches.

⁸⁸ comitÄtus, -Å«s, company, retinue. The abl. of accompaniment may be used without cum in military expressions.

⁸⁹ ingredior, -gredÄ«, -gressus sum, enter on

⁹⁰ and together with (them)

⁹¹ impetus, -Å«s, attack

⁹² Ä“dÅ«cunturâ€¦ gladiÄ«, swords were drawn

⁹³ nostrÄ«s (virÄ«s)

⁹⁴ interventus, -Å«s, intervention

⁹⁵ pugna, -ae, fight

⁹⁶ sÄdÅ (1), settle, stop (not to be confused with sedeÅ, sit)

⁹⁷ quÄ«cumque, quaecumque, quodcumque, whoever, whatever

⁹⁸ integer, -gra, -grum, untouched, whole

⁹⁹ dÄ«lÅ«cÄ“scit, -ere, -lÅ«xit, it grows light, dawn comes

¹⁰⁰ improbus, -a, -um, wicked

¹⁰¹ mÄchinÄtor, -Åris, m., contriver, plotter

¹⁰² Cimber GabÄ«nius

¹⁰³ statim, adv., immediately

¹⁰⁴ nihil-dum, nothing yet

¹⁰⁵ suspicor (1), suspect

¹⁰⁶ item, adv., likewise

¹⁰⁷ arcessÅ, -ere, -Ä«vÄ«, -Ä«tum, summon

¹⁰⁸ tardÄ“, adv., slowly

¹⁰⁹ frequÄ“ns, gen. -entis, crowded, full

¹¹⁰ intereÄ, adv., meanwhile

¹¹¹ admonitus, -Å«s, warning, suggestion

¹¹² aedÄ“s, -ium, f. pl., house

¹¹³ tÄlum, -Ä«, weapon; tÄlÅrum is gen. of whole with quid: anything of weapons = any weapons

¹¹⁴ rel. clause of purp.: quÄ« = ut is

¹¹⁵ Antecedent is aedibus.

¹¹⁶ sÄ«ca, -ae, dagger

¹¹⁷ efferÅ: ex-ferÅ

¹¹⁸ intrÅ-dÅ«cÅ = Eng. introduce

¹¹⁹ promise of protection in the name of the state

¹²⁰ iussus, -Å«s, command

¹²¹ indÄ«cÅ (1), indicate, make known

¹²² vix, adv., hardly

¹²³ The perf. endings in -Ävi-, -Ävi-, -Åvi- often contract to -Ä-, -Ä-, -Å-, respectively. So here rÄcreÄvÄ«sset has contracted to recreÄsset. Perfs. in -Ä«vi- may lose the v but the two resultant vowels rarely contract to Ä« except before ss and st: audÄ«verat, audierat; audÄ«visse, audÄ«sse; quaesÄ«ssent

¹²⁴ jussive noun clause with mandÄta et litterÄs

¹²⁵ quam prÄ«mum, as soon as possible

¹²⁶ (that he should do) this (id) with this plan (in mind) thatâ€¦

¹²⁷ The rest of the sentence can be outlined thus: ut (cumâ¦ partibus [quem ad modumâ¦ distributum erat] incendissent etâ¦ fÄcissent) praestÅ esset ille (quÄ« etâ¦ exciperet etâ¦ coniungeret)

¹²⁸ here in

¹²⁹ quem ad modum, as

¹³⁰ impers. pass. verbs: as had been marked out and assigned

¹³¹ incendÅ, -ere, -cendÄ«, -cÄnsum, set fire to

¹³² caedÄ“s, -is, f., slaughter

¹³³ Ä«nfÄ«nÄ«tus, -a, -um, unlimited

¹³⁴ praestÅ, adv., on hand, ready

¹³⁵ ille = Catiline

¹³⁶ ex-cipiÅ, pick up, capture

¹³⁷ con + iungÅ. Why are exciperet and coniungeret in the subjunct.?

¹³⁸ iÅ«s, iÅ«randum, iÅ«ris iÅ«randÄ«, n., oath

¹³⁹ prae-scrÄ«bÅ, order, direct; esse praescrÄ«ptum, impers. pass. (it had been commanded to themselves, sibi) but translate as personal: they had been directed.

¹⁴⁰ equitÄtus, -Å«s, cavalry

¹⁴¹ jussive noun clause depending on esse praescrÄ«ptum

¹⁴² to be brief

¹⁴³ tabella, -ae, tablet: very shallow trays, not unlike the modern slate, filled with wax on which writing was done with a sharp-pointed stilus. Two of these closed face to face, tied together with a string, and sealed with wax and the impression of a signet ring, were the equivalent of a modern letter in an envelope.

¹⁴⁴ prÅ-ferÅ

¹⁴⁵ datae (esse); datae is nom. f. pl. to agree with quae (tabellae), the subj. of dÄ«cÄ“bantur.

¹⁴⁶ lÄ«num, -Ä«, string

¹⁴⁷ incÄ«dÅ, -ere, -cÄ«dÄ«, -cÄ«sum, cut

¹⁴⁸ (CethÄ“gÄ«) ipsÄ«us: emphatic because letters were often written by an amanuensis, a slave to whom the letter was dictated.

¹⁴⁹ sÄsÄ = sÄ (i.e., Cethegus), subj. of factÅ«rum esse and also of ÅrÄre

¹⁵⁰ cÅnfÄ«rmÅ (1), assert, declare; subjunct. in ind. state. (see S.S.)

¹⁵¹ a little before (before by a little), abl. of degree of difference (see S.S.)

¹⁵² dÄprehendÅ, -ere, -hendÄ«, -hÄnsum, seize

¹⁵³ respondisset dÄ«xissetque, subjs. in rel. clause of characteristic, which have the force of a concessive clause (= although)

¹⁵⁴ ferrÄmentum, -Ä«, weapon

¹⁵⁵ studiÅsus, -a, -um, fond of (i.e., he was a collector.)

¹⁵⁶ dÄbilitÅ (1), weaken

¹⁵⁷ abiectus, -a, -um, downcast

¹⁵⁸ cÅnscientia, -ae, knowledge, conscience

¹⁵⁹ conticÄscÅ, -ere, -ticuÄ«, become silent

¹⁶⁰ adnuÅ, -ere, -nuÄ«, nod assent

¹⁶¹ vellet, subjunct. because it is a subordinate clause in an implied ind. state. for Ciceroâ€™s original words: sÄ« quidâ€¦ dÄ«cere vÄ«s

¹⁶² potestÄs, -tÄtis, f., power, opportunity

¹⁶³ = posteÄ

¹⁶⁴ aliquantÅ, abl. of degree of difference (by somewhat) equivalent to an adv.: somewhat, a little

¹⁶⁵ indicium, -iÄ«, evidence, information

¹⁶⁶ Ä-dÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, give forth, publish

¹⁶⁷ quam ob rem = quÄrÄ

¹⁶⁸ constanter, adv., consistently, steadily

¹⁶⁹ quotiÄ“ns, adv., how often

¹⁷⁰ contracted form, n. 122 above

¹⁷¹ sÄ“cum: an ind. reflexive referring to the subj. of quaesÄ«ssent; translate to them.

¹⁷² fÄta SibyllÄ«na, a collection of ancient prophecies for which the Romans had very high respect. By these Lentulus had sought to prove to the Allobroges that he was destined to hold the regnum and imperium at Rome.

¹⁷³ dÄ“-mÄ“ns, gen. -mentis, out of oneâ€™s mind

¹⁷⁴ Ä«nfitior (1), deny

¹⁷⁵ opÄ«niÅ, -Ånis, f., expectation

¹⁷⁶ impudenter, adv., impudently

¹⁷⁷ ad extrÄ“mum, at the last, finally

¹⁷⁸ eÄ«s = n. pl., those things

¹⁷⁹ Ä«nsimulÅ (1), charge

¹⁸⁰ depends on vÄ«sa sunt

¹⁸¹ cumâ¦ tum, not onlyâ¦ but also (cf. nÅn sÅlumâ¦ sed etiam)

¹⁸² illa argÅ«menta atque indicia (i.e., tabellaeâ¦ confessiÅ) certissima vÄ«sa sunt

¹⁸³ cÅnfessiÅ, -Ånis, f. = Eng.

¹⁸⁴ lit. more certain by much. What kind of abl. is multÅ? (see S.S.)

¹⁸⁵ colorâ¦ taciturnitÄs, in apposition with illa, which is nom. n. pl. color, -Åris, m., = Eng.

¹⁸⁶ taciturnitÄs, -tÄtis, f., silence (cf. taciturn)

¹⁸⁷ obstupÄscÅ, -ere, -stupuÄ«, become stupefied, be thunderstruck

¹⁸⁸ intueor, -Ä“rÄ«, -tuitus sum, look at

¹⁸⁹ indicÅ (1), accuse (cf. indicium, n. 165 above)

¹⁹⁰ cÅnsulÅ, -ere, -suluÄ«, -sultum, consult, ask advice of

¹⁹¹ highest interest of the state

¹⁹² varietÄs, -tÄtis, f., variation

¹⁹³ Ä«nsigne, -is, n., sign, symbol

¹⁹⁴ postulÅ (1), request, demand

¹⁹⁵ except

¹⁹⁶ sempiternus, -a, -um, eternal

¹⁹⁷ veneror (1), worship

¹⁹⁸ tÄ“ctum, -Ä«, roof; house

¹⁹⁹ quamquam, conj., although

²⁰⁰ dÄpellÅ, drive off, avert

²⁰¹ equally as = just as

¹ VII As part of his demonstration that death is not an evil, Cicero cites Socratesâ views as given in Platoâs âApology,â Socratesâ defense of his life before the jury that finally condemned him to death.

² quÄâ¦ Å«sum, which Plato represents him as using; quÄ, abl. with the partic. Å«sum

³ multÅ, (1), punish, sentence

⁴ Ä-veniÅ, turn out; impers. infin. in ind. state.

⁵ subordinate clause in ind. state.

⁶ necesse, indecl. adj., (it is) necessary

⁷ Supply ut before sit: that there be one of two possibilities, with the utâ¦ migrÄtur clause in apposition with duÅbus

⁸ autâ€¦ aut

⁹ migrÅ (1), depart, migrate; migrÄtur as impers. pass., one departs

¹⁰ = quÄrÄ

¹¹ = sÄ«

¹² vÄ«sum, -Ä«, vision

¹³ somnium, -iÄ«, dream

¹⁴ plÄcÄtus, -a, -um, peaceful

¹⁵ Ä“-morior, die (off)

¹⁶ futÅ«ra est, is going to be

¹⁷ perpetuitÄs, -tÄtis, f., perpetuity

¹⁸ cÅn-sequor

¹⁹ quis (est)

²⁰ sÄ«n, conj., but if

²¹ (ea) sunt vÄ“ra

²² migrÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., the noun of migrÅ, n. 9 above

²³ Åra, -ae, shore, region

²⁴ (eÄ«) quÄ«

²⁵ ex-cÄdÅ = discÄdÅ

²⁶ incolÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, inhabit

²⁷ abl. of degree of difference (S.S.)

²⁸ peregrÄ«nÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., travel abroad

²⁹ col-loquor, talk with, converse (cf. colloquial)

³⁰ Orpheus and Musaeus were famous poets and musicians before the time of Homer

³¹ Hesiod, a Gk. epic poet chronologically next after Homer.

³² quantÄ« (pretiÄ«), of how much (value), gen. of indef. value. quantÄ«â¦ aestimÄtis, how valuable, pray, do you estimate this is?

³³ aestimÅ (1), estimate, value

³⁴ quisquam, quidquam (quicquam), anyone, anything; cuiquam modified by bonÅ: to any good man

³⁵ malÄ« (gen.) depends on quicquam: anything of evil = any evil

³⁶ vÄ«vÅ and mortuÅ modify cuiquam bonÅ.

³⁷ hinc, adv., from this place

³⁸ hominemâ€¦ nÄ“minem, no man

¹ VIII In these excerpts Scipio Africanus Minor (the Younger, hero of the Third Punic War in 146 B.C.) tells how the deceased Scipio Africanus Maior (the Elder, hero of the Second Punic War who defeated Hannibal in 202 B.C.) appeared to him in a dream and discoursed on the nature of life here and hereafter.

² artus, -a, -um, deep (sleep); narrow

³ solÄ“bat (esse)

⁴ complector, -Ä«, -plexus sum, embrace

⁵ abl. of description

⁶ imÄgÅ, -inis, f., image; here = portrait mask of an ancestor. The imÄginÄs of a Roman patricianâs ancestors were displayed in the atrium of the house.

⁷ nÅtus, -a, -um, known, familiar

⁸ agnÅscÅ (cf. cognÅscÅ), recognize

⁹ cohorrÄscÅ, -ere, -horruÄ«, shudder

¹⁰ L. Aemilius Paulus, father of Africanus Minor

¹¹ exstÄ«nctÅs (esse): exstinguÅ

¹² carcer, -eris, n., prison

¹³ Ä-volÅ (1), fly away; not to be confused with volÅ, velle

¹⁴ quÄ«n aspicis: why, donâ€™t you see?

¹⁵ vim = cÅpiam

¹⁶ Åsculor (1), kiss

¹⁷ fleÅ, -Äre, flÄvÄ«, flÄtum, weep

¹⁸ ut prÄ«mum, as soon as

¹⁹ flÄtus, -Å«s, noun of fleÅ, n. 17 above

²⁰ re-primÅ (premÅ)

²¹ quaesÅ, -ere, commonly exclamatory: I beg you!, pray tell!, please

²² sÄnctus, -a, -um, holy

²³ moror (1), delay, wait

²⁴ why not?

²⁵ hÅ«c, adv., to this place, here

²⁶ properÅ (1), hasten

²⁷ = that is not the way

²⁸ order = is deus

²⁹ templum, -Ä«, sacred area, temple

³⁰ cuiusâ¦ cÅnspicis: whose this temple is or to whom belongs this templeâeverything which you behold. Apparently, as he says hoc templum, he makes a sweeping gesture with his arm to indicate the universe and then adds omne quod cÅnspicis to make this even clearer. cÅnspiciÅ = aspiciÅ

³¹ aditus, -Å«s, approach, entrance

³² abl. of accordance: in accordance with this law, on this condition

³³ generÅ (1), create

³⁴ tueor, -Ä“rÄ«, tÅ«tus sum, watch, protect. Why subjunct.?

³⁵ globus, -Ä«, sphere, globe

³⁶ i.e., hominibus

³⁷ PÅ«blius, praenomen (first name) of Africanus Minor

³⁸ re-tineÅ, retain, preserve

³⁹ iniussÅ«, abl. as adv., without the command (of); cf. iussÅ«

⁴⁰ ille (animus)

⁴¹ mÅ«nus, -eris, n., duty, service

⁴² adsignÅ (1), assign

⁴³ dÄ-fugiÅ, flee from, avoid

⁴⁴ iÅ«stitia, -ae, justice (cf. iÅ«stus)

⁴⁵ colÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, cultum, cultivate, cherish

⁴⁶ pietÄs, -tÄtis, f., loyalty, devotion

⁴⁷ important

⁴⁸ propinquus, -Ä«, relative

⁴⁹ here = surely

⁵⁰ coetus, -Å«s, gathering, company

⁵¹ laxÅ (1), set free

⁵² orbis (-is) lacteus (-Ä«), m., the Milky Way (orb), which Cicero here says is a term received from the Greeks (ut Ä GraÄ«s, i.e. GraecÄ«s, accÄpistis), who called it galaxias kyklos (= lacteus orbis); cf. our word galaxy.

⁵³ nuncupÅ (1) = appellÅ

⁵⁴ habÄtÅ, fut. imperat., you shall consider; consider

⁵⁵ sc. esse mortÄle

⁵⁶ tuÄ«s, to your (friends), dat. depending on dÄclÄrat

⁵⁷ dÄclÄrÅ (1) = Eng.

⁵⁸ = fÅrma

⁵⁹ scÄ«tÅ, another fut. imperat., you shall know; know

⁶⁰ sÄ«quidem, conj., since

⁶¹ vigeÅ -Äre, -uÄ« be strong, be active

⁶² meminÄ«, meminisse, defective, found only in perf. system, remember

⁶³ moderor (1), control

⁶⁴ prae-pÅnÅ, put in charge of

⁶⁵ as

⁶⁶ From the preceding clause sc. regit, etc. as verbs

¹ IX If death is such a great evil, how can the following attitudes be explained?

² quid, as adv., why? (= cÅ«r?)

³ nÅminÅ (1), name, mention (cf. nÅmen)

⁴ legiÅ, -Ånis, f., legion

⁵ CatÅ, -Ånis, m., Cato, the famous censor, who wrote a now-lost history of Rome called the Origines.

⁶ alacer, -cris, -cre, eager, happy. We should use an adv. instead of a pred. adj.: eagerly

⁷ profectÄs (esse); reditÅ«rÄs (esse)

⁸ LacedaemoniÄ«, -Årum, m., Spartans

⁹ Thermopylae, -Ärum; 480 B.C.

¹⁰ on whom Simonides (wrote); Simonides a 6th-cent. Gk. poet famous esp. for his poems and epigrams in the elegiac couplet.

¹¹ hospes, -itis, m., stranger

¹² Sparta, -ae, f., Spartae, dat. depending on dÄ«c

¹³ tÄ vÄ«disse nÅs

¹⁴ = iacentÄ“s

¹⁵ ob-sequor + dat., obey

¹⁶ commemorÅ (1), call to mind mention (cf. memoria)

¹⁷ What kind of person, then, was the Spartan woman? quÄlis, -e, what kind of

¹⁸ (eum) interfectum (esse)

¹⁹ idcircÅ, adv., for that reason

²⁰ gignÅ, -ere, genuÄ«, genitum, beget (cf. generate), bear

²¹ (the kind of person) who

²² occumbÅ, -ere, -cubuÄ«, -cubitum, meet

²³ ad-moneÅ = moneÅ, remind

²⁴ humÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., burial (cf. humus, earth)

²⁵ sepultÅ«ra, -ae, funeral (cf. sepulchre)

²⁶ dÄ«cendum (esse)

²⁷ exÄ«stimÅ (1), think

²⁸ CritÅ, -Ånis, m., Crito, a friend of Socrates

²⁹ sepeliÅ, -Ä«re, -Ä«vÄ«, -pultum, bury

³⁰ opera, -ae, effort, pains

³¹ frÅ«strÄ, adv., in vain (cf. frustrate)

³² Ä-volÅ (1); avolÄtÅ«rum (esse), infin. in ind. state. with persuÄsÄ«

³³ meÄ«, gen. of ego, depending on quicquam.

³⁴ relictÅ«rum (esse)

³⁵ gen. of vÅs

³⁶ ex-cÄdÅ, cf. discÄdÅ

³⁷ cÅnsequor, -Ä«, -secÅ«tus sum, overtake, catch

³⁸ Diogenes, the Cynic philosopher, famed for his asceticism and independence

³⁹ prÅ-iciÅ (iaciÅ), throw out

⁴⁰ inhumÄtus, -a, -um, unburied

⁴¹ volucris, -is, f., bird

⁴² fera, -ae, wild beast; dat. with prÅicÄ« understood

⁴³ minimÄ“, adv., no, not at all

⁴⁴ bacillum, -Ä«, staff (cf. bacillus, a New Latin form)

⁴⁵ here = near

⁴⁶ abigÅ, -ere, -ÄgÄ«, -Äctum, drive away; sc. volucrÄs et ferÄs. Why subjunct.?

⁴⁷ fut. imperat. = you shall put

⁴⁸ quÄ«, adv., how?

⁴⁹ laniÄtus, -Å«s, lacerating

⁵⁰ obsum, -esse, -fuÄ«, -futÅ«rus, be against, hurt. Why does oberit have the dat. mihi?

⁵¹ sentientÄ« modifies mihi and has nihil as its obj.

¹ X In the course of a speech defending the citizenship of the poet Archias against the charges of a certain Grattius, Cicero pronounced one of the worldâ€™s finest encomiums on the inestimable value and delight of literature.

² tantÅ opere, so greatly (cf. magnopere)

³ homine, the poet Archias.

⁴ quia, conj., because

⁵ suppeditÅ (1), supply

⁶ the means by which

⁷ forÄ“nsis, -e, of the forum. By Ciceroâ€™s time the Forum was primarily the political and legal center of Rome.

⁸ strepitus, -Å«s, din

⁹ re-ficiÅ, refresh, revive

¹⁰ convÄ«cium, -iÄ«, wrangling

¹¹ dÄ“fessus, -a, -um, exhausted

¹² conquiÄscÅ, -ere, -quiÄvÄ«, -quiÄtum, find rest

¹³ reprehendÅ, -ere, -hendÄ«, -hÄnsum, censure; reprehendat, deliberative, or dubitative, subjunct. The deliberative subjunct. is used in questions implying doubt, indignation, or impossibility. Quis mÄ reprehendat: who is to blame me (I wonder)?

¹⁴ iÅ«re = cum iÅ«re, abl. of manner that has virtually become an adv.: rightly

¹⁵ suscÄnseÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, be incensed, + dat.

¹⁶ sÄ« introduces sÅ«mpserÅ. The only real difficulty with this complex clause is the involvement of the quantum clauses. Although these clauses should be read and understood in the order in which they stand, the following outline may prove a welcome guide. Quis mÄ reprehendatâ¦ sÄ« ego tantum temporum ad haec studia sÅ«mpserÅ quantum temporum cÄterÄ«s ad suÄs rÄs (fÄstÅs diÄs, voluptÄtÄs, etc.) concÄditur, quantum temporum aliÄ« tribuunt convÄ«viÄ«s (alveolÅ pilae)?

¹⁷ quantum (temporum)

¹⁸ ob-eÅ, attend to

¹⁹ fÄ“stus, -a, -um, festive

²⁰ celebrÅ (1), celebrate

²¹ requiÄ“s, -Ä“tis, acc. requiÄ“tem or requiem, rest

²² concÄdÅ, grant, concede

²³ tribuÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, -Å«tum, allot

²⁴ tempestÄ«vus, -a, -um, timely; here = early, beginning in the afternoon so as to be conveniently prolonged.

²⁵ convÄ«vium, -iÄ«, banquet

²⁶ alveolus, -Ä«, gaming board

²⁷ pila, -ae, ball (cf. pill)

²⁸ tantum (temporum)â€¦ quantum, as muchâ€¦ as

²⁹ ego-met, an emphatic form of ego

³⁰ re-colÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, -cultum, renew

³¹ sÅ«mÅ, -ere, sÅ«mpsÄ«, sÅ«mptum, take

³² ideÅ, adv., for this reason, therefore

³³ facultÄs, -tÄtis, f., skill. Combine with orÄtiÅ and translate: this oratorical skill.

³⁴ quantuscumque, -acumque, -umcumque, however great

³⁵ dÄ“-sum, be lacking

³⁶ exemplum, -Ä«, example; exemplÅrum also goes with plÄnÄ« and plÄnae.

³⁷ vetustÄs, -tÄtis, f., antiquity

³⁸ tenebrae, -Ärum, darkness

³⁹ lÅ«men, -inis, n., light

⁴⁰ imÄgÅ, -ginis, f., portrait, picture

⁴¹ intueor, gaze on, contemplate

⁴² vÄ“rum, conj., but

⁴³ imitor (1), imitate

⁴⁴ ex-primÅ (premÅ), describe, portray

⁴⁵ administrÅ (1), manage

⁴⁶ prÅ-pÅnÅ, put forward, set before; prÅpÅnÄns has quÄs as dir. obj. and mihi as ind. obj.

⁴⁷ cÅgitÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., thought; cf. cÅgitÅ

⁴⁸ excellÄ“ns, gen. -entis, superior, remarkable

⁴⁹ cÅnfÅrmÅ (1), mold

⁵⁰ quispiam, quaepiam, quidpiam, someone

⁵¹ prÅdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, transmit, reveal

⁵² doctrÄ«na, -ae, instruction

⁵³ efferÅ, -ferre, extulÄ«, ÄlÄtum, lift up, extol

⁵⁴ ÄrudiÅ (4), educate, train

⁵⁵ cÅnfÄ«rmÅ (1), assert

⁵⁶ valuisse ad laudem, to be powerful toward praise = to have led to praise; infin. in ind. state.

⁵⁷ idem ego, I the same person = I also

⁵⁸ maintain

⁵⁹ eximius, -a, -um, extraordinary

⁶⁰ illustris, -e, noble, brilliant

⁶¹ accÄdÅ here = be added

⁶² cÅnfÅrmÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., molding, shaping

⁶³ nesciÅ quis, nesciÅ quid, indef. pron., lit. I know not who / what = some (uncertain) person or thing; the nesciÅ remains unchanged in this phrase.

⁶⁴ singulÄris, -e, unique, extraordinary

⁶⁵ exsistÅ, -ere, -stitÄ«, arise, appear, exist

⁶⁶ cÄterae (remissiÅnÄs or dÄlectÄtiÅnÄs)

⁶⁷ gen. of possession used in pred. = pred. gen.; sc. omnium with each gen.: the other delights do not belong to all timesâ€¦

¹ XI L. Aemilius Paulus Macedonicus was the father of Scipio Africanus Minor. As consul in 168 B.C. he brought the war with Macedonia to a successful conclusion by the defeat of the Macedonian King, Perseus. This explains why, before setting out against Perseus, he interpreted the chance words Persa periit as a favorable omen. The Romans believed seriously in the importance of omens.

² dat. with obtigisset

³ obj. of gereret

⁴ Perseus, -eÄ«; Perse abl.

⁵ utâ€¦ gereret, noun clause subj. of obtigisset

⁶ obtingÅ, -ere, -tigÄ«, touch, fall to oneâs lot

⁷ fÄ«li (a) with the diminutive ending -ola, little daughter

⁸ Tertia, a name meaning third. The Romans often used ordinal numerals as names, though commonly without strict regard to the number of children they had; e.g., Secundus, QuÄ«ntus, Sextus, Decimus.

⁹ admodum, adv., very

¹⁰ Åsculor (1), kiss

¹¹ anim-ad-vertÅ, turn the mind to, notice, observe

¹² trÄ«sticulus, -a, -um, rather sad, diminutive of tristis

¹³ What is it? What is the matter?

¹⁴ quid = cÅ«r

¹⁵ Persa, the name of her pet

¹⁶ artius, adv., closely

¹⁷ complector, -Ä«, -plexus sum, embrace

¹⁸ Åmen, -inis, n., omen, sign; i.e., the omen of his victory over Perseus

¹⁹ catellus, -Ä«, puppy

¹ XII fÄ«nitimus, -a, -um, neighboring; akin to: est fÄ«nitinum, it is akin to

² dissimulÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., irony

³ honestus, -a, -um, honorable, fine

⁴ vitiÅsus, -a, -um, faulty, bad

⁵ cÄnsor, -Åris, m., censor, Roman magistrate among whose duties was the assigning of citizens to their proper rank according to their property and service and the removal of names from the census rolls when citizens proved unworthy of citizenship.

⁶ tribus, -Å«s, f., tribe, a political division of the Roman people

⁷ centuriÅ, -Ånis, m., centurion

⁸ pugna, -ae, battle

⁹ ad-sum, be present

¹⁰ castra, -Årum, camp

¹¹ notÅ (1), mark, here with the nota cÄnsÅria placed opposite a citizenâs name to indicate his removal from the citizen list in disgrace.

¹ XIII pompa, -ae, parade

² vÄ«s here = quantity (cf. cÅpia)

³ aurum, -Ä«, gold

⁴ argentum, -Ä«, silver

⁵ XenocratÄ“s, -is, pupil of Plato and later head of the Academy

⁶ Alexander, -drÄ«

⁷ indecl. adj., fifty

⁸ talentum, -Ä«, a talent, a large sum of money

⁹ praesertim, adv., especially

¹⁰ AcadÄ“mÄ«a, -ae, the Academy, a gymnasium in a grove just outside of Athens. Here Plato established his school, which might be called the first European university.

¹¹ ap-pÅnÅ, place near, serve

¹² apparÄtus, -Å«s, equipment, splendor

¹³ postrÄ«diÄ“, adv., on the next day

¹⁴ numerÅ (1), count, pay out; sc. pecÅ«niam as subj. of numerÄrÄ«

¹⁵ hesternus, -a, -um, of yesterday

¹⁶ cÄ“nula, -ae, diminutive of cÄ“na

¹⁷ indecl. adj., thirty

¹⁸ mina, -ae, a Greek coin

¹⁹ aspernor (1), spurn, despise

²⁰ lÄ«berÄlitÄs, -tÄtis, f., generosity

²¹ LocÄ« Im. IX n. 38

²² lÄ«berius, adv., freely, boldly

²³ as a Cynic, being a Cynic

²⁴ opus (indecl.) est, is necessary: if he needed anything

²⁵ paululum, adv., a little

²⁶ i.e., you are blocking my sunlight

²⁷ officiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum + dat., be in the way, obstruct

²⁸ vidÄ“-licet, adv. (you may see), clearly, evidently

²⁹ aprÄ«cor (1), sun oneself

¹ XIV Darius III, defeated by Alexander the Great in 331 B.C. The spelling DÄrÄ«us reflects later Gk. pronunciation.

² fuga, -ae, flight

³ turbidus, -a, -um, turbid, roiled

⁴ cadÄver, -eris, n., corpse (cf. cadaverous)

⁵ inquinÄtus, -a, -um, polluted

⁶ sitiÅ (4), be thirsty

⁷ ÄsuriÅ (4), be hungry

⁸ Which Egyptian king of this name is unknown.

⁹ edÅ, -ere, ÄdÄ«, Äsum, eat (cf. edible)

¹⁰ per-agrÅ (1), wander through

¹¹ Aegyptus, -Ä«, f., Egypt

¹² comes, -itis, m., companion

¹³ cÅn-sequor

¹⁴ cibÄriusâ¦ pÄnis, ordinary (coarse) bread; pÄnis, -is, m.

¹⁵ ferÅ here = report, say

¹⁶ contentÄ, strenuously, adv. from contendÅ, struggle

¹⁷ it had been asked of him, he had been asked

¹⁸ quÅ, regularly used instead of ut to introduce a purp. containing a compar.

¹⁹ obsÅnÅ (1), buy provisions, here = provide (an appetite)

²⁰ famÄ“s, -is, f., hunger

²¹ vÄ«ctus, -Å«s, living, mode of living, food

²² philitia, -Årum, public meals (for Spartan citizens of military age)

²³ ubi = among the Lacedaemonians

²⁴ iÅ«s, iÅ«ris, n., soup

²⁵ dat. of purp. (S.S.)

²⁶ dÄlectÄtum (esse)

²⁷ coquÅ, -ere, coxÄ«, coctum, cook (cf. concoct)

²⁸ mÄ«rus, -a, -um, wonderful, surprising

²⁹ condÄ«mentum, -Ä«, seasoning, condiment

³⁰ dÄ“-sum, be lacking

³¹ vÄnÄtus, -Å«s, hunting

³² sÅ«dor, -Åris, m., sweat

³³ at the Eurotas (EurÅtÄs, -ae, m., river on which Sparta was located)

³⁴ sitis, -is, f., thirst

³⁵ epulae, -Ärum, banquet

³⁶ condiÅ (4), season, spice

³⁷ sÅ«dÅ (1), sweat

³⁸ ructÅ (1), belch

³⁹ refertus, -a, -um, stuffed, crammed, + abl.

⁴⁰ opÄ«mus, -a, -um, fertile, fat; bÅs, bovis, m., ox

⁴¹ cÅn-sequor, follow up, gain

⁴² iÅ«cunditÄs, -tÄtis, f., pleasure, charm

⁴³ n. 21 above; here = food

⁴⁴ dÄ“sÄ«derium, -iÄ«, desire

⁴⁵ satietÄs, -tÄtis, f., abundance, satisfy

¹ XV (For more about Themistocles and Aristides see selections 19 and 20 below.) is said, is reported

² SerÄ«phius, -iÄ«, inhabitant of Seriphos, a small island in the Aegean Sea.

³ iÅ«rgium, -iÄ«, quarrel

⁴ splendor, -Åris, m., distinction, honor

⁵ as-sequor = ad-sequor, gain, attain

⁶ hercule, a mild oath, by Hercules

⁷ AthÄ“niÄ“nsis, -e, Athenian

⁸ Persae, -Ärum, m., the Persians

⁹ cÅntiÅ, -Ånis, f., assembly

¹⁰ salÅ«tÄris, -e, salutary, advantageous; modifies cÅnsilium

¹¹ opus est, it is necessary

¹² postulÅ (1), demand, request

¹³ quÄ«cum, quÄ« = old abl. form + cum, with whom

¹⁴ commÅ«nicÅ (1), communicate, share

¹⁵ huic = the last mentioned, Aristides

¹⁶ classis, -is, f., fleet

¹⁷ sub-dÅ«cÅ, beach; subjunct. because subordinate clause in ind. state. (see S.S.). Because of their shallow draft and small size, ancient ships were more often beached than anchored.

¹⁸ GythÄ“um, -Ä«, the port of Sparta

¹⁹ clam, adv., secretly

²⁰ incendÅ, -ere, -cendÄ«, -cÄnsum, set on fire, burn

²¹ frangÅ, -ere, frÄgÄ«, frÄctum, break, crush

²² necesse (indecl. adj.) est, it is necessary

²³ exspectÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., expectation, abl. of attendant circumstance

²⁴ per-Å«tilis, -e, very useful, advantageous

²⁵ auctÅre AristÄ«de, abl. abs.

²⁶ repudiÅ (1), reject

¹ XVI A homely little letter which serves as an antidote to Ciceroâ€™s usually lofty concerns.

² (MÄrcus) Tullius (CicerÅ)

³ salÅ«tem dÄ«cit

⁴ Terentia, -ae, wife of Cicero

⁵ TusculÄnum, -Ä«, Tusculan estate (praedium) southeast of Rome in Latium

⁶ ventÅ«rÅs (esse)

⁷ NÅnae, -Ärum, the Nones were the seventh day in March, May, July, October; the fifth day in other months.

⁸ postrÄ«diÄ“, adv., the day after

⁹ (curÄ) ut, take care that

¹⁰ plÅ«rÄ“s, several people

¹¹ fortasse, adv., perhaps

¹² com-moror (1), remain

¹³ lÄbrum, -Ä«, a wash basin or a bath

¹⁴ balneum, -Ä«, bathroom

¹⁵ (cÅ«rÄ) ut

¹⁶ item, adv., likewise

¹⁷ valÄtÅ«dÅ, -inis, f., health

¹⁸ necessÄrius, -a, -um = Eng.

¹⁹ KalendÄ«s OctÅbribus, on the Kalends of October = October 1st

²⁰ Sent from his estate at Venusia, in Apulia. The year is said to be 47 B.C.

¹ XVII In 43 B.C.

² adventus, -Å«s, arrival

³ triumvirÄ«, -Årum, commission of three men, the second triumvirate composed of Antony, Octavian, and Lepidus

⁴ his Tusculan villa

⁵ trÄnsversus, -a, -um, transverse, crosswise

⁶ FormiÄnum, -Ä«, estate near Formiae, which was nearly 100 miles south of Rome on the Appian Way near the sea

⁷ CaiÄ“ta, -ae, a sea-coast town not far from Formiae

⁸ as he was going to board ship (cÅnscendÅ, -ere, -scendÄ«, -scÄnsum, ascend)

⁹ aliquotiÄ“ns, adv., several times

¹⁰ altum, -Ä«, the deep, the sea

¹¹ prÅ-vehÅ, -ere, -vexÄ«, -vectum, carry forward; provectum (having sailed out) goes with eum below

¹² iactÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., tossing

¹³ taedium, -iÄ«, weariness, disgust

¹⁴ fuga, -ae, flight; fugae depends on taedium

¹⁵ regredior, -Ä«, -gressus sum, go back

¹⁶ cÅnstat, it is agreed

¹⁷ dÄ«micÅ (1), fight (to the finish)

¹⁸ lectÄ«ca, -ae, litter

¹⁹ (eÅs) quiÄtÅs, them quiet, subj. of patÄ«; but we say: them quietly. (quiÄtus, -a, -um)

²⁰ sors, sortis, f., lot

²¹ inÄ«quus, -a, -um, unfavorable, unjust (in-aequus)

²² prÅmineÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, jut out, step forth: (eÄ«) prÅminentÄ«, for him stepping forth = as he stepped forth, dat. of ref. or interest

²³ cervÄ«x, -vÄ«cis, f., neck

²⁴ praecÄ«dÅ, -ere, -cÄ«dÄ«, cÄ«sum (prae-caedÅ, cut), cut offâby the soldiers whom Antony had sent to execute Cicero in reprisal for Ciceroâs âPhilippicsâ denouncing Antony. Such were the horrors of the proscriptions.

²⁵ exprobrÅ (1), reproach, charge: (militÄs), exprobrantÄs (manÅ«s) scrÄ«psisse aliquid, manÅ«s praecÄ«dÄrunt

²⁶ positum, sc. est

²⁷ cÅnsulÄris, -is, m., ex-consul

²⁸ adversus, prep. + acc., against

²⁹ quantaâ¦ vÅx (fuerat), how great no voice had been = greater than any voice had been

³⁰ admÄ«rÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f. = Eng.

³¹ Ä“loquentia, -ae, f.; Ä“loquentiae, obj. gen. (S.S.)

³² attollÅ, -ere, raise, lift

³³ intueor, -Ä“rÄ«, -tuitus sum, look at

³⁴ trucÄ«dÅ (1), cut to pieces, butcher

³⁵ membrum, -Ä«, member (of the body), limb

³⁶ indecl. adj., sixty

³⁷ memorÄbilis, -e, remarkable, memorable

³⁸ per-sequor, follow up, set forth

³⁹ opus est + abl. = there is need of (Cicero)

⁴⁰ fuerit, perf. subjunct., potential subjunct., there would be need of

¹ XVIII 490 B.C., the first major battle of the Persian wars and one of the most illustrious victories in the apparently unending conflict between democracies and autocracies (despotisms): the relatively few Athenians, practically alone, against the hordes of the Persian autocracy.

² EurÅpa, -ae, Europe

³ trÄiciÅ, -ere, -iÄcÄ«, -iectus, transfer

⁴ Scythae, -Ärum, m., the Scythians, a nomadic people of southeastern Europe; ScythÄ«s, dat. with compound verbs

⁵ bellum Ä«n-ferÅ (-ferre, -tulÄ«, -lÄtus), make war upon, + dat.

⁶ Hister, -trÄ«, the Danube

⁷ quÄ, rel. adv. instead of rel. pron., where, by which, referring to pontem

⁸ trÄ (= trÄns)-dÅ«cÅ. Why the subjunct. in the rel. clause?

⁹ ab-sum, be away, be absent; abesset, subjunct. of implied ind. state., the thought in his mind being: âwhile I shall be awayâ

¹⁰ as guards

¹¹ Ionia and Aeolis, Gk. sections of Asia Minor

¹² singulÄ«, -ae, -a (pl.), separate, one each

¹³ sÄ“, acc., subj. of retentÅ«rum (esse)

¹⁴ the Greek-speaking peoples, obj. of retentÅ«rum

¹⁵ incolÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, inhabit

¹⁶ retentÅ«rum (esse); re-tineÅ

¹⁷ oppidum, -Ä«, town; occasionally city

¹⁸ tuenda, (the towns) to be protected = the protection of the towns (tueor, -Ä“rÄ«, tÅ«tus sum, look at, protect)

¹⁹ fut. more vivid condition in ind. state.: eÅs retinÄbÅ sÄ« amÄ«cÄ«s oppida trÄdiderÅ.

²⁰ hÅc modifies numerÅ. Note carefully that a characteristic of Neposâ style is the fondness for separating modifiers from the words which they modify. Be sure to match up such separated words accurately according to the rules of agreement.

²¹ MiltiadÄ“s, -is, m., Miltiades, Athenian general, hero of Marathon, who many years before the Battle of Marathon had been sent by the Athenians to rule over the Thracian Chersonesus, a peninsula west of the Hellespont.

²² crÄ“ber, -bra, -brum, numerous

²³ nÅ«ntius, -iÄ«, messenger

²⁴ FortÅ«na is here regarded as a person (deity). Why is Ä used?

²⁵ dÄ«-mittÅ, let go, lose

²⁶ trÄnsportÅ (1), transport, take across; trÄnsportÄrat = trÄnsportÄverat

²⁷ ind. state. depending on the idea of saying in hortÄtus est of the preceding sent.; direct form: sÄ« DÄrÄus interierit, EurÅpa erit tÅ«ta. inter-eÅ, perish

²⁸ tÅ«tus, -a, -um

²⁹ abl. of specification (S.S.), Greek in race or by race

³⁰ dominÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f. = Eng.

³¹ ef-ficiÅ, accomplish

³² still ind. state.

³³ rescindÅ, -ere, rescidÄ«, rescissum, cut down

³⁴ velâ€¦ vel, eitherâ€¦ or

³⁵ inopia, -ae, need, privation

³⁶ plÄrÄ«que, -Årumque, most people, very many (plÄrusque, -aque, -umque, the greater part, very many)

³⁷ Histiaeus, -Ä«, tyrant of Miletus in Asia Minor

³⁸ adeÅ, adv., so, to such a degree

³⁹ ab-horreÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, shrink from, be averse to

⁴⁰ cÅnfÄ«rmÅ (1), strengthen

⁴¹ subj. of cÅnfÄ«rmÄrÄ«

⁴² rÅ«rsus, adv., again

⁴³ dÄmigrÅ (1), depart (cf. migrate)

⁴⁴ conjunctive use of rel.

⁴⁵ redigÅ, -ere, -ÄgÄ«, -Äctum, reduce

⁴⁶ quÄ«ngentÄ«, -ae, -a, 500

⁴⁷ comparÄvit here = strong form of parÄvit

⁴⁸ eÄ« (= classÄ«), dat. with compounds

⁴⁹ prae-ficio, + dat., put in charge or command of

⁵⁰ DÄtis, -tidis, acc. DÄtim, Datis, a general; ArtaphernÄs, -is, Artaphernes, nephew of Darius

⁵¹ ducentÄ«, -ae, -a, 200

⁵² pedes, -itis, m., foot-soldier

⁵³ eques, -itis, m., horseman

⁵⁴ interserÅ, -ere, allege

⁵⁵ IÅnes, -um, m., the Ionians, a Gk. people inhabiting the central western coast of Asia Minor; -es, Gk. ending

⁵⁶ SardÄ“s, -ium, acc. SardÄ«s, Sardis, capital of the Persian province of Lydia in western Asia Minor

⁵⁷ expugnÅ (1), take by storm

⁵⁸ sua, refers to Sardis

⁵⁹ praefectus, -Ä«, commander, deputy

⁶⁰ rÄ“gius, -a, -um, royal

⁶¹ Euboea, -ae, Euboea, a large island off the eastern shore of central Greece

⁶² appellÅ, -ere, -pulÄ«, -pulsum, drive, bring to land

⁶³ Eretria, -ae, Eretria, a city of the western central coast of Euboea

⁶⁴ ab-ripiÅ = ÄripiÅ; abreptÅsâ¦ misÄrunt, they carried away and sent to

⁶⁵ inde, adv., from that place

⁶⁶ Attica, -ae, Attica, district in central Greece of which the capital was Athens (somewhat unusually called an oppidum in the next sentence)

⁶⁷ campus, -Ä«, field, plain

⁶⁸ MarathÅn, -Ånis, acc. -Åna, f., Marathon

⁶⁹ circiter, adv., about

⁷⁰ passus, -Å«s, pace (ca. 5â€™); mÄ«lia passuum, thousands of paces = miles

⁷¹ tumultus, -Å«s, disturbance, uprising

⁷² propinquus, -a, -um, near, neighboring

⁷³ per-moveÅ, move thoroughly, trouble

⁷⁴ nÅ«squam, adv., nowhere

⁷⁵ PhÄ«dippus, -Ä«, Phidippus, an Athenian courier (cursor, -Åris, m., runner)

⁷⁶ hÄ“merodromus, -Ä« (-dromoe, Gk. nom. pl.), day runner (Gk. word), professional runner. Herodotus says that Phidippus (or Phidippides) covered the 140 miles between Athens and Sparta in two days. QuÄ« agrees with hÄ“merodromoe rather than generis since a rel. pron. agrees with a pred. noun rather than with the antecedent.

⁷⁷ LacedaemÅn, -onis, f., Lacedaemonia, Sparta

⁷⁸ opus est + abl. (of means), there is need of, an impers. construction in which opus remains indecl.; opus esse, infin. in ind. state. with auxiliÅ in abl.

⁷⁹ creant, historical pres.

⁸⁰ praetor, -Åris, m., called stratÄgoi, generals, by the Athenians

⁸¹ prae-sum + dat., be in charge of; why subjunct.?

⁸² contentiÅ, -Ånis, f., controversy

⁸³ obviam (adv.) Ä«re + dat., go to meet

⁸⁴ aciÄ“s, -Ä“Ä«, line of battle

⁸⁵ alone, i.e., of the ten generals

⁸⁶ nÄ«tor, -Ä«, nÄ«xus sum, strive labor

⁸⁷ that a camp should be made = to take the field

⁸⁸ dat. of purp. (S.S.)

⁸⁹ PlataeÄ“nsÄ“s, -ium, m. pl., the men of Plataea, a city in Boeotia just over the border from Attica

⁹⁰ mÄ«lle here = a noun with gen. of whole mÄ«litum. This is regular with mÄ«lia but uncommon with mÄ«lle.

⁹¹ adventus, -Å«s, approach

⁹² armÄtÄ«, -Årum, armed men

⁹³ compleÅ, -Äre, -plÄvÄ«, -plÄtum, fill out, complete

⁹⁴ mÄ«rÄbilis, -e, wonderful, extraordinary; modifies cupiditÄte

⁹⁵ flagrÅ (1), burn, be excited

⁹⁶ because of which = and because of this

⁹⁷ it happened that

⁹⁸ collÄ“ga, -ae, m., colleague

⁹⁹ plÅ«sâ€¦ valÄ“ret, he had power more than = he had more power or influence than, he prevailed over. valÄ“ret, why subjunct.?

¹⁰⁰ impellÅ, -ere, -pulÄ«, -pulsum, impel

¹⁰¹ locÅ, place where, no prep. necessary with locÅ

¹⁰² dein = deinde

¹⁰³ posterus, -a, -um, next following

¹⁰⁴ rÄdÄ«x, -Ä«cis, f., root, base

¹⁰⁵ regiÅ, -Ånis, f., region

¹⁰⁶ Ä«nstruÅ, -ere, -strÅ«xÄ«, -strÅ«ctum, draw up (battle line)

¹⁰⁷ interlocked word order: aciÄ Ä«nstrÅ«ctÄ (in) regiÅne nÅn apertissimÄ; apertus, -a, -um, open

¹⁰⁸ namque, conj., more emphatic form of nam

¹⁰⁹ rÄrus, -a, -um, scattered: there were scattered trees

¹¹⁰ proelium committere, join battle

¹¹¹ altitÅ«dÅ, -inis, f., height

¹¹² tegÅ, -ere, tÄxÄ«, tÄctum, cover, protect

¹¹³ tractus, -Å«s, dragging

¹¹⁴ equitÄtus, -Å«s, cavalry

¹¹⁵ multitÅ«dÅ, -inis, f., large number

¹¹⁶ claudÅ, here enclose, surround

¹¹⁷ locum (esse) nÅn aequum suÄ«s

¹¹⁸ frÄ“tus, -a, -um, + abl., relying on

¹¹⁹ cÅnflÄ«gÅ, -ere, -flÄ«xÄ«, -flÄ«ctum, fight (cf. conflict)

¹²⁰ eÅ, adv., on that account

¹²¹ priusquam and antequam, before, + indic. denote an actual fact; + subjunct. denote anticipation as here: before they could come

¹²² dat.

¹²³ in quÅ (proeliÅ)

¹²⁴ abl. of degree of difference (S.S.)

¹²⁵ they were strong by so much more (strength) in respect to courage = they were so much more powerful in the matter of courage

¹²⁶ decemplex, gen. -plicis, tenfold

¹²⁷ prÅflÄ«gÅ (1), overthrow; prÅflÄ«gÄrint = -gÄverint. Why subjunct.?

¹²⁸ ad-hÅ«c, adv., thus far, hitherto

¹²⁹ exsistÅ, -ere, -stitÄ«, arise, exist, be

¹³⁰ nÅbilis, -e, famous

¹³¹ exiguus, -a, -um, small, scanty. âNever did so many owe so much to so few.â

¹³² prÅsternÅ, -ere, -strÄvÄ«, -strÄtum, overthrow, throw down

¹ XIX 480 B.C. The Battle of Salamis was the naval counterpart of Marathon, except that this time Athens had the help of Sparta.

² ThemistoclÄ“s, -is, or -Ä«, Themistocles, a talented Athenian politician.

³ Corcraeus, -a, -um, Corcyraen; Corcyra, a large island off the northwest coast of Greece. Actually Nepos is in error about Themistoclesâ€™ command in the Corcyraean affair but he is correct about the tremendous importance of Themistoclesâ€™ big-navy policy.

⁴ praesÄ“ns, gen. -entis, present

⁵ reliquus, -a, -um, remaining, rest of

⁶ metallum, -Ä«, a mine, silver mines at Laurium in Attica south of Athens

⁷ largÄ«tiÅ, -Ånis, f., generosity, liberality

⁸ magistrÄtus, -Å«s, civil office; civil officer, magistrate

⁹ quotannÄ«s, adv., annually

¹⁰ inter-eÅ, be lost, perish (cf. pereÅ): interÄ«ret, subjunct. introduced by cum; the subj. is pecÅ«nia.

¹¹ aedificÅ (1), build (cf. edifice)

¹² quÄ (classe)

¹³ frangÅ, -ere, frÄgÄ«, frÄctum, break, overcome

¹⁴ maritimus (-a, -um = Eng.; cf. mare) praedÅ (-Ånis, m., robber) = pirate; obj. of cÅnsectandÅ

¹⁵ cÅnsector (1), pursue, hound (cf. cÅnsequor)

¹⁶ in (doing) which

¹⁷ perÄ«tus, -a, -um, + gen., skilled in; obj. complement

¹⁸ nÄvÄlis, -e; cf. nÄvis

¹⁹ quantae salÅ«tÄ«, dat. of purp. with a dat. of ref., Graeciae (S.S.)

²⁰ Å«niversus, -a, -um, entire, whole, as a whole

²¹ Persicus, -a, -um, Persian; the Second Persian War

²² XerxÄ“s, -is or -Ä«, m., Xerxes, son of Darius and king of the Persians, 485â€“465 B.C.

²³ marÄ« et terrÄ (or terrÄ marÄ«que) abl. of place where, without a prep., regular in this formula

²⁴ invÄdÅ, -ere, -vÄsÄ«, -vÄsum, move against, invade

²⁵ nÄvium longÄrum, of 1,200 men-of-war; his fleet was of 1,200 ships = his fleet consisted ofâ¦

²⁶ onerÄria, -ae (nÄvis), transport

²⁷ terrestris exercitus, land army

²⁸ septingentÄ«, -ae, -a, seven hundred

²⁹ quadringentÄ«, -ae, -a, four hundred

³⁰ Though the subj., exercitus, is sg., fuÄ“runt is pl. according to the idea of plurality which precedes it.

³¹ adventus, -Å«s, approach, arrival

³² per-ferÅ

³³ acc. of place to which. At Delphi was the famous oracle of Apollo.

³⁴ acc. supine of cÅnsulÅ to express purp. = to consult

³⁵ quisnam, quidnam, who or what in the world

³⁶ both ind. quest. and deliberative subjunct.

³⁷ dÄlÄ«berÅ (1), deliberate; (eÄ«s) dÄlÄ«berantibus, dat.

³⁸ Pthia, -ae, the Pythian priestess, who gave the response of Apollo

³⁹ ligneus, -a, -um, wooden

⁴⁰ mÅ«niÅ (4), fortify, defend

⁴¹ respÅnsum, -Ä«, the noun of respondeÅ, subj. of valÄret

⁴² quÅ (adv.) valÄret, lit. in what direction this was strong or valid = in what way this applied or what this meant

⁴³ esse. The infin. shows that this is ind. state. with persuÄdeÅ and not the more common jussive noun clause introduced by ut: he persuaded (them) that it was the advice of Apollo that they should betakeâ¦

⁴⁴ sua, their things = their possessions

⁴⁵ eum mÅ«rum ligneum, that wooden wall (= the ships)

⁴⁶ significÅ (1), signify, mean; significÄrÄ«, ind. state, depending on a verb of saying understood

⁴⁷ ad-dÅ, -dere, -didÄ«, -ditum, add

⁴⁸ totidem, indecl. adj., just as many

⁴⁹ trirÄ“mis, -e, having three banks of oars

⁵⁰ partim, adv., partly

⁵¹ SalamÄ«s, -Ä«nis, acc. SalamÄ«na, f., Salamis, island on west coast of Attica; acc. of place to which (islands as well as cities and towns)

⁵² TroezÄ“n, -Ä“nis, acc. TroezÄ“na, f., Troezen, southeastern part of Argolis, across the Saronic Gulf from Athens.

⁵³ dÄportÅ (1), carry off

⁵⁴ the acropolis of the city of Athens.

⁵⁵ maiÅrÄs nÄtÅ«, those greater in respect to birth = old men, elders

⁵⁶ sacer, -cra, -crum, sacred; sacra, n. pl. sacred vessels, or rites

⁵⁷ prÅcÅ«rÅ (1), take care of

⁵⁸ i.e., Themistoclesâ€™

⁵⁹ plÄrÄ«sque cÄ«vitÄtibus, i.e., the allies of the Athenians; dat. with displicÄbat

⁶⁰ dis-placeÅ

⁶¹ dÄ«micÄrÄ«, impers. pass., lit. that it be fought, but translate that the war be fought. The infin. dÄ«micÄrÄ« is subj. of placÄbat.

⁶² dÄ“lÄ“ctus, -a, -um, chosen, picked; chosen men

⁶³ LeÅnidÄs, -ae, m., Leonidas

⁶⁴ Thermopylae, -Ärum, Thermopylae, a mountain pass near the southern border of Thessaly

⁶⁵ occupÅ (1), seize

⁶⁶ barbarus, -a, -um, foreign, uncivilized, barbarian (commonly applied by a kind of ethnocentrism to those not of the Gk. and Roman civilization)

⁶⁷ sustineÅ, -Äre, -tinuÄ«, -tentum, sustain; the subj. is iÄ« (= eÄ«).

⁶⁸ See App. under Numerals (cardinals 200 and 300); ducentae (nÄvÄs)

⁶⁸ See App. under Numerals (cardinals 200 and 300); ducentae (nÄvÄs)

⁶⁹ pred. gen. of possession: were of the Athenians = belonged to the Athenians

⁷⁰ apud ArtemÄ«sium, near Artemisium, promontory at northern tip of Euboea

⁷¹ continÄ“ns terra, continentis terrae, the mainland

⁷² classiÄrius, -iÄ«, a marine (lit. a soldier of the fleet)

⁷³ rÄ“gius, -a, -um, royal

⁷⁴ conflÄ«gÅ, -ere, -flÄ«xÄ«, -flÄ«ctum, to fight

⁷⁵ angustiae, -Ärum, narrow place

⁷⁶ multitÅ«dÅ, -inis, f., large number, multitude

⁷⁷ circum-eÅ, surround

⁷⁸ parÄ« proeliÅ, the battle was a draw

⁷⁹ nÄ“ = lest, similar to the construction after verbs of fearing

⁸⁰ adversÄrius, -a, -um, hostile; adversÄrius, -iÄ«, opponent, enemy

⁸¹ a simple fut. condition in a nÄ- clause The original thought was sÄ« pars superÄverit,â¦ premÄmur; the fut. perf. indic. superÄverit becomes pluperf. subjunct. superÄsset.

⁸² anceps, gen. ancipitis, two-headed, double

⁸³ quÅ = quÄrÄ

⁸⁴ result clause, subj. of factum est: = the result was that

⁸⁵ exadversum, prep. + acc., opposite

⁸⁶ cÅnstituÅ, -ere, -stituÄ«, -stitÅ«tum, draw up, establish

⁸⁷ astÅ«, n. indecl., the city (= Athens), obj. of accessit

⁸⁸ incendium, -iÄ«, burning, fire. The marks of this fire can still be seen on some of the marble pieces later built into the wall of the Acropolis.

⁸⁹ per-terreÅ

⁹⁰ place to which without a prep. as in the sg. domum

⁹¹ resistÅ, -ere, -stitÄ«, make a stand, resist

⁹² universÅsâ¦ posse, all together (united) they could be equal (to the Persians)

⁹³ imperf. of ait

⁹⁴ di-spergÅ, -ere, -spersÄ«, -spersum, scatter

⁹⁵ testor (1), testify, declare

⁹⁶ EurybiadÄs, -is, m., Eurybiades; EurybiadÄ« depends on adfÄ«rmÄbat.

⁹⁷ summa, -ae, highest place

⁹⁸ summae imperiÄ« (gen. of whole) praeerat, he was in charge of the highest part of the command = he was commander-in-chief

⁹⁹ Subj. of fore (= futÅ«rum esse) is id.

¹⁰⁰ adfÄ«rmÅ (1), assert, declare

¹⁰¹ noctÅ«, adv., at night

¹⁰² (illum) dÄ“ servÄ«s suÄ«s, that one of his slaves

¹⁰³ considered

¹⁰⁴ in his (Themistoclesâ€™) own words, i.e., in his own name

¹⁰⁵ adversÄriÅs (= hostÄs) eius (= rÄgis)

¹⁰⁶ fuga, -ae, flight

¹⁰⁷ quÄ« = et eÄ«

¹⁰⁸ sÄ« discessissentâ¦ (eum) bellum cÅnfectÅ«rum (esse), another simple fut. condition in ind. state.: sÄ« discesserint (fut. perf.), tÅ« bellum cÅnficiÄsâ¦; cÅnficiÅ, -ere, -fÄcÄ«, -fectum, finish, accomplish.

¹⁰⁹ one at a time

¹¹⁰ aggredior, -gredÄ«, -gressus sum, attack

¹¹¹ dolus, -Ä«, deceit, trick. What kind of gen. is dolÄ«?

¹¹² sub-sum, be under, be concealed

¹¹³ aliÄ“nus, -a, -um, foreign, unfavorable

¹¹⁴ contrÄ, adv., on the contrary

¹¹⁵ opportÅ«nus, -a, -um, advantageous, referring to locÅ

¹¹⁶ abl. of place where without a prep.

¹¹⁷ The perf. subjunct. is not uncommon in result clause in historical sequence.

¹¹⁸ prÅ«dentia, -ae, foresight, discretion

¹¹⁹ succumbÅ, -ere, -cubuÄ«, submit, succumb

¹²⁰ MarathÅniÅ tropaeÅ, trophy or victory at Marathon

¹²¹ dÄ-vincÅ, conquer completely

¹ XX AristÄ«dÄ“s, -is, m., Aristides, Athenian statesman and general

² Lsimachus, -Ä«, Lysimachus

³ aequÄlis, -is, m., an equal in age, a contemporary

⁴ ThemistoclÄ«, here gen. of possession

⁵ prÄ«ncipÄtus, -Å«s, first place, leadership

⁶ abl. of degree of difference (S.S.) depending on the idea of comparison in antistÄret: how much

⁷ anti-stÅ, -Äre, -stetÄ«, stand before = excel

⁸ innocentia, -ae, harmlessness; integrity. Why dat.?

⁹ excellÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, -celsum, excel; excellÄbat: note that quamquam (although) is used with the indic.

¹⁰ abstinentia, -ae, self-restraint, esp. in matters involving public funds, uprightness; abstinentiÄ, abl. of specification (S.S.).

¹¹ cognÅmen, -minis, n., here = epithet, apellative. Of the three regular Roman names (praenÅmen, nÅmen, cognÅmen) the cognÅmen (cf. cognÅscÅ) seems to have originated as a kind of nickname.

¹² collabefiÅ, -fierÄ«, -factus sum, be overthrown, be ruined

¹³ testula, -ae, little potsherd; ostracism; testulÄ abl. of accordance or perhaps means. Look up the interesting history of ostracism, a political safety valve against tyranny.

¹⁴ illÄ, in the unusual position of following its noun = that famous

¹⁵ exsiliÅ, abl. of penalty (= a form of abl. of means)

¹⁶ decem annÅrum, gen. of description

¹⁷ multÅ (1), punish

¹⁸ re-primÅ, -ere, -pressÄ«, -pressum, press back, check

¹⁹ concitÅ (1), arouse, excite

²⁰ jussive noun clause, writing that he should be driven out

²¹ eÅ, i.e., the quendam above

²² (what he had committed) that

²³ ignÅrÅ (1), not know, be unacquainted with

²⁴ sibi nÅn placÄre (impers.), it was not pleasing to him = he was displeased (becauseâ¦)

²⁵ lÄ“gitimus, -a, -um, fixed by law, legal

²⁶ postquam, conj. + perf. indic., after

²⁷ dÄscendÅ, -ere, -scendÄ«, -scÄnsum, descend, march on

²⁸ quam = postquam; post sometimes omitted after an ordinal number in the abl. of time construction

²⁹ scÄ«tum, -Ä«, decree (cf. plebiscite)

³⁰ restituÅ, -ere, -stituÄ«, -stitÅ«tum, restore

³¹ inter-sum + dat., be present at, take part in

³² priusquam + subjunct.

³³ the same man = he also

³⁴ Plataeae, -Ärum, Plataea

³⁵ fundÅ, -ere, fÅ«dÄ«, fÅ«sum, pour out, rout

³⁶ Mardonius, -iÄ«, Mardonius, Persian general under Xerxes in command of the âbarbariansâ

³⁷ aequitÄs, -tÄtis, f., equity, fairness; aequitÄte, abl. of cause (S.S.)

³⁸ factum estâ¦ ut summa imperiÄ« trÄnsferrÄtur, it happened that the chief command was transferred; utâ¦ trÄnsferrÄtur, noun clause of result used as subj. of factum est

³⁹ PausaniÄs, -ae, m., Pausanias, a Spartan, victor over the Persians at Plataea in 479 B.C. but a person whose selfish ambition was too great to permit his continuing long as commander-in-chief of the united Gk. forces

⁴⁰ abl. abs.

⁴¹ fugÅ (1), put to flight, rout; not to be confused with fugiÅ

⁴² LocÄ« Im. XIX n. 97â€“98

⁴³ intemperantia, -ae, intemperance, arrogance

⁴⁴ societÄs, -tÄtis, f., confederacy, alliance

⁴⁵ applicÅ (1), attach

⁴⁶ dÄligÅ, -ere, -lÄgÄ«, -lÄctum = legÅ

⁴⁷ = barbarÅs

⁴⁸ LocÄ« Im. XIV n. 18

⁴⁹ re-pellÅ

⁵⁰ forte, adv., by chance

⁵¹ If novus is new, what must the verb re-novÅ (1) mean?

⁵² Both gerundive phrases belong in the quantum clause

⁵³ quaeque cÄ«vitÄs: quaeque, f. adj. form of quisque

⁵⁴ cÅnstituÅ, -ere, -stituÄ«, -stitÅ«tum, establish, decide; quÄ« cÅnstitueret, rel. clause of purp., which has as its obj. the quantumâ¦ daret clause

⁵⁵ arbitrium, -Ä«, judgment, decision; arbitriÅ, what kind of abl.?

⁵⁶ quadringÄna et sexÄgÄna (distributive numerals) talenta quotannÄ«s, 460 talents each year

⁵⁷ DÄ“los, -Ä«, f., Delos, small island in the center of the Cyclades in the Aegean

⁵⁸ aerÄrium, -iÄ«, treasury

⁵⁹ posterus, -a, -um, coming after (post), later

⁶⁰ quÄ abstinentiÄ, abl. of description, of what integrity he was = how great was his integrity

⁶¹ perf. subjunct., ind. quest. depending on indicium

⁶² indicium, -iÄ«, indication, proof

⁶³ the fact that

⁶⁴ prae-sum + dat., be in charge of

⁶⁵ dÄ-cÄdÅ, depart, die

⁶⁶ quÄ« = old form of abl.: with efferÄ“tur = by which he might be buried = enough to bury him

⁶⁷ quÅ, adv., wherefore

⁶⁸ pÅ«blicÄ“, adv., at public expense

⁶⁹ dÅs, dÅtis, f., dowry

⁷⁰ collocÅ (1), place, settle in marriage

¹ XXI Timoleon, who came from a noble family at Corinth, was a great champion of liberty against tyranny. By 334 B.C. he was in Sicily fighting the Carthaginians, expelling tyrants, and establishing democracies.

² DiÅn, DiÅnis, m., Dion, relative and friend of the tyrant Dionysius the Elder. With the aid of Plato he triedâbut in vainâto give a noble pattern to the life of Dionysius the Younger, who followed his father in tyranny. After finally exiling Dionysius the Younger from Syracuse, he himself ruled tyrannically and was assassinated in 353 B.C.

³ Dionsius, -iÄ«, Dionysius the Younger

⁴ potior + gen. or abl.

⁵ CorinthiÄ«, -Årum, Corinthians

⁶ TÄ«moleÅn, -ontis, m., Timoleon

⁷ incrÄ“dibilis, -e, incredible

⁸ fÄlÄ«citÄs, -tÄtis, f., happiness, good fortune

⁹ dÄ-pellÅ

¹⁰ tÅ«tÅ, adv., safely

¹¹ Corinthus, -Ä«, f., Corinth, on the Isthmus of Corinth

¹² LocÄ« Ant. VIII n. 20â€“21

¹³ uterque, utraque, utrumque, each; here = both

¹⁴ crÅ«dÄlitÄs, -tÄtis, f., cruelty

¹⁵ These words refer not only to the expulsion of Dionysius, but also to a great victory over the Carthaginians in Sicily as recounted in the omitted passages.

¹⁶ diÅ«turnitÄs, -tÄtis, f., long duration

¹⁷ regiÅ, -Ånis, f., region; here = country districts

¹⁸ dÄ“sertus, -a, -um, deserted

¹⁹ con-quÄ«rÅ, -ere, -quÄ«sÄ«vÄ«, -quÄ«sÄ«tum (quaerÅ), seek out, gather together

²⁰ colÅnus, -Ä«, settler, colonist

²¹ sua, n. pl.

²² novÄ«s (colÅnÄ«s)

²³ vacuÄ-faciÅ, make empty

²⁴ possessiÅ, -Ånis, f., possession, property

²⁵ dÄ«vidÅ, -ere, dÄ«vÄ«sÄ«, dÄ«vÄ«sum, divide, distribute

²⁶ dis-iciÅ, throw apart, scatter

²⁷ fÄnum, -Ä«, shrine, temple (cf. profane, fanatic, fan = devotee)

²⁸ dÄ-tegÅ, -ere, -tÄxÄ«, -tÄctum, unroof, uncover (cf. detect)

²⁹ re-ficiÅ

³⁰ tantÄ«sâ€¦ opibus: abl. of description

³¹ (SiculÄ«s) etiam invÄ«tÄ«s, (the Sicilians) even against their will

³² tantumâ€¦ licÄ“ret: cum, although, introduces this clause as well as the preceding one.

³³ SiculÄ«, -Årum, the Sicilians

³⁴ obtineÅ, -Äre, -tinuÄ«, -tentum, occupy, hold

³⁵ cum prÄ«mum, as soon as

³⁶ prÄ«vÄtus, -Ä«, private citizen; as a private citizen, heâ¦

³⁷ imperÄ«tÄ“, adv., unskillfully, ignorantly

³⁸ benevolentia, -ae, good-will, kindness

³⁹ prÅ-vehÅ, -ere, -vexÄ«, -vectum, carry forward

⁴⁰ lÅ«men, -minis, n., light; sight

⁴¹ calamitÄs, -tÄtis, f., misfortune

⁴² moderÄtÄ, adv., with moderation

⁴³ perf. subjunct. in historical sequence

⁴⁴ Ä«nsolÄ“ns, gen. -entis, arrogant, insolent

⁴⁵ glÅriÅsus, -a, -um, here = boastful

⁴⁶ praedicÅ (1), declare, relate

⁴⁷ aliud quam, other than

⁴⁸ potissimum, adv., especially, above all

⁴⁹ nÅ«men, -minis, n., divine power, command

⁵⁰ nÄtÄlis diÄs, nÄtÄlis diÄÄ«, m., birthday

⁵¹ quÅâ¦ ut, LocÄ« Im. XX n. 38, 67

⁵² fÄ“stus, -a, -um, festive

⁵³ DÄ“maenetus, -Ä«, Demaenetus, an enemy of Timoleon

⁵⁴ cÅntiÅ, -Ånis, f., assembly

⁵⁵ rÄs gestae, rÄrum gestÄrum (lit. things done), exploits, deeds

⁵⁶ dÄ-trahÅ, detract, disparage

⁵⁷ nÅnnÅ«lla is n. acc. pl.âinvehor, -Ä«, -vectus sum (deponent form of in-vehÅ), + in + acc., make an attack on, inveigh against: nÅnnÅ«lla inveherÄtur in, he made some attacks on

⁵⁸ dÄ“mum, adv., at last

⁵⁹ damnÅ (1) + gen., condemn on the charge of; vÅtÄ« damnÄrÄ«, to be condemned to pay a vow = to have a vow or prayer granted

⁶⁰ precor (1), beseech

⁶¹ dat. of quÄ«-vÄ«s, quae-vÄ«s, quid-vÄ«s (quod-vÄ«s), indef., anyone at all, anything at all

⁶² impÅ«ne, adv., with impunity

⁶³ dÄ«cere, subj. of licÄ“ret

⁶⁴ pÅ«blicÄ“, adv. of pÅ«blicus

⁶⁵ gymnasium, -iÄ«, gymnasium, which in Gk. had a much broader meaning than it does in Eng.

⁶⁶ TÄ«moleontÄ“um, the Timoleonteum (gymnasium)

⁶⁷ celebrÅ (1), celebrate

⁶⁸ sepeliÅ, -Ä«re, -pelÄ«vÄ«, -pultum, bury

¹ XXII METER: Greater Asclepiad. nÄ“ quaesierÄ«s (= quaesÄ«verÄ«s): nÄ“ + perf. subjunct. = a colloquial prohibition (negative command), do not seek

² nefÄs, n., indecl., wrong, sin; nefÄs (est), it is wrong

³ quemâ€¦ quem, modifies fÄ«nem

⁴ LeuconoÄ“, -es, f., LeuconoÃ«, a Gk. name

⁵ temptÅ (1), try; temptÄrÄ«s = temptÄverÄ«s, another neg. command

⁶ numerÅs, calculations employed by astrologers in casting horo-scopes; âBabylonianâ because astrology was associated with the East. With the decay of belief in the old-time religion in Rome during the 1st cent. B.C., astrology and superstitions prospered. Apparently LeuconoÃ« had visited a fortune teller.

⁷ ut melius (est), how (much) better it is

⁸ i.e., projected too far into the future

⁹ resecÅ, -Äre, -secuÄ«, -sectum, cut off, prune back; resecÄs, poetic use of the pres. subjunct. (jussive) for the pres. imperat.

¹⁰ invidus, -a, -um, envious

¹¹ minimum, adv. = minimÄ“

¹² crÄ“dulus, -a, -um, believing in, trusting + dat.; crÄ“dula, nom. f. sg. agreeing with the subj. of carpe, i.e. LeuconoÄ“

¹³ posterÅ (diÄÄ«), dat.

¹ XXIII METER: Sapphic stanza. integer, -gra, -grum, untouched, blameless; (vir) integer vÄ«tae (poetic gen. of specification), the person blameless in his life

² pÅ«rus, -a, -um, pure, free from; sceleris, poetic gen. of separation or specification

³ Maurus, -a, -um, Moorish (= Mauritanian)

⁴ iaculum, -Ä«, missile, javelin (cf. iaciÅ)

⁵ arcus, -Å«s, bow

⁶ venÄnÄtus, -a, -um, poisonous, dipped in poison

⁷ gravidus, -a, -um, laden (with); cf. gravis

⁸ sagitta, -ae, arrow

⁹ Fuscus, -Ä«, Fuscus, a literary man and a close, sometimes waggish, friend of Horace

¹⁰ pharetra, -ae, quiver

¹¹ lupus, -Ä«, wolf

¹² SabÄ«nus, -a, -um, Sabine; cf. LocÄ« Ant. X

¹³ cantÅ (1), sing about; dum + historical pres. to denote continued action in past time: while I was singing about

¹⁴ LalagÄ“, -Ä“s, acc. LalagÄ“n (Gk. noun), f., Lalage, name of a girlâ€”a most mellifluous name!

¹⁵ terminus, -Ä«, boundary (cf. terminus, term, terminate)

¹⁶ vagor (1), wander, ramble (cf. vagary, vagabond)

¹⁷ expediÅ (4), disentangle, set free; cÅ«rÄ«s expedÄ«tÄ«s, abl. abs.

¹⁸ Note the interlocked word order of this stanza, which is so characteristic of Lat. poetry: mÄ (obj. of fÅ«git) at the beginning modified by inermem at the end; silvÄ in SabÄ«nÄ, place where phrase interrupted by lupus subj. of fÅ«git; all this separated from the main verb by a double dum clause

¹⁹ inermis, -e, unarmed; cf. integer vÄ«taeâ¦ nÅn eget iaculÄ«s.

²⁰ piger, -gra, -grum, lazy, sluggish, torpid (because frozen), modifying campÄ«s (campus, -Ä«, field) in a place-where phrase without a prep. (the omission of a prep. is common in poetry). The order of the thought is: pÅne mÄ (in) pigrÄ«s campÄ«s ubiâ¦

²¹ aestÄ«vus, -a, -um, summer (cf. aestÄs)

²² aura, -ae, breeze

²³ = (or put me) in eÅ latere mundÄ« quodâ¦; latus, -eris, n., side, region

²⁴ nebula, -ae, mist, fog

²⁵ malus = inclement, because Jupiter is here god of the weather

²⁶ urgeÅ, -Äre, ursÄ«, urge, press, oppress

²⁷ currus, -Å«s, chariot

²⁸ dulce, poetic for dulciter. These exquisitely mellifluous last lines somewhat onomatopoetically suggest the dulcet timbre of Lalageâ€™s voice and laugh.

¹ XXIV METER: Sapphic stanza. rÄ“ctius, adv., rightly, well, suitably

² LicinÄ«, voc. of Licinius, a person who seems to have been wanting in the virtue of moderation

³ the deep (sea)

⁴ i.e., heading out to the deep

⁵ procella, -ae, storm, gale

⁶ cautus, -a, -um, cautious, circumspect; with dumâ€¦ horrÄ“scis, while you in your cautionâ€¦

⁷ horrÄscÅ, -ere, horruÄ«, begin to shudder at, begin to dread

⁸ altum and lÄ«tus = extremes

⁹ inÄ«quus, -a, -um, unequal; here = treacherous

¹⁰ aureus, -a, -um, golden

¹¹ mediocritÄs, -tÄtis, f., moderation, the mean between extremes. Note that Horace does not say that âmediocrityâ is golden! The idea of (aurea) mediocritÄs was common in Gk. ethical thought, and Aristotle made it a cardinal virtue in his âEthics.â

¹² tÅ«tus caret, secure (in his philosophy of the âgolden meanâ) he is free fromâ¦

¹³ obsolÄ“tus, -a, -um, worn out, dilapidated

¹⁴ sordÄ“s, -ium, f. pl., dirt, filth; sordibus, what kind of abl.?

¹⁵ invidendÄ, sure to be envied

¹⁶ sÅbrius, -a, -um, sober-minded, moderate, in his sobriety

¹⁷ aula, -ae, palace

¹⁸ agitÅ (1), agitate, toss

¹⁹ pÄ«nus, -Ä«, f., pine

²⁰ celsus, -a, -um, high, lofty

²¹ cÄsus, -Å«s, fall, destruction

²² dÄcidÅ, -ere, -cidÄ«, fall down (cf. cadÅ)

²³ turris, -is, f., tower

²⁴ feriÅ (4), strike

²⁵ fulgur, -uris, n., lightning, thunderbolt

²⁶ anticipates, expects

²⁷ Ä«nfestus, -a, -um, unsafe, dangerous, adverse; Ä«nfestÄ«s (rÄ“bus) dat., lit.: for his adverse circumstances (= in adversity) he anticipates the other (= the opposite) fortune (sortem)

²⁸ secundÄ«s (rÄ“bus) balances Ä«nfestÄ«s: for his favorable circumstances (= in prosperity) he apprehends the opposite fortune.

²⁹ alter, the other of two; here = the opposite

³⁰ sors, sortis, f., lot, fortune; sortem, obj. of spÄ“rat and metuit

³¹ prae-parÅ (1), make ready in advance, prepare: well prepared (by the philosophy of life which Horace is here enunciating)

³² subj. of spÄ“rat and metuit

³³ Ä«nfÅrmis, -e, shapeless, hideous, horrid

³⁴ hiems, hiemis, f., stormy weather, winter

³⁵ Jupiter as god of sky and weather

³⁶ Ä«dem, the same god = he also

³⁷ sum-moveÅ, remove, drive away, sc. hiemÄs

³⁸ male (est), it is bad, things are bad

³⁹ et Ålim, also in the future

⁴⁰ here = sometimes

⁴¹ cithara, -ae, lyre

⁴² suscitÅ (1), arouse; suscitat, subj. is ApollÅ

⁴³ MÅ«sa, -ae, a Muse

⁴⁴ tendÅ, -ere, tetendÄ«, tÄnsum, stretch

⁴⁵ ApollÅ, -inis, m., Apollo, god of the sun, prophecy, poetry, and music; also god of archery, pestilence, and medicine. Apollo has two aspects: happy and constructive (MÅ«sam); unhappy and destructive (arcum).

⁴⁶ rÄ“bus angustÄ«s, abl. abs., when things are narrow (= difficult), i.e., in adversity

⁴⁷ anim-Åsus, -a, -um (-Åsus, suffix = full of), spirited

⁴⁸ appÄreÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -itum, show oneâs self; appÄrÄ, analyze the form carefully.

⁴⁹ here = if you are wise

⁵⁰ see n. 36 above

⁵¹ con-trahÅ, draw in, shorten

⁵² turgidus, -a, -um, swollen

⁵³ vÄ“lum, -Ä«, sail

¹ XXV METER: Alcaic stanza. Ä“heu, cf. heu. This sigh is emphasized by the repetition of Postumusâ€™ name.

² fugÄx, gen. -Äcis, fleeting

³ lÄbor, -Ä«, lÄpsus sum, slip, glide

⁴ pietÄs, -tÄtis, f., loyalty, devotion, piety

⁵ rÅ«ga, -ae, wrinkle (cf. corrugated)

⁶ Ä«nstÄns, gen. -antis, pressing, urgent

⁷ senecta, -ae = senectÅ«s

⁸ indomitus, -a, -um, untamable, invincible

⁹ frÅ«strÄ, adv., in vain. What is the significance of its emphatic position?

¹⁰ cruentus, -a, -um, bloody

¹¹ MÄrs, MÄrtis, m., Mars, god of war; MÄrte, what abl.?

¹² frangÅ, -ere, frÄgÄ«, frÄctum, break

¹³ raucus, -a, -um, hoarse, noisy

¹⁴ flÅ«ctus, -Å«s, wave; frÄctÄ«s flÅ«ctibus, broken waves = breakers

¹⁵ Hadria, -ae, m., Adriatic Sea

¹⁶ autumnus, -Ä«, autumn, unhealthy part of the year because of the Sirocco

¹⁷ depends on nocentem

¹⁸ auster, -trÄ«, the south wind, the Sirocco blowing from the Sahara

¹⁹ vÄ«sÅ, -ere, vÄ«sÄ«, vÄ«sum, visit; vÄ«sendus (est)

²⁰ Äter, Ätra, Ätrum, dark, modifying CÅctos

²¹ languidus, -a, -um, sluggish, weak

²² CÅctos, -Ä«, m., Cocytus, the river of wailing, one of the rivers surrounding Hades; CÅctos, Gk. nom.

²³ DanaÄ« genus, the offspring of DanaÃ¼s, whose 49 daughters murdered their husbands and in Hades were punished by having to pour water eternally into a sieve

²⁴ Ä«nfÄmis, -e, infamous

²⁵ damnÅ (1) condemn

²⁶ SÄ«syphus, -Ä«, Sisyphus, who was condemned eternally to roll up a hill a stone which rolled down againâ€”an exquisite nightmare

²⁷ AeolidÄ“s, -ae, m., son of Aeolus

²⁸ After verbs of accusing, condemning, and acquitting the gen. can be used to express the charge or the penalty involved.

²⁹ linquenda (est), balancing vÄ«sendus in contrast; linquÅ = relinquÅ

³⁰ tellÅ«s, -Å«ris, f., earth, land

³¹ invÄ«sus, -a, -um, hated, hateful

³² cupressus, -Ä«, f., cypress (tree); invÄ«sÄs because they were used at funerals and were planted near tombs

³³ neque Å«lla hÄrum arborum, nor any = and noneâ¦

³⁴ brevem dominum, in apposition with tÄ“; brevem, implying that life is brief

¹ XXVI METER: Sapphic stanza. vÄ«vitur parvÅ bene (ab eÅ) cui, it is lived on little well by him for whom: vÄ«vitur, impers. pass. = he lives well on little (i.e., not in abject poverty and not in the lap of luxury).

² cui, dat. of ref. but most easily translated by whose

³ paternum salÄ«num (salÄ«num, -Ä«), paternal salt-cellar; the long list of words derived from sÄl provides some idea of the importance of salt and the salt-cellar.

⁴ splendeÅ, -Äre, shine

⁵ tenuis, -e, plain, simple

⁶ levis, -e, here = gentle

⁷ sordidus, -a, -um, sordid (cf. sordÄs LocÄ« Im. XXIV n. 14); cupÄ«dÅ is m. in Horace.

⁸ auferÅ (ab-ferÅ)

⁹ = cÅ«r

¹⁰ fortÄs (virÄ«) brevÄ« aevÅ (aevum, -Ä«, time, life)

¹¹ iaculor (1), aim at

¹² Quidâ¦ mÅ«tÄmus, lit. why do we exchange lands warmed by another sun? The expression is poetic and in part illogical but the sense is clear: why do we exchange our lands for those warmed by another sun? âThe pasture is always greenerâ¦â

¹³ exsul, exsulis, m., exile; with patriae quis, who an exile of (from) his native land

¹⁴ fÅ«git, perf., has ever fled

¹⁵ scandÅ, -ere, scandÄ«, scÄnsum, climb up

¹⁶ aerÄtus, -a, -um, fitted with bronze, probably referring to the bronze beaks of the men-of-war (longae nÄvÄs), which were faster than the ordinary shipsâthough even these cannot outstrip anxiety.

¹⁷ turma, -ae, a troop of cavalry (equitum, LocÄ« Im. XVIII n. 53). A person cannot ride fast enough to escape care.

¹⁸ Åcior, -ius, adj. in compar. degree, swifter, agreeing with cÅ«ra

¹⁹ cervus, -Ä«, stag

²⁰ nimbus, -Ä«, rain cloud

²¹ Eurus, -Ä«, wind (from the southeast)

²² laetus, -a, -um, happy, joyful

²³ praesÄ“ns, gen. -entis, present; in praesÄ“ns (tempus) for the present (cf. the carpe diem philosophy)

²⁴ Åderit, perf. subjunct., jussive, let (the laetus animus) refuse to (hate to) be anxious about (cÅ«rÄre)

²⁵ amÄrus, -a, -um, bitter, disagreeable; amÄra, n. pl.

²⁶ lentus, -a, -um, pliant, tenacious, slow, lingering; here = tolerant, quiet

²⁷ temperÅ (1), control, temper

²⁸ rÄ«sus, -Å«s, laughter (cf. rÄ«deÅ)

²⁹ ab omnÄ« parte, from every part = in every respect, completely

¹ XXVII METER: Sapphic stanza. Hic diÄ“s, referring to Augustusâ€™ return from the campaign of 27â€“25 B.C. in Spain

² eximÅ, -ere, -ÄmÄ«, -Ämptum, take away

³ Caesar = Augustus. When C. Octavius was adopted by his great-uncle, C. Iulius Caesar, his name became C. Iulius Caesar Octavianus, to which the senate added the title of Augustus in 27 B.C.

⁴ unguentum, -Ä«, ointment, perfume

⁵ puer = slave; cf. Fr. garÃ§on

⁶ corÅna, -ae, crown, wreath

⁷ cadus, -Ä«, wine jar

⁸ MÄrsus, -a, -um, Marsian; duellum = old form of bellum: MarsÄ« duellÄ«, of the Marsian, or Social, War of 91â88 B.C., by which the sociÄ« (allies) of Rome in Italy gained full citizenship; i.e., a 65-year-old wine

⁹ memor, gen. -oris, mindful

¹⁰ Spartacus, -Ä«, Spartacus, the gladiator who led the slaves in revolt against Rome, 73â€“71 B.C.

¹¹ quÄ, adv., anywhere or in any way

¹² fallÅ, -ere, fefellÄ«, falsum, deceive, escape the notice of

¹³ testa, -ae, jug

¹ XXVIII METER: Lesser Asclepiad. perennis, -e, lasting (throughout the year)

² rÄgÄlis, -e, royal

³ situs, -Å«s, site, situation; here = structure

⁴ pramis, -idis, f., pyramid

⁵ altus, -a, -um, high; altius agrees with monumentum.

⁶ imber, -bris, m., storm

⁷ edÄx, gen. edacis, greedy, destructive

⁸ aquilÅ, -Ånis, m., north wind

⁹ impotÄ“ns, gen. -ntis, powerless (to injure my monument)

¹⁰ dÄ«ruÅ, -ere, -ruÄ«, -rutum, raze, destroy

¹¹ in-numerÄbilis, -e = Eng.

¹² seriÄ“s, -Ä“Ä«, succession

¹³ LibitÄ«na, -ae, Libitina, goddess of funerals; death

¹ XXIX METER: Iambic trimeter. Phaedrus: freedman of Augustus, who made extensive use of Aesopâ€™s fables. pÄ“ra, -ae, wallet

² im-pÅnÅ, + dat., put on

³ proprius, -a, -um, oneâ€™s own, here = our own

⁴ repleÅ, -Äre, -plÄvÄ«, -plÄtum, fill; (pÄram) replÄtam

⁵ tergum, -Ä«, back

⁶ dedit, here = put

⁷ aliÄ“nus, -a, -um, belonging to another; aliÄ“nÄ«s (vitiÄ«s), abl. with gravem

⁸ sc. nostrum

⁹ (alteram pÄ“ram) gravemâ€¦ suspendit

¹⁰ simul = simul ac, as soon as

¹¹ dÄlinquÅ, -ere, -lÄ«quÄ«, -lictum, fail, commit a crime

¹² cÄnsor, -Åris, m., censor; censurer, severe judge

¹ XXX METER: Iambic trimeter. famÄ“s, -is, abl. -e, appetite, hunger

² vulpÄ“s, -is, f., fox

³ vÄ«nea, -ae, vineyard

⁴ Å«va, -ae, bunch of grapes

⁵ ap-petÅ (= ad-petÅ), reach toward, desire (cf. appetite); appetÄbat, note the force of the imperf.

⁶ saliÅ, -Ä«re, -uÄ«, saltum, jump

⁷ quam = Å«vam

⁸ mÄtÅ«rus, -a, -um, ripe

⁹ sÅ«mÅ, -ere, sÅ«mpsÄ«, sÅ«mptum, take

¹⁰ complem. infin. with possunt

¹¹ ÄlevÅ (1), disparage, weaken

¹² ad-scrÄ«bÅ, assign

¹ XXXI METER: Iambic trimeter. persÅna, -ae, mask worn by actors

² tragicus, -a, -um, tragic

³ forte, adv., by chance

⁴ speciÄ“s, -Ä“Ä«, appearance, form

⁵ cerebrum, -Ä«, brain

⁶ tribuÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, -Å«tum, allot, assign, give

¹ XXXII METER: Iambic trimeter. fÅns, fontis, m., spring

² restÅ, -Äre, restitÄ«, remain (standing)

³ liquor, -Åris, m., liquid

⁴ effigiÄ“s, -Ä“Ä«, image, likeness

⁵ rÄmÅsus, -a, -um, branching

⁶ mÄ«ror (1), marvel at, wonder

⁷ crÅ«s, crÅ«ris, n., leg

⁸ nimius, -a, -um, excessive

⁹ tenuitÄs, -tÄtis, f., thinness

¹⁰ vituperÅ (1), blame, find fault with

¹¹ vÄ“nor (1), hunt; vÄ“nantum, gen. pl. of pres. partic.

¹² con-territus

¹³ canis, -is, m. / f., dog

¹⁴ ÄlÅ«dÅ, -ere, -lÅ«sÄ«, -lÅ«sum, evade

¹⁵ ferus, -Ä«, wild animal

¹⁶ re-tentus, -a, -um, held back, held fast

¹⁷ lacerÅ (1), tear to pieces (cf. lacerate)

¹⁸ morsus, -Å«s, bite

¹⁹ saevus, -a, -um, fierce, savage

²⁰ ÄdÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, give out, utter

²¹ mÄ“ Ä«nfÄ“lÄ«cem, acc. of exclamation

²² dÄ“mum, adv., at last

²³ Å«tiliaâ€¦ quam = quam Å«tilia

²⁴ (ea, those things) quae

²⁵ dÄspiciÅ, -ere, -spexÄ«, -spectum, look down on, despise

²⁶ = laudÄveram

²⁷ lÅ«ctus, -Å«s, grief, sorrow

¹ XXXIII METER: Iambic trimeter. subdolus, -a, -um, deceitful

² paenitentia, -ae, repentance

³ corvus, -Ä«, raven

⁴ cÄseus, -Ä«, cheese

⁵ comedÅ, comedere or comÄsse, -edÄ«, -Äsum, eat up

⁶ resideÅ, -Äre, -sÄdÄ«, -sessum, sit, be sitting

⁷ penna, -ae, feather

⁸ nitor, -Åris, m., brightness, beauty; quÄ« est nitor, what (= how great) is the beauty

⁹ decor, decÅris, m., grace, beauty

¹⁰ you bear, i.e., have in your body and face; (in) corpore, preps. often omitted in poetry

¹¹ prior, pred. adj. after foret, better, finer

¹² Äles, Älitis, f., bird

¹³ foret = esset

¹⁴ Ä-mittÅ

¹⁵ dolÅsus, -a, -um, crafty, cunning

¹⁶ avidus, -a, -um, greedy, eager

¹⁷ dÄ“ns, dentis, m., tooth

¹ XXXIV METER: Iambic trimeter. prÄ«ncipÄtus, -Å«s, rule, dominion

² com-mÅ«tÅ (1), change

³ fÄbella, -ae, fable

⁴ asellus, -Ä«, a little ass, diminutive of asinus, -Ä«, an ass (verse 6)

⁵ prÄtum, -Ä«, meadow

⁶ timidus, -a, -um, timid

⁷ pÄscÅ, -ere, pÄvÄ«, pÄstum, pasture

⁸ clÄmor, -Åris, m., shouting

⁹ subitus, -a, -um, sudden

¹⁰ suÄdeÅ, -Äre, suÄsÄ«, suÄsum, urge

¹¹ lentus, -a, -um, slow, motionless, apathetic

¹² quaesÅ, -ere, beg, beseech, = quaerÅ

¹³ bÄ«nÄs clÄ«tellÄs, two pairs of panniers (i.e., instead of the present single pair); bÄ«nÄ«, -ae, -a, distributive numeral used with a regularly pl. noun

¹⁴ clÄ«tellae, -Ärum, a pair of panniers, baskets

¹⁵ im-pÅnÅ = in + pÅnÅ

¹⁶ victor, -Åris = Eng.

¹⁷ what difference does it make to me, highly idiomatic

¹⁸ portÅ (1), bear, carry

¹ XXXV METER: Iambic trimeter. mÅ«lus, -Ä«, mule

² gravÅ (1), load, burden

³ sarcina, -ae, bundle, pack

⁴ fiscus, -Ä«, basket

⁵ tumeÅ, -Äre, swell, be swollen

⁶ saccus, -Ä«, sack

⁷ hordeum, -Ä«, barley

⁸ onus, -eris, n., burden, load

⁹ cervÄ«x, -vÄ«cis, f., neck

¹⁰ ÄmineÅ, -Äre, -minuÄ«, stand out, be conspicuous

¹¹ collum, -Ä«, neck

¹² iactÅ (1), toss

¹³ tintinnÄbulum, -Ä«, bell, a delightfully onomatopoetic word

¹⁴ comes, comitis, m. / f., companion

¹⁵ quiÄ“tus, -a, -um, quiet

¹⁶ placidus, -a, -um, placid, gentle

¹⁷ gradus, -Å«s, step

¹⁸ latrÅ, -Ånis, m., bandit, robber

¹⁹ advolÅ (1), fly, hasten

²⁰ lancinÅ (1), mangle

²¹ dÄ«ripiÅ, -ere, -ripuÄ«, -reptum, plunder

²² nummus, -Ä«, currency, money

²³ vÄ«lis, -e, cheap

²⁴ spoliÅ (1), rob

²⁵ cÄsus, -Å«s, accident

²⁶ laedÅ, -ere, laesÄ«, laesum, injure

²⁷ tenuitÄs, -tÄtis, f., poverty

²⁸ perÄ«clum, -Ä«, early Lat. form, used instead of perÄ«culum in classical Lat. poetry whenever it was metrically convenient

²⁹ obnoxius, -a, -um, subject to, exposed to

¹ XXXVI LocÄ« Ant. XI n. 1 and 3

² Calpurnius Macer

³ it is

⁴ quia, conj., because

⁴ quia, conj., because

⁵ fruor, -Ä«, frÅ«ctus sum + abl., enjoy (cf. frÅ«ctus, -Å«s)

⁶ viridis, -e, green; viridia, gen. viridium, n. pl. as a noun, green things, greenery

⁷ amoenus, -a, -um, pleasant

⁸ amoenissimam, agreeing with vÄ«llam understood as subj. of esse

⁹ sÄ compÅnere, to compose oneself, to rest

¹⁰ the man, apparently referring to a former owner who had been happier (fÄlÄ«cior) on this estate as an ordinary person (homÅ) before he could realize his ambition of becoming âmost happyâ (fÄlÄ«cissimus), i.e., before he could achieve some very high position which did not give him supreme happiness after all.

¹¹ antequam + subjunct.

¹² lit. in the Tuscans = on my Tuscan estate

¹³ vÄ“nor (1), hunt

¹⁴ quae, n. pl. referring to vÄnor and studeÅ as antecedents

¹⁵ interdum, adv., sometimes, at times

¹⁶ alternÄ«s, adv., alternately, by turns

¹⁷ simul, adv., at the same time, simultaneously. In another letter (1.6), Pliny tells how he combined hunting and studying in one operation.

¹⁸ adhÅ«c, adv., thus far, till now

¹ XXXVII Pliny and Caninius were fellow townsmen from Comum (Como) at the south end of beautiful Lake Larius (Como) in northern Italy.

² an, in questions, or

³ piscor (1), to fish

⁴ LÄrius, -iÄ«, Lake Larius (now Lake Como)

⁵ lacus, -Å«s, lake

⁶ piscis, -is, m., fish

⁷ fera (sc. bÄ“stia), -ae, wild animal

⁸ cingÅ, -ere, cÄ«nxÄ«, cÄ«nctum, surround, gird

⁹ sÄ“cessus, -Å«s, retreat, summer place

¹⁰ adfatim, adv., sufficiently, abundantly

¹¹ sug-gerÅ, -ere, -gessÄ«, -gestum, furnish, afford, supply

¹² sÄ«veâ€¦ sÄ«ve, (sÄ«-ve), ifâ€¦ or if, whetherâ€¦ or

¹³ angÅ, -ere, torment

¹⁴ artus, -a, -um, close, narrow; laqueus, -Ä«, noose, cord

¹⁵ ab-rumpÅ, -ere, -rÅ«pÄ«, -ruptum, break off, sever. Pliny is tied up in Rome.

¹⁶ negÅtium, -iÄ«, business; duty

¹⁷ accrÄscÅ, -ere, -crÄvÄ«, -crÄtum, increase; nova (negÅtia) accrÄscunt (veteribus negÅtiÄ«s) new duties increase byâ¦ or are added toâ¦

¹⁸ per-agÅ, complete

¹⁹ nexus, -Å«s, coils, obligations

²⁰ catÄ“na, -ae, chain

²¹ in diÄ“s, from day to day

²² occupÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., occupation, employment

²³ agmen, -minis, n., line of march, column

²⁴ ex-tendÅ, -ere, -tendÄ«, -tentum, extend, increase

¹ XXXVIII he lost (not sent away)

² singulÄris, -e, extraordinary

³ The abl. is sometimes used instead of the acc. to express the idea of extent of time.

⁴ iÅ«rgium, -iÄ«, quarrel

⁵ offÄ“nsa, -ae, hatred, affront

⁶ reverentia, -ae, respect

⁷ marÄ«tus, -Ä«, husband

⁸ mereor, -Ä“rÄ«, meritus sum, deserve

⁹ dÄ«versus, -a, -um, diverse, different

¹⁰ grandis, -e, great

¹¹ hinc, here = from this cause

¹² exacerbÅ (1), exasperate; embitter

¹³ suspÄ“nsus, -a, -um, in suspense, anxious

¹⁴ dum, conj., until, used with the subjunct. to imply intention or expectancy

¹⁵ ad-mittÅ, admit, receive

¹⁶ ÄvocÄmentum, -Ä«, diversion

¹⁷ cicÄtrÄ«x, -trÄ«cis, f., scar, which implies healing

¹⁸ aequÄ“ ac, equally as, quite so well as

¹⁹ necessitÄs (-tÄtis, f.) ipsa, necessity itself, sheer necessity

²⁰ here = time

²¹ satietÄs, -tÄtis, f., satiety

²² in-dÅ«cÅ, bring on, induce

¹ XXXIX Fannia (est)

² neptis, -is, f., granddaughter

³ Arria, -ae, Arria (Maior), brave wife of Caecina Paetus. When, because of his part in a conspiracy against the emperor Claudius, he had to commit suicide in 42 A.D., Arria committed suicide with him, actually setting him an example as indicated at the end of the letter. (Cf. âPaete, NÅn Dolet,â Capvt XXXIX).

⁴ ille, the famous, when immediately following its noun

⁵ marÄ«tÅ, dat.

⁶ referÄ“bat, subj. = Fannia, who related these episodes during a conversation with Pliny on the preceding day.

⁷ avia, -ae, grandmother; aviae, gen. case

⁸ hÅc, abl. of comparison, referring to the rel. clause of the preceding sent.

⁹ obscÅ«rus, -a, -um, obscure, unknown

¹⁰ legentÄ«, to be construed with tibi

¹¹ fore = futÅ«ra esse, fut. infin. in ind. state. depending on exÄ«stimÅ (1), think

¹² aegrÅtÅ (1), be sick

¹³ mortiferÄ, adv. (mors-ferÅ), fatally

¹⁴ dÄ-cÄdÅ, go away, die (cf. deceased)

¹⁵ eximius, -a, -um, extraordinary

¹⁶ pulchritÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f., beauty; eximiÄ pulchritÅ«dine, abl. describing fÄ«lius but more easily translated if we supply a word like puer: fÄ«lius dÄcessitâ(puer) eximiÄ pulchritÅ«dine, etc.

¹⁷ verecÅ«ndia, -ae, modesty

¹⁸ ob, prep. + acc., on account of; toward

¹⁹ fÅ«nus, -eris, n., funeral

²⁰ quÄ«n immÅ, why, on the contrary

²¹ quotiÄ“ns, adv., as often as

²² cubiculum, -Ä«, bedroom

²³ intrÅ (1), enter; intrÄret: in Silver Lat. the imperf. subjunct. of customary action is often found in place of the indic.

²⁴ commodus, -a, -um, suitable, satisfactory; here = better

²⁵ simulÅ (1) pretend

²⁶ per-saepe, adv., very often

²⁷ interrogÅ (1), ask, inquire (cf. rogÅ); (marÄ«tÅ) interrogantÄ«

²⁸ quiÄscÅ, -ere, -ÄvÄ«, -Ätus, rest, be quiet

²⁹ cibus, -Ä«, food

³⁰ cohibeÅ, -ere, -uÄ«, -itum, hold together, hold back, restrain

³¹ prÅrumpÅ, -ere, -rÅ«pÄ«, -ruptum, burst forth

³² siccus, -a, -um, dry; siccÄ«s oculÄ«s abl. abs.

³³ orbitÄs, -tÄtis, f., bereavement, loss

³⁴ What kind of condition in the tamquam clause?

³⁵ that deed; sc. fuit

³⁶ stringÅ, -ere, -strÄ«nxÄ«, strictus, draw; stringere, infin. in apposition with illud

³⁷ perfodiÅ, -ere, -fÅdÄ«, -fossum, pierce (lit. dig through)

³⁸ ex-trahÅ

³⁹ pugiÅ, -Ånis, m., dagger

⁴⁰ porrigÅ, -ere, -rÄxÄ«, -rÄctum, hold out, extend

⁴¹ ad-dÅ, -ere, -didÄ«, -ditum, add

⁴² paene, adv., almost

⁴³ dÄ«vÄ«nus, -a, -um = Eng.

¹ XL dÄ“fungor, -Ä«, -fÅ«nctus sum, finish or complete life, die

² puellÄ, abl. of comparison

³ fÄ“stÄ«vus, -a, -um, pleasant, agreeable

⁴ amÄbilis, -e, lovable, lovely

⁵ impleÅ, -Äre, -plÄvÄ«, -plÄtum, fill up, complete

⁶ dat. of possession (S.S.)

⁷ anÄ«lis, -e, of an old woman

⁸ mÄtrÅnÄlis, -e, of a matron, matronly

⁹ gravitÄs, -tÄtis, f., seriousness, dignity

¹⁰ suÄvitÄs, -tÄtis, f., sweetness

¹¹ puellÄris, -e, girlish

¹² how

¹³ cervÄ«x, -Ä«cis, f., usually pl. (cervÄ«cÄ“s) as here, neck

¹⁴ inhaereÅ, -Äre, -haesÄ«, -haesum, cling

¹⁵ paternus, -a, -um, paternal, of a father

¹⁶ amanter, adv. of amÄns

¹⁷ modestÄ“, adv., modestly

¹⁸ complector, -Ä«, -plexus sum, hold in the arms, embrace

¹⁹ nÅ«trÄ«x, -Ä«cis, f., nurse

²⁰ paedagÅgus, -Ä«, tutor (slave who escorted children)

²¹ praeceptor, -Åris, m., teacher (in a school, not a private tutor)

²² studiÅsÄ, adv. of studiÅsus, full of studium

²³ intellegenter, adv. of intelligÄ“ns

²⁴ lÄctitÅ (1), read (eagerly)

²⁵ temperantia, -ae, self-control

²⁶ cÅnstantia, -ae, firmness

²⁷ valÄtÅ«dÅ, -dinis, f., here = bad health, illness

²⁸ ob + sequor, obey

²⁹ adhortor = hortor

³⁰ dÄstituÅ, -ere, -stituÄ«, -stitÅ«tum, desert, abandon

³¹ vigor, -Åris, m., vigor; vigÅre, abl. of means with sustinÄbat

³² (puella) sustinÄ“bat sÄ“ ipsam

³³ dÅ«rÅ (1), endure

³⁴ hic (vigor animÄ«)

³⁵ extrÄ“mum, -Ä« = fÄ«nis

³⁶ spatium, -iÄ«, space, duration

³⁷ Ä«nfringÅ, -ere, -frÄgÄ«, -frÄctum, break

³⁸ plÄnÄ, adv., clearly

³⁹ here = mors

⁴⁰ dÄstinÅ (1), bind, engage

⁴¹ Ä“gregius, -a, -um, excellent, distinguished

⁴² iuvenis, -is, m., young man

⁴³ Ä-ligÅ = legÅ

⁴⁴ nÅ«ptiae, -Ärum, wedding

⁴⁵ maeror, -Åris, m., grief

⁴⁶ ex-primÅ (= premÅ), express

⁴⁷ praecipiÅ, -ere, -cÄpÄ«, -ceptum, direct

⁴⁸ The antecedent is hoc in the following line.

⁴⁹ vestis, -is, f., garment, clothes

⁵⁰ margarÄ«tum, -Ä«, pearl

⁵¹ gemma, -ae, jewel

⁵² ÄrogÅ (1), pay out, spend; fuerat ÄrogÄtÅ«rus (act. periphrastic), he had been about to spend, had intended to spend (on clothes, jewels, etc., for the wedding)

⁵³ tÅ«s, tÅ«ris, n., incense

⁵⁴ odor, -Åris, m., perfume

⁵⁵ impendÅ, -ere, -pendÄ«, -pÄnsum, expend; impenderÄtur, subjunct. in a jussive noun clause

⁵⁶ meminÄ«, meminisse, defective verb, remember; mementÅ, fut. imperat., remember

⁵⁷ adhibeÅ, -ere, -hibuÄ«, -hibitum, use, furnish

⁵⁸ mollis, -e, soft, gentle

¹ XLI molliter, adv. of mollis

² tuÅs (servÅs et lÄ«bertÅs); so meÅs below

³ treat

⁴ simpliciter, adv., frankly, candidly; quÅ simplicius by which (degree of difference) more frankly = the more frankly

⁵ indulgentia, -ae, kindness

⁶ tractÅ (1), handle, treat

⁷ Ä«nfÄ«rmitÄs, -tÄtis, f., illness, weakness

⁸ lÄ«bertus, -Ä«, freedman (a slave who had somehow secured his freedom) in contrast to a lÄ«ber vir (one who was born free). A freedman commonly remained closely attached to his former master.

⁹ ZÅsimus, -Ä«, Zosimus, apparently a Greek

¹⁰ hÅ«mÄnitÄs, -tÄtis, f., kindness

¹¹ ex-hibeÅ, show, exhibit

¹² probus, -a, -um, honorable, fine

¹³ officiÅsus, -a, -um, obliging, courteous

¹⁴ litterÄtus, -a, -um, well-educated; Gk. slaves esp. were often well educated.

¹⁵ Ä«nscrÄ«ptiÅ, -Ånis, f., here = label, a placard hung around a slaveâs neck in the slave market to indicate his special abilities.âcÅmoedus, -Ä«, comic actor, often a slave trained to read at dinners scenes from famous comedies. Although this was Zosimusâ specialty, we find him in the next two sents. surprisingly versatile and talented.

¹⁶ perÄ«tÄ“, adv., skillfully

¹⁷ commodÄ“, adv., fitly, satisfactorily

¹⁸ historia, -ae = Eng.

¹⁹ sÄdulÅ, adv., carefully

²⁰ ministerium, -iÄ«, service

²¹ cÄritÄs, -tÄtis, f., dearness, affection (cf. cÄrus)

²² augeÅ, -Äre, auxÄ«, auctum, increase

²³ aliquot, indecl. adj., several, some

²⁴ anteâ¦ annÅs, several years ago

²⁵ earnestly and emphatically

²⁶ sanguis, -inis, m., blood

²⁷ re-iciÅ, reject, spit out

²⁸ Aegyptus, -Ä«, f., Egypt

²⁹ peregrÄ«nÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., travel or sojourn abroad

³⁰ cÅnfÄ«rmÅ (1), strengthen

³¹ Ä«nfÄ«rmitÄs, -tÄtis, f., weakness, sickness

³² tussicula, -ae, slight cough

³³ ad-monitus = monitus

³⁴ reddidit = reiÄ“cit

³⁵ dÄstinÅ (1), intend, resolve

³⁶ praedium, -iÄ«, country seat

³⁷ Forum IÅ«liÄ«, ForÄ« IÅ«liÄ«, Forum of Julius, modern FrÃ©jus, a coastal town of southern France; ForÅ, place where

³⁸ possideÅ, -Äre, -sÄdÄ«, -sessum, possess, own

³⁹ ÄÄr, Äeris, m., air; Äera = Gk. acc. sg.

⁴⁰ salÅ«bris, -e, healthful; still so regarded

⁴¹ lac, lactis, n., milk; i.e., for the milk cure

⁴² cÅ«rÄtiÅ, -Ånis, f., cure

⁴³ accommodÄtus, -a, -um, suited

⁴⁴ (ut) scrÄ«bÄs: ut is sometimes omitted in such clauses

⁴⁵ tuÄ«s, your servants

⁴⁶ ut vÄ«lla (pateat), ut domus pateat: i.e., he is to have access to the great house itself as well as to the estate.

¹ XLII suscÄnseÅ, -Äre, -cÄnsuÄ«, -cÄnsum, + dat., be angry with

² summa, -ae, sum

³ paenitentia, -ae, repentance

⁴ ÄmendÅ (1), correct; (eum) ÄmendÄtum (esse)

⁵ dÄlinquÅ, -ere, -lÄ«quÄ«, -lictum, fail (in duty), commit a crime

⁶ meritÅ, adv., rightly (with merit)

⁷ praecipuus, -a, -um, special; sc. est

⁸ mÄnsuÄtÅ«dÅ, -inis, f., gentleness, mildness

⁹ contracted form = amÄvistÄ«

¹⁰ interim, adv., meanwhile (cf. intereÄ)

¹¹ sufficit, subj. = ut-clause

¹² ex-ÅrÅ, stronger form of ÅrÅ

¹³ sinÅ, -ere, sÄ«vÄ«, situm, allow, permit

¹⁴ torqueÅ, -Äre, torsÄ«, tortum, twist, torture; nÄ torserÄ«s, LocÄ« Im. XXII n. 1

¹⁵ torquÄ“ris, you are tormented = you torment yourself (reflexive use of the pass.)

¹⁶ lÄnis, -e, gentle, kind; agreeing with subj. of irÄsceris: you, such a gentle person

¹⁷ prex, precis, f., prayer

¹⁸ plÄ“nÄ“, adv. of plÄ“nus

¹⁹ effÅ«sÄ“, adv., profusely, unrestrainedly

²⁰ tantÅâ¦ quantÅ, the moreâ¦ the more, abl. of degree of difference (S.S.)

²¹ (lÄ«bertum) ipsum

²² sevÄ“rÄ“, adv., seriously, severely

²³ cor-ripiÅ, -ere, -ripuÄ«, -reptum, seize, accuse, blame

¹ XLIII you did well because = thank you for

² lÄ«bertum, in thought, the obj. of both redÅ«centibus and recÄ“pistÄ«

³ aliquandÅ, adv., once

⁴ re-dÅ«cÅ

⁵ epistulÄ«s, here pl. of a single letter (the preceding one) on the analogy of litterae, -Ärum

⁶ Both prepositional phrases, connected by et understood, depend on recÄ“pistÄ«

⁷ prÄ«mum, adv., first

⁸ tractÄbilis, -Ä, tractable, compliant

⁹ tribuÅ, -ere, -buÄ«, -bÅ«tum, attribute, ascribe

¹⁰ velâ€¦ vel, eitherâ€¦ or

¹¹ indulgeÅ, -Äre, -dulsÄ«, -dultum, yield to, gratify

¹ XLIV in-iungÅ, enjoin, impose

² beneficiÅ tuÅ, thanks to you

³ schola, -ae, school

⁴ re-sÅ«mÅ, -ere, -sÅ«mpsÄ«, -sÅ«mptum, resume

⁵ gen. with quantum

⁶ proximÄ“, adv., very recently

⁷ frequÄ“ns, gen. -entis, crowded

⁸ audÄ«tÅrium, -iÄ«, lecture room, school; audÄ«tÅriÅ, place where without a prep.

⁹ cÅram, prep. + abl., in the presence of

¹⁰ i.e., the senatorial order

¹¹ clÄrÄ (adv. of clÄrus), here = loudly

¹² conticÄscÅ, -ere, -ticuÄ«, become silent

¹³ quod, having as antecedent the whole preceding idea

¹⁴ pertineÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, -tentum, pertain to

¹⁵ profiteor, -Ä“rÄ«, -fessus sum, teach, a late meaning of the word

¹⁶ efficiÅâ¦ ut, LocÄ« Ant. VIII n. 20â21

¹⁷ cÅn-sequor, accomplish

¹⁸ praesertim, adv., especially

¹⁹ super, prep. + abl., about

²⁰ interest vestrÄ, interests you (highly idiomatic)

²¹ patruus, -Ä«, (paternal) uncle; tÄ patruÅ is in the same construction as illÅ patre.

¹ XLV METER: Elegiac couplet. mentior, -Ä«rÄ«, -Ä«tus sum, lie, declare falsely, here = imitate

² tingÅ, -ere, tÄ«nxÄ«, tÄ«nctus, wet, dye

³ LaetÄ«nus, -Ä«, Laetinus

⁴ capillÄ«, -Årum, hair

⁵ cycnus, -Ä«, swan

⁶ nÅn ÅmnÄs (fallis) seems to imply that the hair dyes were good enough to deceive at least some people.

⁷ PrÅserpina, -ae, Proserpina, goddess of the underworld, and so of death

⁸ cÄnus, -a, -um, gray; tÄ (esse) cÄnum

⁹ dÄ-trahÅ

¹⁰ illa = Proserpina

¹ XLVI METER: Elegiac couplet. Ämissum patrem

² Gellia, -ae, Gellia

³ at her bidding; how literally?

⁴ prÅsiliÅ (4), leap forth

⁵ lÅ«geÅ, -Äre, lÅ«xÄ«, lÅ«ctum, mourn

⁶ testis, -is, m., witness

¹ XLVII METER: Elegiac couplet. convÄ«vor (1), to feast

² Lupercus, -Ä«, Lupercus

³ licet usque (ut) vocÄ“s (it is even permitted that you call), you may even invite me, or even though you invite me

⁴ i.e., send a slave as a special messenger

¹ XLVIII METER: Elegiac couplet. vÄ«ctÅ«rum, sc. esse

² No doubt Martial intended to have us think of Horaceâ€™s Postumus in LocÄ« Im. XXV above.

³ crÄs istud, that âtomorrowâ of yours, subj. of venit

⁴ petendum (est)

⁵ numquid latet, it does not lie hidden, does it?

⁶ among the Parthians and Armenians, i.e., at landâ€™s end in the East

⁷ lateÅ, -Äre, -uÄ«, lie hidden

⁸ Priamus, -Ä«, Priam, aged king of Troy

⁹ NestÅr, -oris, Nestor, Gk. leader famed for his years and wisdom

¹⁰ quantÄ«, gen. of indef. value: at what price, for how much can that tomorrow be bought

¹¹ emÅ, -ere, ÄmÄ«, Ämptum, buy

¹² sÄ“rus, -a, -um, late; sÄ“rum, pred. adj. in n. to agree with hodiÄ“ vÄ«vere, which is subj. of est

¹ XLIX METER: Hendecasyllabic. Issa, colloquial and affectionate form for Ipsa and here used as the name of a pet dog

² passer CatullÄ«, see LocÄ« Im. III

³ nÄ“quam, indecl. adj.; compar. nÄ“quior, -ius, worthless, good for nothing, mischievous

⁴ columba, -ae, dove

⁵ blandus, -a, -um, flattering, caressing, coaxing

⁶ Indicus, -a, -um, of India

⁷ lapillus, -Ä«, precious stone, gem

⁸ see LocÄ«.Im. III

⁹ catella, -ae, little dog

¹⁰ PÅ«blÄ« = PÅ«bliÄ«, gen. sg. of PÅ«blius

¹¹ here = whimper

¹² trÄ«stitia, -ae, sadness

¹³ lÅ«x (diÄ“s) suprÄ“ma = mors

¹⁴ pingÅ, -ere, pÄ«nxÄ«, pictum, paint; pictÄ tabellÄ, by a painted tablet = in a painting

¹⁵ exprimÅ, -ere, -pressÄ«, pressum, express, portray

¹⁶ tam similemâ€¦ Issam: an Issa (of the painting) so similar (to the real Issa)

¹⁷ nec here = not even

¹³ Note that the verbs in this list have no passive voice (except for the idiomatic impersonal passive of eÅ, which is not used in this book).